WaterCAD Users Guide

WATERCAD

®

USER ’S GUIDE

WATER DISTRIBUTION MODELING SOFTWARE

Copyright © 1986-2003 Haestad Methods, Inc. All rights reserved. WaterCAD User’s Guide. WaterCAD Online Help. This documentation is published by Haestad Methods, Inc. (“Haestad”), and is intended solely for use in conjunction with Haestad’s software. This documentation is available to all current Licensees in print and electronic format. No one may copy, photocopy, reproduce, translate, or convert to any electronic or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, the printed documentation without the prior written approval of Haestad. Licensee may download the electronic documentation from Haestad’s web site and make that documentation available solely on licensee’s intranet. Licensee may print the electronic documentation, in part or in whole, for personal use. No one may translate, alter, sell, or make available the electronic documentation on the Internet, transfer the documentation by FTP, or display any of the documentation on any web site without the prior written approval of Haestad. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.: CulvertMaster, Cybernet, Darwin, FlowMaster, Graphical HEC-1, PondPack, SewerCAD, StormCAD, WaterCAD, and WaterGEMS. The following are trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.: HEC-Pack, HAMMER, PumpMaster, and GISConnect. Haestad Methods is a registered tradename of Haestad Methods, Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. ESRI is a registered trademark of Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Visual Studio, Word, and Excel, are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other brands, company or product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Portions of this document include intellectual property of ESRI and its licensor(s) and are used herein under license. Copyright © 1999-2003 ESRI and its licensor(s). All rights reserved.

37 Brookside Road Waterbury, CT 06708-1499 USA Phone: +1-203-755-1666 Fax: +1-203-597-1488 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.haestad.com

Contents Chapter 1: Orientation

27

Using the WaterCAD Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28 What’s New? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29 Previously Added in WaterCAD v5.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Previously Added in WaterCAD v4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Previously Added in WaterCAD v4.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Installation, Upgrades, and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33 Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33 WATERCAD STAND-ALONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 AUTOCAD MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 RECOMMENDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Installing Haestad Methods’ Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Software Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37 Globe Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37 Network Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37 Registering Network Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38 REQUESTING A PERMANENT NETWORK LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR NETWORK LICENSE VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40 NETWORK DEPLOYMENT FOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41 Learning WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Tutorials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Sample Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Haestad Methods’ Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Contacting Haestad Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44 SUPPORT HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45 Your Suggestions Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45

WaterCAD User's Guide

Contents-1

Chapter 2: WaterCAD Main Window

47

Main Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterCAD Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROJECT LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACKGROUND LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shapefile Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOLBARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHORTCUT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICK ATTRIBUTE SELECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-47 2-48 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-53 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-56 2-56 2-56 2-57

WaterCAD Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STAND-ALONE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOCAD MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL TOOL MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL TOOL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USING THE ONLINE HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-57 2-58 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-66 2-66 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-70 2-72

Online Help Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Online Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Online Help Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Online Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Navigation Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77

Using the Online Book (PDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 WaterCAD Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Button Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Pane Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILE TOOLS (STAND-ALONE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZOOM TOOLS (STAND-ALONE ONLY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALCULATION AND DATA MANAGEMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORTING TOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATES AND HELP TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tool Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-2

2-78 2-78 2-78 2-79 2-79 2-79 2-80 2-80 2-81 2-81 2-82


Other Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 General Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 File Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Unit System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Calculation Results Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Refresh and Auto-Refresh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85

Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons

87

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis . . . .3-87 Part 1—Creating a New Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88 Part 2—Laying Out the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90 Part 3—Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93 Part 4—Entering Data through Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94 Part 5—Entering Data through FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-103 Part 6—Performing a Steady-State Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-105 Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107 Part 1—Creating Demand Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107 Part 2—Running an Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114 Lesson 3: Scenario Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116 Part 1—Creating a New Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116 Part 2—Editing and Creating Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120 Part 3—Calculate and Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-122 Part 4—Physical Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124 Lesson 4: Reporting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127 Part 1—Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128 Part 2—Tabular Reports (FlexTables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-132 Part 3—Create a Plan and Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-136 Part 4—Contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138 Part 5—Element Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-139 Part 6—Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-141 Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-143 Part 1—Inputting Fire Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-143 Part 2—Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-148 Part 3—Viewing Fire Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-150 Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-151 Part 1—Computing Water Age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-152 Part 2—Analyzing Constituent Concentrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-159 Part 3—Performing a Trace Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-162 Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-164 Part 1—Importing Shapefile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-166 Part 2—Importing Data from a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-173 Part 3—Converting CAD Drawing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-181 Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-187


Contents-3

Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188 Part 2—Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199 Part 3—Using Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201 Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up for Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Optimized Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate and Verify the Optimal Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4: Starting a WaterCAD Project

3-205 3-213 3-226 3-227 3-235

237

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterCAD Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterCAD Database Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shapefile/Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Old File Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-237 4-238 4-238 4-238 4-239 4-239 4-239

Import Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239 Multiple Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240 Importing a Submodel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240 Exporting a Submodel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241 Project Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241 Project Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WELCOME DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNIT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTER KEY BEHAVIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WINDOW COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STICKY TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO PROMPTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRICTION METHOD THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIQUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIPE LENGTH ROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAWING SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNOTATION MULTIPLIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIPE TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYMBOL VISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAP SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scenario Dataset Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STEP 1—SPECIFY SOURCE DATASET AND TARGET GEODATABASE . . . . . .

Contents-4

4-242 4-242 4-243 4-243 4-243 4-244 4-244 4-244 4-244 4-244 4-245 4-245 4-246 4-246 4-246 4-247 4-248 4-248 4-249 4-249 4-249


STEP 2—SPECIFY ELEMENT ATTRIBUTES TO BE INCLUDED . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-250 STEP 3—COMPLETE SCENARIO WIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251 Selection Set Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251 Select Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-251 FlexUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-252 Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-252 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253 Display Precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253 NUMBER OF DIGITS DISPLAYED AFTER DECIMAL POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253 ROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253 Scientific Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-253 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-254 FlexUnits Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-254

Chapter 5: Layout and Editing Tools

255

Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255 Using the Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-255 Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor . . . . . . . . . . . .5-256 Creating New Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-256 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node . . . . . . . .5-257 Morphing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-258 Splitting Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-258 Pipe Disconnect / Reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259 Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259 SELECTING ELEMENTS (STAND-ALONE MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-259 SELECTING ELEMENTS (AUTOCAD MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-260 OTHER GRAPHICAL SELECTION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-260 Single Element Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260 Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261 Select From Drawing Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261

Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-261 MOVING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262 DELETING ELEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262 Other Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-262 Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263 Selection Sets Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263 New Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-263 Selection Set Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264 Duplicate Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264 Rename Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264 Selection Set Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264 Delete Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-264 Find Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265 Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-265 Zoom Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-266


Contents-5

Aerial View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-266 Drawing Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267 Drawing Review Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267 Selection Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269 Relabel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relabel Elements Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relabel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elements Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-269 5-270 5-270 5-271

Element Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271 Element Labeling Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-272 Moving Element Labels and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-273 Quick Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-273

Chapter 6: Hydraulic Element Editors

275

Element Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Element Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Pipe Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Junction Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reservoir Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-276 6-276 6-277 6-277 6-278 6-279 6-279 6-281

Element Editors’ Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSURE PIPE GENERAL TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIPE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MINOR LOSS ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INITIAL STATUS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER-DEFINED LENGTH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NODES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYDRAULIC RESULTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WATER QUALITY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Junctions General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JUNCTION CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYDRAULICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reservoirs General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESERVOIR CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump General Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUMP DEFINITION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INITIAL SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIPES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-282 6-283 6-283 6-284 6-284 6-285 6-285 6-285 6-286 6-286 6-286 6-287 6-287 6-287 6-288 6-288 6-288 6-289 6-289 6-289 6-290 6-290 6-291 6-292

Contents-6


OPERATING POINT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292 Pump Definition Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292 Pump Definition Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-293 Importing Pump Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-295 Valve General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-296 GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-297 VALVE CHARACTERISTICS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-297 INITIAL SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-298 PIPES SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299 CALCULATED HYDRAULICS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299 HEAD-DISCHARGE POINTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-299 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-300 Importing Demands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-301 DEMAND IMPORT DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-302 Section Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-302 TANK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-303 OPERATING RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-303 CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-304 Constant Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-304 Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-304

Controls Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-305 SIMPLE CONTROL DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-305 SIMPLE CONTROL PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306 SIMPLE CONTROL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306 CONTROL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306 NODE CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-306 TIME CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-307 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-307

Quality Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-307 WATER QUALITY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-309 CONSTITUENT SOURCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-310 INVERT ELEVATIONS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-311 Fire Flow Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-311 FIRE FLOW INPUT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-312 FIRE FLOW CALCULATION RESULTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-313 Capital Cost Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-313 INCLUDE IN COST CALCULATION? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314 NON-CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314 CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-315 CONSTRUCTION COSTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-315 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION COST OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-316 User Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-316 USER DATA SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317 USER MEMOS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317 Messages Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317 VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317 Energy Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-319 PUMP EFFICIENCY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-320 EFFICIENCY SETTINGS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-320


Contents-7

DAILY ENERGY COST SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321 PEAK DEMAND SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321 EFFICIENCY SUMMARY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322 Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322 User Data Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322 User Data Extension Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-323 USER FIELD SPECIFICATION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324 Type Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324 Type Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-325 Format Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-326 Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327

EXISTING FIELDS TO SHARE WITH DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327 Zone Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328 Zone Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328

Chapter 7: FlexTables

329

Table Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-330 7-331 7-331 7-331 7-332 7-332 7-332

Table Setup Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Table Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Table Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Manipulation Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Duplicate Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-332 7-333 7-333 7-333 7-334 7-335

Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDITABLE TABLE COLUMNS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE NAVIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-335 7-336 7-336 7-336

Table Navigation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336 Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-336

GLOBALLY EDITING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting and Filtering Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SORTING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOM SORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILTERING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INCLUDE INACTIVE TOPOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING COLUMN HEADINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABBREVIATED LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING COLUMN DISPLAY PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-8

7-337 7-337 7-338 7-338 7-339 7-340 7-340 7-341 7-341 7-341


LOCAL VERSUS SYNCHRONIZED UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-342 MIXING UNITS IN A TABULAR REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-342 Table Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-343 FILE (EXPORT TABLE TO ASCII FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344 TABLE COPY TO CLIPBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344 TABLE PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344 TABLE PRINT PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-344

Chapter 8: Scenarios/Alternatives

345

Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-345 Alternatives Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-347 MERGING CHILD ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-349 Alternatives Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-349 Physical Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-350 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-350 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-351 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-351 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR GPVS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR JUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR RESERVOIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-352 PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-353 Active Topology Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-353 Demand Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-354 Initial Settings Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-355 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR PRESSURE VALVES . . . . . . . .8-356 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR FCVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR TCVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-356 INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE EDITOR FOR GPVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-357 Operational Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-357 Age Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-358 Constituent Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-358 Trace Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-360 Fire Flow Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-360 DEFAULT FLOW AND PRESSURE CONSTRAINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-361 SELECTION SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362 FIRE FLOW LOADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362 USE DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-362 Capital Cost Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363 User Data Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363 Energy Cost Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-363 Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-364 Scenario Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-365 Editing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-365 Scenario Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-366


Contents-9

BATCH RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CREATING SCENARIOS TO MODEL WHAT-IF SITUATIONS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scenario Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO WIZARD—STEP 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scenario Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALTERNATIVES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCENARIO EDITOR—CALCULATION TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESULTS TAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9: Modeling Capabilities

8-368 8-368 8-369 8-369 8-370 8-370 8-370 8-370 8-371 8-371 8-372 8-372 8-374 8-374

377

Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-378 Steady-State Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-378 Extended Period Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-379 Optional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-380 Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-381 Check Data/Validate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-382 Calculate Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-383 Flow Emitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-384 Parallel VSPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-384 Fire Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MANUAL FIRE FLOW SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MANUAL FIRE FLOW SCENARIOS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIRE FLOW DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-385 9-386 9-387 9-387 9-388 9-389

Water Quality Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Age Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constituent Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-389 9-389 9-390 9-391

Calculation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-391 Hydraulic Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-392 Water Quality Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-392 Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pattern Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pattern Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEFINING PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME STEP POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-10

9-393 9-394 9-395 9-395 9-396 9-396


Importing Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-396 Logical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-397 Creating a New Logical Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-399 Logical Controls Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-401 Logical Control Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-401 CONTROLS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-402 CONDITIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-403 ACTIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-404 Logical Control Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-405 Condition Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-406 NEW LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-406 SIMPLE LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-407 Simple Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-407 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-410 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-411

COMPOSITE LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-411 Action Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-412 NEW LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-413 SIMPLE LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-413 COMPOSITE LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-415 Finding Controls and Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-416 FIND LOGICAL CONTROL DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-416 FIND LOGICAL CONDITION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-417 FIND LOGICAL ACTION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-417 Logical Control Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-418 LOGICAL CONTROL SETS ALTERNATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-418 LOGICAL CONTROLS SET EDITOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-419 Active Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-419 Active Topology Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-420

Chapter 10: GA Optimization and Calibration

421

Darwin Calibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-421 New Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-422 Optimized Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423 ROUGHNESS/DEMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423 FIELD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-423 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-424 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-424 Manual Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425 ROUGHNESS/DEMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425 FIELD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-425 Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-426 Calibration Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-426 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-427


Contents-11

GA-Optimized Calibration Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-428 Calibration Results Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-429 Field Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Data Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBSERVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Data Sets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Field Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Data Observation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Fire Flow Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-429 10-430 10-430 10-431 10-432 10-432 10-433 10-433 10-434 10-435 10-435

Adjustment Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Adjustment Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-437 10-437 10-437 10-438 10-438 10-439

Calibration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-440 GA Parameters Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-442 Calibration Options Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-444

Chapter 11: Cost Estimating

447

Capital Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capital Cost Manager—Button Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Cost Adjustments Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Cost Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-448 11-449 11-450 11-450 11-450 11-451

Energy Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Cost Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Pricing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Pricing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-451 11-452 11-452 11-455 11-456

Capital Cost Alternatives Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-457 Unit Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Cost Functions Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Cost Function Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabular Unit Cost Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATTRIBUTE VALUE RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNIT COST DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula Unit Cost Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-12

11-457 11-458 11-458 11-459 11-459 11-459 11-460 11-460 11-460 11-461


VALID COST DATA RANGE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461 COEFFICIENTS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461 Cost Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-461 Element Detailed Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-462 Project Detailed Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463 Project Element Summary Cost Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463 Project Summary Cost Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-463 Pipe Costs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-464 Cost Warnings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-464

Chapter 12: Using Darwin Designer

465

Overview: How to Use Darwin Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-465 Design Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-466 Design Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-468 REPRESENTATIVE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-470 ADDING A DESIGN EVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-471 Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-471 ADDING A NEW GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-472 EDITING A GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-472 DESIGN AND REHAB GROUPS OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-473 Rehab Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-473 Option Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-474 ADDING AND EDITING DESIGN OPTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-475 Material Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-478

ADDING AND EDITING REHABILITATION OPTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-478 Function Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-481 Function Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-483

NEW OPTION GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-483 Design Type Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-483 Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-484 Design Event Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-484 Demand Adjustments Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-485 Pressure Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-487 PRESSURE CONSTRAINTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-488 Flow Constraints Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-489 FLOW CONSTRAINTS TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-490 Boundary Conditions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-490 LOAD BOUNDARY CONDITIONS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-491 Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-492 Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-492 Design Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-493 Local Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-494 MANUAL DESIGN RUNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-494 Local Rehab Groups Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-496 Local Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-497 STOPPING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-497 TOP SOLUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-498


Contents-13

Notes Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-498 Computing the Design Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-498 Results Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rehab Groups Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Constraints Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-498 12-500 12-500 12-501 12-501

Element Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-501 Report Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-502 Graph Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-503 About Pareto Optimal Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-504 Export Design to Scenario Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-505 Schema Augmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-506 Set Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-507 Verification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-507

Chapter 13: Presenting your Results

509

Element Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Annotation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNOTATION WIZARD—SELECT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNOTATION WIZARD—SPECIFY ANNOTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-509 13-510 13-510 13-511 13-511

Initial Placement Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-512

ANNOTATION WIZARD—SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-512 Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513 Color Coding Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Results Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scenario Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Results Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan View Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation/Problem Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Totalizing Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabular Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Head Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-514 13-515 13-515 13-516 13-517 13-517 13-517 13-517 13-518 13-518 13-519 13-519 13-519 13-520

Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank Storage Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Demand Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-520 13-521 13-521 13-521

Contents-14


Pattern Graph and Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-521 Plotting a Variable versus Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-521 GRAPH SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522 AVAILABLE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522 GRAPH WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-522 Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-523 GeoGrapher Graph Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-523 GeoGrapher Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-524 GeoGrapher Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-524 GeoGrapher Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-529 GeoGrapher Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-532 GeoGrapher Graph Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-532 GeoGrapher Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-533 CHART TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-533 SERIES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-544 Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-547 Contour Map Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-547 Contour Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-549 Contour Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-549 Enhanced Pressure Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-550 Contour Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-550 Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-551 SPOT ELEVATION INPUT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-551 SPOT ELEVATION CALCULATED RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552 Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552 Profile Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-552 Profile Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-553 Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554 Walk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554 Walk Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-554 Scenario Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-555 Annotation Comparison Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-555 Scenario Comparison Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-556 Graphic Annotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-557 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558 Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558 Preview Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-558 Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-559 Print Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-559 Graph Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560 TITLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560 AXIS (FOR GRAPHS ONLY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560 GRID (FOR GRAPHS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-560 DISPLAY (FOR PIE CHARTS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561 LEGEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561 Status Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-561


Contents-15

Chapter 14: Engineering Libraries

563

Engineering Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-564 WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-564 Engineering Library Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565 MATERIAL PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-566

MINOR LOSS PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-566 LIQUID PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-567 CONSTITUENT PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-568 General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-568 Reaction Rates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-569

Chapter 15: Shapefile and Database Connections

571

Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Connection Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Database Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Connection Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATABASE CONNECTION TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATABASE TABLE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT FIELD LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODBC DATABASE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODBC DATABASE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNCHRONIZING VIA ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODBC DATABASE TABLES AND FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Database Connections between Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHARING DATABASE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PROJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . PREVENTING DATABASE CONNECTIVITY SHARING BETWEEN PROJECTS . . Database Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-573 15-574 15-575 15-577 15-578 15-579 15-579 15-581 15-581 15-582 15-582 15-583 15-583 15-584 15-584 15-584 15-585

Shapefile Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shapefile Connection Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE CONNECTION WIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE CONNECTION LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYNCHRONIZE NOW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shapefile Connection Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shapefile Link Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE LINK SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Shapefile Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT ELEMENT TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-585 15-586 15-586 15-587 15-587 15-587 15-588 15-588 15-589 15-589 15-590 15-590

When Missing Connectivity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-591

IMPORT SHAPEFILE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CREATE SHAPEFILE CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAPEFILE IMPORT EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Shapefile Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-16

15-591 15-592 15-592 15-593


EXPORT SHAPEFILE LINK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-594 SHAPEFILE EXPORT EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-595 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-595 SHARING SHAPEFILE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PROJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596 PREVENTING SHAPEFILE CONNECTIVITY SHARING BETWEEN PROJECTS . .15-596 Shapefile Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596 Shapefile Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-596

Chapter 16: Exchanging Data with CAD Software

599

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-599 Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-600 Polyline to Pipe Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-600 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 1 (STAND-ALONE MODE ONLY) . . . . . .16-601 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-602 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-602 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 4 (FOR .DXF FILES WITH BLOCKS) . . .16-603 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-603 POLYLINE TO PIPE WIZARD—STEP 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604 POLYLINE CONVERSION PROBLEM DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604 DRAWING PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604 Importing and Exporting DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-604 Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605 Exporting a DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-605 Advanced DXF Import Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-606

Chapter 17: Additional Features for AutoCAD

607

AutoCAD Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-608 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-608 Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609 Drawing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609 Symbol Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-609 Rebuild Figure Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610 AutoCAD Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610 Drawing Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-610 Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-611 WaterCAD Element Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-611 Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612 Select Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612 Select Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612 Working with Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-612 Edit Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613 Deleting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613 Modifying Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613 SCALE ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-613


Contents-17

ROTATE LABELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODIFY PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDIT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17-613 17-613 17-614 17-614

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explode Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Element Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17-614 17-615 17-615 17-616 17-616 17-616 17-617

Undo/Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-617 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements . . . . . . . . . . 17-618 Layout Pipe Using Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-618 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-618 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619 Import WaterCAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619 Working with Proxies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-619

Chapter 18: Automated Skeletonization

621

Skeletonization Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-622 Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic—Data Scrubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic—Branch Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic—Series Pipe Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-623 18-624 18-624 18-625

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator—Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-626 18-626 18-627 18-628 18-630 18-631 18-632

Using the Skelebrator Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skeletonizer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKELETONIZATION PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Skeletonization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BATCH RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROTECTED PIPES AND PROTECTED JUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart Pipe Removal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch Collapsing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series Pipe Merging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Pipe Merging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New Operation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Operation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skelebrator Progress Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-633 18-634 18-637 18-639 18-640 18-641 18-642 18-644 18-644 18-648 18-650 18-650 18-650

Contents-18


Conditions and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-650 PIPE CONDITIONS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-651 JUNCTION CONDITIONS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-652 Important Skelebrator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653 Backing Up Your Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653 Skeletonization and Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-653 Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-655 Skeletonization and Active Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-656

Chapter 19: WaterSafe

659

WaterSafe Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-659 Trace Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-660 Select Trace Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-660 Constituent Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-661 Select Constituent Alternatives Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-662 Age Analysis Project Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-662 Select Age Alternative Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-663 Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664 Graph Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664 TRACE ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664 CONSTITUENT ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-664 AGE ANALYSIS GRAPH SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-665 Graph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-665 BAR AND PIE GRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-667 Graph Print Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-668 Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-668 Color Coding Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670 Table Print Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670 Statistical Report Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-670 Graph Unit Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-672 Table Unit Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-672

Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions

673

Overview: “How Do I” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-673 Import/Export Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions . . . . . . . . . . . CYBERNET V1 DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYBERNET V2 DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WATERCAD/CYBERNET V3 AND V4 FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transitioning from Cybernet v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORKING WITH THE GRAPHICAL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT TABLES (FLEXTABLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINKS TO GRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS (GIS) AND DATABASES. . . . SCENARIO MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


A-674 A-674 A-674 A-674 A-675 A-675 A-676 A-676 A-677 A-677

Contents-19

USING THE SCENARIO CONTROL CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPOSITE DEMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUMPS AND PUMP CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing EPANET Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONCENTRATION UNITS IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing KYPIPE Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Database and Shapefile Data Created with WaterCAD v3 . . . . . Additional Considerations When Working with Large Model Files. . . . . . . .

A-678 A-678 A-679 A-679 A-680 A-680 A-681 A-681 A-681 A-682 A-682 A-682 A-683

Modeling Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling Parallel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARALLEL VSPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling Fire Hydrants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modeling Variable Speed Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TYPES OF VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PATTERN BASED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIXED HEAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROLS WITH FIXED HEAD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Scenarios to Model “What If?” Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge Base? . . . . . . . . . . . . Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-683 A-684 A-684 A-685 A-686 A-687 A-687 A-688 A-688 A-690 A-691 A-693 A-693 A-694 A-694 A-695 A-695 A-696 A-696

Display Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-699 How Do I Change Units in a Column? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-699 How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-700 How Do I Color Code Elements? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-700 How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels? . . . . . . . A-701 How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701 Editing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701 Mouse Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-701 Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-702 Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-703 Advanced Darwin Designer Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-703

Contents-20


Appendix B: WaterCAD Theory

713

Acknowledgements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-713 Pressure Network Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Hydraulics Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THE ENERGY PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Energy Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic and Energy Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYDRAULIC GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENERGY GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conservation of Mass and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSERVATION OF MASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSERVATION OF ENERGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Gradient Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Linear System Equation Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSTANT HORSEPOWER PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK VALVES (CVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOW CONTROL VALVES (FCVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (PRVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVES (PSVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSURE BREAKER VALVES (PBVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THROTTLE CONTROL VALVES (TCVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES (GPVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-714 B-714 B-715 B-716 B-716 B-717 B-717 B-717 B-717 B-718 B-719 B-719 B-722 B-723 B-724 B-725 B-726 B-726 B-726 B-726 B-727 B-727 B-727 B-727

Friction and Minor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Friction Loss Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHEZY’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-727 B-727 B-728 B-728 B-729 B-729

Swamee and Jain Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-730

MANNING’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-731 Minor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-732 Water Quality Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advective Transport in Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixing at Pipe Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixing in Storage Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulk Flow Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMPLE 1ST-ORDER DECAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIRST-ORDER SATURATION GROWTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TWO-COMPONENT, 2ND-ORDER DECAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MICHAELIS-MENTON DECAY KINETICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZERO-ORDER GROWTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Wall Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System of Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


B-733 B-733 B-734 B-734 B-735 B-736 B-736 B-736 B-736 B-737 B-738 B-739

Contents-21

Lagrangian Transport Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-739 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-741 Engineer’s Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-743 Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-743 Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) . . . . . . B-744 Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-745 Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-746 Fitting Loss Coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-747 Genetic Algorithms Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Darwin Calibrator Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALIBRATION FORMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALIBRATION OBJECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-748 B-748 B-750 B-750

Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares . . . . . . . . . . B-750 Objective Type Two: Minimize the Sum of Absolute Differences . . . . . . . . . B-750 Objective Type Three: Minimize the Maximum Absolute Difference . . . . . . B-751

CALIBRATION CONSTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENETIC ALGORITHM OPTIMIZED CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Darwin Designer Methodology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODEL LEVEL 1: LEAST COST OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODEL LEVEL 2: MAXIMUM BENEFIT OPTIMIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODEL LEVEL 3: COST-BENEFIT TRADE-OFF OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . .

B-751 B-752 B-753 B-753 B-753 B-753

Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-754 Cost Objective Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755 New Pipe Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755 Rehabilitation Pipe Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-755 Break Repairing Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756

BENEFIT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756 Pressure Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-756 Rehabilitation Benefit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-757 Unitized Benefit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-758

MULTI OBJECTIVE GENETIC ALGORITHM OPTIMIZED DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . B-760 Competent Genetic Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-762 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-763 Energy Cost Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765 Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765 Water Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-765 Brake Power and Pump Efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-766 Motor Power and Motor Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-766 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-767 Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768 ENERGY USAGE COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768 PEAK USAGE COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768 Storage Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-768 Daily Cost Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-769 Variable Speed Pump Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-769 VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-771 Performing Advanced Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-772

Contents-22


References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-773 Hydraulic Equivalency Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazen-Williams Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manning’s Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Darcy-Weisbach Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERIES PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARALLEL PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MINOR LOSSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUMERICAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-773 B-773 B-774 B-774 B-775 B-775 B-775 B-776 B-776 B-777 B-778 B-778 B-778 B-778

Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-778 Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-779

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-780 Naïve Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-780 Plane Sweep Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-781

Appendix C: Scenario Management Guide

783

About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-784 Before Haestad Methods—Distributed Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-784 With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-785 The Scenario Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-786 Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-787 A Familiar Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-787 Scenario Behavior: Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-788 Overriding Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789


Contents-23

Dynamic Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789 When Are Values Local versus Inherited? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-789 Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-790 Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-791 A Water Distribution Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-792 Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-792 Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-793 Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-793 Correcting an Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-794 Analyzing Improvement Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-794 Finalizing the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-795 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-796

Appendix D: Capital Cost Estimating

797

Capital Cost Estimating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-797 Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-798 Navigating within the Cost Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-798 LEVEL OF DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799 CONSTRUCTION VERSUS OVERALL PROJECT COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799 INDIRECT COSTS BY ELEMENT OR BY PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799 COST FUNCTIONS VERSUS FIXED UNIT COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799 SCENARIOS VERSUS COST ALTERNATIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-799 MULTIPLE SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800 Entering Data for Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800 PROTOTYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-800 SETTING THE INCLUDE IN COST CALCULATION BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-801 ENTERING COST ITEMS AND UNIT PRICES GLOBALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802 USING FILTERS TO EDIT ONLY SOME ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802 Unit Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-802 Form of Cost Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-803 MULTIPLE COST FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-805 ASSIGNING COST FUNCTIONS TO ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806 ENTERING COST FUNCTION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806 Formula Cost Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-806 DEFINING COST FORMULAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-807 COEFFICIENTS IN COST FORMULAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-807 Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-808 Building Cost Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-810 Associating Costs with Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-810 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-811 USING COST ALTERNATIVES TO SEGREGATE MULTIPLE PROJECTS . . . . . . D-811 Viewing Cost Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-811

Contents-24


Active Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Cost FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Element Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Node and Pipe Cost Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost Scenario Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-812 D-812 D-813 D-813 D-813

Assigning Costs to Model Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction versus Non-Construction Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost Considerations for Different Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COST PER ITEM VERSUS COST PER LENGTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ITEMS WITH COST PER LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNIT COST FUNCTIONS FOR PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Node Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TYPES OF NODES BY COST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COST ITEMS FOR NODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump Station Costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Construction Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMISSIONS AND CONTINGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAND, EASEMENT, AND RIGHT-OF-WAY COSTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFYING NON-CONSTRUCTION COSTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-815 D-815 D-816 D-816 D-816 D-817 D-817 D-818 D-818 D-819 D-821 D-822 D-823 D-823 D-824

Appendix E: Haestad Methods

829

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterGEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SewerCAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PondPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CulvertMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WaterSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PumpMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-829 E-830 E-830 E-831 E-831 E-831 E-832 E-832 E-832 E-832

Haestad Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-833 Training and Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-833 Accreditations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-834 Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instant Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CivilProjects.com. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CivilQuiz.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Haestad Engineering Forums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-834 E-834 E-834 E-835 E-835

Appendix F: Glossary

837

Appendix G: References

849


Contents-25

Index

851

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867

Contents-26


Chapter

1

Orientation

Thank you for purchasing WaterCAD. At Haestad Methods, we pride ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your needs without getting in your way. WaterCAD is a feature-rich program with extensive online documentation that is able to provide a level of instruction appropriate to your needs. When you first use WaterCAD, the intuitive interface and interactive dialog boxes will guide you. If you need more information, use the online help by either pressing the Help button present in each dialog box, pressing the F1 key, or right-clicking anywhere in a dialog box. Help text regarding the area of the program in which you are working will be displayed. Before you run WaterCAD, you should be familiar with: •

“What’s New?” on page 1-29

•

“Installation, Upgrades, and Updates” on page 1-33

•

“Learning WaterCAD” on page 1-42

•

“Contacting Haestad Methods” on page 1-43


1-27

Using the WaterCAD Documentation

1.1

Using the WaterCAD Documentation Note:

If you cannot find the information you need in the printed book, make sure you use the index or search the online book (.PDF) or online help (.CHM). These online resources contain extra information that is useful when you are actually using the software and need contextsensitive assistance or help with the software interface.

We designed the WaterCAD documentation to provide you content in the best possible way. With this in mind, there is significantly more content available online than inprint. The online content was designed to provide what you need while you are using the software, and so the online content includes information about the WaterCAD interface. The online content can also be updated dynamically as we update the software, and delivered to you by download or as part of an updated software version. The printed content was designed to help you with lessons and to be usable away from the computer to review WaterCAD features and theory. The printed document is not as easily updateable as the online content. The WaterCAD documentation comes in three distinct parts: •

Printed User’s Guide—The printed user’s guide contains tutorials and the theory on which the WaterCAD is based. Use this document at your leisure to review the engineering standards we use and beside you at the computer to review the WaterCAD lessons (

•

Online Book—The online user’s guide is a .PDF-format file that contains the same material as the printed user’s guide plus it includes reference content about the WaterCAD interface, options, and dialog boxes. Updated versions of the online user’s guide will be made available for download and be included in updates to the software. This document is hypertext, you can search it, and you can print page ranges from your local or network printer. Use this document to view and print content about WaterCAD dialog boxes, windows, and other elements of the WaterCAD software.

•

Context-Sensitive Online Help—WaterCAD includes context-sensitive HTML Help. Like the online book, the online help is fully searchable, uses hypertext, and is updateable by download. Press F1 when using the WaterCAD software to use the online help and get information immediately about the software feature you are currently using.

For more information, see “Using the Online Book (PDF)” on page 2-77 and “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

1-28


Orientation

1.2

What’s New? Note:

Support for AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD. Windows 2000 and XP are the only supported operating systems.

WaterCAD includes a variety of new and enhanced features, including: •

Skelebrator™—Lets you reduce complex raw GIS assets into accurate modeling representations while automatically preserving pipe network integrity and hydraulic capacity. Skelebrator is available as an optional feature level.

•

Reflective Data Model—Extends the data coverage in real-time by adding custom fields, attributes, and objects.

•

WaterObjects™—Adds custom functionality and developing components and full applications using standard programming languages and scripts. WaterObjects customization is available as an optional feature level.

•

GeoGrapher™—Provides advanced visualization and graphic presentation.

•

GIS-Style Background Layer Control—Lets you easily manage multiple background layers and annotation.

•

Pump Definition Manager—Lets you manage custom pump definitions that can be reused throughout your model and minimize the duplication of data.

•

GEMSLinks™—Shows how to program against WaterObjects. This object model sample written in C# lets you link elements in your model to external metadata, such as a pump to a picture of the pump.

•

Custom Tools—You can populate the WaterCAD Tools menu with your own custom-built tools using the new External Tools Manager.

•

Parallel VSPs - You can now utilize Variable Speed Pumps (VSPs or Variable Speed Drives - VSDs) in parallel, allowing you to more accurately model realworld networks.

•

Pipe Split—You can now split an existing pipe by placing a node element at the point of the split using intuitive drag-and-drop functionality.

•

Pipe Disconnect/Reconnect—You can now disconnect existing pipes from the connected end node, and reconnect it to another node without deleting and redrawing the nodes and/or pipes.

•

Scalable Color Coding Legend—The color coding legend can now be resized independently of the text height multiplier.

•

AutoCAD 2004 Support—WaterCAD offers full integration with AutoCAD, including the latest release, AutoCAD 2004. AutoCAD integration is an optional feature level.


1-29

What’s New?

1.2.1

1-30

Previously Added in WaterCAD v5.0 •

Darwin Calibration—Darwin Calibrator harnesses the power of genetic algorithms to automatically calibrate pipe roughness, demands, and pipe status. An unlimited number of calibration scenarios can be automatically generated and ranked by their proximity to your observed data, and the adjustments suggested by the calibrator can be automatically applied to your model. Manual calibration can also be performed from within the Darwin Calibrator on selected groups of elements or for all pipes and junctions in the model. The Darwin Calibrator is available as an optional feature level.

•

Active Topology Alternative—By using the Active Topology Alternatives feature, you can temporarily remove any of the network elements from the drawing view. While these elements are Inactive, they are not included in any calculations. This capability allows you to maintain multiple network configuration scenarios within a single project file, eliminating the need to switch between multiple files.

•

Variable Speed Pumps—You can make any pump a variable speed pump. You can control variable speed pumps using a pump speed pattern or choose to have the pump adjust its speed to meet a specific head at a target node.

•

Energy Cost Analysis—WaterCAD can estimate the energy costs associated with running the pumps in a network. This feature goes beyond calculating the amount of electricity used in that it also accounts for the energy losses and gains associated with tank level changes over time.

•

Logical Rule-Based Controls—Logical Rule Based Controls provide greater flexibility and functionality than simple controls, giving you enhanced ability to dictate the behavior of your system.

•

System Head Curve Generation—WaterCAD can automatically generate system head curves, which can be used to find the appropriate pump size for the system or to find the operating point for an existing pump.

•

General Purpose Valve—GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, turbines, or any other device or situation with a unique headloss-to-flow relationship.

•

Demand and Pattern Import—You can import demands and patterns from ASCII text files.

•

Time Variable Reservoir—HGL patterns can now be applied to reservoirs, providing the ability to simulate tidal activity and situations where the reservoir represents a tie-in to another system whose pressure varies with time.

•

Manual Fire Flow Scenarios—With only a small amount of input data, you can have the program automatically create fire flow scenarios for each individual node in which a user-defined fire flow demand is applied. You can then perform a batch run on these scenarios to compare them, or run a steady-state or extended-period simulation (EPS) on each individual scenario.


Orientation

1.2.2

•

Flow Emitters—Use Flow Emitters to model fire sprinklers, irrigation systems, leakage, or any other situation in which the node demand varies in proportion to the pressure at the emitter node.

•

Totalizing Flow Meters—By using Totalizing Flow Meters, you can determine the total and net amount of flow passing through any network element.

•

Submodel Import and Export—Export a model, or portions thereof, for import into other projects.

•

Animation Support—Animate the plan and profile views separately or at the same time to serve as an ideal tool for presentations and output analysis.

•

Quick Attribute Selector—The Quick Attribute Selector organizes the available attributes into groups of related attribute types, allowing you to easily find the desired attribute.

•

Mouse Wheel Pan and Zoom—You can pan and zoom inside the drawing pane using the mouse wheel.

•

Time Of Day Support—WaterCAD has Time-of Day support, using a standard 24-hour clock (AM and PM).

•

Enhanced Filtering Capability—In addition to the filtering options available in previous versions, WaterCAD lets you filter using the operators Begins With and Contains.

•

Improved Element Calculation Messages—A printable list of all elements with messages and warnings can now be accessed from the Calculation Results tab.

•

Improved Element Graphs—Element graphs can now display multiple elements simultaneously.

•

AutoCAD Double-Click Support—Double-clicking an element opens the Element Editor dialog box for that element, eliminating the need to select the Edit menu command.

•

AutoCAD Multi-line Tooltips—Hovering the mouse cursor over an element will open a multi-line tooltip, which displays any current Annotation applied to that element.

•

AutoCAD Contour Labeling—Contour labeling can now be achieved using WaterCAD commands. Labels can be applied to the ends or the interior of the contour lines.

•

Windows XP Support—WaterCAD is now compatible with Windows XP.


Editable Quick View—The Quick View Window has always been the fastest way to view the data associated with any element. Now you can use Quick View to make input changes as well (and, as you would expect, with full undo/redo support).


1-31

What’s New?

1.2.3

1-32


Network Licensing—Purchase a multi-seat license. With the purchase of the AutoCAD version of WaterCAD, your engineers and technicians can individually use WaterCAD in either Stand-Alone mode or AutoCAD mode and share project files.

•

Custom Fields—Utilize user-defined custom fields for storing information, which you can use to perform many standard operations including filtering, sorting, and color-coding.

•

User-Defined Groups—Organize your input, profiling, and reporting steps with persistent user-defined groups of pipes and nodes by type or any other basis.

•

Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion—Batch convert existing AutoCAD lines, polylines, and blocks to water distribution elements via automated polyline-to-pipe options. Allows you to customize polyline-to-pipe parameters.

•

Drawing Review—Quickly navigate your model using the drawing review tool in order to identify and resolve design problems in the network.

•

Element Relabeling—Automatically renumber, replace, or append a prefix/suffix to selected element labels.

•

Aerial View—Access this separate window to facilitate zooming, panning, and locating a small viewing area in the main window.

•

Aligning Pipe Labels—Automatically align pipe labels and annotations with the associated pipe.

•

Cost Estimating—Perform detailed cost estimates using an integrated cost analysis modeling subsystem. Calculate a planning-level estimate of the capital cost associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with the various scenarios, thus helping to ensure that the most cost-effective design is chosen.

•

Contouring by Selection Set—Generate contours based on any model parameter for a subset of the model.

•

Fire Flow Capacity—Analyze fire-flow capacity of predefined subsets of the network. Color-code and contour the system or a selection set according to available fire flow.

•

Labels—Automatically label pressure, flow quantity, and any other selected input/output parameter. Dynamically updates annotations (labels) with each calculation, alternative scenario, or change in time step.


Orientation

1.3

•

International Settings—Select a local date and time format.

•

External Data Sources—Externalize and leverage existing enterprise data using standard database connections. Freely exchange data for all network elements with GIS software using exclusive dynamic shapefile connections. Extract, transform, and load enterprise information to and from the model using built-in automated data tools. Avoid data preprocessing or intermediate file generation. Preserve the consistency of external data using built-in automated data model filters that dynamically validate and enforce model integrity.

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates This section lets you know:

1.3.1

•

“Minimum System Requirements” on page 1-33

•

“Installing Haestad Methods’ Products” on page 1-35

•

“Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products” on page 1-35

•

“Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation” on page 1-35

•

“Software Registration” on page 1-36

•

“Upgrades” on page 1-37

•

“Globe Button” on page 1-37

•

“Network Licensing” on page 1-37

•

“Registering Network Programs” on page 1-38

Minimum System Requirements Note:

Support for AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD. Windows 2000 and XP are the only supported operating systems.

We recommend the following minimum and recommended system requirements for running WaterCAD without significant delays. The RAM requirement for AutoCAD Mode is due to AutoCAD and operating system demands, not WaterCAD itself. •

“WaterCAD Stand-Alone” on page 1-34

•

“AutoCAD Mode” on page 1-34


1-33

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

WaterCAD Stand-Alone Processor:

Pentium III - 1 GHz

RAM:

128 Megabytes

Hard Disk:

150 Megabytes of free storage space, with additional room for data files

Operating System:

Windows 2000 or Windows XP

Display:

800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors

AutoCAD Mode Processor:

Pentium III - 1 GHz

RAM:

256 Megabytes

Hard Disk:

150 Megabytes of free storage space, with additional room for data files

Display:

800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors

Recommended While Haestad Methods’ software will perform adequately given the minimum system requirements, performance will only improve with a faster system. Our products are designed to perform at optimal levels with a fast CPU and ample amounts of RAM and free disk space. We highly recommend running our software on the best system possible to maximize its potential, especially for larger models containing thousands of pipes. We understand that an engineer’s time is a valuable commodity, and we have designed our software to help make the most of that time.

1-34


Orientation

1.3.2

Installing Haestad Methods’ Products Note:

If you own a network license version of the software, see “Network Licensing” on page 1-37. If you still have questions, consult the KnowledgeBase on our Web site, http:// www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.

For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow these steps to install a single-user license copy of WaterCAD: 1. If you have not done so, turn on your computer. 2. Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy-disk drive (commonly the a: or b: drive). 3. Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive). 4. If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin automatically. Proceed to step six. 5. If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run, and type d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive), and then click OK. 6. Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard.

1.3.3

Uninstalling Haestad Methods’ Products Haestad Methods’ products come with an uninstall option. After a single-user license copy of a Haestad Methods’ product is installed on a computer, it must be uninstalled before a new installation can occur. To uninstall the program, put the original floppy disk labeled Disk 1 that came with the product into the floppy-disk drive. On the Windows Start Bar, click Start\Program Files\Haestad Methods\WaterCAD\Uninstall WaterCAD.

1.3.4

Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstallation Because of the multi-tasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications running in the background that make it difficult for the setup routines to determine the configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the installation (setup) or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our technical support staff: •

Restart your PC.


1-35

Installation, Upgrades, and Updates •

Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Exit any applications that are running and restart your machine.

•

Run setup or uninstall again without running any other program first.

If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our support staff.

1.3.5

Software Registration Note:

If you own a network license version of the software, see “Network Licensing” on page 1-37. If you still have questions, consult the KnowledgeBase on our Web site, http:// www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.

During the installation of the program, a dialog box will prompt you to register the software. Please note the label with your registration information is on the inside of the back cover of the manual. Although this software is not copy protected, registration is required to unlock the software capabilities for the hydraulic features that you have licensed. All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog box exactly as it appears on the label. •

Company

•

City

•

State/Country

•

Product ID

•

Registration Number

After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status by opening the registration dialog box in the software itself. To open the Registration dialog box: •

Select Help > About.

•

Click the Registration button in the About dialog box.

The current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc.) will be displayed.

1-36


Orientation

1.3.6

•

You can use the Copy button to place the registration information in the Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into another Windows application.

•

You can also use the Print button to print the information shown in the Registration Form dialog box.

Upgrades When you click the Registration button on the Help > About WaterCAD dialog box, the current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc.) is displayed. To upgrade to more pipes or inlets, higher feature levels, or additional licenses, contact our sales team today and request information about our ClientCare® Program. We will provide the information you need to get up and running in no time!

1.3.7

Globe Button Note:

Use the Globe button to keep your investment current.

Haestad Methods makes it easy to stay up-to-date with the latest advances in our software. Software maintenance releases can be downloaded from the Haestad Methods’ Web site quickly and easily if you are a subscriber to our ClientCare Program. Just click the Globe icon on the tool palette to launch your preferred Web browser and open the Haestad Methods’ ClientCare Web site. The Web site will automatically check to see if your installed version is the latest available. If it is not, you will have the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring your software up-to-date. The ClientCare Program also gives you access to our extensive KnowledgeBase™ for answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ). Contact the Haestad Methods sales team for more information about our ClientCare Program.

1.3.8

Network Licensing Network versions of this product are available. If you purchased a network version, your program will run at any workstation located on your network if a floating license key is available for use. Floating licenses allow one or more concurrent users of a particular application to access and use the full capabilities of the software if the number of concurrent licenses does not exceed the number allowed under the terms of the license sale. Once the number of concurrent users exceeds the licensed number, new application sessions will run in a limited demo mode. Network licensing is implemented using Rainbow Industries SentinelLM™ license manager. Administrators should refer to the SentinelLM™ System Administrators Guide for details on implementing network licensing at your location.


1-37


1.3.9

Registering Network Programs During the installation of the network deployment folder, a dialog box will appear asking you to register the software. The label with your registration information is on the inside back cover of the manual. This registration data is required to enable the software capabilities for the hydraulic network size and features that you have licensed. All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog box exactly as it appears on the label. •

Company

•

City

•

State/Country

•

Product ID

•

Registration Number

After you have registered the software, you can view the current registration and floating license usage status at any of the workstations that has the product software installed on it. To open the Registration dialog box: •

Select Help > About.

•

Click the Registration button.

The current registration status (number of floating licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc.) will be displayed. If all available floating licenses are in current use, the software will run in demo mode. Network administrators may activate network licenses and upgrade the features served by their floating licenses by invoking the Request License option, which is activated using the Registration button on this dialog box.

1-38

•

You can use the Copy button to export the registration information to the Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into other Windows applications.

•

You can use the Print button to print the information shown.


Orientation

Requesting a Permanent Network License System administrators who are responsible for managing network license versions of Haestad Methods’ software must activate their organization’s floating licenses by obtaining a permanent license file from Haestad Methods. This may be done using the Request License button on the Registration dialog box. This button will only be available for users who have purchased the network-licensing feature. Note:

Haestad Methods uses SentinelLM License Manager software from Rainbow Technologies to manage network licensing for this application. For more information concerning the administration of the Haestad Methods floating network licensing, please see the Sentinel online documentation that installed with your network license server software.

To acquire a network license file, the administrator must first generate the network locking codes for the computer that will be acting as the network license server. To get your license server locking code, use the SentinelLM echoid utility. This is installed with the license server software on the computer acting as the network license host for this application. Note:

The echoid utility must be run from the same computer that will act as the license server host for this particular Haestad Methods application.

Write down the values for the locking codes that are posted in the echoid utility’s message box. Be certain to record these values accurately, as they will be used by Haestad Methods to generate a custom license file keyed to the specific license server’s hardware signature. Once issued, a license key-code may not be installed on another machine. You will not be able to transport the license server to another network machine without obtaining new lock codes. With echoid values in hand, start the Haestad Methods product application on any workstation located on the network served by the license manager. You can even install and run the Haestad Methods application from the same computer that will be acting as the license server host computer. Select Help > About to open the Registration dialog box. Open the Request License Key dialog box using the Request License button. Fill out the form, then either e-mail or fax the completed form to Haestad Methods using the Submit Request button.


1-39


Installation Guide for Network License Versions To set up a Haestad Methods’ software product for operation as a network licensed version: 1. Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy-disk drive (commonly the a: or b: drive). 2. Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive). 3. If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin automatically. Proceed to step 5. 4. If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run, and type d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive). Click OK. 5. To perform the following steps, you must have full administrator privileges for the target network-based installation folders. Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard, which will guide you through the installation of two components: –

Network Deployment Folder—A directory installed on a network node that is available from all client workstations on which the license product will be installed. Users of the floating licenses will invoke the network-based installation utility SETUP.EXE, which will install and configure the application to each client workstation.

–

Network License Manager and Utilities—The license manager service executable file that will automatically monitor availability and distribute network floating licenses to client applications as they are started up across the license hosting LAN. The license manager may be installed on any shared node in the network, but is generally located on a network server machine.

6. Start the license server using the appropriate procedure for the host machine’s operating system: –

Windows 2000 and XP—Use the loadls utility via the Service Loader menu option to install the license server. The license manager runs as a service and can be manually controlled via the Windows Control Panel > Services group.

7. Announce the availability of the product via e-mail. Instruct interested users to install the product by using the Start > Run menu command and browsing to the network deployment folder installed in step 5 to run SETUP.EXE. The license server ships with special 30-day licenses that will allow users to begin using the application immediately.

1-40


Orientation 8. Obtain a permanent license file for the application. A permanent license file must be obtained from Haestad Methods within 30 days of receipt of the product package. Request a permanent license file by following these steps: a. At the host computer on which the license server will run, use the echoid utility via the Locking Codes menu option to determine the locking codes that will be used to generate license keys for your network. The license key file will be configured specifically for the license server machine installation. Write these locking codes down. b. Start the Haestad Methods’ product application at any workstation where the product has been installed. The product can even be installed directly on the computer acting as the license server. c. Select Help > About and click the Registration button. Use the Request License button at the bottom of the Registration dialog box and fill out the License Key Request form with the system administrator contact and host server locking code information. Be certain to accurately record the locking codes obtained during the previous steps, since inaccurate information will result in the generation of unusable license files. d. Click the Submit Request button. Following the instructions in the form, email or fax the form to Haestad Methods. The activation request will be processed, and a license file will be generated and e-mailed to the system administrator making the request. 9. Use the lslic utility located in the AdminTools directory to modify the permanent license file managed by the network license server. After the license key file requested above is received via e-mail from Haestad Methods, save the file attachment to a computer folder on any computer resident on the network serviced by the running license server. For future convenience, safety, and ease-of-support, it is recommended that the license file be saved in the license manager tools directory, AdminTools. This utility must be run from the operating system prompt. Enter lslic -F , where is the name of the license file attachment e-mailed by Haestad Methods and saved to the hard-drive. This step will install the new license key into the license file, lservrc, located on the same computer and in the same directory that the license server resides. Once these steps are completed, floating licenses will be available to concurrent users via the network. Should the number of users exceed the number of license keys available, the unlicensed client sessions will continue to run in demo mode.

Network Deployment Folder Interested users may install the complete product via the network deployment folder using the Windows Start > Run command. Browse to the deployment directory, and run SETUP.EXE to install the program to a client workstation.


1-41

Learning WaterCAD

1.4

Learning WaterCAD Use the following:

1.4.1

•

“Using the WaterCAD Documentation” on page 1-28

•

“How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions” on page 1-42

•

“Glossary” on page 1-42

•

“Tutorials” on page 1-42

•

“Sample Projects” on page 1-43

•

“Haestad Methods’ Workshops” on page 1-43

How Do I?—Frequently Asked Questions “How Do I?” is an easily referenced topic in WaterCAD’s online documentation. It is a listing of commonly asked questions about WaterCAD. (For more information, see “Frequently Asked Questions” on page A-673.)To use How Do I?, click Help > How Do I? The listing of How Do I? topics will appear. Click the topic of your choice for a detailed explanation.

1.4.2

Glossary The glossary contains many terms used throughout the application and the online help. To use the Glossary:

1.4.3

•

Click Help > Contents to open the main Help window.

•

Click the Contents tab, scroll to the bottom of the bookmarks list, and click the Glossary bookmark.

Tutorials Tutorials provide a quick introduction to WaterCAD. To access tutorials, click Help > Tutorials. To start a tutorial, select one from the list and click the play button. End a tutorial at any time by either pressing the Esc key (in Stand-Alone mode), or by clicking the X button in the lower section of any tutorial dialog box.

1-42


Orientation

1.4.4

Sample Projects To explore one of the sample projects provided to demonstrate this software’s capabilities: 1. Select File > Open to access the Open Project File dialog box. 2. Choose EXAMPLE?.WCD (or EXAMPLE?.DWG, if using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode) (where ? represents a number 1-5) from the Sample directory, and click Open. These are working network models, so you can explore the systems and see how different elements are modeled. First, calculate the system by using the GO button on the main toolbar. Then use Quick View, Graphs, Profiles, Tabular Views, Detailed Reports, Color Coding (“Color Coding” on page 13-513), and Contouring (“Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547) to see how the system behaves.

1.4.5

Haestad Methods’ Workshops Haestad Methods offers a variety of workshops dealing with topics ranging from urban stormwater management to water distribution modeling, alternating theory, modeling insights, and hands-on practice with software instruction. These workshops are held at various locations, and include discounted pricing when purchasing Haestad Methods’ software. For more information about our workshops (such as instructors, schedules, pricing, and locations), please contact our sales department, or visit our Web site at http:// www.haestad.com for current workshop schedules and locations. We will be glad to answer any questions you may have regarding the workshops and our other products and services. Haestad Methods offers a range of other training services including on-site, online, and on-campus training. For detailed information on the availability of these options, visit http://www.haestad.com/education.

1.5

Contacting Haestad Methods For information on contacting Haestad Methods, see: •

“Sales” on page 1-44

•

“Technical Support” on page 1-44

•

“Addresses” on page 1-45

•

“Your Suggestions Count” on page 1-45


1-43

Contacting Haestad Methods

1.5.1

Sales Haestad Methods’ professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact your sales representative with any questions regarding Haestad Methods’ latest products and prices.

1.5.2

Phone:

+1-203-755-1666

Fax:

+1-203-597-1488

E-mail:

[email protected]

Technical Support We hope that everything runs smoothly, and you never have a need for our technical support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their services seven days a week and may be contacted by phone, fax, and the Internet. For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team and request information about our ClientCare program. When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information available: •

Operating system your computer is running (Windows 2000 or Windows XP).

•

Name and build number of the Haestad Methods software you are calling about. The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About WaterCAD. The build number is the number in brackets located in the lower-left corner of the dialog box that opens.

•

A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.

•

Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.

When e-mailing or faxing for support, please provide additional details as follows so we can provide a timely and accurate response: •

Company name, address, and phone number

•

A detailed explanation of your concerns

•

The HAESTAD.LOG and ERROR.LOG files located in the product directory

Support Hours

1-44

Monday - Friday:

9:00 AM EST to 8:00 PM EST

Saturday - Sunday:

9:00 AM EST to 5:00 PM EST


Orientation You can contact our technical support team at:

1.5.3

Phone:

+1-203-755-1666

Fax:

+1-203-597-1488

E-mail:

[email protected]

Addresses Use this address information to contact us: Internet:

http://www.haestad.com

E-mail:

[email protected] [email protected] [email protected]

Phone:

+1-203-755-1666

Fax:

+1-203-597-1488

Mail:

Haestad Methods 37 Brookside Road Waterbury, CT 06708-1499 USA

1.5.4

Your Suggestions Count At Haestad Methods, we strive to continually provide you with sophisticated software and documentation. We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving our products, our online help system, and our printed manuals. Your feedback will guide us in developing products that will make you more productive. Please let us hear from you ([email protected])!


1-45

Contacting Haestad Methods

1-46


Chapter

2

WaterCAD Main Window If you are already familiar with standard Microsoft Windows interfaces, you will find WaterCAD to be intuitive and comfortable. Even if you are not accustomed to Windows, just a few minutes of exploring WaterCAD should be enough to acquaint you with the flexibility and power that this program offers. This section describes the program’s main window, menus, and toolbars, letting you interact with this software in a quick and efficient manner. For more information about tools for layout, annotating, and editing, see “Layout and Editing Tools” on page 5255. For more information, see:

2.1

•

“WaterCAD Menus” on page 2-57

•

“WaterCAD Toolbars” on page 2-78

•

“Status Bar” on page 2-83

Main Window Components Main window components include: •

“Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-48

•

“WaterCAD Main Window” on page 2-49

•

“Drawing Pane” on page 2-50

•

“Layer Controls” on page 2-51

•

“DXF Properties Dialog Box” on page 2-53

•

“Shapefile Properties Dialog Box” on page 2-53

•

“Status Bar” on page 2-55

•

“Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys” on page 2-55

•

“Command Line” on page 2-57


2-47

Main Window Components

2.1.1

Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode Note:

AutoCAD mode is an available feature level. Contact us to upgrade your WaterCAD Stand-Alone version to include the AutoCAD integration feature level (for more information, see “Contacting Haestad Methods” on page 1-43).

Both the Stand-Alone graphical editor and the AutoCAD interface perform actions through the WaterCAD model server. This use of a common central model enables both modes to perform the same functions with the same behaviors. For example, graphical layout and model management are virtually identical between the two modes. Note:

Because of the common WaterCAD model server, model data is easily shared between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone modes.

One advantage of Stand-Alone mode is that your interaction is more streamlined and dynamic by virtue of the fact that the editing environment is a dedicated network editor. Also, since AutoCAD is not needed to run in Stand-Alone mode, less system resources and memory are required. A significant advantage of the AutoCAD mode is that you can create and model your network directly within your primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCAD’s powerful drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform WaterCAD modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between WaterCAD and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at your organization.

2-48


WaterCAD Main Window

2.1.2

WaterCAD Main Window Both the WaterCAD Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface have many components common to Windows-based programs. The following figures illustrate some of the important areas that make up the WaterCAD Stand-Alone and AutoCAD 2002 interfaces (the WaterCAD main window looks fairly similar in AutoCAD 2000 and AutoCAD 2002).

Menus

Project Layer Controls Toolbars

Drawing pane

Background Layer Control

Status bar Scroll bars

Notice that many of the window components (such as the menus and toolbars) are very similar for the Stand-Alone editor and AutoCAD. Other features (such as the command line) are only available in AutoCAD.


2-49


Menus WaterCAD toolbars AutoCAD toolbars

Drawing pane

AutoCAD command line Status bar Scroll bars

For more information regarding the various functions and behaviors of AutoCAD, please refer to Autodesk’s AutoCAD documentation.

2.1.3

Drawing Pane The drawing pane, the center of WaterCAD graphical activity, is where the water network elements are displayed. It is the main interactive area for creating elements, editing data, and even displaying results. In Stand-Alone mode, the drawing pane can also display a background .DXF image. This background can be helpful for aligning and positioning elements, as well as adding additional drafting elements for printing plan views.

2-50


WaterCAD Main Window In AutoCAD mode, the drawing pane is where all graphical elements, not just WaterCAD entities, are displayed and manipulated. Lines, arcs, text, and many other drafting elements can be created and modified within the drawing pane.

2.1.4

Layer Controls To the left of the main drawing pane are the background and project layer controls. These controls determine the visibility of element labels, annotation, background drawings, and various symbols in the main drawing pane. Layer controls include: •

“Project Layers” on page 2-51

•

“Background Layers” on page 2-52

Project Layers The Project Layers pane lists the various display components divided into layers, and allows you to control the visibility of each of these symbology layers. Selecting the check box next to a symbology layer causes that layer to become visible in the main drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. The project symbology layers are as follows: •

Element Labels—The layer that contains the element labels for all elements.

•

Annotation—This layer contains all dynamic annotation, as applied in the Element Annotation Wizard.

•

Flow Arrows—This layer contains the flow arrows that indicate the direction of flow after a calculation has been successfully completed.

•

Control Symbols—This layer contains the symbols that are applied to pumps, valves, and pipes that are associated with simple and logical controls.

•

Source Symbols—This layer contains the symbols that are applied to nodes that are designated as constituent sources during water quality analysis.

•

Graphical Annotation—This layer contains the lines, borders, and text that is applied using the Graphical Annotation tool.

•

Spot Elevations—This layer contains all spot elevations, including imported and manually placed spot elevations.


2-51


Background Layers The Background Layers pane lists all background drawings that are associated with the current project, and provides controls that can be used to add, edit, and remove background layers.

Background layers

When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane, along with an associated check box that is used to control that layer’s visibility. Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. The following controls can be found directly above the Background Layers pane:

2-52

•

Check box—Select the check box next to a background layer to make that layer visible.

•

Insert—Opens a browse dialog box that allows you to choose the file to use as a background layer.

•

Edit—Opens the Properties dialog box to allow various settings of the currently highlighted background layer to be modified.

•

Delete—Removes the currently highlighted background layer.


WaterCAD Main Window Note:

2.1.5

When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer in the first list position will be drawn “on top of” all other layers, since they are all below it on the list.

•

Shift Up—Moves the currently highlighted background layer up one place in the background layers list pane.

•

Shift Down—Moves the currently highlighted background layer down one place in the background layers list pane.

DXF Properties Dialog Box This dialog box appears after the Insert Background Layer button is selected and after a DXF drawing file has been chosen. The following controls can be used to define the properties of the background layer:

2.1.6

•

File Name—This field lists the path and filename of the .DXF to use as a background layer. The path and filename can be typed here manually to choose a drawing file, or the file can be specified using the Browse button.

•

Browse—Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the file to be used as a background layer.

•

Label—An identifying label for the background layer.

•

Background Color—This field allows you to specify the color in which the background layer elements will be displayed. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open a palette containing more color choices.

•

1 DXF Unit = 1—Choose a unit from the drop-down list. This is the unit associated with the spatial data within the .DXF. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the .DXF represent feet, choose ft. from the list.

•

Build Display List—Select this check box (checked) to generate a display list that will cause the file to load more slowly, but display more quickly.

Shapefile Properties Dialog Box This dialog box opens after you click the Insert Background Layer button and after a shapefile drawing file has been chosen. The following controls can be used to define the properties of the background layer: •

File Name—This field lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use as a background layer. The path and filename can be typed here manually to choose a drawing file, or the file can be specified using the Browse button.

•

Browse—Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the file to be used as a background layer.


2-53

Main Window Components •

Label—An identifying label for the background layer.

•

1 Shapefile Unit = 1—Choose a unit from the drop-down list. This is the unit associated with the spatial data within the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet, choose ft. from the list.

•

Background Color—This field allows you to specify the color in which the background layer elements will be displayed. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open a palette containing more color choices.

•

Symbol—This drop-down menu allows you to select the symbol that will be used to represent points in a point-shapefile-derived background layer. This control is only available when a point shapefile has been selected.

•

Size—This field allows you to specify the relative size of the symbols that will be used to represent points in a point-shapefile-derived background layer. This control is only available when a point shapefile has been selected.

•

Build Display List—Select this check box (checked) to generate a display list that will cause the file to load more slowly, but display more quickly. This check box is only available when a polygon or polyline shapefile has been selected. Tip:

It is possible to display multiple layers in such a way that filled polygons are outlined in another color. To produce this effect, add the same shapefile to the background layers list twice. For one of these shapefile layers, leave the Fill Figures check box cleared and choose the desired color. In the other layer, select the Fill Figures check box and choose a different color. The unfilled layer must be above the other in the list to produce the effect.

•

2-54

Fill Figures?—Select this check box (checked) to cause the polygons to be filled with the background color. When the box is unchecked, only an outline is displayed. This check box is only available when a polygon shapefile has been selected.



2.1.7

Status Bar Note:

When you position the mouse pointer over a toolbar button or menu item, the status pane will display a descriptive message. Leave the mouse over a section of the status pane to display an informative tip.

The status bar is located along the bottom of the main application window and provides useful information about application settings, the current user activity, file save status, etc.

2.1.8

Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys Anyone who has ever watched someone else use a computer should realize that not all people use computers in the same way. Some prefer to primarily use the mouse, some the keyboard, and others use a combination of both. For this reason, Haestad Methods’ programs provide access to the most common features through several means, including: •

“Menus” on page 2-55

•

“Toolbars” on page 2-56

•

“Shortcut Keys” on page 2-56

•

“Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56

•

“Command Line” on page 2-57

Menus As with any Windows-based program, the menu system provides easy access to many features. Items can be accessed by clicking the desired menu text, or by pressing the Alt key to activate the menus and then pressing the key for the underlined letter of the menu item you wish to access. For example, to open an existing file you can use the mouse to select File > Open, or you can press the Alt and F keys (Alt + F), then O on the keyboard.


2-55


Toolbars Toolbar buttons offer one-click access to some of the most commonly used features, giving you a quicker way to perform the most frequent operations. For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File > Open), simply click the File Open button.

Shortcut Keys Shortcut keys are Ctrl-key (Control) combination sequences that provide quick access to common application functions. If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it will be indicated in the menu itself. For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File > Open) you can press the Ctrl and O keys (Ctrl + O) at the same time.

Quick Attribute Selector Whenever attributes are selected, such as when setting up annotations or database connections, you can select them from organized categories using the Quick Attribute Selector tool. Click the attribute field to open the menu. From this menu you can select attributes from the list of available categories.

2-56



Command Line The command line is a special area that is not available in Stand-Alone mode. In AutoCAD mode, this area enables you to type commands directly, rather than using the menus, toolbars, or shortcut keys. For example, to open an existing AutoCAD file (the equivalent of selecting File > Open) you can simply type the command OPEN at the AutoCAD command line. Many of AutoCAD’s commands are easy to enter at the command line, including accessing drafting tools (like LINE and CIRCLE) and editing tools (like MOVE and ERASE). Modeling elements can also be manipulated through the AutoCAD command line, just as they can be manipulated via the menus or toolbars. For more information on the AutoCAD command line, please see the AutoCAD documentation.

2.2

WaterCAD Menus Although the toolbars and shortcut keys provide quick and easy access to commonly used features, the menu system provides much more comprehensive access to WaterCAD properties and behaviors. Since toolbar buttons and shortcut keys do not exist for all of these features, the menus are a logical choice for exploring all areas of WaterCAD. This section will introduce you to many of the things you can do with the menus in WaterCAD and show you how you can access these features, including the toolbar buttons and shortcut keys that are available. Commands are grouped under several menus, which are pretty much identical between Haestad Methods products. This makes any Haestad Methods product look very familiar once you already know one. The menu system for WaterCAD consists of the following selections: •

“File Menu” on page 2-58

•

“Edit Menu” on page 2-61

•

“Analysis Menu” on page 2-63

•

“View Menu” on page 2-64

•

“Tools Menu” on page 2-66

•

“Report Menu” on page 2-70

•

“Help Menu” on page 2-70


2-57

WaterCAD Menus

2.2.1

File Menu The File menu contains many of the items dealing with project management. It provides features to create, read, write, and print project files, as well as features for sharing data with databases and GIS systems. New—Create a new project. When you choose this item, a dialog box will appear so that you can enter a drive, directory, and filename for your new project file. The Project Setup Wizard will then help you set up your new project (for more information, see “Project Setup Wizard” on page 4-241). Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + N

Open—Load an existing project file from disk. When you select this item, a dialog box will appear so that you can choose the name and location of the project you want to open. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + O

Save—Save the current project file to disk. While saving the project file, the status pane will briefly display a message to show you the progress of the save command. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + S

Save As—Save the current project to disk under a different filename. When you use this command, a dialog box will appear prompting you to enter the drive, directory, and a new file name for your project. Project Summary—Access the Project Summary information, such as the project title and the project engineer (for more information, see “Project Summary” on page 4-242). Import > Shapefile—Build network elements from ESRI shapefiles. This command will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you bring the GIS elements and their associated data into your project (for more information, see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589). Note:

A similar command called “Change Entities to Pipes” is available in the AutoCAD version under the Edit menu.

Import > Polyline-to-Pipe—Build network elements from a .DXF file. This command will start the Polyline-to-Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert polyline data representing geographical data into your project as pipes and nodes (for more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600).

2-58


WaterCAD Main Window Note:

WaterCAD v3 and v4 projects should simply be opened in WaterCAD v5 (as any WaterCAD v5 project), without using the Import command. However, once you save the project in WaterCAD v5, the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3 or v4 any longer.

Import > Network—Import data from KYPIPE v1 (see “Importing KYPIPE Data” on page A-681), v2 or v3, EPANET 1.0 and 2.0 (see “Importing EPANET Files” on page A-681), or Cybernet® (see “Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions” on page A-674) files. Import > Spot Elevations—Bring spot elevation data from a space or comma delimited ASCII file in a variety of formats. Note:

Coordinate data is included in the .WSM file so elements in the imported submodel may overlap elements in the current drawing. Imported elements will not overwrite the existing elements, and may be moved to the desired location.

Import > Submodels—Combine current network with a previously exported WaterCAD submodel. For information, see “Importing a Submodel” on page 4-240 and “Exporting a Submodel” on page 4-241. Import > GEMS Project—Imports a GEMS .MDB file. Import > Background Layer—Bring a .DXF drawing file or a shapefile into your project as a background map. This command will open a dialog box that prompts you to select the name and location of the desired .DXF or shapefile. Import > WaterCAD—(AutoCAD mode only) Import a Stand-Alone WaterCAD file (*.WCD) into WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode (for more information, see “Import WaterCAD” on page 17-619). Note:

WaterCAD has the ability to import demands and patterns from text files. This option is not available from the File Menu along with the other import options, but can be found in the Demand Alternative Editor and the Pattern Manager, respectively. For more information, see “Importing Patterns” on page 9-396 and “Importing Demands” on page 6-301.

Export > Shapefile—Export your project to ESRI shapefile format for access in GIS applications. This command will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you create shapefiles with the desired project elements and associated data. Export > Submodels—Exports currently selected network elements to .WSM format for importing into other WaterCAD projects. Export > Spot Elevations—Export spot elevation data to a space or comma delimited ASCII file.


2-59

WaterCAD Menus Export > .DXF File—Export the entire network drawing to a .DXF format, which can be read by all popular CAD programs. This command will open a dialog box prompting you to enter the name and location for the .DXF file you would like to create. Synchronize > Database Connections—Access the Database Connection Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574), which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external databases, spreadsheets, and other ODBC compliant sources. For more information, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571. Synchronize > Shapefile Connections—Access the Shapefile Connection Manager (see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586), which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external GIS systems. For more information, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571. Synchronize GEMS Project—Brings into agreement the GEMS .MDB and the WaterCAD .WCD. Print—Print the current view of the project drawing to a printer. Profiles and tabular reports are printed from their respective windows. The print command invokes the standard Print dialog box, which allows you to select the printer and set up properties to be used. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + P

Print Preview—Open the Print Preview dialog box for the current view of the project drawing. This feature allows you to see the drawing as it will be printed before sending it to the printer. Print Setup—Select the default printer for WaterCAD to use. You can also use this to change options related to the printer driver, such as portrait or landscape orientation and other printer details. Exit—Close the current project and exit WaterCAD. If you made any changes to the current project, you will be prompted to save the project before you exit WaterCAD. Shortcut Key:

Alt + F4

1, 2, etc.—The most recently opened project files appear at the bottom of the File menu. Using this file list, you can quickly select and open a recently used file without locating its drive and directory.

2-60



2.2.2

Edit Menu The Edit menu provides access to basic commands for controlling a WaterCAD Element, including element navigation, selection, deletion, and undo / redo.

Stand-Alone Mode Undo [Last Action Performed]—Reverse the last reversible action performed. Reversible actions include things such as element creation, deletion, editing, and moves. The Undo command cannot reverse the effects of some model actions, such as calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Additionally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state, the undo/redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + Z

Redo [Last Action Undone]—Reverse the effects of the last undone action. Any action that can be undone can be redone. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + Y

Delete—Erase selected elements. Deleting an element removes it from all aspects of the project, including all scenarios. Shortcut Key:

Delete

Select > All—Select all of the elements in the current project. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + A

Select > By Element > [Element Type]—Select all elements of a certain type, such as all pipes or all junctions. Select > By Selection Set—Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). Select > Clear Selection—Resets the current selection set. Find Element—Use the Find Element dialog box (see “Find Element” on page 5265) to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane. This element search is based on the element label (note that this is not case sensitive). Shortcut Key:

Ctrl + F

Drawing Review—Open the Drawing Review window to isolate elements that may need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements with messages, superimposed nodes, etc.). For more information, see “Drawing Review” on page 5-267.


2-61

WaterCAD Menus

AutoCAD Mode WaterCAD Undo [Last Action Performed]—Reverse the last reversible action performed. Reversible actions include such things as element creation, deletion, editing, and moves. The effects of some model actions cannot be reversed, such as calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Additionally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state the undo/redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued. WaterCAD Redo [Last Action Undone]—Reverse the effects of the last undone action. Any action that can be undone can be redone. Cut—Delete the selected entities and place them on the Windows clipboard. These items can be pasted into other Windows programs or back into AutoCAD. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl+X

Copy—Place the selected entities from the current AutoCAD drawing on the Windows clipboard. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl+C

Paste—Place the items on the Windows clipboard into the current AutoCAD drawing. Shortcut Key:

Ctrl+V

Paste Special—Place special items located on the Windows clipboard, such as Excel Spreadsheets and Word documents, into the current AutoCAD drawing. Select > All—Select all of the elements in the current project. Select > By Element > [Element Type]—Select all elements of a certain type, such as all pipes or all junctions. Select > By Selection Set—Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). Select > Clear Selection—Reset (empty) the current selection set. Edit Element—Open an element’s dialog box. Select this item and click the element you wish to edit. Edit Elements—Edit a group of elements. Select this item, then select a group of elements using the crosshairs or by windowing an area. After the elements have been selected, right-click and the Table Manager will appear (for more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-330). The selected elements will be reported in the tables.

2-62


WaterCAD Main Window Modify Elements > Scale Elements—Scale the symbols representing the elements in the current selection set. Modify Elements > Rotate Labels—Rotate the labels of the elements in the current selection set. Modify Pipes > Insert Bend—Insert a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element. Modify Pipes > Remove Bend—Delete a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element. Modify Pipes > Remove All Bends—Delete all the bends along a selected Pressure Pipe Element. Modify Pipes > Change Widths—Change the Width of the lines representing pipes. Note:

A similar command called Import Polyline to Pipe is available in the Stand-Alone version (under the File menu).

Change Entities to Pipes—Build network elements from AutoCAD entities. This command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert the desired polylines representing geographical data into pipes (for more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600). Find Element—Open the Find Element dialog box (see “Find Element” on page 5265), which allows you to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane. This element search is based on the element label and is not case sensitive. Review Drawing—Open the Drawing Review window, which is used to isolate elements that need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements with messages, superimposed nodes, etc.). For more information, see “Drawing Review” on page 5-267.

2.2.3

Analysis Menu The Analysis menu contains items useful for managing calculations. These include the scenario and alternative managers and the calculation commands. Scenarios—Access the Scenario Control Center (see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366), letting you analyze and recall an unlimited number of “What If?” alternative calculations for your model. Alternatives—Access the Alternative Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347), letting you organize your data into building blocks to be combined to form scenarios.


2-63

WaterCAD Menus Active Topology—Access the Active Topology Editor (see “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353), letting you temporarily remove elements from the drawing view and network calculations. Patterns—Access the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394), letting you define automatic time-variable changes within the system. Logical Controls—Access the Logical Controls Manager (see “Logical Control Manager” on page 9-401), which lets you create, edit, and find rule-based or logical, controls. Zones—Access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328). From here, you can define zones in which to place network elements. Pump Definitions—Opens the Pump Definition Manager, letting you create, manage, and edit pump definition templates. System Head Curve—Open the System Head Curve dialog box (see “System Head Curve Dialog Box” on page 13-520), letting you enter the necessary input data to have WaterCAD generate a system head curve. Capital Costs—Open the Capital Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or perform Capital Cost Estimating calculations. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager” on page 11-448. Energy Costs—Open the Energy Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or perform Energy Cost Estimating calculations. For more information, see “Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452. Darwin Calibrator—Open the Darwin Calibration Manager. Compute—Open the Calculation dialog box, which gives you access to items such as calculation options and referenced alternatives. For more information, see “Calculate Network” on page 9-383.

2.2.4

View Menu Note:

In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for more information.

In both AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode, the View menu provides access to tools dealing with the drawing pane, toolbar visibility, and so forth. In Stand-Alone mode, you are provided with the following tools:

2-64


WaterCAD Main Window Pan—Upon selection hold down the left mouse button to move the drawing. Shortcut Key:

Hold down the mouse wheel.

Zoom In—Enlarge the current view of the drawing. Shortcut Key:

+ (Keypad)

Mouse:

Hold down Ctrl while scrolling up with mouse wheel.

Zoom Out—Reduce the current view of the drawing. Shortcut Key:

- (Keypad)

Mouse:

Hold down Ctrl while scrolling down with mouse wheel.

Zoom Window—Activate the user-defined zoom tool. This tool enables you to select the corners of the area within the drawing pane that you wish to enlarge. Zoom Extents—Reset the drawing zoom factor such that all elements are displayed in the drawing pane. Zoom Previous—Return the drawing pane to the most recent view. Zoom Center—Open the Zoom Center dialog box (see “Zoom Center” on page 5-266), which lets you specify the central coordinates and zoom factor to change the view in the drawing pane. Refresh—Updates the main window view according to the latest information contained within the WaterCAD datastore. Auto-Refresh—Automatically updates the main window view according to the latest information contained within the WaterCAD datastore whenever changes are made. Aerial View—Enable or disable the Aerial View window (see “Aerial View” on page 5-266). This window lets you display a second view of the drawing at a larger scale. Quick Edit—Enable or disable the Quick Edit window (see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273), which lets you quickly view input data, output data, and the legend for active color coding for any element. The Quick Edit dialog box also lets you edit the input data. Toolbars > Standard—Toggle the display of the Standard toolbar at the top of the window, which provides shortcuts to the most commonly used commands.


2-65

WaterCAD Menus Toolbars > Analysis Toolbar—Toggle the display of the Analysis toolbar, which includes the scenario selection list, as well as the time step selection list if applicable. Status Pane—Toggle the display of information at the bottom of the window regarding your current project.

2.2.5

Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only) Note:

You can add additional AutoCAD menus to your Haestad Methods application menus using AutoCAD’s menuload command. See the AutoCAD documentation for more information.

The Draw menu is actually an AutoCAD menu that is accessible in the current program.

2.2.6

Tools Menu The Tools menu provides general tools for placing or modifying graphical elements, annotating, color coding, contouring, changing the projects options, etc. Selection Sets—Access the Selection Sets dialog box (see “Selection Sets Manager” on page 5-263), which lets you create selection sets of elements based on element labels, element types, filters, and other means. Color Coding—Open the Color Coding dialog box (see “Color Coding” on page 13-513), which lets you control the display of elements based on value ranges such as pipe diameter, hydraulic grade, and so forth. Element Annotation—Access to the Element Annotation dialog box (see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509), which lets you display element attribute labeling, such as pipe diameter and pipe flow. Profiling—Open the Profile Setup dialog box (see “Profile Setup” on page 13-552), which lets you generate a profile of your piping system along a specified path. Contouring—Access the Contour Map Manager (see “Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547) to create and view contours. Relabel Elements—Open the Relabel Elements dialog box (see “Relabel Elements Dialog Box” on page 5-270), which lets you renumber some or all of your project elements. Element Labeling—Set the format for the labels applied to elements as they are added to the drawing.

2-66


WaterCAD Main Window Prototypes—Specify the default values for new network elements. Engineering Libraries—Declare the paths to and edit the libraries used in this project. User Data Extension—Open the User Data Extension dialog box (see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323), where you can add and define custom data fields. For instance, you can add new fields such as the pipe installation date. FlexUnits—Open the FlexUnits dialog box (see “FlexUnits Manager” on page 4254), where you can control units and display precision for any parameter. Note that you can also change the unit and display precision of variables from several other areas within the program. Layout > Select—Activate the selection tool used to highlight elements. Once elements are selected, they may be moved or edited. Layout > [Element Type]—Activate the corresponding element tool to place elements in the graphical editor. Layout > Spot Elevation—Activate the spot elevation tool, which is used to add spot elevations. Layout > Graphic Annotation—(Stand-Alone mode only) Activate various annotation tools, which enable you to add lines, borders, and text elements to the project drawing. Layout > Legend—Activate the legend tool used to add a key for the current drawing color coding for links and nodes. Note:

It is recommended practice top Compact Database every time a a large amount of model data is deleted (alternatives, large groups of elements, etc.).

Database Utilities > Compact Database—When you delete data from a WaterGEMS project, such as elements or alternatives, the database store that WaterGEMS uses can become fragmented, causing data storage to be inefficient. This can cause unnecessarily large data files, which can impact performance substantially. Compacting the database with this command eliminates the empty data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore and improving the performance of the file. Skelebrator—Opens the Skelebrator dialog box, letting you perform network reduction operations. External Tools—This toolbar item contains all of the external tools that you have added. External Tools > Customize—This command opens the External Tool Manager.


2-67

WaterCAD Menus Options—Specify settings for the current project, such as the friction method, coordinate system, unit system, and auto-prompting. Element Properties—(AutoCAD mode only) Control on which layer each type of object and its associated text is placed. Also controls the text style for labels and annotations. Preferences—(AutoCAD mode only) Activate the AutoCAD Preferences command in order to edit general AutoCAD settings. Contour Labeling—(AutoCAD mode only) After exporting a contour plot to the AutoCAD drawing, this option allows you to apply various label types to the contour. For more information, see “Contour Labeling” on page 13-550.

External Tool Manager The External Tool Manager lets you manage custom menu commands, which are then located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility. You can create a custom menu command from any executable file. Executable file types include: •

.exe

•

.com

•

.pif

•

.bat

•

.cmd

The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements: External Tool List Pane—This pane lists the external tools that have been created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools > External Tools menu. Add—This button opens the External Tools Manager, letting you create a new external tool. Edit—This button opens the currently highlighted tool’s External Tool Editor, allowing you to modify its settings. Duplicate—This button creates a copy of the currently highlighted tool. Delete—This button deletes the currently highlighted tool.

2-68



External Tool Editor The External Tool Editor lets you create custom menu commands, which are then located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility. You can create a custom menu command from any executable file. Executable file types include: •

.exe

•

.com

•

.pif

•

.bat

•

.cmd Note:

If an external tool is currently active and then activated again from the External Tools menu, a new instance of the tool will be launched. If your intent is simply to refresh the tool rather than open another instance, you must add this functionality to the external tool itself (the executable).

The External Tool Editor consists of the following controls: Label—This field allows you to specify the name of the custom tool. Placing an ampersand (&) character in front of a letter will cause that letter to be the shortcut key for the command. (For example, If you name your tool &Custom Tool, C will be the shortcut key for that command. If you name your tool Custom &Tool, T will be the shortcut key for that command.) Command—This field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that the tool will initiate. Browse—This button opens a browse dialog box to allow you to select the executable file that the tool will initiate. Arguments—This optional field allows you to enter command line variables that are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. The available arguments are: •

%(ProjDir)—This argument passes the current project directory to the executable upon activation of the tool.

•

%(ProjFileName)—This argument passes the current project file name (.WCD) to the executable upon activation of the tool.

•

%(ProjStoreFileName)—This argument passes the current project datastore file name (.MDB) to the executable upon activation of the tool.

Initial Directory—Specifies the working directory of the tool or command.


2-69

WaterCAD Menus

2.2.7

Report Menu The Report menu provides access to a collection of preformatted textual and graphical reports. Furthermore, the report menu provides access to FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), which enable you to create your own custom reports. Element Details—Open the Detailed Reports dialog box (see “Element Details Report” on page 13-515), which lets you print detailed reports for any set of elements. Element Results—Open the Analysis Results dialog box (“Element Results Report” on page 13-516), which lets you print reports of the results for any set of elements. Element Graphs—Opens the Graph Setup dialog box (“Graph Setup” on page 13522) to let you set up custom graphs of any element or set of elements. GeoGrapher—Opens the GeoGrapher advanced graph manager, letting you create, edit, and manage new and previously created graphs. FlexTables—Access the Table Manager (“Table Manager” on page 7-330), which lets you open predefined tables or generate your own custom tables. Scenario Summary—Generate a report for the current scenario, including an alternative summary, calculation options, etc. Project Inventory—Generate a report summarizing the project elements, including the number and breakdown of pipes, the number of manholes, and so forth. Plan View—Generate plan view printable reports of the network for either the current drawing display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).

2.2.8

Help Menu The Help menu contains items that relate to online documentation for WaterCAD (which includes the information contained in the printed documentation, as well as updated information and built-in tutorials). Help menu items can also be accessed from the Help button:

2-70

Contents:

Opens the Table of Contents for the online help. For more information, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

How to Use Help:

Accesses instructions for using the online help system.

AutoCAD Help Topics:

Accesses the AutoCAD online help.


WaterCAD Main Window Release Notes:

Provides the latest information on the current version of WaterCAD. This topic, which takes the place of a README file, includes information about new features, tips, performance tuning, and other general information.

Services:

Opens an Internet browser to Haestad Methods’ Web site or a local page that provides an overview of the services and products offered by Haestad Methods. In the local page, accessed by selecting Content, there are links to Haestad Methods Internet sites, which are updated frequently.

Welcome Dialog Box:

(In Stand-Alone mode only). Opens the Welcome dialog box, which is also shown at program startup (for more information, see “Welcome Dialog Box” on page 4-243).

Tutorials:

Accesses the interactive tutorials, which guide you through many of the program’s features. Tutorials are a great way to become familiar with new features (for more information, see “Tutorials” on page 1-42).

Using WaterCAD:

Opens a help topic with an Introduction to WaterCAD and related elementary information.

How Do I:

Provides instructions for tasks commonly performed within the program, as well as frequently asked questions.

About WaterCAD:

Opens a dialog box displaying product and registration information (for more information, see “Software Registration” on page 1-36).


2-71

WaterCAD Menus

Using the Online Help To open the online help for browsing, select Help > Contents. Use the table of contents, index, or perform a search to locate the information you need. You can also save a list of favorite help topics for quick reference.

Click Hide/Show to hide or show the Contents tab

To use context-sensitive help, click the Help button in any window or dialog box. Note that the online help will open at the topic you want and the Contents tab is hidden. Click the Show button in the online help toolbar to display the Contents tab.

2-72


WaterCAD Main Window Online Help Index Use the Index tab to search the online help index. For most searches, the index should provide better results more efficiently than the Search tab.

Type the keyword you want to find

Click a topic and click Display to display the selected topic

Click a Related Topic button to see and select topics related to the current one

To use the index: 1. Type the word (called keywords) you want to find. 2. Select the topic you want to see, and click Display. The topic you selected displays in the help window. Keywords are highlighted. 3. If your keyword pertains to more than one topic, you are prompted to select the topic you want. Click the topic to select it, and click Display.


2-73

WaterCAD Menus Online Help Search Use the Search tab to search for all instances of a word or words in the help system. •

If you enter more than one word, the online help will return only those topics that contain all of the words you enter, though those topics might not have the words all together or in the order you specify.

•

If you enter more than one word inside quotation marks, the online help search returns only topics with the complete phrase as typed.

To search for words: 1. Type the words (called keywords) you want to find. 2. Click List Topics. 3. Click the topic you want, to highlight it. 4. Click Display. The topic you selected displays in the help window; keywords are highlighted.

Keywords are highlighted in the text

Click a topic and click Display to display the selected topic

2-74

Type the keywords you want to find and click List Topics


WaterCAD Main Window Online Help Favorites You can use the Favorites tab to create a list of topics you frequently use. •

Click the Add button in the Favorites tab to add the current topic to your list of favorites.

•

Click Display to display the contents of the selected favorite topic in the help window.

•

Click Remove to remove the selected favorite topic from the Favorites tab.

Click Add to add the current topic to the Favorites tab

If you want to print the online help, consider opening the online book, which is set up for printing.


2-75

WaterCAD Menus Online Help Topics Online help topics can be navigated by using hypertext and Related Topics. Hypertext:

Hypertext is blue, underlined text that is clickable. Clicking hypertext displays the destination topic for that hypertext link. Click Back to return to where you were before you clicked the hypertext.

Related Topics:

Related Topics is a button that displays at the end of some help topics. If there is more than one related topic, click the button to see a list of the related topics. This list is hypertext. You can click an item in the list to display the related topic. If there is only one related topic, click the button to display that related topic. Click Back to return to where you were before you clicked the hypertext.

Click Back to return to the previous help topic

2-76

Click the Related Topic button to see and select topics related to the current one


WaterCAD Main Window Navigation Arrows In addition to the standard HTML Help navigation tools, WaterCAD online help includes forward and backward arrows at the bottom-left of every topic that let you navigate sequentially through the online help file. While the online book, .PDF, is better suited to this kind of navigation, these buttons may be particularly helpful if you are reviewing the WaterCAD lessons online (for more information, see “Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-87).

Navigation buttons at the bottom-left of every topic

2.3

Using the Online Book (PDF) Note:

On-screen display of graphics in .PDF files is dependent on the zoom level you use. For more optimal viewing of graphics in Adobe Acrobat Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.

WaterCAD includes an Adobe Acrobat online book that you can open from the WaterCAD group in your Start menu. The online book contains reference material about using the software that is not included in the printed book that accompanies the software. The online book is designed so that you can view it on-screen or print page ranges. Use the bookmarks, index, and search in the Adobe Acrobat Reader to find the topic you want.


2-77

WaterCAD Toolbars

2.4

WaterCAD Toolbars Toolbars include:

2.4.1

•

“Toolbar Button Summaries” on page 2-78

•

“Tool Pane Summary” on page 2-78

•

“The Tool Palette” on page 2-81

•

“Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-81

•

“Animation Options” on page 2-82

•

“Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82

Toolbar Button Summaries Note:

In AutoCAD mode, some tools are provided by AutoCAD itself (such as file open and save, zoom, etc.). These AutoCAD tools are not included on the WaterCAD toolbars.

The toolbar buttons are grouped based on functionality. For example, element creation tools are all together in the tool palette, results tools are all together, etc.

2.4.2

Tool Pane Summary The tool pane contains buttons for project management, data management, and results presentation. The tool pane includes:

2-78

•

“File Tools (Stand-Alone Only)” on page 2-79

•

“Zoom Tools (Stand-Alone Only)” on page 2-79

•

“Calculation and Data Management Tools” on page 2-79

•

“Reporting Tools” on page 2-80

•

“Updates and Help Tools” on page 2-80



File Tools (Stand-Alone Only)

New—Creates a new project.

Open—Opens an existing project.

Save—Saves the current project. Print Preview—Lets you see how the current view will print to the currently-selected printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

Zoom Tools (Stand-Alone Only)

Zoom Extents—Zooms to the full extents of the drawing.

Zoom In—Lets you magnify an area of the drawing. Zoom Out—Lets you reduce the magnification of an area of the drawing, possibly letting you see more of a large drawing. Zoom Window—Zooms to an area selected by you.

Zoom Previous—Zooms to the previous view.

Calculation and Data Management Tools GO—Opens the Calculation dialog box for the current scenario. For more information, see “Calculate Network” on page 9-383. Tabular Reports—Opens the Table Manager dialog box. For more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-330.


2-79

WaterCAD Toolbars

Reporting Tools Color Coding—Color codes the network. For more information, see “How Do I Color Code Elements?” on page A-700. Annotation—Annotates elements with input or output data. For more information, see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509. GeoGrapher—Opens the GeoGrapher advanced graph manager. Profile—Opens the Profile wizard to develop a network profile. For more information, see “Profile” on page 13-552. Contours—Opens the Contours window to generate contours of various attributes. For more information, see “Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547. QuickEdit—Opens the QuickEdit window for easy data viewing. For more information, see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273.

Updates and Help Tools Globe—If you are connected to the Internet, this will take you to Haestad Methods’ web site for product updates and other services. For more information, see “Globe Button” on page 1-37. Help—Accesses the on-line help system. For more information, see “Help Menu” on page 2-70.

2-80



2.4.3

The Tool Palette The tool palette contains a Select tool, Network Element tools, and Annotation tools. Note:

Click a tool to select it as the active tool. In Stand-Alone mode, when a tool is selected it will be highlighted, and the cursor appearance will change to reflect the active tool. In Stand-Alone mode, right-click the tool palette to access the Prototype Manager for setting the default data for each type of network element (for more information, see “Prototypes” on page 6-322).

2.4.4

•

The Select tool lets you select elements for group editing, detailed reporting, deleting, or moving elements.

•

The Network Element tools let you add elements to your network. These tools can also be used to split pipes and morph nodes.

•

The Graphic Annotation tools (see “Graphic Annotation” on page 13-557) can be used to add polylines, borders, and text to your drawing. You can also add a link or node color-coding legend using the Legend tool.

Analysis Toolbar The Analysis toolbar displays the active scenario and provides a means for changing the current scenario and accessing the Scenario Control Center. All input and output information displayed in the tables, profiles, element dialog boxes, and annotation will be related to the active scenario shown on the Analysis toolbar.

You can change the current scenario from the drop-down list box. To the left of the Scenario drop-down list box are the Extended Period Simulation Analysis controls. These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the drawing view and the Increment list box, which controls how many time steps are skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps are displayed during animation. The following buttons are located to the right of the Scenario drop-down list:


2-81

WaterCAD Toolbars

Scenario Control Center—Opens the Scenario Control Center.

Active Topology Editor—Opens the Active Topology Editor.

Capital Cost Manager—Opens the Capital Cost Manager.

Energy Cost Manager—Opens the Energy Cost Manager.

Darwin Calibrator—Opens the Darwin Calibrator.

Skelebrator—Opens the Skelebrator Manager.

2.4.5

Animation Options By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the Animation Options. Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions:

2.4.6

•

Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that lets you set the delay between animated frames.

•

Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, then every window capable of being animated will animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not selected, then only the current window will animate.

Other Toolbar Buttons Some of the following toolbar buttons appear on secondary windows, such as the Print Preview window and the Profile window, available throughout the program:

2-82

•

File

•

Print

•

Print Preview

•

Copy to Clipboard

•

Undo

•

Redo



2.5

•

Options

•

Page Up/Down

•

Close

•

Help

Print Preview:

Opens a Print Preview on the contents of the current window.

Page Up/Down:

Navigates between pages of a multi-page report.

File:

Exports the data in the current window to a file format that can be used by other applications (such as .DXF and ASCII text files).

Copy to Clipboard:

Copies data to the clipboard, where it can be pasted into most Windows-based spreadsheet, database, and word processor applications.

Print:

Prints the contents of the current window.

Options:

Options vary depending on the context. They may include things such as printer setup, or graph options for the current window.

Close:

Closes the current window.

Status Bar Information displayed in the status bar includes (Stand-Alone only): •

“General Status Information” on page 2-84

•

“File Status” on page 2-84

•

“Unit System Status” on page 2-84

•

“Cursor Location” on page 2-84

•

“Calculation Results Status” on page 2-84

The AutoCAD status pane contains similar information, but deals with your AutoCAD drawing status rather than your hydraulic project. For more information about AutoCAD’s status pane, see your AutoCAD documentation.


2-83

Status Bar

2.5.1

General Status Information General status information includes messages that relate to the user’s current activities. These messages consist of information such as menu command descriptions, and indications regarding the progress of an executing command.

2.5.2

File Status If changes have been made since the last time the project file was saved, an image of a diskette appears in the status pane. If the file is currently in a saved state, no such image will appear.

2.5.3

Unit System Status The unit system box on the task bar indicates which unit system is currently active: System International (metric) or U.S. Customary (English). It does not indicate changes to units of individual fields.

2.5.4

Cursor Location The status bar displays the current X and Y (or Northing and Easting) coordinates for the cursor’s position within the drawing pane (see “Drawing Pane” on page 2-50).

2.5.5

Calculation Results Status In Stand-Alone mode, if the current calculation results are out-of-date or otherwise invalid, an indicator will appear in the status bar that signifies that the results no longer match the state of your input data. If the results are currently valid, no such indicator will appear.

2-84



2.5.6

Refresh and Auto-Refresh A refresh occurs when the contents of the drawing pane are updated to reflect changes in the model calculations. Examples include color coding, annotation, and changing time steps of an extended period simulation. In previous versions of WaterCAD, a refresh was performed automatically when one of these changes occurred. In WaterCAD, you have the option of enabling or disabling Auto-Refresh. When Auto-Refresh is enabled (the default setting), WaterCAD will automatically update the drawing pane when changes occur. When Auto-Refresh is disabled, you must manually click the Refresh button, select View > Refresh, or press F5 to update the drawing view to reflect any changes that have occurred. The benefit of turning off Auto-Refresh is the performance enhancement gained as a result of WaterCAD only accessing the project data store when you manually instruct it to. This performance increase will be negligible except for large models.


2-85

Status Bar

2-86


Chapter

3

Quick Start Lessons

Note:

You can either perform these lessons in sequence, since each lesson uses the results of the previous ones, or do the lessons in any order using the catch-up files located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.

The quick-start lessons give you hands-on experience with many of the features and capabilities of WaterCAD. These detailed lessons will help you get started with the exploration and use of the WaterCAD software. Before proceeding with the lessons, you should run through the brief online tutorials, accessed from the Help menu. These interactive tutorials will take you quickly through overviews of key program features. Another way to become acquainted with WaterCAD is to run and experiment with the included sample files, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Sample directory. Remember, you can right-click or press the F1 key to access the context-sensitive online help at any time.

3.1

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis Note:

If, at any time during this lesson, you are prompted to reset all calculated results to N/A, click NO.

WaterCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a water distribution network. It is easy to prepare a schematic or scaled model and let WaterCAD take care of the linknode connectivity. In constructing a distribution network for this lesson, you do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because WaterCAD will assign labels automatically. When creating a schematic drawing, pipe lengths are entered manually. In a scaled drawing, pipe lengths are automatically calculated from the position of the pipes’ bends and start and stop nodes on the drawing pane.


3-87

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis Note:

In this network, the modeling of a reservoir connected to a pump simulates a connection to the main water distribution system. Simplifying the network in this way can approximate the pressures supplied to the system at the connection under a range of demands. This type of approximation is not always applicable, and care should be taken when modeling a network in this way. It is more accurate to trace the network back to the source.

In this lesson, you will create and analyze the network shown below. You will use a scaled background drawing for most of the network; however, four of the pipes are not to scale and will have user-defined lengths.

3.1.1

Part 1—Creating a New Project File This lesson has instructions for use with the Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface. In the Stand-Alone interface: 1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box appears, select the Close button. 2. If you are prompted to set up the project before you continue, click No. 3. Select Tools > Options and click the Global tab. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System drop-down list, and select System International.

3-88


Quick Start Lessons 4. Click OK. 5. Click File > Save as. In the Save File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder. Type the file name MYLESSON1.WCD for your project, and click Save. In the AutoCAD interface: 1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Open the Global Options tab, accessed from the Tools > Options menu. 2. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK. 3. Select File > Open. When prompted, do not save changes to the current drawing. If the Select File dialog box opens, move to step 3. Otherwise, do the following: Press the Esc key. At the command prompt, type filedia, press the Enter key to activate the command, and then enter a new value of 1. Select File > Open again, and do not save changes to the current drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialog boxes or at the command prompt. 4. Select the existing AutoCAD file LESSON1.DWG from the Wtrc\Lesson folder. 5. With the drawing open, select File > Save As. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder, enter the filename as MYLESSON1.DWG and click Save to save the file in your \Wtrc\Lesson directory. In both the AutoCAD and Stand-Alone interfaces: 6. Now, select the Layout Elements tool in the WaterCAD toolbar. Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir from the shortcut menu. Click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see diagram above). You will be prompted to set up the project. Click Yes to open the Project Setup Wizard. 7. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 1—Steady State Analysis and click the Next button. 8. Choose your desired settings. For this lesson, use the program default values. Click the Next button. 9. Select the Scaled button located under the Drawing Scale option. Set the horizontal scale to 1 mm = 4000 mm, and the vertical scale to 1 mm = 400 mm. 10. Click the Next button to continue. 11. The element prototype buttons allow you to set default values for each element type. We will use the default prototype values in this lesson, so click the Finished button.


3-89

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis

3.1.2

Part 2—Laying Out the Network 1. To draw the skeletonized water distribution network shown previously, select the Pipe layout tool from the toolbar. 2. Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir from the shortcut menu.

Right-click to access the shortcut menu

3. To place the reservoir, click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see the preceding Water Distribution Network diagram). 4. Next, move the cursor to the location of pump P-1. Right-click and select Pump from the shortcut menu. Click to place it. 5. Place junction J-1 by right-clicking, selecting Junction from the shortcut menu, and clicking the appropriate location. 6. Proceed with laying out the network by placing junctions J-2, J-3, and J-4. 7. Close the loop by clicking junction J-1. 8. Right-click and select Done from the shortcut menu.

3-90


Quick Start Lessons

Tip:

To construct a pipe with bends in the Stand-Alone version, hold down the Ctrl key and click the location of the bend. Then, release the Ctrl key to enter the next element. You can insert bends after a pipe is constructed by right-clicking the pipe in Stand-Alone and selecting Bend > Add Bend. Then, drag the new vertex to the appropriate location.

9. Create J-5. a. Select the Pipe layout tool again. b. Click junction J-3. c. Move the cursor to the location of J-5, and click to insert the element. d. Right-click and select Done.


3-91


J-5

10. Insert the PRV (Valve > PRV on the shortcut menu), and junction J-6 by selecting the Pipe layout tool and placing the elements in their appropriate locations. Be sure to lay out the pipes in numerical order (P-7 through P-9), so that their labels correspond to the labels in the diagram. Right-click and select Done from the shortcut menu to terminate the Pipe Layout command. 11. Insert the tank, T-1, using the Pipe layout tool. Pipe P-10 should connect the tank to the network if you laid out the elements in the correct order.

3-92


Quick Start Lessons

Pipe labels should be as you see here

12. Save the WaterCAD network by clicking the Save button or by choosing File > Save.

3.1.3

Part 3—Entering Data There are four ways to enter and modify element data in WaterCAD: •

Dialog Boxes—You can use the Select tool and double-click an element to bring up its editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select tool to open the element’s editor.

•

FlexTables—You can click the Tabular Reports button to bring up dynamic tables that allow you to edit and display the model data in a tabular format. You can edit the data as you would in a spreadsheet.


3-93


3.1.4

•

Database Connections—The database connection feature allows you to import and export element data directly from external sources such as Excel spreadsheets, GIS, Jet Databases like Microsoft Access, or any other ODBC database.

•

Alternative Editors—Alternatives are used to enter data for different “What If?” situations used in Scenario Management. For more information, see “Lesson 3: Scenario Management” on page 3-116.

Part 4—Entering Data through Dialog Boxes To access an element’s dialog box in Stand-Alone mode, double-click the element. In AutoCAD, first click the Select tool on the toolbar, then click the element whose attributes you wish to modify. 1. Open the Reservoir Editor for reservoir R-1, and select the General tab. 2. Enter the hydraulic grade line elevation from “Table 3-1: Reservoir Data”on page 3-94. Table 3-1: Reservoir Data Ge ne ra l Ta b

3-94

Re se rvoir

Ele va tion (m )

Zone

R-1

198

Connection Zone


Quick Start Lessons 3. Set Zone to Connection Zone. a. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Zone field. This action opens the Zone Manager.

Click to set the Connection Zone

b. Click Add. c. Type a label for the new pressure zone, Connection Zone. d. Click OK, and OK again to exit the Zone Manager. e. Finally, select the zone you just created from the Zone list box. f.

Click OK to close the Reservoir Editor.


3-95


4. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1. Enter the data from “Table 3-2: Tank Data”on page 3-96 in the General and Section tabs. To set a diameter of 8 m, you must set the Cross Section to Circular. 5. Leave the other parameters set to their default values. Click OK to exit the dialog box. Table 3-2: Tank Data Ge ne ra l Ta b

3-96

Ta nk

Zone

Se ction

T-1

Zone-1

Constant Area

Ma x . Ele v. (m ) 226

Se ction Ta b Initia l Min. Ele v. Ele v. (m ) (m ) 225 220

Ba se Ele v. (m ) 200

Dia m e te r (m ) 8


Quick Start Lessons

6. Open the Pump Editor for pump PMP-1. a. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new pump definition.

Click to define the pump


3-97

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis b. Click Add, set the Pump Definition Name to PMP-1. Click OK. The Pump Definition dialog box opens.

c. Select Standard (3 Point) from the Pump Type list box.

Right-click and select Design Properties to change the units

d. Change the discharge units to l/min. Do this by right-clicking in the Design Discharge text box, selecting Design Properties, and selecting l/min. from the Units drop-down list in the Set Field Options dialog box. Click OK.

3-98


Quick Start Lessons e. After you change the discharge units to l/min., enter the discharge curve as given in “Table 3-3: Pump Data”on page 3-99. Click OK after you finish. Table 3-3: Pump Data

Shutoff: De sign: Ma x . Ope ra ting

f.

He a d (m ) 30.0 27.4 24.8

Discha rge (l/m in) 0 3800 7500

Ge ne ra l Ta b Pum p PMP-1

Ele va tion (m ) 193

Pum p Type 3 Point

Upon returning to the Pump editor dialog box, select the newly created PMP1 in the Pump Definition drop-down list.


3-99


g. Click OK to exit the dialog box. 7. Open the Valve Editor for valve PRV-1. Use the information given in “Table 3-4: PRV Data”on page 3-100. Leave the other parameters set to their default values. Click OK to exit the dialog box. Table 3-4: PRV Data

Va lve PRV-1

3-100

Ele va tion (m ) 165

Ge ne ra l Ta b Dia m e te r Pre ssure Sta tus Se ttings (m m ) (kPa ) 150 Active Pressure 390


Quick Start Lessons

Note:

You will have to use the Ellipsis (…) button to create Zone-2.

8. Enter the data for the junctions as outlined in “Table 3-5: Junction Node Data”on page 3-102. Leave all other fields set to their default values.


3-101

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis Table 3-5: Junction Node Data

Junction J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6

Ge ne ra l Ground Ele va tion (m ) 184 185 184 183 185.5 165

Ta b

De ma nd Ta b

Zone

De m a nd (l/m in)

Zone-1 Zone-1 Zone-1 Zone-1 Zone-1 Zone-2

38 31 34 38 350 356

9. Finally, you need to specify user-defined lengths for pipes P-1, P-7, P-8, P-9 and P-10, since the reservoir, tank, PRV, and nodes J-5 and J-6 are only shown in approximate locations. a. Double-click pipe P-1 to open the Pipe Editor. b. Click the box labeled User Defined Length to activate this feature. Then, enter a value of 0.01 m in the Length field. c. Because you are using the reservoir and pump to simulate the connection to the main distribution system, you want headloss through this pipe to be negligible. Therefore, the length is very small and the diameter will be large. d. Set the diameter of P1 to 1000 mm. e. Repeat this procedure for pipes P-7 through P-10 using the user-defined lengths and diameters in “Table 3-6: Pipe Data”on page 3-102. Table 3-6: Pipe Data

3-102

Pipe

Material

Diameter (mm)

User-Defined Length (m)

P-1 P-2 P-3 P-4 P-5 P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 P-10

Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron PVC Ductile Iron Ductile Iron PVC Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron

1000 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150

0.01 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 400 500 31 100


Quick Start Lessons

3.1.5

Part 5—Entering Data through FlexTables It is often more convenient to enter data for similar elements in tabular form, rather than to individually open a dialog box for an element, enter the data into the dialog box, and then select the next element. Using tabular reports, you can enter the data as you would enter data into a spreadsheet. 1. To access the tabular report, click the Tabular Reports button on the toolbar. 2. Select the Pipe Report and click OK. Note that the white fields are editable, but the yellow fields are not. The pipes may not be in alphanumeric order in the table. To sort the table by pipe label, right-click the Label column heading. Select Sort > Ascending from the shortcut menu that appears.


3-103

Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis 3. For each of the ten pipes, enter the diameter and the pipe material as outlined in “Table 3-6: Pipe Data”on page 3-102. Notice that the C values for the pipes will be automatically assigned to preset values based on the material; however, these values could be modified if a different coefficient were required. 4. Leave other data set to their default values. Click the Close button to exit the table when you are finished.

3-104


Quick Start Lessons

3.1.6

Part 6—Performing a Steady-State Analysis 1. Click the GO button to open the Scenario: Base dialog box. On the Calculation tab, make sure that the Calculation Type is set to Steady-State.

2. Click the GO button on the dialog box to analyze the model. When calculations are completed, a Results report is displayed. 3. The Results tab displays a summary of model results.


3-105


–

Review the summary to get an idea of the results that are given. Expand the tree view.

–

There should be a green light displayed on the Results tab of the dialog box. You can quickly tell if there were warnings or failures with a glance at the light. A green light indicates no warnings or failures, a yellow light indicates warnings, while a red light indicates problems.

Note:

Before proceeding to the next lesson, save this project (for example, as MYLESSON1.WCD in Stand-Alone mode or MYLESSON1.DWG in AutoCAD mode).

4. Click Close when you are done. After a model run, all the calculated fields in dialog boxes and tabular reports will display results. For an overview of the output options available, see “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127.

3-106


Quick Start Lessons

3.2

Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation This lesson will illustrate how WaterCAD can model the behavior of a water distribution system through time using an extended period simulation (EPS). An EPS can be conducted for any duration you specify. System conditions are computed over the given duration at a specified time increment. Some of the types of system behaviors that can be analyzed using an EPS include how tank levels fluctuate, when pumps are running, whether valves are open or closed, and how demands change throughout the day. Note:


This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1 (see “Lesson 1: Building a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis” on page 3-87). If you have not completed Lesson 1, then open the project LESSON2.WCD (LESSON2.DWG in the AutoCAD version) from the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did complete Lesson 1, then you can use the MYLESSON1 file you created. 1. Open MYLESSON1.WCD. 2. After you have opened the file, select File > Save As. 3. Type the filename MYLESSON2 and click Save. 4. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 2— Extended Period Simulation. Click OK.

3.2.1

Part 1—Creating Demand Patterns Water demand in a distribution system fluctuates over time. For example, residential water use on a typical weekday is higher than average in the morning before people go to work, and is usually highest in the evening when residents are preparing dinner, washing clothes, etc. This variation in demand over time can be modeled using demand patterns. Demand patterns are multipliers that vary with time and are applied to a given base demand, most typically the average daily demand. In this lesson, you will be dividing the single fixed demands for each junction node in Lesson 1 into two individual demands with different demand patterns. One demand pattern will be created for residential use, and another for commercial use. You will enter demand patterns at the junction nodes through the junction editors. 1. Open the editor for Junction J-1 (double-click junction J-1) and select the Demand tab. 2. By default, the demand pattern is set to Fixed. In the Demands table, leave the first row set to Demand, and set the baseline load to 23 l/min.


3-107

Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation 3. Click the corresponding cell in the Pattern column, and select the Ellipsis (…) button that appears. This action opens the Pattern Manager. 4. Click the Add button to create a new pattern for this model. 5. In the Pattern dialog box: a. Enter the name Residential in the Label field. b. Leave the Start Time to 12:00:00 AM. c. Set the Starting Multiplier to 0.5. d. Under Format, select the button labeled Stepwise. The resulting demand pattern will have multipliers that remain constant until the next pattern time increment is reached. Note:

Note that the multiplier for the last time given (24 hrs.) must be the same as the Starting Multiplier (0.5). These values are equal because the demand curve represents a complete cycle, with the last point the same as the first.

e. In the Pattern table, enter the times and multipliers from “Table 3-7: Residential Pattern Data”on page 3-108. Table 3-7: Residential Pattern Data Time from Start (hr) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24

3-108

Multiplier 0.4 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.6 0.8 0.5


Quick Start Lessons

Pattern table

f.

Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager.

6. In the Pattern Manager, create a pattern for commercial demands. a. Click Add, and create a pattern labeled Commercial, having a Start Time of 12:00:00 AM and a Starting Multiplier of 0.4. b. Enter the times and multipliers from “Table 3-8: Commercial Pattern Data”on page 3-109 into the Pattern table. c. This pattern will also be Stepwise. Table 3-8: Commercial Pattern Data Tim e from Sta rt (hr) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24


Multiplie r 0.6 0.8 1.6 1.6 1.2 0.8 0.6 0.4

3-109

Lesson 2: Extended Period Simulation

Pattern table

d. Click OK after you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager. 7. Click OK to close the Pattern Manager dialog box and return to the Junction Editor for J-1.

3-110


Quick Start Lessons 8. In the Pattern list box for the first row, select Residential from the choice list. 9. In the second row, enter a demand of 15 l/min. Select Commercial as the pattern for this row. 10. Click OK to exit the junction J-1 editor. 11. Go into the Demands table in the editors for junctions J-2, J-3, J-4, J-5 and J-6 and enter the demand data from “Table 3-9: Demand Patterns”on page 3-111. Use the Residential and Commercial demand patterns already created, so just select the appropriate pattern from the list box. Table 3-9: Demand Patterns Demand Tab Junction J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6

Residential Commercial Demand Demand (l/min) (l/min) 23 8 23 11 23 15 350 N/A 280 76

12. Now, you will set up an additional demand pattern to simulate a three-hour fire at node J-6. a. In the Demand tab of Junction Editor for J-6, insert an additional Demand of 2000 l/min. in row three of the Demands table. b. Click the Pattern column for row three and select the Ellipsis (…) button to open the Pattern Manager. c. Select the Add button to add a new demand pattern. d. In the Pattern dialog box, enter a Label of 3-Hour Fire, a Start Time of 12:00:00 AM, and a Starting Multiplier of 0.00. Select the button for Stepwise format.


3-111


e. Enter the information in “Table 3-10: 3-Hour Fire Pattern Data”on page 3-112 into the pattern table. Table 3-10: 3-Hour Fire Pattern Data

f.

3-112

Tim e from Sta rt (hr)

Multiplie r

18 21 24

1.00 0.00 0.00

After you have filled in the table, select the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box. Choose Graph to display a graph of the demand pattern. Notice that the value of the multiplier is zero, except for the period between 18 and 21 hours, when it is 1.0. Since the input the demand as 2000 l/min., the result will be a 2000 l/min. fire flow at junction J-6 between hours 18 and 21.


Quick Start Lessons

g. Click Close to exit the graph, OK to exit the Pattern dialog box and OK again to exit the Pattern Manager.

13. Finally, select your new pattern, 3-Hour Fire, from the Pattern selection box in row three of the demands table, and click OK to exit the Junction Editor.


3-113


3.2.2

Part 2—Running an Extended Period Simulation To run the Extended Period Simulation: 1. Click the GO button on the toolbar.

2. Select the button for Extended Period. –

Accept the default of a Start Time of 12:00:00.

–

Accept the default Duration of 24 hours.

–

Accept the default Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour.

3. Then, click the GO button to run the analysis. 4. After the model runs, the green light on the Results tab indicates that there are not any warnings for the analysis and WaterCAD was able to compute a balanced solution for the distribution network. Click the Close button.

3-114


Quick Start Lessons

Green light indicates no errors and no warnings

5. You can view results by opening individual element dialog boxes, clicking the Report button to generate detailed reports and graphs for the individual elements, as well as through output tables, color-coding, profiling, contouring, and annotation. a. For example, open the Valve Editor for the PRV by double-clicking the PRV element. b. Click the Report button. c. Select Detailed Report. Scroll and page through the report to view the Calculated Results Summary. Notice that the PRV is throttling, except for hours 18 to 20, when the fire occurs and the downstream pressure setting can no longer be maintained. For more information on reporting results, see “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127. 6. Click Close and OK to close open dialog boxes. 7. Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 3.


3-115

Lesson 3: Scenario Management

3.3

Lesson 3: Scenario Management One of the many powerful and versatile project tools in WaterCAD is Scenario Management (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). Scenarios let you calculate multiple “What If?” situations in a single project file. You may wish to try several designs and compare the results, or analyze an existing system using several different demand alternatives and compare the resulting system pressures. A scenario is a set of alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345), while alternatives are groups of actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent/child relationship where a child scenario or alternative inherits data from the parent scenario or alternative. In Lessons 1 and 2, you constructed the water distribution network, defined the characteristics of the various elements, entered demands and demand patterns, and performed steady-state and extended period simulations. In this lesson, you will set up the scenarios needed to test four “What If?” situations for our water distribution system. These “What If?” situations will involve changing demands and pipe sizes. At the end of the lesson, you will compare all of the results using the Scenario Comparison tool (for more information, see “Scenario Comparison” on page 13-555). Note:


1. This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 2. If you completed Lesson 2, open the project you created previously, MYLESSON2 in the Wtrc\Lesson directory. 2. Otherwise, open the file called LESSON3.WCD (LESSON3.DWG in the AutoCAD version). 3. After you have opened the file, select File > Save As. 4. Type the filename MYLESSON3 and click Save. 5. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 3— Scenario Management. 6. Click OK.

3.3.1

Part 1—Creating a New Alternative First, you need to set up the required data sets, or alternatives. An alternative is a group of data that describes a specific part of the model. There are thirteen alternative types:

3-116

•

Active Topology

•

Physical


Quick Start Lessons •

Demand

•

Initial Settings

•

Operational

•

Age

•

Constituent

•

Trace

•

Fire Flow

•

Capital Cost

•

Energy Cost

•

User Data

In this example, you need to set up a different physical or demand alternative for each design trial you want to evaluate. Each alternative will contain different pipe size or demand data. In WaterCAD, you create families of alternatives from base alternatives. Base alternatives are alternatives that do not inherit data from any other alternative. Child alternatives can be created from the base alternative. A Child alternative inherits the characteristics of its parent, but specific data can be overridden to be local to the child. A child alternative can, in turn, be the parent of another alternative. 1. Select Analysis > Alternatives. Highlight the Demand alternative in the left pane of the dialog box. Currently, there is only one Demand Alternative listed. The Base-Demand alternative contains the demands for the current distribution system. 2. You can change the default demand name to be something more descriptive of our data. a. Click the Rename button. b. Type the new name, Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire Flow.


3-117


3. You would like to add a child of the base-demands alternative, because the new alternative will inherit most data. Then, you can locally change the data that you want to modify. You will modify the existing demand data by increasing the fire flow component at node J-6 from 2000 l/min. to 4000 l/min. a. Click the Add Child button. b. Type the name 4000 l/min. Fire Flow for the new Alternative. c. Click OK. 4. The Demand Alternatives editor for the new alternative opens, showing you the data that was inherited from the parent alternative. Notice the key at the bottom describing the check boxes. As the key indicates, all of your data is inherited. If you change any piece of data, the check box will become selected because that record is now local to this alternative and not inherited from the parent.

3-118


Quick Start Lessons

5. Click in the Demand Summary column for node J-6. A button appears. Click this button to open the Demand table for this node. Change the 2000 l/min. fire demand to 4000 l/min.

6. Click OK. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor and return to the Alternatives Manager, and Close again to exit back to the drawing pane.


3-119


3.3.2

Part 2—Editing and Creating Scenarios Alternatives are the building blocks of a scenario. A scenario is a set of one of each of the thirteen types of alternatives, plus all of the calculation information needed to solve a model. Just as there are base, parent, and child alternatives, there are also base, parent, and child scenarios. The difference is that instead of inheriting model data, scenarios inherit sets of alternatives. To change the new scenario, change one or more of the new scenario’s alternatives. For this lesson, you will create a new scenario for each different set of conditions you need to evaluate. 1. Select Analysis > Scenarios. The Scenario Control Center opens. There is always a default Base Scenario that is composed of the base alternatives listed in the right pane. The left pane of the Scenario Control Center contains a list of the scenarios. Only the Base is available initially, because you have not created any new scenarios.

2. You should first rename the Base Scenario as something more descriptive. a. Click the Scenario Management button and select Rename. b. The scenario name in the left pane will become editable. Type in a descriptive name for the Scenario, such as 2000 l/min., 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS). c. Then, press the Enter key.

3-120


Quick Start Lessons 3. Create a child scenario from the existing base scenario to incorporate the new demand alternative. a. Click the Scenario Management menu button. b. Select Add > Child Scenario. c. Type a scenario name of 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) and click OK. A dialog box for the new Scenario opens, listing the alternatives as inherited from the base scenario. 4. Your new Child Scenario initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent scenario, except the Demand Alternative should be the new alternative you created, 4000 l/min. Fire Flow. a. Select the Demand check box. b. From the drop-down list, select the 4000 l/min. Fire Flow alternative. The new alternative is no longer inherited from the parent, but is local to this scenario. Click Close to exit the Scenario.


3-121


3.3.3

Part 3—Calculate and Compare You are going to calculate both of the scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run tool. 1. Click the Batch Run button on the left side of the Scenario Management dialog box. 2. Select both check boxes next to the scenario names in the Batch Run dialog box. 3. Click the Batch button. 4. Click Yes at the prompt to run the batch for two scenarios. 5. After computing finishes, click OK. 6. You can see the results for each scenario by highlighting it in the Scenario list. Click the Results tab at the top right in the dialog box to see the selected scenario’s results. 7. Use the Scenario Comparison tool to compare the results and see how the scenarios differ. a. Click the Scenario Comparison button to start the Annotation Comparison Wizard. b. Select the 2000 l/min., 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) Scenario in the first drop-down list box and the 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the second box. The difference between the two scenarios is found by subtracting scenario 1 from scenario 2. c. Click Next. d. To compare the results for pressures at the junctions and velocities in the pipes, select the Pressure Junction and Pressure Pipe check boxes. Click Next.

3-122


Quick Start Lessons

e. Select Pressure from the drop-down list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Junction Annotation. f.

Edit the entry in the Mask column by deleting the label name, so that only the pressure and unit variables (%v %u) remain. Click Next.

g. Select Velocity from the drop-down list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Pipe Annotation.


3-123

Lesson 3: Scenario Management h. Edit the label in the Mask column by deleting the label name, so that only the pressure and unit variables (%v %u) remain. Click Next. i.

Check to make sure your annotation is correct, and then click Finished.

8. A plan view opens, showing the system with annotation displaying the difference between the two scenarios. To better view the data, maximize the window and use the zoom buttons from the upper toolbar to look at different areas of the model. The difference between the two is found by subtracting scenario 1 from scenario 2. For example, if scenario 1 has a pressure of 50 kPa at a junction and scenario 2, which represents a future scenario, has a pressure of 45 kPa at the same junction, then comparing these pressures for scenario 1 and scenario 2 would result in annotation stating a difference of -5 kPa. When you have more than two scenarios, you can select different combinations of the scenarios from the two list boxes and click the Update button to view the differences between the two. You could also select the Auto Update check box, and the differences will automatically update every time you change the combination of scenarios and time increments in the list boxes. 9. Select the Auto Update check box and use the VCR-style buttons to scroll through different increments. Look at the difference in pressures at junction J-6 during the fire flow (between 18 and 21 hours). There is a very large pressure drop due to the substantial increase in demand. In the next part of this lesson, you will look at scenarios to reduce this decrease in pressure.

3.3.4

Part 4—Physical Alternative You need to further examine what is going on in the system as a result of the fire flow, and find solutions to any problems that might have arisen in the network as a result. You can review output tables to quickly see what the pressures and velocities are within the system, and create new alternatives and scenarios to capture your modifications. 1. Click the Close button to exit the Scenario Comparison Window. Click Close again to exit the Scenario Control Center and return to the drawing pane. 2. Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar. 3. Highlight Junction Report in the list, and click OK. 4. Select 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the Scenario list box, and set the Time to 18.00 hr. Most of the system pressures look acceptable at this time increment; however, the pressure at J-6 is actually negative. 5. Click the Options button and select Table Manager.

3-124


Quick Start Lessons 6. Highlight Pipe Report, and click OK. In the Pipe Report table, notice that the headloss gradient for pipes P-8 and P-9 are significantly higher than in the rest of the system. You can reduce the headloss gradient by increasing the sizes of these pipes. The pressure at J-6 should increase as a consequence. 7. Click Close to exit the table. 8. Create a new scenario having a new physical alternative with the pipe sizes for P8 and P-9 increased to 200 mm. a. Select Analysis > Scenarios. b. Highlight 4000 l/min. Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS) in the list of Scenarios. c. Click the Scenario Management button, and select Add > Child Scenario. d. Name the new Scenario P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm, and click OK. e. Under the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog box, select the Physical check box. f.

Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog box.

g. Click the Add Child button, and name the new Alternative P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm. Click OK. h. Under the Pipe tab for this Alternative, change the pipe sizes in the table for pipes P-8 and P-9 from 150 mm to 200 mm.


3-125


3-126

i.

Click the Close button to exit the editor, and click Close again to exit the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog box.

j.

Select the new Physical Alternative from the list box for the scenario.


Quick Start Lessons k. Click Close to return to the Scenario Control Center. l.

Select Batch Run to run the model. Deselect the check boxes for the first two scenarios, and select the check box for Pipes P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm.

m. Click Batch and select Yes to confirm and run the Scenario. n. Click OK after the run is complete. 9. Close the Scenario Control Center and return to the drawing pane. Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar. 10. Open the Junction Report. In the Scenario list box, select the new Scenario, and examine the pressures at J-6 for 18, 19, and 20 hours. The pressures for this node are now at acceptable levels. If you would like to learn more about the various results presentation methods available in WaterCAD, see “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127. 11. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project before proceeding.

3.4

Lesson 4: Reporting Results An important feature in all water distribution modeling software is the ability to present results clearly. This lesson outlines several of WaterCAD reporting features, including: •

Reports, which display and print information on any or all elements in the system (for more information, see “Predefined Reports” on page 13-515).

•

Tabular Reports (FlexTables), for viewing, editing, and presentation of selected data and elements in a tabular format (for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329).


3-127

Lesson 4: Reporting Results •

Profiles, to graphically show, in a profile view, how a selected attribute, such as hydraulic grade, varies along an interconnected series of pipes (for more information, see “Profile” on page 13-552).

•

Contouring, to show how a selected attribute, such as pressure, varies throughout the distribution system (for more information, see “Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547).

•

Element Annotation, for dynamic presentation of the values of user-selected variables in the plan view (for more information, see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509).

•

Color Coding, which assigns colors based on ranges of values to elements in the plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network (for more information, see “Color Coding” on page 13-513). Note:


For this lesson, you will use the system from Lesson 3 (see “Lesson 3: Scenario Management”), saved as MYLESSON3 in the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did not complete Lesson 3, you may use the file LESSON4.WCD (LESSON4.DWG in AutoCAD). 1. Open MYLESSON3.WCD. 2. Select File > Save As. 3. Type the filename MYLESSON4, and click Save. 4. Select File > Project Summary, and change the Project Title to Lesson 4 Reporting Results.

3.4.1

Part 1—Reports 1. Select the 2000 l/min., 3 hour fire flow at J-6 (EPS) scenario. 2. Click the GO button to open the Scenario dialog box. 3. Click GO to analyze the scenario. When the Results dialog box opens, notice that the Results report can be saved to a file, copied to the clipboard, or printed using the buttons in the top left corner. This report displays key system characteristics on a formatted page. In an EPS analysis such as this one, these characteristics are displayed for each time increment. If there were any warnings or problems, they would also appear here. 4. Click Close. You can access the results for the current scenario (the scenario appearing in the list box in the toolbar) at any time by clicking GO and selecting the Results tab.

3-128


Quick Start Lessons 5. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1 (by double-clicking the tank, T-1). 6. Click the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box and select Detailed Report to view a formatted summary report for the tank. 7. Use the Page Down button to navigate to page two of the report. On page two, you can see the tank’s status (draining or filling) at each time increment.

Every element can generate a report in the same general format, which includes the name of the calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element’s properties and results in detail. You can print this report or copy it to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the dialog box. The report will print or paste into a word processor in the exact format seen on the screen. 8. Click the Close button on the report, and then click OK to exit the Tank Editor. 9. You can also print detailed reports for several elements at one time.


3-129

Lesson 4: Reporting Results In the Stand-Alone version, use the Select tool to draw a window around the elements you want to report, or hold down the shift key while selecting the elements individually. Then, select Report > Element Details to open the Element Details dialog box.

In the AutoCAD version, start by selecting Report > Element Details. The crosshairs change into a pickbox. Using the pickbox, select elements from the drawing space that you want to report (individually or using a window), and then right-click to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog box. 10. When the Detailed Reports dialog box opens, the elements selected from the layout view are already highlighted for output. From this dialog box, you can edit the element selection set (hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple elements from the list), and then print the reports. Click the Select button to go to the Selection Set dialog box. 11. If you want to select multiple elements based on some criteria, you can do that here. Click Cancel to return to the Detailed Reports dialog box.

3-130


Quick Start Lessons

12. If you want, you can click the Print button to print all of the reports for the selected elements. 13. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box. 14. Click Cancel. 15. Another type of report available is the Element Results Report. Select the elements to be included in this report in the same way as the elements for the Detailed Report. 16. Select Report > Elements Results. The result is a single report containing calculated analysis results for each of the elements selected. From the Elements Results Report dialog box, you can print or copy and paste the report for any elements. The Elements Results Report contains all of the results calculated for the selected elements. 17. Select elements to be included in this report and click Preview to view the resulting output. 18. Click Close when you are finished to exit the preview and the Analysis Results Report dialog box. 19. Select Report > Scenario Summary. This report summarizes the alternatives and options selected in the current scenario. 20. Click Close. 21. Select Report > Project Inventory (for more information, see “Project Inventory Report” on page 13-517). This report tells you the total number of each type of element and the total length of pipe in the system.


3-131

Lesson 4: Reporting Results 22. Click Close. 23. Finally, click the Capital Cost button in the toolbar. 24. Assuming Capital Cost Estimating calculations had already been run, clicking the Report button located above the Scenario Costs tree view would generate a Capital Cost Analysis Report. Click Close.

3.4.2

Part 2—Tabular Reports (FlexTables) Tabular Reports are an extremely powerful tool in WaterCAD (for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329). These reports are not only good presentation tools, they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis. When data must be entered for a large number of elements, clicking each element and entering the data can be tedious and time consuming. Using the tabular reports, elements can be changed using the global edit tool, or filtered to display only the desired elements. Values that are entered into the table will be automatically updated in the model. The tables can also be customized to contain only the desired data. Columns can be added or removed, or you can display duplicates of the same column with different units. The tabular reports can save you an enormous amount of time and effort. Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White columns are editable input values, and yellow columns are non-editable calculated values. When data is entered into a table directly, the values in the model will be automatically updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program. Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edit (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337) and Filtering (see “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339). Suppose you decide to evaluate how our network might operate in five years. Assume that the C factor for 5-year old ductile iron pipe reduces from 130 to 120. It would be repetitive to go through and edit the pipe roughness through the individual pipe dialog boxes, particularly when dealing with a large system. Instead, you will use the filter tool in this example to filter out the PVC pipes, and then use global edit tool to change the pipe roughness on the ductile iron pipes only. 1. Begin by setting up a new Alternative and Scenario to capture the changes to the C values. a. Select Analysis > Scenarios. b. Highlight the Scenario P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm. c. Click the Scenario Management button. d. Add a Child for this Scenario called 5-yr.-old D.I.P.; click OK.

3-132


Quick Start Lessons

e. Select the Physical check box and click the New button. f.

Name the new Alternative 5-yr.-old D.I.P. and click OK.

g. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor, and again to exit the Scenario Control Center and return to the drawing pane. 2. To open a tabular report, select Report > Tables, or click the Tabular Report button on the toolbar. 3. Select the Pipe Report from the list and click OK.


3-133

Lesson 4: Reporting Results

4. Click the Scenario list box and select the new Scenario from the list. 5. Right-click the Material column and choose Filter > Quick Filter from the shortcut menu. You want to display only ductile iron pipes in the table. To do so: a. Set the Column field to Material. b. Set the Operator to =. c. Set the Value field to Ductile Iron. d. Click OK. 6. Use the Global Edit tool to modify all of the roughness values in the table. a. Right-click the Hazen-Williams C column and select Global Edit. b. Select Set from the Operation list. c. Enter 120 into the Global Edit box. d. Click OK. All of the values are now set to 120. 7. To deactivate the filter, right-click anywhere in the dialog box and select Filter > Reset from the shortcut menu. Click Yes to reset the filter.

3-134


Quick Start Lessons 8. You may also wish to edit a table by adding or removing columns using the Table Manager (for more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7-330). a. Click the Options button at the top of the table dialog box and select Customize. b. Scroll through the list on the left side to see the types of data available for placement in the table. You can highlight a particular item, then use the [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to add or remove that column from your table. c. For this example, you can display junction elevations in both meters and feet by checking the Allow Duplicate Columns box, highlighting Elevation (shown in gray) in the list of available columns, and clicking the [ > ] button. Elevation now appears twice under Selected Columns. d. You can adjust the order in which the columns will be displayed using the arrows below the right hand list, or drag items up and down. Click OK, and OK again to exit the Table Manager.

e. The revised table appears with two Elevation columns, both in meters. Drag and drop the new column heading to relocate it next to the original Elevation column. f.

To apply separate units to the two columns, click the Options button and select Use Local Units, placing a check next to it to indicate this option is active.

g. Click Close to exit the table when you are finished. 9. Click GO to open the Batch Run dialog box. 10. Click GO to compute the network for 5-yr.-old D.I.P., and then click Close.


3-135

Lesson 4: Reporting Results This option allows the tabular report to have units independent of the project and local to the table. In other words, without this option switched on, changing the units from meters to feet in the table would change the unit for pressure throughout the project. The Use Local Units option is ideal for displaying the same variable with multiple units within the same tabular report. 11. Click Yes in the warning box that appears indicating that you wish to switch to local units. To assign units of feet to one of the columns, right-click the column heading and select Elevation Properties from the shortcut menu. 12. In the Set Field Options dialog box, select ft. from the Units list box. Click OK to return to the updated table. 13. Click Close to exit the table when you are finished. Click GO to open the Batch Run dialog box, and click GO to compute the network for 5-yr.-old D.I.P., and then click Close.

3.4.3

Part 3—Create a Plan and Profile 1. To create a plan view of the distribution system, click Report > Plan View > Full View. This option will create a plan of the entire system regardless of what the screen shows, while the Current View option will create a plan of exactly what is displayed in the window at that moment. The Plan View will be put into a separate window, which can then be printed or copied to the clipboard. If you click the Copy button, you can paste the plan view into a word processor. 2. Click Close. 3. You can also create a plan view in the Stand-Alone version for export to AutoCAD or other compatible software. Click File > Export > DXF File. This action will create a .DXF file of your network that you can then import into AutoCAD. In AutoCAD, use plan views as a quick way to develop simple scaled views of your primary network. Click OK or Cancel to exit the dialog box. 4. To create a profile view, select Tools > Profiling, or click the Profile button in the toolbar. This activates the Profile Setup dialog box. In the Profile Setup dialog box, choose the attribute you wish to profile from the Attribute list box. For this example, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade. 5. Next, click the Select From Drawing button. 6. The dialog box closes, and the crosshairs change to a pick box in AutoCAD. Click pipes P-1, P-2, P-6, P-8, and P-9, selecting a continuous path, or walk-through the network. Right-click when you are finished (and select Done in Stand-Alone).

3-136


Quick Start Lessons 7. The Profile Setup dialog box opens with the selected elements appearing, in order, in the list. Click the Profile button to view the profile.

8. After you create the profile, you can make adjustments to its appearance by clicking the Options button and selecting Graph Options. A dialog box opens in which you can change the titles, fonts, scaling, and line types used in the graph. 9. Leave everything set to the defaults for this example, and click Cancel to exit the dialog box. 10. When you have finished setting up the graph, it can be printed or copied to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the Plot window. 11. Click Close to exit the Plot window when you are finished. Click Close again to exit the Profile Setup dialog box.


3-137

Lesson 4: Reporting Results

3.4.4

Part 4—Contouring The contouring feature in WaterCAD enables you to generate contours for reporting attributes such as elevation, pressure, and hydraulic grade. You can specify the contour interval, as well as color code the contours by index values or ranges of values. In this lesson, you will contour based on hydraulic grade elevations. 1. To create a plan view of the water distribution system with contours, click the Contour button from the toolbar. 2. Within the Contour Manager, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade from the Contour drop-down list box. 3. Create a Selection Set of elements you will use in contouring by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Selection Set list box. 4. Click Add, name the set Contour by HGL, and click OK. 5. Define your selection set so that it consists of all junctions in Zone-1. a. Click Select > By Filter > Pressure Junctions. b. Under Column, select Zone. c. For Operator, select =. d. For Value, select Zone-1. e. Click OK to return to the Selection Set dialog box. 6. Notice that the selected elements are now highlighted under Available Items. Click [ > ] to move the elements to the Selected Items list, and click OK. 7. Click OK again to exit the Selection Set Manager. 8. Select Contour by HGL in the Selection Set drop-down list box. 9. Click Initialize to update the Minimum and Maximum HGL elevations. Enter: –

an Increment of 0.1 m

–

and an Index Increment of 0.2 m

10. Make sure the button for Color by Index is selected, and click OK. 11. A plan view of the water distribution model is opened in a separate window, along with contours that interpolate between the elevations of the selected network components. 12. To improve the appearance of the contouring, press the Options button and choose Smooth Contours.

3-138


Quick Start Lessons

13. Click Close to return to the drawing pane.

3.4.5

Part 5—Element Annotation When you want to label network attributes in the plan view, use the Annotation feature. With it, you can control which values are displayed, how they are labeled, and how units are expressed. For this example, you will annotate demands at the junctions, and flow and velocity in the pipes. 1. Click the Element Annotation option (see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509) located in the Tools menu, or click the Annotation button on the toolbar to open the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510). 2. Select the elements you wish to annotate. In this example, add annotation to the pressure junctions and pipes. Select these elements from the list and click Next. 3. The next dialog box allows you to choose the attributes you wish to annotate for the specified element type. –

The Attributes column is used for selecting the attribute you would like to annotate.

–

The Mask is a template of how the annotation will appear on the screen.

–

The %v and %u options are added to display and control the value and units associated with the attribute.


3-139

Lesson 4: Reporting Results –

The Preview column shows an example of the annotation with values for the variables.

4. For this example, add annotation for the demand summary at each junction. a. In the first row, the Attribute column, select Demand (Calculated) from the list and click Next. b. Add Discharge and Velocity annotations for the pipes in the same manner and click Next. c. The final dialog box of the Annotation Wizard contains a summary where you can check your annotations. If there are any errors, click the Back button to go backwards in the wizard and make any necessary changes. Click Finished.

5. The drawing will now display all of the annotations. You can try changing the properties of an element and recalculating. The annotations will update automatically to reflect any changes in the system. 6. If the annotation is crowded, you can click and drag the annotation to move it. In the AutoCAD version, click the annotation and then click the grip to move it, or use an AutoCAD command such as Move or Stretch.

3-140


Quick Start Lessons Alternatively, you could go back into the Annotation Wizard, and abbreviate or remove the Mask labels. A third option is to decrease the Annotation Height. This option is found under the Drawing tab in the Tools > Options menu. 7. If you wish to delete the annotations, click the Annotation toolbar button, and clear any checked boxes. Click Next, and then Finished.

3.4.6

Part 6—Color Coding You can also review results in the plan view by color coding the elements based on attributes or ranges of values. 1. Select the Color Coding option (see “How Do I Color Code Elements?” on page A-700) under the Tools menu, or click the Color Coding button on the toolbar. 2. The Color Coding dialog box allows you to set the color coding for links, nodes, or both. You will color code by diameter (link attribute) and pressure (node attribute) in this example. Click the Link tab, and from the Color Coding list box. a. Select the Diameter attribute. b. In the table, enter values of 150, 200, and 1000 mm with colors of red, blue, and green, respectively.


3-141

Lesson 4: Reporting Results c. Next, click the Node tab, and select Pressure from the Attribute drop-down list box. d. Click the Calculate Range button to get the minimum and maximum values for the variable displayed at the top of the dialog box. e. Then, click the Initialize button and the model will select the color coding ranges in the table automatically. f.

Finally, click OK to generate the Color Coding.

3. You can add a legend to the drawing by clicking the Insert Legend button, choosing the Link Legend or Node Legend option, and clicking anywhere on the drawing space to place the legend. In AutoCAD, accept the defaults when prompted about scale and legend.

4. Color coding is dynamic; that is, it updates automatically as you change time increment or Scenario using the list boxes above the drawing pane. Notice that as you switch from the first Scenario to P-8 and P-9 set to 200 mm, the color of these pipes changes from red to blue. –

To turn the color coding off, open the Color Coding dialog box (double-click the legend you placed) and set the Attribute to on both the Link and Node tabs.

–

To delete a legend, select it by clicking once, and press the Delete key.

5. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project.

3-142


Quick Start Lessons

3.5

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis One of the primary goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires. WaterCAD automated fire flow analysis can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining minimum pressure constraints. Fire flows can be computed for all nodes in the system, or you can create a selection set consisting of specific nodes where you wish to test available flow. Fire flows are computed by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures. The model assigns the fire flow demand to a node and checks the model, checking to see if all pressure constraints are met at that demand. It will assign a new demand and automatically re-check the system pressures if a constraint is violated. Iterations continue until the constraints are met, or until the maximum number of iterations is reached. The purpose of this example is to walk you through the steps to create, calculate, and analyze a fire-flow scenario. This lesson again uses the distribution system from the previous lessons.

3.5.1

Part 1—Inputting Fire Flow Data 1. Start WaterCAD and open the file LESSON5, found in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson folder. 2. Or, if you have previously completed Lesson 3 or 4, you can use your MYLESSON3 or MYLESSON4 file. Select Project Summary from the File menu, and change the title of the project to Lesson 5—Fire Flow Analysis. Click OK. 3. Previously, you ran an analysis with a fire flow at node J-6 by manually adding a large demand to the individual node. Before running the automated fire flow analysis, you will create a new Demand Alternative, removing that demand. a. Select Analysis > Alternatives and highlight the Demand alternative in the left pane. b. Highlight Average Daily with 2000 l/min. Fire Flow in the right pane. c. Click Duplicate. d. In the Demand Summary column for node J-6 (row 6), click the word Composite, and it changes to a button. e. Click the Composite button to open the editor for the composite demand.


3-143

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis

f.

Click the 2000 l/min. demand, and click Delete.

g. Select Yes to confirm, OK to close the editor, and Close to exit the Demand Alternative. 4. You will now see the Demand Alternative Copy of Average Daily with 2000 l/ min. Fire Flow in the list. Highlight it and click the Rename button. Rename this Alternative Base-Average Daily.

3-144


Quick Start Lessons

5. You are going to analyze the fire flows by adding to the Maximum Day Demands, which are 1.5 times the Average Day Demands. a. Set up the Maximum Day Demand Alternative by highlighting the Base Average Daily Alternative and selecting Duplicate. b. Right-click the Base Flow column, and select Global Edit. Set the Operation to multiply, and enter a value of 1.5. Click OK.


3-145

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis Note:

Composite demands cannot be modified using global edit. Each individual demand that makes up the composite demand must be changed individually.

c. Click Close to exit the new Demand Alternative. d. Rename this Alternative Max. Day. 6. Highlight the Fire Flow alternative in the Alternative Manager. 7. Click the Edit button to set up the Base-Fire Flow Alternative. a. Enter a Needed Fire Flow of 3000 l/min. b. Enter a Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6000 l/min. c. Set Apply Fire Flows By to Adding to Baseline Demand. This selection means that when WaterCAD performs the analysis, the fire flow will be added to any demands already assigned to the junction. Alternatively, you could have selected to replace these demands, so that the fire flow would represent the total demand at the node. d. For Pressure Constraints, set both the Residual Pressure and Minimum Zone Pressure to 150 kPa. e. Leave the check box for Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint cleared, so that the minimum pressure will only be checked for the zone a particular node is in.

3-146


Quick Start Lessons Note that if you had multiple zones within your project and wanted to insure that a minimum system-wide pressure constraint was met, you could check the Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint box and type it in the box provided. This box is grayed out until the check box is activated. f.

Select Subset of Junctions from the Selection Set drop-down list box.

g. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to open the Selection Set dialog box. 8. For this example, a fire flow analysis is only needed for the junctions at the four street corners in our drawing. Choose the Select From Drawing button and click nodes J-1, J-2, J-3, and J-4 (in Stand-Alone, you must hold down the Shift key while making multiple selections). 9. When you are finished, right-click (and select Done in Stand-Alone).


3-147

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis

10. The nodes you selected are now in the Selected Items list. Click OK to exit the Selection Set dialog box. Note that the Selection Set table is now filled with your Selection Set. 11. Click the Close button to exit the Fire Flow Alternative dialog box, and Close again to exit the Alternative Manager dialog box.

3.5.2

Part 2—Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis You must now set up a new Scenario to utilize the appropriate alternatives and set up the calculation options. 1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Control Center. 2. Choose Scenario Management > Add > Base Scenario. 3. Name your new Scenario Automated Fire Flow Analysis and click OK. 4. In the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog box, change the Physical Alternative to P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm. 5. Change the Demand to Max. Day and leave all other Alternatives set to their defaults.

3-148


Quick Start Lessons

6. Click the Calculation tab, and make sure that Steady State is selected. 7. Select the Fire Flow Analysis check box. Note that all fire flow calculations must be performed under steady-state conditions. 8. Click Close to exit the Scenario dialog box. 9. Run the Scenario. a. Click GO Batch Run. b. Select the check box for Automated Fire Flow Analysis, and clear the other Scenarios.


3-149

Lesson 5: Automated Fire Flow Analysis c. Click Batch to run the analysis, and Yes at the confirmation prompt. d. When the calculation is complete, click OK and Close to exit the Scenario Control Center.

3.5.3

Part 3—Viewing Fire Flow Results Note:

Another good way to review an automated fire flow analysis is to use color coding. If you have a situation where no nodes meet the pressure constraints for the needed fire flow, you can color code these nodes in the plan view for easy identification. For more information on color coding, see “Part 6—Color Coding” on page 3-141.

1. Click the Tabular Reports button, located to the right of the GO button on the WaterCAD toolbar, to open the Table Manager. 2. Highlight the Fire Flow Report and click the OK button to view the report. 3. Make sure that Automated Fire Flow Analysis is selected in the Scenario list box.

4. In the Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints column, all of the boxes are checked except for the nodes that you did not analyze, because the specified needed flow of 3000 l/min. was available and minimum pressures were exceeded.

3-150


Quick Start Lessons –

For nodes J-1 and J-3, pressures were computed for the Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6000 l/min. because none ever dropped below specified minimum pressures.

–

Nodes J-2 and J-4 reached their minimum residual pressures at flows slightly below the maximum of 6000 l/min.

–

Notice, also, that the report contains the Minimum System Pressure (excluding the current node being flowed) and its location.

5. When you are finished reviewing the report, click Close in the WaterCAD Fire Flow Report dialog box and save your file as MYLESSON5.

3.6

Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis Note:


In conjunction with Extended Period simulations, WaterCAD is capable of performing a water quality analysis to compute water age, constituent concentration, or percentage of water from a given node (trace analysis). Using these features, you can look at factors such as residence time in tanks, chlorine residuals throughout the system, and which tank or reservoir is the primary water source for different areas in your system. This lesson uses the file called LESSON6.WCD (LESSON6.DWG in the AutoCAD version), located in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. 1. Open this file, and then select File > Save As. 2. Type the filename MYLESSON6 and click Save. The water distribution system has already been set up for you. It has one reservoir and one tank. The system serves primarily residential areas, with some commercial water use as well. There are two pumps connected to the reservoir. However, under normal conditions, only one pump will be in use. A background drawing has been included for reference. If you would like to turn off the .DXF background in the Stand-Alone version, clear the background check box in the Background Layers pane.


3-151

Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis

3.6.1

Part 1—Computing Water Age You will begin by running an age analysis for water in the system, assuming an initial age of 0 for all nodes. The water from the reservoir will be an infinite supply of new water, so the age of water elsewhere in the system will be a reflection of time from the start of the run and how long ago the water left the reservoir. The analysis will be run for a 2-week period (336 hours), in order to determine the equilibrium point of the system. 1. Start by adding a new Alternative for the age analysis. Select Analysis > Alternatives. 2. Click Age in the left column, to highlight it. 3. Click Add. This lets you add an age alternative. 4. Name the new alternative Initial Age = 0. Since you are assuming an initial age of 0 everywhere in the system, you do not need to enter any initial ages.

3-152


Quick Start Lessons

5. Click OK. 6. The Active Topology Alternative window opens. Click Close. 7. Click Close to close the Alternatives Manager. 8. Next, set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new Alternative. a. Select Analysis > Scenarios. There is one Scenario already set up called Existing - Avg Day. b. If needed, click Existing - Avg Day to highlight it. c. Click Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario. d. Type Age Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK.


3-153


e. Under the Alternatives tab, select the Age check box, and select the alternative you just created, Initial Age = 0, from the drop-down list box.

3-154


Quick Start Lessons f.

Click the Calculation tab to view the calculation settings for this Scenario. Extended Period Analysis should already be selected.

g. Enter a Start Time of 0. h. Set a Duration of 336 hours. i.

Set a Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour.

j.

Select the Water Quality Analysis check box.

k. Select the Age button.

9. Click Options. The Calculation Options dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you will find various calculation options such as number of trials, accuracy, and tolerance settings for each of the water quality analysis types. Leave these options set to their default values, click Cancel to exit the dialog box, and Close to exit the Scenario Editor. 10. Run the Scenario. a. Click Batch Run. b. Select the Age Analysis check box.


3-155


c. Click Batch, and then Yes and OK when prompted. d. After the run is complete, click Close to exit the Scenario Control Center. 11. Select Age Analysis from the Scenario toolbar list box. 12. A good way to view changes in water quality attributes over time is to use color coding. Click the Color Coding button on the toolbar. 13. Under the Link tab, set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age. 14. Click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme. Accept this default scheme. If you get a message about WaterCAD being unable to determine the limits for mapping, make sure that Age Analysis is selected in the Scenario drop-down list, in the toolbar. 15. Click the Node tab. 16. Set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age. 17. Click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme. Accept this default scheme. 18. Click OK. 19. Once back in the drawing pane, click the Legend button on the toolbar. 20. Select either the Node Legend or Link Legend (in this case, the color coding should be the same for both). Click anywhere in your drawing to place the legend. If you do not place it correctly the first time, you can always drag it and drop it in a new location.

3-156


Quick Start Lessons

Legend

21. Set the time increment in the toolbar to 4.00 hr. 22. Use the VCR-style buttons to scroll through time in your analysis and observe the color changes in your network reflecting water age. 23. A good way to check if your network has had sufficient time to reach an equilibrium point is to look at Age vs. Time graphs for your elements.


3-157


a. Open the Tank Editor for Tank T-1 (by double-clicking the tank). b. Click the Report button at the bottom of the editor, and select Graph. c. Select Calculated Age as the Dependent variable. d. Make sure Age Analysis is checked in the Available Scenarios box. e. Click OK.

3-158


Quick Start Lessons

From the graph, you can see that once a repeating pattern is reached, the age of the water fluctuates between approximately 34 and 49 hours in 24-hour periods. Looking at these equilibrium ranges for various nodes can help guide you in setting up initial water age values in subsequent runs. f.

3.6.2

Click Close and OK after you review the graph.

Part 2—Analyzing Constituent Concentrations In this portion of the lesson, you will look at chlorine residuals in the system over time. WaterCAD stores information on constituent characteristics in a file called a constituent library. You will add information for chlorine to this library, set up initial concentrations in the system, and run the simulation. 1. Select Analysis > Alternatives. 2. Click the Constituent alternative to highlight it. 3. Click Add. 4. Name the new alternative Chlorine Injection, and click OK. 5. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Constituent drop-down list box to open the Constituent Library. 6. Click the Insert button. An entry for Unlabeled appears in the table.


3-159

Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis 7. Click the Edit button, and enter the data below into the dialog box. La be l: Bulk Re a ction: W a ll Re a ction: Diffusivity:

Chlorine -0.10/day -0.08 m/day 1.2e-9 m 2/s

8. Leave the Unlimited Concentration check box selected, and click OK. 9. Click Close to exit the Constituent Library. You should now be back in the Constituent Alternative Editor. Tip:

To quickly enter the initial concentrations for an element type, use the Global Edit feature.

10. Select Chlorine from the Constituent list box. Notice that the Bulk Reaction in the table is automatically updated. 11. In the Pump and Valve tabs, set the pumps and valves to an initial concentration of 1 mg/l. 12. Click the Junction tab, and initialize the chlorine concentrations by entering a value of 1 mg/l at each junction node. (Right-click the column heading and use Global Options to Set the initial concentration.) 13. In the Reservoir tab, enter a value of 2.0 mg/l for the reservoir. 14. Set the tank’s concentration to 0.5 mg/l. 15. Close the Editor and the Alternatives Manager.

3-160


Quick Start Lessons 16. Now, open the Scenario Control Center and set up a new Scenario in order to run the Constituent Analysis. a. Create a new Child off of the Age Analysis Scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario. b. Type Chlorine Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK. c. Under the Alternatives tab, check the box labeled Constituent, and select the Chlorine Injection Alternative from the choice list. 17. Click the Calculation tab. 18. Select the Constituent button, in the Analysis section, and leave everything else set to the inherited values. 19. Click Close to exit the dialog box. 20. Click GO Batch Run. 21. Deselect Age Analysis. 22. Select Chlorine Analysis, then click Batch to run the model. 23. Click Yes and OK to accept the message boxes. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. 24. Select sure Chlorine Analysis as the current Scenario. 25. Set up color coding (see “Part 1—Computing Water Age” on page 3-152). This time, color code by Calculated Concentration instead of Calculated Age. Scroll through the time steps to view how the concentrations change throughout the network. When you look at your results using color coding, tables, and graphs, try to discover what better initial values for chlorine concentration might be.


3-161


3.6.3

Part 3—Performing a Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of water at all nodes and links in the system from a specific source node (the trace node). In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various source nodes as the trace nodes in successive analyses. For this run, you will perform a trace analysis to determine the percentages of water coming from the tank. 1. Select Analysis > Alternatives. 2. Click the Trace alternative to highlight it. 3. Click Add. 4. Name the new alternative Trace Analysis for Tank, and click OK. 5. In the Trace Node list box, select the tank, T-1. 6. Leave the initial percentages set to zero, and close the editor. 7. Close the Alternatives Manager.

8. Next, set up a new scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new alternative. a. Select Analysis > Scenarios. b. Create a new child for the Age Analysis scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management > Add > Child Scenario.

3-162


Quick Start Lessons c. Type Trace Analysis as the new scenario name, and click OK. d. In the Alternatives tab, select the Trace check box. e. Select the Trace Analysis for Tank alternative from the drop-down list box. f.

In the Calculation tab, select the Trace button in the Analysis section, and leave everything else set to the inherited values.

g. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

9. Click GO Batch Run. 10. Select the new Trace Analysis scenario and click Batch.


3-163

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources 11. Use color coding (by Calculated Trace), tables, and graphs to view the results of this run. As you scroll through the time periods, notice how the colors spread outward from the tank during periods when the tank is draining, and recede when the tank begins to fill. For more information on reporting features, “Lesson 4: Reporting Results” on page 3-127. 12. Close the open dialog boxes and save this project.

3.7

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources WaterCAD supports several methods of exchanging data with external applications, preventing duplication of effort and allowing you to save time by reusing data already present in other locations. For instance, you can exchange data with databases or a GIS system, or you can convert existing CAD linework to a pipe network. There are multiple ways of importing data from outside sources into WaterCAD. You can set up one or more database connections to bring in information stored in many standard database and spreadsheet formats. GIS information can be brought in through connections to ESRI shapefiles. If you have existing drawings of your network in a .DXF format (.DWG format in the AutoCAD version), you can have WaterCAD convert your lines and/or blocks into distribution system elements, setting up preferences for handling situations such as T-intersections and line endpoints, and creating tolerances to allow for drawing imperfections. Or, you can display a .DXF file as a background drawing for use in laying out a scaled network (Stand-Alone version only). Patterns and pump definitions can also be imported, from specially formatted text files. These data types can only be imported in this way—since this data occupies more than a single database field, shapefile and database connections cannot be used to bring pump definitions or patterns into the model. Shapefile and database connections can, however, store the name of the pump definition, as well as other single-field pump data such as elevation, label, and relative speed. This allows the pumps to be imported into the model, and assigned a previously created (or imported) pump definition, according to the name of the pump definition. This process is demonstrated in Part 1. Finally, WaterCAD will automatically import networks created in EPANet, KYPIPE, and previous versions of Cybernet/WaterCAD.

3-164


Quick Start Lessons WaterCAD also uses database and shapefile connections to export data from the model for use externally. You can also copy tables, reports, and graphs and paste them into other Windows applications, or save plan and profile views in .DXF format for use when creating construction documents in CAD. This lesson covers the three main methods of building your network using external data, summarized in the following table. Table 3-11: Network Building Using External Data Method

Description

Advantages

Disadvantages

Database Connection

Create connections to import and export model data using common database and spreadsheet formats.

Extremely versatile. Allows exchange of most any model data with a wide variety of applications (ODBC). A topographic representation of the network can be created by using node coordinates and assigning to and from nodes to pipes. Once a connection is established, it can be saved for later use, and multiple connections can be created and synchronized simultaneously.

Pipes will be depicted as straight lines connecting the to and from nodes, so pipe bends will not be transferred.

Shapefile Connection

Create connections to import and export model data in ESRI shapefile format.

Advantages are similar to those of Database Connections, except the topographic data exchange is automatic and pipe bends are accounted for.

More proprietary. You have to have software that supports ESRI shapefiles in order to utilize the data.

Enables you to use legacy CAD drawings to build your network. You can set up tolerances to allow for drawing imperfections, and preferences for how nodes will be created.

Elements are assigned default labels as they are created. Only topographic data can be imported, not attribute values. Requires careful review on the part of the modeler.

Polyline to Pipe Conversion

Convert existing lines, polylines, and blocks in DXF/DWG format into pipes and other network elements.


3-165

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources

3.7.1

Part 1—Importing Shapefile Data In this part of the lesson, you will import ESRI shapefiles to construct the distribution network in WaterCAD from existing GIS data. If you have ArcView, ArcInfo, or other application that can open a shapefile, then you can, if you choose, view the files externally prior to importing them. However, you will still be able to perform the workshop problem even if you don’t have one of these applications. This lesson uses the network from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151. The ESRI shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as follows: •

Main File—The main file is a binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record contains a series of points, and a point record contains x and y coordinates.

•

Index File—The index file is a binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position of each record in the main file.

•

Database File—The database file is a dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the non-spatial data associated with the map features.

All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and be located in the same directory. Listed below are the files you will be importing. Only the main files are listed; however, corresponding .SHX and .DBF are present as well. •

PresJunc.shp

•

PresPipe.shp

•

PRV.shp

•

Pump.shp

•

Reservoi.shp

•

Tank.shp

If you have a program such as ArcView or ArcGIS that allows you to view shapefiles, begin by setting up a view with all of the shapefiles (themes) listed above turned on. If you completed “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151, you should recognize the layout from that lesson. You can look at the data table for each of the themes to see what you will be importing. When you have finished reviewing the shapefiles, close the application.

3-166


Quick Start Lessons This lesson has instructions for use with the Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface. In the Stand-Alone interface: 1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box opens, click the Close button. 2. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab. 3. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK. 4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the current project. 5. In the Create Project File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder, type the file name GISPROB.WCD for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard opens. 6. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS Data. Click Next. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog box set to its default values. 7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000 and a vertical scale of 1:500. 8. Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 2.8. 9. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished. 10. Before importing the shapefiles, we must import the pump definition that is referenced by the pump shapefile. To do this, open the Pump Definition Manager by clicking the Analysis > Pump Definitions. 11. In the Pump Definition Manager, click the Import button. Browse to your Haestad/WaterGEMS/Lesson directory and select Lesson7.txt. Click Open. The Lesson7 pump definition should appear in the list pane of the Pump Definition Manager. In the AutoCAD interface: 1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Select Tools > Options and choose the Global tab. 2. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK. 3. Click File > New and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing. 4. Only if the Create New Drawing dialog box does not open: Press the Esc key. Then, type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value 1 and press Enter. Then, choose File > New, and do not save changes to the existing drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialog boxes or simply at the command prompt.


3-167

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources 5. When the Create New Drawing dialog box opens, make sure Metric is selected, and click OK. 6. Click Yes when prompted to set up the project. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS Data, and click Next. 7. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen. 8. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000 and a vertical scale of 1:500. 9. Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 2.8. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished. In both the AutoCAD and Stand-Alone interfaces: 10. Select File > Synchronize > Shapefile Connections. If you have not defined any shapefile connections in WaterCAD yet, you are prompted to create a shapefile connection; select Yes to start the Shapefile Connection Wizard. Or, if you have already defined shapefile connections in any other WaterCAD project, start the Shapefile Connection Wizard by clicking Add in the Shapefile Connection Manager that opens. Type the Connection Label Lesson 7, Part 1 for this connection, and click the Next button. 11. Now, you need to select the check boxes for the types of elements you will be importing. For this connection, select these check boxes: Pressure Junction, Pressure Pipe, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank. 12. Click Next.

3-168


Quick Start Lessons 13. Leave the Shapefile Unit set to m, and select the check box to establish missing connectivity data from spatial data, and click Next. 14. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Shapefile field. Browse and select the file PRESJUNC.SHP from the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory; click Open. 15. Set the Key/Label field to LABEL. This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct place. 16. Using the Field Links table, match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the shapefile. 17. In row 1, select Elevation from the WaterCAD column and ELEV from the Database column. Set the Unit to m to set the coordinate from the shapefile to meters. If the units in your shapefile were different than the units set up in WaterCAD, then WaterCAD would automatically do the necessary unit conversions.

18. Fill in the next row, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Click Next when you are finished. Table 3-12: Pressure Junction Shapefile Connection


WaterCAD

Database

Elevation

ELEV

Base Flow

DEMAND

Unit m l/min

3-169

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources 19. Set up the Pressure Pipe connections. Continue by entering the information below for the Pressure Pipe and clicking Next to proceed to the next dialog box. The shapefile for each type of element will be located in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory (for example, select the PRESPIPE.SHP file for the pressure pipe connection), and the entry for the Key\Label field will always be LABEL. Your Field Links tables should look like the tables that follow. Table 3-13: Pressure Pipe Shapefile Connection WaterCAD

Database

Diameter

D

Hazen-Williams C

C

Unit mm

Table 3-14: PRV Shapefile Connection WaterCAD

Database

Elevation

ELEV

Diameter

D

Initial HGL

HGL

Initial Valve Status

INITIAL_ST

Unit m mm m

Table 3-15: Pump Shapefile Connection WaterCAD

Database

Elevation

ELEV

Initial Pump Status

INIT_PUMP

Pump Definition

PUMP_DEFIN

Unit m

Table 3-16: Reservoir Shapefile Connection

3-170

WaterCAD

Database

Elevation

ELEV

Unit m


Quick Start Lessons Table 3-17: Tank Shapefile Connection WaterCAD

Database

Unit

Tank Diameter

TANK_D

m

Base Elevation

BASE_ELEV

m

Minimum Elevation

MIN_ELEV

m

Initial HGL

INITIAL_HGL

m

Maximum Elevation

MAX_ELEV

m

20. When you are finished setting up the shapefile connections, click Next to proceed. The Synchronize Now? dialog box will open. 21. Make sure the Synchronize Shapefile Connection and In check boxes are selected because you will be reading data from the shapefiles. 22. Click Finished and Yes when prompted if you want to proceed.

23. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data that is read into the model. After the import is complete, you should get a yellow light in this window, indicating that the synchronization was successful but that there are warnings. If there were no warnings you would get a green light and, if there were errors, a red light.


3-171

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources In this case, the warnings are due to the fact that you set WaterCAD to generate our network connectivity from the GIS spatial data. The log indicates where connectivity is being established, which is fine. 24. Close the Status Log and click OK to return to the drawing pane.

25. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it looks like the network from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151, and many of the pipes have bends and curves in them. Since you have topographic information stored in the shapefile, these bends can be imported. Because you created a scaled drawing, the pipe lengths will be read from the layout. Also notice that the default scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or shapefile connection, it is automatically written into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario. Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current scenario will be used. 26. To run the model, click the GO button in the toolbar, and then click GO in the dialog box. Now that you have calculated data, you could export the new data to your GIS database by going into the database and creating a new label for it. In “Part 2—Importing Data from a Database” on page 3-173, you will use an almost identical procedure to export pressures using database connections. 27. After you are finished, close the Scenario Editor. Continue with “Part 2— Importing Data from a Database” on page 3-173 or save your file as MyLesson7 and exit WaterCAD.

3-172


Quick Start Lessons

3.7.2

Part 2—Importing Data from a Database This portion of the lesson shows you through the steps to set up a connection to a database in order to create a new water distribution network from existing data. The necessary data has been included as a Microsoft Excel 5.0 spreadsheet. If you do not have software that can read this file type, you will still be able to perform the workshop, but you won’t be able to open the data to view it externally. This lesson uses the network from “Lesson 6: Water Quality Analysis” on page 3-151. This lesson has instructions for use with the Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface. In the Stand-Alone interface: 1. Open the spreadsheet file LESSON7.XLS and take a look at it. As you can see from the worksheet tabs, the data is organized into six worksheets, one for each type of element in the network. When setting up a spreadsheet yourself, you may organize and group data however you like. Just make sure that the different types of data are sorted into columns, with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell, and include a column for your labels. 2. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog box opens, select the Close button. 3. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK. 4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the current project. In the Create Project File As dialog box, double-click the Lesson folder, type the file name DBPROB.WCD for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard opens. 5. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data from a Database. Click Next. 6. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog box set to its default values. 7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 25. 8. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished. In the AutoCAD interface: 1. Open the spreadsheet file LESSON7.XLS and take a look at it. As you can see from the worksheet tabs, the data is organized into six worksheets, one for each type of element in the network. When setting up a spreadsheet yourself, you may


3-173

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources organize and group data however you like. Just make sure that the different types of data are sorted into columns, with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell, and include a column for your labels. 2. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. 3. Click Tools > Options and select the Global Options tab. Since you will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK. 4. Select File > New. Click No when prompted to save the existing drawing. 5. If the Create New Drawing dialog box does not open: Press the Esc key. Then, type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value 1 and press Enter. Then, choose File > New, and do not save changes to the existing drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialog boxes or simply at the command prompt. 6. When the Create New Drawing dialog box opens, make sure that Metric is selected, and click OK. Select Yes when prompted to set up the project. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data from a Database, and click Next. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen. 7. In this dialog box, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 25. 8. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished. In both the AutoCAD and Stand-Alone interfaces: 9. Click File > Synchronize > Database Connections. 10. Click Add.

3-174


Quick Start Lessons 11. Enter the Connection Label Lesson 7, Part 2 for this connection, and click the Add button.

12. Set the Database Type to Excel 5.0. 13. Click the Ellipsis (…) button next to the Database File field, and browse to select the LESSON7.XLS file from the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. 14. Click the Database Table list box. Notice that the items in the list correspond to the different worksheet tabs in your spreadsheet file. 15. Select Junction$ from the list and Pressure Junction for the Table Type. 16. Set the Key/Label field to Label. This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct place. 17. Using the Field Links table, you must now match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the spreadsheet. a. In row 1, select X from the WaterCAD column, and X (m) from the Database column. b. Set the Unit to m to set the coordinates that are read from the spreadsheet to meters. If the units in your database were different than the units set up in WaterCAD, then WaterCAD would automatically make the necessary unit conversions.


3-175

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources 18. Fill in the remaining rows, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Table 3-18: Junction Database Connection WaterCAD

Database

Unit

X

X (m)

m

Y

Y (m)

m

Elevation

Elevation (m)

m

Demand

Demand (m)

m

19. Click OK when you are finished. 20. In the Database Connection dialog box, click Add, and set up your database connection for pipe data. 21. Use the same spreadsheet file you used for the junction data, but set the Database Table and Table Type to Pipes and Pressure Pipe, respectively. 22. The Key/Label Field is Label. 23. Set up the following Pipe Database connection.

3-176


Quick Start Lessons Table 3-19: Pipe Database Connection WaterCAD

Database

+Start Node

Start Node

+Stop Node

Stop Node

Diameter

Diameter

Material

Material

Hazen-Williams C

Roughness

Length

Length (m)

Unit

mm

m

24. Repeat the above procedure to set up connections for Reservoir, Tank, and Valve connections, using information from the following tables. Table 3-20: Reservoir Database Connection WaterCAD

Database

Unit

X

X (m)

m

Y

Y (m)

m

Elevation

Elevation (m)

m

Table 3-21: Tank Database Connection WaterCAD

Database

X

X (m)

m

Y

Y (m)

m

Tank Diameter

Tank Diameter (m)

m


Unit

3-177

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources Table 3-21: Tank Database Connection (Cont’d) WaterCAD

Database

Unit

Base Elevation

Base Elev# (m)

m

Minimum Elevation

Minimum Elev# (m)

m

Initial HGL

Initial Elev# (m)

m

Maximum Elevation

Maximum Elev# (m)

m

Table 3-22: PRV Database Connection

3-178

WaterCAD

Database

Unit

X

X (m)

m

Y

Y (m)

m

Elevation

Elevation (m)

m

Diameter

Diameter (mm)

Initial HGL

Initial Grade Setting (m)

Initial Valve Status

Initial Status

mm m


Quick Start Lessons

Note:

The Table Type for this connection is PRV.

25. After you finish setting up the database connections, click OK to close the Database Connection Editor. 26. Click the Synchronize In button. When the message box opens, click Yes to proceed. 27. When prompted to add an element, click Yes to All. 28. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model. After the import is complete, you should get a green light in this window. If there were warnings or errors you would get a yellow light or red light, respectively. You could then scroll through the log to see where any problems might be occurring. Click Close to exit the Status Log and OK to exit the Database Connection Manager. 29. You should now be able to see the imported network in the drawing pane, but the symbol and label sizes are very small. Select Tools > Options and click the Drawing tab. 30. Set all three Annotation Multipliers to 25, and click OK. 31. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it is different in appearance from the same network imported using a shapefile in “Part 1—Importing Shapefile Data” on page 3-166. The difference stems from the fact that, in a database connection, a pipe’s layout is defined only by the location of its end nodes.


3-179

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources Therefore, pipes appear without bends, making a straight line connection between nodes. Hydraulically, your model will not be affected, since the pipe lengths are user-defined and not scaled from the layout. Also notice that the default scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or shapefile connection, it is automatically written into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario. Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current scenario will be used. 32. Click the GO button, and click GO again, to run the model. Now that you have calculated data, you can export it back to the database. For this example, you will only export pressures at the junction nodes. 33. Close the Scenario Editor. 34. Use Microsoft Excel to open LESSON7.XLS in another window. 35. Click the tab for the Junction worksheet, and add a new column heading in cell F1 called Pressure. Save and close the file. 36. In the WaterCAD window, choose File > Synchronize > Database Connections. Highlight Lesson 7, Part 2, and click the Edit button. 37. Select the junction table from the list, and click Edit again. 38. In Row 5 of the Field Links table, link the WaterCAD Pressure to the Database’s Pressure. The Unit should be set to kPa. 39. Click OK and OK again to get back to the Database Connection Manager. 40. Click the Synchronize Out button to send the information back to the spreadsheet.

3-180


Quick Start Lessons

41. Finally, if you reopen the LESSON7.XLS file in Microsoft Excel, you will see that the pressure values have now been added.

3.7.3

Part 3—Converting CAD Drawing Entities The Polyline to Pipe tool lets you take existing CAD entities and use them to quickly construct a water distribution network. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, line and block entities can be converted as well (polylines and lines can be converted to pipes; blocks can be converted to any available node type). Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. Difficulties can arise due to the fact that a drawing may appear to be correct visually, but may contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be made up of two lines, one directly on top of another.


3-181

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources The Polyline to Pipe Wizard guides you through the conversion process, letting you set up options relating to tolerances, node creation, and handling T-intersections. To help reduce some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During conversion, the network is analyzed, and potential problems are flagged for review. After performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window lets you navigate to and fix any problems that may be encountered. This lesson has instructions for use with the Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface. In the Stand-Alone interface: 1. Open WaterCAD and click Tools > Options. 2. In the Global Options tab, make sure that the Unit System is set to System International, and click OK. 3. Select File > Import > Polyline to Pipe. When prompted, click Yes to start the Project Setup Wizard. In the AutoCAD interface: 1. Start WaterCAD for AutoCAD and open the file LESSON7.DWG in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. 2. Select Edit > Change Entities to Pipes. The AutoCAD command line prompts you to select objects. Draw a selection window around all of the objects in the drawing by clicking the upper left and lower right corners, then right-click. 3. Click Yes when prompted to set up the project. In both the AutoCAD and Stand-Alone interfaces: 4. In the wizard, type Lesson 7 - Polyline to Pipe as the project title. 5. Click Next, and Next again to accept the default settings. 6. Make sure that you are set up for a Scaled drawing, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000 and a vertical scale of 1:500. 7. Set the three Annotation Multipliers to 2.8. 8. Click Next. 9. In order to minimize your data input later, create prototypes for common element characteristics. The most common type of pipe in the model you will be creating is 150 mm ductile iron with a C value of 130. Make sure these characteristics coincide with the prototype values, and click OK. 10. Since you have two identical pumps, set up a prototype for them using the data below. Change the Elevation to 148 m and the Pump Type should be 3 point. Change the units to l/min. before entering the discharge values.

3-182


Quick Start Lessons 11. Click OK when you are finished. Table 3-23: Pump Data Head (m)

Discharge (l/ min.)

Shutoff:

70

0

Design:

50

1200

Max. Operating

35

2000

12. Create one more prototype, this time for the PRVs. They both have an elevation of 129 m and an HGL setting of 185.2 m. 13. Click OK, and then Finished. The Polyline to Pipe Wizard opens. In the Stand-Alone interface: 14. Browse to and open the file LESSON7.DXF, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. 15. Leave the .DXF unit set to meters, and click Next.


3-183

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources 16. Set up the options WaterCAD will use when performing the conversion. a. Change the Tolerance to 1 m, so that pipe endpoints that come within a meter of one another will be assumed to be connected. b. Select Convert Polylines and Lines to pipes, and select Pressure Junction to be used if no node is found at a polyline endpoint. c. Click Next.

17. Select the option to join pipes at T-intersections within the specified tolerance, and click Next.

18. Select Yes when prompted for blocks that you would like to convert to nodes.

3-184


Quick Start Lessons 19. Fill in the table by matching the AutoCAD Blocks JUNCTION, PRV, PUMP, RESERVOIR, and TANK with the corresponding WaterCAD elements (Pressure Junction, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank). 20. Click Next.

21. You will be given the option to alter the prototype settings. This option is useful if you want to import in multiple passes, grouping like data together to make the data entry process more automated. For instance, you could have chosen to import all of the 100 mm pipes, then the 150 mm pipes, etc., changing the prototype each time. For this example, you will leave the prototypes as set in the Project Setup Wizard. Click Next. 22. Make sure that the layers HMI_NODE and HMI_PIPE are both checked, and click Finished to perform the conversion. 23. When it is completed, close the statistics window.


3-185

Lesson 7: Working with Data from External Sources

24. A Drawing Review dialog box opens with five junctions listed in it. The purpose of the Drawing Review is to alert you to problems or assumptions made during the import. Find any one of these junctions by highlighting it in the list and clicking Go To. The drawing pane will center on the junction and select it. If you have difficulty seeing the selected element, increase the zoom factor in the Drawing Review dialog box. 25. Open the element, and click the Messages tab. There will be a message telling you that the node was added during the Polyline to Pipe conversion. The junction had to be added because there was no node at that location in your .DXF drawing, but there was a polyline endpoint. In the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, you set WaterCAD to add junctions to endpoints. Even though you now have your drawing converted to a pipe network, it is still not ready to be run because you can only bring in element types and network connectivity using this type of import. Before you could run this model, you would have to input data for elevations, demands, pipe sizes, etc., either directly into WaterCAD or through database connections. In the AutoCAD interface: The WaterCAD elements are now on layer 0, since that layer was current when you performed the conversion. If you turn off layers HMI_PIPE and HMI_NODE, only the actual WaterCAD elements will be visible.

3-186


Quick Start Lessons

3.8

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer In this lesson, you use Darwin Designer to optimize the setup of a pipe network. For more information on Darwin Designer and its underlying genetic-algorithm-based technology, see: •

“Using Darwin Designer” on page 12-465

•

“Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753

Hillview Reservoir EL 300ft

P-1

R-1

5 P-1

J-15

J-2 P-2

City Tunnel No. 1

Bronx

P-1 4

P-3

J-3

J-14

J-4 P-4

P-1 3

City Tunnel No. 2

J-5

P-5

Man hattan

P-1 2

J-13

J-18

P-18

J-19

P-17

J-12

J-6

P-1 1

P-6

Queen s

J-7

J-11

P-1 0

7 P-

J-8 P1

9

P8

J-20

2 P1

P-2 0

P-9

J-9

Richmond

P-1 6

J-10

Brooklyn

J-16

J-17


3-187

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer

3.8.1

Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization 1. Open WaterCAD. 2. Browse to your Haestad/WaterCAD/Lesson directory. Open the file DesignerSample1.wcd. 3. Open Darwin Designer. –

Click the Darwin Designer button.

–

Or, click Analysis > Darwin Designer.

4. If the File Format Update dialog box opens, click Update File Format. This updates the schema of the file to match the schema of the current version of WaterCAD.

Darwin Designer opens.

3-188


Quick Start Lessons

5. Click New > Design Study. 6. Name the design study Tunnel Expansion Project and click OK.

7. Select Optimization Base as the representative scenario in the drop-down list. (For more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364.)


3-189


8. If needed, click the Design Event tab. 9. Click New. 10. Name the design event Required Pressures, and click OK.

The Design Event Editor opens. 11. Set pressure constraints for all junctions. a. Click the Pressure Constraints tab. b. Select All Junctions from the Selection Set drop-down list. c. In the Pressure Constraints Defaults area, set the Minimum Pressure to 110.33 psi (HGL = 255 ft.). d. In the Pressure Constraints Defaults area, set the Maximum Pressure to 1000 psi. For this example, maximum pressure is not a consideration, so you set it high so it does not affect the calculations.

3-190


Quick Start Lessons

12. Customize junction J-17 to require a minimum pressure of 118.03 psi. a. In the Pressure Constraints area, scroll so you can see junction J-17. b. Select the Override Defaults? check box. c. Type a minimum pressure of 118.03 psi. 13. Click OK after you finish setting up the Design Event Editor. 14. In the Darwin Designer dialog box, click the Design Groups tab.


3-191

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer 15. Click Create Multiple Design Groups. This button lets you automatically create one design group for each pipe in the network or for a particular set of pipes. a. In the Selection Sets drop-down list, select Parallel Pipes for Optimization. This highlights a selection set containing a specific subset of the pipes in your network. (For more information about selection sets, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263.)

b. Click OK. c. When prompted, click Yes to create a group for each selected pipe. 16. Add a option group for your optimization. a. Click the Option Groups tab. b. Click Design Option Groups, in the tree-view. c. Click New. d. Name the new table New Pipe Sizes, and click OK. e. Type the following pipe material, size, roughness coefficient, and cost:

3-192


Quick Start Lessons Table 3-24: New Pipe Parameters

Right-click to select Global Edit

Material

Diameter (in.)

Hazen Williams Roughness

Cost

Ductile Iron

0

100

0.00

Ductile Iron

60

100

176.00

Ductile Iron

72

100

221.00

Ductile Iron

84

100

267.00

Ductile Iron

96

100

316.00

Ductile Iron

108

100

365.00

Ductile Iron

120

100

417.00

Ductile Iron

132

100

469.00

Click a row label to select the row


3-193

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer 17. Create a new optimized design run. a. In the Designs tree-view, right-click Tunnel Expansion Project and select New Optimized Design Run. Or, click the New button and select New Optimized Design Run.

b. Name the design run Optimized Design. 18. Select the design event you want to use, Required Pressures, by clicking the Active check box.

3-194


Quick Start Lessons 19. Click the Design Groups tab. a. Set all of the design groups to Active. b. Right-click the column label and choose Global Edit. c. In the Global Edit dialog box, select the Active check box. d. Click OK.

e. Right-click the Design Option Group column heading. f.

Select Global Edit.

g. Choose New Pipe Sizes as the option group you want to use and click OK.


3-195

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer 20. Click the Options tab.

a. Set the GA Parameters as follows: Table 3-25: GA Parameters GA Parameter

Value

Maximum Era Number

6

Era Generation Number

150

Population Size

50

Cut Probability

1.7

Splice Probability

60.0

Mutation Probability

1.5

Random Seed

0.4

Penalty Factor

25000000

b. Set the Stopping Criteria as follows:

3-196


Quick Start Lessons Table 3-26: Stopping Criteria Stopping Criteria

Value

Maximum Trials

50000

Non Improvement Generations

200

c. Set the Top Solutions, Solutions to Keep to 3. This sets how many results will be available as results (see “Part 2—Viewing Results”). 21. Click GO to calculate the optimized design. While the calculation proceeds, WaterCAD displays the Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box.

22. Review the Messages tab for notes pertaining to the calculation. 23. Review the Status tab to see what are the results of your calculation. –

Completed Successfully—If this green bar displays, then there were no errors encountered by the calculation. If there were errors, you would be notified and could look on the Messages tab to see what they were.

–

Best Fitness—In this case, you were calculating based on cost. So, the best fitness is the least costly solution that the GA found.

–

Cost ($)—The lowest cost found by the calculation displays here.

–

Benefit—Measured pressure improvement in the network. This is 0 because the lesson only considers cost and not pressure benefit.


3-197

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer –

Violation—The largest violation of established pressure and flow boundaries, such as maximum or minimum pressures, displays here. If there were a violation, you would use the results area Pressure and/or Flow tabs (in the results pane of the main Darwin Designer window) to look for the actual violations.

–

Generations—The maximum value for generations is determined by the Maximum Era Number and Era Generation Number you set in the Options > GA Parameters. The actual number of generations that get calculated depend on the Options > Stopping Criteria you set.

–

Trials—The maximum value for trials is determined by what you set in Options > Stopping Criteria. Note that you can set a number larger than (Maximum Era Number)*(Era Generation Number)*(Population Size), but calculations beyond that number (for this example, the value is 45,000) are less likely to produce significant improvements. Also, note that the Messages tab might report you exceeded the maximum number of trials. This is usually because Darwin Designer must complete all the generations before ending a trial, so it is possible that completing generations will cause a few excess trials to be calculated.

24. Click Close to close the Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box.

3-198


Quick Start Lessons

3.8.2

Part 2—Viewing Results After you calculate the optimized design (by clicking the GO button—for more information, see “Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization” on page 3-188), results display. You can review results and look for violations of parameters.

Results area

1. Click Hide Results to minimize the results area and Show Results to restore the results area. 2. From the solutions drop-down list, select the solution you want to see: Solution 0. Notice that each solution is color coded; use the color code as a key when viewing graphs. Solutions are ranked by fitness, with Solution 0 being the best.

3. In the Design Groups tab, if you scroll down, you can see there are six pipes specified. These are the pipes that Darwin added to the scenario to provide the optimal solution (note, we are not rehabilitating pipes in this example):


3-199

Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer Table 3-27: New Pipes Pipe

Diameter (in.)

Cost

GA-P-7

96

3033600.00

GA-P-16

120

11008800.00

GA-P-17

108

11388000.00

GA-P-18

72

5304000.00

GA-P-19

72

3182400.00

GA-P-21

60

4646400.00

4. If needed, click Resize to Fit to fit the result columns in the dialog box. 5. The Rehab Groups and Flow Constraints tabs are empty because this lesson does not use those. 6. Click the Pressure Constraints tab. This displays the maximum and minimum pressure constraints you set on the junctions and the actual pressures calculated by Darwin Designer.

3-200


Quick Start Lessons

3.8.3

Part 3—Using Results After you calculate the optimized design (by clicking the GO button—for more information, see “Part 1—Creating the Darwin Designer Optimization” on page 3-188), results display. You can use the results are to create graphs and reports.

Results area

1. Click the Report button and select Solution Comparison. There are three solutions to compare (this is set in Options > Stopping Criteria). Solution 0 clearly provides the least expensive solution.


3-201


2. Export the solution to WaterCAD so you can use it. a. Select Solution 0 in the solutions drop-down list. Notice that each solution is color-coded. b. Click Export to Scenario. The Export to Design Scenario dialog box opens.

If you see this, hover the cursor over the exclamation point to read any error message

c. Select all check boxes to export to the various alternatives. d. Name the scenarios you want to export, such as Optimized Design - 0. The name you choose must be unique; there cannot already exist a scenario with the same name. e. Click OK.

3-202


Quick Start Lessons 3. Click Close to close Darwin Designer.

Select the scenario you exported

4. A dialog will appear, informing you that the program is now synchronizing the changes and time stamp from Darwin Designer with WaterCAD. 5. In WaterCAD, select the scenario you exported from the Scenario drop-down list. Notice the parallel pipes that have been added to the base network. These are the pipes that meet the optimized design calculated by Darwin Designer.


3-203


Scenario: Optimized Design - 0 Hillview Reservoir EL 300ft

P-1

R-1

5 P-1

J-15

J-2 P-2

City Tunnel No. 1

Bronx

P-1 4

P-3

J-3

J-14

J-4 P-4

P-1 3

City Tunnel No. 2

J-5

P-5

P-1 2

J-13

Man hattan

J-18

J-19

P-18

P-17

J-12

J-6

GA-P -1 8

GA-P -17 P-1 1

P-6

Queen s

GA

J-7

J-11

P7

7 P-

GA -

P-1 0

J-8 P1

P-

19

9

P8

J-20

2 P1 GA P-

J-10

P-2 0

P-9

J-9

P-1 6

GA -P

-1 6

21

Richmond

Brooklyn

J-16

J-17

3-204


Quick Start Lessons

3.9

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview In this lesson, you use Darwin Designer to optimize the setup of a pipe network. There are three scenarios: •

Existing System representing current system conditions

•

Future Condition representing the system expansion layout

•

Optimization base representing the scenario for Designer base.

There are two design tasks: •

New pipes to be sized are pipes 54, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76.

•

Old pipes need to be rehabilitated by applying possible actions including cleaning pipe, relining pipe, and leaving the pipe as it is (no action or do thing to a pipe).

The design criteria is: •

Minimum pressure 45 psi at all demand junction

•

Maximum pressure 110 psi at all demand junction

•

Filling each tank to or above the initial tank level

1. Browse to your Haestad/WaterCAD/Lesson directory. Open DesignerSample2.wcd. 2. If needed, select Existing System from the Scenario drop-down list. This displays the current network. Notice that the Existing scenario comprises two types of pipe: –

In green, there are older pipes, perhaps representing an old downtown section

–

In purple, there are newer pipes, perhaps representing newer additions to the water supply network

3. Click GO to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Existing Condition. If you want, you can run a simulation or inspect the pressures and tank volumes, but the purpose for calculating this condition was for a tank level comparison between the Existing and Future Condition scenarios in a later step.


3-205

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview

Add subdivision and more pipes here

Newer pipe section in purple

Older pipe section in green

4. Select the Future Condition from the Scenario drop-down list. If needed, click Zoom Extents to view the entire network in the window.

3-206


Quick Start Lessons

New subdivision pipes display in red

Newer pipe section in purple

Older pipe section in green

5. Click GO to calculate the system pressures and tank levels for the Future Condition. 6. In the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box, select an Extended Period simulation.


3-207


–

Set the start time to 12:00 AM.

–

Set the Duration to 24.00 hours.

–

Set the Hydraulic Time Step to 1.00 hours.

7. Click GO. 8. Click Close to close the Scenario: Future Condition dialog box. 9. Review the color coding for pressure at junctions. a. Click Color Coding. The Color Coding dialog box opens. b. Select Node and set the Attribute to Pressure, if needed.

3-208


Quick Start Lessons

Note the color coding for pressure: -

<= 45 psi is red

-

<= 70 psi is blue

-

<= 100 psi is magenta

-

<= 130 psi is green

For this lesson, one objective is to keep the junction pressures above 45psi. So, when you play the simulation, watch for red junctions which indicate unacceptably low pressure. c. Click OK to close the Color Coding dialog box. 10. Run an animation to see what happens in the network over the course of 24 hours. a. If needed, set the Animation Delay to 0.25 seconds.


3-209

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview b. Click Play to run the animation.

Click Play

c. Notice, at hour 6 there is a low pressure junction and, by hour 15, most of the junctions are showing a low pressure.

The red junctions all have pressure that is too low

3-210


Quick Start Lessons 11. Use GeoGrapher to check the levels on the tanks. a. Click GeoGrapher. b. Several graphs are pre-built. Double-click ScenariosComparison Tank 165-existing vs. future. This shows the water levels for tank 165 in the Existing scenario and also the Future Condition scenario. c. Select the Attribute Calculated Tank Level from the drop-down list, if needed.

Existing scenario

Future Condition scenario: tank empties

d. Notice that by hour 11, Tank 165 is empty and does not refill. e. From the Elements drop-down list, select Tank 65.


3-211


Existing scenario

Future Condition scenario: tank empties

f.

Notice that by hour 12, Tank 65 is also empty.

g. Close the graphing window. 12. You need to use Darwin Designer and some analysis in WaterCAD to change the existing pipe network to:

3-212

–

Keep junction pressures above 45psi

–

Keep the two water tanks filled


Quick Start Lessons

3.9.1

Set Up for Darwin Designer With Darwin Designer, you need to consider two ways of accomplishing a cost-effective design: create new or parallel pipes and rehabilitate existing pipes. Clearly, the new subdivision will get new pipes. And, as you can design an appropriate size for these new pipes, there is no need for parallel pipes and there are no existing pipes on which to perform rehabilitation. With that in mind, you would create a parallel pipe option for all existing pipes. This parallel pipe option should include a variety of sizes so Darwin Designer has flexibility to choose the most efficient size. Additionally, the pipe sizes must include a 0 diameter, which lets Darwin Designer calculate the efficiency of the system with the pipe absent (without installing the parallel pipe). There are four options in this tutorial for existing pipe: •

Install parallel pipe

•

Clean existing pipe

•

Reline existing pipe

•

Take no action

1. Select Optimization Base from the Scenario drop-down list. This is the future network set up for Darwin Designer optimization. Notice that parallel pipes have been added next to all the existing pipes. All new pipes— parallel and new ones for the subdivision—are colored red.


3-213


2. Open Darwin Designer. 3. If needed, select Optimization Base from the Representative Scenario drop-down list. 4. Create a new design study, called Design and Rehabilitation.

a. Click the New button and select New Design Study. b. Name the study and click OK. 5. Create a new design event, called Criteria Set - 1.

3-214


Quick Start Lessons

Click New to create a new design study

Click New to create a new design event

a. On the Design Event tab, click New. b. Name the design event and click OK. The Design Event Editor opens. 6. Set up the Design Event Editor.


3-215


a. On the Pressure Constraint tab, set: -

Selection Set to All Junctions

-

Minimum Pressure to 45 psi

-

Maximum Pressure to 100 psi.

b. Click OK to close the Design Event Editor. 7. Click the Design Groups tab. 8. Click New to create design groups. (Notice that the model includes the pipes in groups already; if you are comfortable with creating groups, you can just use the existing groups. Pipes can only belong to one group at a time.) You need to create design groups for all new or potentially new pipes, which include: –

All pipes labeled in the model with a P (these are parallel pipes)

–

All new pipes: 54, 68, 70, 72, 74, 76

Do not include existing pipes in any of these groups, because these need to be in a rehabilitation group. 9. Click the Rehab groups tab. Create Rehab groups containing pipes grouped as follows:

3-216

–

4, 8, 30, 32, 34 36

–

2, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 48

–

6, 78


Quick Start Lessons –

38, 40, 42, 66

–

44, 46, 50, 58, 62, 80

–

52, 56, 60, 64

Note that there is no need to include any of the new pipes in rehab groups—in fact, these should already have been assigned to design groups and be unavailable for rehab groups. You might consider grouping pipes based on size or age. To create a Rehab group: a. Click New. b. Name the Rehab group and click OK. c. Use the Element Selector dialog box to choose the pipes you want to include in the group. 10. Click the Option Groups tab. Create two design option groups and one rehabilitation option group.

Click New to create a new design option group

a. In the tree-view, select Design Option Groups. b. Click New to create a new table. c. Name the table, and click OK.


3-217

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview d. Enter data into the table. The first table contains a pipe diameter of 0. All parallel pipes will use this option group. Including a diameter of 0 lets Darwin Designer consider not adding a parallel pipe if that pipe is not needed for the optimal solution. Table 3-28: Design Option Group 1 Material


Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost ($/ft.)

Aluminum structural

6

130

12.80

Aluminum

8

130

17.80

Aluminum

10

130

22.50

Aluminum

12

130

29.20

Aluminum

14

130

36.20

Aluminum

16

130

43.60

Aluminum

18

130

51.50

Aluminum

20

130

60.10

Aluminum

24

130

77.00

Aluminum

30

130

105.50

Aluminum

0

130

0.00

e. Create a second design costs table. (You can duplicate the table you just created and delete the row for 0 diameter.) This table is the same as the first one except it does not have a pipe diameter of 0 and is used for new pipes. New pipes must have a minimum diameter because their existence is a requirement, unlike the parallel pipes.

3-218


Quick Start Lessons Table 3-29: Design Option Group 2 Material


Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost ($/ft.)

Aluminum structural

6

130

12.80

Aluminum

8

130

17.80

Aluminum

10

130

22.50

Aluminum

12

130

29.20

Aluminum

14

130

36.20

Aluminum

16

130

43.60

Aluminum

18

130

51.50

Aluminum

20

130

60.10

Aluminum

24

130

77.00

Aluminum

30

130

105.50

11. Create a single rehab option groups table containing three actions: Clean, Relining, and Do Nothing. A do-nothing action is necessary so Darwin Designer can consider not rehabilitating some pipes. Each of these actions must reference three functions, one for each column in the table.


3-219


Select three functions for each action

12. Select Rehab Option Groups in the tree-view and click New to create a new rehab table. a. Name the table and click OK. b. Type the name of an action you want to create, such as Clean. c. Click the cell under Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function and click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new function. The Function Manager opens. d. Click New > New Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function. e. Name the function, Function - 0, and click OK.

f.

3-220

The Function Editor opens. Enter your diameter data (inside pipe diameter) into the table. We recommend you included all the diameters of pipe in the table. (If you do not, Darwin Designer will use interpolation to calculate the diameters you do not include.) In this case, the function does not change the diameter of any pipes.


Quick Start Lessons

Table 3-30: Function - 0 Diameter Data Pre-Rehab Diameter (in.)

Post-Rehab Diameter (in.) 6

6

8

8

10

10

12

12

14

14

16

16

18

18

20

20

g. Click OK to close Function Editor. 13. In Function Manager, click New > Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function. a. When prompted, name it Function - 1, and click OK. b. In Function Editor, enter a data for pipe diameter and unit cost.


3-221

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview Table 3-31: Function -1 Diameter vs. Unit Cost Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost($/ft.) 6

17.00

8

17.00

10

17.00

12

17.00

14

18.20

16

19.80

18

21.60

20

23.50

30

25.50

c. Click OK to close Function Editor. 14. In Function Manager, click New > Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function. a. When prompted, name it Function - 2, and click OK. b. In Function Editor, enter a data for pipe diameter and roughness. Table 3-32: Function -2 Pre-Rehab Diameter vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost($/ft.) 6

130

8

130

10

130

12

130

14

130

16

130

18

130

20

130

c. Click OK to close Function Editor.

3-222


Quick Start Lessons 15. Create another Function called Cost Function - Reline. This is the cost for relining pipes. Use these values: Table 3-33: Relining Diameter vs. Cost Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost ($/ft.) 6

26.20

8

27.80

10

34.10

12

41.40

14

50.20

16

58.50

18

66.20

20

76.80

24

109.20

30

142.50

16. Create a final function called Do Nothing. This function is required if you need Darwin Designer to consider not rehabilitating an existing pipe as an option. Table 3-34: Do Nothing Cost Diameter (in.)


Unit Cost ($/ft.) 6

0.00

8

0.00

10

0.00

12

0.00

14

0.00

16

0.00

3-223

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview Table 3-34: Do Nothing Cost Diameter (in.)

Unit Cost ($/ft.) 18

0.00

20

0.00

24

0.00

30

0.00

17. Click OK to close Function Manager. 18. For the Action, Clean: a. In the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function cell, select Function 1 from the dropdown list. b. In the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function, select Function 2 from the drop-down list. 19. Type a new Action, called Relining 1. a. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function to Function 0. b. Set the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function to Cost Function - Reline. c. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function to Function - 2.

3-224


Quick Start Lessons 20. Type a new Action called Do Nothing. a. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Diameter Function to Function 0. b. Set the Diameter Vs. Unit Cost Function to Cost Function - Do Nothing. c. Set the Pre-Rehab Diameter Vs. Post-Rehab Roughness Function to Function - 2.

21. Click the Design Type tab to set the genetic algorithm parameters. Set the Objective Type to Minimize Cost. You are not considering any benefits to increasing system flow or pressure.


3-225


3.9.2

Create the Optimized Design Run The design run uses your setup and applies it to the network. 1. Right-click the Design and Rehabilitation design run in the tree-view, and select Add New Optimized Design Run.

2. Name the optimized design run as Design Run -1, and click OK. 3. In the Design Events tab, select the Active check box for the Design Event Name Criteria Set -1. This enables the selected design event for the current run. 4. Click the Design Groups tab. 5. Activate all the design groups. a. Right-click the Active column header. b. Select Global Edit.

c. In the Global Edit dialog box, select the Active check box, and click OK. This selects all the Active check boxes for all of the design groups in the tab.

3-226


Quick Start Lessons 6. Select the design option group used by your design groups. a. All groups containing parallel pipes need to use Design Option Group 1, for that option group contains data for a pipe size of 0. Parallel pipes have the prefix P. b. All groups containing new, single pipes need to use Design Option Group 2, for that option group does not use a 0 pipe size. 7. Click the Rehab Groups tab. a. Set all the groups as Active. (Right-click the heading of the check box column and globally edit them.) b. Set all the groups to use your rehab option group. (Right-click the heading of the check box column and globally edit them.) 8. Click the Options tab to set the GA parameters for the optimization.

3.9.3

–

Under Stopping Criteria, set Maximum Trials to 100000.

–

Under Top Solutions, set Solutions to Keep to 5.

Calculate and Verify the Optimal Solution It is important, after you calculate your solutions, that you look at them and verify they do what you need. 1. Click GO. The Darwin Designer Run Progress dialog box opens and displays the progress of the calculation.


3-227

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview 2. After the calculation is complete, click Close. (If the calculation did not complete successfully, you would check the Messages tab.) In the results area, in the solutions drop-down list you see five solutions numbered 0 through 4. These are the five top solutions you set.

Review the solutions

Solutions are stored in order of optimization fitness, with Solution 0 providing a better calculated solution than Solution 1, which has a better calculated solution that Solution 2, etc. 3. Export the solutions to your model, so you can review tank levels. Note that the optimization calculations consider your pressure requirements (that pressure be greater than 45 psi) but not your tank levels. a. Click Export to Scenario. The Export to Scenario dialog box opens. b. Select the Use Scenario Name for Alternatives check box. The default name is the design run name plus an incremental number starting at 1. Don’t be confused by solutions numbered from 0 to 4 while the corresponding scenarios are numbered 1 - 5.

3-228


Quick Start Lessons

c. Click OK and OK again to clear the message prompt. This exports Solution 0. d. Select Solution 1 from the solutions drop-down list. e. Export Solution 1. f.

Export the remaining solutions in turn.

4. Click Close to exit Darwin Designer so you can review the solutions you exported. 5. In WaterCAD, open Scenario Manager. 6. Select Future Condition from the Scenarios drop-down list.

7. Compute the scenarios you exported in a batch run. This lets you graph those results and look at what is happening with your tank levels. a. Click GO Batch Run. b. Select the Scenarios you want to run.


3-229


Select the Scenarios you want to run

c. Click Batch and confirm the message boxes. d. After the batch run finishes, close the Scenario Control Center dialog box.

3-230


Quick Start Lessons 8. Open GeoGrapher. You will use GeoGrapher to inspect your tank levels. a. Click New, Over Time, and Scenarios Comparison.

b. Click Next. c. Select the Scenarios you exported and the Future Condition scenario and move them to the Selected Scenarios window.


3-231


d. Click Next. e. Choose Tank as the Element Type. Select either tank, as you’ll want to look at them both. Click Next. f.

Set the Primary Y-Axis Attribute to Calculated Tank Level. Click Next.

g. Click Finish. h. For tank 65, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full. i.

3-232

For tank 165, review the graph. Make sure the tank is kept full.


Quick Start Lessons

Run 1-1 representing Scenario 0, fails to keep the tank full

Note that two scenarios fail to keep the tanks full. The Future Condition scenario, which is not optimized, and Design Run 1 - 1, which corresponds to Solution 0, or your least costly and therefore most highly optimized solution. Since all the other runs do keep the tanks full, and since Solution 0 fails to keep your tanks full, Solution 1 (Scenario - 1-2) is the best optimal solution that meets your pressure and tank fill requirements. 9. Close Geographer. Save your changes if prompted. 10. In the Scenario drop-down list, choose Design Run - 1-2, which represents Solution 1 that Darwin Designer calculated. From looking at the graphing results in GeoGrapher, you know this solution keeps your tanks full. 11. Inspect your tank pressure by animating the scenario over 24 hours. Click Play. Note the color coding for pressure: –

<= 45 psi is red

–

<= 70 psi is blue

–

<= 100 psi is magenta

–

<= 130 psi is green


3-233

Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview 12. Make sure none of the junctions is red during the animation. 13. Inspect a table of junction pressures. a. Double-click any junction. b. Click Report > Graph.The Graph Setup dialog box opens. c. From the Dependent drop-down list, select Pressure. d. Click the Elements tab. e. Click Select. f.

In the Selection Set dialog box, select all available items (junctions), and click OK.

g. In the Graph Setup dialog box, click OK. h. The Graph dialog box opens and displays pressures for the junctions you selected. Note that none of the junctions fall below 45 psi.

All the junctions for this scenario have greater pressure than 45 psi

3-234


Quick Start Lessons

3.9.4

Conclusion Darwin Designer computed Solution 0 to be the most optimal solution, meaning the least costly. But, in GeoGrapher, you were able to identify that Solution 0, or Design Run - 1-1 failed to keep the tanks full. Thus, Solution 1, or Design Run - 1-2 became the best solution that kept the tanks full. You also verified that Solution 1 was able to maintain pressures above 45 psi.

New pipes for subdivision Some parallel pipes are used


3-235


3-236


Chapter

4

Starting a WaterCAD Project At the beginning of a project, you need to set some global settings. In the Global Options (see “Global Options” on page 4-242) and Project Options (see “Project Options” on page 4-244) dialog boxes, you can specify the unit system, the friction formulas used, and whether you want to use Auto Prompting. In the Drawing Options dialog box (see “Drawing Options” on page 4-246), you can specify settings such as the drawing scale and the size of the symbols and annotations. Note:

These options can also be viewed or edited by selecting the Options menu item from the Tools menu.

You can also access the FlexUnit dialog box (see “FlexUnits” on page 4-252) in order to globally specify the units and number of decimals to be displayed for each type of data.

4.1

File Management WaterCAD uses the .WCD extension to store WaterCAD Stand-Alone-specific information (including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.). When WaterCAD runs within AutoCAD, two important files are used. The .WCD file is still used to hold all model data, and a .DWG file contains all of the AutoCAD entities. This means that even a complete AutoCAD drawing corruption (or loss) will not endanger your hydraulic model data—in fact, you can even regenerate the AutoCAD modeling elements from the .WCD file!


4-237

File Management

4.1.1

WaterCAD Backup Files When a .WCD file is overwritten by a save action, a backup file of the .WCD file is created with a .WCK extension. Note that AutoCAD also generates a backup drawing file, with a .BAK extension.

4.1.2

WaterCAD Database Store In addition to the WaterCAD Stand-Alone-specific information contained within the .WCD file, element and scenario information is contained within the WaterCAD Database store (also referred to as the WaterCAD datastore). This WaterCAD datastore is an .MDB file—in Stand-Alone you need to save your work to apply changes to the MDB.

4.1.3

Shapefile/Database Connection Files If you use the Shapefile or Database Connections Managers to exchange data with external data sources, the connection files you create and use have the .HSC and .HDC extension respectively. By default, they are named Wtrc.HSC and Wtrc.HDC, and are located in your haestad…Wtrc directory. In this case, these connections are shared between all your projects. You are also given the option to keep these connections local to your project. In this case, these files are placed in your current project directory with the same name as your .WCD file but with the .HSC and .HDC file extensions, respectively. For more information, see “Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects” on page 15-595 and “Sharing Database Connections between Projects” on page 15-584.

4-238


Starting a WaterCAD Project

4.1.4

Libraries Libraries are saved in separate files so they can be shared between projects. The paths are specified in the Engineering Library Manager (for more information, see “Engineering Library Manager” on page 14-564). They have an .HLB extension and are located by default in your Haestad\Wtrc directory.

4.1.5

Additional Files Note:

It is recommended to use a separate directory for every WaterCAD project on your computer to facilitate project management and backup.

WaterCAD creates additional files in the same directory as your .WCD file to save the calculation results. Since recalculating the scenarios can regenerate these results, these files do not necessarily need to be included when backing up your important files. However, if you are unsure, copy all files present in your project directory.

4.1.6

Old File Format Dialog Box This dialog box appears when opening a WaterCAD v5 or earlier project. It allows you to specify a new name for the project so that the older version of the file will be retained. If you choose to keep the existing file name, the new file will overwrite the existing one.

4.2

Import Command Note:

The current project remains in schematic mode when importing data. We have made every effort to prevent the loss of data during these imports. However, all imported data should be checked for accuracy. WaterCAD projects should be opened in WaterCAD, without using the Import command. However, once you save the project in WaterCAD, the project files cannot be opened in previous versions any longer.

The Import Network command allows you to import data from KYPIPE v1 (see “Importing KYPIPE Data” on page A-681), v2, or v3, EPANET v1 or v2 (see “Importing EPANET Files” on page A-681), and Cybernet (see “Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions” on page A-674). You will then be able to save this project as a WaterCAD project. The data is imported into an empty project. Therefore, before the data is imported, you will be prompted to save your current project if it contains WaterCAD elements.


4-239

Multiple Sessions

4.3

Multiple Sessions WaterCAD does not support multiple sessions. WaterCAD uses a single document model and support for multiple views has not been implemented. Therefore, do not try to open more than one session of WaterCAD at the same time or data loss and/or data corruption could occur.

4.4

Importing a Submodel Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives that have a common name will also be imported. In other words, input data will only be transferred from an alternative in the submodel to be imported to an alternative with the same name in the model you are importing to. For Example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like to transfer in a Physical Alternative named Larger Pipes. The model you want to import the submodel into must also have an Alternative named Larger Pipes for this data to be imported. If there is no Larger Pipes alternative in the project, no input data will be transferred and you will receive a warning message to this effect in the Status Log (for more information, see “Status Log” on page 13-561). Also note that the coordinate data associated with the submodel is retained and this data dictates the location that the submodel elements will appear in the model you are importing to. This can cause elements to overlap one another. Note:

If any element labels in the submodel are being used by elements in the project, you will be prompted to change these element labels. User-defined data and logical controls are not transferred during submodel import and export operations.

To import a submodel:

4-240

•

Click the File menu and select Import…Submodel.

•

In the Import WSM File dialog box, select the submodel file to be imported. Click the Open button.

•

Review the Status Log to ensure that all desired input data has been transferred.



4.5

Exporting a Submodel You can export a model, or any portion thereof, as a submodel for import into other projects. Input data is also stored in the .WSM file that is created in the process of Exporting a Submodel. This input data will only be imported to alternatives with the same name. For more information about input data transfer, see “Importing a Submodel” on page 4-240. To export a submodel: •

In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.

•

Click the File menu and select Export…Submodel.

•

In the Create WSM File dialog box, specify the directory to which the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.

•

Review the Status Log to ensure that no problems occurred during the export process (for more information, see “Status Log” on page 13-561). Note:

4.6

User-defined data and logical controls are not transferred during submodel import and export operations.

Project Management Project management includes:

4.6.1

•

“Project Setup Wizard” on page 4-241

•

“Project Summary” on page 4-242

Project Setup Wizard The Project Setup Wizard can only be accessed at the start of a new project. All of the options that are edited from the Wizard, however, can be changed individually from other menus. The Project Setup Wizard assists you in the creation of a new project by stepping you through many of the project-wide options, allowing you to set up most of your notes and defaults before you even create the first pipe. The areas covered by this Wizard include: Project Summary—Includes information about the project, such as the project title, the project engineer, and general comments. For more information, see “Project Summary” on page 4-242.


4-241

Options Project Options—Include information regarding global options, such as the desired friction method and coordinate system. For more information, see “Project Options” on page 4-244. Drawing Options—Include information regarding the drawing pane, such as the drawing scale and annotation multiplier. For more information, see “Drawing Options” on page 4-246. Prototypes—Enable you to set default values for elements, which are used to initialize values for any new elements that are added to the project. For more information, see “Prototypes” on page 6-322.

4.6.2

Project Summary The Summary dialog box provides a way to enter a Project Title, the name of the Project Engineer, and any significant comments (for example, the project revision history). The Date field defaults to the current day. To change any portion of the date, click the item to be changed (i.e., month field), then use the up and down arrows on the keyboard to set the date. The Project Title and Project Engineer will print in the footer of reports.

4.7

Options Options include:

4.7.1

•

“Global Options” on page 4-242

•

“Project Options” on page 4-244

•

“Drawing Options” on page 4-246

Global Options The Global Options dialog box allows you to customize the following options for this application:

4-242

•

“Welcome Dialog Box” on page 4-243 (Stand-Alone mode only)

•

“Unit System” on page 4-243

•

“Enter Key Behavior” on page 4-243

•

“Window Color” on page 4-244 (Stand-Alone mode only)

•

“Sticky Tools” on page 4-244 (Stand-Alone mode only)

•

“Auto Prompting” on page 4-244



Welcome Dialog Box The Welcome dialog box appears when the program is started, and provides easy access to common tasks you may want to perform when you first start using the program. The following options are available: •

“Tutorials” on page 1-42

•

Exit Program

You can choose whether to show the Welcome dialog box each time you start the program by selecting Beginner Welcome or Expert Hide Welcome in the Global Options dialog box, which can be accessed by selecting Tools > Options. The Welcome dialog box also provides a check box that you can use to disable it when the program starts.

Unit System Note:

If the file that you are editing in Stand-Alone mode is already associated with an AutoCAD drawing, be careful not to change the unit systems. Otherwise, the .DWG and the .WCD files may become irreversibly out of sync.

Although individual units can be controlled throughout the program, you may find it useful to change your entire unit system at once to either the System International (SI) unit system or the US Customary (English) system. When you switch to a different unit system, you will be asked to confirm this action. If you choose YES, all data will be displayed in the default unit for the selected system, and conversions will be done automatically.

Enter Key Behavior Enter Key Behavior controls how the Enter key functions during editing: •

CUA Enter Key—With this setting, the Enter key acts as it normally does for Windows applications. It conforms to Common User Access (CUA) standards. This means that when you press the Enter key, it is as though you pressed the default button on the dialog box. CUA Enter Key is the recommended setting.

•

Tabbing Enter Key—With this setting, the Enter key behaves the same as the Tab key for editable fields (not buttons). This means that when you press the Enter key, the cursor will move to the next field in the dialog box.


4-243

Options

Window Color You can specify the background and foreground colors of the main graphical window in Stand-Alone mode. The foreground color is the default color that is applied to all elements symbols, pipes, labels, and annotations when no color coding is defined. These color settings also apply to the Scenario Comparison window, but do not apply to the Profile or Graph Plot windows.

Sticky Tools Sticky Tools are available in Stand-Alone mode. With Sticky Tools disabled, the drawing pane cursor will return to the Select tool after creating a node or finishing a pipe run. With Sticky Tools enabled, the tool does not reset to the Select tool, allowing you to continue dropping new elements into the drawing without re-selecting the tool. The Sticky Tool Palette can be turned on or off to meet your needs and preferences.

Auto Prompting Auto Prompting allows you to immediately enter data as elements are added to the drawing, without interrupting the layout process. When Auto Prompting is active, the Auto Prompting dialog box will immediately appear when you add an element to the drawing. From the Auto Prompting dialog box, you can modify the element’s default label and access the remaining input data by clicking the associated Edit button. Auto Prompting can also be toggled off in this dialog box.

4.7.2

Project Options The Project Options dialog box allows you to set the following essential information about your project: •

“Friction Method Theory” on page 4-244

•

“Liquid Properties” on page 14-567

•

“Input Modes” on page 4-245

•

“Pipe Length Rounding” on page 4-246

Friction Method Theory The Friction Method option enables you to select the methodology for determining flow resistance and friction losses during calculations. Available methodologies include:

4-244


Starting a WaterCAD Project •

“Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729

•

“Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729

•

“Manning’s Equation” on page B-731

If you change the friction method after pipes have been entered into the network, the program will ask if you want to update the roughness values of those pipes. If you select Yes, the program will assign all pipes a new roughness that corresponds to the default roughness of the pipe material.

Liquid Note:

The kinematic viscosity is used in determining the friction coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method (see “DarcyWeisbach Equation” on page B-729).

You can specify the type of liquid transported by the network, the characteristics of which (kinematic viscosity and specific gravity) are defined in the Liquid Library (for more information, see “Liquid Properties” on page 14-567).

Input Modes WaterCAD supports several input modes to adjust data entry to your style or the needs of a particular project. •

Coordinates—Coordinates can be displayed either in X and Y format or as Northing and Easting. Whichever coordinate input mode is chosen will be active everywhere within the program (element editors, FlexTables, etc.; for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329).

•

Settings—This drop-down list allows you to set whether values on control conditions will be input in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure. Note that regardless of the mode you choose, the program will always display values in both hydraulic grade and pressure.

•

Tank Levels—This drop-down list allows you to set whether tank operating ranges will be input in terms of elevations (height above a datum elevation of 0) or levels (height above the wet well’s base elevation).


4-245

Options

Pipe Length Rounding Pipe length rounding is used to determine the level of precision desired for scaled pipe lengths. Pipe lengths will automatically be rounded according to the pipe length rounding value. Note:

This only affects the value as it appears in elemental editors, FlexTables, and so on. The actual length of the pipe figure in the drawing pane is not physically adjusted to force the pipe to a rounded length. A change to the pipe rounding length is not retroactive. Therefore, it will not affect existing pipes unless the User Defined Length is toggled off and then on again in the appropriate element editor.

For example, consider a pipe with an actual scaled length of 35.8 meters. If the pipe length rounding value is 1.0 meter, the program will assume the pipe length to be 36.0 meters.

4.7.3

Drawing Options The Drawing Options dialog box allows you to specify information regarding the graphical display of elements in the drawing pane, including: •

“Drawing Scale” on page 4-246

•

“Annotation Multipliers” on page 4-247

•

“Pipe Text” on page 4-248

•

“Symbol Visibility” on page 4-248

Drawing Scale You can set the scale that you want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is determined based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final presentation. You may choose either schematic or scaled mode to define the horizontal and vertical distance scales.

4-246

•

Schematic—Pipe lengths are not automatically initialized from their lengths in the drawing pane, but must be manually entered for each pipe.

•

Scaled—Pipe lengths are determined from the lengths of the pipe elements in the drawing pane.


Starting a WaterCAD Project –

HOR—Horizontal scale controls the scale of the plan view.

–

VER—Vertical scale controls the default elevation scale (for use in profiles, for example).

Scaled or schematic mode can be set on a pipe-by-pipe basis. This is useful when scaled mode is preferred, but an exaggerated scale is needed for layout of detailed piping arrangements. Whether the drawing is set in scaled or schematic mode automatically reflects the setting of the pipe prototype. While in schematic mode, Gravity Pipe Prototypes and Pressure Pipe Prototypes can be assigned a default length. When the drawing mode is scaled, pipe lengths do not need to be initialized from the prototype. Switching between scaled and schematic in either the Project Options or Pipe Prototype dialog boxes has no effect on existing pipes.

Annotation Multipliers Annotation multipliers allow you to change the size of symbols, labels and annotation text relative to the drawing scale. There is not a single annotation size that is going to work well with all projects and scales, so these values should be adjusted based on your judgment and the desired look of the finished drawings. •

Symbol Size—The number entered in this field will either increase or decrease the size of your symbols by the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2 would result in the symbol size being doubled. The program selects a default symbol height that corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in actual-world units, regardless of scale.

•

Text Height—The text height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the text associated with element labeling by the factor indicated. The program automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example, results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.

•

Annotation Height—The annotation height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the element annotation by the multiplier indicated. The program automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example, results in a text height (to scale) of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.

•

Pipe Text—Selecting the Align Text with Pipe box aligns the text with pipes.

In AutoCAD mode, if you change the Symbol Size, Text Height, or Annotation Height you will be prompted with the Text Positioning dialog box, which allows you to select one of the following options when applying the scaling operation.


4-247

Options •

Maintain current text positions—The current position of all the annotation will be maintained after the scale is changed.

•

Reset text to default positions—The annotation will be repositioned to the default position calculated by the program.

On the Text Positioning dialog box there is a check box that is labeled Don’t show this dialog box again. If you check this box, you will not be prompted with this dialog box until you turn it back on using one of the following commands at the AutoCAD command line: •

WTRCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using WaterCAD

•

STMCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using StormCAD

•

SWRCScaleChangeOptions—if you are using SewerCAD

Pipe Text The Align Text with Pipes toggle lets you specify whether you want the pipe labeling and annotations to be parallel to the pipe or horizontal.

Symbol Visibility Symbol visibility allows you to customize the drawing by turning specific layers on or off. Each drawing layer holds a particular type of graphical element, such as labels and annotation. To remove the graphical elements of a particular layer from the drawing view, clear the associated check box:

4-248

•

Show Labels—The label layer holds the labels for all network elements.

•

Show Graphic Annotations—Graphic annotation (see “Graphic Annotation” on page 13-557) includes lines, borders, and text (in Stand-Alone mode only).

•

Show Element Annotations—Element annotation (see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509) includes any dynamic annotation that is added to the project, such as through the Annotation Wizard, see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510.

•

Show Source Symbols—For a water quality analysis, a symbol may be displayed next to nodes that are defined as Constituent Sources.

•

Show Control Symbols—A symbol may be displayed next to pump, valve, and pipe elements with one or more controls, as defined in the Controls tab of the element editors.

•

Show Flow Arrows—Arrows indicating the flow direction may be displayed after calculations have been run.

•

Show Spot Elevations—Toggles on and off the display of spot elevations (see “Spot Elevations” on page 13-551).



Map Scale Factor A scale factor is used to proportion the size of the imported model into this program’s editing environment. The choice of this factor depends on the scale of the model being imported. If you find that the scale that you specified is not correct, you can make adjustments later. From the Tools > Options menu, select the Drawing tab to change the Scale, Symbol, and/or Text Multiplier.

4.7.4

Scenario Dataset Wizard The Scenario Dataset Wizard allows you to convert a WaterCAD Dataset into an ArcGIS personal geodatabase. This conversion must take place if you want to open, edit, or calculate the model in ArcCatalog or ArcMap. WaterCAD uses an open database format to store model data. Running the Scenario Dataset Wizard converts the data from the WaterCAD format to a geodatabase format, which is usable by ArcGIS. The converted data can be written to the same database that WaterCAD uses to store model data, or to another existing database.The wizard consists of the following steps: •

“Step 1—Specify Source Dataset and Target Geodatabase” on page 4-249

•

“Step 2—Specify Element Attributes to be Included” on page 4-250

•

“Step 3—Complete Scenario Wizard” on page 4-251

Step 1—Specify Source Dataset and Target Geodatabase In this step, a WaterCAD dataset is selected and either an existing geodatabase is chosen as the target for this data. The following controls compose this step of the wizard: In this step, a WaterCAD dataset is selected and an existing geodatabase is chosen as the target for this data. The following controls compose this step of the wizard: Template—This field allows a Scenario Template to be specified. Scenario templates store the settings that were used in a previous Scenario Dataset Wizard conversion. If you would like to customize the settings to be used by the Wizard, leave this field at the default value (DEFAULT.XML). In step three of the wizard, you will have the option tStand-Aloneo save your settings as a template, which can then be reused later. The Ellipsis (…) button next to the text field opens a browse dialog box. Output—This field allows the target geodatabase to be specified. This is the file that will be updated with the successful completion of the Scenario Dataset Wizard. To append the WaterCAD dataset to the new geodatabase, leave this field at the default value. To select an alternative geodatabase that was created previously, click the Ellipsis (...) button to open a browse dialog box.


4-249

Options Note:

A new geodatabase or WaterCAD database cannot be created by the Scenario Dataset Wizard. An existing geodatabase or WaterCAD database must be chosen in this step.

Input—This field allows the source WaterCAD dataset file (.MDB file) to be specified. The Ellipsis (…) button next to the text field opens a browse dialog box. Scenarios—This menu lists the Scenarios contained within the WaterCAD dataset. Each scenario that is selected here will be converted to an ESRI feature dataset in the target geodatabase that was selected in Step 1. Place a check in the box next to each of the scenarios you want to publish to ESRI feature dataset format. Note:

Scenarios that have already been published as feature datasets are not available for selection in the Scenarios list.

Change Settings—This button opens the ArcGIS Spatial Reference Properties dialog box. See ESRI’s ArcGIS documentation for more information about the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box.

Step 2—Specify Element Attributes to be Included Tip:

If you would like to change the designation used by a particular attribute in your GIS data (Column Name), this must be done outside of the Scenario Dataset Wizard. The Column Name fields of the Attribute Table are read-only.

This step allows you to choose the element attributes (and their associated units) that will be included in the target geodatabase that was specified in Step 1. Please note that only attributes that are selected in this step will be converted to personal geodatabase format. Therefore, attributes that are not selected for conversion in this step will not be available for use in ArcCatalog or ArcMap. This step consists of the following controls: Element Pane—This pane contains a list of WaterCAD element types. Highlighting an element displays the currently selected attributes in the Attribute Table. Feature Class Name—This field specifies the label that will be associated with the corresponding feature class in the ArcMap and ArcCatalog clients. Select Attributes—This button opens the Select Attributes dialog box. See “Select Attributes Dialog Box” on page 4-251 for more information. Attribute Table—This table lists the attributes that will be included in the feature class that is currently highlighted in the Element Pane. The table lists the WaterCAD Attribute, the geodatabase column label, and the unit associated with the attribute in that row. Only the unit can be modified in this table—clicking the desired unit cell activates a menu that lists the units available for that attribute type.

4-250



Step 3—Complete Scenario Wizard This step the final settings are specified, including the following: Selection Set—Clicking this button opens the Selection Set dialog box, allowing you to select for use only the elements contained within a previously created selection set. See “Selection Set Options” on page 4-251 for more information. Linear Unit—This drop-down allows you to select the units of measurement used for distances and lengths in the model. Save Settings—Clicking this check box will save the currently specified settings as a Scenario Template, which can be used in Step 1 of the Scenario Dataset Wizard.

4.7.5

Selection Set Options This dialog box allows you to select for use by the Scenario Dataset Wizard only the elements contained within a previously created selection set. The dialog box comprises the following controls:

4.7.6

•

Use Selection Set (Check Box)—Placing a check in this check box activates the Use Selection Set menu.

•

Use Selection Set (Menu)—This menu allows the previously created selection set to be specified.

Select Attributes Dialog Box This dialog box consists of two panes and four buttons. The left pane displays a list of the available attributes and the right pane lists the selected attributes. The following buttons are used to manipulate the attributes between the two panes. [>]—Moves the currently selected attribute from the left (available) pane to the right (selected) pane. [>>]—Moves all of the attributes from the left (available) pane to the right (selected) pane. [<]—Moves the currently selected attribute from the right (selected) pane to the left (available) pane. [<<]—Moves all of the attributes from the right (selected) pane to the left (available) pane.


4-251

FlexUnits

4.8

FlexUnits FlexUnits (the ability to control units, display precision, etc.) are available from almost anywhere within Haestad Methods’ software, including element dialog boxes, FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), and the FlexUnits Manager (see “FlexUnits Manager” on page 4-254).

4.8.1

Field Options Most dialog boxes provide access to FlexUnits to set options such as unit, rounding, and scientific notation for any field in the dialog box. To set the display options for a unitized attribute: 1. Right-click the field, and select Properties from the shortcut menu. The Set Field Options dialog box will appear. 2. Set the options you want for your units. 3. Click OK to set the options for the field, or Cancel to leave without making changes. You will be able to change the following characteristics: •

“Units” on page 4-253

•

“Display Precision” on page 4-253

•

“Scientific Notation” on page 4-253

•

“Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value” on page 4-254 Tip:

You can see the results of your changes in the preview at the top of the dialog box.

Some attributes do not have theoretical minimum or maximum values, and others may have an acceptable range governed by calculation restrictions or physical impossibilities. For these attributes, minimum and maximum allowable values may not be applicable.

4-252



4.8.2

Units Units are the method of measurement displayed for the attribute. To change units, click the choice list, then click the desired unit. The list is not limited to either SI or US customary units, so you can mix unit systems within the same project. FlexUnits are intelligent—the units actually have meaning. When you change units, the displayed value is converted to the new unit so the underlying magnitude of the attribute remains the same. For example, a length of 100.0 ft. is not converted to a length of 100.0 m or 100.0 in. It is correctly converted to 30.49 m or 1200.0 in.

4.8.3

Display Precision The precision setting can be used to control the number of digits displayed after the decimal point, or the rounding of numbers.

Number of Digits Displayed After Decimal Point Enter 0 or a positive number to specify the number of digits after the decimal point. For example, if the display precision is set to 3, a value of 123.456789 displays as 123.457. This works the same regardless of whether scientific notation is active.

Rounding Note:

Display precision is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy.

Enter a negative number to specify rounding to the nearest power of 10. (-1) rounds to the nearest 10, (-2) rounds to the nearest 100, and so on. For example, if the display precision is set to (-3), a value of 1234567.89 displays as 1235000.

4.8.4

Scientific Notation Note:

Scientific Notation is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy.

Scientific notation displays the number as a real number beginning with an integer or real value, followed by the letter e and an integer (possibly preceded by a sign). Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off. A check will appear in the box to indicate that this setting is turned on.


4-253

FlexUnits

4.8.5

Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value Note:

These allowable minimums and maximums are only available for certain parameters.

Minimum and maximum values are used to control the allowable range for an attribute, and are used for validation of input. For example, some coefficient values might typically range between 0.09 and 0.20. A frequent input error is to misplace the decimal point when entering a value. If you enter a number that is less than the minimum allowed value, a warning message will be displayed. This helps reduce the number of input errors. You may change this number in cases where you find the default limits too restrictive.

4.8.6

FlexUnits Manager Note:

The display units can also be changed from several other areas in the program, and any changes are project-wide. For example, if length is changed from units of feet to meters, all dialog boxes will display length in meters. If you change the units in the dialog box from meters to yards, the FlexUnits Manager will indicate that length is in yards.

The FlexUnits Manager allows you to set the parameters for all the units used. The dialog box consists of the following columns:

4-254

•

Attribute Type—Parameter measured by the unit.

•

Unit—Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type, click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option also allows you to use both US Customary and SI units in the same worksheet.

•

System—Set the system of units. Click the system column for the desired unit, and a button will appear. Click the button, and set the unit system to U.S. or SI.

•

Display Precision—Rounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point. This feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off.

•

Scientific Notation—Displays numbers in scientific notation. Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off. If it is turned on, a check mark appears in the box.


Chapter

5

Layout and Editing Tools The layout and editing tools allow you to select elements to perform various graphical or editing operations, locate particular elements, review the network for potential problems, label or relabel elements, review your data, or define any new type of data.

5.1

Graphical Editor Graphical Editor includes:

5.1.1

•

“Using the Graphical Editor” on page 5-255

•

“Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor” on page 5-256

•

“Creating New Elements” on page 5-256

•

“Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node” on page 5257

•

“Morphing Elements” on page 5-258

•

“Splitting Pipes” on page 5-258

•

“Selecting Elements” on page 5-259

•

“Editing Elements” on page 5-261

•

“Other Tools” on page 5-262

Using the Graphical Editor One of the most powerful features of the graphical editor, both in Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes, is the ability to create (see “Creating New Elements” on page 5256), move (see “Moving Elements” on page 5-262), edit (see “Editing Elements” on page 5-261), and delete (see “Deleting Elements” on page 5-262) network elements graphically. With these capabilities, working with your model becomes a simple point and click exercise. The online tutorials and Lesson 1 have step-by-step instructions for performing common tasks in the graphical editor. For more information, see “Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-87.


5-255

Graphical Editor

5.1.2

Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor Note:

As you place your mouse over each element, a tooltip is displayed informing you of the element’s label and annotations. This feature is useful when the element labels have been turned off or when the drawing view is zoomed out.

Most network editing tasks can be performed using only your mouse:

5.1.3

•

“Creating New Elements” on page 5-256

•

“Selecting Elements” on page 5-259

•

“Editing Elements” on page 5-261

•

“Moving Elements” on page 5-262

•

“Deleting Elements” on page 5-262

•

“Graphic Annotation” on page 13-557

Creating New Elements The tool palette contains all of the tools necessary for adding a network Element to the drawing. These element tools include: Pipe Layout Tool—Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs. Pressure Junction Tool—Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow. Junctions are also where chemical constituents can enter the network. Tank Tool—Tanks are a type of Storage Node. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation.

5-256


Layout and Editing Tools

Reservoir Tool—Reservoirs are a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation. Pump Tool—Pumps are elements that add head to the system as water passes through. A Pump is represented as a node. Valve Tool—Valves are elements that open, throttle, or close to satisfy a condition you specify. A valve is represented as a node. Spot Elevation Tool—In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes. Although elements can be inserted individually, the most rapid method of network creation is through the Pipe Layout tool. The Pipe Layout tool enables you to connect existing nodes with new pipes, but also allows you to create new nodes as you lay out the pipes. For example, when the Pipe Layout tool is active, clicking within the drawing pane will insert a node. Clicking again at another location will insert another node and connect the two with a pipe. Use the online tutorials to experience it interactively.

5.1.4

Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node While laying out a network, you may need to change the type of node that the Pipe Layout tool inserts. This can be done very easily by following the steps outlined below: Note:

The cursor appearance will change to reflect the type of node to be inserted.

With the Pipe Layout tool active, right-click in the drawing pane. •

A shortcut menu will appear with a list of available element types.

•

Select an element type from the shortcut menu.


5-257

Graphical Editor

5.1.5

Morphing Elements Occasionally, you may find that you need to replace a node with a different type of node. You can make this change through a process called morphing. Morphing enables you to change an existing network node type, without having to delete and re-create the node and all of its connecting links. Information types that are common between the existing and new elements will be copied into the new element. To morph an existing element into a different type of element:

5.1.6

•

Select the new element type from the Tool Palette.

•

In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the old element and click the left mouse button.

•

You will be prompted to verify that you want to morph. Answer Yes to perform the morph, or answer no and a new element will be added at the specified location. If you accidentally morph an element, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.

Splitting Pipes You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new node in the middle of an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new inlet to capture excessive surface flow in StormCAD, a new junction to represent additional demand in WaterCAD, or a new manhole to maintain maximum access hole spacing in SewerCAD. You can split existing pipes by inserting a node along the pipe as follows: From the Tool Palette, select the node type. •

In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe and click.

•

You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to split the pipe. If you choose to split the pipe, the node will be inserted and two new pipes will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are split proportionally).

•

If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of the pipe without connecting to anything.

If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo. You can also split an existing pipe with an existing node. To do this, drag the node into position along the pipe to be split. After the node is placed over the point along the pipe where you want the split to occur, right-click the node and select Split from the context menu (where is the name of the pipe to be split).

5-258



5.1.7

Pipe Disconnect / Reconnect In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe connectivity, pipes may have been connected to the wrong nodes. You can disconnect a pipe from an adjacent node and then reconnect it to another existing node using the right-click context menu, as follows: 1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected. 2. A context menu will appear. Two reconnect options will be displayed, one for each of the end nodes of the pipe. Select the node from which you want to disconnect the pipe. 3. A broken line will appear, joining the node from which the pipe is being disconnected and your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the junction to which you would like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button. The pipe will now be connected to this junction.

5.1.8

Selecting Elements You can select one element or a group of elements from drawing pane on which to perform various operations such as moving (see “Moving Elements” on page 5-262), deleting (see “Deleting Elements” on page 5-262), and editing (“Editing Elements” on page 5-261).

Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode) •

In Stand-Alone model activate the Select tool.

•

To select a single element, click the desired element. To select a group of elements, click the drawing pane and drag the mouse to form a selection box around the elements you want to select, then click again to choose the other corner of the selection box. All elements that are fully enclosed within the selection box will be selected.

To toggle the selected status of one or more elements, you can follow the same instructions as above while holding down the Shift key. There are also additional ways to select elements through the Edit menu. When an element is selected in the Stand-Alone drawing pane, it will be displayed with at least one grip. A grip is a black box, as shown below, that indicates the figure’s insertion point. The label of a selected item, or the number of selected items, will be displayed in the status bar.


5-259

Graphical Editor

Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode) Within AutoCAD, the Select tool does not need to be active when making a selection. Use the standard AutoCAD selection techniques. AutoCAD also offers a variety of other selection methods that are outlined in the AutoCAD documentation. When an element is selected in AutoCAD, it may be displayed as a dashed line, and the grips may become visible, as shown below. The exact display depends on how the element was selected and the value of the AutoCAD variable GRIPS.

Other Graphical Selection Functions Other graphical selection functions include: •

“Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260

•

“Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-261

•

“Select From Drawing Button” on page 5-261

Single Element Selection Dialog Box Use the Select Element dialog box to select a single element from your model.

5-260

•

Elements—The Elements drop-down list acts as a filter for the elements displayed in the available element display pane. Select an element type here to only display elements of that type, or select if you want all element types to be displayed.

•

Ellipsis Button (…)—Opens the Selection Set dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264).

•

Select From Drawing—This button returns you to the drawing pane to allow you to visually select an element. When an element is clicked in the drawing view, you are returned to the Select Element dialog box, where the element that was clicked will be highlighted.


Layout and Editing Tools Calibration Group Selection Dialog Box This dialog box is very similar to the Selection Set dialog box, with one exception: Once an element has been added to a group, it cannot be included in any other groups. For more information, see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264. Select From Drawing Button The Select From Drawing button allows you to graphically select elements. Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to deactivate. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a menu that allows you to select Done, which will bring you back to the dialog box in which you initially clicked the Select From Drawing button.

5.1.9

Editing Elements There are several methods for editing network element data, including Quick Edit (see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273), FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), and the Alternative Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347). You can also import data using Database Connections (see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571). Perhaps the most common method of changing element data, however, is from an individual element’s editor dialog box. To edit a single element, use the Select tool. To edit a single element, double-click the element, and the Editor dialog box will open. Alternatively, you can right-click the element and select Edit… from the shortcut menu.

In AutoCAD 2000/2002, the process is slightly different. First, click the Select tool, then click the element you wish to edit. If you are using AutoCAD 2000/2002, you can also right-click to activate the shortcut context menu or double-click the element to be edited. Right-click context menus can provide easy access to common functions and actions. In AutoCAD 2000i, as in Stand-Alone, you can also double-click the element to bring up its editor.


5-261

Graphical Editor

Moving Elements You can change the location of elements easily. The first step is to select the elements to be moved. Next, click to drag the element and release the mouse button to drop the element at its new location. In AutoCAD mode, you can accomplish this by dragging the grips. When a node is moved to a new location, all connected pipes will remain attached, and pipe lengths will automatically update (unless the pipe has a userdefined length or you are working in schematic mode). Tip:

For more information regarding moving elements within AutoCAD, please refer to your Autodesk documentation.

In the same fashion, you can graphically change the location of element labels and annotation relative to the element. A node element can also be moved by editing its coordinates in the element’s editor, in FlexTables, or through database connections.

Deleting Elements To delete elements, select the elements to be deleted, and press the Delete key. Note that the integrity of the network is automatically maintained when deletions are performed. This means that when a node is deleted, any connecting pipes are also deleted to prevent dangling pipes that would cause the network to be invalid. There are also several other methods of deleting elements, including selecting Edit > Delete, or typing ERASE at AutoCAD’s command line.

5.1.10

Other Tools Although this product is primarily a modeling application, some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation. AutoCAD, of course, provides a tremendous number of drafting tools. In Stand-Alone mode, drafting and annotation tools allow you to add polylines (multi-segmented lines), rectangles, and text to the drawing pane.

5-262



5.2

Selection Sets Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. Selection sets are defined through the Selection Set Manager by selecting Tools > Selection Sets. Selection sets includes:

5.2.1

•

“Selection Sets Manager” on page 5-263

•

“New Selection Set” on page 5-263

•

“Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264

•

“Duplicate Selection Set” on page 5-264

•

“Rename Selection Set” on page 5-264

•

“Selection Set Notes” on page 5-264

•

“Delete Selection Set” on page 5-264

Selection Sets Manager The Selection Sets Manager is used to create, edit, and duplicate selection sets. The following options are available after clicking the Selection Set button:

5.2.2

•

Add—Add a new selection set.

•

Edit—Edit an existing selection set.

•

Duplicate—Copy an existing selection set.

•

Delete—Delete an existing selection set.

•

Rename—Rename an existing selection set.

•

Notes—Add a note regarding the selection set.

New Selection Set After clicking Add in the Selection Set Manager, a dialog box opens. Enter the name of your new selection set in the dialog box. Click OK to name the selection set, or Cancel to exit the dialog box without creating a selection set.


5-263

Selection Sets

5.2.3

Selection Set Dialog Box In this dialog box, you will notice two panes. A listing of all the elements in the network is displayed in the Available Items pane. To add items to the Selected Items pane, select the desired elements in the available list and click the [>] button under Add. To add all the elements to your selection set, click the [>>] button. Additionally, you can use the Select button to highlight items in the Available Items pane using a variety of powerful selection techniques, or by graphically selecting elements from the drawing. The button also lets you invert the current selection set, thereby canceling items already selected and selecting items that are not already selected. You can also clear the selected items using the Select button. The features mentioned above are also available to remove items from the Selected Items pane. There is also a Select From Drawing button. Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to include in the selection set. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button brings you back to the Selection Set dialog box.

5.2.4

Duplicate Selection Set Click Duplicate to make a copy of the highlighted selection set.

5.2.5

Rename Selection Set Click Rename to open a dialog box that allows you to change the name of the highlighted selection set.

5.2.6

Selection Set Notes Click Notes to input free form paragraph text that will be associated with the highlighted selection set.

5.2.7

Delete Selection Set Click Delete to delete the highlighted selection set. This only deletes the selection set and not the actual elements.

5-264



5.3

Find Element This is a powerful feature that allows you to quickly locate any element in the drawing by its label. It performs a case insensitive search. The Find Element feature is available from the Edit menu on the main window. To find an element: Choose Edit > Find Element.

5.4

•

Type the label of the element you wish to find, or click the list box to choose from a sorted list of elements in the system.

•

You may wish to choose a Zoom Factor from the list provided. 100% is the default Zoom Factor. If you wish to magnify the view of the drawing, then choose a Zoom Factor greater than 100%. To decrease the view of the drawing, choose a Zoom Factor less than 100%.

•

Click OK to select the highlighted element.

Zooming Zooming controls how large or small a drawing appears on the screen. Zooming is helpful when you want to enlarge the display to see the drawing’s details, or to reduce the display to see an entire drawing. Zooming does not change the actual size of the drawing, only the size of the current view. Tip:

You can use the Plus key (+) and the Minus key (-) on the numeric keyboard as a shortcut for zooming in and out respectively (Stand-Alone mode only). You can also zoom in and out by holding down the ctrl key and using the mouse wheel.

From the View menu or the toolbars, you can perform the following zoom operations: Zoom In

Enlarge the view of the drawing.

Zoom Out

Decrease the view of the drawing.


5-265

Zooming

5.4.1

Zoom Window

Choose the portion of the drawing to fit in the window by drawing a selection box around it.

Zoom Extents

Bring all elements in the drawing into view.

Zoom Previous

Return to the most recent view of the drawing.

Zoom Center

Center the location of specific coordinates within the drawing pane. (For more information, see “Zoom Center” on page 5-266.)

Zoom Center The Zoom Center dialog box provides you with a quick way to zoom to any area of your drawing. This feature is useful if you want to start laying out a network around certain coordinates, or if you know the coordinates of an existing element that you would like to locate. To use Zoom Center:

5.4.2

•

Select View > Zoom Center.

•

In the Zoom Center dialog box, enter the coordinates to which you would like to zoom.

•

Select a zoom factor if you would like to increase or decrease the magnification.

•

Click OK, and the specified coordinates will be located at the center of the drawing.

Aerial View The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting View > Aerial View. A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navigation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.

5-266


Layout and Editing Tools You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan, click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again to specify the second corner. •

In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.

•

In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View > Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.

The Aerial View window contains the following buttons: •

Zoom Extents—Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.

•

Zoom In—Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.

•

Zoom Out—Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window.

To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.

5.5

Drawing Review Drawing review includes:

5.5.1

•

“Drawing Review Window” on page 5-267

•

“Selection Tolerance” on page 5-269

Drawing Review Window The Drawing Review window allows you to quickly navigate to and review any group of elements. This tool is particularly useful for finding potential problems in a network. These problems may result from data entry errors or data discrepancies in the source (database, shapefile, or CAD drawing) from which a model was imported. By default, when the Drawing Review window opens, all elements will appear in the list. You can work with any subset of elements by choosing one of the following items: •

Select > Custom—Allows you to choose any set of elements to review using the Selection Set dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264).


5-267

Drawing Review •

Select > All Elements—Automatically selects all available elements.

•

Select > Nodes in Close Proximity—Allows you to select all nodes that are within a user-defined tolerance of another node. The tolerance is defined in the Nodes in Close Proximity dialog box, which opens when this option is selected. This tool is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems. For example, if two nodes are close to each other they may actually be the same node, and one of them needs to be deleted.

•

Select > Pipe-Split Candidates—Allows you to find nodes that are closer to a pipe than a user-defined tolerance, but are not connected to the system. The tolerance is defined in the Pipe-Split Candidates dialog box, which opens when this option is selected. This option is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems.

•

Select > Orphaned Nodes—Allows you to select all orphaned nodes in your network. A node is an orphan when it is not connected to any pipe.

•

Select > Elements with Messages—Allows you to select all the elements that have warnings or error messages, appearing in the Messages tab (see “Messages Tab” on page 6-317) of an Element Editor dialog box. This is useful for correcting data entry errors.

•

Select > Pipes Missing Nodes—Allows you to select all pipes that are missing a terminal node.

•

Select > Clear Drawing Review Messages—Allows you to reset Drawing Review messages for all elements in the list. Drawing Review messages are automatically added during various Import operations such as Polyline to Pipe Import and Land Development Desktop Import (SewerCAD or StormCAD only). After you review and fix these problems, you may want to clear the review messages. If you want to retain some of the drawing review messages, remove those elements from the list prior to performing this operation.

•

Create Selection Set—Allows you to create a new selection set. After selecting this option, a dialog box will appear allowing you to name the selection set. After clicking OK in this dialog box, the Selection Set dialog box will appear. (See “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264.)

The elements you select will appear in the primary list located along the left side of the Drawing Review window.

5-268

•

Go To—To navigate to an element, select the desired element in the list and press the Go To button.

•

Next/Prev—To navigate to the elements sequentially, use the Next or Prev buttons.

•

Zoom—You can control the degree to which the drawing review zooms into the selected element by choosing a zoom factor from the field labeled Zoom, located in the lower right corner of the dialog box.


Layout and Editing Tools Tip:

You can double-click an element in the list to quickly navigate to that element. If you know the name of the element to which you wish to navigate, type the label in the field located above the element list and click the Go To button. All menus and toolbars will remain available even when the Drawing Review window is open. This allows you to navigate to and fix any problems that you find.

Use the Drawing Review window in conjunction with the QuickView window (see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273) to review the data for the selected elements.

5.5.2

Selection Tolerance Some select operations require you to specify a tolerance for defining which nodes will be selected for the Drawing Review window (for more information, see “Drawing Review Window” on page 5-267).

5.6

•

Elements in Close proximity—If the distance between the elements in the drawing is within the specified tolerance, those elements will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window.

•

Pipe Split Candidates—If the distance between a node and a pipe is within the specified tolerance, it will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window.

Relabel Elements Relabel elements includes: •

“Relabel Elements Dialog Box” on page 5-270

•

“Relabel Operations” on page 5-270

•

“Elements Selected” on page 5-271


5-269

Relabel Elements

5.6.1

Relabel Elements Dialog Box Element relabeling allows you to modify the labels of a selected set of elements. This feature is especially useful with a model built from a database that uses numeric IDs to identify elements, making it difficult to distinguish between the different types of elements in the system. With element relabeling, you can quickly append a prefix such as ‘P-’ to all pipes in your system so that it is obvious which labels belong to elements representing pipes. The Relabel Elements dialog box contains two sections:

5.6.2

•

Relabel Operations—Allows you to select and define the operations you want to perform. For more information, see “Relabel Operations” on page 5-270.

•

Elements Selected—Allows you to select which elements in your project you want to relabel. For more information, see “Elements Selected” on page 5-271.

Relabel Operations The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list presents a description of the available element relabel operations.

5-270

•

Replace—This operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For instance, if you selected elements with labels P-1, P-2, P-12, and J-5, you could replace all the Ps with the word Pipe by entering P in the Find field, Pipe in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting labels are Pipe-1, Pipe-2, Pipe-12, and J-5. You can also use this operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the original labels. You can enter ipe in the Find field and leave the Replace With field blank to reproduce the labels P1, P-2, P-12, and J-5. There is also the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case field.

•

Renumber—This operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix, prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the labels P-1, P-4, P-10, and Pipe-12, you could use this feature to renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix P- and a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is incremented, 5, is entered


Layout and Editing Tools in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply button to produce the following labels: P-05-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1, and P-20-Z1. •

Append—This operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and 20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually pipes in Zone 1 of your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and suffix, such as P- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels P5-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1 and P-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.

The selection set of elements on which the relabel operation is to be performed can be selected in the Elements section of the Relabel Elements dialog box.

5.6.3

Elements Selected The Elements section contains a pane that lists the elements to be relabeled. You can select the set of elements that appears in this pane by clicking the Select button. This accesses the Selection Set dialog box (see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264), where you can pick a set of elements from all the elements currently in the project. For the Append and Replace operations, the order that the elements appear in the text pane does not affect the results of the operation. However, for the Renumber operation, the order in which the elements appear in the text pane determines the order in which they will be renumbered. The default order in which the elements appear in the text pane is in the alphanumeric order of the element labels, called Ascending Order. If you wish to change this order, click the Sort button, and select Network Order to put the elements in the order they appear in the network, Descending Order to put them in reverse alphanumeric order, or Ascending Order to put them back in alphanumeric order.

5.7

Element Labeling Element labeling includes: •

“Element Labeling Dialog Box” on page 5-272

•

“Moving Element Labels and Annotation” on page 5-273


5-271

Element Labeling

5.7.1

Element Labeling Dialog Box The Element Labeling dialog box is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new elements as they are added to the network. The following options are available: •

Element—View the type of element to which the label applies.

•

Next—Enter the integer you want to use as the starting value for the ID number portion of the label. The program will generate labels beginning with this number, and will choose the first available unique label.

•

Increment—Enter the integer that will be added to the ID number after each element is created to yield the number for the next element.

•

Prefix—Enter the letters or numbers that will appear in front of the ID number for the elements in your network.

•

Digits—Enter the minimum number of digits that the ID number will have. For instance, 1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would be 01, 10, and 100.

•

Suffix—Enter the letters or numbers that will appear after the ID number for the elements in your network.

•

Preview—View an example of what the label will look like based on the information you have entered in the previous fields.

Changes to the element labeling specifications will only affect the numbering of new elements. Existing elements will not be affected. In order to adjust the numbering of existing elements, utilize the Relabel Elements option accessible from the Tools menu (for more information, see “Relabel Elements Dialog Box” on page 5-270). You can control the angle at which the text flips from one side of the pipe to the other to read in the opposite direction, when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical. By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees, measured counter-clockwise from the vertical. You may modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the HAESTAD.INI file that is located in the program file of your Haestad directory, and specifying the angle at which the text should flip. The angle is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical. For instance, if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should add the following line to the HAESTAD.INI file: Note:

Pipe labeling can be aligned with the pipes or be displayed horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog box (for more information, see “Pipe Text” on page 4-248).

TextFlipAngle=0.0 Reasonable values typically fall in the range 15.0 deg to -15.0 deg.

5-272



5.7.2

Moving Element Labels and Annotation Note:

To select multiple lines of annotation, Shift+ click them.

When multiple lines of annotation are present, you can move all lines as a group by clicking and holding the left mouse button and dragging the labels to the desired position. If you want to move these labels individually, click one of the lines of annotation to highlight them. You will notice highlighted grips in the middle of each line. Click this grip, hold down the mouse button, and drag to move a single line of annotation to the desired location.

5.8

Quick Edit The Quick Edit window gives you a fast way to edit or view the data associated with any element in the network without having to open the element dialog box. This floating window includes input and output information for any element that you have selected. It also includes a convenient color-coding legend. These tabs are available: •

Input—Contains input data for the selected element.

•

Output—Contains output data for the selected element.

•

Legend—Displays ranges of the active color-coding. Note:

Use the resize bar at the top of the Quick Edit window to change the size of the Label, Value, and Unit columns on the Input/ Output tabs. You can highlight an Input/Output attribute by clicking the label of that attribute, which provides better visual feedback (e.g., when monitoring =pressures at several nodes).

When the Quick Edit window is open, the data for an entity will immediately be displayed when you select it (see “Selecting Elements” on page 5-259) within the graphical editor. Once an element has been selected, click any editable field on the Input tab to edit the associated value. Edits will be committed when you leave the Quick Edit window. Changes made through the Quick Edit window can be undone/ redone by accessing the Edit menu.


5-273

Quick Edit

5-274


Chapter

6

Hydraulic Element Editors This section presents a detailed look at the input and output data for each type of element used in a WaterCAD project and the way it is organized in the graphical user interface. First, a description of the elements used to model the water distribution network is provided, including prototypes as a way to initialize new model elements with default values. Then, the user data extension, which allows you to add your own attributes to any element, and the Zone Manager, which allows you to group modeling elements into zones, are described. Note:

A water distribution system model will not be considered valid for calculation if the number of pipes exceeds the licensed size. To determine how many pipes you are licensed for, choose the Help > About WaterCAD menu item. Click the Registration button to view the size that has been licensed. If the total number of pipes exceeds the licensed size, the project will not calculate.

The primary component of a WaterCAD project is the network model. The element types that are used to form a network models are: •

Pressure Pipes—Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs to each other. The only way for water to travel from one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes. For more information, see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277.

•

Pressure Junctions—Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands, water can enter the network as an inflow, or chemical constituents can enter the network. For more information, see “Pressure Junction Editor” on page 6-277.

•

Tanks—Tanks are a type of Storage Node. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation. Tanks can have either a circular or irregular cross section. For more information, see “Tank Editor” on page 6-278.


6-275

Element Editors

6.1

•

Reservoirs—A reservoir is a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation, unless an HGL Pattern has been applied to the reservoir. Reservoirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes, streams, and wells. When an HGL pattern is applied, reservoirs can also be used to represent tidal activity and connections to other systems where the pressure varies over time. For more information, see “Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279.

•

Valves—A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you specify. It is represented in WaterCAD as a node. For more information, see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281.

•

Pumps—A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through. It is typically defined by a pump curve and control elevations, which turn the pump on or off. It is represented in WaterCAD as a node. For more information, see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279.

Element Editors Element editors includes:

6.1.1

•

“Using Element Editors” on page 6-276

•

“Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277

•

“Pressure Junction Editor” on page 6-277

•

“Tank Editor” on page 6-278

•

“Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279

•

“Pump Editor” on page 6-279

•

“Valve Editor” on page 6-281

Using Element Editors Note:

Element data may also be viewed/edited more efficiently through FlexTables (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), which display all the data in customizable tabular format, allowing you to perform functions such as sorting, filtering, and global editing. The data may also be quickly reviewed and edited through the Quick Edit window (see “Quick Edit” on page 5-273).

The Element Editors allow you to edit all input data and view all calculated output data defining a single network element.

6-276


Hydraulic Element Editors

6.1.2

Pressure Pipe Editor The pressure pipe editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

6.1.3

•

General—General pipe information including dimensions and physical characteristics data, as well as hydraulic results. For more information, see “Tank General Tab” on page 6-287.

•

Controls—Control data used to specify whether the pipe is open or closed at a specified simulation time or based on the HGL or pressure at any node in the system. For more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372). For more information, see “Quality Tab” on page 6307.

•

Capital Cost—Cost Analysis input/output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations. For more information, see “Capital Cost Tab” on page 6-313.

•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the pipe installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6316.

•

Messages—Calculation messages, such as warnings or error messages, and notes and descriptions that you enter. For more information, see “Messages Tab” on page 6-317.

Pressure Junction Editor The pressure junction editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs: •

General—General junction information including geographical data and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Pressure Junctions General Tab” on page 6-286.

•

Demand—Assignment of demands or inflows to junction elements in order to simulate water leaving or entering the network. Inflows and demands consist of a baseline flow rate and an associated Fixed or Extended Period Simulation (EPS) Pattern. For more information, see “Load” on page 6-300.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box. For more information, see “Tank General Tab” on page 6-287.

•

Fire Flow—Contains fire flow input and output data. For more information, see “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311.


6-277

Element Editors

6.1.4

•


•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the junction installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-316.

•


Tank Editor WaterCAD allows you to define tanks with either fixed or variable sections. Note:

For steady-state simulations, a tank is considered to have a constant water surface elevation, similar to a reservoir.

The tank editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

6-278

•

General—General tank information including geographical data and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Tank General Tab” on page 6-287.

•

Demand—Assignment of demands or inflows to tank elements in order to simulate water leaving or entering the network. For more information, see “Load” on page 6-300.

•

Section—Data defining the geometric characteristics of the tank and its operating level range. For more information, see “Tank Section” on page 6-303.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372). For more information, see “Quality Tab” on page 6307.

•


•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the tank installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6316.

•




6.1.5

Reservoir Editor The reservoir editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

6.1.6

•

General—General reservoir information including geographical data and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Reservoirs General Tab” on page 6288.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372 and “Quality Tab” on page 6-307).

•


•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the reservoir installation date or other GIS data. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6-316.

•


Pump Editor A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through it. This software can currently be used to model six different pump types (see “Constant Horsepower Pumps” on page B-725): •

Constant Power

•

Design Point (One-Point)

•

Standard (Three-Point)

•

Standard Extended

•

Custom Extended

•

Multiple Point


6-279

Element Editors Note:

Avoid using constant power or design point pumps except for preliminary estimates. They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points. It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream of a pump, because the pump elements in WaterCAD, by default, have built-in check valves that prevent reverse flow.

The pump editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

6-280

•

General—General pump information including geographical data, pump curve data, initial settings, and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Pump General Tab” on page 6-289.

•

VSP—Variable speed pump settings. For more information, see “VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab” on page 6-317.

•

Controls—Data specifying the on/off elevation settings of the pump, as well as relative speed factor settings in the case of a variable speed pump. For more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305.

•

Energy—This tab contains the pump efficiency input for use in Energy Cost analysis. For more information, see “Energy Tab” on page 6-319.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372 and “Quality Tab” on page 6-307).

•


•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the pump installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6316.

•




6.1.7

Valve Editor A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you specify. This software can model several different types of valves. The behavior of a valve is determined by the upstream (From Pipe) and downstream (To Pipe) conditions. The valve types include: •

Pressure Reducer Valve (PRV)—PRVs throttle to prevent the downstream hydraulic grade from exceeding a set value. If the downstream grade rises above the set value, the PRV will close. If the head upstream is lower than the valve setting, the valve will open fully.

•

Pressure Sustaining Valve (PSV)—PSVs throttle to prevent the upstream hydraulic grade from dropping below a set value. If the upstream grade is lower than the set grade, the valve will close completely.

•

Pressure Breaker Valve (PBV)—PBVs are used to force a specified pressure (head) drop across the valve. These valves do not automatically check flow and will actually boost the pressure in the direction of reverse flow to achieve a downstream grade that is lower than the upstream grade by a set amount.

•

Flow Control Valve (FCV)—FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe).

•

Throttle Control Valve (TCV)—TCVs are used as controlled minor losses. A TCV is a valve that has a minor loss associated with it where the minor loss can change in magnitude according to the controls that are implemented for the valve.

•

General Purpose Valve (GPV)—GPVs are used to model situations and devices where the flow-to-headloss relationship is specified by you rather than using the standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention (RPBP) valves, well draw-down behavior, and turbines. Tip:

You can change a valve from one type to another by a process called morphing. Just click the new valve type button on the toolbar, and drag the new valve on top of the old one. If you are using a valve that does not normally check flow, but you would like it to, set one of the pipes connecting to the valve with a check valve.

The valve editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs: •

General—General valve information including geographical data and hydraulic results. For more information, see “Valve General Tab” on page 6-296.


6-281

Element Editors’ Tabs

6.2

•

Controls—Data specifying how the valve is controlled, as a function of the time or the hydraulic condition at any node in the system. For more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305.

•

Quality—Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog box (see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372 and “Quality Tab” on page 6-307).

•


•

User Data—Additional data as defined by you. New fields can be added, such as the valve installation date. For more information, see “User Data Tab” on page 6316.

•


Element Editors’ Tabs The element editors can be opened by double-clicking an element or by right-clicking an element and selecting Edit. Element editors’ tabs include:

6-282

•

“General Tab” on page 6-283

•

“Pressure Junctions General Tab” on page 6-286

•

“Tank General Tab” on page 6-287

•

“Reservoirs General Tab” on page 6-288

•

“Pump General Tab” on page 6-289

•

“Valve General Tab” on page 6-296

•

“Load” on page 6-300

•

“Section Tab” on page 6-302

•

“Controls Tab” on page 6-305

•

“Quality Tab” on page 6-307

•

“Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311

•

“Capital Cost Tab” on page 6-313

•

“User Data Tab” on page 6-316

•

“Messages Tab” on page 6-317

•

“VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab” on page 6-317

•

“Energy Tab” on page 6-319



6.2.1

General Tab The General tab includes: •

“Pressure Pipe General Tab” on page 6-283

•

“Pipe Section” on page 6-284

•

“Minor Loss Elements” on page 6-284

•

“Initial Status Section” on page 6-285

•

“User-Defined Length Section” on page 6-285

•

“Nodes Section” on page 6-285

•

“Hydraulic Results Section” on page 6-286

•

“Water Quality Section” on page 6-286

Pressure Pipe General Tab The General tab for pressure pipes is organized into the following groups: •

Pipe—General pipe data. For more information, see “Pipe Section” on page 6284.

•

Initial Status—Specify a pipes initial condition, open or closed. For more information, see “Initial Status Section” on page 6-285.

•

User-Defined Length—Specify whether the pipe length is calculated automatically or defined by you. For more information, see “User-Defined Length Section” on page 6-285.

•

Nodes—Define a positive direction for the flow in the pipe. This is used for check valves or flow results. A reported negative flow indicates that the water is flowing from the To Node to the From Node. For more information, see “Nodes Section” on page 6-285.

•

Hydraulic Results—Calculated hydraulic data. For more information, see “Hydraulic Results Section” on page 6-286.

•

Water Quality—Results of the water quality computations in the pipe reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed. For more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.


6-283


Pipe Section Tip:

By clicking the ellipsis (...) button located next to the Material you can access the engineering library to create and customize materials. By clicking the ellipsis (…) button on the Minor Loss Coefficient field, you can access the Minor Loss builder and generate composite minor loss coefficients to be applied to the pressure pipe (for more information, see “Minor Loss Elements” on page 6284). Set the minor loss coefficient value to 0.0 (default) if there is no minor loss in the pipe.

In this section you enter in all of the pipe general characteristics: •

Label—Unique name referencing the pipe in reports, error messages, and tables. The label can be any combination of alphanumeric digits.

•

Material—Pipe material, with its associated roughness value, selected from the Material Library.

•

diameter—Inside diameter of the pipe.

•

Roughness Coefficient—Pipe roughness coefficient or value associated with the roughness method selected during the project setup for the selected material. (For more information, see “Manning’s Equation” on page B-731, “Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729, and “Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729.) You can keep the roughness value associated with the selected material, as defined in the material library, or override the roughness value for that specific pipe.

•

Minor Loss Coefficient—Coefficient K used in the minor loss equation. For more information, see “Minor Losses” on page B-732. This is the equation most commonly used for determining the headloss in a fitting, valve, meter, or other localized component.

•

Check Valve—When this box is checked, flow can only travel from the From Node to the To Node in a pressure pipe.

Minor Loss Elements Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with them. This program provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor losses. The minor loss table consists of four columns:

6-284

•

Quantity—The number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the composite minor loss for the pipe.

•

Minor Loss—The type of minor loss element.


Hydraulic Element Editors •

K Each—The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss element of the specified type.

•

K Total—The total minor loss coefficient for the row. It is the Quantity multiplied by the K Each.

The Minor Loss Elements dialog box also has three command buttons: •

Insert—Insert a row in the table.

•

Duplicate—Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row.

•

Delete—Delete the selected row of the table.

Initial Status Section Note:

In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Initial Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation Options” on page 9-391) is checked. The Calculation Options dialog box is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view, and then clicking the Options button.

The initial status of the pipe can be either Open or Closed. It is possible that this status will change when calculations are performed, based on the presence of controls for that pipe.

User-Defined Length Section If the User-Defined Length box is checked, you can enter a pipe length. Otherwise, the program will compute a pipe length from node center to node center, accounting for bends if there are any. Creating user-defined lengths is useful for drawing quick schematics to accelerate your design process.

Nodes Section This section allows you to identify the calculated flow direction. A reported positive flow value indicates that the flow is in the direction of the From Node to the To Node. It is also useful for check valves, which allows flow only in the From Node to the To Node direction. The Reverse button allows you to change the direction of a pipe, switching the From Node and the To Node.


6-285


Hydraulic Results Section This section reports the following hydraulic results: •

Discharge—Calculated total flow in the pipe.

•

Velocity—Calculated velocity in the pipe.

•

Headloss Gradient—Headloss in the pipe represented as a slope or gradient.

•

Pressure Pipe Headloss—Loss of energy in the pipe due to friction and minor losses.

•

Control Status—Open or Closed status of the pipe. Open means that flow occurs in the pipe and Closed means that there is no flow.

Water Quality Section This section reports the results of the water quality computations at this location, assuming that a Water Quality Analysis was performed. The water quality parameter displayed depends on the type of water quality analysis being performed. This parameter is one of the three types:

6.2.2

•

Age—Report how long the water has been in the system at this node or link. For more information, see “Age Analysis” on page 9-389.

•

Trace—Report the percentage of water at this node or link that originated at another chosen node (tank, reservoir, or junction). For more information, see “Trace Analysis” on page 9-391.

•

Constituent—Report the concentration of a given constituent at this node or link. For more information, see “Constituent Analysis” on page 9-390.

Pressure Junctions General Tab The General tab for junctions is organized into the following sections:

6-286

•

General—General information about the junction. For more information, see “General Section” on page 6-287.

•

Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated demand, hydraulic grade and pressure at the junction. For more information, see “Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section” on page 6-287.

•

Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at this node reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed. For more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.



General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the junction, such as: •

Label—Unique alphanumeric name referencing the junction in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X (Easting)—The location of the junction may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y (Northing)—The location of the junction may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the junction.

•

Zone—Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones. For more information, see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328.

•

Emitter Coefficient—Discharge coefficient for an emitter (sprinkler or nozzle) placed at junction. Units are flow units at 1 unit of pressure drop (psi or m). Leave blank or set to 0 if no emitter is present. For more information, see “Flow Emitters” on page 9-384.

Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the following results:

6.2.3

•

Demand (Calculated)—Total Demand leaving (or entering) the pipe network at the junction at the current time.

•

Calculated Hydraulic Grade—Hydraulic Grade at the junction.

•

Pressure—Pressure at the junction.

Tank General Tab The General tab for tanks is organized into the following sections: •

General—General geographic information about the tank. For more information, see “General Section” on page 6-288.

•

Hydraulics—Calculated flow entering/leaving the tank and the calculated hydraulic grade in the tank. For more information, see “Hydraulics Section” on page 6-288.

•



6-287


General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the tank such as: •

Label—Unique name referencing the tank in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X (Easting)—The location of the tank may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y (Northing)—The location of the tank may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Elevation—Ground elevation of the tank.

•

Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which allows you to edit or add zones.

Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the tank:

6.2.4

•

Hydraulic Grade—Calculated hydraulic grade in the tank.

•

Inflow/Outflow—Flow entering/leaving the tank (the field label changes accordingly).

Reservoirs General Tab The General tab for reservoirs is organized into the following sections: •

General—General geographic information about the reservoir. For more information, see “General Section” on page 6-289.

•

Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated flow entering or leaving the reservoir. For more information, see “Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section” on page 6-289.

•


For more information on the data, see the topic on each section. The water quality section is identical for all elements; for more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.

6-288



General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the reservoir, such as: •

Label—Unique name referencing the reservoir in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X (Easting)—The location of the reservoir may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y (Northing)—The location of the reservoir may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the water surface in the reservoir, which is assumed to remain constant through time.

•

HGL Pattern—Allows you to apply a pattern for changes to the reservoir’s hydraulic grade line over time for extended period simulations. Click on the ellipsis (…) button to open the Pattern Manager. From the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394), you can create, edit, and import HGL patterns for the reservoir.

•

Zone—Specify the zone in which the reservoir belongs. Click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which allows you to edit or add zones.

Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the reservoir: •

6.2.5

Inflow/Outflow—Flow entering/leaving the reservoir (the field label changes accordingly).

Pump General Tab The General tab for pumps is organized into the following groups: •

General—General physical data about the pump. For more information, see “Pump General Section” on page 6-290.

•

Pump Definition—Type of pump curve and related data. For more information, see “Pump Definition Section” on page 6-290.

•

Initial Setting—Initial conditions for a pump describing the pump’s behavior at the start of the analysis in EPS mode, or its permanent setting in Steady-State mode. For more information, see “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-291.

•

Pipes—Direction the pump is operating (i.e., from upstream to downstream node). The direction of pumping can be reversed by clicking the Reverse button. For more information, see “Pipes Section” on page 6-292.


6-289


6.2.6

•

Operating Point—Values of pump head and discharge, which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates. For more information, see “Operating Point Section” on page 6-292.

•

Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at this pump reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed. For more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.

Pump General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the pump such as: •

Label—Unique name referencing the pump in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X (Easting)—The location of the pump may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y (Northing)—The location of the pump may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the pump.

The pump general section includes: •

“Pump Definition Section” on page 6-290

•

“Initial Setting Section” on page 6-291

•

“Pipes Section” on page 6-292

•

“Operating Point Section” on page 6-292

Pump Definition Section Note:

All defined pump curve points have an associated head and discharge. In previous versions of WaterCAD, the Pump element editor would not close if there was invalid input data present in the head definition. This validation has been removed, so it is now possible to enter invalid data in this dialog box. It is a good idea to review your input data carefully.

The pump definition section displays the pump curve plot for the definition that is currently assigned to the pump. When a new pump is placed, it is assigned the default pump definition (unless otherwise specified, i.e., prototypes). A new pump definition must be assigned. To do this, select a pump from the menu (if a definition has already

6-290


Hydraulic Element Editors been created) or click the Ellipsis (...) button to open the Pump Definition Manager (See “Pump Definition Manager” on page 6-292). The information required for a pump depends on the type of pump that is selected. The possible information is as follows: •

Head Definition—Select one of the six available types of pump curves. For more information, see “Constant Horsepower Pumps” on page B-725.

•

Pump Power—Represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump to the water. Depending on the pump’s efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary. This is available only for constant-power pumps.

•

Shutoff—Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.

•

Design—Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.

•

Max Operating—Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.

•

Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate, adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or entered as a custom extended point.

Initial Setting Section Note:

In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Pump Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation Options” on page 9-391) is checked. The Calculation Options dialog box is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and then clicking the Options button.

The initial conditions for a pump describe the pump’s behavior at the start of the analysis. These conditions include: •

Status—One of two available status conditions: On (normal operation), Off (no flow under any condition).

•

Relative Speed Factor—Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 will indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve.


6-291


Pipes Section Note:

You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking the Reverse button.

This indicates the direction in which the pump is operating (from upstream pipe to downstream pipe).

Operating Point Section Note:

For a constant power pump, the calculated operating point may be outside of the range for which the pump is representative of a real pump. Be very cautious and check all results carefully. For more information, see “Pump Theory” on page B-723.

The pump’s operating point represents the values for pump head and discharge, which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates.

6.2.7

•

Relative Speed—Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 will indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve.

•

Control Status—Available pump conditions: On (normal operation), Off (no flow under any condition).

•

Discharge—Discharge produced by the pump at the operating point.

•

Pump Head—Head generated by the pump at the operating point. The calculated parameters are: –

Intake Pump Pressure—Calculated hydraulic grade line at the intake of the pump.

–

Discharge Pump Pressure—Calculated hydraulic grade line at the downstream end of the pump.

Pump Definition Manager The Pump Definition Manager dialog box consists of a pump definition list pane and six control buttons. The pane lists all of the pump definitions contained within the currently active scenario. To the right of this section are the following buttons:

6-292

•

Add—This button creates a new pump definition.

•

Edit—This button opens the pump definition editor for the currently highlighted pump definition.



6.2.8

•

Duplicate—This button creates a copy of the currently highlighted pump definition.

•

Delete—This button removes the currently highlighted pump definition. The delete button is only available when the Pump Definition Manager is accessed from the Analysis/Pump Definitions menu command.

•

Rename—This button allows you to rename the currently highlighted pump definition.

•

Import—This button allows you to import pump definitions from a specially formatted text file. (See “Importing Pump Definitions” on page 6-295)

Pump Definition Editor The Definition Editor section is divided into the following tabs: •

Head—This tab consists of input data fields that allow you to define the pump head curve. The specific fields vary depending on which type of pump is selected in the Head Definition field. The following fields may be available depending on the head definition type: –

Head Definition—Select one of the six available types of pump curves.

–

Pump Power—This field is only available when the Constant Power Head Definition type is selected. This value represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump to the water. Depending on the pump’s efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.

–

Shutoff—Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.

–

Design—Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.

–

Max Operating—Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.

–

Max Extended—Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate, adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or entered as a custom extended point.


6-293

Element Editors’ Tabs Note:

•

Efficiency—This tab allows you to specify the Efficiency Type for the pump that is being edited. The following choices are available: Note:

–

–

–

Pump Efficiency—The Pump Efficiency value is representative of the ability of the pump to transfer the mechanical energy generated by the motor to Water Power.

Best Efficiency Point—This efficiency type generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the input value as the best efficiency point. When the Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input fields are as follows: -

BEP Flow—The flow delivered when the pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.

-

BEP Efficiency—The efficiency of the pump when it is operating at its Best Efficiency Point.

Multiple Efficiency Points—This efficiency type generates an efficiency curve based upon two or more user-defined efficiency points. These points are linearly interpolated to form the curve. When the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the input field is as follows: -

Efficiency Points Table—This table allows you to enter the pump’s efficiency at various discharge rates.

Motor—This tab allows you to define the pump’s motor efficiency. The tab contains the following input fields: –

6-294

Avoid using the Constant Efficiency efficiency type whenever possible. This efficiency type is much less accurate than the other types because of the lack of a realistic efficiency curve.

Constant Efficiency—This efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value regardless of changes in discharge. When the Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field is as follows: -

•

In previous versions of WaterCAD, the Pump element editor would not close if there was invalid input data present in the head definition. This validation has been removed, so it is now possible to enter invalid data in this dialog box. It is a good idea to review your input data carefully.

Motor Efficiency—The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to rotary mechanical energy.



•

6.2.9

–

Variable Speed Drive?—This check box allows you to specify whether or not the pump is a Variable Speed Pump. Toggling this check box On allows you to input points on the Speed Efficiency table

–

Speed/Efficiency Table—This table allows you to enter speed/efficiency points for variable speed pumps. This table is activated by toggling the “Variable Speed Drive” check box On.

Notes—The Notes tab allows the input of text that will be associated with the highlighted pump definition.

Importing Pump Definitions You can import pump definitions from a formatted tab-delimited text file. The accepted format must include at a minimum Head Definition information. The optional input data include Power, Efficiency, Motor, VSD (Variable Speed Drive), and Pumps. These are separated into sections in the text file by entering the data under the following headings: •

[Head]—Enter the pump curve points under this heading. The head definition type is determined by The number of pump curve points that are included for the pump. So to import a Design Point pump definition, only add a single pump curve point; to import a Standard 3-point pump definition, add three pump curve points; and to import a Custom Extended pump definition, add four pump curve points. The format for pump curve points under the [Head] heading is as follows: PumpDefinitionName Discharge Head

•

[Power]—Enter the pump power rating for Constant Power pump definitions under this heading. If you are not importing any Constant Power pump definitions, omit this heading completely. The format for pump power ratings under the [Power] heading is as follows: PumpDefinitionName PumpPower

•

[Efficiency]—Enter the efficiency rating for pump definitions under this heading. The Efficiency type is determined by the number of efficiency points assigned to a pump definition. So to import a Best Efficiency Point type, only add a single efficiency point; to import a Multiple Efficiency Point type, add multiple efficiency points. Note that by not specifying an efficiency rating, the default value of onehundred percent efficiency will be used.

•

[Motor]—Enter the motor efficiency under this heading. The format for Motor Efficiency under the [Motor] heading is as follows: PumpDefinitionName MotorEfficiency


6-295

Element Editors’ Tabs •

[VSD]—Enter the variable speed drive speed-efficiency points under this heading. If you are not importing any variable speed drive pump definitions, omit this heading completely. The format for speed-efficiency points under the [VSD] heading is as follows: PumpDefinitionName Speed Efficiency

•

[Pumps]—Under this heading, you can assign pump definitions to the pumps in your model. The format to assign pumps under the [Pumps] heading is as follows: PumpLabel PumpDefinitionName

To see an example of a correctly formatted text file for pump definitions, see the Lesson7.txt file in your Haestad/WaterGEMS/Lesson directory.

6.2.10

Valve General Tab The General tab for valves is organized into the following sections: •

General—General information about the valve. For more information, see “General Section” on page 6-297.

•

Valve Characteristics—Diameter and minor loss coefficient of the valve. For more information, see “Valve Characteristics Section” on page 6-297.

•

Initial Setting—Behavior of the valve at the start of the analysis. For more information, see “Initial Setting Section” on page 6-298.

•

Pipes—Direction in which the valve is controlling the flow. You can reverse that direction by clicking the Reverse button. For more information, see “Pipes Section” on page 6-299

•

Calculated Hydraulics—Calculated hydraulic data upstream, downstream, and through the valve. For more information, see “Calculated Hydraulics Section” on page 6-299.

•

Water Quality—Result of the water quality computations at the valve reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed. For more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-286.

•

Head-Discharge Points—This section is only displayed for General Purpose Valves. GPVs require at least two unique points to be entered in this table. For more information, see “Head-Discharge Points Section” on page 6-299.

Valve General tab includes:

6-296

•

“General Section” on page 6-297

•

“Valve Characteristics Section” on page 6-297



“Initial Setting Section” on page 6-298

•

“Pipes Section” on page 6-299

•

“Calculated Hydraulics Section” on page 6-299

•

“Head-Discharge Points Section” on page 6-299

General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the valve such as: •

Label—Unique alphanumeric name referencing the valve in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X (Easting)—The location of the valve may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y (Northing)—The location of the valve may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the valve.

Valve Characteristics Section Note:

Minor loss data is not required for Throttle Control Valves (TCVs) because the minor losses are already accounted for by the valve’s primary purpose. To change the type of a valve, use the element morphing feature of WaterCAD. For more information, see “Morphing Elements” on page 5-258.

The Valve Characteristics section defines the following parameters: •

Diameter—Inside diameter of the valve. Used to calculate the velocity through the valve and a corresponding minor loss when a minor loss coefficient is entered.

•

Minor Loss Coefficient—Coefficient used to model any minor loss associated with the valve for the specified valve diameter when the valve is fully open. Click the ellipsis (…) button to define composite minor losses (for more information, see “Minor Loss Elements” on page 6-284). The valve is fully open in the following two cases: –

The valve status is set to Inactive.

–

The valve status is set to Active, and the hydraulic conditions are such that the valve is fully open.


6-297


Initial Setting Section The initial conditions describe the valve’s behavior at the start of the analysis. These conditions include: •

•

Valve Status—A valve can have several different status conditions: –

Active (throttling, opening, or closing depending on system pressures and flows)

–

Closed (no flow under any conditions)

–

Inactive (wide open, with no regulation)

Settings/Hydraulic Grade/Pressure—For Pressure Reducing, Pressure Sustaining and Pressure Breaker Valves, specify either the initial hydraulic grade or the pressure setting associated with the valve. Note:

You only need to specify either the pressure setting or the hydraulic grade setting. The other will be automatically calculated based on the valve’s elevation. In Steady-State Analysis mode (in WaterCAD), the Initial Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog box is checked. The Calculation Options dialog box (see “Calculation Options” on page 9-391) is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor and then clicking the Options button.

6-298

•

Discharge—For Flow Control Valves, specify the initial discharge to maintain through the valve.

•

Headloss Coefficient—For Throttle Control Valves, specify the initial minor losses associated with the valve.



Pipes Section Note:

The valve direction, along with the flow direction, affects the behavior of the valve. For more information, see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281. You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking the Reverse button.

This section allows you to specify the Upstream Pipe and Downstream Pipe.

Calculated Hydraulics Section Note:

Because a valve is modeled internally as two junction nodes connected by a controlled link, the hydraulic grades are referring to the conditions at the two hidden nodes, upstream and downstream. These conditions also represent the grade at the adjacent end of each connecting pipe.

This section reports the following calculated hydraulic parameters for a valve: •

Discharge—Calculated flow rate passing through the valve.

•

Velocity—Calculated velocity inside the valve, based on the valve diameter.

•

Headloss—Calculated headloss through the valve.

•

From HGL (or Pressure)—Calculated hydraulic grade or pressure immediately upstream of the valve.

•

To HGL (or Pressure)—Calculated hydraulic grade or pressure immediately downstream of the valve.

Head-Discharge Points Section •

Headloss—Enter the desired headloss for the corresponding Discharge.

•

Discharge—Enter the Discharge rate at which the corresponding headloss is desired.

•

Insert—Click to insert a new Head-Discharge point.

•

Delete—Delete an existing Head-Discharge point.


6-299


6.2.11

Load You can define a hydraulic load consisting of multiple demands and inflows for each junction and tank node in the network. Each individual hydraulic demand or inflow consists of a baseline flow rate and a pattern that is applied when performing an Extended Period Simulation (EPS). This software provides a table for editing hydraulic loads. Each row represents an individual hydraulic demand or inflow. •

Type—Choose the type of load. Demand represents a withdrawal of liquid from the network system (if the value entered is negative, then the liquid is entering network). Inflow represents the addition of liquid to the system (negative inflow represents flow leaving the system).

•

Base Flow—Enter the baseline flow rate for the load. This number will always be positive. If you need to define an inflow, change the load type. The units are volume per unit time (typically l/s or gpm).

•

Pattern—Choose the EPS pattern that will apply to this load. Each load in the table can have a different EPS pattern. The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the baseline load. Note:

The EPS Pattern is not considered during Steady State Simulations (the demand baseline load will be used instead). It is not necessary to use negative values for the baseline flow rate to simulate water entering the network. WaterCAD provides you with the option of explicitly defining an inflow. Inflows are essentially negative demands.

The Demand dialog box has the following command buttons: •

Insert—Insert a row in the table.

•

Duplicate—Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row.

•

Delete—Delete the selected row of the table. The selected demand or inflow is removed from the list.

•

Graph—Generate a graph of the total demand over time at this junction.

The Demand tab includes:

6-300

•

“Importing Demands” on page 6-301

•

“Demand Import Dialog Box” on page 6-302



6.2.12

Importing Demands WaterCAD now lets you import simple or composite demands from an ASCII tabdelimited text file. Click Analysis > Alternatives, select Demand, and click Add or Edit to import demands. Import Demands can be imported to junction and tank elements by accessing the Demand Alternative and clicking the Import button. Junction and Tank demands can be imported from the same file. The file to be imported must be in the following format: Element Label Demand Pattern 1 Demand Pattern 2, etc. Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of demands can be imported from a single text file by adding additional columns following the same format. The first row of the text file is used to associate the demand values with demand patterns. The first column of the first row is ignored. The patterns to be associated with the demand values are entered in the subsequent columns. If this row references a pattern that is not available in the current project, a new pattern will be created with the value entered in this column as its label. This pattern will have a demand multiplier of one for every time step by default. After the file to be imported is chosen, the Demand Import dialog box is opened (for more information, see “Demand Import Dialog Box” on page 6-302). This dialog box allows you to choose the unit type for the demand values in the file to be imported.


6-301


Nodes that are present in the model but are not included in the file being imported will not be modified. Existing demands are removed without warning from any node that is present in the file being imported. Each node must have a value entered for every pattern column in the file. If no demand is associated with a specific pattern, enter zero as the demand for that pattern.

EXAMPLE: DEMANDS In this example, J-1 will have a composite demand of 15 and will use the patterns Residential and Commercial. J-7 will have a demand of 20 and will use the pattern Commercial. J-8 will have a demand of 15 and use pattern Residential. Label

Residential

Commercial

J-1

5

10

J-2

6

11

J-3

7

12

J-4

8

13

J-5

9

14

J-6

10

15

J-7

0

20

J-8

15

0

Demand Import Dialog Box The dialog box contains a drop-down list, which allows you to specify the unit type to be associated with the demand values in the file to be imported. This dialog box is automatically opened after selecting the text file to import.

6.2.13

Section Tab Tank section data includes the information necessary to describe the storage characteristics of the tank. They have been factored into the following logical groups: •

6-302

Section—The type of cross-section and the basic storage parameters. For more information, see “Tank Section” on page 6-303.



Operating Range—The minimum, initial, and maximum operating elevations. For more information, see “Operating Range Section” on page 6-303.

•

Cross Section—Parameters describing the cross-sectional geometry. For more information, see “Cross Section” on page 6-304.

The Section tab includes: •

“Tank Section” on page 6-303

•

“Operating Range Section” on page 6-303

•

“Cross Section” on page 6-304

Tank Section The general information for tank section consists of the following: •

Section—Choose the type of cross section (see “Cross Section” on page 6-304) for this storage tank. There are two types of cross sections to choose from: Constant Area and Variable Area.

•

Inactive Volume—Enter the inactive volume for this storage tank. This data is used when performing water quality analysis.

•

Total Active Volume—If this storage tank is a Constant Area Tank, the total active volume will be computed from the other tank data and this field will not be editable. If this is a Variable Area Tank, then enter the total storage volume for the tank.

Operating Range Section This section allows you to set the absolute limits for the water levels in the tank. Elevations are relative to the same datum as the rest of your system, while levels refer to heights of water above the tank’s base elevation. The operating range fields prompt you for the following values: •

Elevations/Levels—Select whether you want to enter the data in terms of absolute elevation, typically based on the sea level, or in terms of levels, which are relative to an arbitrary base elevation of the tank you specify.

•

Maximum—Highest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank fills above this point, it will be automatically shut off from the system.

•

Initial—Value used as the water surface elevation or level when performing steady-state calculations, or as the beginning condition when performing an extended period simulation.


6-303


Minimum—Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank drains below this point, it will be automatically shut off from the system.

•

Base Elevation—Elevation of the storage tank base used as a reference when entering water surface elevations in the tank in terms of levels.

Cross Section There are two basic types of storage tanks: •

“Constant Area” on page 6-304

•

“Variable Area” on page 6-304

Constant Area The cross sectional geometry of the tank is constant between the minimum and maximum operating elevations. Two parameters are needed to fully describe a constant area tank section: •

Cross Section—Choose whether the cross section is circular or non-circular.

•

Average Area/Diameter—Enter the average area of the non-circular crosssection, or the diameter of the circular cross-section.

Variable Area Note:

The storage characteristics of the tank can be plotted. Choose Tank Curve from the Report Button at the bottom of the Tank dialog box.

The cross-sectional geometry varies between the minimum and maximum operating elevations. •

6-304

Depth/Volume Ratio Table—Enter a series of points describing the storage characteristics of the tank. For example, at 0.1 the total depth (depth ratio = 0.1) the tank stores 0.028, the total active volume (volume ratio = 0.028). At 0.2, the total depth that tank stores 0. 014, the total active volume (0.2, 0.014), etc.



6.2.14

Controls Tab Note:

Pipes with check valves cannot have controls.

The Controls dialog box is separated into two windows—one lists the Simple Controls, the other lists the Rule-Based, or Logical Controls. Controls allow you to configure the hydraulic model to change the status or settings of a pump, valve, or pipe at a specific time or when specific junction pressures or tank water levels occur in the network. Rule-Based Controls can only be set in the Logical Control Manager, which is accessed by clicking Analysis…Logical Controls. From the Controls tab, the following Simple Control options are available: •

To add a simple control—Click the Add button. This will open the Control dialog box (see “Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305)where the specifics of the control can be edited.

•

To edit an existing simple control—Select the description of the control you wish to edit and click the Edit button.

•

To duplicate an existing simple control—Select the description of the control you wish to duplicate and click the Duplicate button.

•

To delete an existing simple control—Select the description of the control you wish to delete and click the Delete button.

Controls tab includes: •

“Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305

•

“Simple Control Preview” on page 6-306

•

“Simple Control Type” on page 6-306

•

“Control Condition” on page 6-306

•

“Node Condition” on page 6-306

•

“Time Condition” on page 6-307

Simple Control Dialog Box Several types of information are required to define a simple control for a pressure pipe, pump, or valve. This data is grouped into the following sections: •

Preview—Textual description of the control being edited. For more information, see “Simple Control Preview” on page 6-306.


6-305


Control—Specify the type of control, either Status or Setting. For more information, see “Simple Control Type” on page 6-306.

•

Control Condition—Specify whether the control is based on a time condition or a node condition, and specify the control setting. For more information, see “Control Condition” on page 6-306.

Simple Control Preview The control preview provides a textual description of the control being edited. The control preview is continuously updated while you edit a control, providing constant feedback as to the state of your control.

Simple Control Type Note:

Only status controls are available for pipes. Setting controls are not appropriate. When pumps are turned on by a control, their relative speed factor is set to 1.00. Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump. To activate a closed or inactive valve, use a setting control. Similarly, to turn a pump on at a relative speed setting other than 1.00, use a setting control.

Simple controls support two types of controls: •

Status—Controls the Open/Closed Status (pipes), inactive/closed (valves), or On/ Off Status (pumps) status.

•

Setting—Controls the relative speed factor of a pump and the parameters for a valve.

Control Condition A control can be triggered by a specified pressure or hydraulic grade being reached in any tank or pressure junction located in the project.

Node Condition A node condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the hydraulic condition of a specified tank or pressure junction is reached. The comparison component allows the following:

6-306



Above—Trigger the control (“Controls Tab” on page 6-305) when the junction or tank’s hydraulic parameter is above the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.

•

Below—Trigger the control when the junction or tank’s hydraulic parameter is below the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.

You can express the conditions at the control node in terms of Pressure or Hydraulic Grade. Example: Closed if node J-2 below 10 psi means that the controlled pipe will close when the pressure at junction J-2 goes below 10 psi.

Time Condition There are two types of Time Condition: Time From Start and Clock Time. A Time From Start condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the specified amount of time has elapsed. A Clock Time condition will trigger the control at the specified hour. Examples Closed at Time From Start 2.00 hr.—At 2.00 hours into the analysis, this link will be closed. Set hydraulic grade to 440 ft. at Time From Start 5.50 hr.—At 5.5 hours into the analysis, the hydraulic grade of this pressure regulating valve will be set to 440 ft. Open at Clock Time 12:00:00—Pipe will open when the clock reaches 12:00:00.

6.2.15

Quality Tab The Quality tab of an element allows you to edit the input data related to water quality. Three types of water quality analyses can be performed, as defined in the Scenario Editor dialog box (see “Scenario Wizard—Step 3” on page 8-370) accessed by clicking the GO button in the main WaterCAD window. These are Water Age, Constituent Concentration and Source Tracing. The basic parts of an element’s water quality input data vary depending on the element type. Not all of the following input data sections are available for all elements: •

Water Quality—Displays the active water quality alternative for the current scenario, as well as initial water quality conditions or component reaction rates, depending on the type of water quality analysis being performed. For more information, see “Water Quality Section” on page 6-309.

•

Constituent Source—For nodes only. This section of the dialog box contains three data fields which are only active when the Constituent Source check box is checked (for more information, see “Constituent Source Section” on page 6-310):


6-307

Element Editors’ Tabs –

Constituent Source—This menu allows you to select the Constituent Source Type. The available types are as follows: -

Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.

-

Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network.

-

Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point.

-

Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.

–

Baseline Concentration—This data field allows you to specify the corresponding constituent concentration at this node over time.

–

Pattern—The menu allows you to apply a constituent pattern to the Constituent Source. The Ellipsis (…) button opens the Pattern Manager dialog box (for more information, see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394).

Note:

A constituent source may be a tank, reservoir, or junction (but not a pump or valve). The Water Quality data is only used when performing a Water Quality analysis, which can only be done in Extended Period Simulation mode. When performing a Constituent or Trace Analysis, the constituent and source trace node are defined in the Constituent and Age Alternative Editor respectively.

•

6-308

Tank Mixing Model—For Tanks only. This section allows you to specify the Tank Mixing Model that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is specified on a tank-by-tank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model. The following mixing models are available: –

Two Compartment—Under this mixing model, available storage is divided into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives overflow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing model is selected, the Two Compartment section appears.

–

Completely Mixed—The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.



•

–

FIFO—First In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is the first parcel to leave.

–

LIFO—Last In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is the first to leave.

Two Compartment—For Tanks using the Two Compartment mixing model only. This section contains two fields, which describe the division of total tank volume between the two compartments. The field labeled Compartment 1 allows you to enter the percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.

The Quality tab includes: •

“Water Quality Section” on page 6-309

•

“Constituent Source Section” on page 6-310

•

“Invert Elevations Section” on page 6-311

Water Quality Section The general water quality information consists of several parameters, some of which vary depending on the type of water quality analysis (Water Age, Constituent Concentration or Source Tracing): •

Alternative—Read-only field showing which water quality alternative is active for the current scenario.

•

Initial Age, Constituent, or Trace—Specify the initial water age, constituent concentration, or source trace at the current location, depending on which type of water quality analysis is currently selected in the Scenario Editor dialog box (see “Scenario Wizard—Step 3” on page 8-370). This does not apply to pipes.


6-309


For age and trace analyses, pipe velocity and flow rate are the only related data needed for computations. Therefore, these reaction coefficient fields are grayed out or not displayed. For constituent analyses, however, the bulk and pipe reaction coefficients are needed to define the reactions that occur within the pipes (in the water and between the water and pipe wall) and in the tanks. The bulk and wall reaction coefficient fields are initialized with the values defined in the constituent library, but may also be edited individually. In order to select the constituent being modeled, and its corresponding parameters, or revert to default values, use the Constituent Alternative Editor (for more information, see “Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358).

When performing Constituent analysis, reaction coefficients are needed, as defined below: •

Bulk Reaction Coefficient—Coefficient defining how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time. This applies to Tank and Pipes only.

•

Wall Reaction Coefficient—Coefficient defining the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe.

Constituent Source Section Any node element (i.e., tank, reservoir, or junction) can serve as a source for a chemical constituent. To turn a node into a constituent source: •

Click the check box in the Constituent Source group title.

•

Enter values for: –

6-310

Constituent Source—This menu allows you to select the Constituent Source Type. The available types are as follows: -

Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.

-

Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network.

-

Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point.

-

Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.


Hydraulic Element Editors –

•

Constituent Baseline Load—Concentration of the constituent to be modeled, used in conjunction with the constituent pattern to represent the concentration over time.

Constituent Pattern—EPS Pattern that will apply to this load. The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the constituent baseline load. Note:

Any water leaving a constituent source has a concentration in accordance with the baseline concentration and the chosen pattern.

The behavior of the source during the course of a water quality calculation varies depending on the type of element, as follows: •

Junction—The concentration is the source concentration and varies with time according to the constituent pattern.

•

Tank—If a tank is tagged as a source, only the discharge from that tank will have a source concentration that varies with time according to the source pattern. The internal concentration of the tank will vary over time according to inflowing concentrations and hydraulic demands.

•

Reservoir—Reservoirs can be considered constant concentration sources whose initial concentration does not vary with time. If a reservoir is selected as the source the concentration will vary according to the source type and the selected source pattern.

Invert Elevations Section Note:

Elevations are defined at the connecting node structure.

The From Node and To Node Invert Elevations of the pressure pipe can be viewed here.

6.2.16

Fire Flow Tab Note:

Edit the following data exclusively in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor: whether a fire flow analysis is to be performed at a node, whether the needed fire flow is to replace or be added to current demands, whether a minimum pressure is required for the entire system, and default fire flow input values. Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run, are only reported in the Fire Flow tab and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (accessed from Report > Tables > Fire Flow


6-311

Element Editors’ Tabs Report or the FlexTable icon). Results reported in the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow, unless you explicitly entered this fire flow as a demand at a specific junction.

The Fire Flow tab of the junction editor offers the ability to adjust an individual junction’s required fire flows and pressures. If these values are not specifically entered for a given junction, the values will be based on the default fire flow data as entered in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor (see “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360), accessed by selecting the Analysis > Alternatives menu item, and clicking the Edit button on the Fire Flow tab. The Fire Flow Tab is divided into the following sections: •

Fire Flow Input—Minimum required fire flow at the selected junction, and minimum pressures to be maintained. For more information, see “Fire Flow Input Section” on page 6-312.

•

Fire Flow Calculation Results—After performing a fire flow analysis, results are available for the junction node assuming it is part of the fire flow selection set. For more information, see “Fire Flow Calculation Results Section” on page 6-313.

The Fire Flow tab includes: •

“Fire Flow Input Section” on page 6-312

•

“Fire Flow Calculation Results Section” on page 6-313

Fire Flow Input Section The fire flow input data for a junction are as follows:

6-312

•

Needed Fire Flow—The flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands. This value will be added to or replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows as specified in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog box (for more information, see “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360).

•

Fire Flow Upper Limit—This input defines the maximum allowable fire flow that a junction can provide and the maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at any single withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical limit that will prevent the program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have a large diameter and high service pressures. Remember that a system’s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location.

•

Residual Pressure—Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.



Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within the Zone you are testing. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another Zone.

•

Minimum System Pressure—Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If a node’s pressure anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint.

Fire Flow Calculation Results Section After performing a fire flow analysis, the following calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set:

6.2.17

•

Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints—Whether the selected junction node meets the fire flow constraints.

•

Available Fire Flow—Amount of flow available for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.

•

Calculated Residual Pressure—Calculated pressure at the junction node during the fire flow withdrawal.

•

Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as this junction.

•

Minimum Zone Junction—Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum zone pressure.

•

Calculated Minimum System Pressure—Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the system.

•

Minimum System Junction—Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum system pressure.

Capital Cost Tab On this tab, you can specify whether or not the element is to be included in the capital cost analysis. If the element is selected to appear in the cost analysis then you can enter the costs associated with the element. This tab is comprised of the following components: •

Include in Cost Calculation?—A check box that allows you to control whether or not this element will be included in the cost analysis. If this box is checked, the element will be included in the cost calculation. For more information, see “Include In Cost Calculation?” on page 6-314.


6-313


Construction Costs—Contains a table for an element for entering cost items that can be expressed in terms of a quantity, unit, and unit cost. For more information, see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315.

•

Non-Constructions Costs—Contains a table for entering costs related to the elements that need to be expressed either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the construction costs. For more information, see “Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314.

The Capital Cost tab includes: •

“Include In Cost Calculation?” on page 6-314

•

“Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314

•

“Construction Costs” on page 6-315

•

“Construction Costs Table” on page 6-315

•

“Advanced Construction Cost Options” on page 6-316

Include In Cost Calculation? This check box allows you to control whether or not this element will be included in the cost calculation. If this box is checked, the element will be included in the cost calculation. If you are modeling a new subdivision, most of the elements in your model will probably be included in the cost calculation. However, if you are adding onto an existing system, you may only calculate the cost for a small portion of the total elements in your system. The value of this field can be varied by alternative. This can be useful if you want to compute the costs for different portions of your system separately. For instance, if you have several phases of construction that you want to cost separately, you could create one cost alternative that only includes elements in phase one, and another alternative that only includes elements in phase two. After you perform your cost analysis, you can then perform cost reports detailing each phase of construction.

Non-Construction Costs The Non-Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab contains a table that allows you to enter an unlimited number of non-construction cost items for each element. A non-construction cost item can be specified either as a lump sum value or as a percentage of the total construction costs for the element. Each non-construction cost contains the following four components.

6-314

•

Label—A unique name that identifies the non-construction cost item. The labels must be different for all non-construction cost items in a table.

•

Factor—A numeric value that is used in conjunction with the operation to compute the cost for a non-construction cost item.



Operation—The operation that will be applied against the factor to compute the total cost for the non-construction cost item. The two possible values for this field are lump sum or percentage of the total construction costs.

•

Cost—The cost of the non-construction cost item.

Construction Costs The Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab consists of the following two components: •

Construction Costs Table—This table allows you to specify an unlimited number of construction costs for each element. For more information, see “Construction Costs Table” on page 6-315.

•

Advanced Construction Costs Options—This button is only available for elements such as pipes, inlets, gravity junctions, and manholes that support Unit Cost Functions. Clicking this button accesses advanced options for the selected construction cost item. For more information, see “Advanced Construction Cost Options” on page 6-316.

Construction Costs Table The construction costs table allows you to specify an unlimited number of construction cost items for each element. Each construction cost item is composed of four basic characteristics, which are listed below. •

Label—This is a string that identifies the construction cost item. It must be unique for every construction cost in the table.

•

Quantity—This field holds a numeric value that will be multiplied by the unit cost to compute the total cost for the construction cost item.

•

Unit—The value in this field signifies the unit of the value held in the quantity field. For pipes, this field can be either a length unit or each. For nodal elements this field is a user-defined string.

•

Unit Cost—This is the cost per unit specified in the unit column. For instance, for a pipe it could be cost per length. This value is multiplied by the quantity to calculate the total cost for the construction cost item. If a Unit Cost Function is assigned to a construction cost item then this field will not be editable as the value will be computed based on the Unit Cost Function.

•

Total Cost—This is calculated by multiplying the unit cost by the quantity. The value in this field is always calculated by the program.


6-315


Advanced Construction Cost Options Construction cost items for pipes and gravity structures (inlets, manholes, and junction chambers) have a set of advanced options. Under these advanced options, you can specify a Unit Cost Function to associate with a construction cost item. A Unit Cost Function describes the relationship between the unit cost for a construction cost item and the value of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost for a pipe may be a function of the diameter. If you assign a Unit Cost Function to a construction cost item then the unit cost for that item is automatically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change. For pipes there is an additional advanced option Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length, which allows you to set the quantity field for a construction cost item equal to the length of the pipe.

6.2.18

User Data Tab The User Data tab allows you to view and edit the customizable user data for each element. This tab is composed of two sections: •

User Data—Any Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No data defined you. For more information, see “User Data Section” on page 6-317.

•

User Memos—Any memo data fields defined by you. For more information, see “User Memos Section” on page 6-317. Note:

Default user-defined attributes are provided. These can easily be deleted or modified. User Data Extensions are a powerful way to add your own data to the project. This data will not affect the hydraulic calculations in any way, but can be used as any other data for operations such as sorting, annotating, reporting, and importing/exporting.

For information on how to add new fields or edit an existing field format, see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323. The User Data tab includes:

6-316

•

“User Data Section” on page 6-317

•

“User Memos Section” on page 6-317



User Data Section This section contains a list of Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No user data fields, displayed as single line fields. User data fields are defined in the User Data Extension dialog box (for more information, see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6323).

User Memos Section This section contains a list of any memo fields displayed as multiple line scrolling text panes. User memos are defined in the User Data Extension dialog box (for more information, see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323).

6.2.19

Messages Tab Note:

Messages, descriptions, and notes will be printed in any element report.

All Element Editors have a Messages tab, which contains three parts:

6.2.20

•

Message List—Contains information that is generated during the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors, and status updates.

•

Description—An informative statement that you may enter about the element.

•

Notes—Contains notes that you enter, and may include a description of the element, a summary of your data sources, or any other information of interest.

VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab The Variable Speed Pump tab is split into two sections: •

Variable Speed Pump Type—This section of the dialog box is comprised of a check box and a menu.

•

VSP Check Box—Checking this box On makes the current pump a Variable Speed Pump and activates the VSP Type drop-down and the VSP Settings section.

•

VSP Type Drop-Down—This drop-down allows you to specify the Variable Speed Pump type. The choices include Pattern Based and Fixed Head.


6-317


Variable Speed Pump Settings—The available input fields in this section vary depending on the VSP type that is chosen.

•

Pattern Based—When the Pattern Based VSP type is selected, this section consists of a menu and an ellipsis (…) button. The Pump Speed Pattern dropdown list allows you to select a previously created pattern, and the ellipsis button opens the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394), which allows you to select a previously created pattern or create a new one. Note:

Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump. Use the Pattern Based VSP type when you already know the Relative Speed Settings for the Variable Speed Pump.

•

Fixed Head—When the Fixed Head VSP type is chosen, the pump will increase or decrease its relative speed factor to maintain the Head specified at a control node. When this VSP type is selected, this section consists of the following items:

•

Control Node—The node that the VSP checks to determine whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its relative speed factor. Note:

•

Target Head—The Head that the VSP will attempt to maintain for the Control Node. Note:

•

6-318

The algorithm may become unstable when a junction is specified as the control node on the suction side of a pump. For best results, tanks should be specified as the control node when maintaining a head on the suction side.

The control node target head is the constant elevation of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head is greater then the maximum head the pump can generate at the demanded flow rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained. The VSP target head for junction nodes can be set on the VSP tab of the Pump dialog box, and for tanks on the Section tab of the Tank dialog box by adjusting the initial level.

Maximum Relative Speed Factor—The highest relative speed factor that the pump can be set at to meet the target head at the control node. If the target head cannot be met when the pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor, the maximum will be used.



Ellipsis Button—Opens the Select Element dialog box.

•

Select From Drawing Button—Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the element that will be the Control Node. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a context menu with a Done option. Clicking this will return you to the VSP tab. Note:

6.2.21

VSPs can also be modeled in parallel to represent VSP pump stations. For more information on using parallel VSPs, see “Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page A-686 and “Parallel VSPs” on page 9-384.

Energy Tab The Energy Tab is divided into the following sections: •

Pump Efficiency—Allows you to choose the pump’s efficiency type, and plot the efficiency curve. For more information, see “Pump Efficiency Section” on page 6320.

•

Efficiency Settings—The input requirements for this section vary depending on the efficiency type selected in the Pump Efficiency section. For more information, see “Efficiency Settings Section” on page 6-320.

•

Daily Energy Cost Summary Section—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays a summary of the general calculated results, such as energy usage and total daily cost. For more information, see “Daily Energy Cost Summary Section” on page 6-321.

•

Peak Demand Summary—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays the calculated results for the peak power usage and the cost associated with this peak usage. For more information, see “Peak Demand Summary Section” on page 6-321.

•

Efficiency Summary—After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays the calculated results for wire power coming into the pumps, the power transferred to the water, and the efficiency of the transfer. For more information, see “Efficiency Summary Section” on page 6-322.

The Energy tab includes: •

“Pump Efficiency Section” on page 6-320

•

“Efficiency Settings Section” on page 6-320

•

“Daily Energy Cost Summary Section” on page 6-321

•

“Peak Demand Summary Section” on page 6-321

•

“Efficiency Summary Section” on page 6-322


6-319


Pump Efficiency Section This section allows you to specify the Efficiency Type for the pump that is being edited. The following choices are available: •

Best Efficiency Point—This efficiency type generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the input value as the best efficiency point.

•

Constant Efficiency—This efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value regardless of changes in discharge. Note:

•

Avoid using the Constant Efficiency efficiency type whenever possible. This efficiency type is much less accurate than the other types because of the lack of a realistic efficiency curve.

Multiple Efficiency Points—This efficiency type generates an efficiency curve based upon two or more user-defined efficiency points. These points are linearly interpolated to form the curve.

When using the Best Efficiency Point or Multiple Efficiency Points efficiency types, the Plot button in this section is activated. Clicking this button graphs the efficiency curve in the Plot window (for more information, see “Plot Window” on page 13-559).

Efficiency Settings Section The available input fields in this section change depending on which Efficiency Type is selected. •

•

•

6-320

When the Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input fields are as follows: –


–

BEP Efficiency—The efficiency of the pump when it is operating at its Best Efficiency Point.

–

BEP Flow—The flow delivered when the pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.

When the Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input fields are as follows: –


–

Pump Efficiency—The Pump Efficiency value is representative of the ability of the pump to transfer the mechanical energy generated by the motor to Water Power.

When the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the input fields are as follows:


Hydraulic Element Editors –


–

Efficiency Points Table—This table allows you to enter the pump’s efficiency at various discharge rates.

Daily Energy Cost Summary Section Note:

The Energy Cost Results displayed here are not automatically updated to reflect any input data modifications when a new Extended Period Simulation is calculated. The Energy Cost Analysis must be recalculated in the Energy Cost Manager to update the results.

This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost Analysis: •

Utilization—Percentage of total time during the EPS that the pump was On.

•

Daily Energy Usage—Amount of energy used during a 24-hour period.

•

Daily Energy Use Cost—The cost of the energy used during a 24-hour period, determined by the calculated energy usage and the energy pricing pattern.

•

Daily Peak Power Cost—The cost associated with the Peak Demand Charge, if applicable.

•

Total Daily Cost—The total cost accumulated during a 24-hour period. This value is the total of the Daily Energy Use Cost and the Daily Peak Demand Cost (if a peak demand charge has been applied).

Peak Demand Summary Section Note:


This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost Analysis: •

Peak Power—Displays the peak energy usage, as calculated during the extended period simulation. This result is displayed even if Peak Demand Charges are not applied.

•

Peak Power Cost—Displays the energy cost as calculated during the extended period simulation. If no Peak Demand Charge has been applied to the associated Energy Price Definition, this field will display as zero.


6-321

Prototypes

Efficiency Summary Section Note:

6.3


•

Water Power—The amount of energy transferred to the water by the pump.

•

Wire to Water Efficiency—The ratio of the Water Power to the Wire Power.

•

Wire Power—The amount of energy delivered to the pump motor.

Prototypes Note:

Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect any elements created prior to the change. If a section of your system has distinctly different characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time when you edit the properties later.

Prototypes allow you to enter default values for the Element in your network. These values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data. For example, if a section of the network contains all PVC pipes, use the pipe prototype to set the Material field to PVC. When a new pipe is created, its material attribute will default to PVC.

6.4

User Data Extensions Note:

The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations. However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing, annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any of the standard pre-defined attributes.

User Data Extensions are a set of one or more fields that you can define to hold data to be stored in the model. The User Data Extension feature allows you to add your own data fields to the project. For instance, you can add a field for keeping track of the date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element. User Data Extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the pre-defined data used in and produced by the model calculations. This means that User Data Extensions can be imported or exported through database and Shapefile connections (see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571), viewed and edited in FlexTables, included in

6-322


Hydraulic Element Editors tabular reports or element detailed reports, annotated in the drawing (see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509), color coded (see “Color Coding” on page 13-513), and reported in the detailed element reports. This data can also be accessed on the User Data tab of each Element Editor dialog box.

6.4.1

User Data Extension Dialog Box The User Data Extension dialog box holds a summary of the user data extensions currently defined in the project. In this dialog box, there is a tab for each type of element. By clicking a particular tab, you can access the user data extensions currently defined for that type of element. The software initially contains default user data extensions, but these can be deleted or edited. Each tab in the User Data Extension dialog box is composed of a table listing characteristics of the user data extensions defined for that type of element. In addition, there are a series of buttons that can be used to add, edit, delete, and share individual user data extensions. The table listing the user data extensions consists of the following four columns: •

Label—Description that will appear next to the field for the user data extension, or as the column heading if the data extension is selected to appear in a FlexTable (for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329).

•

Type—Lists the type of data that is valid for the data extension. The available data types are Date/Time, Number, Text, Memo, and Yes/No.

•

Unit/Picture—Contains the unit of each numeric data extension, or the date and time presentation format for Date/Time data extensions. Both the unit and the date and time representations are specified when you create the data extension. They can always be modified by editing the data extension.

•

Shared—If an asterisk appears in this column, it indicates that the user data extension is shared among two or more types of elements. For more information, see “Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box” on page 6-327.

The following list describes the four buttons that appear on the right side of the table: •

Add—Adds a new User Data Field. The User Field Specification dialog box (see “User Field Specification Dialog Box” on page 6-324) will open when you click this button. Here, you can define the properties of the user data extension that you are adding.

•

Edit—You can edit an existing user data extension by highlighting the data extension you wish to edit and clicking this button. This will open the User Field Specification dialog box where you can change the properties for that item.


6-323

User Data Extensions •

Delete—You can delete a data extension by highlighting it and clicking this button. If the data extension you are deleting is shared among multiple types of elements, it will only be removed from the element type that you are currently editing. If you remove a user data extension, all the information contained in that field will be permanently removed.

•

Share—You can open the Existing Fields to Share With dialog box by clicking this button. Here, you pick which of the available attributes defined for other types of elements you would like to share with the current type of element.

At the bottom of the User Data Extension dialog box is a File button that allows you to import or save a set of user-defined data extensions. You can save the current configuration of user data extensions for later use by selecting File > Save, and specifying a file location and name. The file extension for the files holding the user data extension configurations is .UDX. Select File > Import to merge the data extension configurations defined in these files into the current project. Importing a .UDX file will not remove any of the other data extensions defined in your project. User data extensions that have the same name as those already defined in your project will not be imported. The User Data Extension dialog box includes: •

“User Field Specification Dialog Box” on page 6-324

•

“Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box” on page 6-327

User Field Specification Dialog Box The properties defining a user data extension can be viewed and edited in the User Field Specification dialog box, which is composed of two tabs: •

Type—Enter the user data specification. For more information, see “Type Tab” on page 6-324.

•

Notes—Enter any notes related to the User Data Specification. For more information, see “Notes Tab” on page 6-327.

Type Tab The Type tab is composed of two sections:

6-324

•

Type—Contains fields for entering the label for the user data extension, as well as the data type. For more information, see “Type Section” on page 6-325.

•

Format—Contains fields for defining the specification of the type of user data extension selected in the Type section. For more information, see “Format Section” on page 6-326.


Hydraulic Element Editors Type Section The Type section contains fields for entering the label and data type for the user data extension. The name entered in the Label field corresponds with the User Data Extension field on the User Data tab of the Element Editor. This label will also be used as the column heading if the user data extension is added to a FlexTable. If you want the label to be displayed on multiple rows when it is used as a column heading, you can use forward slashes to specify the location of line breaks. When the label is used as a field label in a dialog box, the forward slashes will be converted to spaces. In FlexTables, there is an option to use abbreviated labels for the column headings. If you want an alternative label to be displayed, you can specify an abbreviated label after the original label, and separate them by the pipe symbol, |. When the option to display abbreviated labels is enabled in the FlexTables, this is the text that will be used as the column heading. For instance, if you specified the label Date/Installed | Date/Inst. it will be displayed in one of the following three ways, depending on the location and options selected.

Field Label (Reports/ Element Dialog Boxes)

Column Heading (FlexTable)

Column heading with abbreviated label option selected (FlexTable)

Date Installed

Date Installed

Date Installed

You can select from five different types of data for the user data extension from the drop-down list in the Type field. An explanation of each is presented in the list below: •

Date/Time—Use this data type when you want the values you are entering to be in a standard date and time format. This format can be more useful than storing date information in a simple text field because it allows the dates to be sorted correctly when they appear in a FlexTable.

•

Memo—If a user data extension is defined to be a memo, it will appear as a scrolling text pane in the User Memos section of the User Data tab in the Element Editor dialog box.

•

Number—Use this data type for fields that contain numeric values. You can specify a unit for the information in this field. The values contained in this field will then be automatically converted if you change the unit for this field.

•

Text—Use this data type to create a single-line text field.

•

Yes/No—Use this data type to display the attribute as a check box to represent true/false data.


6-325

User Data Extensions Format Section This section is enabled only if you select Date/Time or Number in the Type section (see “Type Section” on page 6-325). Here is where you define the properties governing the type of data selected. Number Format—If the type of data you selected was numeric, you can select a unit type (length, volume, intensity, etc.), a unit, a display precision, and whether to use scientific notation. There are no format options for memo, text, and Yes/No data types. Date/Time Type Format—If you selected the Date/Time type, you can specify whether you would like the date or time to appear first in the input field, as well as the format of the date and time information. The format in which the date and time information will be displayed can either be selected from the drop-down lists, or you can type your own custom format directly into the Date Picture and Time Picture fields. If one of these fields is left blank, the corresponding information will not be displayed. The Date/Time data type consists of an input and an output format. The input format is a fixed format that is determined by the regional settings on your computer. Whenever you enter information into a Date/Time field, the information must be entered according to the input format. If it is not entered in the proper input format, the value will revert to the original value. The output format is a mask that defines the manner in which the date and time information will be displayed. It does not affect the way the date and time information can be entered into a Date/Time field. The output format can be edited as follows: •

To specify dates with no leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use lowercase d, lowercase y, or uppercase M.

•

To specify dates with leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use lowercase dd, lowercase yy, or uppercase MM.

•

To specify abbreviations for the day, year, or month, use lowercase ddd, lowercase yyy, or uppercase MMM.

•

To specify the full name of the day, year, or month, use lowercase dddd, lowercase yyyy, or uppercase MMMM.

If there are characters in the output format that do not map to valid date or time information, then the actual value of the character will be displayed. For example, if you wanted the date to be displayed as June 15, 1998, you would define the format as MMMM d, yyyy. Since the spaces and comma do not map to any of the date information, their actual values are displayed. To include a piece of text that contains a character that maps to the date or time information, use single quotation marks (’) around the text.

6-326


Hydraulic Element Editors Notes Tab This tab contains a text pane for entering notes about the current data extension. The text entered here is not displayed anywhere in the model, but allows you to keep records for a particular data extension.

Existing Fields to Share With Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to choose which of the available attributes defined for other types of elements you want to share with the current type of element. The following sections are available: •

Available Items—Lists attributes defined for other element types that have not already been shared with the current type of element. In order to add attributes to the current element type, highlight them and click the Add button to transfer them to the Selected Items list.

•

Selected Items—The attributes in the Selected Items list will be added to the current element after you click the OK button.

All the characteristics (such as data type, format, unit, and display precision) for a particular user data extension are the same for all the elements that share it. This is useful when the attribute you are adding needs to be the same for all the element types for which it is defined. For instance, if you have a Date Installed field for every element, sharing guarantees that the date format is the same for every element and will appear in a single FlexTable column (for more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329). If, at a later point, you decide the date should be in a different format, you can change the format for one type of element. That change will filter through to all the elements that share that attribute.

6.5

Zones Zones includes: •

“Zone Manager” on page 6-328

•

“Zone Dialog Box” on page 6-328


6-327

Zones

6.5.1

Zone Manager Note:

A Zone cannot be deleted if it is referenced by any element.

The zone manager allows you to manipulate zones quickly and easily. Zones listed in the Zone Manager can be associated with each nodal element using the Element Editors, Prototypes, or FlexTables. This manager includes a list of all of the available zones and standard manager features, such as:

6.5.2

•

Add—Add a new zone to the zone list.

•

Edit—Make changes to an existing zone.

•

Duplicate—Create a copy of an existing zone.

•

Delete—Delete an existing zone.

Zone Dialog Box Note:

Only one zone can reference an element. If you add an element to a zone, the element is automatically removed from the zone that it was previously in.

The zone dialog box allows you to name the zone label. When a zone is named, the junctions are automatically assigned the new name. The zone dialog box contains pertinent information, including: •

Label—Required name to identify the zone.

•

Notes—Optional input describing the zone.

In addition to this information, there are also buttons that enable you to make changes to the collection of elements in the zone, such as adding elements to the zone.

6-328


Chapter

7

FlexTables

FlexTables provide you with a powerful data management tool that can be used to edit input data and present output data in a quick, efficient manner. Haestad Methods provides you with default element tables; however, these tables can be customized to fit your particular needs. You can also create your own tables by combining various input and output data for different model elements. You can use FlexTables to view all elements in the network, all elements of a specific type (e.g., all pipes), or any subset of elements. Additionally, tables can be filtered (see “Filtering Tables” on page 7339), globally edited (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337), and sorted (see “Sorting Tables” on page 7-338) to ease data input and present output data for specific elements. FlexTables may also be used to create results reports that can be sent to a printer, a file, or to the Windows clipboard for copying into your favorite word processing or spreadsheet software.


7-329

Table Manager

7.1

Table Manager Note:

You cannot rename or delete the predefined tables that come with this software. You can modify the predefined tables. When you choose to print a table, the table name will be used as the title for the printed report. You can change the report title by renaming the table. The predefined tables may need to be modified to properly display the desired data in certain situations. For instance, if you set up a project and choose the Manning’s friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen-Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by editing the table.

The Table Manager provides support for creating, opening, and managing tables. Although the predefined tables provide access to most of the network element information, it is sometimes practical to present model results and input data through userdefined tables. The Table Management button provides the following tools for manipulating user-defined tables:

7-330

•

OK—Open the selected table.

•

Close—Exit the Table Manager dialog box without opening a table.

•

Table Management > New—Create a new table using the Create New Table and Table Setup dialog boxes. For more information, see “Creating New Tables” on page 7-331.

•

Table Management > Edit—Modify the layout of the selected table using the Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see “Editing Tables” on page 7331.

•

Table Management > Rename—Rename the selected table. For more information, see “Renaming Tables” on page 7-332.

•

Table Management > Duplicate—Duplicate the selected table for additional customization. This is a very useful feature when you need to make changes to a predefined table. For more information, see “Duplicating Tables” on page 7-331.

•

Table Management > Delete—Delete the selected table. For more information, see “Deleting Tables” on page 7-332.

•

Table Management > Reset—Reset a table’s units to the current unit system or reset a predefined table to factory defaults. For more information, see “Resetting Tables” on page 7-332.


FlexTables

7.1.1

Creating New Tables To create a new table, open the Table Manager (see “Table Manager” on page 7-330) by clicking the Tabular Reports button on the main toolbar, or by choosing Report > Tables. In the Table Manager dialog box, click the Table Management button and select New.

7.1.2

•

Specify the Table Type (see “Table Type” on page 7-333) to indicate the type of network elements you want to display in your table.

•

Specify either a one- or two-row display for your table.

•

Enter the name of your new table in the Enter the description for this table: field. This name will also be used as the report title when the table is printed.

•

Click OK to accept these settings and proceed to the Table Setup dialog box to define your table.

Editing Tables The Edit option allows you to modify the list of attributes that will appear in your table.

7.1.3

Duplicating Tables The Duplicate option allows you to create a new table based on an existing table.


7-331

Table Setup Dialog Box

7.1.4

Deleting Tables The Delete option allows you to delete any table that you have defined. You cannot delete the predefined tables.

7.1.5

Renaming Tables Note:

The table name will be used as the title in printed reports. You cannot rename any of the predefined tables. If you need to rename a predefined table, duplicate it first and then rename it (see “Duplicating Tables” on page 7-331).

The Rename option allows you to change the name of any table that you have defined. You cannot rename any of the predefined tables.

7.1.6

7.2

Resetting Tables •

Reset Units to the Current Unit System—This option is only available for tables that are in Local Units mode (for more information, see “Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342). Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own local set of column properties, such as units and precision. Use this option to reset all units in the selected table to the defaults for the current unit system, which refers to the units used in the current project. You will be prompted for confirmation before this action is performed.

•

Reset to Factory Defaults—You can reset any of the predefined tables to the factory defaults. This option is not available for tables that you create.

Table Setup Dialog Box Note:

The number next to the Selected Columns label indicates the number of columns that will appear in your table.

The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following options:

7-332

•

Table Type—Allows you to specify the type of network elements that will appear in the table. For example, only pipes will appear in a pipe table. For more information, see “Table Type” on page 7-333.

•

Available Columns—Contains all the attributes that are available for your table design. These attributes will change based on the Table Type field. For more information, see “Available Table Columns” on page 7-333.


FlexTables

7.2.1

•

Pick Button—You can click this button to access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56) for selecting columns to be added to the tabular report. The selected column will be highlighted in the Available Columns list, and it can then be added to the Selected Columns list.

•

Selected Columns—Contains attributes that will appear in your table. When you open the table, the selected attributes will appear as columns in the same order as in the list. You can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons to change the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list. For more information, see “Selected Table Columns” on page 7-333.

•

Allow Duplicate Columns—An advanced feature that allows you to place two or more identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems. For more information, see “Allow Duplicate Columns” on page 7-335.

•

Column Manipulation Buttons—Allows you to select or deselect columns to be used in the table, as well as to arrange the order in which the columns will appear. For more information, see “Table Manipulation Buttons” on page 7-334.

Table Type The Table Type field allows you to specify the types of elements that will appear in the table. It also provides a filter for the attributes that appear in the Available Columns list. When you choose a table type, the available list will only contain attributes that can be used for that table type. For example, only pipe attributes will be available for a pipe table.

7.2.2

Available Table Columns The Available Columns list is located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog box. This list contains all of the attributes that are available for the type of table you are creating. The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-editable attributes, while those displayed in white represent editable attributes.

7.2.3

Selected Table Columns The Selected Columns list is located on the right side of the Table Setup dialog box. The attributes in this list will appear as columns in the table when it is opened. The columns will appear in the same order as the attributes in the selected list. To add columns to the Selected Columns list: •

Select one or more attributes in the Available Columns list.

•

Click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.


7-333

Table Setup Dialog Box

7.2.4

Table Manipulation Buttons The Add and Remove buttons are located in the center of the Table Setup dialog box. [ > ]:

Adds the selected items from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list (for more information, see “Available Table Columns” on page 7-333 and “Selected Table Columns” on page 7-333).

[ >> ]:

Adds all of the items in the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.

[ < ]:

Removes the selected items from the Selected Columns list.

[ << ]:

Removes all items from the Selected Columns list.

Note:

You can Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select multiple attributes in the Available Columns list. Holding down the Shift key produces group selection, whereas using the Control key will let you select single elements. The items displayed in yellow represent non-editable columns (i.e., columns that contain calculated data), while those in white represent editable columns (i.e., columns that contain input data).

To rearrange the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list:

7-334

•

Highlight the item to be moved.

•

Move it up or down in the list by clicking the up or down button located below the Selected Columns list, or by dragging it to the desired location.


FlexTables

7.2.5

Allow Duplicate Columns Set this check box to allow duplicate columns in a table. Allow Duplicate Columns is an advanced feature that allows you to place two identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems.

7.3

Table Window Note:

Use the Scenario control located at the top of the Table Window to quickly view the data for different scenarios.

The Table window is where you will perform most of your data input and review. It has many features to assist you with data entry, data formatting, report customization, and output generation. To access the Table window, highlight a table in the Table Manager, and click OK. The Table window includes: •

“Table Navigation” on page 7-336

•

“Table Customization” on page 7-340

Options: •

“Sorting Tables” on page 7-338

•

“Filtering Tables” on page 7-339

•

“Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341

•

“Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337

•

“Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340

•

“Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342

•

“Mixing Units in a Tabular Report” on page 7-342

•

“Abbreviated Labels” on page 7-341

•

“Changing Column Display Properties” on page 7-341

Output: •

“File (Export Table to ASCII File)” on page 7-344

•

“Table Copy to Clipboard” on page 7-344

•

“Table Print” on page 7-344

•

“Table Print Preview” on page 7-344


7-335

Table Window

7.3.1

Editing Tables Editing tables includes: •

“Editable Table Columns” on page 7-336

•

“Table Navigation” on page 7-336

•

“Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337

Editable Table Columns Editable table columns correspond to input data that you can change. The values in these columns can be modified either directly or through the Global Edit option. These columns are displayed with a white background. Non-editable table columns are displayed with a yellow background, and correspond to model results calculated by the program and composite values.

Table Navigation The Table window supports two modes: •

“Table Navigation Mode” on page 7-336

•

“Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode)” on page 7-336

By pressing the F2 key, you can toggle between them. Table Navigation Mode The Arrow keys, Home, End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+ keys navigate to different cells in a table. Table Navigation Mode is the default mode when editing a table. To edit within a single cell of a table, press the F2 key to switch to Cell Navigation Mode. Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode) In Cell Navigation Mode, the Arrow keys, Home, and End keys navigate within a single cell. When Cell Navigation Mode is active, the word EDIT will appear on the status pane at the bottom of the window. Cell Navigation Mode will automatically terminate when you press any key except for Left, Right, Home, End, Delete, or Backspace.

7-336


FlexTables

Globally Editing Data Note:

Global Edit is available only for editable columns. You can use Global Edit in conjunction with Filtering (see “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339) to globally edit a subset of elements.

You can globally change the values of any editable column in a table. Right-click the column that you wish to globally change and choose the Global Edit menu item. For numeric columns: •

Choose the operation to be performed: Add, Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.

•

Enter the value you wish to use.

•

Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this change.

For non-numeric columns:

7.3.2

•

Enter the new value.

•

Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this change.

Sorting and Filtering Tables Sorting and filtering tables includes: •

“Sorting Tables” on page 7-338

•

“Custom Sort” on page 7-338

•

“Filtering Tables” on page 7-339

•

“Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340


7-337

Table Window

Sorting Tables Tables can be sorted based on a single column or multiple columns.

Custom Sort You can sort elements in the table based on one or more columns, in ascending or descending order. For example, the following table is given:

Slope (ft./ft.)

Depth (ft.)

Discharge (cfs)

0.001

1

4.11

0.002

1

5.81

0.003

1

7.12

0.001

2

13.43

0.002

2

19.00

0.003

2

23.27

A custom sort is set up to sort first by Slope, then by Depth, in ascending order. The resulting table would appear in the following order:

7-338

Slope (ft./ft.)

Depth (ft.)

Discharge (cfs)

0.001

1

4.11

0.001

2

13.43

0.002

1

5.81

0.002

2

19.00

0.003

1

7.12

0.003

2

23.27


FlexTables

Filtering Tables Filters let you change the table so only rows that match the specified criteria will appear. To access the filtering operations, use the Options button at the top of the Table window (in the case of a FlexTable)—for more information, see “Table Window” on page 7-335—or right-click the column header for the attribute by which you wish to filter. •

Quick Filter—Set up a simple filter by right-clicking the column header for the attribute by which you wish to filter.

•

Custom Filter—Set up a custom filter based on one or more criteria.

•

Reset—Turn off the active filter, causing all available rows in the table to be displayed. Note:

Another way to select which elements are displayed in the table is to first select elements, either graphically or using the Selection Set tool. Then, right-click any of the selected elements and choose Edit Group from the shortcut menu that appears, which opens the Table Manager dialog box. Only the selected elements will appear in any of the tables you open at this point.

When you perform a Quick Filter or a Custom Filter, the Filter dialog box will open and let you specify your filtering criteria. Each filter criterion is made up of three items: •

Column—The attribute to filter.

•

Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >, Contains, and Begins With). Note:

•

The new filtering options “Contains” and “Begins With” allow more flexibility with regard to filtering tables. These filters are only available for Column Types that have alphabetic values, for example Label or Zone. The Contains filter checks for the specified value anywhere in the words, and the Begins With filter checks only the first letter for the specified value.

Value—The comparison value.

Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active for the associated table until the filter is reset.


7-339

Table Window The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed). When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted. Table filtering allows you to perform global editing (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that appear in the filtered table can be edited.

Include Inactive Topology This table option allows you to include or exclude elements that are Inactive in the current scenario. By default, Inactive elements are not displayed in the tabular reports.

7.3.3

Table Customization There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements: •

Changing the Report Title—When you print a table, the table name is used as the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your printed report by renaming the table (see “Renaming Tables” on page 7-332), using the Table Manager.

•

Adding/Removing Columns—You can add, remove, and change the order of columns from the Table Setup dialog box. Use the Table Manager (see “Table Manager” on page 7-330) to access the Table Setup dialog box.

•

Drag/Drop Column Placement—With the Table window open, select the column that you would like to move by holding down the left mouse button on its column heading. Drag the column heading to the left or right, and release the mouse button to drop the column into its new location.

•

Resizing Columns—With the Table window open, place your pointer over the vertical separator line between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that you can resize the column. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the left or right to stretch the column to its new size. Release the mouse button to set the new column width.

•

Changing Column Display Properties—With the Table window open, rightclick in the heading area of the column you wish to change and choose the Properties menu item. The current column properties will be displayed in the Set Field Options dialog box. When working in synchronized units, you can change the project units and display precision, if applicable; these changes apply to the current table only. For more information, see “Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342.

•

7-340

Changing Column Headings—With the Table window open, right-click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label. For more information, see “Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341.


FlexTables Table customization includes: •

“Changing Column Headings” on page 7-341

•

“Abbreviated Labels” on page 7-341

•

“Changing Column Display Properties” on page 7-341

•

“Local versus Synchronized Units” on page 7-342

•

“Mixing Units in a Tabular Report” on page 7-342

Changing Column Headings To change the label of any column in the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335), right-click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label from the context menu. The backslash character (\) can be used to insert a line-break wherever you want the title to be split into multiple lines. If you enter an empty label, the column heading will be restored to the default label.

Abbreviated Labels Using label abbreviations will allow columns to take up less space. Thus, more data fits on each page when printing a report. If you wish to define an abbreviated label, right-click the desired column heading and choose Edit Column Label. In the Label dialog box, separate the abbreviated label from the default label with the pipe symbol, |, located above the backslash (\) on most keyboards. For example, to use the abbreviation L for the Length column, type Length|L in the field provided. When the Use Label Abbreviations option is turned on, the abbreviated label will appear.

Changing Column Display Properties You can change the display properties (e.g., units, precision) of any numeric column in the Table window (for more information, see “Table Window” on page 7-335). Right-click the label of the column that you wish to change, and select Properties from the shortcut menu. This action opens the Set Field Options dialog box (see “Field Options” on page 4-252), where you can change the display properties of the column.


7-341

Table Window

Local versus Synchronized Units Use the Options button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335) to access the Use Local Units menu item. Click the menu item to toggle between Local Units and Synchronized Units. A check mark will appear next to the Use Local Units menu item to indicate that Local Units mode is active. Otherwise, Synchronized Units mode is active. •

Synchronized Units—This is the default mode, which allows the table to stay synchronized with the active project. If you have one project in US Customary and one project in SI units, the table will match the units in the project that is currently open.

•

Local Units—Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own local set of column properties (units, precision, etc). This feature gives you the ability to build tables that are always in a fixed unit system, regardless of what unit system the active project is currently using. This option is useful for printing reports in different unit systems.

When the Table window is open, the current unit synchronization mode is displayed in the status pane at the bottom of the window.

Mixing Units in a Tabular Report This software allows for duplicate columns in a table, thus giving you the ability to display an attribute in multiple units. For example, to see two Pipe Length columns in a Table, one in feet and one in meters: •

Open the Table Manager. For more information, see “Table Manager” on page 7330.

•

Click the Table Management button, and select New to create a new table.

•

Select the Pipe Table Type from the choice list, and enter a name for your new table. Click OK, and you will be taken to the Table Setup dialog box (see “Table Setup Dialog Box” on page 7-332) where you can customize your table.

•

In the Table Setup dialog box, activate the Allow Duplicate Columns check box located in the lower left corner of the dialog box.

•

Add the Length column to the Selected Columns list. Note:

•

7-342

The Length column will still appear in the Available Columns list, but will be displayed in a lighter color, indicating that it has already been selected.

Add the Length column again.


FlexTables

7.3.4

•

Click OK to close the Table Setup dialog box. From the Table Manager, highlight the table you have just created, and click OK.

•

Click the Options button at the top of the window and select the Use Local Units menu item to turn Local Units on. You will be prompted to verify that you want to use local units. Click Yes.

•

Right-click the first Length column and select Length Properties to set the units in the column to ft. Then, right-click the second Length column to set the units to m.

Table Output Table output includes: •

“File (Export Table to ASCII File)” on page 7-344

•

“Table Copy to Clipboard” on page 7-344

•

“Table Print” on page 7-344

•

“Table Print Preview” on page 7-344


7-343

Table Window

File (Export Table to ASCII File) You may export the data shown in the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7335) to an ASCII text file in either tab- or comma-delimited format.

Table Copy to Clipboard The Copy button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335) allows you to copy tab-delimited data to the Windows clipboard. Tab-delimited data can be pasted directly into your favorite spreadsheet program or word processor.

Table Print The Print button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335) is used to output the table directly to the printer.

Table Print Preview Note:

Using label abbreviations (see “Abbreviated Labels” on page 7341) will allow some columns to be narrower, permitting more data to fit on each page. Use the Options button at the top of the Table window to access this option. Printing with landscape orientation will also allow more columns to fit on a single page. From the Print Preview window, use the Options > Print Setup menu item to access orientation.

Click the Print Preview button at the top of the Table window (see “Table Window” on page 7-335) to view the report in the format that will be printed. If you want to paste your table into word processing software, copy from the print preview. If you want to paste into spreadsheet software, copy directly from the table.

7-344


Chapter

8

Scenarios/Alternatives

The scenario management feature allows you to easily analyze and recall an unlimited number of What If? calculations for your model. The powerful two-level design, which uses Scenarios that contain Alternatives, gives you precise control over changes to the model, while eliminating any need to input or maintain redundant data. We have worked hard to devise a system that offers the power and flexibility that you demand, with the ease of use that you have come to expect from us. If you are like most users, you will want to jump right in without having to spend a lot of time reading. When you are ready to create your first scenario, you will find that you will be able to accomplish what you want easily and quickly. The Scenario Wizard is designed to get you started quickly, while slowly exposing you to the power behind scenarios and alternatives. When you are ready to model more complex scenarios, you will appreciate the power and flexibility provided by the various scenario management features. If you are a beginning user, try the Scenario Wizard (see “Scenario Wizard” on page 8-369) and run the Scenario tutorial. For more information, see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347 and “Scenario Management Guide” on page C-783.

8.1

Alternatives Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds the data for a particular element in your system. The different types of alternatives are: •

“Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347

•

“Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349

•

“Physical Alternative” on page 8-350

•

“Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353


8-345

Alternatives •

“Demand Alternative” on page 8-354

•

“Initial Settings Alternative” on page 8-355

•

“Operational Alternative” on page 8-357

•

“Age Alternative” on page 8-358

•

“Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358

•

“Trace Alternative” on page 8-360

•

“Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360

•

“Capital Cost Alternative” on page 8-363

•

“User Data Alternative” on page 8-363

•

“Energy Cost Alternative” on page 8-363

The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario. Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see “Calculation Options” on page 9-391), allowing you to compute and compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios. There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data). When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base alternative types. If you wish to see how your system will behave, for example, by increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters, and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that you can create. Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each alternative will have. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base alternative if you wish. Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative will be changed when the base alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative will remain unchanged.

8-346



8.1.1

Alternatives Manager The Alternatives Manager is the central location for managing the alternatives in your project. It allows you to edit, create, and manage the various types of alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives. The available alternatives of each type are conveniently organized in a list on the left side of the dialog box. The network element data is grouped into the following types: •

“Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353

•

“Physical Alternative” on page 8-350

•

“Demand Alternative” on page 8-354

•

“Initial Settings Alternative” on page 8-355

•

“Operational Alternative” on page 8-357

•

“Age Alternative” on page 8-358

•

“Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358

•

“Trace Alternative” on page 8-360

•

“Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8-360

•

“Capital Cost Alternative” on page 8-363

•

“Energy Cost Alternative” on page 8-363

•

“User Data Alternative” on page 8-363 Note:

You will not be allowed to merge or delete an alternative that is referenced by one or more scenarios. When you attempt to perform the operation, you will be provided with a list of the scenarios that reference the alternative. If you are attempting to merge an alternative that is referenced, you will need to edit the scenarios that references the child alternative that you are merging from, and make them reference the parent alternative that you are merging to. Use the Scenario Control Center window (see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8366) to edit the scenarios, and the Alternatives tab (see “Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372) to make the scenario point to the parent alternative.

On the right side of the dialog box are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives. The following list provides a brief description of the function of each of these buttons.


8-347

Alternatives Add—Create a new base alternative, first prompting for a name, and then opening an alternatives editor. Base alternatives are initialized with the first data set entered either in tables or specific element dialog boxes. Add Child—Create a new child alternative that inherits from the selected alternative. This allows you to automatically share the majority of the records from a parent alternative, while modifying only selected records in the child alternative. Edit—Open the tabular record editor for the selected alternative. This tabular record contains all the values that are used by the selected alternative. Merge—Moves all records from the selected child alternative into its parent alternative, and then removes the selected alternative. The records in the selected alternative will replace the corresponding records in the parent. This is helpful when you have been experimenting with changes in a child alternative, and you want to permanently apply those changes to the parent alternative. All other alternatives that inherit data from that parent alternative will reflect these changes. Rename—Rename an existing alternative. This invokes an in-place editor in the tree view of the available alternatives. Make the desired changes to the existing name and press the Enter key. Duplicate—Create a new alternative filled with records copied from the selected alternative. Use this if you wish to copy the data from an alternative, but not create a child. The two alternatives will be independent. Delete—Remove the selected alternative and its records. Deleting an alternative will also delete all of the input data associated with that alternative. Report—Generate a Print Preview of a summary report of the selected alternative, all alternatives, or the selected alternative and all of its children in that hierarchy.

8-348



Merging Child Alternatives The Alternative Manager’s Merge command allows you to replace the values associated with a parent alternative’s attributes with those contained within one of its’ child alternatives. The primary use for this command is to apply changes that have been made in an “experimental” child alternative to the parent alternative from which it is derived.

8.1.2

Alternatives Editor Note:

As you make changes to records, the check box will automatically become checked. If you want to reset a record to its parent’s values, clear the corresponding check box. Many columns support Global Editing (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337), allowing you to change all values in a single column. Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option. The check box column will be disabled when you edit a base alternative.

The Alternatives Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need. There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative. If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is local, or specific, to this alternative. If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed in the parent, the change will be reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternative’s parent.


8-349

Alternatives

8.1.3

Physical Alternative One of the most common uses of a water distribution model is the design of new or replacement facilities. During design, it is common to try several physical alternatives in an effort to find the most cost effective solution. For example, when designing a replacement pipeline, it would be beneficial to try several sizes and pipe materials to find the most satisfactory combination. Our powerful Alternative Manager allows you to set up an unlimited number of design alternatives and apply them in different scenarios. Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored in a physical properties alternative, as listed below: •

“Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes” on page 8-350

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps” on page 8-351

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for Valves” on page 8-351

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs” on page 8-352

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions” on page 8-352

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for Reservoirs” on page 8-352

•

“Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks” on page 8-353

Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes The Physical Alternative editor for pipes (see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pipes. The following columns are available:

8-350

•

Label—The label is not editable in this dialog box.

•

Material—Type of material from which the pipe is constructed (e.g., Ductile Iron, PVC, Steel).

•

Diameter—Internal diameter of the pipe. The nominal diameter of the pipe is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

•

Roughness—A measure of the pipe’s internal roughness, based on the chosen friction method.

•

Minor Loss Coefficient—Appurtenances such as valves, bends, and tees contribute to local flow disturbances resulting in energy loss. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the composite minor loss element for the pipe.

•

Check Valve—Select this check box to indicate the presence of a check valve.



Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps The Physical Alternative editor for pumps (see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pumps, which consist of the following: •

Label—The label for the pump. This label is not editable in this dialog box.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the pump, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

•

Pump Definition—The attributes that define the pump’s operating characteristics. Click this field, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the parameters for the active pump type.

•

Variable Speed Pump?—This column contains a check box for each pump in the model. If the box is checked, the pump is a Variable Speed pump.

•

VSP Type—This column is only editable when the Variable Speed Pump? Box is checked for the pump in question. When the field is activated, it consists of a menu that allows you to select whether the VSP type is Pattern Based or Fixed Head, and an Ellipsis (…) button that allows you change the settings for the variable speed pump.

•

Efficiency Type—This field consists of a menu that allows you to select whether the Efficiency type is Best Efficiency Point, Constant Efficiency, or Multiple Efficiency Point, and an Ellipsis (…) button that allows you change the efficiency settings. To get set the efficiency type, Click the Ellipsis (...) button next to Pump Definition on the General tab of the Pump Element Editor, click Add or Edit in the Pump Definition Manager, and click the Efficiency tab.

Physical Alternative Editor for Valves The Physical Alternative editor for valves (see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281) used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of valves. The following columns are available for all types of valve: •


•

Elevation—Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

•

Diameter—The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

•

Minor Loss Coefficient—The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the Minor Loss Library (for more information, see “Engineering Library Editor” on page 14-565).


8-351

Alternatives

Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs The Physical Alternative editor for GPVs (see “Valve Editor” on page 6-281) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of General Purpose Valves. The following columns are available: •

Label—The label for the valve. The Label is not editable in this dialog box.

•

Elevation—Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

•

Diameter—The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

•

Minor Loss Elements—The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the Minor Loss Library (for more information, see “Engineering Library Editor” on page 14-565).

•

Headloss Curve—This column contains an Edit button for each GPV in the model. Clicking this button opens the Curve dialog box, which allows you to input the Headloss-Discharge points for that particular GPV.

Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions The Physical Alternative editor for Pressure Junctions (see “Pressure Junction Editor” on page 6-277) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of junctions, which consist of the following: •


•

Elevation—Elevation of the junction, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

•

Zone—Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which allows you to edit or add zones.

•

Emitter Coefficient—Input the emitter coefficient for the corresponding junction.

Physical Alternative Editor for Reservoirs The Physical Alternative editor for reservoirs (see “Reservoir Editor” on page 6-279) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of reservoirs, which consist of the following:

8-352

•


•

Elevation—Elevation of the reservoir, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.


Scenarios/Alternatives •

HGL Pattern—Displays the hydraulic grade line pattern that is currently in effect (if any—if no pattern is selected, this box will display Fixed). This box consists of a menu which lists the available patterns, and an Ellipsis (…) button which, when clicked, opens the Pattern Manager (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394) to allow you to edit or create a pattern.

•

Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which allows you to edit or add zones.

Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks The Physical Alternative editor for tanks (see “Tank Editor” on page 6-278) is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of tanks. The following columns are available:

8.1.4

•


•

Elevation—Ground elevation of the tank.

•

Base Elevation—The vertical distance of the tank’s base above a known datum. Typically, Mean Sea Level is the datum used. The base elevation is the elevation from which all tank levels are computed.

•

Minimum Elevation (or Level)—This is the lowest possible water surface elevation for the tank. If the tank drains below this level, it will shut off from the system.

•

Maximum Elevation (or Level)—This is the highest possible water surface elevation for the tank. If the tank fills above this level, it will shut off from the system.

•

Section—The physical parameters that define the tank cross sectional geometry. There are two (2) types of tank sections, Constant Area and Variable Area. Click this field, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to edit the parameters for the active tank section type.

•

Zone—Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Zone Manager (see “Zone Manager” on page 6-328), which allows you to edit or add zones.

Active Topology Alternative The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the system. The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:


8-353

Alternatives •

Pressure Pipe

•

Pressure Junction

•

Reservoir

•

Tank

•

Pump

•

Valve

For each tab, the same setup applies—the tables are divided into three columns. The first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative. To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Active? column that corresponds to that element’s Label.

8.1.5

Demand Alternative The Demand Alternative allows you to model the response of the pipe network to different sets of demands, such as the current demand and the demand of your system ten years from now. Note:

Setting up multiple demand alternatives makes it possible to easily manage different loading conditions for any network. For example, an Average Day demand alternative contains the average demands for each junction in the network, and a Peak Day demand alternative contains the peak demands for each junction in the network. The Alternative Manager allows you to create any number of demand alternatives. This program allows multiple demands to be attributed to a single junction.

The demand alternative table includes the following columns:

8-354

•

Label—Identifying label of the junction element.

•

Type—Demand type, Demand or Inflow. Direct editing of this item is disabled if the junction has multiple demands (see Demand Summary below).

•

Base Flow—Hydraulic load attributed to the junction for Steady-State Analysis, or the hydraulic load before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for Extended Period Analysis. If the junction has multiple demands, this field displays a single calculated Baseline Load, and direct editing of the field is disabled (see Demand Summary below).


Scenarios/Alternatives •

Pattern—Name of the Pattern (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395) that applies the time-step multiplier to the Baseline Load if the junction has multiple demands. Direct editing is disabled and the pattern name is shown as Composite.

•

Demand Summary—A summary displaying the calculated Baseline Load, the EPS Pattern applied to the Baseline Load, and the calculated demand Type (Demand or Inflow) for the junction. Clicking twice on a Demand Summary opens an editing dialog box for working with multiple demands on a junction.

On the right side of this dialog box, there is also an Import button. Clicking this button allows you to choose an ASCII tab-delimited text file from which to import demands. More information on this procedure can be found in the Importing Demands topic (for more information, see “Importing Demands” on page 6-301).

8.1.6

Initial Settings Alternative The Initial Settings Alternative contains the data that set the conditions of certain types of network elements at the beginning of the simulation. For example, a pipe can start in an open or closed position and a pump can start in an on or off condition. The following types of network elements have initial settings: •

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes” on page 8-355

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps” on page 8-355

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Tanks” on page 8-356

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves” on page 8-356

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs” on page 8-356

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs” on page 8-356

•

“Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPVs” on page 8-357

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes The Initial Settings Alternative for pipes is used to specify if the pipe status is initially Open or Closed.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps The Pump Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pumps. The fields for each record are as follows: •



8-355

Alternatives •

Status—Indicates whether the pump is initially On or Off.

•

Relative Speed Factor—Determines the initial speed of the pump impeller relative to the speed at which the pump curve is defined.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Tanks The Tank Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various water surface elevations (hydraulic grades) in your tank at the beginning of the simulation.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves The Pressure Valve Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pressure valves (Pressure Breaker, Pressure Reducer, and Pressure Sustaining Valves). The fields for each record are as follows: •


•

Valve Status—Indicates whether the pressure valve is initially Active, Inactive (wide-open), or Closed.

•

Hydraulic Grade\Pressure—Initial setting for the valve. Depending on the input mode, the setting is entered and displayed in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs The FCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Flow Control Valves. The fields for each record are as follows: •


•

Valve Status—Indicates whether the FCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.

•

Discharge—Initial flow setting for the valve.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs The TCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Throttle Control Valves. The fields for each record are as follows:

8-356

•


•

Valve Status—Indicates whether the TCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.

•

Headloss Coefficient—Initial headloss coefficient for the valve.



Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPVs The GPV Initial Settings Alternative allows you to choose whether the valve will be initially Active or Closed. Note:

There is no Inactive setting for GPVs. When the valve is active, the associated headlosses will be applied as determined by the values entered into the GPV’s Head-Discharge Points Table.

The only available input field for GPVs is as follows:

8.1.7

•


•

Valve Status—Indicates whether the GPV is initially Active or Closed.

Operational Alternative The Operational Alternative (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345) allows you to specify controls on pressure pipes, pumps, as well as valves The Controlled field contains a Boolean (true or false) statement that indicates whether the network element is controlled. Clicking in this field activates a button that allows you to access the Controls dialog box (see “Controls Tab” on page 6-305) and edit the controls for this element. Note:

Logical Controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based on the order they appear in the Operational Controls alternative. For more information, see “Active Topology” on page 9-419.

The Operational Controls alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both logical controls and logical control sets. The following options are available in this dialog box: •

Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you can add previously created Logical Controls to the new control set.

•

Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to Edit the highlighted control set.

•

Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.

•

Delete—Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

•

Rename—Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, Conditions, Actions, and elements for all of the Logical Controls contained within the control set.


8-357

Alternatives

8.1.8

Age Alternative The Age Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis for modeling the age of the water through the pipe network. This alternative allows you to analyze different scenarios for varying water ages at the network nodes.

8.1.9

Constituent Alternative The Constituent Alternative contains the water quality data used to model a constituent concentration throughout the network when performing a water quality analysis. Selecting a constituent from the Constituent scroll-down list provides default values for table entries. This software provides a user-editable library of constituents for maintaining these values, which may be accessed by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button next to the Constituent scroll-down list. The tabbed tables at the bottom of the dialog box includes different columns depending on the type of elements populating the table. Columns may include such values as: •

Label—Identifying label of the element represented by the row.

•

Initial Constituent—Concentration of the constituent at the beginning of the analysis.

•

Bulk Reaction—Reaction rate constant used to model reactions of the constituent within the bulk flow.

•

Wall Reaction—Reaction rate constant used to model reactions that occur with the material along the pipe wall.

•

Is Constituent Source?—True or false check to determine whether a node is a source of the constituent.

•

Constituent Source Type – This column contains a menu that allows you to select the Constituent Source Type, and an Ellipsis (…) button that opens a dialog box that allows you to specify the baseline concentration and constituent pattern for the associated Constituent Source. The available Constituent Source Types are as follows: –

Concentration—A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction. Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the following fields: -

8-358

Constituent Baseline Load—Load attributed to the element before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for an Extended Period Analysis.


Scenarios/Alternatives –

–

–

•

Constituent Pattern—Name of the Pattern that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load.

Flow Paced Booster—A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network. Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the following fields: -


-

Constituent Pattern—Name of the Pattern (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395) that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load.

Setpoint Booster—A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point. Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the following fields: -


-


Mass Booster—A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network. Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens the Concentration dialog box which contains the following fields: -


-


Tank Mixing Model—This section allows you to specify the Tank Mixing Model that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is specified on a tank-bytank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model. The following mixing models are available: –

Two Compartment—Under this mixing model, available storage is divided into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives overflow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing model is selected, the Two Compartment column becomes available for input.

–

Completely Mixed—The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.


8-359

Alternatives –

FIFO—First In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is the first parcel to leave.

–

LIFO—Last In/First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is the first to leave.

•

Compartment 1—This column is only available for input when the Two Compartment Tank Mixing Model is selected. This field allows you to enter the percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.

•


•


Depending on the type of highlighted network element in the table, the Use Defaults button will reset the reaction coefficients for that element to the constituent default values as specified in the constituent library, or it will reset the initial constituent concentrations to 0.

8.1.10

Trace Alternative The Trace Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis to determine the percentage of water at each node coming from a specified node. The Trace Alternative data includes a Trace Node, which is the node from which all tracing is computed. The trace alternative table includes the following columns:

8.1.11

•

Label—The identifying label of node elements.

•

Initial Trace—A percentage value representing the starting condition at the node.

Fire Flow Alternative The Fire Flow Alternative contains the input data required to perform a fire flow analysis. This data includes the set of junction nodes for which fire flow results are needed, the set of default values for all junctions included in the fire flow set, and a record for each junction node in the fire flow set.

8-360



Default Flow and Pressure Constraints Each fire flow alternative has a set of default parameters that are applied to each junction in the fire flow set. When a default value is modified, you will be prompted to decide if the junction records that have been modified from the default should be updated to reflect the new default value. The default constraints are grouped in the Flow Constraints and Pressure Constraints sections, as follows: •

Needed Fire Flow—Flow rate required at a fire flow junction to satisfy demands.

•

Fire Flow Upper Limit—Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. It will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures.

•

Apply Fire Flows By—There are two methods for applying fire flow demands. The fire flow demand can be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it can completely replace the junction’s baseline demand. The junction’s baseline demand is defined by the Demand Alternative (see “Demand Alternative” on page 8-354) selected for use in the Scenario along with the fire flow alternative.

•

Residual Pressure—Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

•

Minimum Zone Pressure—Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within a zone. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another zone.

•

Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint—Toggle indicating whether a minimum pressure is to be maintained throughout the entire pipe system.

•

Minimum System Pressure—Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied.


8-361

Alternatives

Selection Set Set of selected elements where fire flows need to be analyzed. You can choose between ‘All Junctions’ or a ‘Subset of Junctions’ that you can edit by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button and accessing the Selection Set editor.

Fire Flow Loads The table on the fire flow alternative editor displays the fire flow loads for the junctions in this set. The values in this table reflect the default values entered, unless a change is made. The columns in the table are as follows: •

Label—Label of the junction whose fire flow record is being displayed.

•

Specify Local Fire Flow Constraints—Select this check box to allow input different from the global values. When you select this check box, the fields in that row turn from yellow (read-only) to white (editable).

•

Needed Fire Flow—Flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands. This value will be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it will replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows.

•

Fire Flow Upper Limit—Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. This value will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures. This value will be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it will replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows.

•

Residual Pressure, Minimum Zone Pressure, Minimum System Pressure— Set of pressure constraints for each Fire Flow node. See description for each of these parameters in the Default Flow and Pressure Constraints section above.

Use Defaults Note:

The Defaults for a fire flow alternative can only be set in the root alternative. All child alternatives inherit (Inheritance) the Default values from the root. The set of junction nodes is also inherited from the root and cannot be altered in the child alternatives.

Click the Use Defaults button to reset the selected row to the default values for the Fire Flow Alternative. This does not cause the record to inherit from its parent. It only causes it to reflect the Default values.

8-362



8.1.12

Capital Cost Alternative One of the most common uses of the Capital Cost Manager is to compare the cost between several different system configurations. The compartmentalization of the data afforded by the cost alternative makes it easy to develop and subsequently compare various cost data sets. Developing multiple cost alternatives is an effective way to evaluate the cost of several different proposed solutions or to separate the costs associated with several phases of construction. The cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab contains the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element.

8.1.13

•

Label—Identifies the element associated with a particular record.

•

Include in Cost Calculation—This field allows you to specify whether or not to include the element in the cost calculation. If this field is checked, the item will be included in the cost calculation. For more information, see “Include In Cost Calculation?” on page 6-314.

•

Element Costs—This field is only enabled when the field Include in Cost Calculation has a check mark. If this field is editable, you can click it to open up a dialog box where you can edit the construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. Note that you can Global Edit this field to edit the construction (see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315) and non-construction costs (see “Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314) of all the elements in the alternative.

User Data Alternative The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Extension command (see “User Data Extension Dialog Box” on page 6-323) for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative editor contains a tab for each type of network element.

8.1.14

Energy Cost Alternative The Energy Cost Alternative allows you to specify which tanks and pumps will be included in the Energy Cost calculations. For pumps, you can also select which energy pricing pattern will be used, or create a new one. The energy cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab contains the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element. •

Label—Identifies the element associated with a particular record.


8-363

Scenarios

8.2

•

Include in Energy Calculation—This field allows you to specify whether or not to include the element in the energy cost calculation. If this field is checked, the item will be included in the cost calculation.

•

Energy Pricing—This field is only available on the Pump tab of the Energy Cost Alternative editor. This column consists of a menu containing all of the energy pricing patterns that have been created, and an Ellipsis (...) button that opens the Energy Pricing Manager.

Scenarios A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited number of “What If?” situations for your model, and then modify, compute, and review your system under those conditions. You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run (see “Batch Run” on page 8-368), switch between scenarios, and compare scenario results (see “Scenario Comparison” on page 13-555)—all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create. There are three types of scenarios: •

Base Scenarios—Contain all of your working data. When you start a new project, you will begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it references.

•

Child Scenarios—Inherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios. Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child scenarios. Note:

•

8-364

The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.

Manual Fire Flow Scenarios—Manual Fire Flow scenarios can be generated automatically for any junction or set of junctions in your model. You specify the junctions that you want to perform the Fire Flow analysis on, input the fire flow demand at the junctions, and whether this demand should replace or be added to the other demands at the junctions in question. The program then automatically


Scenarios/Alternatives creates a scenario for each junction that was included in the manual fire flow list. These scenarios reflect the changes in the network when the respective fire flow demands are substituted for/added to the normal demands at that junction. An additional benefit of manual fire flow scenarios is the ability to run the newly created scenarios in an extended period simulation, which can help you assess the effects of changing conditions and controls on the availability of the required fire flow at the respective junctions. For more information, see “Manual Fire Flow Scenarios” on page 9-387. Scenarios include:

8.2.1

•

“Scenario Selection” on page 8-365

•

“Editing Scenarios” on page 8-365

•

“Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366

•

“Scenario Wizard” on page 8-369

•

“Scenario Editor” on page 8-371

Scenario Selection You can change the current scenario by using the Scenario drop-down list located on the Analysis Toolbar (see “Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-81) on the main application window. When you select a different scenario, your current input data, calculation options, and calculated results (if available) will reflect the selected scenario and the alternatives it references.

8.2.2

Editing Scenarios Once scenarios and alternatives are created, you do not need to take any special steps to input data into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario. This happens automatically as you make changes to your data. Changes to your data are always applied to the alternatives in your active scenario. For example, consider that a pipe has a 12-in. diameter in the alternative storing data for the Base scenario. Then you switch to Scenario 2, which references another alternative, and change the pipe diameter to 16-in. The new value will automatically be associated with the alternative in Scenario 2. If you switch back to the Base scenario, the pipe diameter will revert to 12-in. You can also enter data directly into an alternative using the Alternatives Editor (for more information, see “Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349). This editor allows you to see all of the changes that you have made in a single alternative. If you make an unintended change to the active child scenario and you wish to remove it, go to the tabular editor for the type of input data you changed, and clear the leading check box on the records for the elements you wish to restore.


8-365

Scenarios

8.2.3

Scenario Control Center The Scenario Control Center allows you to create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one built-in default scenario—the Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create. Note:

When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records (alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced by that scenario will still exist until you explicitly delete them. By accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the referenced alternatives and data records.

The Scenario Control Center is divided into four sections: •

The three buttons that run across the top of the window:

•

Close—Close the Scenario Control Center.

•

Help—Open the online help.

The series of five buttons running along the left side of the window:

8-366

•

Scenario Wizard—Open the Scenario Wizard, which walks you step-by-step through the creation of a new scenario.

•

Scenario Management—Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and managing scenarios: –

Make Current—Sets the currently highlighted scenario as the active scenario, placing a red check on the currently active scenario in the tree view of the Scenario Control Center. Since edits are performed on the currently active scenario, this lets you change the active scenario. When you use Make Current, notice that the scenario in the main window Scenario drop-down list changes to the currently highlighted one.

–

Add—Prompts for a name, then creates a new child, base, or Manual Fire Flow scenario (for more information, see “Manual Fire Flow Scenarios” on page 9-387). If you create a child scenario, it will be based on the scenario that is currently highlighted.

–

Edit—Open the Scenario Editor (see “Scenario Editor” on page 8-371) for the scenario that is currently highlighted.

–

Rename—Rename an existing scenario. This invokes an in-place editor in the tree view of the available scenarios. Make the desired changes to the existing name and press Enter.


Scenarios/Alternatives –

Delete—Delete the scenario that is currently highlighted.

–

Report—Generate a summary report for the scenario that is highlighted, including alternatives, calculation options, notes, and results.

•

Alternatives—Open the Alternatives Manager for creating, editing, and managing alternatives.

•

Batch Run—Open the Batch Run dialog box (see “Batch Run” on page 8-368) for selecting from among the available scenarios and initiating calculations.

•

Scenario Comparison—Open the Annotation Comparison Wizard, which allows you to create a drawing displaying the differences in input and output variables between two scenarios.

The pane in the center of the dialog box: •

Scenarios Pane—Available scenarios in a hierarchical tree showing the parentchild relationships. You can right-click any scenario to perform scenario management functions on it. You can double-click parent scenarios to expand or collapse the child scenarios beneath them.

The pane on the right side of the dialog box, which displays a variety of information depending on which of the following tabs is selected: •

Alternatives Tab—Alternatives referenced by the highlighted scenario, showing the type and name for each alternative. An icon distinguishes whether the alternative belongs to the scenario or is inherited from its parent scenario. Double-click any alternative to open the Alternatives Editor (for more information, see “Alternatives Editor” on page 8-349).

•

Summary Tab—Summary of the calculation options for the highlighted scenario, and any notes you have associated with it.

•

Results Tab—Summary of the last calculation performed for the highlighted scenario.

Scenario Control Center includes: •

“Batch Run” on page 8-368

•

“Creating Scenarios to Model What-if Situations?” on page 8-368


8-367

Scenarios

Batch Run Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or manage a group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run will remain with your project until you change it. To use this dialog box, check the scenarios you want to run and click the Batch button. Each scenario will be calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation. When the batch is completed, the scenario that was current will remain current, even if it was not one that was calculated. Select a calculated scenario from the main window drop-down list to see the results throughout the program, or select it from the Scenario Control Center and click the Results tab to preview the results. The Batch Run dialog box contains a Select button that displays options you can use to select all scenarios or clear your selections.

Creating Scenarios to Model What-if Situations? The scenario management feature was designed to let you model “what-if” situations by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data, and by comparing different output results just as easily. To create a new scenario: 1. Open the Scenario Control Center dialog box by clicking the Scenario Control Center button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main application window. 2. Open the Scenario Wizard by clicking its button in the upper left of the Scenario Control Center dialog box. 3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard—Name the new scenario, choose which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done. 4. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. Notice the scenario you have just created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario drop-down list in the main application window. 5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new scenario.

8-368



8.2.4

Scenario Wizard The Scenario Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of creating a new scenario. These are the basic steps for creating a new scenario: •

Name—Name the scenario and add some comments if you wish. For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 1” on page 8-369.

•

Base—Select a scenario on which to base the new scenario. For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 2” on page 8-370.

•

Calculation—Choose the type of calculation that you would like to perform, as well as other calculation options.

•

Alternatives—Specify the alternative types with which you would like to work. For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 4” on page 8-370.

•

New/Existing—Create and/or select alternatives for your new scenario. For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 5” on page 8-370.

•

Preview—Preview the scenario, and create it when satisfied. For more information, see “Scenario Wizard—Step 6” on page 8-371.

Scenario Wizard—Step 1 Here you can enter a unique name and an optional note for the new scenario that you are creating. The Name field allows you to input a distinguishing name for this scenario. A default name is provided, but we recommend that you change it to something more descriptive. If the new scenario will be based on another scenario, you may want a name that indicates what will be different about the new scenario. For example: Post Development. The next field is optional, and allows you to input free-form text that will be associated with the new scenario. Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions the scenario will model. Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.


8-369

Scenarios

Scenario Wizard—Step 2 Click the existing scenario on which you would like to base your new scenario. Your new child scenario will inherit data from this parent scenario, and will be initialized with the same calculation settings and options. The Scenario Wizard, designed to introduce you to scenarios, does not allow you to create new base scenarios. Existing scenarios in your project are displayed in a tree structure, giving you a graphic depiction of the parent-child relationships. Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.

Scenario Wizard—Step 3 This step of the Scenario Wizard allows you to specify the type of calculation to be associated with the scenario you are creating. If you choose Steady State mode, you are also given the option to perform an automated fire flow analysis. If you choose Extended Period mode, you are also given the option to perform one of the Water Quality Analysis (Age, Constituent, or Trace analysis).

Scenario Wizard—Step 4 Select the check boxes next to the types of alternatives you want to include in the new scenario. The alternatives for boxes you do not check will be inherited from the specified parent scenario. You will be free to add or remove alternatives to the scenario after you create it. Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.

Scenario Wizard—Step 5 Here you are asked to specify the source for each alternative you have requested in the previous tab. •

Create New Alternative—If you choose to create a new alternative, it will inherit from the same type of alternative in the specified or parent scenario. This means it will initially use all the same input data values. Enter a unique and descriptive name for the new alternative.

•

Use Existing Alternative—If you choose to use an existing alternative, you will be shown the tree of existing alternatives from which to choose. In this case, you will not be creating a new alternative for use in the scenario, and instead may actually be sharing an alternative with another scenario.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.

8-370



Scenario Wizard—Step 6 The last step of the Scenario Wizard displays a summary of the scenario you have defined and are about to create. In the left pane is a preview of the scenario as it relates to its parent and other scenarios. In the right pane is a list of the alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8345) it references, showing their labels and types. An icon indicates whether a given alternative is local to the new child scenario, or if it is inherited from the specified or parent scenario. If you are satisfied, click the Finished button to create the new scenario.

8.2.5

Scenario Editor The Scenario Editor is the control center for each analysis. It is the place where you access or change all the information for performing a single calculation (alternatives, calculation type, calculation options, results, and notes). It is organized by the following tabs: •

Alternatives—Edit or view the alternatives to be used by this scenario. For more information, see “Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372.

•

Calculation—Specify the type of hydraulic/water quality calculations to be performed, and click the GO button. For more information, see “Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372.

•

Results—View the hydraulic/water quality calculation results summary. For more information, see “Results Tab” on page 8-374.

•

Notes—Edit or view notes for this scenario. For more information, see “Notes Tab” on page 8-374.

Scenario Editor includes: •

“Alternatives Tab” on page 8-372

•

“Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab” on page 8-372

•

“Notes Tab” on page 8-374

•

“Results Tab” on page 8-374


8-371

Scenarios

Alternatives Tab The Alternatives tab, located in the Scenario Editor, allows you to specify the alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8-345) that will be used by this scenario. There is one row for each Alternative Type. You need only concern yourself with the rows that correspond to the changes you would like to model using this scenario. To specify the alternatives you would like to work with, click the check box next to the alternative type. For example, if you would like to see how your system behaves by changing the shape or size of a few pipes, then click the check box next to the Physical Properties Alternative row. If you would like to use an existing alternative that you have already set up, use the drop-down list to choose the desired alternative. If you would like to create a new alternative, click the New button. You will be asked to name the new alternative, and the Alternatives Editor will open. Note:

When this scenario is active, the alternatives that you specify here will be active. Changes that you make to your model will be made in these alternatives. When you calculate this scenario, these are the alternatives that will be used. This tab will take on a different appearance depending on whether you are editing a base scenario or child scenario. When editing a base scenario, the check box column described above will not be present. You can use the Ellipsis (…) button located to the right of each drop-down list to access the associated Alternatives Manager (for more information, see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347).

The Scenario Wizard will walk you through all of the steps required to create a new scenario. If you are unsure how to specify the alternatives that you would like to work with, we recommend that you use this wizard.

Scenario Editor—Calculation Tab This dialog box is the control center for each network analysis. This program is capable of performing both a Hydraulic Analysis and a Water Quality Analysis. Also, Extended Period Analysis, which considers time-variable hydraulic demands and constituent source concentrations, is available. Patterns (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395) are used to define the time-variable aspects of these system loads. Also contributing to time-variable hydraulic conditions are tank characteristics and controls (“Simple Control Dialog Box” on page 6-305) associated with Pipes, Pumps, and Valves.

8-372


Scenarios/Alternatives Note:

Calibration is one of the most important steps in developing a hydraulic and/or water quality model. This program provides an easy-to-use adjustment feature that lets you tweak the input data to help you match data observed in the field. In addition, new to WaterCAD is the Darwin Calibrator, which allows you to calibrate your model manually or with the assistance of Genetic Algorithms. For more information, see “GA Optimization and Calibration” on page 10-421. Each calculation depends upon a number of parameters that can optionally be configured using the Calculation Options dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to specify the following data and calculation modes: •

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation—If you have selected Extended Period calculation, a set of extended period options become available for editing. These are Start Time, Duration, and Hydraulic Time Step. For more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378.

•

Analysis Modes—In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you are given the option to perform a Water Quality Analysis (in Steady-State mode), or a Fire Flow analysis (in Extended Period Simulation mode). For more information, see “Optional Analysis” on page 9-380.

•

Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments—Use this feature to tweak junction demands and pipe roughnesses without permanently changing the value of the input data. You can experiment with different adjustment factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data. For more information, see “Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments” on page 9-381.

•

Check Data/Validate—This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard-to-detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button. The process will produce either a dialog box stating “No Problem Found,” or a status log with a list of messages. For more information, see “Steady-State/ Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378.“Check Data/Validate” on page 9382

•

Calculation Options—Use this feature to specify parameters affecting hydraulic and water quality calculations. For more information, see “Calculation Options” on page 9-391.


8-373

Scenarios Tip:

If the model has not been calculated, or if the input data has been changed since the last calculation, the word Compute (displayed in Red) will appear in the status pane in the lower right corner of the main editing window. This is a signal that the model needs to be recalculated.

Clicking the GO button will perform the calculations.

Notes Tab Use this tab as a memo field to input text that will be associated with the item on which you are working.

Results Tab The Results tab contains a summary of the last calculation performed using this scenario. Click the Save button to save the results to an ASCII text file. Click the Print Preview button to preview the Scenario Results Summary Report. To open the Results tab for the active scenario: Click the GO button on the toolbar, or select Analysis > Compute. In the resulting dialog box, click the Results tab. To open the Results tab for a specific scenario: From the Scenario Control Center (see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366), right-click the scenario that you wish to edit, and select Edit that appears. In the resulting dialog box, click the Results tab. Note:

Immediately after you run the calculations, the Results tab displays automatically. You will notice a green, yellow, or red light in that tab indicating how successful the computations were.

The light and folder color provides you with the following information: •

Green Light—Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error messages being generated.

•

Yellow Light—Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are displayed in the results summary in this tab.

•

Red Light—Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.

In order to generate a Scenario Summary Report (see “Scenario Summary Report” on page 13-517), click the Report button. Click the Element Messages button to open up a table that displays all the messages generated during the run.

8-374


Scenarios/Alternatives Double-click the folders or click the + sign to open them up and display messages relevant to the folder’s caption. When you click the copy button or save button the exposed text will be stored.


8-375

Scenarios

8-376


Chapter

9

Modeling Capabilities

WaterCAD provides unmatched modeling capabilities, allowing you to model and optimize practically any distribution system aspect, including the following operations: •

•

Hydraulic Analysis –

Perform a steady-state analysis for a snapshot view of the system, or perform an extended-period simulation to see how the system behaves over time.

–

Use any common friction method: Hazen-Williams, Darcy-Weisbach, or Manning’s methods.

–

Take advantage of scenario management to see how your system reacts to different demand and physical conditions, including fire and emergency usage.

–

Control pressure and flow completely by using flexible valve configurations. You can automatically control pipe, valve, and pump status based on changes in system pressure (or based on the time of day). Control pumps, pipes, and valves based on any pressure junction or tank in the distribution system.

–

Perform automated fire flow analysis for any set of elements and zones in the network.

–

Calibrate your model manually, or use the Darwin Calibrator (for more information, see “GA Optimization and Calibration” on page 10-421).

–

Generate capital and energy-cost estimates.

–

Compute system head curves.

Water Quality Analysis –

Track the growth or decay of substances (such as chlorine) as they travel through the distribution network.

–

Determine the age of water anywhere in the network.

–

Identify source trends throughout the system.

Modeling capabilities include:


9-377

Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation

9.1

•

“Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378

•

“Optional Analysis” on page 9-380

•

“Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments” on page 9-381

•

“Check Data/Validate” on page 9-382

•

“Calculate Network” on page 9-383

•

“Flow Emitters” on page 9-384

•

“Fire Flow Analysis” on page 9-385

•

“Water Quality Analysis” on page 9-389

•

“Calculation Options” on page 9-391

•

“Patterns” on page 9-393

•

“Logical Controls” on page 9-397

•

“Active Topology” on page 9-419

Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation WaterCAD gives the choice between performing a steady-state analysis of the system or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.

9.1.1

Steady-State Simulation Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and flow rates under minimum, average, peak, or short term effects on the system due to fire flows. For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with tanks being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the values of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.

9-378



9.1.2

Extended Period Simulation When the variation of the system attributes over time is important, an extended period simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model tanks filling and draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates changing throughout the system in response to varying demand conditions and automatic control strategies formulated by the Stand-Alone. While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to meet a certain average demand, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system has the ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours, or days. Extended period simulations (EPSes) can also be used for energy consumption and cost studies, as well as water quality modeling (for more information, see “Water Quality Theory” on page B-733). Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to determine water usage patterns (see “Patterns” on page 9-393), more detailed tank information, and operational rules for pumps and valves (for more information, see “Pump Theory” on page B-723 and “Valve Theory” on page B-726). Note:

Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis has a default value. You will most likely want to change the values to suit your particular analysis. Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls (typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls, active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may allow for convergence.

The following additional information is required only when performing Extended Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been specified. •

Start Time—The start time format is a standard 24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM. (e.g., 12:45:30 PM).

•

Duration—The duration can be any positive real number.

•

Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.


9-379

Optional Analysis

9.2

Optional Analysis Note:

Water quality calculations are time variable in nature, and therefore are only available when the calculation is configured for extended period analysis. Be sure that the Extended Period Analysis button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the Calculation dialog box is selected. Fire Flow calculations are based on a steady-state calculation. Therefore, if the calculation is configured to perform an Extended Period Analysis, the Fire Flow Analysis check box is disabled. Be sure that the Steady State Analysis button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the dialog box is selected.

In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you are given the option to perform a water quality analysis or a fire flow analysis: Tip:

•

•

9-380

Use the Alternatives Manager (see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8-347) to set up and maintain multiple Fire Flow data sets.

Water Quality Analysis—This check box configures the calculation to analyze for water quality. When this box is checked, you need to specify the type of water quality analysis to perform. This software is capable of performing three types of water quality analyses: –

Age—Determine how long the water has been in the system. For more information, see “Age Analysis” on page 9-389.

–

Constituent—Determine the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system. For more information, see “Constituent Analysis” on page 9-390.

–

Trace—Determine the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system. The source is designated as a specific node. For more information, see “Trace Analysis” on page 9-391.

Fire Flow Analysis—This check box configures WaterCAD to analyze the system for available fire flow. For more information, see “Fire Flow Analysis” on page 9-385.



9.3

Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments Demand and Roughness Adjustments based on observed data are an important part of the development of hydraulic and water quality models. It is a powerful feature for tweaking the two most commonly used parameters during model calibration: junction demands and pipe roughness. One of the first steps performed during a calculation is the transformation of the input data into the required format for the numerical analysis engine. If a factor and operator are present in the adjustment fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used during this transformation. This does not permanently change the value of the input data, but allows you to experiment with different adjustment factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data. The Calibration section contains the following data: •

Demand—Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the individual demands at all junction nodes in the system that have demands for the current scenario. For example, assume node J-10 has two demands, a 100 gpm fixed pattern demand, and a 200 gpm residential pattern demand, for a total baseline demand of 300 gpm. If you enter a demand adjustment multiplier of 1.25, the input to the numerical engine will be 125 gpm and 250 gpm respectively, for a total baseline demand of 375 gpm at node J-10. If you use the Set operator to set the demands to 400, the demand will be adjusted proportionally to become 133 and 267 gpm, for a total baseline of 400 gpm. In addition, if a junction has an inflow of 100 gpm (or a demand of -100 gpm), and the adjustment operation is Set demand to 200 gpm, then the inflow at that junction will be -200 gpm (equivalent to a demand of 200 gpm).

•

Roughness—Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the roughness of all pipes in the distribution network.

•

Apply—Click the Apply button to permanently adjust the demands or roughness. Generally, you will use this button after experimenting with the adjustment factors on successive calculations, and comparing the calculation results to observed field data.


9-381

Check Data/Validate

9.4

Check Data/Validate This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button. The process will produce either a dialog box stating No Problems Found or a status log (see “Status Log” on page 13561) with a list of messages. The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message means that a particular part of the model (i.e., a pipe’s roughness) does not conform to the expected value, or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not being connected on both its intake and discharge sides. Note:

In earlier versions of the software, it was possible to create a topological situation that was problematic but was not checked for in the network topology validation. The situation could be created by morphing a node element such as a junction, tank, or reservoir into a pump or valve. This situation is now detected and corrected automatically, but it is strongly recommended that you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question. If you have further questions or comments related to this, please contact Haestad Methods Support. Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute being outside the accepted range can often be corrected by adjusting the allowable range for that attribute.

The check data algorithm performs the following validations:

9-382

•

Network Topology—Checks that the network contains at least one boundary node, one pipe, and one junction. These are the minimum network requirements. It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reachable from a boundary node through open links.

•

Element Validation—Checks that every element in the network is valid for the calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range, etc. Each type of element has its own checklist. This same validation is performed when you edit an element in a dialog box. The dialog box will not close until each item on the checklist is satisfied.



9.5

Calculate Network Note:

The Check Data button performs a quick check of your input data and displays any errors found. It is recommended to run this function before the actual run of the calculations. Note, however, that the data is automatically checked when you perform the calculations if Validate is On.

The following steps need to be completed before performing hydraulic calculations for a network. 1. Set the Calculation mode to Steady-State or Extended Period (for more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378). If Extended Period is selected, then specify the starting time, the duration, and the time step to be used. 2. Optionally, in Extended Period mode, you may perform a Water Quality Analysis. Set Water Quality On and select one of the three available types of calculations: Age, Constituent or Trace. 3. Optionally, in Steady-State mode, you may also perform a Fire Flow Analysis by setting the Fire Flow Analysis toggle. For more information, see “Fire Flow Analysis” on page 9-385. 4. Optionally, in the Calibration section, you may modify the demand or roughness values of your entire network for calibration purposes. If a factor and operator are present in the calibration fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used during this calculation. This does not permanently change the value of the input data, but allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data. To permanently change the value of the input data, select Apply. 5. Optionally, click the Options button to verify general algorithm parameters used to perform Hydraulic and Water Quality calculations. 6. Turn on Validate, or click the Check Data button to ensure that your input data does not contain errors. 7. Click the GO button to start the calculations.


9-383

Flow Emitters

9.6

Flow Emitters Flow Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e., the flow rate through the emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The constant of proportionality is termed the discharge coefficient. For nozzles and sprinkler heads, the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi pressure drop. Emitters are used to model flow through sprinkler systems and irrigation networks. They can also be used to simulate leakage in a pipe connected to the junction (if a discharge coefficient and pressure exponent for the leaking crack or joint can be estimated) and compute a fire flow at the junction (the flow available at some minimum residual pressure). In the latter case, one would use a very high value of the discharge coefficient (e.g., 100 times the maximum flow expected) and modify the junction’s elevation to include the equivalent head of the pressure target. When both an emitter and a normal demand are specified for a junction, the demand that WaterCAD reports in its output results includes both the normal demand and the flow through the emitter.

9.7

Parallel VSPs Variable speed pumps (VSPs) can be modeled in parallel. This allows you to model multiple VSPs operated at the same speed at one pump station. To model this, a VSP is chosen as a “lead VSP”, which will be the primary pump to deliver the target head. If the lead VSP cannot deliver the target head while operating at maximum speed, then the second VSP will be triggered on and the VSP calculation will determine the common speed for both VSPs. If the target head cannot be delivered while operating both VSPs at the maximum speed, then another VSP will be triggered on until the target head is met with all the available VSPs. All VSPs that are turned on are operated at the same speed. VSPs are to be turned off if they are not required due to a change in demand. If all standby VSPs are running at the maximum speed, but still cannot deliver the target head, the VSPs are translated into fixed speed pumps. To correctly apply the VSP feature to multiple variable speed pumps in parallel, the following criteria must be met: 1. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target node; 2. Parallel VSPs must be controlled by the same target head;

9-384


Modeling Capabilities 3. Parellel VSPs must have the same maximum relative speed factors; 4. Parallel VSPs must be identical, namely the same pump curve. RELATED TOPICS •

9.8

See “Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page 686.

Fire Flow Analysis Note:

Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run, are only reported in the Fire Flow tab of the individual element editors and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (accessed from the Report menu or the Tabular Reports button). Results reported in the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow, unless you explicitly entered the fire flow as a demand at a specific junction.

One of the goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires. WaterCAD’ powerful fire flow analysis capabilities can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining various pressure constraints. Fire flows can be computed for a single node, a group of selected nodes, or all nodes in the system. A complete fire flow analysis can comprise hundreds or thousands of individual flow solutions—one for each junction selected for the fire flow analysis. Fire flows are computed at user-specified locations by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures. The program calculates a steady-state analysis for each node in the Fire Flow Alternative. At each node, it begins by running a SteadyState analysis to ensure that the fire flow constraints that have been set can be met without withdrawing Fire Flow from any of the nodes. If the constraints are met in this initial run, the program then begins iteratively assigning the Needed Fire Flow demands at each of the nodes, and checking to ensure that the constraints are met. The program then runs another set of Steady State analyses, this time either adding the Maximum Fire Flow (as set in the Fire Flow Upper Limit input box of the Fire Flow Alternative) to whatever normal demands are required at that node, or replacing the normal demands. In either case, the program checks the residual pressure at that node, the Minimum Zone Pressure, and, if applicable, the Minimum System Pressure. If the Fire Flow Upper Limit can be delivered while maintaining the various pressure constraints, that node will satisfy the Fire Flow constraints. If one or more of the pressure constraints is not met while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit, the program will iteratively assign lesser demands until it finds the maximum flow that can be provided while maintaining the pressure constraints. If a node is not providing the Fire Flow Upper Limit, it is because the Residual Pressure at that node, the Minimum Zone Pressure, or the Minimum System Pressure constraints are not met


9-385

Fire Flow Analysis while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit (or the maximum number of iterations has been reached). If a node completely fails to meet the Fire Flow constraints, it is because the network is unable to deliver the Needed Fire Flow while still meeting the pressure constraints. After the program has gone through the above process for each node in the Fire Flow Analysis, it runs a final Steady-State calculation that does not apply Fire Flow demands to any of the junctions. This provides a baseline of calculated results that can then be compared to the Fire Flow conditions, which can be determined by viewing the results presented on the Fire Flow tab (see “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311) of the individual junction editors, or in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (for more information, see “Tabular Reports” on page 13-517). The baseline pressures are the pressures that are modeled under the standard steady-state demand conditions in which fire flows are not exerted. Tip:

All parameters defining a fire flow analysis, such as the residual pressure or the minimum zone pressure, are explained in detail in the Fire Flow Alternative (see “Fire Flow Alternative” on page 8360)and in the Fire Flow tab (see “Fire Flow Tab” on page 6-311) topics. An online Tutorial on Fire Flow can be found by selecting the Help > Tutorials menu.

To perform a Fire Flow analysis:

9.8.1

•

Open the Scenario dialog box. For more information, see “Scenario Editor” on page 8-371.

•

Select the Calculation tab.

•

Select Steady-State calculation and turn on the Fire Flow check box.

Fire Flow Results After performing a fire flow analysis, calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set. These results can be viewed in the predefined Fire Flow Report (in tabular format), accessed by clicking the Tabular Reports button, highlighting Fire Flow Report, and clicking OK. Note that results for the nodes that were not included in the fire flow selection set are reported as N/A.

9-386



9.8.2

Not Getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node Perform the following checks if you are not getting expected fire flow results: •

Check the Available Fire Flow. If it is lower than the Needed Fire Flow, the fire flow conditions for that node are not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

•

Check the Calculated Residual Pressure. If it is lower than the Residual Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

•

Check the Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure. If it is lower than the Minimum Zone Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false. Note:

•

If you are not concerned about the pressure of a node that is NOT meeting the Minimum Zone Pressure constraint, move this node to another zone. Now, the node will not be analyzed as part of the same zone.

If you checked the box for Minimum System Pressure Constraint in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog box, check to see if the Calculated Minimum System Pressure is lower than the set constraint. If it is, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

Manual Fire Flow Scenarios The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios feature will quickly and easily create scenarios in which user-specified Fire Flow Demands are applied to specified junctions. By entering a small amount of input data, you can have the program automatically create a scenario for each individual node. You can then perform a batch run on these scenarios for further comparison or computational analysis. To set up a Manual Fire Flow Scenario: 1. Click the Analysis menu, select Scenarios. 2.

Highlight the Scenario (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364) from which you want the new scenarios to inherit their data. Click the Scenario Management button, select Add…Manual Fire Flow Scenarios. This opens the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box.

3. In the Apply Fire Flows By section of the dialog box, choose whether the fire flow demands will replace or be added to the existing demands by clicking the corresponding button. 4. Click the Select button to choose the junctions for which you want the Fire Flow scenarios to be created. When you are finished, click OK.


9-387

Fire Flow Analysis 5. Enter the fire flow demand for each junction in the Needed Fire Flow column. If all of the junctions require the same fire flow demand, you can perform a Global Edit (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 7-337) to change them all at once. 6. Once the above steps have been completed, click OK in the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box. The program will automatically create a scenario for each junction that was selected in Step 4.

Manual Fire Flow Scenarios Dialog Box The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box is separated into three areas: •

•

•

9-388

Apply Fire Flows By—This area provides you with the following two buttons: –

Adding To Baseline Demand—Choosing this option will cause the Manual Fire Flow Demands to be added to the normal demands at the Manual Fire Flow Nodes.

–

Replacing Baseline Demand—Choosing this option will cause the Manual Fire Flow Demands to replace the normal demands at the Manual Fire Flow Nodes.

Manual Fire Flow Nodes—This section of the dialog box comprised of a two column table and a Select button. –

Label Column—This column displays the nodes for which a Manual Fire Flow Scenario will be created.

–

Needed Fire Flow Column—This column displays the Needed Fire Flow for the corresponding nodes.

–

Select Button—Opens the Selection Set dialog box (see “Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 5-264), allowing you to add or remove nodes from the table.

Button Section—The four buttons in this section are: –

OK—Closes the dialog box and creates a new scenario for each node that was selected in the Manual Fire Flow Nodes section.

–

Cancel—Closes the dialog box without saving changes.

–

Initialize—After at least one normal Fire Flow Analysis has been calculated, this button will open the Fire Flow dialog box (for more information, see “Fire Flow Dialog Box” on page 9-389). This dialog box contains a menu which displays a list of the Scenarios that have been calculated using a Fire Flow Analysis. The junctions that were included in the initial Fire Flow Analysis will be entered in the Label column, and the calculated Available Fire Flows from the scenario chosen in the Fire Flow dialog box will be entered in the Needed Fire Flow column.

–

Help—Opens the online help.



Fire Flow Dialog Box From within the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog box, click the Initialize button to open this dialog box. This dialog box contains a menu, which displays a list of the Scenarios that have been calculated using a Fire Flow Analysis. To choose the scenario to initialize from, highlight the desired scenario in the drop-down and click the OK button.

9.9

Water Quality Analysis Water quality analysis includes:

9.9.1

•

“Age Analysis” on page 9-389

•

“Constituent Analysis” on page 9-390

•

“Trace Analysis” on page 9-391

Age Analysis An age analysis determines how long the water has been in the system and is more of a general water quality indicator than a measurement of any specific constituent. To configure for an age analysis: Note:

Water quality analysis can only be performed for extended period simulations.

1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button. 2. Activate the Extended Period button. For more information, see “Steady-State/ Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378. 3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis. 4. Select the Age button. 5. Assuming you have not already set up an Age alternative for this scenario (including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the Ellipsis (...) or New button next to the Age choice list, and add or edit an Age alternative. To edit an existing alternative (see “Age Alternative” on page 8-358), click the Edit button. Enter the appropriate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to give it a descriptive name. To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a descriptive name into the New Alternative dialog box, and click OK. Enter the appropriate data into the Age Alternative Editor, and click Close. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Age Alternative choice list. 6. Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.


9-389

Water Quality Analysis

9.9.2

Constituent Analysis A constituent is any substance, such as chlorine and fluoride, for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient. A constituent analysis determines the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system. Constituent analyses can be used to determine chlorine residuals throughout the system under present chlorination schedules, or can be used to determine probable behavior of the system under proposed chlorination schedules. To configure for a constituent analysis: Note:


1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button. 2. Activate the Extended Period button. For more information, see “Steady-State/ Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378. 3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis. 4. Select the Constituent button. 5. Assuming you have not already set up a Constituent alternative for this scenario (including the selection of the constituent), go to the Alternatives tab, click the Ellipsis (...) or New button next to the Constituent scroll-down list, and add or edit a Constituent alternative (for more information, see “Constituent Alternative” on page 8-358). To edit an existing alternative, click the Edit button. Enter the appropriate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to give it a descriptive name. To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a descriptive name into the New Alternative dialog box, and click OK. Enter the appropriate data into the Constituent Alternative Editor, and click Close. Specify the Constituent, which is defined in the Constituent Library and accessed by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Constituent Alternative choice list. 6. Return to the Calculation tab, and click the GO button.

9-390



9.9.3

Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system. The source is designated as a specific node in the system and is called the trace node. In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various trace nodes in successive analyses. The source node and initial traces are specified in the Trace Alternative dialog box (for more information, see “Trace Alternative” on page 8-360). To configure for a trace analysis: Note:


1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu, or click the GO button. 2. Activate the Extended Period button. For more information, see “Steady-State/ Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378. 3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis. 4. Select the Trace button. 5. Assuming you have not already set up a Trace alternative for this scenario (including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the Ellipsis (...) or New button next to the Trace choice list, and add or edit a trace alternative. Specify the trace node to be used for this analysis and provide the appropriate data. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Trace Alternative choice list. 6. Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.

9.10

Calculation Options Calculations depend on a variety of parameters that may be configured by you. This program provides defaults for each of the calculation options. If you make changes to the calculation options and decide that you would like to return to the default settings, use the Reset button on the Calculation Options dialog box. The dialog box is divided into two groups: •

“Hydraulic Analysis Options” on page 9-392

•

“Water Quality Analysis Options” on page 9-392


9-391

Calculation Options

9.10.1

Hydraulic Analysis Options The following hydraulic analysis parameters are available for user configuration: Note:

Logical Controls are not executed during Steady-State Analyses. The number of trials specifies the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each time step in an extended period simulation, not the total number of iterations for the entire analysis. In most cases, the default values are adequate for the hydraulic analysis. Under special circumstances, the accuracy may need to be adjusted downward. This is necessary when the model converges, yet there are larger than acceptable discrepancies between the total inflow and outflow at individual nodes.

9.10.2

•

Use Controls In Steady State Analysis—When the box is checked, Simple Controls will be active during Steady State Analyses.

•

Use Linear Interpolation for Multipoint Pumps

•

Trials—Unitless number that defines the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution. The default value is 40.

•

Accuracy—Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations. When the sum of the absolute flow changes between successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy, the solution is said to have converged. The default value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value for Accuracy is 1.0e-5.

•

Emitter Exponent—Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e., the flow rate through the emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The constant of proportionality is termed the discharge coefficient. For nozzles and sprinkler heads the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi pressure drop.

Water Quality Analysis Options The following water quality analysis parameters are available for user configuration: •

9-392

Age Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be of equal age.



9.11

•

Constituent Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to possess an equal concentration of the associated constituent.

•

Trace Tolerance—If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be within the same percentile.

•

Set Quality Time Step—Check this box if you want to manually set the water quality time step. By default, this box is not checked and the water quality time step is computed internally by the numerical engine.

•

Quality Time Step—Time interval used to track water quality changes throughout the network. By default, this value is computed by the numerical engine and is equivalent to the smallest travel time through any pipe in the system.

Patterns The extended period analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents. Patterns allow you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The most common application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal curves are patterns that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day, reflecting times when people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value). Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average. Figure 9-1: Typical Diurnal Curve


9-393

Patterns Note:

This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as representative of any particular network.

There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns that repeat. Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next time step. Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads. Patterns include:

9.11.1

•

“Pattern Manager” on page 9-394

•

“Pattern Editor” on page 9-395

•

“Importing Patterns” on page 9-396

Pattern Manager Patterns provide an effective means of applying time-variable system demands to the distribution model. The Pattern Manager is split into two windows: The left window displays the 4 types of patterns:

9-394

•

Hydraulic—This type of pattern can be applied to Junctions or Tanks. Use this pattern type to describe demand or inflow patterns over time.

•

Constituent—This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs, Tanks, or Junctions. Use this pattern type to describe changes in Constituent Baseline Loads over time.

•

Reservoir—This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs. Use this pattern type to describe changes in HGL over time, such as that caused by tidal activity or when the reservoir represents a connection to another system where the pressure changes over time.

•

Pump—This type of pattern can be applied to Pumps. Use this pattern type to describe changes in the pump’s Relative Speed Factor.


Modeling Capabilities The right window displays all of the patterns for the selected (highlighted) type. The Pattern Manager allows you to do the following: Note:

9.11.2

In this program, an individual demand node can support multiple demands. Furthermore, each demand can be assigned any hydraulic pattern. This powerful functionality makes it possible to model any type of extended period simulation.

•

Add—Click the Add button. This action opens the Pattern Editor (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395) where the specifics of the pattern can be entered.

•

Edit—Select the label of the pattern you wish to edit, and click the Edit button. The Fixed pattern cannot be edited.

•

Duplicate—Select the label of the pattern you wish to duplicate, and press the Duplicate button. The Fixed pattern cannot be duplicated.

•

Delete—Select the label of the pattern you wish to delete, and click the Delete button. The Fixed pattern cannot be deleted.

•

Import—Allows you to import a pattern from a text file. For more information, see “Importing Patterns” on page 9-396.

Pattern Editor A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value. During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to any baseline load that is associated with the pattern.

Defining Patterns •

Label—A required name to uniquely identify the pattern. This name appears in the choice list when applying patterns to hydraulic demands or constituent source loads.

•

Start Time—The first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard 24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM (e.g., 12:45:30 PM).

•

Starting Multiplier—The multiplier value of the first time step point in your pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be 1.0).


9-395

Patterns

Time Step Points •

Time From Start—The amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the time step point being defined.

•

Multiplier—The multiplier value associated with the time step point.

Format Note:

Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point of the pattern’s next cycle. An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time step. This software will automatically convert a continuous pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and source concentrations remain constant during a time step. An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands. Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic demand pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine two or more types of demand patterns (such as residential and institutional) at a single loading node.

•

Stepwise—The multiplier values are considered to be the average value for the interval between the specified time and the next time. Patterns using this format will have a staircase appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time and held constant until the next point in the pattern. Tip:

•

9.11.3

Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report of your pattern.

Continuous—The multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at a particular time. Patterns using this format will have a curvilinear appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time, and are linearly increased or decreased to the next point in the pattern.

Importing Patterns New in WaterCAD is the ability to import Hydraulic, Constituent, Reservoir, and Pump pattern information from an ASCII tab delimited text file. The file to be imported must be in the following format:

9-396


Modeling Capabilities Hour, , Multiplier (Pattern 1), , Multiplier (Pattern 2), , Multiplier (Pattern 3), etc. Note:

The time steps do not need to be in chronological order in the text file to be imported. WaterCAD will organize the time steps properly during the import process. The lowest numbered (earliest) time step will be inserted at hour zero in the newly created pattern. The other time steps will be inserted at the appropriate increment starting from the zero based start time. The pattern’s starting multiplier and ending multiplier must be identical.

Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of patterns (of a single type) can be imported from a single text file by adding additional columns, following the same format. The first row of the text file is used exclusively for labeling purposes. The first column of the first row is ignored. The value contained in the second column of the first row will be used as the pattern label for the first pattern, the value contained in the third column of the first row will be used as the pattern label for the second pattern, and so on.

-

9.12

Pat1

Pat2

0

1.1

1.2

4

1.2

1.3

8

1.3

1.4

12

1.4

1.5

16

1.3

1.4

20

1.2

1.3

24

1.1

1.2

Logical Controls Logical controls give you a way to specify controls for virtually any element based on almost any property of the system. Logical controls are included in a scenario when they are specified in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alternative when you specify the name of a Logical Control Set to use in a given Operational Alternative.


9-397

Logical Controls Logical Control sets are created in the Operation Alternative Editor by clicking the ellipsis (...) next to Logical Control Sets or in the Logical Controls under the Analysis menu. A Logical Control Set is made up of one or more logical control statements (called Controls) of the form: If (condition) then (action) else (action). The actions and conditions are defined under the Conditions or Actions tab under logical control. Therefore in order to use a logical control, the steps are: 1. Define the conditions and actions (e.g. HGL>120 ft is a condition; Pump-7=On is an action), 2. Combine conditions and actions to create control (statements) (e.g. If HGL>120 then Pump-7 = off, else Pump-7 =on is a control), 3. Assign Controls to a Control Set (one of more controls makes up a Control set), 4. Specify that a Control Set is to be used in an Operational Alternative (One control set per operational alternative), 5. Include that Operational Alternative that contains the controls in a Scenario. Logical, or rule-based controls allow far more flexibility and control over the behavior of your network elements than is possible with simple controls. This is accomplished by allowing you to specify one or more conditions and then link these to one or more Actions by using logical IF, AND, THEN, OR, and ELSE statements. Note:

Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.

Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions. Controls are defined as: IF:

Condition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition clause

THEN:

Action 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an action clause

ELSE (Optional):

Action 3 AND action 4, etc. where action X is an action clause

Priority (Optional):

Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5 being the highest priority)

In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions and actions, the functionality of Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions based on element demands, element hydraulic grade or pressure, system demand, clock time, time from start, tank level, or time to fill or drain a tank.

9-398


Modeling Capabilities You can also create composite conditions and actions. You can cause actions to be performed when multiple conditions are met simultaneously, or when one or the other conditions are met. You can also activate multiple actions when a single condition is met. For more information, see “Creating a New Logical Control” on page 9-399.

9.12.1

Creating a New Logical Control Note:

Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses. When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.

Logical controls greatly increase the amount of control you have over the behavior of the elements in the model. Tip:

Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed when the conditions in the control are not being met. For example, if you are creating a control that states, “If the level in Tank 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On,” use an ELSE action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.

To create a new Logical Control: 1. Open the Logical Controls Manager window. For more information, see “Logical Control Manager” on page 9-401 This manager is accessed by clicking the Analysis drop-down list and selecting Logical Controls. 2. In the Logical Controls Manager window, click the Control Management button, and select New. This will open the Logical Controls editor window. For more information, see “Logical Control Dialog Boxes” on page 9-405. 3. Now we must define the conditions that will trigger the control, and the actions that will be performed when the control is triggered. To add a condition to the control, click the New button. This opens the New Logical Condition dialog box. For more information, see “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406. 4. In the New Logical Condition window, you can specify whether the condition will be Simple (single condition) or Composite (multiple conditions). Then, define the condition type: element demand, element hydraulic grade, element pressure, system demand, clock time, or time from start. The input data requirements change depending on the condition type that is chosen. Click OK when you are finished. This will return you to the Logical Controls editor. For more information, see “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406.


9-399

Logical Controls 5. Now that the condition has been set, it needs to be linked to an action. To add an action, click the New button to open the New Logical Action dialog box. For more information, see “New Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413. 6. In the New Logical Action dialog box, you can specify whether the action will be Simple (single action) or Composite (multiple actions). Then, define the element you want the action to apply to. The input data requirements change depending on the action type that is chosen. Click OK when you are finished. This will return you to the Logical Controls editor. EXAMPLE: To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level in a tank (T-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system demands exceed a certain level (5000 gpm): •

Conditions—Because this control needs to be triggered by multiple conditions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either condition is true. IF condition—{T-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR condition—{System Demand > 5000 gpm}

•

Actions—Because this control has a single desired outcome if one of the conditions is met, a simple action is chosen. The first action in a logical control is always linked to the conditions by a logical THEN statement. In this instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of the conditions is true. THEN action—{PMP-1 Status = On} ELSE action—{PMP-1 Status = Off}

The finished logical control looks like this: IF {T-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR {System Demand > 5000 gpm} THEN {PMP-1 Status = On} ELSE {PMP-1 Status = Off} This example illustrates the power of using logical controls. To achieve the same functionality using simple controls, you would need to create four separate controls—one to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value, one to turn the pump off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the pump on if the system demand is greater than the specified value, and one to turn the pump off if the system demand is less than the specified value.

9-400



9.12.2

Logical Controls Operation Logical controls are applied after the initial hydraulic state of the network has been computed (i.e., after time zero). The controls are evaluated over the course of a hydraulic simulation as follows: Note:

Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses. Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.

1. The rules are evaluated at a sub-hydraulic time step equal to 1/10 of the normal hydraulic time step (e.g., if hydraulics are updated every hour, then rules are evaluated every 6 minutes). 2. Over this sub-hydraulic time step, clock time and water levels in storage tanks are updated, based on the last set of pipe flows computed. 3. If a rule’s conditions are satisfied, then its actions are added to a list. If an action conflicts with one for the same element already on the list, then the action from the rule with the higher priority stays on the list and the other is removed. If the priorities are the same then the original action stays on the list. 4. If the action list is not empty, then those actions are taken. If this causes the status or settings of one or more elements to change, then a new hydraulic solution is computed. 5. The action list is cleared and the next sub-hydraulic time step is checked.

9.12.3

Logical Control Manager The Logical Control Manager is the main work center for logical controls. The Logical Control Manager manages all logical controls, logical conditions, and logical actions in the system. The Logical Control Manager allows you to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions. Note:

Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up that control.

The Logical Control Manager dialog box consists of the following three tabs: •

Controls Tab—Lets you manage all logical controls defined in the system. For more information, see “Controls Tab” on page 9-402.


9-401

Logical Controls •

Conditions Tab—Lets you define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. For more information, see “Conditions Tab” on page 9-403.

•

Actions Tab—Lets you define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control condition. For more information, see “Actions Tab” on page 9-404.

Controls Tab The Controls tab allows you to manage all logical controls defined in the system. Logical controls are made up of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action. Controls have a non-editable application-provided ID (e.g., LC01) and an optional priority for resolving potential conflicts between logical controls. The Controls tab is divided into sections: Note:

•

The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of all Logical Controls defined in the system.

•

Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:

•

9-402


–

New—Opens the Logical Control dialog box, which allows you to create a new logical control. For more information, see “Logical Control Dialog Boxes” on page 9-405.

–

Edit—Opens the Logical Control dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted control. For more information, see “Logical Control Dialog Boxes” on page 9-405.

–

Delete—Deletes the highlighted control. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

–

Find—Opens the Find Control dialog box, which allows you to find a particular control based on a variety of criteria. For more information, see “Find Logical Control Dialog Box” on page 9-416.

–

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.

Located along the left of the Controls List are two command buttons: –

Control Management—Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and managing Logical Controls. Provides the same functionality as the toolbar, as described above.

–

Control Sets—Opens the Logical Control Sets Alternative dialog box, which lists the various control sets you have created. In addition to listing the control sets by name, the number of controls in each set is also displayed. The following options are available in this dialog box:



–

-

Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set Editor dialog box. From this window, you can add previously created logical controls to the new control set. For more information, see “Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.

-

Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set Editor dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted control set. For more information, see “Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.

-

Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set Editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set. For more information, see “Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419.

-


-


-

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within the control set.

Located below the Controls List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted control.

Conditions Tab Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system. There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions. The Conditions tab is divided into sections: Note:


•

The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical control references).

•

Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons: –

New—Opens the New Logical Condition dialog box, which allows you to create a new logical condition. For more information, see “New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406.


9-403

Logical Controls

•

–

Edit—Depending on whether a simple or composite condition is highlighted, this button opens the Simple Logical Condition or Composite Logical Condition dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted condition. For more information, see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407 and “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411.

–

Delete—Deletes the highlighted condition. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

–

Find—Opens the Find Logical Condition dialog box, which allows you to find a particular action based on a variety of criteria. For more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417.

–

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted condition.

Located below the Conditions List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted condition.

Actions Tab Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01 for simple, AA01 for composite). The Actions tab is divided into sections:

9-404

•

The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01 for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical control references).

•

Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons: -

New—Opens the New Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to create a new logical action. For more information, see “New Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413.

-

Edit—Depending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted, this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action. For more information, see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407 and “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411.

-

Delete—Deletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

-

Find—Opens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to find a particular action based on a variety of criteria. For more information, see “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.

-

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted action.


Modeling Capabilities •

9.12.4

Located below the Actions List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted action.

Logical Control Dialog Boxes This dialog box allows you to edit or create a logical control consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action. The Logical Control dialog box is split into sections: •

Control Logic—This area of the dialog box is where you specify the conditions and actions to create a logical control. It consists of a drop-down list and three buttons for each of the three components of a logical control: –

IF Condition—The drop-down list allows you to create a new condition (), find an existing condition (), or choose from a list of conditions that have already been created.

–

THEN Action—The drop-down list allows you to create a new action (), find an existing action (), or choose from a list of actions that have already been created.

–

ELSE Action (optional)—The ELSE action is used when the conditions for the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to activate the drop-down list. The menu allows you to create a new action (), find an existing action (), or choose from a list of actions that have already been created.

In addition, there are three buttons next to each menu:

•

–

New—Opens the New Logical Condition dialog box or the New Logical Action dialog box.

–

Properties—Opens the corresponding editor for the control component that is selected in the drop-down list. Depending on the highlighted control, this button will open the Simple Logical Condition editor (see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407), Composite Logical Condition editor (see “Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411), Simple Logical Action editor (see “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9413), or the Composite Logical Action editor (see “Composite Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-415).

–

Find—Opens the Find Condition or Find Action dialog box. For more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417 and “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.

Priority—This area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control being created, click the check box to activate the priority drop-down list. You can set a priority of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be used.


9-405

Logical Controls Note:

At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority. Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the pump. Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up that control. When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data used in the last condition or action that was created. Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an application generated ID (e.g., LC04).

9.12.5

•

Description—This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.

•

Summary—This area of the dialog box displays a verbose description of the control.

Condition Dialog Boxes Condition dialog boxes include: •

“New Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-406

•

“Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407

•

“Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411

New Logical Condition Dialog Box The New Logical Condition dialog box allows you to define the type of condition to be created. The two buttons at the top of the dialog box are used to specify whether the condition to be created is a simple condition or a composite condition.

9-406


Modeling Capabilities Note:

When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.

The appearance of this dialog box will change depending on which condition type is selected. •

“Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-407

•

“Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-411

Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box The Simple Logical Condition dialog box is split into three areas: •

“Simple Condition” on page 9-407

•

“Description” on page 9-410

•

“Summary” on page 9-411

Simple Condition The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corresponding input data are as follows: Element—This will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows: •

Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the condition will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box (see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260), and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type currently specified in the Element field. •

Pressure Junctions—The following attributes are available for use when a Junction is chosen in the Element field: –

Demand—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a demand…).


9-407

Logical Controls

•

–

Hydraulic Grade—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a hydraulic grade of…).

–

Pressure—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a pressure of…).

Pumps—The following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in the Element field: –

Discharge—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a discharge of…).

–

Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the Relative Speed Factor of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a relative speed factor of 1.5…).

–

Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (On or Off) of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 is On…).

Note:

•

•

Tanks—The following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in the Element field: –

Demand—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding tank. For tanks, this demand can represent an inflow or outflow (e.g., If T-1 has a demand…).

–

Hydraulic Grade—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a hydraulic grade of…).

–

Pressure—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a pressure of…).

–

Level—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified water level at the corresponding tank (e.g., If the water in T-1 is at a level of…).

–

Time to Drain—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of time required for the tank to drain (e.g., If T-1 drains in X hours…).

–

Time to Fill—This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of time required for the tank to fill (e.g., If T-1 fills in X hours…).

Reservoirs—The following attributes are available for use when a Reservoir is chosen in the Element field: –

9-408

Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.

Demand—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding reservoir. For reservoirs, this demand can represent an inflow or outflow (e.g., If R-1 has a demand…).



•

•

–

Hydraulic Grade—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a hydraulic grade of…).

–

Pressure—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a pressure of…).

Pipes—The following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the Element field: –

Discharge—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 has a discharge of…).

–

Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Open or Closed) of the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 is Open…).

Valves—The following attributes are available for use when a valve is chosen in the Element field: –

Discharge—This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 has a discharge of…).

Note:

•

•

The Setting attribute is not available when a GPV is selected in the Element field.

Setting—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the setting of the corresponding valve. The type of setting will change depending on the type of valve that is chosen. The valves and their associated setting types are as follows: –

PRV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PRV-1 has a pressure of…).

–

PSV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PSV-1 has a pressure of…).

–

PBV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PBV-1 has a pressure of…).

–

FCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the PRV (e.g., If FCV-1 has a discharge of…).

–

TCV—Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified headloss coefficient at the PRV (e.g., If TCV-1 has a headloss of…).

Status—This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Closed or Inactive) of the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 is Inactive…).


9-409

Logical Controls System Demand—This will create a condition based on the demands for the entire system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are: •

Operator—This field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>), Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=), Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).

•

System Demand—This field lets you set a system-wide demand.

Clock Time—This will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24 hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time. •


Time From Start—This will create a condition based on the amount of time that has passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are available when this condition type is selected: •


Target Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute that is chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen to determine if the condition has been met. Description This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the description field supports the following expandable masks:

%#

ID %e

9-410

Element



%a

Attribute

%o

Operator

%v

Value

%u

Unit

Note:

Click the description list box to select one of the predefined masks.

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various condition components. Summary This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded description.

Composite Logical Condition Dialog Box The Composite Logical Condition dialog box is divided into three areas: •

Composite Condition—The Composite Condition area of the dialog box is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows: –

Insert—Adds a new row to the Condition list

–

Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Condition list

The table contains two columns, as follows: –

Operator—This column allows you to choose the way in which the related Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.


9-411


The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and OR. Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule. When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than AND. Therefore, “IF A or B and C” is equivalent to “IF (A or B) and C”. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls: Logical Control 1: “IF A THEN...” and Logical Control 2: “IF B AND C THEN...”

–

•

Condition—The drop-down list allows you to create a new condition (), find an existing condition (), or choose a condition that was already created beforehand. Choosing New will open the Simple Logical Condition dialog box (see “Simple Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9407), and choosing Find will open the Find Logical Condition dialog box (for more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417).

Description—This area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the description field supports the following expandable masks: %#

ID

%v

Value

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various condition components. Note:

•

9.12.6


Summary—This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded description.

Action Dialog Boxes Action dialog boxes include:

9-412

•

“New Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413

•

“Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413

•

“Composite Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-415



New Logical Action Dialog Box The New Logical Action dialog box allows you to define the type of action to be created. The two buttons at the top of the dialog box are used to specify whether the action to be created is a simple action or a composite action. Note:

When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.

The appearance of this dialog box will change depending on which action type is selected. •

“Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413

•

“Composite Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-415

Simple Logical Action Dialog Box The Simple Logical Action dialog box is divided into sections: •

Simple Action—This area of the dialog box displays the following fields: –

Element—The Element field allows you to specify which element the action will be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box (see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260), and the Select From Drawing button (see “Select From Drawing Button” on page 5-261), which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

–

Attribute—This field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The available attributes include: -

Status – This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve when the related conditions are met. The available choices are dependant on the element type.

-

Setting—This attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve when the related conditions are met. The setting type varies depending on the type of element.


9-413


Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute. For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active status with which to base a control upon—the status choices are Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to Active, but must have specific input data to work with. For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always produce the headlosses associated with it through the HeadDischarge Points table.

–

Operator—The operator for logical actions is always EQUAL TO (=).

–

Attribute Value—This field’s label will change depending on the attribute that is chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was chosen, the input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains the possible settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.

Note:

•

Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off, or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed, depending on the Valve type.


ID

%e

Element

%a

Attribute

%o

Operator

%v

Value (and Unit, if applicable)

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components.

9-414


Modeling Capabilities Note:

•



Composite Logical Action Dialog Box The composite Logical Action dialog box is separated into three areas: •

•

Composite Action—The Composite Action area of the dialog box is comprised of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of the Actions to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that allows you to create a new action (), find an existing action (), or choose an action that was already created beforehand. Selecting will open the Simple Action dialog box (see “Simple Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-413), and selecting will open the Find Action dialog box (for more information, see “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417). –

Insert—Adds a new row to the Action list

–

Delete—Deletes the highlighted row from the Action list.


ID

%v

Value

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components. Note:

Click the description list box to select one of the predefined masks. Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.

•



9-415

Logical Controls

9.12.7

Finding Controls and Control Components Finding controls and control components includes: •

“Find Logical Control Dialog Box” on page 9-416

•

“Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9-417

•

“Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417

Find Logical Control Dialog Box Located throughout the Logical Controls interface are Find tools. Find tools allow you to locate a control, condition, or action. The find dialog box presents a list of all available elements and some filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in the list and click OK to make a selection. The Find Logical Control dialog box is separated into sections: •

•

9-416

Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains four combo boxes that allow you to filter the list of Logical Controls that is displayed in the Controls area of the dialog box. –

Condition—This drop-down list allows you to display only the logical controls that reference the condition that is chosen here. In addition, you have two additional choices: , which is the default setting and applies no Condition filters, and , which opens the Find Condition dialog box. For more information, see “Find Logical Condition Dialog Box” on page 9417.

–

Condition Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in all of the Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will cause only the controls that contain a condition that references the selected element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog box. Choosing , the default setting, will apply no condition element filters.

–

Action—Allows you to display only the logical controls that reference the action that is chosen here. In addition, you have two additional choices: , which is the default setting and applies no action filters, and , which opens the Find Action dialog box. For more information, see “Find Logical Action Dialog Box” on page 9-417.

–

Action Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced by Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will cause only the controls that contain an action that references the selected element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog box. Choosing , the default setting, will apply no action element filters.

Controls—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical controls that match the current filter logic in the current project.



Find Logical Condition Dialog Box Note:

•

•

Located throughout the logical controls interface are Find tools. Find tools let you locate a control, condition, or action. The find dialog box presents a list of all available elements and some filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in the list and press OK to make a selection. The Find Logical Condition dialog box is separated into two areas:

Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains two combo boxes, which allow you to filter the list of conditions that is displayed in the Conditions area of the dialog box. –

Type—This drop-down list allows you to filter by Simple Conditions, Composite Conditions, or no Type filter ().

–

Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in all of the Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will cause only the conditions that reference the selected element to appear in the Conditions area of the dialog box. Choosing , the default setting, will apply no condition element filters. Choosing will cause only the system type conditions to be displayed.

Conditions—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical conditions that match the current filter logic in the current project.

Find Logical Action Dialog Box Note:

Located throughout the logical controls interface are Find tools. Find tools let you locate a control, condition, or action. The find dialog box presents a list of all available elements and some filtering options to refine the list. Select the desired item in the list and press OK to make a selection.

The Find Logical Action dialog box is separated into sections: •

Filter Controls By—This area of the dialog box contains two drop-down lists that allow you to filter the list of actions that is displayed in the Actions area of the dialog box.


9-417

Logical Controls

•

9.12.8

–

Type—This drop-down list allows you to filter by Simple Actions, Composite Actions, or no Type filter ().

–

Element—This drop-down lists the elements that are referenced in all of the Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog box will cause only the actions that reference the selected element to appear in the Actions area of the dialog box. Choosing , the default setting, will apply no action element filters.

Actions—This area of the dialog box displays all of the logical actions that match the current filter logic in the current project.

Logical Control Sets Logical control sets include: •

“Logical Control Sets Alternative” on page 9-418

•

“Logical Controls Set Editor” on page 9-419

Logical Control Sets Alternative The Logical Control Sets dialog box allows you to create, modify and manage logical control sets. Logical control sets are a way to organize your logical controls, and also provide the means to use different logical controls in different scenarios. The following options are available in this dialog box:

9-418

•

Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you can add previously created logical controls to the new control set.

•

Edit—Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted control set.

•

Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.

•


•


•

Report—Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within the control set.



Logical Controls Set Editor Note:

Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule any control with no set priority. Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up that control.

The Logical Control Set Editor is divided into two panes. The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that have been created in the current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To remove a control from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button under Remove. To remove all controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<] button under Remove. The Find button above each pane opens the Find Logical Control dialog box.

9.13

Active Topology The WaterCAD Active Topology feature lets you create alternatives in which selected elements are removed from the drawing view. While these elements are in the inactive state, they are not evaluated in network calculations. This ability allows you to easily create before and after scenarios for proposed construction projects and test the redundancy of existing networks. While elements are inactive, they are not included in any hydraulic equations. Inactive elements are also not evaluated when generating contour plots, and are not available for inclusion while generating profiles. Inactive elements do not appear in the main drawing pane, in the Aerial View window, or in either of the plan view types. When generating project inventory reports, element details reports, or element results reports, inactive elements are not included. Inactive elements will not appear in the corresponding tabular reports, unless the Include Inactive Topology option (see “Include Inactive Topology” on page 7-340) is turned on. The default setting does not include inactive elements. Inactive elements are still available for inclusion in selection sets. Any changes made to the Active Topology are applied to the active topology alternative (see “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-353) associated with the current scenario, and an unlimited number of active topology alternatives can be created.


9-419

Active Topology

9.13.1

Active Topology Selection Dialog Box The Active Topology Selection dialog box allows you to cause specified network elements to become inactive, thereby temporarily removing the inactive elements from the drawing view and any calculations. The name of the dialog box displays the name of the scenario for which the changes will take effect, and is split into two sections: the Inactive Elements pane and the Button section. •

Inactive Elements Pane—This pane displays a list of the elements, which are inactive for the current scenario. Elements in this list are not visible in the drawing view and are not included in calculations.

•

Button Section—The button section of the dialog box consists of three buttons which allow you to choose which elements are included in the Inactive Elements pane. –

Select From Drawing—Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to deactivate. While in this mode, right-clicking opens a menu with the following options: -

Done—Select Done when you are finished selecting elements to bring you back to the Active Topology Selection dialog box.

-

Add—This option is the default mode when you click the Select From Drawing button. Clicking elements while in this mode selects (highlights) elements. Selected elements will be added to the Inactive Elements list.

-

Remove—While in this mode, clicking elements deselects them. Elements that are not selected will not be added to the Inactive Elements list.

Note:

Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes must end at a node. In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology Selection dialog box.

9-420

-

Select Custom—Clicking this button opens a Selection Set-type dialog box. Elements in the left pane are active, and elements in the right pane are inactive. All of the normal selection set functionality is available, including filtering and element-type sorting.

-

Clear Selection—Removes all elements from the inactive elements pane, thereby causing all elements to become active in the current scenario.


Chapter

GA Optimization and Calibration

10

The WaterCAD Darwin Calibrator provides a history of your calibration attempts, lets you use a manual approach to calibration, supports multiple field data sets, brings the speed and efficiency of genetic algorithms to calibrating your water system, and presents several calibration candidates for you to consider, rather than just one solution. Darwin Calibrator lets you set up a series of Base Calibrations, which can have numerous Child Calibrations that inherit settings from their parent Base Calibrations. Note:

Inheritance is not persistent. If you change the Base Calibration, the change does not ripple down to the Child Calibrations.

Use Base and Child Calibrations to establish a history of your calibration trials to help you derive a list of optimized solutions for your water system. To use calibration manager, click Analysis > Darwin Calibrator. 1. Enter field data. Click the Field Data button to view, add, edit, and delete sets of field data that you use to calibrate your water model. 2. Create groups that define what attributes of your model you want to adjust. Click Groups. 3. Choose the options that define how you are evaluating your model. Click Options. 4. Right-click in the calibrations area to add a Base Calibration, or click New Base Calibration.

10.1

Darwin Calibrator Darwin Calibrator lets you adjust your model to better match the actual behavior of your water distribution system. This feature lets you make manual adjustments on the model as well as adjustments using genetic algorithm optimization. Before you can run the Darwin Calibrator, you must set up your calibration parameters. The Darwin Calibrator dialog box has three distinct components:


10-421

Darwin Calibrator •

The Calibrations area, which contains the list of base and child calibrations you have tried.

•

The Calibration Groups area, which contains tabs containing the groups you set up, including Roughness, Demand, Status, and Field data tabs.

•

The Calibration Solutions area, which contains the solutions calculated by your Manual or Optimized calibrations.

Darwin Calibrator includes:

10.1.1

•

“New Calibration” on page 10-422

•

“Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423

•

“Manual Calibration” on page 10-425

•

“Calibrations” on page 10-426

•

“Calibration Solutions” on page 10-426

•

“Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box” on page 10-427

•

“GA-Optimized Calibration Tips” on page 10-428

•

“Calibration Results Statistics” on page 10-429

New Calibration To start a new calibration trial, click the New or New Base buttons. If a Base Calibration already exists, you can also choose to add a new Child Calibration.

10-422

Base/Child Calibration:

Base and child calibrations record a history of the calibrations you try. The base and child relationship work to help you remember the workflow or route you have used to test your calibrations.

Optimized Calibration:

Use a GA (Genetic Algorithm) optimized calibration if you want WaterCAD to efficiently process and evaluate numerous trial calibrations of your water system. You can set the optimized calibration to deliver several solutions for you to review.

Manual Calibration:

Use a Manual Calibration if you want to test fitness by adjusting roughness, demand, or status manually. If you have specific solutions in mind, Manual Calibration might let you quickly narrow-down or refine the number and measure of adjustments before you use the genetic algorithm.

Label:

Enter a label for the calibration you are setting up.


GA Optimization and Calibration OK/Cancel:

10.1.2

Click OK to add the new calibration or Cancel to exit without adding the new Calibration.

Optimized Calibration Genetic-Algorithm Optimized Calibration provides the following tabs: •

“Roughness/Demand” on page 10-423

•

“Status” on page 10-423

•

“Field Data” on page 10-423

•

“Options” on page 10-424

•

“Notes” on page 10-424

Roughness/Demand The Roughness, Demand, and Status tabs display the groups you added when setting up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (for more information, see “Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438). If a tab is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab. Group:

Displays the name of the group.

Operation:

From, the drop-down list, select the operation you want the calibration to perform.

Note:

Try to choose an increment that gives the least number of possible alternatives. You may need to decrease the range between your upper and lower limits to do this.

Min/Max/Increment:

Enter the minimum and maximum values that you want the genetic algorithm to use as boundaries when calculating fitness solutions. Set the increment as the intervals at which you want the GA to test.

Status Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are open or closed.

Field Data The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration. Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.


10-423

Darwin Calibrator

Options Use the Options tab to refine how WaterCAD applies the genetic algorithm (GA) to your optimized calibration trials. Note:

Larger values for maximum trials and non-improvement generations will make the optimization run longer. You may want to start with fairly low numbers and then gradually increase the numbers in subsequent runs as you want to ensure better solutions. If a run seems to be taking long time, you may click the Stop button to stop the optimization.

Reset:

Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Darwin Calibration Options.

Advanced:

Click Advanced to access more Optimized Calibration options (see “GA Parameters Advanced Options” on page 10-442).

Fitness Tolerance:

Set the precision with which you want the optimized calibration to calculate fitness. As with many of these settings, you should determine a tolerance that balances accuracy and speed for your water models. Fitness Tolerance works in conjunction with NonImprovement Generations.

Maximum Trials:

Set the maximum number of calibration trials you want the Optimized Calibration to process before stopping.

Non-Improve Generations:

Set the number of maximum number of nonimprovement generations you want the GA to process without calculating an improved fitness. If the Optimized Calibration makes this number of calculations without finding an improvement in fitness that is better than the defined Fitness Tolerance, the calibration will stop. NonImprovement Generations works in conjunction with Fitness Tolerance.

Solutions to Keep:

Set the number of fitness solutions that you want to keep. Rather than presenting you with only one solution, WaterCAD presents you with a customizable number of solutions, so you can review them manually.

Notes Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.

10-424



10.1.3

Manual Calibration Manual Calibration provides the following tabs: •

“Roughness/Demand” on page 10-425

•

“Field Data” on page 10-425

•


Roughness/Demand The Roughness and Demand tabs display the groups you added when setting up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups dialog box). If a tab is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab. Group:

Displays the name of the group.

Operation:

From, the drop-down list, select the operation you want the calibration to perform.

Value:

Enter the value you want to use with the operation you select for the Group.

Status Use the Status tab to see the initial status of the elements listed, whether pipes are open or closed, and whether the pipe’s status has been changed during the manual calibration.

Field Data The Field Data tab displays all the field data sets you have entered for the calibration. Select the check box next to the name of the field data sets you want to use for the calibration trial. Field data sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.

Notes Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.


10-425

Darwin Calibrator

10.1.4

Calibrations Note:

After you make changes to a calibration, you need to click Go or right-click and select Compute to recalculate the fitness. If you change any calibration options, the fitness values will be different and should not be directly compared to calibration runs that used different options.

The calibrations data window shows all the base and child calibrations you have tried. The Name of the calibration displays along with the fitness calculated for that calibration. 0 is an ideal, perfect fitness and lower numbers indicate fitnesses that rank better than higher numbers.

10.1.5

Calibration Solutions Note:

A green square displays next to solutions created with the current Calibration Options. You can compare the results for solutions marked with green squares. If you change the Calibration Options, previously calculated solutions display with a gray square. Solutions with a gray square cannot be directly compared to solutions with a green square.

The solutions data window shows solutions for the optimized or manual calibration you select in the Calibrations data window. •

Solution Drop-down List—For manual optimizations, this drop-down list contains one solution based on your Calibration. For Darwin Calibrations, the solution drop-down list displays the most favorable number of solutions, based on fitness, for the selected calibration. The number of solutions that display here depends on what you set in the Solutions to Keep field of the Options tab (for more information, see “Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423). Select the solution you want to see from the drop-down list and it displays in the data window. Note:

Any settings you made in the solution tree-view remain when you switch solutions, which better enables you to compare solutions.

Roughness/Demand/Status:

10-426

Expand the tree-view to display the adjustments for any roughness or demand groups, or the status of any pipes you set up in your Adjustment Groups (for more information, see “Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438). Original values and values adjusted by the manual or optimized calibration are displayed.



10.1.6

HGL/Flow Observations:

Expand the tree-view to display the simulated HGL/ flow against the observations you recorded in your field data, and the difference between the observed and simulated values.

Export to Scenario:

Click the Export to Scenario button to export the currently selected Calibration to the water flow model. This opens the Export Calibration to Scenario dialog box (for more information, see “Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box” on page 10-427).

Copy to Clipboard:

Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the Solutions data window to the clipboard. From the Windows Clipboard, you can paste the solution data into other Windows programs, like a word processor or text editor.

Report:

Click the Report button to display a print preview of the solutions data window.

Plot:

Click Plot button to see a graph of your observed data sets versus the HGL correlation between the Simulated and Observed HGL.

Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Box Use the Calibration Export to Scenario dialog box to apply the results of your Optimized Calibration or Manual Calibration to your water model. OK/Cancel:

Click OK to export your calibration or Cancel to close the dialog box without exporting your calibration.

Export Check Boxes:

Select those check boxes next to those items you want to export. Clear any check boxes you do not want to export.

Export Scenario:

When you Export to Scenario, the calibration can be applied to your model by selecting it from the Scenario drop-down list. You can rename the scenario by typing over the default name.

Export Alternatives:

Choose which items to export to your Alternatives. You can rename Alternatives by typing over the default name.


10-427

Darwin Calibrator

10.1.7

GA-Optimized Calibration Tips Darwin Calibrator employs a powerful competent genetic algorithm search method based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction. This kind of search algorithm is well suited to optimization of problems of a non-convex and multiple local-optimal solution nature. Calibration of a hydraulic model falls into this problem category and, as a result, a GA-optimization based search tool, such as Darwin Calibrator, is a sound choice for hydraulic model calibration. Despite all the good features of GA there are, however, some issues to consider: •

10-428

A solution is fitter only in relation to other known solutions and, consequently, a GA has no test for true optimality. As a GA only knows the best solution relative to others, a GA has no precise rule for when to stop. This means that heuristic methods must be used to determine whether to stop a GA run. In Darwin Calibrator you can set a GA run to stop either by: –

Clicking Stop

–

Setting a maximum number of trial solutions

–

Setting a maximum number of non-improvement generations, whereby if the fitness of the best solution does not improve by more than a specified tolerance in a set number of generations, then the GA stops

•

A GA is a non-deterministic method that relies to a certain extent on its initial random population (starting locations in the solution space). Thus, each GA run performed may produce different solutions. (If you keep all GA parameters and fitness settings the same, the method is deterministic and will produce identical solutions every time.) Given the fact that a GA has no true test for optimality, after stopping a GA and producing a particular result, there is always the possibility that if you run the GA again you may find a better solution. In fact, it is good practice to run a GA a number of times, each time modifying something about the GA run (e.g., GA parameters, fitness weightings, or adjustment group settings), in order to produce another set of potentially better results. At a minimum, the random number seed should be changed for each individual run so that the GA search initiates differently and therefore concludes differently.

•

The GA calculates fitness of each trial solution according to the defined objectives for the optimization problem. GA only uses objective means to decide what constitutes a fit solution, and what constitutes a less fit solution. The GA has no way of subjectively assessing a solution other than the methods (weightings) built into the definition of the fitness calculation. The best solution found by a GA shouldn’t be blindly accepted as being correct. To any single optimization problem there are likely to be many solutions that closely match the required objectives. Due to the fact that the GA has no concept of what constitutes a fit solution, other than its performance against the defined objectives, the GA may produce solutions that are impractical. That is, the GA cannot think for the engineer, it can only search the combination of choices that are presented to it. If the


GA Optimization and Calibration engineer doesn’t provide the GA with high quality data and enough or sufficiently flexible options to consider, then the GA may not be able to find a satisfactory solution. Conversely if the GA is presented with too many possibilities to try (e.g., in Darwin Calibrator, if you define an excessively large adjustment group ranges combined with a small adjustment increments and a large number of adjustment groups), then the efficiency of the GA search is reduced, and the likelihood that the GA will find the correct answer is also greatly reduced. GA is a highly sophisticated search technique, but despite all of its great features, GA still must be used with a degree of engineering judgment and skill. Only then can the engineer expect the GA to find solutions that are not only fit, but are practical and likely to represent the real life situation as accurately as possible. •

10.1.8

Uncertainty in field observations should be assessed before these observations are used in an optimization. It is not uncommon for errors in measurement of head loss to be on the same order of magnitude or larger that the actual head loss (Walski, 2000). Such values should not be used in calibration because the calibration algorithm will dutifully try to match the field observations even if they are erroneous. To ensure that head loss is adequate to exceed measurement error, it is helpful to collect data when velocities in pipes are appreciable. In some systems sized for fire protection, demands (and velocities and head losses) are so low most of the time that head loss measurements are meaningless other that to check pressure gage elevations. Another problem that occurs when calibrating a model is that some of the parameters determined are fixed and knowable at the time the data were taken (roughness, valve status), while others are merely a random observation from a stochastic process (water use). If a C-factor is determined as 90, then that value will be true in the not to distant future. If water use during a pressure observation is determined to be 100 gpm (6.3 l/s), is that value the demand that should be used in modeling, given that it is only one observation from a distribution? The actual water determined from calibration may not be the best value to use for representing the current year status of the system. You need to decide if the water use observed during calibration is the water use that should be used as a basis for future modeling.

Calibration Results Statistics After a Calibration has been calculated, a dialog box displays a summary of the Calibration Statistics. The information displayed includes the Fitness Rating, the number of Generations, and number of trials. It also reports the status of the calibration calculations.

10.2

Field Data Sets Field data sets includes: •

“Field Data Set Dialog Box” on page 10-430


10-429

Field Data Sets

10.2.1

•

“Field Data Sets Dialog Box” on page 10-432

•

“New Field Data Set” on page 10-433

•

“Field Data Observation Dialog Box” on page 10-433

•

“Entering Fire Flow Test Results” on page 10-434

•

“Select Element” on page 10-435

•

“Field Data Import” on page 10-435

Field Data Set Dialog Box Use the Field Data Set dialog box to define the field data you have collected. This dialog box comprises three tabs: •

“Observations” on page 10-430

•

“Demand Adjustments” on page 10-431

•


Observations Date: Note:

Set the date of the observations and field tests. The time is important because it is used within any patterns or diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand. The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration.

Time: Note:

10-430

Set the time of the observations and field tests. You must enter a time. You cannot leave the Observations tab or click OK until you set a time.

Time from Start:

Displays the time difference from the time you set for the field data set to the time defined as the start of the scenario.

Observations:

Click Insert to add observed data. Click Delete to remove the selected row of observed data.


GA Optimization and Calibration Note:

Valve and pump flows are used as calibration targets, not boundary conditions. Valve and pump flows are calculated by using the valve setting and pump speed, which are used as boundary conditions if observed. Tanks levels are also used as boundary conditions.

Element Type:

From the drop-down list, select the type of element for which you want to enter data.

Note:

Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element directly from your drawing.

Element:

Select the element for which you want to enter observed data.

Attribute:

Select the attribute for which you have observed data. Different attributes are available for each element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure, Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for the attribute.

Value:

Select a value from the drop-down list or type in a value.

Import:

This allows you to Import field data from a tabdelimited ASCII text file. For more information, see “Field Data Import” on page 10-435.

Demand Adjustments Note:

The Demand Adjustments all relate to the particular field data set you are editing. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers.

Use the Demand Adjustments tab to adjust demand for the element. Select the element for which you want to add an additional demand, such as flow from a hydrant, and enter the value of that demand. •

Override Scenario Demand Alternative—Check this box to override the displayed Demand Alternative and to use the Demand Multiplier. Clear this check box if you do not want to use the Demand Multiplier.

•

Demand Alternative—Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the selected set of observations.

•

Demand Multiplier—Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water model. For example, if you have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.


10-431

Field Data Sets •

Junction—Select the Junction to which you want to apply Demand Adjustments. You can select a junction from a drop-down list, Select Element dialog box, or by clicking the junction to select it from the drawing.

•

Additional Demand—Set the additional demand at the selected junction.

Notes Use the Notes tab to enter any comments you want saved with the adjustments.

10.2.2

Field Data Sets Dialog Box Note:

Field data taken at times of peak usage, in high-flow pipes, and/ or where there is significant head loss, will be more useful when calibrating your model than data taken in low-usage, low-flow areas, where there is little head loss.

The Field Data Sets dialog box lets you enter a variety of test data against which you will calibrate your water model. WaterCAD lets you use more than one field data set in your calculations. Note:

When entering fire flow test results, consider: Entering Fire Flow Test Results. For more information, see “Entering Fire Flow Test Results” on page 10-434.

Representative Scenario:

Note:

Since Field Data Sets are linked to specific scenarios, a scenario that is referenced by a field data set cannot be deleted unless all field data sets that reference it are deleted beforehand.

Field Data Set: Note:

Select the Scenario you want to use for the calibration. For more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364.

Displays the field data sets.

The time is important because it is used within any patterns or diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand.

The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration. (The demand at a junction during a GA Calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.)

10-432


GA Optimization and Calibration Pump settings and control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers. Also, a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands applied, whereas an Optimized Calibration run based on a steady state scenario that uses pattern multipliers for the specified time.

10.2.3

Date/Time:

Displays the date and time that was entered for the field data set. The date field is purely a label that can be used to record when field measurements were taken.

Add:

Click Add to add a new field data set.

Edit:

Click Edit to modify the selected field data set.

Duplicate:

Click Duplicate to copy the selected field data set. This can save you some time in entering new field data as a new set, but make sure all entered data is correct.

Delete:

Click Delete to delete the selected field data set.

Rename:

Click Rename to rename the selected field data set.

New Field Data Set Enter the name of the field data set, or use the default name, and click OK.

10.2.4

Field Data Observation Dialog Box Note:

Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element directly from your drawing.

The Observation dialog box lets you select elements in your model and enter observed data regarding those elements, such as observed pressures, discharges, statuses, or hydraulic grade. Element:


Select the element for which you want to enter observed data.

10-433

Field Data Sets Attribute:

10.2.5

Select the attribute for which you have observed data. Different attributes are available for each element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure, Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for the attribute.

Entering Fire Flow Test Results When entering fire flows, there are two issues to consider: •

How to enter the fire flows.

•

How to adjust demands at other nodes during fire flow test.

To enter a fire flow test: 1. In Darwin Calibrator, select Field Data > Add. 2. Name that Data Set (something like Fire flow at J-129). 3. Enter the observations as you would for any other condition (for more information, see “Field Data Set Dialog Box” on page 10-430). 4. To enter the fire flow, select the Demand Adjustments tab. 5. Enter the Junction label where the fire flow occurred. 6. Enter and the additional fire flow as Additional Demand. 7. The additional flow is added to the normal demand at that node. There are several ways to adjust the flows at the non-fire flow node. Only use one of them:

10-434

•

If you want to use your EPS demand patterns, specify the correct time for the fire flow test and the demand will be adjusted with the multipliers.

•

If you don’t have EPS demand patterns or don’t want to use them, set the first flow time to the some time when the demand multiplier is one (or any time, if there are no demand patterns). Then you have two ways to adjust background demands.

•

You can specify a Demand Multiplier to use.


GA Optimization and Calibration Note:

10.2.6

Do not pick a demand alternative with fire flows because the fire flows will be counted twice.

•

Or, you can specify some alternative demand other than the one corresponding to the Representative Scenario.

•

You can let the Darwin Calibrator identify the demand multiplier. To do that, use a time corresponding to a multiplier of 1, don’t override the Scenario Demand Alternative from the Representative Scenario, and let the Demand Multiplier be one. In this way, the Calibrator will pick the demand multiplier.

Select Element Use the Select Element dialog box to select an element from your model.

10.2.7

•

Elements—Use the Elements drop-down list to display all elements of one type, from which you can select the element you want. From the drop-down list, select if you want WaterCAD to display all element types.

•

Select From Drawing—Click Select From Drawing if you want to select the element by clicking on it in your model.

Field Data Import You can import Field Data from a tab-delimited ASCII text file. The text file to be imported must be in the following format: Element Type, Element Label, Attribute Value. Press the Tab key once between each column. One attribute and value can be entered per line, so to import multiple attributes and values for a single element, multiple lines must be entered. There is no limit to the number of individual Field Data input items that can be imported from a single text file, although all items contained in the text file will be imported to the same Field Data Set. Imported data is appended to any input data that has already been entered. In other words, importing field data information will not overwrite existing input data, even when data for a particular element is already present. The types of data and the corresponding values that can be imported for each element type are as follows:


10-435

Field Data Sets

* Whether this value represents Hydraulic Grade or Pressure is determined by the Global Project Option Input Mode (see “Input Modes” on page 4-245).

EXAMPLE:

10-436

Pressure Junction

J-1

Hydraulic Grade

65.3

Pressure Pipe

P-1

Status

Open

Pressure Pipe

P-1

Discharge

100



Pump

PMP-1

Hydraulic Grade Out

125

Pump

PMP-1

Hydraulic Grade In

37

Pump

PMP-1

Status

On

Tank

T-1

Level

12

To import field data from a tab-delimited text file in the format shown above, click the Analysis menu and select Darwin Calibrator. Click the Field Data button, and then click the Add button in the Field Data Sets window. Name the new field data set and then click the Import button on the Observations tab of the Field Data Set dialog box.

10.3

Adjustment Groups Adjustment groups are available from the Groups button. They include:

10.3.1

•

“New Adjustment Group Dialog Box” on page 10-437

•

“Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box” on page 10-437

•

“Calibration Groups” on page 10-438

•

“Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box” on page 10-438

•

“Selection Set Dialog Box” on page 10-439

New Adjustment Group Dialog Box Type the name of your Adjustment Group, or accept the default name, and click OK.

10.3.2

Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Box Type the name of your Adjustment Group, and click OK.


10-437

Adjustment Groups

10.3.3

Calibration Groups The calibration groups data window displays a series of tabs that let you adjust the conditions for the calibration trial. The tabs and options that are available depend on whether you selected Manual or Optimized Calibration.

10.3.4

Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog Box Note:

Generally, you should not use one element per group but to do a pipe-by-pipe calibration, or something similar, you must create a group for each pipe.

Adjustment groups are used in the calibration process. You can create Adjustment Groups for Roughness, Demand, and Status. Select the kind of group you want to create and click Add to add elements to it. Or, select an existing group and Edit, Delete, or Rename it. Note:

Adjustment Groups are a key component of the calibration. You must be careful to group similar elements and not dissimilar ones. You can adjust the properties for a group as a whole but not for individual members of the group. A good practice is to decide on your Adjustment Groups first and then collect the Field Data to support the number or groups, rather than letting available data determine how many Adjustment Groups you have.

10-438

Roughness:

Click Roughness to view any existing Roughness Adjustment Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups. Each roughness group should comprise elements that have similar attributes, such as pipes in a location of a similar material and age.

Demand:

Click Demand to view any existing Demand Adjustment Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups. Adding Demand Calibration Adjustment Groups introduces more unknowns into a calibration problem. If available, you should enter more accurate demand data into your WaterCAD model, rather than adding Demand Adjustment Groups. Consider creating Demand Groups based on usage patterns.



10.3.5

Status:

Click Status to view any existing Status Adjustment Groups and to add, edit, delete, or rename such groups. Status indicates whether a pipe is open or closed. If you set up Status groups, GA-optimized calibration will test each pipe in each group for open and closed status. We recommend that Status Groups comprise at most only a few pipes, or one pipe.

Label:

Displays the names of the adjustment groups you have created.

Elements:

Lists the number of elements in the groups you have created.

Selection Set Dialog Box The Selection Set dialog box lets you add or edit items in your Roughness, Demand, or Status group. The Selection Set dialog box comprises two data windows: Available Items and Selected Items. The items listed are those that appear in your water model. Select:

Click the Select button to select items by Filter, Element, Selection Set, or by clicking the items you want from your drawing. After selecting the items you want from the drawing, right-click and select Done.

Filter:

Filter lets you select members of your group by similar properties (for more information, see “Filtering Tables” on page 7-339).

Element:

Element lets you select members of your group that are like elements, for example, pressure pipes.

Selection Set:

Selection Set lets you choose pre-defined selection sets to include in the group (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263).

From Drawing:

From Drawing lets you select the elements you want in your group by clicking them in the drawing. Rightclick and select Done after you finish selecting elements by clicking.

Select/Invert Selection:

Use Invert Selection to de-select all highlighted items and select all items that are not currently selected.

Select/Clear Selection:

Use Clear Selection to de-select all highlighted items.


10-439

Calibration Options

10.4

Add:

To include items in your group, click, ctrl-click, or shift-click them and use the single-arrow Add button to move the selected files to the Selected Items data window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking the double-arrow Add button.

Remove:

To remove items from your group, click, Ctrl+click, or Shift+click them and use the single-arrow Remove button to move the selected files to the Available Items data window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking the double-arrow Remove button.

OK/Cancel:

Click OK to accept the items you have included in your group or click Cancel to exit the Selection Set dialog box without making any changes or additions to the group. A Selection Set must have at least one Selected Item when you click OK.

Calibration Options Note:

If you change the Calibration Options, any fitness values you get are not comparable to fitness values obtained using different Calibration Options settings.

Use the Calibration Options dialog box to set up how the calibrations are evaluated. The options you specify are applied to every calibration trial. Fitness Type:

Select the Fitness Type you want to use from the drop-down list. In general, regardless of the fitness type you select, a lower fitness indicates better calibration. Fitness Types include: Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. For more information, see “Calibration Options Formulae” on page 10-444.

Minimize Difference Squares: Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of squares of the discrepancy between the observed data and the model simulated values. (Model simulated values include hydraulic grades and pipe discharges.) This calibration favors solutions that minimize the overall sum of the squares of discrepancies between observed and simulated data.

10-440


GA Optimization and Calibration Min. Diff. Absolute Values:

Note:

The Minimize Maximum Difference Fitness Type is more sensitive to the accuracy of your data than other Fitness Types.

Minimize Max. Difference:

Note:

Uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of absolute discrepancy between the observed data and the model simulated values. This calibration favors solutions that minimize the overall sum of discrepancies between observed and simulated data.

Uses a calibration designed to minimize the maximum of all the discrepancies between the observed data and the model simulated values. This calibration favors solutions that minimize the worst single discrepancy between observed and simulated data.

You can give higher importance to Head or Flow by setting a smaller number for its Per Fitness Point Value.

Head/Flow per Fitness Point: Head and Flow per Fitness Type provide a way for you to weigh the importance of head and flow in your calibration. Set these values such that the head and flow have unit equivalence. Flow Weight Type:

Select the type of weight used: None, Linear, Square, Square Root, and Log. The weighting type you use can provide a greater or lesser fitness penalty.

In general, measurements with larger flow carry more weight in the optimization calibrations than those with less flow. You can exaggerate or reduce the effect larger measurements have on your calibration by selecting different weight types. For example, using no weighting (None) provides no penalty for measurements with lesser flow versus those with greater flow. Using log and square root reduces the fitness penalty for measurements with lesser flow, and using linear or square increases the fitness penalty for measurements with less flow. OK/Cancel:

Click OK to accept the changes you made and apply them to all future calibrations. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making or saving any changes.

Reset:

Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Calibration Options.

Calibration Options includes: •

“GA Parameters Advanced Options” on page 10-442

•

“Calibration Options Formulae” on page 10-444


10-441

Calibration Options

10.4.1

GA Parameters Advanced Options The GA Parameters Advanced Options let you customize how the genetic algorithm (GA) performs. Since genetic-algorithm optimization is a randomly guided search algorithm, different parameter values may yield a slightly different set of solutions, which can used for a sensitivity study of your model calibration. Note:

All values must be positive, not negative. Recommended values are based on maximizing speed and efficiency.

Reset:

Click Reset to restore the software default values for the options.

Maximum Era Number:

Lets you controls the number of outer loops the genetic algorithm (GA) uses. Each outer loop runs over the number of generations with the same population size. A large value for maximum era number will make the optimization run longer than a smaller number would. You might want to start with a low number and increase the number in subsequent runs. The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The GAuses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and Non-Improvement Generations (for more information, see “Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423 and “Stopping Criteria” on page 12497).

Era Generation Number:

Sets the number of generations of each inner loop the GA uses. The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. If you use 0 or less, the Optimized The GA uses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and Non-improvement Generations (for more information, see “Optimized Calibration” on page 10-423 and “Stopping Criteria” on page 12497).

Population Size:

Sets the number of GA solutions in each generation. Increasing Population Size results in a longer time for each generation and more solutions to be evaluated. The allowable range for values is from 50 to 500. We recommend you use a range of 50 to 150.

10-442


GA Optimization and Calibration Cut Probability:

Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split into two pieces. Setting this value closer to 100% increases the number of cuts made and reduces the average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut Probability causes solutions to vary more widely from one generation to the next, whereas decreasing this results in more marginal changes. The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value less than 10%.

Note:

Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the demand on system RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors when using GA Optimization, try reducing the Splice Probability closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability away from 0%.

Splice Probability:

Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be joined together. A Splice Probability set close to 100% results in long solution strings, which increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves the variety of solutions. The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a range from 50% to 90%.

Mutation Probability:

Sets the probability that a GA solution is randomly altered. A value closer to 100% causes the solutions to contain more randomization than values closer to 0%. The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value less than 10%.

Random Seed:

Lets you set the random number generator to a new point. Changing this value and leaving all other parameters as-is will yield a different solution set. The allowable range for values is from 0 to 1, inclusive.

Penalty Factor:


In Darwin Designer, use a penalty factor to help find the solution. A high penalty factor causes the GA to focus on feasible solutions, which do not violate boundaries of pressure and flow. A low penalty factor (50,000 or so) permits the GA to consider solutions that are on the boundary between feasible and infeasible solutions, possibly violating pressure

10-443

Calibration Options or flow boundaries by a small amount. Because the optimal solution often resides in the boundary between feasible and infeasible solutions, a high penalty factor causes the GA to find a feasible solution quickly but is less likely to find the optimal solution. From a practical standpoint, you might consider starting with a high penalty factor and working towards a lower penalty factor as you pursue an optimal solution. (For more information, see “Local Options Tab” on page 12-497.)

10.4.2

Calibration Options Formulae The following formulae are used for Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. 2

NF ⎛ Fsim nf − Fobs nf ⎛ Hsim nh − Hobs nh ⎞ ⎟ ⎜ + w wnf ⎜⎜ ∑ ∑ nh ⎜ ⎟ Hpnt Fpnt np =1 ⎠ nf =1 ⎝ ⎝ NH + NF NH

⎞ ⎟⎟ ⎠

2

Figure 10-1: Minimize Difference Squares:

NH

∑ wnh

np =1

NF Fsimnf − Fobs nf Hsimnh − Hobs nh + ∑ wnf Hpnt Fpnt nf =1

NH + NF Figure 10-2: Minimize Difference Absolute Values

⎧⎪ NH Fsim nf − Fobs nf ⎫⎪ Hsim nh − Hobs nh NF max ⎨max wnh , max wnf ⎬ nf =1 Hpnt Fpnt ⎪⎭ ⎪⎩ nh =1 Figure 10-3: Minimize Maximum Difference where Wnh and Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as:

10-444



Wnh =

Wnf =

Hobs nh ∑ Hobs nh Fobs nf

∑ Fobs

nf

The weighting factors may also take many other forms, such as no weight (equal to 1), linear, square, square root and log functions. Other variables include: •

Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.

•

Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade.

•

Fobsnf is the observed flow.

•

Fsimnf is the model simulated flow.

•

Hpnt notes the hydraulic head per fitness point.

•

Fpnt is the flow per fitness point.

•

NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades.

•

NF is the number of observed pipe discharges.


10-445

Calibration Options

10-446


Chapter

Cost Estimating

11

The Capital Cost Manager lets you calculate a planning level estimate of the capital costs associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with various scenarios and help ensure that the most cost-effective design is chosen. The costs associated with a particular element are broken down into two categories: construction costs (see “Construction Costs” on page 6-315) and non-construction costs (see “Non-Construction Costs” on page 6-314). The total cost for each element is the sum of the total construction and non-construction costs. The total cost for a scenario is computed by summing the total cost for every element selected to be included in the cost analysis, and then applying any global cost adjustments that you have defined. Each construction cost item is expressed as a combination of a quantity, unit, and unit cost. The total cost associated with a single construction cost item is the quantity multiplied by the unit cost. The unit cost for each construction cost item can either be entered directly by you, or if the element is a pipe or gravity structure (e.g., inlet, manhole, junction, junction chamber) it can be calculated based on a Unit Cost Function (for more information, see “Unit Cost Functions” on page 11-457). A Unit Cost Function is a way to relate a property of the element, such as the diameter of a pipe, to the unit cost. This makes it easy to assign a Unit Cost Function to an element. The cost of the element is then automatically updated when you modify the physical characteristics of the system. The other type of cost is non-construction. Non-construction cost items are specified either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. This type of cost can be useful when trying to explicitly account for items like omissions and contingencies.


11-447

Capital Cost Manager Tip:

You do not need to have a hydraulically valid network to perform a cost analysis. You can quickly calculate the cost associated with a system at any time through the Capital Cost Manager.

In addition to specifying the costs for each element in the system, you can also make adjustments on a system level to the total cost of all the elements included in the cost analysis. This makes it easy to account automatically for contingencies and adjustments on a scenario level.

11.1

Capital Cost Manager The Capital Cost Manager allows you to quickly compute and compare the costs associated with your different scenarios. (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). This dialog box provides you with a convenient place to view, edit, and calculate project level cost data. This dialog box is divided into three sections that are described below: •

Button Section—This column of buttons provides access to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager— Button Section” on page 11-449.

•

Center Pane—This pane displays an explorer view of the cost information for various scenarios. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane” on page 11-450.

•

Right Pane—This pane displays the contents of the item selected in the center pane. For more information, see “Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane” on page 11450.

Capital Cost Manager includes:

11-448

•

“Capital Cost Manager—Button Section” on page 11-449

•

“Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane” on page 11-450

•

“Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane” on page 11-450

•

“System Cost Adjustments Table” on page 11-450

•

“Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451


Cost Estimating

11.1.1

Capital Cost Manager—Button Section On the left side of the Capital Cost Manager is a column of buttons that provide access to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis. Each of these buttons is described as follows: •

Unit Cost Functions—Opens the Unit Cost Function Manager, which is the place to add new or edit existing functions describing the relationship between a model attribute and the unit price for the element. For pipes, this might be a table of data relating the pipe material to the cost per unit length. For more information, see “Unit Cost Functions” on page 11-457.

•

Cost Alternatives—Opens the Capital Cost Alternatives Manager where you can quickly create different cost alternatives. For example, you may wish to compare the cost associated with different cost functions, or to separately calculate the cost of different phases of construction. For more information, see “Capital Cost Alternatives Manager” on page 11-457.

•

Cost Adjustments—Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the selected scenario. This is the location where you enter adjustments that you wish to make on a scenario level. For more information, see “System Cost Adjustments Table” on page 11-450.

•

Active Scenarios—Opens the Active Cost Scenarios dialog box where you can select which scenarios will appear in the Capital Cost Manager. For more information, see “Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451.

•

Cost Reports—Opens a menu that provides access to one of the predefined cost reports detailing the costs associated with a particular scenario. The reports that can be opened through this button include: “Project Detailed Cost Report” on page 11-463, “Project Element Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463, “Project Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463, “Pipe Costs Report” on page 11-464, and “Cost Warnings Report” on page 11-464.


11-449

Capital Cost Manager

11.1.2

Capital Cost Manager—Center Pane When you open the Capital Cost Manager (see “Capital Cost Manager” on page 11448), this pane will contain an explorer view of all the scenarios in the file. The total cost of each scenario is displayed to the right of the scenario label. If cost data was specified for a scenario, you will see a small ‘+’ symbol to the left of the folder icon. You can click this symbol to get an expanded view of the costs associated with a scenario. In the first level of the expanded view, you will see the subtotal for each type of element included in the cost analysis, as well as the total cost adjustments made to the scenario. If you expand any of these items, you will get a view of the costs of each individual element. If you expand the view, one more level you will be able to see the construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. The contents of any component that is selected will be displayed in the table on the pane to the right of this one. Just above the right side of this pane is a row of three buttons, which access the following functionality:

11.1.3

•

Properties—Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the currently selected scenario. For more information, see “System Cost Adjustments Table” on page 11-450.

•

Graph—Opens a pie chart of the items comprising the total cost of the scenario.

•

Report—Opens a tabular report on any component selected in this pane.

Capital Cost Manager—Left Pane This pane on the right side of the Capital Cost Manager (see “Capital Cost Manager” on page 11-448) is used to display an expanded view of the contents of the item selected in the center pane.

11.1.4

System Cost Adjustments Table The System Cost Adjustments Table allows you to make adjustments to the total cost calculated for all the elements included in the cost analysis. This may include items such as omissions and contingencies that might be represented as a percentage of the total construction costs, or land acquisition costs that are represented as a lump sum. Each cost adjustment consists of the following items: •

11-450

Label—A unique name that identifies each cost adjustment.


Cost Estimating •

Operation—The mathematical operation that should be used with the factor to compute the cost adjustment.

•

Factor—A numeric value that is used with the operation and the total scenario cost to compute the cost adjustment.

The types of operations that are supported are described below:

11.1.5

•

% of Construction—Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the total construction costs for the scenario. For example, if the total construction cost for a scenario is $100000 and the numeric value in the factor field is 10, the cost adjustment is $10000.

•

% of Total Cost—Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario. For example, if the total cost for all the elements in a scenario is $200000 and the numeric value of the factor is 15, the cost adjustment is $30000.

•

Add—Adds the numeric value that you set to the other costs computed for a scenario.

•

Lump Sum—The numeric value specified is a lump sum that is added to the other costs for the scenario.

•

Multiply—Multiplies the numeric value in the factor field by the total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario.

•

Subtract—Subtracts the numeric value in the factor field from the other costs computed for the scenario.

Active Cost Scenarios The active scenarios dialog box allows you to select, which scenarios you would like to appear in the Capital Cost Manager. If there is check in the box to the left of the scenario name then that scenario will appear in the Capital Cost Manager.

11.2

Energy Cost Manager Energy Cost Manager includes: •

“Energy Cost Analysis” on page 11-452

•

“Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452

•

“Energy Pricing Manager” on page 11-455

•

“Energy Pricing Editor” on page 11-456


11-451

Energy Cost Manager

11.2.1

Energy Cost Analysis The WaterCAD Energy Cost Analysis feature lets you estimate the cost of operating pumps during an extended period simulation (EPS). This cost analysis not only calculates the cost of the energy being used by the pump, it also adjusts the reported daily cost based on the effects of storage within the network. To illustrate this, let’s say you have a tank in the network that has an initial level of 10 ft., and during the course of the extended period simulation this level falls to 5 ft. Realistically, this translates to an energy loss because at some point the pump will have to expend energy to fill the tank back up to its original level. Conversely, if the water level in the tank at the end of the simulation is greater than the initial level, the cost associated with the additional energy expenditure will be subtracted from the final daily cost. The effect of this additional consideration in the cost analysis is that the estimate provided by WaterCAD will be much more realistic than an estimate based solely on the cost of running the pump. For instance, if you ran an extended period simulation in which the tank was able to meet the demands of the network for a 24-hour period without requiring additional water, and ran a cost analysis without accounting for storage gains/losses for this 24-hour period, the program would calculate that the daily energy cost for this network is zero—the pumps did not run, so no energy was consumed. This is obviously incorrect, as energy will be required to fill the tank again to recoup the losses of the previous day.

11.2.2

Energy Cost Manager The Energy Cost Manager is separated into three sections: •

•

11-452

Button Section—This section contains three buttons: –

Prices—Opens the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see “Energy Pricing Manager” on page 11-455).

–

Close—Exits the Energy Cost Manager.

–

Help—Opens the online help.

Analysis Control Pane—This section of the dialog box consists of a menu which allows you to select the scenario to be calculated, a GO button which begins the calculation, and a pane that allows you to control what results will be displayed in the Detailed Results Pane. Highlighting one of the calculation components will cause the detailed results of the cost calculation to be displayed in the Detailed Results Pane. This section also displays a breakdown of the calculated costs associated with the various components of the energy cost analysis.


Cost Estimating •

Detailed Results Pane—This section of the dialog box is comprised of three tabs and a tabular report pane. This pane displays the detailed results associated with the currently highlighted item in the Analysis Control pane. The available tabs change depending on which row is selected in the Analysis Control Pane.

When the green folder representing the scenario to be calculated is highlighted, the following tabs are available: •

Pump—Displays a three column table listing all of the pumps in the current scenario. The three columns are Label, Include In Cost Calculation?, and Energy Pricing. To exclude pumps from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding pumps. The Energy Pricing column allows you to choose which energy pricing definition is to be used when calculating the corresponding pump, or to create a new one. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to open the Energy Pricing Manager (for more information, see “Energy Pricing Manager” on page 11-455).

•

Summary—Displays a summary of the calculated results for the cost analysis.

•

Tank—Displays a two column table listing all of the tanks in the current scenario. The two columns are Label and Include in Cost Calculation?. To exclude tanks from the analysis, clear the check box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding tanks.

Click GO to compute the energy costs. Costs are calculated for the elements in your model.


11-453

Energy Cost Manager

Click GO to calculate energy costs and populate the left pane In the left pane, from the calculated costs, highlight the element about which you want information

From the calculated costs, when you highlight Pump Usage, a Results tab is available. •

Results—The Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily Energy Usage or the Total Energy Usage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).

From the calculated costs, when you highlight Time Detail, the following tabs are available:

11-454


Cost Estimating •

Results—The Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The drop-down list for this tab has only a single option, Time Details. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).

•

Graph—The Graph tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the plot pane. The drop-down list for this tab allows you to choose which attribute is to be graphed. The Copy button copies the plot to the clipboard, and the Report button opens the Print Preview dialog box containing the graph as displayed in the plot pane. To change the graph options, right-click in the graph display pane and select Options.

From the calculated costs, when you highlight Storage, only a Results tab is available: •

Results—The Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Daily or the Storage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).

From the calculated costs, when you highlight Peak Demands, only a Results tab is available: •

11.2.3

Results—The Results tab consists of a menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The drop-down list allows you to choose whether the Peak Demand Daily Summary or the Peak Demand results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog box (for more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559).

Energy Pricing Manager The Energy Pricing Manager allows you to create, edit, and manage the electricity cost definitions that are used for the energy cost calculations. The following options are available in this dialog box: •

Add—Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor (for more information, see “Energy Pricing Editor” on page 11-456).

•

Edit—Opens the Energy Pricing Editor for the currently highlighted definition.

•

Duplicate—Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor, which is pre-set with the input data from the currently highlighted definition.


11-455

Energy Cost Manager

11.2.4

•

Delete—Verifies the action, then deletes the highlighted definition.

•

Rename—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted definition.

Energy Pricing Editor The Energy Price Editor allows you to create the cost definitions that will be used in the Energy Cost Analysis. The three tabs that make up the Energy Pricing Editor are: •

Energy Pricing—This tab is divided into two sections. The upper section contains a required input box: –

•

Start Time—A value between 0 and 24 that specifies the first time step point in the definition.

The lower part of the dialog box is comprised of a two column table and three buttons. The columns in the table are as follows: –

Time From Start—The time at which the value entered into the corresponding Energy Price field will take effect.

–

Energy Price—The Energy Price at the time specified in the corresponding Time From Start field.

The buttons to the right of the table include: •

Insert—Creates a new row in the definition table.

•

Duplicate—Duplicates the highlighted row in the definition table.

•

Delete—Deletes the highlighted row in the definition table. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

In addition, in the upper right-hand side of the dialog box, there is a Plot button.

11-456

•

Plot—Creates a price-vs.-time graph for the current pricing definition.

•

Peak Demand Charge—This tab consists of the following fields:

•

Include Peak Demand Charge?—This check box activates and deactivates the input fields. When the box is checked, a Peak Demand Charge will be applied as determined by the Peak Demand Charge and Billing Period input fields.

•

Peak Demand Charge—The charge applied per kW at the time of greatest power usage.

•

Billing Period—The Billing Period is the length of time over which the peak demand is considered. An equivalent daily cost is found by dividing the peak cost by this period of time.

•

Notes—Allows you to enter descriptive text concerning the pricing definition being created.


Cost Estimating

11.3

Capital Cost Alternatives Manager The Capital Cost Alternatives Manager lets you edit, create, and manage your capital cost alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives. On the right side of the dialog box are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives. These buttons are identical to the buttons found in the Alternatives Manager (for more information, see “Alternatives Manager” on page 8347).

11.4

Unit Cost Functions A Unit Cost Function is a description of the relationship between an element attribute and the unit cost for that element. For example, it might describe the relationship between pipe diameter and the cost-per-unit-length, or it could relate the depth of a gravity structure to the unit cost for that structure. You can specify the relationship between the unit cost and the value of the attribute as either tabular data or as a formula. Tabular Unit Cost Function—Relates attribute values to unit costs as a series of data points. This is the only way to enter unit cost data for non-numeric attributes, such as material. If the attribute for which you are supplying the cost data is numeric, then values between the data points that you enter will be linearly interpolated. If the unit cost is requested for an attribute value that falls outside of the range of data that you supplied in the table, the model will assume that the unit cost is equal to the unit cost at the most extreme point closest to the value that was requested. For example, if the following points had been entered (8 in, 30$/ft.) and (12 in, 40$/ft.) and the unit cost was requested for a 16-in. diameter pipe, the value returned would be 40$/ft. The warnings report available from the cost manager will list the elements and construction cost items for which this is true. For more information, see “Tabular Unit Cost Function” on page 11-459. Note:

For certain values, such as when x is less than c, and b is not an integer, this equation will be invalid. Under these conditions, the unit cost returned by the function will be zero.

Formula Unit Cost Function—Represents the unit cost as a function of the selected numeric attribute of the following form: (for more information, see “Formula Unit Cost Function” on page 11-460)

Cost = d + a ( x – c )


b

11-457

Unit Cost Functions

Where:

Cost

=

Linear cost of the pipe (local currency/m, local currency/ft.)

x

=

Selected attribute (unit depends on the type of attribute)

a, b, c, d

=

Parameters you specify (units depend on local currency and the type of attribute)

Unit Cost Functions includes:

11.4.1

•

“Unit Cost Functions Manager” on page 11-458

•

“New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-458

•

“Unit Cost Function Notes” on page 11-459

•

“Tabular Unit Cost Function” on page 11-459

•

“Formula Unit Cost Function” on page 11-460

Unit Cost Functions Manager You can add, delete, and edit the Unit Cost Functions (see “Unit Cost Functions” on page 11-457) for your project through this manager. You will be able to assign the cost functions defined here to one or more of the elements of the appropriate type in your system. For example, if you define a cost function for pipes, you will be able to select this cost function from the choice list on the Cost tab of the Pipe Element Editor. Use the Save command to save the Unit Cost Functions listed in the Unit Cost Functions Manager. You can then import them into another project using the Import command. The Save and Import commands are accessed from the File button in this dialog box.

11.4.2

New Unit Cost Functions Dialog Box When you add a new Unit Cost Function, you will be prompted with this dialog box containing two fields, Unit Cost Function Type and Unit Cost Function Attribute. This is the information that is needed to initialize the new Unit Cost Function that you are about to create. The Unit Cost Function Type field allows you to select whether you would like to enter your cost function data in tabular or formula format. We recommend that you quickly familiarize yourself with both formats to see which is most convenient for you. If you wish to base your unit cost on an attribute that is not numeric, such as material, you must choose a tabular format.

11-458


Cost Estimating The Unit Cost Function Attribute field is for selecting the attribute for which your unit costs are functions. For example, the unit cost of a pipe might be based upon its diameter or its material. Attributes that are not numeric can only be selected if the Unit Cost Function type is tabular.

11.4.3

Unit Cost Function Notes In this section, you can enter optional notes related to the Unit Cost Function.

11.4.4

Tabular Unit Cost Function This tab contains the data for Unit Cost Functions defined with tabular data. The information is defined in the following fields: •

General—Contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For more information, see “General Section” on page 11-459.

•

Attribute Value Range—Displays the range of the selected attribute in the current scenario. This information can be useful for specifying cost data for the entire range of values in the model. For more information, see “Attribute Value Range Section” on page 11-460.

•

Unit Cost Data—Specifies the tabular data relating unit cost to the value of the selected attribute. For more information, see “Attribute Value Range Section” on page 11-460. Note:

If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost Function is outside the defined range for some elements in your network, the unit cost used will be the cost of the minimum or maximum value of the attribute you defined in the table.

In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box: •

Plot—Plots the tabular data relating cost to the value of the selected attribute.

•

Initialize Range—Initializes the minimum and maximum values in the Attribute Value Range section, based on all the elements present in your project for the current scenario.

General Section This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as follows: •

Label—Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.


11-459

Unit Cost Functions •

Element Type—Displays the type of element to which the function applies, which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junction, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.

•

Attribute Label—Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diameter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager.

Attribute Value Range Section This section displays the minimum and maximum values for the attribute that controls the unit cost in your current network. Click the Initialize Range button to have these values calculated.

Unit Cost Data Table This allows you to define the Unit Cost Function in a tabular format, preferably defining the costs associated with the entire range of values present in your network. To display the current range of values in your model, initialize the Attribute Value Range section by clicking the Initialize Range button.

11.4.5

Formula Unit Cost Function The data defining formula-based Unit Cost Functions is grouped as follows: •

General—General information identifying the Unit Cost Function. For more information, see “General Section” on page 11-461.

•

Valid Cost Data Range—The range for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. For more information, see “Valid Cost Data Range Section” on page 11-461.

•

Coefficients—Coefficients defining the formula relating the unit cost to the attribute value. For more information, see “Coefficients Section” on page 11-461. Note:

If the function is invalid for any interval within the Valid Cost Data Range, it is set to 0.0 in that interval. Click the Plot button to see if there are any problems with the function. If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost Function is outside the Valid Cost Data Range for any element in the network, the formula will still be applied to calculate that element unit cost. However, an error message for that element will be reported when computing the cost for the system.

In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box:

11-460


Cost Estimating •

Plot—A graph of the Unit Cost Function.

•

Initialize Range—The minimum and maximum values of the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function based on all the elements in your project.

General Section This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as follows: •

Label—Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.

•

Element Type—Displays the type of element to which the function applies, which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junction, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.

•

Attribute Label—Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diameter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager.

•

Local Unit—Unit of the attribute that controls the unit cost. This unit is used for defining the formula coefficients.

Valid Cost Data Range Section This section specifies the range of values for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. Clicking the Initialize Range button accesses the two values based on the range of values present in your current network.

Coefficients Section In this section, you can enter the coefficients defining the Unit Cost Function. The xparameter, which represents the value of the attribute on which the Unit Cost Function is based, is expressed by the unit specified in the Local Unit field on this tab.

11.5

Cost Reports In addition to the standard reporting capabilities, the cost analysis feature provides a number of specialized reports for presenting results. These reports include: •

Element Detailed Cost Report—Presents a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a single element. For more information, see “Element Detailed Cost Report” on page 11-462.

•

Project Detailed Cost Report—Provides a detailed view of calculated cost data for every element included in the cost analysis. For more information, see “Project Detailed Cost Report” on page 11-463.


11-461

Cost Reports •

Project Element Summary Cost Report—Returns a summary of the costs for every element included in the cost report. For more information, see “Project Element Summary Cost Report” on page 11-463.

•

Project Summary Cost Report—Provides an overview of all the costs in the system. For more information, see “Project Summary Cost Report” on page 11463.

•

Pipe Costs Report—Provides an overview of the costs associated with the pipes in the project, grouping them by material and section size. For more information, see “Pipe Costs Report” on page 11-464.

•

Cost Warnings Report—Provides a list of warnings for a particular Cost Scenario. For more information, see “Cost Warnings Report” on page 11-464.

Each of these tabular reports can be sent directly to the printer, or copied and pasted into a spreadsheet program for further refinement.

11.5.1

Element Detailed Cost Report This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a single element. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction costs for an element, as well as the subtotals and total cost of the element. This report is only available for elements that have been selected for inclusion in the cost calculation. For more information, see “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519. To access the field Element Detailed Cost Report:

11-462

Stand-Alone:

Double-click the element for which you wish to see the report, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report.

AutoCAD 2000/2002:

Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to edit, or select the element and choose Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report.

AutoCAD 2000i:

Double-click the element for which you wish to see the report, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog box that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report.


Cost Estimating

11.5.2

Project Detailed Cost Report This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for every element included in the cost analysis. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction costs for each element, as well as the cost adjustments made to the total cost of the project. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario. For more information, see “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519.

11.5.3

Project Element Summary Cost Report This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for each element selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. It contains an overview of the costs assigned to each element, and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario. For more information, see “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519.

11.5.4

Project Summary Cost Report This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for the elements selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. This report contains an overview of the costs assigned to each element type and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario. For more information, see “Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519.


11-463

Cost Reports

11.5.5

Pipe Costs Report This printed report provides a summary of the cost of all the pipes included in the cost analysis. The pipes are grouped by material and section size. The total length of pipe for each size and material are reported along with the total cost associated with that group of pipes.

11.5.6

Cost Warnings Report This report provides a list of all the cost warnings for the selected scenario. You will receive warnings when you have assigned a Unit Cost Function to a particular element but the attribute value for that element lies outside of the valid range of data you set for the Unit Cost Function. You need to check these elements and make sure that the cost data supplied to these elements is applicable.

11-464


Chapter

12

Using Darwin Designer

Darwin Designer lets you design new pipe layouts or pipe rehabilitation for existing pipes. A genetic-algorithm based approach lets you avoid a manual trial and error approach to finding the most efficient design. Solutions and costs calculated using Darwin Designer can be exported back to any scenario. To open Darwin Designer: 1. Start WaterCAD. 2. Click the Darwin Designer button. 3. Or, click Analysis > Darwin Designer. 4. If the Schema Augmentation dialog box opens, click Augment Schema. (For more information, see “Schema Augmentation” on page 12-506.) 5. The Darwin Designer dialog box opens. Begin by creating a new design study. (For more information, see “Lesson 9: Using Darwin Designer” on page 3-187 and “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753.)

12.1

Overview: How to Use Darwin Designer Design studies comprise: •

Design events –

Flows (demand adjustments—see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12485)

–

Constraints (pressure and flow—see “Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12487 and “Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-489)

–

Boundary conditions (see “Boundary Conditions Tab” on page 12-490)

•

Design group specifications (see “Local Design Groups Tab” on page 12-494)

•

Rehab group specifications (see “Local Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-496)


12-465

Design Study •

Cost data (see “Option Groups Tab” on page 12-474)

•

Design study options (type of optimization—see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-485)

A Design Run is created by picking which of the following are to be used for a given run: •

Design events

•

Design groups

•

Rehab groups

•

Run specific options

The particular events and groups are specified by making them active. You may create many design runs within a design study.

12.2

Design Study A design study is a top-level grouping of the pipe design and rehabilitation you want to do for one complete design project. A design study should be used to represent a real project unit, such as a system expansion, main replacement, system augmentation, etc. For a different or unrelated projects—such as a main replacement project and a project to design a new service area—you should use different, new design studies. To start using Darwin Designer, you must first create a design study. All Darwin Designer data exists within design studies. A design study comprises the following elements: 1. A description of the events that serve as the basis for design 2. A set of pipes being sized or rehabilitated 3. Constraints you must meet, which are defined in a design event 4. A range of design sizes or rehabilitation options (as part of option groups) 5. Cost data on for use in the optimization (as part of option groups) 6. Genetic algorithm options 7. A number of design runs of to test the design (see “Design Run” on page 12-492) 8. The results of design runs (see “Results Pane” on page 12-498) It is readily apparent that one or more of these items will be different between different design studies, hence the ability to create as many design studies as you need.

12-466


Using Darwin Designer You can create more than one design study. Each design study can comprise one or more design runs. Each design run is manual or GA optimized. (For more information, see “Design Run” on page 12-492.) In the design study, create the groups of pipes for design and rehabilitation, define the design/rehab options (costs and sizes etc), and define constraints and parameters for your designs. These items get used in the design runs and the computations that produce your design results.

Right-click the design study in the tree-view to access some options. Add New Design Study:

You can add more than one design study. Design studies are not related.

Add New Design Run:

You can add manual and optimized design runs to each design study. Optimized design runs uses a genetic algorithm whereas the manual design lets you apply specific solution alternatives for trial-and-error calculations. Darwin Designer does not run a design study; it uses a design run. There can be multiple design runs in a design study.

Duplicate:


Click Duplicate to create a copy of the selected design study. This can be an efficient way to create a new design study that has many of the attributes of an existing study.

12-467

Design Study

12.2.1

Rename:

Click Rename to change the name of the selected design study.

Delete:

Click Delete to delete the selected design study.

Close Button:

Click Close to exit Darwin Designer.

Help Button:

Click Help to open the context-sensitive online help. For more information, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

Design Events Tab Note:

A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer. The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to make it active by selecting a check box under a design run. You must have at least one active design event and one active design or rehab group to make up a design run.

In producing a system design, the design must typically achieve some objective or objectives. Generally, a design must supply some specified demands, while concurrently meeting specified performance criteria, subject to specific boundary conditions, such as tank levels, or emergency conditions. Design events are used to define the requirements of your designs. Design events include information about the demand conditions a design must satisfy, the performance requirements or constraints a design must meet (in the form of pressure and flow constraints), and also the boundary conditions under which the design must achieve the previous two goals. In order to create a design using Darwin Designer you need at least one design event, however, in many cases you will use more than that.

12-468



Buttons used by the tabs

New:

Click New to add a new design event. For more information, see “Adding a Design Event” on page 12-471.

Edit:

Click Edit to modify an existing design event. For more information, see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484.

Duplicate:

Click Duplicate to create a copy of the selected design event. This can be an efficient way to create a new design event that has many of the attributes of an existing set.

Rename:

Click Rename to change the name of an existing design event. When the dialog box opens, type the new name and click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming anything.

Delete:

Click Delete to permanently remove the selected design event.

Representative Scenario:

From the drop-down list, select the scenario you want Darwin Designer to use for the design and calculations. The list displays those scenarios defined in your WaterCAD file (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). This scenario is the starting point for Darwin Designer calculations.


12-469

Design Study Note:

You can drag the vertical column dividers in the headings to change the column widths.

Design Event Name:

The Design Event Name column lists the designs you have created. Click the column heading to rank these in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Notes:

The Notes field displays any notes that are in the Design Event Editor’s Note tab (see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484).

Representative Scenarios The representative scenario is the scenario upon which Darwin Designer will base its designs. The representative scenario must, therefore, contain any and all data that will be considered for design purposes. The types of data that this includes is: •

Topological data, such as the locations of existing and possible new facilities. Note that, for pipes that do not currently exist (Designer will be used to size them), we recommended you model them as open pipes with small diameters (e.g., 0.01 inches or 0.01 mm). It is also good practice to adopt some kind of obvious naming convention, such as FP-1, FP-2 (Future Pipe) or GA-P-1, GA-P2, etc. It is also possible to consider the inclusion/exclusion of other facilities using topological data. For more information, see “Advanced Darwin Designer Tips” on page A-703.

•

Physical data, such as pipe diameters, lengths, tank diameters, elevations, etc.

•

Initial Settings data, such as tank levels, control valve statuses, etc.

•

Demand data, such as loading patterns, nodal demands, fire flows (as nodal demands). Note:

The representative scenario must either be a steady state or EPS scenario. Water Quality and/or Fire Flow options are ignored.

After you choose an appropriate representative scenario, it is possible within Darwin Designer to set up multiple design events (see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-493) that specify differences over and above the representative scenario. Specifically, it is possible to specify additional demands (see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12485), a completely different demand alternative (by overriding), and also different boundary conditions. In this way, you can set up a suite of design events that capture the design requirements of the project. As an example, the representative scenario might reference peak hour demands. In this case, you could set up a design event that uses the representative scenario unchanged to ensure the design meets peak hour flows, and then you could add in additional design events that specify fire flows (additional demands) or emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks (boundary conditions).

12-470



Adding a Design Event The first component of a design study is the design event that is being analyzed. It is in the design event that you describe the flows that must be delivered and the constraints that must be met. To add a new design event: 1. Select the Representative Scenario on which you want to base your design. 2. Click New. 3. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK. 4. The Design Event Editor opens. Enter your data to define the design event. For more information, see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484.

12.2.2

Design Groups Tab For an overview of design groups, see “Design and Rehab Groups Overview” on page 12-473. New Design Group:

Click New to add a new design option group. For more information, see “Adding a New Group” on page 12-472.

Edit Design Group:

Click Edit to modify an existing design option group. For more information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.

Rename Design Group:

Click Rename to change the name of an existing design option group. When the dialog box opens, type the new name and click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming anything.

Delete Design Group:

Click Delete to permanently remove the selected design option group. Note that the elements in that group are unaffected.

New Multiple Design Groups: Click this button to create several design groups at once, from all the elements or selection sets (see “Selection Sets” on page 5263). This can be an efficient way to quickly create several one-pipe design groups, rather than creating the groups one at a time.


12-471

Design Study Note:


Design Group Name:

The Design Group Name column lists the design groups. Click the column heading to rank these in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Pipe Count:

Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group. To change this value, edit the group. (For more information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.)

Adding a New Group Pipes can only exist in one group. For example, the same pipe cannot be in multiple design groups nor in a design and a rehab group. To add a new design or rehabilitation group: 1. Click New. 2. Type the name of the design group you are creating and click OK. 3. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes you want to include in your group. –

Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select.

–

Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.

4. After you have selected the elements, click OK to create the group. Or, click Cancel to exit the dialog box without creating a new group.

Editing a Group To edit a design or rehabilitation group: 1. Click Edit. 2. In the Element Selector dialog box, click those pipes and/or junctions you want to include in your group. –

Use the drop-down list to filter the elements from which you can select: pipes, junctions, or both.

–

Shift+click and ctrl+click to select ranges and more than one pipe.

3. After you have selected the elements, click OK to apply your changes to the group. Or, click Cancel to exit the dialog box without making any changes.

12-472



Design and Rehab Groups Overview Darwin Designer determines the size or rehab action for pipes. It is unlikely, however, that a large pipeline will change diameter every block along its route. Plus, if fewer pipes being sized, optimization will happen faster than if a larger number of pipes were sized. Therefore, Darwin Designer uses the idea of a pipe group or rehab group to group pipes that will attract the same design decision. At the end of a run, all of the pipes in the same design group are given the same diameter, and all of the pipes in the same rehab group receive the same rehab action. This is both logical and more efficient from a computational standpoint. For a pipe to be considered a candidate for design or rehab, it must be placed in a group. This is done on the Design Groups or Rehab Groups tab when the Design Study is highlighted. (When the Design Run is highlighted, you choose which groups are to be considered during that run.) You must insert at least one pipe in each design group (see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472). There is no absolute rule for deciding which pipes belong in a given group. Usually it is the set of pipes that will be laid with the same diameter and at the same time, but it can also be smaller groups than that, and in the case of smaller design problems or academic exercises, it may be only 1 pipe per group, which is easily expedited with the Create Multiple Design Groups selection (see “New Multiple Design Groups” on page 12-471). The down side of adding every pipe to its own group, however, is that this can be computationally inefficient and potentially leads to a pipeline that is say 12 in. for one block, 8 in. for the next, 6 in. the next, etc., which may be a theoretically least-cost design but is not a solution that is likely to be installed. Ultimately the choice comes down to a trade-off between number of pipe groups (and size of the optimization problem) versus constructability of the design through the potential for different pipe sizes adopted for each group. For more information, see “Advanced Darwin Designer Tips” on page A-703.

12.2.3

Rehab Groups Tab For an overview of rehab groups, see “Design and Rehab Groups Overview” on page 12-473. New Rehabilitation Group:

Click New to add a new rehabilitation group. For more information, see “Adding a New Group” on page 12-472.

Edit Rehabilitation Group:

Click Edit to modify an existing rehabilitation group. For more information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.


12-473

Design Study Rename Rehabilitation Group: Click Rename to change the name of an existing rehabilitation group. When the dialog box opens, type the new name and click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming anything. Delete Rehabilitation Group:

Note:

12.2.4

Click Delete to permanently remove the selected rehabilitation group. Note that the elements in that group are unaffected.


Rehabilitation Group Name:

The Rehabilitation Group Name column lists the rehabilitation groups. Click the column heading to rank these in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Pipe Count:

Pipe Count tells you how many pipes in the group. To change this value, edit the group. (For more information, see “Editing a Group” on page 12-472.)

Option Groups Tab Note:

The option groups table is dimmed until you click the table in the tree-view, to select it. To see the option groups, click the + sign next to Design Option Groups and Rehab Option Groups. If there is no + sign, there is no table and you must create a table by clicking the New button.

Option groups are used by Darwin Designer to determine the hydraulic effect of and calculate the capital cost of the solutions it generates. Option groups come in two types: Design Option Groups (new pipes) and Rehab Option Groups (rehabilitation actions). Design options (new pipe sizes and associated roughness, material type and unit cost) are defined by adding design option groups. Rehab Options (rehab actions and associated post action functions) are defined by adding rehab option groups. Each option group contains a set of options that the Darwin Designer can select from in order to create its hydraulic solutions. Design Option Groups are used where you are designing a new system or part of a system and brand new pipes need to be installed. Rehab Option Groups are used when you are examining the effect of rehabilitating (cleaning, lining etc) existing pipes.

12-474



Use this tree-view with the Option Groups tab

Design Option Groups:

Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit new pipe option groups. For more information, see “Adding and Editing Design Option Groups” on page 12-475.

Rehab Option Groups:

Select this item in the tree-view to create and edit rehabilitation option groups. For more information, see “Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option Groups” on page 12-478.

Adding and Editing Design Option Groups Note:

The order of pipe diameters is not important, but it makes easier viewing if you enter pipe diameters in increasing size.

Design Option Groups are used to define a selection of pipes that can be used in your design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you wish. For example, for a rough cut design, you may simply wish to use nominal diameters and estimated unit rates, but for a detailed design you may wish to use internal pipe diameters and even distinguish between different materials. The new pipe option group is set up to allow you to adopt either approach. In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the different cost situations in your project. For example, you may decide that you have three different cost types that need to be considered: Residential, Greenfields and Commercial. In this case, you can set up three different option groups to reflect the different in-ground costs for each of the three different cost types. For example,


12-475

Design Study Greenfields would be cheaper than Residential, where the additional costs of breaking the road and resurfacing need to be included. Not all groups need to include the same pipe sizes either, so you may choose to use different option groups as a way of limiting certain pipe groups to being able to attain only certain sizes. For example, there is not much point allowing a transmission main to be sized as a 6-in. pipe, where a consumer connection pipe might be acceptable as a 6-in. pipe. Darwin Designer has the ability to not only size new pipes from a range of possible available pipe sizes, but it can also determine whether a particular pipe needs to be constructed at all. To get Designer to determine whether a pipe needs to be constructed at all, simply add a zero diameter option to the pipe option group. The zero diameter option should also attract a cost of zero (in this case, roughness is redundant). The zero size option can be used to size parallel pipes and it can also be used to determine the optimal design layout, whereby more pipes are being sized than are necessary to service all demands. For pipes that are essential for service and that must be sized, define and use a pipeoption group that contains no zero diameter option. For more information, see “Lesson 10: Darwin Designer Overview” on page 3-205. To define an option group for design options (new pipe sizing), first select the Design Option Groups tree-view item.

You can right-click in the tree-view, as well as using the buttons

12-476


Using Darwin Designer New Design Option Group:

Right-click the Design Option Groups treeview item and select Add New Design Option Group or click the New button to add a new design option group. Enter the name of the table and click OK to create a new blank table, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a new table.

Duplicate Design Option Group:Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Duplicate or click the Duplicate button to make a copy of the selected design option group. This can be an efficient way to create a new table that shares many values with an existing table. Rename Design Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Rename or click the Rename button to enter a new name for the selected design option group. Delete Design Option Group:

Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Delete or click the Delete button.

Add/Delete Design Options:

Click the Insert and Delete buttons to add or remove selected rows from the pipe table.

Material:

Click on a table cell and select the pipe material from the drop-down list or click the Ellipsis button to open the Material Manager. (For more information, see “Material Editor” on page 12-478.) You can type the first letter of the material to select it and use the arrow.

Diameter:

Type a diameter for the pipe.

Roughness:

Type the roughness value for the pipe (figure shows Hazen-Williams value).

Unit Cost:

Type the unit cost value for the pipe.


12-477

Design Study Material Editor Use the Material Editor to add or edit pipe material. Type the name of the pipe material and enter a roughness value for the material. Click OK to apply your changes or Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.

Adding and Editing Rehabilitation Option Groups 1. Rehab option groups define the selection of rehab actions that can be used in the design. 2. As much or as little detail as user wishes. 3. As many groups as needed for different cost types. 4. Not all groups need include the same rehab options. Rehab Option Groups are used to define the selection of rehab actions that can be used in the design. You may choose to use as much or as little detail as you want. You can set up as many groups as you need for different cost types, and not all groups need to include the same rehabilitation options. In setting up option groups, you can set up as many groups as needed to describe the different cost situations in your project To define a rehabilitation option group: 1. Right-click the Rehab Option Groups tree-view item. 2. Select New Rehabilitation Option Group. 3. Name the table and click OK. 4. Type the name of for an Action you want to add. 5. Select the three functions that describe the pre- and post-rehabilitation conditions. You must select one of each type of function for a rehabilitation action; none of the functions are optional. a. Click the arrow to select an existing function from the drop-down list. b. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to create a new function (see “Function Editor” on page 12-483). 6. As needed, click Insert or Delete to add and remove rows. 7. Create as many rehabilitation actions as needed.

12-478



You can right-click in the tree-view, as well as using the buttons

New Rehab Option Group:

Right-click the Rehab Option Groups treeview item and select New Rehabilitation Option Group or click the New button to add a new option group. Enter the name of the table and click OK to create a new blank table, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a new table.

Duplicate Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Duplicate or click the Duplicate button to make a copy of the selected option group. This can be an efficient way to create a new table that shares many values with an existing table. Rename Rehab Option Group: Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Rename or click the Rename button to enter a new name for the selected option group. Delete Rehab Option Group:

Right-click a table name in the tree-view and select Delete or click the Delete button.

Add/Delete Table Rows:

Click the Insert and Delete buttons to add or remove selected rows from the table.

Action:

Type the name of the rehabilitation action you are creating.


12-479

Design Study Note:

Select from the list to use an existing rehabilitation function. Click the Ellipses (…) button to open Function Manager to create a new function (see “Function Manager” on page 12-481).

Pre versus Post Diameter:

Select or create the function you want to use for the rehabilitation action you are creating. This function describes the pre- and post-rehabilitation pipe diameters. You must create at least one function for prerehabilitation diameter versus post-rehabilitation diameter.

Note:

Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation diameters.

Pre-Rehab Diameter vs. Cost:

Select or create the function you want to use for the rehabilitation action you are creating. This function describes the cost of the action per length for pipe of a given pre-rehabilitation diameter. You must create at least one function for diameter versus cost.

Diameter versus Roughness:

Select or create the function you want to use for the rehabilitation action you are creating. This function describes the pre-rehabilitation diameter versus the post-rehabilitation pipe roughness. You must create at least one function for diameter versus roughness.

12-480


Using Darwin Designer Function Manager Use the Function Manager to create a rehabilitation function. To create a rehabilitation function, from a rehab table in the Option Groups tab:

Create one function for each of these column headings

1. Click in a cell, other than an Action cell, in the Rehab Option Group grid. 2. Click the Ellipses (…) button. The Function Manager opens. In the Rehab Option Group grid, in addition to the Action column, there are three columns: pre- versus post-rehab diameters, pre-rehab diameter versus unit costs, and pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness. At a minimum, you must create one cost function for each of these columns.


12-481

Design Study

12-482

New:

Click New to add a rehab cost function.

Edit:

Click Edit to change the definition of an existing function.

Duplicate:

Click Duplicate to make a copy of the selected function. This can be an efficient way to create a new function that shares many values with an existing function.

Rename:

Click Rename to change the name of an existing function. When the dialog box opens, type the new name and click OK or click Cancel to exit without renaming anything.

Delete:

Click Delete to permanently remove the selected function.


Using Darwin Designer Function Editor To create or edit a function: Note:

Ideally, you want to include in all functions you create each of the pipe sizes that are present in your rehabilitation groups. This ensures that Darwin Designer does not need to extrapolate or interpolate values for unspecified pipe diameters, possibly resulting in undesirable cost, roughness, or post-rehabilitation diameters.

1. Click New and select one of the types of functions to create. Name the new function and click OK. 2. Or, select a function and click Edit. The Function Editor opens. 3. Click Insert to add a new row or Delete to remove a selected row. 4. Add data to the table that describes the relationship you want. For example, enter a pre-rehabilitation and post-rehabilitation diameter for the pipe.

New Option Group Enter the name you want to use for the option group. Click OK to apply the name to a new table or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a new table.

12.2.5

Design Type Tab The Design Type tab lets you design and weight benefits so the genetic algorithm knows better what your design priorities are. For more information, see “Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753. Design Objectives:


Set the Objective Type. This is the overall priority of the design. For each design type except Minimize Budget, you need to enter an Available Budget.

12-483

Design Event Editor

Benefit Type:

•

Minimize Cost sets price as your primary concern and the genetic algorithm will consider costs most heavily.

•

Maximize Benefit sets the performance of the system as the highest priority. The system performance is measured by the pressures at specified junctions using pressure benefits.

•

Multi-Objective Trade-off lets the genetic algorithm consider where the best compromise lies between cost and pressure benefit.

Select a Dimensionless or Unitized benefit for Maximized Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off. If you are looking for a specific pressure improvement from your system, consider using unitized benefit. Unitized benefit considers the average pressure increase for selected junctions. If pressure improvement is not a primary concern, consider using dimensionless benefit. Dimensionless benefit considers the ratio of pressure improvement to minimum pressure for selected junctions.

Pressure Benefit:

12.2.6

Set the Pressure Benefit Coefficient and the Pressure Benefit Exponent. These increase the weighted value of pressure in your network. The Pressure Benefit Exponent has a larger effect on the weighted value than the same number for the coefficient.

Notes Tab Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries and dates.

12.3

Design Event Editor Note:

A design event represents a single time step hydraulic analysis that will be analyzed by Darwin Designer.

Use the Design Event Editor to create or edit design events used as parameters for your designs or rehabilitation of systems. For more information, see “Design Study” on page 12-466.

12-484



The Design Event Editor comprises these tabs:

12.3.1

•

“Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-485

•

“Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12-487

•

“Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-489

•

“Boundary Conditions Tab” on page 12-490

•

“Notes Tab” on page 12-492

Demand Adjustments Tab The sizing of pipes in designer is driven by demands. By default, the demands used will be those associated with the representative scenario. However, you may want to use different demands, such as fire flows or peaks. There are several different ways to modify or overwrite the demands in the representative scenario.


12-485

Design Event Editor •

Override Scenario Demand Alternative—This option lets you select a new demand alternative to use in lieu of the demand alternative referenced by the representative scenario. In this way, you can set up all of your different demand cases in WaterCAD before starting Darwin Designer, and then reference them by selecting Override Scenario Demand Alternative and selecting the appropriate demand alternative. Using this option eliminates the need for the following options, but does not preclude their use.

•

Adjust demands with a fixed multiplier—In some cases, the demands for the representative scenario might be for an average day and you would like to adjust them for a peak hour. To do so, enter a demand multiplier to adjust it. Note that the multiplier you should enter is the value needed to adjust the demands at the specified time to the desired value. Assuming that the time from start was already 7 hours, which equated to 7 a.m. in a particular model, and you want to adjust demands up to the 9 p.m. peak, rather than enter the 9 p.m. peak multiplier, you should enter the ratio of the 7 a.m. multiplier and the 9 p.m. multiplier. For example, if the 7 a.m. multiplier is 1.3 and the 9 p.m. multiplier is 1.6, then 1.23 should be used as the demand multiplier. This is illustrated as follows: 1.3 x 1.23 = 1.6 Thus it is true to say that the demand for any single junction is calculated by: Qc = Qb * DMt * DM Where:

Qc = calculated flow Qb = base flow DMt = demand multiplier at time t (Time from start) determined for demand patterns DM = specified demand multiplier (default is 1.0)

•

12-486

Additional Demands—Fire flows or other special cases can be achieved by adding demand adjustments to individual junctions: by selecting the junction and specifying the additional demand. If necessary, demands can also be subtracted by specifying a negative number. Be sure to enter demands in the correct flow units.

Design Time:

Scenario start time plus time from start. This is the clock time that the Time From Start value represents.

Scenario Start Time:

The time at which the scenario is set to begin. This is the clock time for the start of the hydraulic simulation defined as part of the representative scenario calculation properties.

Time from Start:

Only adjustable when the representative scenario is set for EPS, the time from start specifies the time to use as the basis of design. That is, for a model with a scenario start time of 12:00:00AM, a time from start


Using Darwin Designer value of 7 equates to 7:00:00AM. The result is that Darwin Designer will, for the current design event, simulate demands as the base demands multiplied by their respective pattern multipliers at 7:00:00AM. In short, the demands at 7 a.m. are used. It is easy to see that you can set up multiple design events that consider demands at different times in the day, simply by adjusting the Time From Start value. Override Scenario Dmnd Alt.

Select this check box to override the displayed Demand Alternative and to use the Demand Multiplier. Clear this check box if you do not want to use the Demand Multiplier.

Demand Alternative:

Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the selected set of observations.

Demand Multiplier:

Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water model at that time from start. For example, if you have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.

Insert/Delete:

Click Insert or Delete to add or remove a row in the Demand Adjustments table.

Junction:

Select a junction at which to set a demand adjustment. To access the drop-down and other selection buttons, click in the Junction cell. Click the drop-down list to select a junction from the list, click the Ellipses button.

12.3.2

Demand Adjustments:

Type the demand adjustment that you want applied to the selected junction.

OK/Cancel/Help Buttons:

Click OK to accept and apply the changes you made. Or, click Cancel to exit the current function without making or applying changes. Click Help to display the help topic that describes the feature you are using.

Pressure Constraints Tab Use this tab to define pressure constraints for all junctions or a set of junctions.


12-487

Design Event Editor Selection Set:

From the drop-down list, select the junctions to which you want to apply the constraints. To select junctions, click the Ellipsis (…) button and use the Element Selector (see “Element Selector” on page 12-501).

Minimum Pressure:

Set a minimum pressure that you require for the selected set of junctions. Violations of this boundary are displayed when you calculate your network.

Maximum Pressure:

Set a maximum pressure that you require for the selected set of junctions. This value cannot be lower than the minimum pressure you set. You can set this to an unusually high value if you are unconcerned with maximum pressure. Violations of this boundary are displayed when you calculate your network.

Consider Pressure Benefit:

If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to Minimize Cost (for more information, see “Design Objectives” on page 12-483), then pressure benefit is not considered in the solution, but the benefit is computed. This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters. Select this check box if you want the genetic algorithm to consider the benefits provided your design by higher system pressures.

Pressure Constraints Table:

For more information, see “Pressure Constraints Table” on page 12-488.

OK/Cancel/Help:


Pressure Constraints Table Note:

12-488

Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or descending order, or right-click the column heading and select Sort.

Junction:

Displays the list of junctions for which you have set up pressure constraints.

Override Defaults:

Select this check box if you want to override the default maximum and/or minimum pressure constraints, or you wish to override whether to use the selected junction in pressure benefit calculations.


Using Darwin Designer After you select this check box, click in the field you want to change and type the new value for the constraint, or click the Consider Pressure Benefit check box. Minimum/Maximum Pressure: Displays the pressure minimum and maximum that are set. Consider Pressure Benefit:

If you set the Design Parameters Design Type to Minimize Cost (for more information, see “Design Objectives” on page 12-483), then pressure benefit is not considered in the solution, but the benefit is computed. This check box is available to Maximize Benefit and Multi-Objective Trade-off design parameters. Select this check box if you want the genetic algorithm to consider the benefits provided your design by higher system pressures. If you check Consider Pressure Benefit but your Design Type option is set to Minimize Cost, then benefit is computed and the benefit value will show up at run time as well as in report.

12.3.3

Flow Constraints Tab Use this tab to define flow boundary conditions for a junction or set of junctions. Selection Set:

From the drop-down list, select the pipes to which you want to apply the constraints. To select pipes, click the Ellipsis button and use the Element Selector.

Minimum Velocity:

Set a minimum velocity that you require for the selected set of pipes. Violations of this boundary are displayed when you calculate your network.

Maximum Velocity:

Set a maximum velocity that you require for the selected set of pipes. You can set this to an unusually high value if needed. Violations of this boundary are displayed when you calculate your network.

Flow Constraints Table:

For more information, see “Flow Constraints Table” on page 12-490.


12-489

Design Event Editor OK/Cancel/Help:


Flow Constraints Table Note:

Click a column heading to sort the column in ascending or descending order, or right-click the column heading and select Sort.

Pipe:

Displays the list of pipes for which you have set up flow constraints.

Override Defaults:

Select this check box if you want to override the default maximum and/or minimum flow (velocity) constraints for selected pipes. After you select this check box, click in the field you want to change and type the new value for the constraint.

Minimum/Maximum Velocity: Displays the velocity minimum and maximum that are set.

12.3.4

Boundary Conditions Tab Note:

Boundary conditions are used if specified for both steady state and EPS models. Boundary conditions can be used to override initial settings from the design representative scenario. For example, if you want to simulate a pipe break, you can set the status of a pipe to closed. Similarly, valve settings can be applied, tank levels and so on.

Use the boundary conditions tab to set up certain pre-rehabilitation, pre-design boundaries for tanks, pumps, pipes, and valves. Element Type:

From the list of elements, select the kind of element for which you want to set a boundary condition: pump, tank, pipe, or valve.

Selection Set:

The Selection Set drop-down list reflects your selection of an element type. Click the Ellipsis (…) button to choose the particular element you want, or to select multiple or all elements of a particular type. After you select a series of elements, you can set the boundary conditions for the selected elements.

12-490


Using Darwin Designer Load from Model:

After you choose a selection, use Load from Model to load settings and conditions for your elements at a time from start that you specify. For example, if your peak time is 6 pm, you can load the settings for your elements from the model at that time. For more information, see “Load Boundary Conditions Dialog Box” on page 12-491.

Status:

Pipe and pump status have two values: open and closed or on and off. Valves can be closed, active or inactive, except for GPVs which can be closed or active only.

Speed:

Pumps have a relative speed setting that you can define.

Level:

Tanks have a level setting that you can define.

Flow Setting:

Flow-control valves have a flow setting you can define.

Pressure Setting:

PBVs, PSVs, and PRVs have pressure settings that you can define.

Coefficient:

TCVs have a coefficient that you can define.

OK/Cancel/Help:


Load Boundary Conditions Dialog Box Note:

When calculating an EPS model to get boundary conditions, Darwin Designer uses the sizes, demands, etc., that are present in the representative scenario. If the representative scenario includes lots of unsized pipes, then you will need to override the appropriate boundary conditions (such as, a tank in a new part of the model).

Time from Start :


Specify the time in the EPS that should be used to source element boundary conditions from. E.g., for a model where time 7 = 7 a.m., this setting defines boundary conditions for elements to the states that exist at 7am in your model.

12-491

Design Run Since your model may not yet have the design improvements included (the reason you are using Darwin Designer), boundary conditions may need to be adjusted to set up conditions to the correct levels of conservatism for your design. E.g., the assumed level for a new tank might only be 75% full at peak hour. Perform calculation:

12.3.5

Specify whether to calculate the hydraulic model to determine boundary conditions. This option is available so you can save time by not recalculating the model unnecessarily.

Notes Tab Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries and dates. Notes you enter here also display in the Design Events tab, Notes column, of the Darwin Designer main dialog box.

12.4

Design Run Note:

The way that you decide to use an event or a constraint is to make it active by checking a box. You must have at least one active design event and one active design or rehab group to make up a design run.

As part of any design study, you will want to make numerous design runs. A design run is a single, complete solution of the problem consisting of the design events, groups, and other options plus the results of the design run. To create a design run, right-click the design study that the run is to be part of. Then, •

Add a new optimized design run or

•

Add a new manual design run. or

•

Select an existing design and duplicate it.

Each time you want to run an optimization, you can create a new run or edit an existing run.

12-492


Using Darwin Designer Design runs can either be GA optimized or manual runs. A GA optimized design run uses genetic-algorithm optimization to optimize the selected objective (e.g., minimize cost) for your design. A manual design run lets you make a single selection of pipe sizes and/or rehabilitation actions in order to evaluate the specified design against the same criterion as a GA optimized design. The difference between the two kinds of run is that a manual run executes a single solution evaluation only, using the pipe sizes and rehabilitation options that you selected.

Click the design run to see the tabs

12.4.1

Design Events Tab The Design Events tab displays a list of the events you have set up. (For more information, see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-468.) Select the check boxes to set as Active those criteria that you want to be used in the calculation of your design run. Your design run must have at least one active design event in order to be calculated without error. Event Name:

Lists the design event.

Active:

Select the check boxes for those design events that you want to be considered in the current design run. You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a check box.


12-493

Design Run

12.4.2

Local Design Groups Tab Note:

You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a valid design or rehab option group. Local means pertaining to the specific design run and not global.

Design Group:

Tells you the names of the design groups.

Active:

Select the check boxes for those design groups that you want to be considered in the current design run. You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a check box.

Design Option Group:

For each design group, you must select the design option group (set of possible pipe sizes) you want to use. for more information, see “Option Groups Tab” on page 12-474. You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to row and type the first letter of a design group name to select that design group.

Manual Selection:

Lets you force the use of a specific pipe size for the group. This column is only available for manual design and rehabilitation runs, not for optimized ones. For more information, see “Manual Design Runs” on page 12-494.

Manual Design Runs Manual selections are used to force Darwin Designer to use specific designs in calculating costs of a network. For example, you might use an manual design to test some hand calculations you have made or to reproduce an optimized design to which you want to force manual overrides.

12-494

•

For example, you could create a manual design run in which you force the groups of pipes to specific sizes.

•

You might create a rehabilitation design that forces groups to use specific actions.



Set the groups to use specific pipe sizes

The difference between a manual design run and an optimized design run is the Manual Selection column in the Design Groups and Rehab Groups tab for the run. After you select a table to use for a group, you then must set that group to use a specific pipe size or specific rehabilitation action.


12-495

Design Run

Set the groups to use specific rehab actions

12.4.3

Local Rehab Groups Tab Note:

You must have at least one active design or rehab group set to a valid design or rehab option group.

Rehabilitation Group Name:

Tells you the names of the rehabilitation groups.

Active:

Select the check boxes for those rehabilitation groups that you want to be considered in the current design run. You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to row and press the spacebar to select and deselect a check box.

Rehab Option Group:

For each rehabilitation group, you must select the option group you want to use. For more information, see “Option Groups Tab” on page 12-474. You can use the arrow keys to navigate from row to row and type the first letter of a design group name to select that design group.

12-496


Using Darwin Designer Manual Selection:

12.4.4

Lets you force a particular action for the selected group. For more information, see “Manual Design Runs” on page 12-494.

Local Options Tab Note:

Use these settings to fine-tune the way the GA finds results. If adjusting a particular GA control gives you better results, pursue the approach to maximize your design. Local options relate to optimized design runs only and therefore are not available for manual design runs.

The Options tab lets you define the parameters for the genetic algorithm. •

“GA Parameters Advanced Options” on page 10-442

•

“Stopping Criteria” on page 12-497

•

“Top Solutions” on page 12-498

Stopping Criteria Maximum Trials:

Set the maximum number of calibration trials you want the GA to process before stopping.

Non-Improvement Generations: Set the number of maximum number of nonimprovement generations you want the GA to process without calculating an improved fitness. If the GA makes this number of calculations without


12-497

Computing the Design Run finding an improvement that is better than the defined Fitness Tolerance, the GA will stop. NonImprovement Generations works in conjunction with Fitness Tolerance.

Top Solutions Solutions to Keep:

12.4.5

Select the number of solutions you want to keep.

Notes Tab Use the Notes tab to type comments about your project and read things like log entries and dates.

12.5

Computing the Design Run After you set up your design run (see “Design Run” on page 12-492), click the GO button to compute the results of your design.

12.6

Results Pane After you have computed your design run (see “Computing the Design Run” on page 12-498), the results area becomes available for you. Use the results area to review and use your results.

12-498


Using Darwin Designer Note:

In all results panes, you can sort columns by right-clicking and selecting Sort or by clicking on the column headers. This is especially useful for quickly indentifying which junctions and/or pipes have violations. Also, sorting is preserved in reports, so if you sort something it will be sorted the same way in the report view.

Show/Hide Results:

Click Show Results or Hide Results to display or hide the results area.

Solution:

Use the drop-down list to select the solution you want to see or report on.

Export to Scenario:

Click Export to Scenario to export your results as an alternative to your WaterCAD or WaterGEMS scenario. Export creates a new scenario and lets you export the following data to alternatives: •

Physical Alternative data: diameter, roughness, and material.

•

Active Topology Alternative: If the pipe diameter is 0, the pipe is made inactive in the active topology alternative.

•

Capital Cost Alternative: capital costs and unit length costs for pipes.

In WaterCAD or WaterGEMS, to see the changes brought about by your export, choose the scenario from the Scenarios drop-down list or review cost information. For more information, see “Scenario Selection” on page 8-365 and “Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451.) Copy to Clipboard:

Click Copy to Clipboard to copy the results from the currently-displayed (active) tab to the Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, you can paste (Ctrl+V) this data into other software, such as Microsoft Excel, for example.

Report:

Click Report to present your data in Report Viewer. For more information, see “Report Viewer” on page 12-502.

Plot:

This displays a graph of your results. For more information, see “Graph Dialog Box” on page 12-503.

Resize to Fit:

Click Resize to Fit to fit all result columns in the report-area display.


12-499

Results Pane Tabs:

12.6.1

•

“Design Groups Tab” on page 12-500

•

“Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-500

•

“Pressure Constraints Tab” on page 12-501

•

“Flow Constraints Tab” on page 12-501

Fitness:

Fitness is the overall score given a solution by Darwin Designer. For Minimize Cost solutions, a lower fitness is best. Otherwise, higher fitness indicates the best solution. For more information, see “Competent Genetic Algorithms” on page B-762.

Total Benefit:

This only has a value for Maximize Benefit and Multi-Objective Trade-off calculations. This is a score of the calculated benefits, with a higher value indicating more benefit in terms of improved network pressure.

Total Cost:

Total Cost displays the sum of rehabilitation and design costs.

Design Groups Tab The Design Groups tab in the results area displays:

12.6.2

•

Design group name (see “Design Groups Tab” on page 12-471)

•

Pipe label

•

Pipe material

•

Pipe roughness

•

Pipe inside diameter

•

Cost of each pipe

Rehab Groups Tab The Rehab Groups tab in the results area displays:

12-500

•

Rehabilitation group name (see “Rehab Groups Tab” on page 12-473)

•

Pipe label

•

Rehabilitation action taken

•

Cost of rehabilitation for each pipe



12.6.3

Pressure Constraints Tab The Pressure Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction pressures:

12.6.4

•

Design event set name (see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484)

•

Junction label

•

Simulated pressure at the junction

•

Required minimum pressure at the junction

•

Required maximum pressure at the junction

•

Any calculated pressures that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the maximum)

Flow Constraints Tab The Flow Constraints tab in the results area displays information about junction pressures:

12.7

•

Design event name (see “Design Event Editor” on page 12-484)

•

Junction label

•

Simulated velocity at the junction

•

Required minimum velocity at the pipe

•

Required maximum velocity at the pipe

•

Any calculated velocities that fall below the minimum or above the maximum (as a negative number if below the minimum, as a positive one if above the maximum)

Element Selector The Element Selector dialog box lets you choose the elements for which you want to optimize rehabilitation or design.


12-501

Report Viewer

Note:

To use selection sets in Darwin Designer, you must first set them up in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD. For more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263. If you are creating new pipes in WaterGEMS or WaterCAD specifically for use in Darwin Designer, you should use a naming convention that stands out and lets you more easily select them.

12.8

Selection Set:

If you have a selection set defined that you want to use, select it from the drop-down list.

Elements:

Click, shift+click, and/or ctrl+click elements you want to include in your design group. Whatever elements are highlighted when you press OK will become part of the group.

Report Viewer Report Viewer lets you view, print, and search reports you create about your optimization.

12-502

Print:

Lets you print your report to an installed printer.

Find:

Lets you search for text in your report. Report Viewer highlights the text as it finds it.

Single/Multiple Page:

Lets you display one of your report pages or several pages at once.

Zoom:

Lets you magnify or reduce the display of your report for better viewing.



12.9

Previous/Next Page:

Lets you page through your report. You can also use the Page Up/Down keys on your keyboard.

Forward/Backward:

Lets you navigate between pages you have just viewed.

Graph Dialog Box You can create two graphs from your Darwin Designer calculations: •

Pareto Optimal Plot—Shows Benefit versus Cost for your calculations, provided you have used Maximum Benefit or Multi-Objective Trade-off Design Parameters (see “Design Type Tab” on page 12-483 and “About Pareto Optimal Plots” on page 12-504).

•

Pipe Size Usage Plot—Shows the total length of pipe of a certain diameter used by the solution.

To create a graph of your solution, with the Design Run highlighted, and after calculating the network, in the results area, click the Plot button and choose the kind of plot you want. The graph dialog box has three buttons: •

Edit—Lets you edit your graphing parameters, axes, etc.

•

Copy to Clipboard—Copies the current graph as a raster (bitmap) image to the clipboard.

•

Print Preview—Shows you how the graph will print to your default printer.


12-503

Graph Dialog Box

12.9.1

About Pareto Optimal Plots When there is more than one objective in a design, it is seldom possible to say that one solution is clearly the best because it may be better than another with regard to one objective measure but worse on another. (Although, there are many solutions that are clearly inferior. That is there are other solutions that are better than an inferior with regard to all objectives.) However, there will be a small set of solutions for which no solution can give a better value of one objective without having a worse value for another objective. This set of solutions is referred to as non-inferior or Pareto optimal (after Pareto, an Italian economist). For example, one solution may cost $5 million and have a pressure benefit of 2 (high is good), while another may cost $6 million and have a pressure benefit of 2.2. Neither is clearly superior but neither is clearly inferior; they are both non-inferior to one another. When working with multiple objectives, there is not likely to be a single solution that is superior for all objectives. Therefore, when multiple objectives are involved, you must chose between a number of non-inferior solutions. Darwin eliminates the thousands of inferior solutions and provides two ways to compare non-inferior solutions: 1. Solution comparison table 2. Pareto optimal plot.

12-504



12.9.2

Export Design to Scenario Dialog Box Note:

If you export a Designer solution to the scenario manager, the extra demand adjustments (see “Demand Adjustments Tab” on page 12-485) and boundary (initial) conditions (see “Boundary Conditions Tab” on page 12-490) aren’t exported (only physical properties, active topology, and capital cost alternatives can be exported). Given this, to recreate simulation runs that are equivalent to each Design Event (see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-493), it is necessary for you to build a corresponding demand and initial alternative that reflects the additional demand adjustments (if any) and any boundary conditions (if any).

Use Export to Scenario to pass your results and optimized network back for use in WaterCAD. (For more information, see “Scenario Selection” on page 8-365 and “Active Cost Scenarios” on page 11-451.) 1. Click Export to Scenario. 2. The Export Design to Scenario dialog box opens. Select the check boxes for those items you want to export. 3. By default, WaterCAD uses the name of the design run as the name for the scenario and alternatives you export. If you want, you can manually type a different name for these. 4. If you want to rename the scenarios and alternatives using the same name but to something other than the design run name, select the Use Scenario Name for Alternatives check box and type in the Export to Scenario Name field; the text boxes for the alternatives will match what you type. 5. Click OK to export the scenarios and any alternatives you chose. Click OK when prompted to accept a confirmation message about the export. 6. To see what you have exported: a. Close Darwin Designer. b. Use the Scenario drop-down list to select the scenario you exported.

c. Use the Scenario Manager button to review the alternatives you exported.


12-505

Schema Augmentation

12.10

Schema Augmentation The Schema Augmentation dialog box opens if the WaterCAD file does not contain the Darwin Designer schema.

A schema is the series of tables and table cells that contain your data. A schema change typically means a table or table cells have been added, usually by an update to the software. When you use Schema Augmentation, WaterCAD adds any missing tables to the schema of the file you are using. Updating a schema should not damage your data but we do recommend you create a backup. Select the Create backup: *.bak check box to create a backup of your existing database. It will be saved in its current directory but will have .BAK appended to the filename. To restore the backup, delete or move your current .MDB file and then rename your backup file by deleting the .BAK extension, so the extension becomes only .MDB.

Existing database

Backup file

12-506



12.11

Set Field Options Right-click any units in any dialog box and select the properties to use the Set Field Options dialog box. This lets you set the units, precision, and format for the data:

12.12

Scientific:

Scientific numbers use the form, 1.111 E+111.

Fixed Point:

Fixed point numbers use the form 111.111.

General:

General format uses the most compact of either fixed-point or scientific notation

Number:

Numbers use the form 1,111,111.111, where number separators are used.

Verification Summary If you try to calculate a network using invalid Darwin Designer settings, the Designer Data Verification Summary displays. This dialog box means that there are some invalid settings in your run that prevent Darwin Designer from calculating your solution. Here are some things to consider: •

Do your groups reference elements that are inactive in your Representative Scenario? Check the scenario you are using. For more information, see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-468. Make sure your scenario uses only active pipes.

•

Does your design run have an Active Design Event? It should. For more information, see “Design Events Tab” on page 12-493.

•

Do you have active design groups that are assigned to valid design option tables? You need at least one active design group that corresponds to a design option table. For more information, see “Local Design Groups Tab” on page 12-494.

•

Is it possible that elements have been deleted from the model from another client application? If so, close down Darwin Designer and re-open it. Darwin Designer will then update itself based on the latest GEMS model, deleting any references to deleted elements.


12-507

Verification Summary

12-508


Chapter

13

Presenting your Results

This section covers the various methods that are provided for viewing, annotating, graphing, and reporting your data. It also presents the tools available for generating contours, generating profiles, and color coding elements based on any attribute.

13.1

Element Annotation Element annotations allow you to display detailed information such as pipe lengths or node ground elevations, as well as calculated values such as velocity, in your drawing. You can add one or more annotations for any type of element in the system. Annotations update automatically. For example, annotations will display newly calculated values and will be refreshed as you change scenarios. Note:

The annotations and their format are defined by using the Annotation Wizard (for more information, see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510). In Stand-Alone mode, the annotation format can also be easily modified in the Attribute Annotation dialog box, (see “Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation” on page 13-511) which opens when you double-click the handle of the annotation text in the drawing, or if you right-click the annotation and select Edit from the shortcut menu. Pipe annotations can be aligned with the pipes or displayed horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text alignment setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog box.

You can flip the text from one side of the pipe to the other (reading in the opposite direction) to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical. By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees measured counter-clockwise from the vertical. You can modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the HAESTAD.INI file, located in the Haestad directory. The angle is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical. For instance, if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should add the following line to the HAESTAD.INI file:


13-509

Element Annotation TextFlipAngle=0.0 Reasonable values fall in the range from 15.0 degrees to -15.0 degrees. The TextFlipAngle is only applicable to annotations on the plan view. Element annotation includes:

13.1.1

•

“Attribute Annotation Dialog Box” on page 13-510

•

“The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510

Attribute Annotation Dialog Box To access the Attribute Annotation dialog box, right-click the annotation and select Annotation. Alternatively, in the main view in Stand-Alone mode, double-click the handle of the annotation text to display the corresponding Attribute Annotation dialog box. Here you can easily modify the format of that attribute annotation without going through the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510) again. The replaceable parameters %v and %u represent the attribute’s value and unit respectively.

13.1.2

The Annotation Wizard You can use the Annotation Wizard to add annotations to the drawing, as well as to remove or modify existing annotations in the drawing. You can annotate all elements or any subset of elements. The wizard is divided into three steps:

13-510

•

Select Elements—Select the types of elements to annotate. For more information, see “Annotation Wizard—Select Elements” on page 13-511.

•

Specify Annotations—Specify the set of elements to annotate, the attributes you would like to annotate, and the format of your notations. For more information, see “Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation” on page 13-511.

•

Summary—Summary of the selected annotation settings. For more information, see “Annotation Wizard—Summary” on page 13-512.



Annotation Wizard—Select Elements Tip:

If you decide to turn off the annotations for a particular element type, your annotation settings will be retained, allowing you to easily toggle annotation back on.

This step allows you to specify the types of elements you wish to annotate by checking the appropriate boxes. You may annotate more than one type of element at a time by checking all the desired element types. If you have already annotated your drawing, you can remove annotations for a particular type of element by clearing the corresponding check box.

Annotation Wizard—Specify Annotation The next steps allows you to specify the subset of elements and the attributes you wish to annotate for each element type. For each element type, you will be presented with a table where you can specify the attributes you wish to annotate, and the mask for each attribute. •

Specify the Set of Elements—Choose All Elements from the choice list for annotation to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets.

•

Attributes—Select from a list of all available attributes for the current element type including calculated values. Click this field, and choose the attributes you wish to annotate by selecting from the list that appears. Clicking the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).

•

Mask—Customize the way the annotation is displayed. The replaceable parameters %v and %u represent the attribute’s value and unit respectively. By default, the mask is set up as follows: : %v %u. Tip:

•

When annotating, for example, pipe diameters, the default mask is Diameter: %v %u. The default annotation for a 150 millimeter pipe would be Diameter: 150 mm. By changing the mask to %v %u, the resulting annotation would be 150 mm.

Initial Placement (Available for profile annotations only)—Specify how the annotation will be offset relative to the label of the element it is referring to. If the is selected, then the annotation will be placed under the label. To specify a custom offset select Offset… and click the Ellipsis (...) button to bring up the Offset dialog box. In this dialog box you can specify the x and y offsets. Click OK when completed.


13-511

Element Annotation Initial Placement Dialog Box Use the Initial Placement dialog box to set how the annotation will be offset relative to the label of the element it is referring to. Set the x and y offsets and click OK when you are done. This feature lets you customize your drawing annotations to more closely match accepted specifications.

Annotation Wizard—Summary Tip:

You can turn annotation visibility on or off by editing the Drawing Options. Your annotation settings will be retained. If the Drawing Options are set so that element annotations will not be displayed, clicking the Finished button in the Annotation Wizard will automatically turn annotations on. In Stand-Alone mode, you can double-click an annotation element in the drawing to edit the associated mask. The Annotation Text Height can be adjusted from the Drawing tab of the Options dialog box, accessed by selecting Tools > Options.

The last step of annotating your drawing is reviewing the choices you have made. If you would like to make changes at this time, click the Back button to return to previous windows in the wizard. When you are satisfied, click the Finished button to apply the annotations to the drawing.

13-512



13.2

Color Coding Color Coding allows you to assign colors to elements in the drawing based on a variety of input and output attributes. For any attribute, you can supply a color scheme or have the application generate one for you. For example, you can supply a color scheme to display all pipes sizes between 2 in. and 8 in. in green, those between 10 in. and 24 in. in blue, and those between 27 in. and 48 in. in red.

13.2.1

Color Coding Dialog Box At the top of the Color Coding dialog box are two tabs, Link and Node. You can set up color coding for both links and nodes, or just one of the two. The following fields are available: Note:

Color coding legends can be added to any location in the drawing by clicking the Legend button on the Tool Palette. Color coding will automatically update as input or results change. For example, after performing a calculation, colors will update to reflect the newly calculated values. If the results for the selected attribute are not available, or if all values for that attribute are the same, automatic range initialization will not be performed. You can enter your own custom range in this case. A schematic can have any number of color assignments.

•

Attribute—Select the attribute by which you would like to color code, or select to turn color coding off. By clicking the sideways triangle button, you can access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).

•

Selection Set—Choose All Elements from the list to apply color coding to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set to apply color coding to a subset. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets.

•

Calculate Range—Automatically determine the minimum and maximum for the specified attribute and selection set.

•

Minimum/Maximum—Displays the calculated minimum and maximum values for the specified attribute in the selection set.


13-513

Reports •

Initialize—Automatically calculate a default color coding range for the specified attribute, based on the values in your project.

•

Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values. Tip:

The Quick View window can be used to display a summary of the active link or node color coding parameters.

Use the Initialize and/or the Insert buttons to define your color coding map. Then click OK to apply the specified colors to the appropriate elements.

13.3

Reports Reports includes:

13-514

•

“Predefined Reports” on page 13-515

•

“Element Details Report” on page 13-515

•

“Element Results Report” on page 13-516

•

“Tabular Reports” on page 13-517

•

“Scenario Summary Report” on page 13-517

•

“Project Inventory Report” on page 13-517

•

“Calculation Results Table” on page 13-517

•

“Plan View Report” on page 13-518

•

“Calculation/Problem Summary Report” on page 13-518

•

“Contour Plan View” on page 13-519

•

“Totalizing Flow Meters” on page 13-519

•

“Tabular Report Window” on page 13-519

•

“System Head Curve Dialog Box” on page 13-520



13.3.1

Predefined Reports This application provides several predefined reports that can be used in your projects. This feature makes report generation a simple point-and-click exercise. Select the elements for which you want a report and send them to your printer. Note:

Detailed reports can be copied to the Windows clipboard in RTF format for use in your favorite word processing program.

The following types of Predefined Reports are available:

13.3.2

•

“Element Details Report” on page 13-515

•

“Element Results Report” on page 13-516

•

“Tabular Reports” on page 13-517

•

“Scenario Summary Report” on page 13-517

•

“Project Inventory Report” on page 13-517

•

“Plan View Report” on page 13-518

Element Details Report The Detailed Reports dialog box allows you to print detailed reports for all elements or any subset of elements in the system. In Stand-Alone mode, from the Detailed Reports dialog box, select multiple elements to be printed by Shift+clicking or Control+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). This provides more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Print button to output the selected reports.


13-515

Reports Note:

You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Detailed Reports dialog box. This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting elements, or by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when you open the dialog box. You can print a detailed report for a single element without using the Detailed Reports dialog box. Open the element editor for the desired element and click the Report button.

In AutoCAD mode, to activate the Detailed Reports dialog box, select Report > Element Details. The cursor will change to a pick box, signaling you to choose the elements for which you would like to view reports. Select elements as you normally would in AutoCAD. Press the Enter key, and the dialog box will appear. While all of the elements in the project are listed, the ones you have selected are highlighted. You can use the Select button to further edit this list. Click the Print button to output the selected reports when you are satisfied.

13.3.3

Element Results Report Note:

You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Element Results dialog box. This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting multiple elements, or by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when you open the dialog box. When working with large systems, the preview option can require a great deal of system resources. You can reduce resource requirements by selecting a small subset of elements with which to work. The print option has lower system resource requirements than the preview option.

The Element Results dialog box allows you to print or preview a single report containing the results for any number of elements in the system. From the Element Results dialog box, you can select elements to be printed by Shift+clicking or Ctrl+clicking. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior. Alternatively, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog box (for more information, see “Selection Sets” on page 5-263). This provides more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Preview button to view the selected reports, or click the Print button to print the selected reports.

13-516



13.3.4

Tabular Reports Note:

The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain situations to have them properly display the desired data. For instance, if you set up a project and choose the Manning’s friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a HazenWilliams C column, which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by Editing the table. All tabular data in this program can be copied to the Windows Clipboard by right-clicking the desired table and selecting Copy from the shortcut menu. You can then paste this data into your favorite spreadsheet or word processor to generate custom reports and graphs.

Using the powerful FlexTables feature (see “FlexTables” on page 7-329), you can very quickly generate a tabular report containing any attribute and any network element.

13.3.5

Scenario Summary Report The Scenario Summary provides a detailed report of the active scenario (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364), including alternatives (see “Alternatives” on page 8345), and a brief summary of the calculation options.

13.3.6

Project Inventory Report The Project Inventory report provides a detailed report that includes a summary of the active scenario (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364), a network inventory, and a detailed pipe inventory (grouped by pipe section).

13.3.7

Calculation Results Table The calculation results for each element in a network can be viewed in a table format. This table is predefined and you cannot change it. It displays the set of the most commonly desired output attributes for the type of element for each reporting time step in the hydraulic analysis. The contents of the table can be copied to the Windows clipboard to transfer the data to another application such as a spreadsheet or word processing document.


13-517

Reports Tip:

You can change the reporting time step increment on the Analysis Toolbar (for more information, see “Analysis Toolbar” on page 2-81).

To copy the data to the Windows clipboard, right-click the table and select Copy from the context menu.

13.3.8

Plan View Report Generate reports for the plan view of the network, for either the current drawing display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).

13.3.9

Calculation/Problem Summary Report After running hydraulic calculations, the Results tab of the Scenario Editor is displayed. This tab contains a summary of the calculation results. To view any problems or warnings encountered during the simulation, click the Element Messages button. Tip:

Tip:Holding the mouse cursor over a message in the Element Calculation Message Browser report will open up a shortcut message box that displays further information on the message.

The report consists of a series of folders that represent different stages of the calculation process. Double-click a folder or click the + sign to view information related to the folder’s caption. The color of the folder will indicate if any problems occurred during that portion of the analysis. The colors indicate the following: •

Green Light—Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error messages being generated.

•

Yellow Light—Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are displayed in the results summary in this tab.

•

Red Light—Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.

This report can be previewed before being printed or copied to the clipboard by clicking the Printer button on the Results tab. It can also be exported to a text file by clicking the Save button on the Results tab. Only the exposed text will be exported, copied or printed.

13-518



13.3.10

Contour Plan View A preview of the Contour Plan View Report, showing all contours as displayed in the Contour Plot window, can be obtained by clicking the Print Preview button in the Contour Plot window (for more information, see “Contour Plot” on page 13-549).

13.3.11

Totalizing Flow Meters The Totalizing Flow Meter allows you to track the total and net flows passing through any element. The dialog box is divided into two sections: •

•

13.3.12

Times—The Times section allows you to specify the time period for which the meter will calculate flows. This section consists of two menus: –

Start—The time when the meter begins calculating flow passing through the corresponding element.

–

Stop—The time when the meter stops calculating flow passing through the corresponding element.

Volumes—The Volumes section displays the results of the meter calculations in the following four result fields: –

Net Volume—The value reported in this field is the Negative Volume subtracted from the Positive Volume.

–

Positive Volume—The amount of flow passing through the meter from the element upstream (From Node) to the element downstream (To Node).

–

Negative Volume—The amount of flow passing through the meter from the element downstream (To Node) to the element upstream (From Node).

–

Total Volume—The total amount of flow passing through the meter in either direction.

Tabular Report Window This window is used to display data in a tabular format. At the top of the window are five buttons that provide the following functionality: •

File—Export the data in the report to either a comma or tab delimited text file.

•

Copy—Copy the data in the report to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into another program such as a spreadsheet or word processor.

•

Print Preview—Open a print preview of the report, from which the report can be sent directly to the printer.


13-519

Graphs

13.3.13

•

Close—Close the report.

•

Help—Access the online help for this report.

System Head Curve Dialog Box The System Head Curve dialog box contains the following three input fields:

13.4

•

Pump—The Pump field allows you to specify which pump the system head curve will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this pump. The menu, which lists all of the pumps in the network, the Ellipsis (...) button which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box (see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260), and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

•

Maximum Flow—This field is automatically supplied with the Maximum Operating Discharge value for the selected pump.

•

# of Intervals—This field determines the number of Head/Discharge points that will be used to create the system head curve. The higher the number of intervals used, the smoother the curve will be.

•

Validate—If this box is checked when you click the OK button, the pump curve input data will be checked to ensure that it is valid. If a problem is found, a dialog box will appear that provides details about the cause of the error. If the box is unchecked when the OK button is clicked, the input data is not checked, and if errors are present the operation will fail. You will then be prompted to check the input data carefully using the Validate option.

Graphs Graphs includes:

13-520

•

“Pump Curve” on page 13-521

•

“Tank Storage Curve” on page 13-521

•

“Junction Demand Graph” on page 13-521

•

“Pattern Graph and Report” on page 13-521

•

“Plotting a Variable versus Time” on page 13-521



13.4.1

Pump Curve To generate a pump curve, open the Pump Editor for the pump of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Pump Curve menu item.

13.4.2

Tank Storage Curve To generate a plot of the tank storage volume versus the elevation, open the Tank Editor for the tank of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Tank Curve menu item.

13.4.3

Junction Demand Graph To generate a graph of the total demand at a junction over time, open the Junction Editor for the junction of interest, select the Demand tab and click the Graph button.

13.4.4

Pattern Graph and Report You can generate a graph or a full report of a pattern that represents the multiplier variable of the pattern over time. To do so, open the appropriate Pattern Manager dialog box and access the pattern for which you would like to generate output. From the Pattern Editor dialog box (see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395), click the Report button, and select Graph or Detailed Report.

13.4.5

Plotting a Variable versus Time Plotting a variable versus time includes: •

“Graph Setup” on page 13-522

•

“Available Scenarios” on page 13-522

•

“Graph Window” on page 13-522


13-521

Graphs

Graph Setup Note:

The Graph Setup option is only available for Extended Period Analysis (for more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378). When the Plot Window is open, click the Options button to graph other dependent variables or to change the graph options. Clicking Options > Graph Setup opens the Graph Setup dialog box. Clicking Options > Graph Options opens the Graph Options dialog box (for more information, see “Graph Options” on page 13560).

The Graph Setup dialog box allows you to graph calculated results for any element in the system. The dialog box is divided into three tabs: •

Graph Setup—This tab contains the dependent menu. This menu lists the attributes that can be graphed for the current element type. The attribute range is automatically initialized by the program depending on the calculated values for the elements that are being graphed.

•

Elements—This dialog box consists of a pane that lists the elements available for graphing and a Select button. Click the check boxes next to each of the elements that you want to graph. The Select button opens the Selection Set dialog box, which allows you to choose the elements that will be displayed in the graph.

•

Scenarios—Select and compare various scenario computations (for more information, see “Available Scenarios” on page 13-522).

Available Scenarios Note:

The only scenarios that will be available to graph are scenarios for which an Extended Period Simulation have been calculated.

This feature allows you to select which scenarios you wish to view and compare on the current graph. Place a check mark by the scenarios you wish to display.

Graph Window The Graph window is divided into two tabs: Graph and Data. The Graph tab displays a plot of the selected dependent variable vs. time. The Data tab will display the data under the Graph tab in a tabular format. The following functions will either be formed on the plot or the tabular data, depending on which tab is selected. •

13-522

Copy—Copies the graph/data onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.



13.5

•

Print—Outputs the contents of the Graph/Data tab to the printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Options/Graph Options—Allows you to customize the plot by changing the graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc. This is only available when the Graph tab is selected. For more information, see “Graph Options” on page 13-560.

•

Options/Graph Setup—Allows you to rebuild the graph with different data and parameters. For more information, see “Graph Setup” on page 13-522.

•

Close—Close the Graph window. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Help—Provides access to help for the Graph window. For more information, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher GeoGrapher includes:

13.5.1

•

“GeoGrapher Graph Manager” on page 13-523

•

“GeoGrapher Manager” on page 13-524

GeoGrapher Graph Manager GeoGrapher allows you to create, edit, and store custom graphs. The available graph types in the first step of the Graph Creator Wizard are as follows: When the Over Time Graph button is selected, there are four graph types to choose from: •

Elements Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line graph format.

•

Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps in a line graph format.

•

Scenarios Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a line graph format.

•

Single Element (Over time)—This graph type displays a single attribute for any element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format.

When the Single Time Step button is selected, there are 3 graph types to choose from:


13-523

Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher

13.5.2

•

Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a bar graph format.

•

Element Analysis (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a scatter graph format.

•

Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple time-steps in a bar graph format.

GeoGrapher Manager The GeoGrapher Manager dialog box provides the following commands:

13.5.3

•

New—Creates a new graph of the highlighted type.

•

Open—Opens the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.

•

Rename—Renames the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.

•

Duplicate—Makes a copy of the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.

•

Delete—Deletes the previously created graph that is currently highlighted.

GeoGrapher Wizard The GeoGrapher Wizard assists you in the creation of graphs by stepping you through the most commonly used setup options. Depending on the type of graph that is being created, the specific steps of the wizard will vary. •

13-524

Attribute Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a bar graph format. –

Step 1—Select the Desired Graph Type: This step allows you to change the type of graph being created from the default settings associated with the graph type that was chosen in the Graph Manager. Click Next to retain the default settings.

–

Step 2—Select Elements to Graph: This step allows you to specify the element(s) that will be displayed in the graph. The [>] and [<] buttons add and remove (respectively) the highlighted element from the corresponding pane. The [>>] and [<<] buttons add and remove (respectively) all elements from the corresponding pane.


Presenting your Results Note:

•

Multiple element types may be included in the same graph. However, only attributes that all of the elements have in common will be available in the next step.

–

Step 3—Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the primary and secondary attributes that will displayed for the selected element(s).

–

Step 4—Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to be used in the graph, with the following choices: -

Apply Selected Graph Type’s User Default format—Choosing this option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the user default setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1. A user default can be saved by clicking the Save as User’s Default format button in the GeoGrapher Display Window (“GeoGrapher Display Window” on page 13-529).

-

Apply Selected Graph Type’s Factory Default format—Choosing this option instructs GeoGrapher to create the graph using the factory default setting for the graph type that was chosen in Step 1.

Element Analysis (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements during a single time step in a scatter graph format. –


–


Note:


–

Step 3—Select Attributes to Graph: This step allows you to specify the x-axis and y-axis attributes that will displayed for the selected element(s).

–

Step 4—Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to be used in the graph, with the following choices:


13-525


•

-


-


Elements Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a primary and secondary attribute for any number of elements over multiple time-steps in a line graph format. –


–


Note:

13-526


–

Step 3—Select Attribute to Graph: This step allows you to specify the attribute that will displayed for the selected element(s).

–



-



Presenting your Results •

Element-Scenario Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any number of element-scenario pairs over multiple time-steps in a line graph format. –


–


Note:

•


–

Step 3—Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).

–



-


Scenarios Comparison (Over time)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any element during multiple scenarios over multiple time-steps in a line graph format. –


–

Step 2—Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element.


13-527


•

–

Step 3—Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the element that will be displayed in the graph.

–



-


Scenarios Comparison (Single time-step)—This graph type compares a single attribute for any number of elements during multiple scenarios across multiple time-steps in a bar graph format. –


–

Step 2—Select Scenarios to Graph: This step allows you to specify the scenario(s) that will displayed for the selected element(s).

–


Note:

–

13-528


Step 4—Completing the Add Graph Wizard: This step allows you to enter a name for the graph. This is the label that will be displayed in the graph manager dialog box. The dialog box also prompts you to choose the format to be used in the graph, with the following choices:



•

13.5.4

-


-


Single Element (Over time)—This graph type displays a single attribute for any element across multiple time-steps in a line graph format. –


–

Step 2—Select an Element to Graph: This step allows you to select the element that will be displayed in the graph.

–



-


GeoGrapher Display Window The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as desired. The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:


13-529

Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps are displayed during animation. By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following Animation Options: Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions: •

Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between animated frames.

•

Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, every window capable of being animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not selected, then only the current window will animate.

If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears, offering the following options: •

Copy Image—This command copies the currently displayed graph to the clipboard, to be pasted into a compatible graphics application.

•

Copy Format—This command stores the settings used by the current graph to be re-used in another graph. To re-use a copied format, right-click and choose Paste Format.

•

Paste Format—This command applies to the current graph settings that were previously copied from another graph. To copy settings from another graph, rightclick and choose Copy Format.

•

Graph Setup—This command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box (see “GeoGrapher Graph Setup” on page 13-532).

•

Graph Options—This command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see “GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533

Depending on the type of graph, the following drop-down menus may be available: •

Scenarios—Allows you to select the current scenario for the graph.

•

Attribute—Allows you to select the attribute being graphed.

•

Elements—Allows you to select which element is being graphed.

The main graph display pane has the following tabs: •

13-530

Graph—This tab displays the current graph.



Data—This tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based.

•

Notes—This tab shows any user-defined notes associated with the graph. Note:

The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually changed through GeoGrapher. Instead, GeoGrapher will automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given attribute in WaterGEMS Modeler. To change the unit that is used, first change it in WaterGEMS Modeler (see“FlexUnits” on page 4-252), then open GeoGrapher and create your graph.

The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:

Save—Saves the current graph. Save as User’s Default format—Saves the graph settings as the user default template for use in other graphs. To use the user default template, select the Apply Selected Graph Type’s User Default format option in the Completing the Add Graph Wizard step when creating a new graph. Export—Exports the current graph image or data.

Print—Prints the current graph.

Print Preview—Displays a preview of the graph as it will be printed. Activate/Deactivate Zoom—This toggle button enables you to magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around it. Zoom Extents—Displays graph at the default (fully zoomed out) magnification and view. Graph Setup—Opens a dialog box that allows you to change graph settings.

Graph Options—Opens the Graph Options dialog box.


13-531


13.5.5

GeoGrapher Print Preview The GeoGrapher Print Preview window allows you to modify the print settings and preview the graph before it is printed. The following controls are available in this dialog box:

13.5.6

•

Printer (drop-down menu)—This menu allows you to select the printer to which the settings and commands issued in this dialog box will be applied.

•

Setup (button)—Opens the printer’s settings and print options dialog box.

•

Print (button)—Prints the current view that is displayed in the Preview pane using the printer selected in the Printer menu.

•

Portrait (button)—Orients the page to a long-vertical alignment.

•

Landscape (button)—Orients the page to a long-horizontal alignment.

•

Margins (up/down increment controls)—These four increment controls change the margin spacing along the edges of the page.

•

Reset Margins (button)—Resets the margins to the default settings.

•

View Margins (check box)—Makes the margin lines visible in the Preview pane.

•

Detail (slider bar)—This slider increases the detail of the preview in the Preview pane as it is moved to the left, and decreases the amount of detail as the indicator is moved to the right.

•

Preview Pane—This pane displays the current page view as it will be printed. Changes made using the other controls in this dialog box are immediately updated in this pane.

GeoGrapher Graph Setup The GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box allows you to change various graph settings. The specific settings that are available for modification in this dialog box vary depending on the graph type. The possible variables that can be changed here include:

13-532

•

Elements

•

X-Axis Variable

•

Y-Axis Variable

•

Element Attribute

•

Scenario



13.5.7

GeoGrapher Options The GeoGrapher Options dialog box is divided into two main tabs: •

“Chart Tab” on page 13-533

•

“Series Tab” on page 13-544

Chart Tab The Chart tab allows you to define overall Chart display parameters. This tab is further subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs: •

Series—This tab contains a pane that displays the series that are associated with the current graph. The check box next to each list item determines whether or not the corresponding series is visible in the graph display. The Up and Down arrow buttons move the highlighted series up or down one line in the list. The five additional buttons on this tab are as follows: –

Add—Adds a new series to the current graph.

–

Delete—Removes the currently highlighted series.

Note:

–

Title—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted series.

Note:

•

Only user-defined series can be deleted from the graph display. The default factory-defined series cannot be deleted.

Series titles are automatically generated by GeoGrapher when you create a graph. Changing the value of the title will cause the title to be user-defined. To have GeoGrapher once again automatically assign a title for you, enter %auto as the value for the title.

–

Clone—Creates a duplicate of the currently highlighted series.

–

Change—Allows you to edit the currently highlighted series.

Axis—The Axis sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs. Regardless of the tab that is active, the Axis sub-tab contains a pane on the left of the dialog box that allows you to select the axis that any modifications will be applied to. The Visible check box enables/disables visibility for all axes at once. The Behind check box controls if axes will be displayed in front of or behind the series display. The third-level sub-tabs for the Axis tab are as follows: –

Scales—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -


Automatic (Check Box)—This check box determines whether the Maximum and Minimum axis values may be manually set.

13-533


•

-

Visible (Check Box)—Determines the visibility of the scales within the chart display.

-

Inverted (Check Box)—When Inverted is True, Axis Minimum and Maximum scales will be swapped. Axis labels and series points will be displayed accordingly.

-

Auto, Maximum (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the maximum axis value is automatically determined and the maximum Change button is disabled.

-

Auto, Minimum (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the minimum axis value is automatically determined and the minimum Change button is disabled.

-

Logarithmic (Check Box)—Determines if the current axis uses logarithmic scale.

-

Change, Minimum (Button)—Allows input of a user-defined axis value. This button is only enabled when the maximum Auto check box is not checked.

-

Change, Maximum (Button)—Allows input of a user-defined axis value. This button is only enabled when the minimum Auto check box is not checked.

-

Change, Increment (Button)—This button allows you to edit the Axis Increment. The Axis Increment is the minimum step between axis labels. It must be a positive number or DateTime value. GeoGrapher will use this value as the starting axis labels step.

-

Log Base (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the logarithmic base value when the Logarithmic check box is checked.

Title—The Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs. Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. These subtabs are then further subdivided into fourth-level sub-tabs, as described below: –

–

Style—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Title (Text Box)—Allows entry of an alphanumeric title.

-

Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Allows the display angle of the title to be specified.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the font size of the Title text.

-

Visible (Check Box)—Enables/Disables visibility of the title.

Text—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

13-534

Font (Button)—Specifies the font to be used in the title.



•

-

Outline (Button)—Enables/Disables the display of an outline containing the title text.

-

Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines the size of the space between characters.

-

Color (Button)—Determines the color of the title shadow.

-

Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the horizontal size of the title shadow.

-

Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical size of the title shadow.

Labels—The Labels sub-tab is further subdivided into the following fourth-level sub-tabs: –

–


Visible (Check Box)—Determines label visibility in the chart display.

-

Multi-Line (Check Box)—When checked, spaces in point Labels or in Axis DateTimeFormat/ValueFormat are used to break the label into more than one line of text.

-

Round First (Check Box)—This property controls if Axis labels will be automatically rounded to the nearest magnitude.

-

Label On Axis (Check Box)—This property controls whether or not Labels just at Axis Minimum and Maximum positions will be shown.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the size of the displayed labels.

-

Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the display angle of the corresponding labels.

-

Min. Separation % (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property specifies the percent amount of minimum distance between Axis Labels.

-

Auto (Button)—Chooses the label style automatically.

-

Value (Button)—Axis labeling is based on axis Minimum and Maximum properties.

-

Text (Button)—Label using series label strings.

-

None (Button)—No label.

-

Mark (Button)—Label using SeriesMarks style.

Format—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -


Exponential (Check Box)—Shows/hides the number of mantissa in superscript font.

13-535


–

–

13-536

-

Values Format (List Box)—Determines the value display format.

-

Default Alignment (Check Box)—Enables/Disables default label alignment.


Font (Button)—Specifies the font to be used.

-

Outline (Button)—Enables/Disables the display of an outline.

-

Inter-char Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines the amount of space between characters.

-

Color (Button)—Determines the color of the text shadow.

-

Horiz. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the horizontal size of the text shadow.

-

Vert. Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical size of the text shadow.

Ticks—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Axis (Button)—The Axis property determines the kind of pen used to draw the Axis major lines.

-

Grid (Button)—Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.

-

Centered (Check Box)—Places Axis Grid lines between (not at) label positions.

-

Ticks (Button)—The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to draw Axis marks along the Axis line.

-

Len, Ticks (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the length of Axis Ticks.

-

Len, Inner (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the length in pixels of Axis ticks drawn inside Chart boundaries.

-

At Labels Only (Check Box)—This property sets the Axis Ticks to be drawn only to coincide at Labels.

–

Minor—This sub-tab contains the following controls:

–

Ticks (Button)—The Ticks property determines the kind of Pen used to draw Axis marks along the Axis line.

–

Length (Up/Down Increment Control)—This property defines the length of Axis Ticks.

–

Grid (Button)—Defines the pen used to draw Chart Grid Lines.

–

Count (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the number of minor ticks.



•

Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls: –

Position % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Position of Axis as a percentage of the Chart Height (horizontal Axis) or Chart Width (vertical Axis).

–

Start % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Start of Axis as percentage of width (horizontal Axis) and height (vertical Axis) of the Chart rectangle. Original Axis scale will be fitted to new Axis height/width.

–

End % (Up/Down Increment Control)—End of Axis as percentage of width.

Titles—The Title sub-tab is further subdivided into six third-level sub-tabs. Regardless of the tab that is active, the Title sub-tab contains a menu that allows you to select the title type that any modifications will be applied to. The Titles sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-tabs: –

–

–


Visible (Check Box)—Determines title visibility.

-

Adjust Frame (Check Box)—The Adjust Frame property controls if Chart Title and Foot frames will be resized to full Chart dimensions or to the title text width.

-

Left Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the left side of the chart.

-

Center Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the center of the chart.

-

Right Alignment (Button)—Aligns the title to the right side of the chart.

-

Text Pane—Allows entry of the title text.

Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Custom (Check Box)—Checking the Custom check box activates the Left and Top controls to allow you to specify the placement of the Title on the graph plot.

-

Left (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines left position in pixels.

-

Top (Up/Down Increment Control)—Defines top position in pixels.


Color (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button specifies the frame fill color.

-

Frame (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button specifies the frame settings.

-

Pattern (Button)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this button specifies the frame fill pattern settings.


13-537


–

–

13-538

-

Bevel (Menu)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this menu specifies the frame bevel effect settings.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this control changes the size of the frame bevel effect.

-

Round Frame (Check Box)—If the Transparent check box is unchecked, this check box enables/disables rounding of the frame shape.

-

Transparent (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables frame visibility.



-

Outline (Button)—Enables/disables the display of an outline.

-


-


-


-


Gradient—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables the three-dimensional graph display. When this box is checked, the other gradient controls are activated.

-

Direction (Menu)—The Direction property specifies the direction in which the gradient fill will be applied.

-

Swap (Button)—Switches the colors specified by the Start and End buttons.

-

Start (Button)—This button specifies the first of the two required colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.

-

Middle (Button)—This button specifies an optional third color that will be used to generate the gradient fill.

-

End (Button)—This button specifies the second of the two required colors that will be used to generate the gradient fill.

-

No Middle (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables the Middle button. When the No Middle box is unchecked, a two-base-color gradient will be generated; when it is checked, a three-base-color gradient is generated.


Presenting your Results –

•

Shadow—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Color (Button)—This button allows you to choose the color of the shadow.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—This button allows you to adjust the size of the shadow.

Legend—The Legend sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-tabs: –

–


Visible (Check Box)—Turns legend visibility on and off.

-

Inverted (Check Box)

-

Check Boxes (Check Box)—Activates/deactivates check boxes associated with each series in the Legend. When these boxes are unchecked in the legend, the associated series are invisible.

-

Font Series Color (Check Box)—When this option is checked, the text associated with each series in the Legend is the same color as the color used to represent the series display.

-

Legend Style (Menu)—Specifies the Legend style that is used. Choices include:

-

Text Style (Menu)—Specifies the content that will be displayed in the Legend.

-

Vert. Spacing (Up/Down Increment Control)—This control determines the amount of space between each series line in the Legend.

-

Dividing Lines (Button)—Determines the presence of and display style of lines dividing each series line in the Legend.

Position—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Left (Button)—Places the Legend in the left side of the chart.

-

Right (Button)—Places the Legend in the right side of the chart.

-

Top (Button)—Places the Legend at the top of the chart.

-

Bottom (Button)—Places the Legend at the bottom of the chart.

-

Resize Chart (Check Box)—The Resize Chart control indicates if Legend will automatically reduce the Chart rectangle to prevent overlap between Legend and Chart rectangles.

-

Margin (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the amount of space between the graph image and the Legend.


13-539


–

–

–

13-540

-

Position Offset % (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical placement of the Legend. Lower values place the Legend higher up in the display.

-

Custom (Check Box)—This check box activates the Left and Top buttons to allow user-defined placement of the Legend.

-

Left (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the horizontal placement of the Legend.

-

Top (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the vertical placement of the Legend.

Symbols—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the symbols used to represent the series displayed in the Legend.

-

Width Units (Menu)—Allows you to choose the units that the value in the Width control represent.

-

Position (Menu)—Determines the left/right placement of the Legend symbols in relation to the text contained within the Legend.

-

Continuous (Check Box)—When this box is checked, the series symbols will appear as a continuous line.


Color (Button)—Determines the background color of the Legend pane.

-

Frame (Button)—This button allows you to define the Legend Frame settings.

-

Pattern (Button)—Determines the background pattern of the Legend pane.

-

Bevel (Menu)—Specifies the Legend frame bevel settings.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the size of the Legend bevel frame.

-

Round Frame (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables rounding of the Legend frame shape.

-

Transparent (Check Box)—This check box controls the visibility of the Legend frame.



-


-




–

–

•

-


-


-




-


-


-


-


-


-

No Middle (Check Box)—This check box enables/disables the Middle button. When the Middle button is disabled, a two-base-color gradient will be generated; when it is enabled, a three-base-color gradient is generated.



-


Panel—The Panel sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level subtabs: –

Background—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Color (Button)—This button lets you specify the chart background color.

-

Browse (Button)—This button allows you to browse the hard drive for background images.

-

Inside (Check Box)—Restrict the background image to display inside the chart rectangle only.


13-541


–

–

13-542

-

Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables the visibility of the background image.

-

Stretch (Button)—Sizes the background image to fit within the graph dialog box.

-

Tile (Button)—Repeats the background image to fill the graph dialog box.

-

Center (Button)—Centers the background image within the graph dialog box.

Borders—This sub-tab contains the following controls: -

Bevel Inner None (Button)—Disables display of bevel effect around the inside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Inner Lowered (Button)—Enables display of a lowered bevel effect around the inside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Inner Raised (Button)—Enables display of a raised bevel effect around the inside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Outer None (Button)—Disables display of bevel effect around the outside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Outer Lowered (Button)—Enables display of a lowered bevel effect around the outside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Outer Raised (Button)—Enables display of a raised bevel effect around the outside of the chart frame.

-

Border (Check Box)—Enables/disables a border around the inside of the chart frame.

-

Bevel Inner Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the inner bevel effect.

-

Bevel Outer Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the outer bevel effect.



-


-


-




•

-


-


-


Walls—This sub-tab contains the following controls, which are identical for each of the Wall third-level sub-tabs (Left, Right, Bottom, Back): –

Color (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall color.

–

Border (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall border.

–

Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall pattern.

–

Gradient (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the wall gradient.

–

Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of the wall.

–

Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3D surface shading of the wall. This check box is active only when a Size greater than o has been specified in the Size control.

–

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the depth of the wall in 3D graphs.

–

Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of the wall.

Note:

•

Only the Back settings are used in 2D graphs.

3D—This sub-tab contains the following controls: –

3 Dimensions (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3-dimensional display of the chart.

–

3D% (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the degree of the 3D effect.

–

Orthogonal (Check Box)—Enables/disables the 2D Canvas and disables/ enables the Full 3D Canvas allowing Elevation and Rotation displacement of the Chart.

–

Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Specifies the display angle of the 3D orthogonal graph.

–

Zoom Text (Check Box)—Enables/disables the zooming of text when using the Zoom control.


13-543

Advanced Graph Manager GeoGrapher –

Zoom (Slider)—Zooms in/out in the graph display.

–

Rotation (Slider)—Horizontally rotates the graph three dimensionally. This control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.

–

Elevation (Slider)—Vertically rotates the graph three dimensionally. This control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.

–

Horiz. Offset (Slider)—Determines the horizontal placement of the graph image within the chart.

–

Vert. Offset (Slider)—Determines the vertical placement of the graph image within the chart.

–

Perspective (Slider)—Use this property with Orthogonal unchecked to modify the 3D perspective of the Chart. Larger values add more depth perspective. This control is disabled when an Orthogonal display is chosen.

Series Tab The Series tab contains parameters dependant on the series type concerned. The list box at the top of the Series tab shows which series you are editing. This tab is further subdivided into the following second-level sub-tabs: •

•

13-544


Border (Button) Determines whether the series indicator will display a border.

-

Color (Button)—Determines the color of the series indicator.

-

Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the series indicator pattern.

-

Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables shading of 3D surfaces.

-

Color Each (Check Box)—Assigns a different color to each series indicator.

-

Height 3D (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the 3D effect when a 3D graph is chosen.

-

Stack (Menu)—Determines stacking characteristics of series.

-

Stairs (Check Box)—When checked, 2 Lines between each pair of points are drawn, thus giving a stairs appearance.

-

Inverted (Check Box)—Inverts the direction of the stair effect.

-

Outline (Button)—Draws an outline around the series indicator.

Point—This sub-tab contains the following controls: –

Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables visibility of series points.

–

3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables 3D representation of series points.



•

–

Dark 3D (Check Box)—Enables/disables shading of 3D point surfaces.

–

Style (Menu)—Determines the symbol used to represent series points.

–

Width (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the width of the series point symbol in pixels.

–

Height (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the height of the series point symbol in pixels.

–

Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the point pattern.

–

Default (Check Box)—Enables/disables use of the default pattern.

–

Border (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the border enclosing the point symbol.

Marks—The Marks sub-tab is further subdivided into the following third-level sub-tabs: –

–


Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables display of marks, or series point labels, in the graph.

-

Clipped (Check Box)—Allows/disallows display of marks outside of the inner graph border.

-

Multi line (Check Box)—Enables/disables multiple lines within each mark.

-

All Series Visible (Check Box)—Enables/disables display of all series marks.

-

Style (Menu)—Determines the information that is displayed in the marks.

-

Draw every (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the interval of the marks that are displayed. Selecting “2” would display marks for every other series point, selecting “3” would display every third, etc.

-

Angle (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the display angle of the mark.

-

Color (Button)—Determines the color of the line that connects the series point and the mark.

-

Length (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the length of the line that connects the series point and the mark.


Color (Button)—Determines the background color of the marks.

-

Frame (Button)—Enables/disables display of a frame around each mark.


13-545


–

–

13-546

-

Pattern (Button)—Determines the presence of and settings for the marks background pattern.

-

Bevel (Menu)—Determines the type of the bevel effect.

-

Size (Up/Down Increment Control)—Determines the size of the bevel effect.

-

Round Frame (Check Box)—Rounds the frame corners.

-

Transparent (Check Box)—Enables/disables mark background transparency.



-


-


-


-


-




-


-


-


-


-


-



Presenting your Results –

13.6



-


Contours Contours includes:

13.6.1

•

“Contour Map Manager” on page 13-547

•

“Contour Plot” on page 13-549

•

“Contour Smoothing” on page 13-549

•

“Enhanced Pressure Contours” on page 13-550

•

“Contour Labeling” on page 13-550

•

“Spot Elevations” on page 13-551

Contour Map Manager The Contour Map Manager contains the information required to generate contours for a calculated network, organized as follows: •

Contour—Choice list used to select the attribute that is to be contoured. Clicking the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56).

•

Selection Set—Contours can be generated using all elements in the network or a subset of elements, defined in the Selection Set Manager (for more information, see “Selection Sets Manager” on page 5-263). Click the Ellipsis (...) button to access the Selection Set Manager.


13-547

Contours Note:

In addition to using selection sets. You can also add nodes to a special zone that will ensure that they are excluded from the contouring point set. Cybernet 2 users might recall that Zone number 99 was reserved for this purpose. You should create a zone named Do not contour. You can then add the nodes that you do not want to be included in the contour set. You can change the name of the contour exclusion zone by editing the file, HAESTAD.INI, and setting the variable, ExcludeFromContouringTag, equal to any string label. The exclusion label is not case-sensitive. If you want to exclude some spot elevations from the contouring point set, set their Description field to Do not contour (or whatever value is set in the HAESTAD.INI ExcludeFromContouringTag variable).

13-548

•

Minimum—Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It may be desirable to use a minimum that is above the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-differential portions of the system.

•

Maximum—Highest value for which contours will be generated.

•

Increment—Step by which the contours increase. The contours created will be evenly divisible by the increment, and are not directly related to the minimum and maximum values. For example, a contour set with 10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3 would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not [ 10, 13, 16, 19 ].

•

Index Increment—Value for which contours will be highlighted and labeled. The index increment should be an even multiple of the standard increment.

•

Initialize—This button, located to the right of the Contour section, will initialize the Minimum, Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values based on the actual values observed for the elements in the selection set.

•

Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will select colors for the other values. For instance, picking red as the first color and blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.

•

Color by Range—Contours are colored based on attribute ranges. Use the Initialize button to create five evenly spaced ranges and associated colors.


Presenting your Results Tip:

•

13.6.2

Initialization can be accomplished by clicking the Initialize button. This program will then automatically generate values for the minimum, maximum, and so on, to create an evenly spaced contour set. These values may or may not be the desired range for your purposes, but should at least give you a better concept of the range of values with which you are dealing.

Color by Index—The standard contours and index contours have separately controlled colors so you can make the index contours more apparent.

Contour Plot Note:

Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.

The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours. View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using WaterCAD’ new animation feature. Click the Play button to automatically advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar. Tip:

Although the straight-line contours generated by this program are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking Options, and selecting Smooth Contours.

The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the File button at the top of the window. In AutoCAD mode, you can export the contours directly to your AutoCAD drawing by clicking File > Export to AutoCAD.

13.6.3

Contour Smoothing The Contour Smoothing option displays the results of a contour map specification as smooth, curved contours. The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the command buttons at the top of the window.


13-549

Contours Note:

13.6.4

Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot Status Pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.

Enhanced Pressure Contours Normal contouring routines only include model nodes, such as junctions, tanks and reservoirs. When spot elevations are added to the drawing, however, you can create more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours. These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes, but also the interpolated and calculated results for the spot elevations. Enhanced pressure contours can help the Stand-Alone to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been included directly in the model.

13.6.5

Contour Labeling You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following options are available:

13-550

•

End—Allows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label, AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point, clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.

•

Interior—This option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will move the label along the contour line.

•

Group End—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box. The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Increment that was selected.



13.6.6

•

Group Interior—Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box. The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be prompted to select the Start point for a line.

•

Change Settings—Allows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font Height of the contour labels.

•

Delete Label—Prompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted, then prompts to select the labels to be removed.

•

Delete All Labels—Prompts to select which contours the labels will be removed from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.

Spot Elevations In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes. Note:

These spot elevations have no effect on the network model, but can better define the terrain surface throughout the drawing. The result is that elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours can be generated with more detail. This gives the Stand-Alone a better prediction of the system’s behavior, even in areas where the model has been skeletonized.

Because spot elevations are not included in the actual piping network, there is very little information in the spot elevation editor. The data consists of the following: •

Spot Elevation Input Data—General characteristics defined by you. For more information, see “Spot Elevation Input Data” on page 13-551.

•

Spot Elevation Calculated Results—Values calculated from the model results. For more information, see “Spot Elevation Calculated Results” on page 13-552.

Spot Elevation Input Data Spot Elevations have user-defined characteristics, including: •

Label—Unique name by which a spot elevation element will be referenced in reports, error messages, and tables.

•

X-Coordinate (Easting)—The location may be presented as an X-value or defined as an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

•

Y-Coordinate (Northing)—The location may be presented as a Y-value or defined as a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.


13-551

Profile •

Elevation—Elevation of the spot elevation.

•

Description—Optional notes describing the spot elevation.

Spot Elevation Calculated Results Because spot elevations are not directly tied to the hydraulic network model, there are only a few values that are calculated from the model results: Note:

These values are obtained by interpolating between three adjacent model nodes. The enhanced hydraulic grade is determined from this interpolation, and the enhanced pressure is then computed as a function of the interpolated hydraulic grade and the elevation. For spot elevations that are outside the model bounds, there may not be three adjacent model nodes. If this is the case, the enhanced hydraulic grade will be determined to be zero, which may result in negative pressures. This does not necessarily demonstrate that there are poor conditions in the system. It indicates that the spot elevations may cover a wider area than the model itself.

13.7

•

Enhanced Hydraulic Grade—Interpolated hydraulic grade at this location.

•

Enhanced Pressure—Pressure based on the interpolated hydraulic grade.

Profile A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and constituent concentration. Although profiles in general are not limited to a specific alignment, piping network models are usually concerned with a specific profile alignment type called a network walk (for more information, see “Walk” on page 13-554).

13.7.1

Profile Setup Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the walk and the attribute on which the profile is to be based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes:

13-552

•

Attribute—Parameter to be plotted on the vertical axis of the profile.

•

Elements—List of elements that define the walk (see “Walk” on page 13-554) to be profiled.


Presenting your Results In addition, the network walk can be manipulated by using some of the associated options: •

Select From Drawing—Return to the drawing in a protected mode to select and deselect elements for inclusion in the walk. Note:

In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu command Repeat to re-open the Profile Setup dialog box.

•

Reverse—Reverse the order of the walk. The first node in the list becomes the last, and the last node becomes the first.

•

Remove All—Remove all elements from the current walk.

•

Remove All Previous—Remove all elements that appear before the selected element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be removed.

•

Remove All Following—Remove all elements that appear after the selected element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be removed.

When everything is set up to your satisfaction, click the Profile button to generate the graph.

13.7.2

Profile Plot The Profile Plot window displays the results of an analysis in a profile format. The plot can be copied to the Windows clipboard or printed out directly. By selecting the Options > Graph Options menu button, you can also adjust the titles, axes, colors, and other characteristics of the graph. Note:

For an extended period simulation, the extents of the axes are determined based on the minimum and maximum attribute values for the entire time step, not just the current time step. This is done so that stepping through the time steps gives a more accurate portrayal of the system behavior without rescaling.

There is also a time toolbar on the Profile Plot window that allows you to follow the profile through extended period simulation results (for more information, see “SteadyState/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378).


13-553

Profile

13.7.3

Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode) Profiles can be exported to the AutoCAD drawing using the File menu on the Profile Plot dialog box (for more information, see “Profile Plot” on page 13-553). Profiles will be exported to an insertion point below the current drawing extents.

13.7.4

Walk A walk is a collection of nodes and pipes that follows a specific path through the network. It can include any type of Network Element, but cannot include annotations or spot elevations. Note:

A walk is a non-branching path through the network, and can only be extended at either end. Pipes cannot be added along the midsection of the walk. Likewise, elements in the midsection of the walk cannot be deselected without first deselecting all of the elements between one end and the undesired element.

A walk cannot double back on itself, so once a pipe has been selected it cannot be included elsewhere in the walk.

13.7.5

Walk Selection After clicking the Select From Drawing button to define a walk, you will be returned to the drawing editor. If there are already elements in the current walk, they will be displayed in a highlighted mode. Otherwise, you need to begin a new walk by clicking any pipe. The pipe and its end nodes will then be highlighted. Continue clicking pipes to add them to the walk, or click highlighted end pipes to remove them from the current walk. Once you have selected a walk, press the Escape button on your keyboard, or rightclick with the mouse and select Done.

13-554



13.8

Scenario Comparison Note:

The active topology that is displayed is based on the current scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other scenario.

The data calculated in different scenarios (see “Scenarios” on page 8-364) can be compared through the use of the Scenario Comparison window. This allows you to create an annotated drawing to display the differences in the values for any two scenarios.

13.8.1

Annotation Comparison Wizard The Annotation Comparison Wizard is used to create a drawing that contains text elements displaying the differences between specific attributes of two scenarios (for more information, see “Scenarios” on page 8-364). The Annotation Comparison Wizard is identical to the Annotation Wizard (see “The Annotation Wizard” on page 13-510) except it has one additional step. This step involves selecting the two scenarios you wish to compare. •

Scenario 1—Choose the baseline scenario.

•

Scenario 2—Choose the scenario you wish to compare to Scenario 1. Note:

The active topology that is displayed is based on the current scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other scenario.

The value in Scenario 1 is subtracted from the value of Scenario 2, and the difference is displayed. Therefore, if any specified attribute’s value is greater in Scenario 2 than it is in Scenario 1, the difference is displayed as a positive number. If the value is smaller in Scenario 2 than in Scenario 1, it is displayed as a negative number. Tip:

For applications that support extended period simulations, you can choose the same scenario for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 to annotate the differences between two time steps of that scenario.

For example, suppose your model contains two scenarios. One is named 2002 Conditions, and the other is named 2010 Conditions. To create a drawing that displays the difference in velocity in a pipe between the 2002 scenario and the 2010 scenario, you would use the Annotation Comparison Wizard. You could choose the 2002 scenario as


13-555

Scenario Comparison Scenario 1, and the 2010 scenario as Scenario 2. You would then complete the rest of the steps in the wizard. The drawing produced would show positive values where the velocity increased under 2010 conditions and negative values where the velocity decreased under 2010 conditions.

13.8.2

Scenario Comparison Window The Scenario Comparison window allows you to view, print, export, and modify scenario comparison annotations (for more information, see “Element Annotation” on page 13-509). Along the top of the window is a row of buttons that perform the various functions listed below: •

File > Export To DXF—Exports the drawing in the standard .DXF file format. For more information, see “Advanced DXF Import Techniques” on page 16-606.

•

File > Export To AutoCAD (available only in AutoCAD mode)—Export the drawing to the current AutoCAD drawing.

•

Zoom Tools—Provides standard zoom capabilities for navigating within the drawing.

•

Options > Annotation Manager—Opens the Annotation Comparison Wizard to add, delete, or modify the scenario comparison annotations. For more information, see “Annotation Comparison Wizard” on page 13-555.

•

Options > Annotation Height Multiplier—Modifies the text height for the scenario comparison annotations.

•

Options > Find Element—Allows you to locate an element by its label.

•

Print Preview—Opens the Print Preview window to view how the printed pages will look.

•

Close—Closes the Scenario Comparison window.

•

Help—Get quick access to this help topic.

Several user interface elements are available to let you modify the scenarios that are being compared, and to control when the scenario comparison annotations are updated. These interface elements are described in more detail below.

13-556

•

Scenario 1—This row of controls is similar to the Analysis Toolbar on the main window. This field allows you to choose, from the list of available scenarios, the one that will be the baseline in the comparison.

•

Scenario 2—This row of controls is identical to those described above in Scenario 1, but instead of defining the baseline for the comparison, the scenario you pick here will be compared to the baseline.



13.9

•

Update—Click this button to refresh the scenario comparison annotations. This button is used when Auto Update (described below) is off, and you have changed either Scenario 1 or Scenario 2.

•

Auto Update—A check in this box indicates that Auto Update is on, and that the scenario comparison annotations will be refreshed whenever Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 is changed. With Auto Update off, you can select the desired combination of Scenario 1 and Scenario 2, then click the Update button. With Auto Update on, the annotations will refresh automatically to every scenario or time step change.

Graphic Annotation Note:

To turn off Graphic Annotation, clear the corresponding check box in the Symbol Visibility section (see “Symbol Visibility” on page 4-248) of the Drawing Options tab in the Global Options dialog box.

In Stand-Alone mode, several Graphic Annotation tools are provided for enhancing the appearance of your drawing. Graphic annotations can be manipulated like any other element in the Graphical Editor. You can add, move, and delete them just as you would with any network elements. To add graphic annotation to your drawing, use Tools > Layout > Graphic Annotation, or use the tool palette located along the left side of the main window. The available tools are: Tip:

The program will calculate the area of a closed polyline. Rightclick the polyline for which you wish to determine the area and select Enclosed Area. To open or close a polyline, right-click the polyline and select Close. A check will appear next to the menu item to indicate that the polyline is closed. To add bends or vertices to a polyline, right-click the polyline at the location you would like to add a bend and select Bend > Add Bend. To remove bends or vertices from a polyline, select the polyline, right-click the bend you would like to remove, and select Bend > Remove Bend.

•

Line Tool—Add polylines or polygons such as drawing roads or catchment outlines.


13-557

Preview Windows

13.9.1

•

Border Tool—Add rectangles to your drawing for creating borders such as property lines.

•

Text Tool—Add text to your drawing for adding explanatory notes, titles, or labels for non-network elements.

Legend Legends are used to display the ranges of the active link and node color coding. The legend tool adds a color coding legend to the drawing. This legend is automatically updated as the color coding is modified. Tip:

You can double-click a color coding legend in the drawing to edit the associated color coding parameters.

Editing of the legend figure is not required. In Stand-Alone mode, multiple legends may be placed in the drawing to assist you when printing specified regions within the drawing.

13.9.2

Scale Dialog Box Access the scale dialog box by right-clicking on a color coding legend and selecting the Scale Legend option. The dialog box consists of a single numeric entry field. The value entered here is a multiplier that is applied to the default legend size. The default legend size is determined automatically based on the scale of the drawing and the text height multiplier. Therefore, a value of 2 entered in the Scale field will result in a Legend twice as big as the default size; a value of 3 results in a legend three times as big as the default, and so on.

13.10

Preview Windows Preview windows includes:

13-558

•

“Plot Window” on page 13-559

•

“Print Preview Window” on page 13-559

•

“Graph Options” on page 13-560



13.10.1

Plot Window The Plot window provides the following functionality:

13.10.2

•

Copy—Copies the plot onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Print—Outputs the contents of the Plot window to the printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Options > Graph Options—Allows you to customize the plot by changing the graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc. For more information, see “Graph Options” on page 13-560.

•

Close—Close the Plot window. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Help—Provides access to help for the Plot window. For more information, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.

Print Preview Window This window provides you with a preview of what will be printed. The window contains the following buttons: •

Pg Up/Pg Dn—Navigate between pages of the report. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Copy—Copy the reports to the Windows Clipboard. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Print—Output the report to the printer. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Options—For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82. –

Print Setup—Change printer options, such as portrait or landscape page layout.

–

Fit to Page—The Fit to Page check box will not appear if the Print Preview window does not contain a drawing, or if the drawing is in schematic mode. When checked, the drawing will be scaled to fit within a single page. When not checked, the drawing will be output using the drawing scale.

•

Close—Close the Print Preview window. For more information, see “Other Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-82.

•

Help—Provides access to help for the Print Preview window. For more information, see “Using the Online Help” on page 2-72.


13-559

Preview Windows

13.10.3

Graph Options These features allow you to customize the way a graph or pie chart looks. The dialog box is divided into several tabs: •

“Titles” on page 13-560

•

“Axis (for Graphs Only)” on page 13-560

•

“Grid (for Graphs Only)” on page 13-560

•

“Display (for Pie Charts Only)” on page 13-561

•

“Legend” on page 13-561

Titles •

Titles—There are three sets of titles for a graph: Graph title, X-Axis title and YAxis title. Each title set contains two levels: title and subtitle. A pie chart has a title and a subtitle.

•

Title Font—This feature allows you to select and change the text font type for specific items on the graph or pie chart. Use the selection list to choose the item for which to change the font, then click the Ellipsis (...) button to select the desired font type from the list of available fonts currently installed on your PC.

Axis (for Graphs Only) •

Automatic Scaling—By default, the program uses the Automatic Scaling options for setting the X and Y-axis minimum, maximum, and increment values. To customize an axis, turn the check mark off and enter the desired values for the minimum, maximum, and increment. If desired, you can customize a single axis while leaving the other in the Automatic Scaling mode.

•

Log Scale—Place a check mark in this box to use a log scale for this axis. You can use a log scale for one or both axes.

Grid (for Graphs Only) Note:

13-560

You can specify to use grid lines for one or both axes.

•

X-Axis—Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the X-Axis labels.

•

Y-Axis—Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the YAxis labels.

•

Line Color—Use this selection list to define the color to use for both axes grid lines.

•

Line Style—Use this selection list to define the line type (solid, dashed, etc) to use for both axes grid lines.



Fill Color—Use this selection list to define the color to use for background fill within the plotting boundaries of the graph.

•

Save as Default—Place a check mark in this box to save the current grid settings as the default for subsequent graphs.

Display (for Pie Charts Only) •

Data Labels—Allows you to annotate pie charts with percentages, labels, or both.

•

Percentages—Indicates how many decimals are to be displayed for the percentage figures.

•

Legend Location—Allows you to place the legend (if any) on the left, right, top, or bottom of the pie chart.

•

Chart View—Allows you to generate a 3D-view pie chart.

Legend •

Show Legend—A check mark designates that the legend will be included on the graph or pie chart. Turn the check mark off if you do not wish to show the legend.

•

Series—Each series represents a different curve on the graph or a slice on the pie chart. If the graph contains only one curve, or the pie chart contains only one slice, then it is designated as Series 1. Scroll through the list and select the desired curve or slice (series number). Then, use one of the options below to customize it:

•

13.11

–

Label—Name for the selected curve (series).

–

Line Color—Color for the selected curve (series).

–

Line Style (for graphs only)—Style for the selected curve (series).

–

Line Width (for graphs only)—Width for the selected curve (series).

–

Symbol (for graphs only)—Data point symbol to use for the selected curve (series).

Save as Default—Place a check mark in this box to save the current legend settings as the default for subsequent graphs.

Status Log Several commands generate a status log showing the results of that command. For instance, a status log is displayed when you calculate a scenario using the GO button. The status information is displayed at the top of the dialog box. The dialog box contains the following buttons: •

Save—Export the status log results as an ASCII file.

•

Print or Print Preview—Print or preview the status log results.


13-561

Status Log

13-562

•

Close—Close the status log dialog box after design calculations.

•

Help—Access context-sensitive online help.


Chapter

14

Engineering Libraries

The Haestad Methods’ Engineering Libraries and Library Managers are powerful and flexible facilities for managing specifications of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects. Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe materials, pipe sections (in StormCAD and SewerCAD), and sanitary loads (in SewerCAD only). You can modify engineering libraries and the objects they contain by using the Tools > Engineering Libraries option, or by clicking the Ellipsis (...) buttons available next to the fields in dialog boxes that make use of library objects. The data for each engineering library is stored in a tabular ASCII file with the extension .HLB. Tip:

We strongly recommend that you only edit these files using the built-in facilities available by selecting Tools > Engineering Libraries. If absolutely necessary, these library files may be edited or repaired using any ASCII editor.

The standard set of engineering libraries shipped with your Haestad Methods product resides in the product’s program directory. By default, each project you create will use the objects in these default libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or by creating a new library and setting the path in the Engineering Library Manager to the path for the custom library. When you change the properties for an object in an engineering library, those changes will affect all projects that use that library object. At the time a project is loaded, all of its engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library. Objects are synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the object’s values will be made the same. If any library referenced in a Library Manager path cannot be found at the location specified, then the standard library in the program directory will be used. Once a project is created, it is not necessary to have access to the engineering library in order for that project to be edited or analyzed.


14-563

Engineering Library Manager

14.1

Engineering Library Manager The Engineering Library Manager dialog box consists of a table of two columns and three buttons. In the table section, there is one row for each kind of engineering library used in your project. You cannot create library types other than the types found in the set of standard libraries shipped with the product. The columns in the table are as follows: •

Library—This column lists the kind of object stored in the referenced library.

•

Path—This column lists the path to the library to be used for objects of a certain kind within the current project. By default, the path will reference the standard library shipped with your Haestad Methods product. To browse for other libraries of the same type that you may have already created, select the library, and click the Browse column.

The buttons will perform their respective actions for the row that is currently highlighted. These buttons are as follows: Note:

14.2

Most users do not need to create custom libraries or edit the library paths. You only need to change path values if you wish to create and use custom libraries.

•

Browse—Click this button if you wish to search your computer or network and locate other engineering libraries. To reference a library in the path field, the library must already exist. To create it you may copy a standard library using Windows File Manager or Explorer, or click New as described below.

•

Edit—Click this button if you wish to add, delete, or edit the objects within a specific kind of engineering library.

•

New—Click this button if you wish to create a new library.

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules WaterCAD makes use of the following library modules:

14-564

•

“Material Properties” on page 14-565

•

“Minor Loss Properties” on page 14-566

•

“Liquid Properties” on page 14-567

•

“Constituent Properties” on page 14-568


Engineering Libraries

14.2.1

Engineering Library Editor The engineering library editor is where you add, delete, or edit the objects within a specific kind of engineering library. To access the engineering library editor, select the appropriate library and click Edit. The Engineering Library Editor dialog box consists of a table with two columns: •

Label—This column contains a textual description of the object. In general, objects are considered to be the same if their labels are the same. For example, when a project is loaded, the engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library based on label.

•

Available in—This column contains a check box indicating whether the library object on the given row is enabled for use by this application. If an object is enabled, it will appear in choice lists as a candidate for use in the project. If an object is disabled, it will remain in the library and be editable, but it will not be offered as a candidate for any operations in the program. If a disabled object has already been used in a project, then it will remain in use. Disabling it will not affect the existing project in any way.

The following command buttons appear on the Engineering Library dialog box: •

Insert—Insert a new, unlabeled object into the current library. You must then click the Edit button to edit the label and add the appropriate values before the library will be valid. Library objects will be sorted by label in ascending alphabetical order the next time you open the Engineering Library Editor dialog box.

•

Duplicate—Create a copy of the currently highlighted library object.

•

Delete—Delete the object represented by the highlighted row. Note that this command always deletes objects from the library, but never deletes an object from your current project if it is in use. To change the library object that is currently in use by a project, proceed to the dialog box containing the field where the library object is referenced and select a different library object.

•

Edit—Access the object properties editor.

•

Usage—Use this button to specify specific uses for the material. (This only applies to the material engineering library.)

Material Properties A customizable library of materials is provided. Materials provide the pipe or channel with a default value for the roughness coefficient used in the friction equations. Therefore, a material must be defined with the following properties: •

Label—Name of the material as it will appear in material selection lists.


14-565

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules •

Culvert Inlet Material Type—Limits the type of culvert inlets that are available when the material is used as the culvert material (used in CulvertMaster). The inclusion of this property allows the sharing of libraries among Haestad Methods’ products.

•

Manning’s Coefficient—Default value for Manning’s n. This is a number generally between 0.009 and 0.300. For more information, see “Manning’s Equation” on page B-731.

•

Roughness Height—Default value for absolute roughness height. This will be used in conjunction with the Darcy-Weisbach friction equation. The roughness height has units of length, typically mm or ft. For more information, see “DarcyWeisbach Equation” on page B-729.

•

Kutter’s n Coefficient (StormCAD and SewerCAD)—Default value for Kutter’s formula. This is a unitless number generally between 0.009 and 0.300.

•

C Coefficient—Default value for Hazen William’s C. This is a unitless number generally between 60 and 150. For more information, see “Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729.

The check boxes next to each item specify whether the friction method will be available for the material. For example, some materials, such as asphalt, only have Manning’s n values defined. Usage This dialog box only applies to the Material Library. Usage is what specifies the type of section or pipe that will be available for each material. Use the following commands to select which sections you would like to be available for each material: [ > ]:

Adds the selected items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

[ >> ]:

Adds all of the items in the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

[ < ]:

Removes the selected items from the Selected Items list.

[ << ]:

Removes all items from the Selected Items list.

Minor Loss Properties An editable library of minor losses is provided. Minor losses are used on pressure pipes and valves to model headlosses due to pipe fittings or obstructions to the flow. A minor loss is defined with the following properties: •

14-566

Label—Name of the minor loss as it will appear in choice lists.


Engineering Libraries •

Type—General type of fitting or loss element. This field is used to limit the number of minor loss elements available in choice lists. For example, the minor loss choice list on the valve dialog box only includes minor losses of type valve. You cannot add or delete types.

•

K Coefficient—Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This unitless number represents the ratio of the headloss across the minor loss element to the velocity head of the flow through the element.

Liquid Properties An editable library of liquids is provided. All hydraulic or hydrologic networks transport a particular liquid. Liquids are defined with the following properties: Note:

Certain friction methods (i.e., Manning’s, Hazen William’s) were developed experimentally, and are only applicable to water at room temperature (20°C/68°F). WaterCAD will prompt you to confirm any choice you make that is inconsistent with the chosen friction method, but it will not prevent you from using the liquid properties you chose. Use Tools > Options to specify the liquid to be modeled in the Project Options dialog box.

•

Liquid Label—Name of the liquid as it will appear in choice lists.

•

Kinematic Viscosity—Ratio of the liquid’s dynamic, or absolute, viscosity to its mass density. This is a common parameter in fluid mechanics. The units of kinematic viscosity are length squared per unit time (typically m2/sec. or ft.2/sec.).

•

Specific Gravity—Ratio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight of water at 4°C (39°F). Specific gravity is a unitless number.

•

Temperature—Reference temperature for the liquid. This is required because the two parameters listed above are generally a function of the temperature, however this has no effect on the calculations. The default temperature for new liquids is room temperature (20°C/68°F).


14-567

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules

Constituent Properties An editable library of constituents is provided. Constituents are used in water quality analyses where the tracking of the growth or decay of a constituent is desired. The Constituent dialog box contains the following two tabs: Note:

The constituent library shipped by Haestad Methods includes a single constituent labeled Constituent. The values for this constituent do not correspond to anything in particular. It is not intended that you use this constituent for an actual analysis, but it was provided as a starting point for the library. A negative value for the reaction rate constant indicates constituent decay, and a positive value indicates constituent growth.

•

General Tab—This tab allows you to input general constituent properties, such as the name of the constituent, diffusivity, and concentration. For more information, see “General Tab” on page 14-568.

•

Reaction Rates Tab—This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and Wall reactions. For more information, see “Reaction Rates Tab” on page 14-569.

General Tab Constituents are defined with the following general properties:

14-568

•

Label—Name of the constituent as it will appear in choice lists.

•

Diffusivity—Molecular diffusivity of the constituent. This value is only used when pipe wall reactions are considered in the water quality analysis. Diffusivity has units of length squared per unit time (typically m2/s or ft.2/s).

•

Unlimited Concentration—Check this box if the constituent does not have a limiting concentration or potential. If this box is checked, the Concentration Limit field will not be available for editing. If it is not checked, the Concentration Limit field is applicable. This box will typically be checked, but certain constituents, such as trihalomethanes (THMs), have a limiting concentration or formation potential that needs to be modeled.

•

Concentration Limit—Limiting concentration or potential for the constituent. When a concentration limit is given, reaction rates will be proportional to the difference of the current concentration and the concentration limit. Concentration limit has units of mass per unit volume (typically mg/l or lbs./million gal.)


Engineering Libraries Reaction Rates Tab The water quality module of WaterCAD can track the growth or decay of a substance by reaction as it travels through a distribution system. In order to do this it needs to know the rate at which the substance reacts and how this rate might depend on substance concentration. Reactions can occur both within the bulk flow and with material along the pipe wall. Bulk fluid reactions can also occur within tanks. WaterCAD allows a modeler to use different reaction rates for the two zones of reaction. This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and Wall reactions. This tab is divided into two sections: •

•

Bulk Reaction Section—Bulk flow reactions are reactions that occur in the main flow stream of a pipe or in a storage tank, unaffected by any processes that might involve the pipe wall. The following input fields are available in this section: –

Order—This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring in the bulk fluid. WaterCAD is capable of modeling nth order reactions.

–

Bulk Reaction Rate—Default bulk reaction rate coefficient assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if no bulk reaction occurs.

Wall Reaction Section—Wall reactions are reactions that occur with material on or near the pipe wall. The rate of this reaction can be considered to be dependent on the concentration in the bulk flow. The following components comprise this section: –

Order—This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring at the pipe wall. The value can be 0 or 1.

–

Roughness Correlated—This check box will make all pipe wall reaction coefficients dependent on pipe roughness.

–

Wall Reaction Rate—This input field is active when the Roughness Correlated check box is clear. This value indicates the wall reaction rate coefficient assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if no wall reaction occurs. The units used by this field will change depending on the Order that is specified.

–

Correlation Factor—This input field is active when the Roughness Correlated Box is checked. The Correlation Factor is a unitless value that represents the factor correlating wall reaction coefficient to pipe roughness.


14-569

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules

14-570


Chapter

Shapefile and Database Connections

15

Haestad Methods’ GIS/Database Connection feature provides the modeler with the ability to dynamically exchange data with a variety of applications. You can establish a connection between your hydraulic model and relational and non-relational database management systems (RDBMS and DBMS), spreadsheets, and ESRI shapefiles. The term external file is used to generically refer to any one of these types of files. Where information pertains to a specific type of external file, that type will be used. The GIS/Database Connection system is extremely powerful. It can be used to update hundreds or thousands of database records with a few clicks of the mouse. This section provides detailed information on the structure and behavior of the system so that it can be used more effectively. The purpose of the GIS/Database Connection system is to provide you with a safe and convenient means of exchanging data with external files. This system has several advantages over providing an open file format for direct manipulation by the end user. Generality—Open file formats have a specific form that must be adhered to. This restrictiveness is problematic for both the developer and the end user. Developers are now under additional constraints when modifying the software. They must be cognizant of the fact that users may depend on this format, and are therefore less free to modify it. The end user, on the other hand, has no control over this format, and is at the mercy of the developer. A new version may change the format completely, and all of your existing data must be converted. In addition, the file format is rarely convenient for an end user since it is typically chosen for efficient processing by the program. The GIS/Database Connection system allows you to exchange data between the model and any arbitrarily defined external files. This flexibility allows you to set up a database or spreadsheet, and it frees the developer to use a file format that is most efficient for the program. Data Protection—Open file formats can typically be modified by anyone, often without the knowledge of the modeler. By providing an interface to exchange data, the model is protected from inadvertent changes. The modeler is in complete control of when and how the model or external files are updated.


15-571

Type Coercion—Quite often the external files do not store the data using the format expected by the hydraulic model. For example, a database may store the length of a pipe using single precision floating point numbers, whereas the model works with double precision floating point numbers. When exchanging data between the model and the external file using the GIS/Database Connection system, the data is coerced from one type to the other automatically. Unit Conversion—The quantities used in hydraulic models almost always have some unit associated with them. For example, pipe lengths are typically expressed in meters or feet. General purpose database and spreadsheet applications do not support the concept of unitized numbers. A pipe length, for example, is represented as 100.0. Is that 100.0 meters or 100.0 feet? The GIS/Database Connection interface allows you to specify the database unit so the numbers can be converted from the model unit to the database unit and vice versa. Virtually all model inputs and calculated results can be exchanged through the GIS/ Database Connection system. The system not only supports the update of existing model elements and external file records, but also the creation and deletion of these elements and records. For example, by performing a Sync In operation (explained in detail below), an entire hydraulic model can be built from data stored in a spreadsheet. Likewise, an empty spreadsheet can be completely populated with data from an existing hydraulic model by performing a Sync Out operation. The spreadsheet can be kept synchronized with the hydraulic model over the course of a project as new elements are added or deleted, and the input and output data is modified. The GIS/Database Connection system has a three-tiered architecture: •

Connections

•

Table or Shapefile Links

•

Field Links

The first tier is the Connection. Connections are organized and managed by Connection Managers. There are two types of Connection Managers: a Database Connection Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574) and a Shapefile Connection Manager (see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). As the names imply, the first manages connections to databases and spreadsheets, and the second manages connections to ESRI shapefiles. The Connection Managers are similar, and provide an interface for adding, editing, deleting, duplicating, and synchronizing Connections. To exchange data between the model and external files, a Connection must be created and then synchronized. The two synchronization operations that can be performed on a Connection are Sync In and Sync Out. Sync In synchronizes the model to the data contained in external files. In this case, the model acts as a consumer of the data, and external files act as the data provider. Sync Out synchronizes external files to the data contained in the model. Thus, for Sync Out, the model is the data provider and

15-572


Shapefile and Database Connections external files are the consumers. Exactly what data is exchanged during synchronization depends on how the Connection is defined. Intuitively, a Connection must specify which files are to be connected to the model, and what data in each file is to be exchanged. The second tier is the Table or Shapefile Link. A Database Connection uses these links to gather and store information. Each Connection can contain one or more Table or Shapefile Links. Each of these links specifies the type of external file with which to exchange data (implied with shapefile links), the name of the file, and, if the file contains multiple tables, which table within the file is of interest. The third tier of the system is the Field Link. Each Table or Shapefile Link uses one or more Field Links to specify exactly what data in the external file is going to be exchanged. A Field Link defines the fundamental mapping between a field in an external file and a field in the model. For example, a field link may be used to map the GRND_FT field of an external database file to the Ground Elevation attribute of the model. In summary, a Connection defines a link between the model and external files. Table or Shapefile Links and Field Links are used to specify files, tables, and fields to be linked. Once a Connection is created, it can be synchronized in or out. The synchronization action will update models (“in” direction) or the external files (“out” direction). The rest of this section provides details on the dialog boxes and windows used to interact with the GIS/Database Connection system. Although Database Connections and Shapefile Connections are similar in concept, there are differences in the interfaces and options. Therefore, they will be discussed in separate sections.

15.1

Database Connections Database connections includes: •

“Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574

•

“Standard Database Import/Export” on page 15-575

•

“Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577

•

“ODBC” on page 15-581

•

“Sharing Database Connections between Projects” on page 15-584

•

“Database Connection Example” on page 15-585


15-573

Database Connections

15.1.1

Database Connection Manager This manager, accessed by selecting File > Synchronize > Database Connections, helps you track and work with database connections. On the left side of this dialog box is a list of the current Database Connections. There are several options available in the Database Connection Manager, including: •

Add—Creates a new database connection using the Database Connection Editor. For more information, see “Shapefile Connection Editor” on page 15-587.

•

Edit—Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will open the Database Connection Editor, where you can rename the connection, change the associated database files, and perform other changes to the connection configuration.

•

Duplicate—Creates a connection identical to the selected one. This feature is very helpful when defining two or more connections with many similar attributes.

•

Delete—Removes the selected connection from the list.

•

Synchronize In—Updates the network attributes from the databases defined in the selected connection.

•

Synchronize Out—Updates all databases in the connection from the current status of the model.

•

Reset—Returns the highlighted standard database import or export connection to default settings. For more information, see “Standard Database Import/Export” on page 15-575. Tip:

If you do not want your input values overwritten upon synchronizing out, duplicate the connection. Then, edit one connection such that it includes only the values you want to synchronize in, and one that includes only the values you want to synchronize out. When synchronizing out, be sure that the model element labels are of the same data type as the database column to which you are mapping. Otherwise, synchronizing out to the database will yield erroneous results. For example, if you were to synchronize in from a database where your pipe identifier was numeric, then any changes or additions to the pipes in the model should also

15-574


Shapefile and Database Connections use a numeric-labeling scheme. To assure the consistency in type in this case, select Element Labeling from the Tools menu and remove the appropriate element prefixes before any changes are made to the model.

When synchronizing in, output fields such as hydraulic grade line or computed pipe flow will not be updated. If an attempt is made to update an output field during a Synchronize In operation, a Read Only Warning will be issued in the status log, indicating which attribute could not be updated. When synchronizing out, all mapped information will be overwritten in the database files, including input and output conditions.

15.1.2

Standard Database Import/Export The Database Connection Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15574) is initialized with four standard database connections for importing and exporting model data using simple File menu commands. These standard connections are as follows: •

[Project Export - SI]—Used for the File > Export > Database command when the global unit system is set to System International.

•

[Project Export - US]—Used for the File > Export > Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary.

•

[Project Import - SI]—Used for the File > Import > Database command when the global unit system is set to System International.

•

[Project Import - US]—Used for the File > Import > Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary.

The purpose of the standard database connections is to provide a powerful yet easy-touse method of exposing the model data to external applications using a standard database format, Microsoft Access database (.MDB). This method is powerful because it provides you with all the flexibility and functionality of a user-defined database connection, such as unit conversion and type coercion. It is easy to use because it is predefined with all of the standard model data, and requires nothing more than a file name to execute. The standard database connections are almost identical to user-defined database connections with the following exceptions: •

Standard connections cannot be deleted.

•

The label of a standard database connection cannot be changed.


15-575

Database Connections •

The target database for a standard database connection is determined at the time it is synchronized. During a Synchronize In operation, you will be prompted to choose an existing Microsoft Access Database (.MDB). During a Synchronize Out, you will be prompted for the name of a new Access database. If an existing filename is chosen, a warning will indicate that the existing file will be overwritten.

•

The field names of the external database tables are editable from within the Table Link Editor (for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15579).

•

The Database Type on the Table Link Editor cannot be changed.

•

Standard connections can be reset to their factory default values. To do this, select a standard connection from the list in the Database Connection Manager, and click the Reset button.

By default, the standard database connections include a table link for each element type, and field links for all the attributes related to that element type, with some minor exceptions. The default units for the specified unit system (SI or US) are used for unitized attributes. The Key Label field is designated as the key field for each of the table links, and it is created as an index for the table during database creation. No duplicates are allowed. As noted above, the field links external field names can be edited directly within the Table Link Editor. It is valid to have more than one internal attribute mapped to a single external field name. Although this is not the case for the standard connections in their factory default state, you can create this condition. Under this condition, the following behaviors will be observed:

15-576

•

Import (Synchronize In)—All of the attributes will be populated with the value of the database field if it is a valid value for the specified attributes.

•

Export (Synchronize Out)—The database field will be populated with the last non-blank attribute value.


Shapefile and Database Connections Note:

If an existing filename is chosen during export, the existing database file will be overwritten. Therefore, any custom tables, queries, or forms present in that database will be lost. Model data that are typically a collection of data (e.g., SewerCAD unit sanitary loads, StormCAD watershed areas and rational C coefficients, and WaterCAD junction demands) cannot be written to a single record, and are therefore not exported to the database. However, if these collections only contain a single item, that single item will be transferred to and from the database during export and import.

By default, the Standard Database Export creates Microsoft Office 2000 Access files. These files cannot be read with Office 97. If you want to use Office 97, you need to use a text editor to edit the HAESTAD.INI file located in your HAESTAD directory, and replace the line: ConnectionDatabaseFormat=0 with: ConnectionDatabaseFormat=3 Basically, a value of 3 results in the program creating an Office 97 Access file, whereas a value of 0 will have the program generate an Office 2000 Access file.

15.1.3

Database Connection Editor The Database Connection Editor is used for defining the group of table links to be included in the connection. The Database Connection Editor has tabs for Database Connection (see “Database Connection Tab” on page 15-578) and Synchronization Options (see “Synchronization Options Tab” on page 15-579). There are three standard operation buttons at the bottom of the dialog box: •

OK—Accepts the current condition of the connection, including any changes that have been made.

•

Cancel—Closes the Database Connection Editor without saving any changes.

•

Help—Opens the context-sensitive help system.


15-577

Database Connections

Database Connection Tab The Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577) provides an interface for the standard attributes of a connection. It contains the following:

15-578

•

Connection Label—A required unique alphanumeric identification for the connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Database Connection Manager dialog box (for more information, see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574).

•

Table Links—Provide basic information about each table link, such as the referenced database file, the specific table within the database, and the type of table that is referenced. A table link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog box (for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15579): –

Add—Adds a new table link. If there are no table links currently defined for this connection, this will be the only button available.

–

Edit—Changes the characteristics of the selected table link, such as the referenced file or table, or the mapping of the table’s field links.

–

Duplicate—Duplicates the selected table. This command is very helpful when defining two or more table links with similar attributes.

–

Delete—Deletes the selected table link from the connection.



Synchronization Options Tab The Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor (see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577) provides an interface for some of the behaviors of the connection. These options cannot be accessed until the Table Links are defined, and are as follows: Note:

In order to be successfully created from the database, pipe elements must have a Start and Stop node associated with them. This association can be established by mapping the ‘+ Start Node’ and ‘+ Stop Node’ attributes in the pipe table link, or by the ‘+ In Link’ or ‘+ Out Link’ of a node table link. Mapping both the pipe table and node table attributes may result in the reading of redundant data causing the connection to fail. By default, elements created from a database are located at coordinate (0,0). This behavior can be overridden by mapping the X and Y or Northing and Easting attributes of the node elements.

•

Add objects to destination if present in source—If this option is selected, when performing a Synchronize Out for example, elements that are present in the model but are not found in the database file will be created in the database. If this is not checked, only the elements that are present in both the model and the database will be updated.

•

Prompt before adding object—If this is checked, you will get a dialog box notifying you of each unmapped element in the source, and asking if you would like to create a new element in the destination. If this is not checked, the additional elements will be automatically created in the database.

•

Remove objects from destination if missing from source—If this is checked when synchronizing out, elements that are present in the database but not in the model will be deleted from the database. If this is not checked, the unmapped elements will be ignored.

•

Prompt before remove—When this box is checked a dialog box will appear notifying you of each unmapped element in the destination and asking if you would like to remove that element. If the box is not checked, the additional elements will be automatically removed from the database.

Database Table Link Editor The Table Link Editor is a tool for defining or modifying a table link. This dialog box is separated into two groups, one dealing with the file and table information, and the other dealing with the field links (attribute mapping). The general table link information includes:


15-579


Database Type—Type of database to which the link will be made. There are many types of external files that can be linked into the model. Among these are Btrieve, Dbase, Excel, FoxPro, Jet (.MDB files, such as Access), Lotus, and Paradox, as well as Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server, or any other Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database.

•

Database File—File referenced by the table link. To browse directories and specify a file path, click the Ellipsis (...) button.

•

Database Table—Once the external file has been selected, it will be scanned for tables (or worksheets), which will then be available for selection from this field. Only one table can be linked for each table link, but table links can be easily duplicated and edited from the Database Connection Editor (for more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577).

•

Table Type—Defines the type of data that can be mapped for this particular table link. For example, a Pipe type of table link means that the available model attributes to be mapped are items such as material, roughness coefficient, flow rate, and velocity.

•

Key\Label Field—Key by which the entire database-model mapping is defined. The model references each element by a unique alphanumeric label, and the database must contain the same labels in one of the columns. If the key field for you data type is numeric, you will want to be sure that your model labels include numbers only. Make sure that there are no duplicate element labels/keys within the data source.

The Field Links group is a manager for the attribute mapping. The tabular list in this group has three field columns: •

Model—Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being mapped to the database. The list of available attributes depends on the type of the table. Note:

15-580

Clicking the button in the Field Links cell will open the Quick Attribute Selector (for more information, see “Quick Attribute Selector” on page 2-56). This will allow you select attributes from organized categories to more easily find needed attributes.

•

Database—Each item in this column is a heading from the database table, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped.

•

Unit—This column defines the units of the values in the database. During a synchronization operation, the values will automatically be converted to the appropriate units to maintain the desired unit systems in both the model and the database. No conversion on your part is required.


Shapefile and Database Connections In addition to the standard table operations of Insert, Duplicate, and Delete, the Field Links Manager offers the following additional operation: •

Select—Opens the Select Field Links dialog box (see “Select Field Links” on page 15-581) for an efficient method of selecting the fields of interest from the available model fields.

Select Field Links The Select Field Links dialog box provides an easy-to-use interface for populating the Field Links group of the Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579) or Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591). The dialog box contains two lists: •

Available Items—Model attributes that are available for mapping in the current Table or Shapefile Link.

•

Selected Items—Model attributes that have been selected for mapping.

The following buttons are provided to move items from one list to the other: Note:

15.1.4

The Select Field Links dialog box provides functions similar to the Table Setup dialog box. For more information on topics such as selecting multiple attributes, see “Selected Table Columns” on page 7-333).

•

[>]—Moves the selected item or items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

•

[>>]—Moves all items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

•

[<]—Moves the selected item or items from the Selected Items list to the Available Items list.

•

[<<]—Moves all items from the Items Selected list to the Available Items list.

ODBC ODBC, which stands for Open Database Connectivity, is a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational database management systems (DBMS). Using ODBC, applications such as Haestad Methods’ engineering software can access data stored in many different PC, minicomputer, and mainframe DBMS, even though each uses a different storage format and programming interface. The ODBC architecture conceptually consists of three parts:


15-581


The application program—The Haestad Methods product.

•

The Data Source Administrator Program—Embedded in Microsoft Windows.

•

The low-level drivers for accessing specific databases—Supplied by your database vendor.

Although most computers with Windows will have ODBC present, the exact databases you can interface via ODBC will depend on the databases and drivers installed on your computer. ODBC is powerful because it is generic and can access many database systems, including mainframe, GIS, and legacy systems. However, because ODBC must be general, it is slower, more complex, and more difficult to use than working directly with a database. When you have the option to work directly with a database, you will usually find it faster and easier than going through ODBC. For specific information about ODBC in your environment, see your database vendor’s documentation. For general information on ODBC, see the online help for the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program. To find the Administrator Program, go to the Control Panel of your computer and double-click the ODBC icon. Choose the Help button on the dialog box that appears, and go to the Contents tab.

ODBC Database Type The first field of the database connection Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579) is the Database Type. The list box displays the external databases and versions supported by the Database Connection feature. One of the Database Types you can select is ODBC. This does not refer to a specific database or version. It is actually a link to the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program running on your computer. This link will provide an interface between the Haestad Methods’ Database Connection and a specific DBMS and source database file.

ODBC Database File If you have selected ODBC as the Database Type, when you click the Ellipsis (...) button next to the Database File field the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program will take over and offer a list of the ODBC data sources installed on your computer. Depending on how your computer is configured, you may see database systems or actual database files from which to choose.

15-582


Shapefile and Database Connections Note:

You will also see database systems such as Microsoft Jet or Excel that are supported directly via choices in the Database Type list. In general, the Database Connection feature will work faster by choosing these database systems directly rather than going through ODBC. If you are unable to successfully synchronize to the data source using the default form of the ODBC string, it is possible that you may need to add some parameters to the string that are specific to your environment. See your database vendor’s ODBC documentation for details.

If you choose a data source from the Administrator Program, upon returning to the Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579) you will see an ODBC connect string in the Database File field, rather than a file path. This connect string is a series of key = value pairs, separated by semicolons. It specifies the database location, security parameters, and access options needed by the particular ODBC driver you are using. In general, you should not edit this string in any way as you could introduce an error that would prevent the ODBC driver from accessing the data source you have selected.

Synchronizing Via ODBC Once you have successfully created and entered the data for a database connection that uses ODBC, the Synchronize In and Synchronize Out operations perform as they do for any other database format. However, ODBC databases are accessed with slightly different internal mechanisms, and thus may generate different error conditions. If synchronization fails to complete, see the status log for error messages. Note the project or database object the program was processing when the error occurred. See to your database vendor’s documentation for detailed information on any errors reported. Using ODBC to access SQL Server databases will result in an error #3197 if the synchronization attempts to delete a database record. To avoid this error, clear Remove Objects on the Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor (for more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577).

ODBC Database Tables and Fields There are many complexities in successfully accessing ODBC databases. You will know if there are problems on your machine because the Database Table or other database-related fields will not have any entries in the associated drop-down lists. If this happens, confirm that ODBC is installed and operating correctly on your computer. Double-check that the ODBC data source you are trying to reference actually exists and is accessible by other programs in your environment. Check the HAESTAD.LOG file for error messages pertaining to ODBC. If none of these steps helps you correct the problem, please call Haestad Methods’ Technical Support.


15-583

Database Connections Given the diversity of ODBC database drivers and the difficulty of reproducing your networked computing environment, we cannot guarantee that the Database Connection feature will function with all ODBC databases. However, we will try to determine the source of your problem and offer a fix or workaround if possible. If you edit the connect string manually, you will need to re-enter the dependent fields such as Database Table and Field Links.

15.1.5

Sharing Database Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with database connections, it is using a file with an .HDC extension, which stores the information regarding database files, table links, and field mapping. When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HDC extension. If it finds this file, it uses the database connectivity information contained therein. If it does not find this file, then it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called Wtrc.HDC.

Sharing Database Connections between Projects If you are working on a local drive and you have several project files, all of which reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the Wtrc.HDC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project. If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HDC file can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.

Preventing Database Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful, such as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HDC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the same name as your .WCD file. For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HDC to PROJECT1.HDC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects.

15-584



15.1.6

Database Connection Example To connect your model to an external file, take the following steps: From the File menu, select Synchronize > Database Connections to open the Database Connection Manager. Click Add.

15.2

•

In the Database Connection Editor (see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577), type a label for your Connection.

•

Click Add to create a new table link. This will take you to the Table Link Editor (for more information, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579).

•

Select the type of file to which you would like to link, and then click the Ellipsis (...) button to browse for and select your database file.

•

Choose the table to which you would like to link, and the type of table.

•

Choose the Key\Label field to define the column in the database that contains the labels of the elements to be synchronized.

•

Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated database column and unit.

•

Click OK to exit the Table Link Editor.

•

Click OK again to exit the Database Connection Editor.

•

You should be back at the Database Connection Manager. You can leave this dialog box and return to the model, or you can choose to Synchronize In to the model from the database, or Synchronize Out to the database from the model. Click OK to save changes and exit back to the model. Click Cancel exit back to the model without saving changes.

Shapefile Connections Shapefile connections includes: •

“Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586

•

“Shapefile Connection Editor” on page 15-587

•

“Shapefile Link Wizard” on page 15-588


15-585

Shapefile Connections

15.2.1

Shapefile Connection Manager Note:

For a general discussion of Shapefile Connections, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571.

This manager is identical to the Database Connection Manager (see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574), except that it helps you to track and work with shapefile connections rather than database connections. Only a brief description of each dialog box control is presented here. For more information, see “Database Connection Manager” on page 15-574. •

Add—Creates a new shapefile connection. This will open the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).

•

Edit—Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will open the Shapefile Connection Editor (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Editor” on page 15-587).

•

Duplicate—Duplicates the selected connection.

•

Delete—Deletes the selected connection from the list.

•

Synchronize In—Updates the network attributes from the shapefiles linked to the selected connection.

•

Synchronize Out—Updates all shapefiles within the connection from the current status of the model.

Shapefile Connection Wizard The Shapefile Connection Wizard provides an easy-to-use interface for defining a new Shapefile Connection. It is similar to the Shapefile Import Wizard (see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589), but has a few additional steps. The major steps in the wizard are as follows:

15-586

•

Label—Enters an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify the Shapefile Connection. For more information, see “Shapefile Connection Label” on page 15-587.

•

Select Element Types—Chooses the types of network elements you wish to connect to shapefiles.

•

Shapefile Synchronization Options—Specifies the spatial data unit, and configures other options.

•

Import Shapefile Link Editor—Chooses the shapefile to which you want to connect and specifies the details of the link.

•

Synchronize Now—Choose whether you want to synchronize the Shapefile Connection when finished with the wizard. You can choose to synchronize in either direction. For more information, see “Synchronize Now?” on page 15-587.



Shapefile Connection Label The Shapefile Connection Label window allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric label for your Shapefile Connection. This window is presented in the Import and Export Shapefile Connection Wizards (see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589 and “Export Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-593), as well as the Shapefile Connection Wizard (see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).

Synchronize Now? The last step in the Shapefile Connection Wizard (see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586), the Synchronize Now? Window, allows you to specify whether you wish to synchronize the Shapefile Connection immediately after editing it in the wizard. The following options are available:

15.2.2

•

Synchronize Shapefile Connection—Check this box if you wish to synchronize the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button. By default this check box is selected; if you clear it, you will return to the Shapefile Connection Manager (see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586) after clicking the Finished button.

•

In—Select this button if you wish to synchronize the connection in to the model. This will update the model data from the shapefiles linked to the connection.

•

Out—Select this button if you wish to synchronize the connection out to the shapefiles linked to the connection. This will update the shapefiles from the model.

Shapefile Connection Editor The Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection Editor (for more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577). It offers the tabs for Shapefile Connection and Synchronization Options. To use the Shapefile Connection Editor, do the following: •

Select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections from the File menu.

•

If you do not currently have any shapefile connections defined, you will be prompted to indicate if you wish to create one now. If you answer Yes, you will be automatically taken to the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).

•

If there are connections already defined, or if you answer No to the prompt to create one now, you will be taken to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). Select Edit to open the Shapefile Connection Editor.


15-587


Shapefile Connection The Shapefile Connection tab of the Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor (for more information, see “Database Connection Editor” on page 15-577). It contains the following:

15.2.3

•

Connection Label—A unique alphanumeric identification for the connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Shapefile Connection Manager dialog box (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586).

•

Table Links—List that provides basic information about each Shapefile link, such as the referenced Shapefile, the feature type of the shapefile, and the type of element that is referenced. As with the other managers, a shapefile link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog box: –

Add—Defines a new shapefile link. If there are no table links currently defined for this connection, this will be the only button available. Clicking this button invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile Link Wizard” on page 15-588).

–

Edit—Changes the characteristics of the selected shapefile link, such as the referenced file or the mapping of the shapefile’s field links. Clicking this button also invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard.

–

Duplicate—Creates an identical shapefile link to the selected one. This is very helpful when defining two or more shapefile links with similar attributes.

–

Delete—Removes the selected shapefile link from the connection.

Shapefile Link Wizard The Shapefile Link Wizard is used when adding new Shapefile Links to a Shapefile Connection, or when editing the existing links of a Shapefile Connection. The first step of the wizard is bypassed when editing an existing link. The basic steps of the wizard are as follows: •

15-588

Select Element Type—Similar to the Select Element Types window for importing shapefiles, except that buttons are used rather than check boxes. This is because a Shapefile Connection represents a single element type. For more information, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.


Shapefile and Database Connections •

Import Shapefile—Choose the shapefile to which you would like to connect, and the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the model attribute, the associated shapefile column, and the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591.

•

Shapefile Link Summary—Quick review of the details specified in the wizard. For more information, see “Shapefile Link Summary” on page 15-589.

As with all wizards, you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to the Shapefile Link.

Shapefile Link Summary The Shapefile Link Summary window provides an opportunity to review the details of the Shapefile Link before completing the editing process. The following information is provided in the summary window:

15.2.4

•

Type—Type of element represented by this Shapefile Link.

•

Shapefile—Full path and file name of the shapefile referenced by this Shapefile Link.

•

Key/Label Field—Shapefile field used to map shapefile records to their corresponding network elements in the model.

•

Attributes Mapped—Number of Field Links mapped in this Shapefile Link.

Import Shapefile Wizard The Import Shapefile Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of importing ESRI shapefiles (for more information, see “Shapefile Format” on page 15596). These are the basic steps for importing shapefiles: •

Select Element Types—Select the type of network elements you wish to import. For more information, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.

•

Shapefile Synchronization Options—Specify the spatial data unit and configure other options. For more information, see “Shapefile Synchronization Options” on page 15-590.


15-589

Shapefile Connections •

Import Shapefile—Browse to and select the shapefiles you would like to import, and select the Key/Label field to specify the column in the shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the network attribute, the associated shapefile column, and the Unit in which the shapefile attribute is stored. For more information, see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591.

•

Create Shapefile Connection—Select whether you want to establish a Shapefile Connection. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the shapefile. For more information, see “Create Shapefile Connection” on page 15-592.

While using the wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes by clicking the Next and Back buttons. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to import shapefiles.

Select Element Types The Select Element Types window is used for selecting the types of network elements that are of interest when importing and exporting shapefiles, or when creating a Shapefile Connection. The window contains a list of network element types with a check box preceding each type. To select an element type for Shapefile Import, Export, or Connection, put a check mark in the corresponding box.

Shapefile Synchronization Options Several options are available to customize the shapefile synchronization process. The Shapefile Synchronization Options are available for editing in the Import Shapefile Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor. The first group of options is only available when editing a Shapefile Connection. These options are exactly the same as their counterparts in Database Synchronization Options (see “Synchronization Options Tab” on page 15-579), and are as follows: •

Prompt before adding object

•

Prompt before removing object

Unlike the Database Synchronization Options, the Shapefile Synchronization Options do not allow for optionally adding or removing elements. When synchronized, shapefiles and the model will contain exactly the same number of records for the specified element type. For example, suppose a shapefile contains a record for the junction labeled J-1. When this shapefile is synchronized into the model, the model will automatically add a junction labeled J-1 if none currently exists. Likewise, if J-1 is removed from the model and then synchronized out to the shapefile, the record for J-1 will automatically be removed from the shapefile. You have no control over this.

15-590


Shapefile and Database Connections The rest of the options are available during the Shapefile Import Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor. Shapefile Unit—Choose a unit from the available list. This is the unit of the spatial data in the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet, choose feet from the list. If they represent meters, select meters. This unit must be the same for every shapefile in the Shapefile Connection. If you wish to import shapefiles that have different spatial data units, create a separate connection for each unit. When Missing Connectivity Data As noted in the Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579), to create a pipe from an external file it is necessary for a pipe to have a start node and stop node associated with it. Typically, these connectivity associations are created by synchronizing the + Start Node and + Stop Node attributes of the pipe. Since a shapefile contains spatial data, it is also possible to establish these associations based on the location of nodes relative to the end points of the pipe. The following options allow you to customize this behavior: •

Establish By Spatial Data—Check this box to configure the synchronization so that any missing connectivity data (start node, stop node, or both) for a pipe will be established from the spatial data if possible.

•

Tolerance—This value represents the distance to be searched when trying to locate nodes for establishing connectivity for a pipe. All nodes within the tolerance of a pipe’s end point will be collected, and the closest node will be selected for connection.

•

Create Nodes if None Found—Check this box if you would like nodes to be created during the synchronization when no nodes are found within the specified tolerance of a pipe’s end point. If this box is not checked, and no nodes are found within the tolerance, the pipe will not be created because it has insufficient connectivity data.

Import Shapefile Link Editor The Import Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor. For more information on the following Shapefile Link parameters, see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579): •

Shapefile—Location of the file that is being referenced by the shapefile link. This is identical to the Database File parameter of the Table Link Editor.

•

Key/Label Field—Key by which the entire shapefile/model mapping is defined.

•

Field Links—Identical to the Field Links group of the Database Table Link Editor.


15-591


Create Shapefile Connection The Create Shapefile Connection window provides an opportunity during a shapefile import or export to specify that a persistent connection containing the Shapefile Links and Synchronization Options be created. This connection can be used at a later time to synchronize the model and the shapefiles. The Create Shapefile Connection window has the following parameters: •

Add Shapefile Connection—Check this box if you wish to add a persistent Shapefile Connection to the Shapefile Connection Manager. By default, this box is checked.

•

Label—Specify an alphanumeric label for the connection. This field is only editable when the Add Shapefile Connection box is checked.

Shapefile Import Example Follow these steps to import one or more shapefiles into a new or existing model: From the File menu, select Import > Shapefile to access the Import Shapefile Wizard (for more information, see “Import Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-589). •

Choose the element types that you wish to import by selecting one or more of the check boxes in the list, and then click the Next button.

•

Configure the options for this import. First, select the unit for the spatial data of the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see “Shapefile Synchronization Options” on page 15-590. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors.

•

You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591) for each element type you choose to import. Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor: –

15-592

Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to import for the specified element type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and select your shapefile.



•

15.2.5

–

Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model.

–

Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and the associated shapefile column and unit. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.

Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the shapefiles you are importing and the model. If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection. Click the Finished button to import the shapefiles.

Export Shapefile Wizard This program has the capability of exporting network elements in the ESRI shapefile format (for more information, see “Shapefile Format” on page 15-596). The ESRI shapefile is actually three files that together define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. In the case of Haestad Methods hydraulic models, map features are network elements (e.g., pipes, junctions). Exporting shapefiles creates brand new files. If you are exporting a shapefile to a directory that already contains a shapefile of the same name, the existing shapefile will be completely overwritten. If you wish to update the shapefile rather than overwriting it, use the Shapefile Connection feature. The major components of the Wizard are as follows: •

Select Element Types—Choose the type of network elements you wish to export. Each type of network element will have its own shapefile associated with it. This component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Select Element Types component. For more information, see “Select Element Types” on page 15-590.

•

Export Shapefile Link Editor—Enter a name for each shapefile you wish to create. Each shapefile name must be no more than eight characters in length, and should not be duplicated. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the network attribute. The shapefile variable will default to a preset value, which can be edited. For more information, see “Export Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-594.


15-593

Shapefile Connections Note:

•

The Label attribute is automatically exported to the shapefile and should not be specified explicitly as one of the defined field links.

Create Shapefile Connection—Choose whether you want to establish a Shapefile Connection for this shapefile. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the shapefile. This component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Create Shapefile Connection component. For more information, see “Create Shapefile Connection” on page 15-592.

While using the Wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process by clicking the Next and Back buttons. When you are finished defining it, click the Finished button to create the shapefile.

Export Shapefile Link Editor The Export Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor (see “Database Table Link Editor” on page 15-579), with the following differences: •

Shapefile—The name and location for the file that is being exported. The shapefile name is limited to eight characters.

The Field Links group is used to specify the attributes and shapefile column headings that you wish to export, as follows: Note:

The spatial data in the shapefiles being created will be in the current display unit for map coordinates. For example, if the X and Y or Northing and Easting values in the model are displayed in meters at the time of the export, then the spatial data in the shapefiles created will also be in meters. The values for the exported attributes will be in the current display units for that attribute. For example, if a junction elevation attribute is displayed in feet at the time of the export, the shapefile will contain that value in feet.

15-594

•

Model—Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being exported to the shapefile. The list of available attributes depends on the type of table.

•

Shapefile—Each item in this column is a column heading in the shapefile being created, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped. By default, the headings are set to an all-capitals abbreviation of the attribute name, with spaces and periods replaced by the underscore character. The column heading can be changed, but must be less than ten characters long and cannot contain periods.



Shapefile Export Example Follow these steps to export one or more shapefiles from the model: From the File menu, select Export > Shapefile to access the Export Shapefile Wizard (for more information, see “Export Shapefile Wizard” on page 15-593).

15.2.6

•

Select the element types that you wish to export by selecting one or more of the check boxes in the list, then click the Next button.

•

You will be presented with an Export Shapefile Link Editor (see “Export Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-594) for each element type you choose to export. Perform the following steps for each Export Shapefile Link Editor: –

Enter the name of the shapefile you wish to create for the specified element type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for a directory in which to store the shapefile.

–

Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and providing a name for the associated shapefile column. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button to continue.

–

Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the shapefiles you are exporting and the model. If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection. Click the Finished button to export shapefiles.

Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with shapefile connections, it is using a file with an .HSC extension, which stores the information regarding the shapefiles and field mapping for each element type. When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HSC extension. If it finds this file, it uses the shapefile connectivity information contained therein. If it does not find this file, it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called Wtrc.HSC.


15-595


Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects If you are working on a local drive, and you have several project files that all reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the Wtrc.HSC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project. If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HSC file can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.

Preventing Shapefile Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project, rather than with all projects. To do this, copy the Wtrc.HSC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the same name as your .WCD file. For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename Wtrc.HSC to PROJECT1.HSC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects.

15.2.7

Shapefile Format An ESRI shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as follows: •

Main File—A binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record contains a series of points, and a point record contains X and Y coordinates.

•

Index File—A binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position of each record in the main file.

•

Database File—A dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the nonspatial data associated with the map features.

All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and be located in the same directory.

15.2.8

Shapefile Connection Example Follow these steps to connect one or more shapefiles to the model:

15-596


Shapefile and Database Connections •

From the File menu, select Synchronize > Shapefile Connections.

•

If you do not have any connections currently defined, you will be asked if you want to create a new one now. Select Yes. If you already have one or more connections defined, you will go to the Shapefile Connection Manager (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Manager” on page 15-586). Click Add to access the Shapefile Connection Wizard (for more information, see “Shapefile Connection Wizard” on page 15-586).

•

Provide an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify this new connection. Click the Next button.

•

Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the check boxes in the list, and click the Next button.

•

Configure the options for this connection. First select the unit for the spatial data of the shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information, see “Shapefile Synchronization Options” on page 15-590. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors.

•

You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor (see “Import Shapefile Link Editor” on page 15-591) for each element type you chose to import. Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor: –

Enter the name of the shapefile to which you wish to connect for the specified element type. Click the Ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for and select your shapefile.

–

Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model.

–

Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated shapefile column and unit if appropriate. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.

•

Check the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box if you wish to synchronize the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button.

•

If the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, choose whether you want to Synchronize In to the model from a shapefile, or Synchronize Out to the shapefile from the model.

•

Click the Finished button to synchronize the connection if the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, or to return to the Shapefile Connection Manager.


15-597


15-598


Chapter

16

Exchanging Data with CAD Software Exchanging data with CAD software includes:

16.1

•

“AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion” on page 16-599

•

“Importing and Exporting DXF Files” on page 16-604

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion Tip:

The Polyline to Pipe conversion cannot be undone. Be sure to save your project before you begin. You can import entities into an existing project. Polylines will automatically be connected to nodes within the specified Tolerance. You can add nodes to your project prior to performing the import.

This feature allows you to quickly construct a network based on the entities contained in an AutoCAD drawing. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, Line and Block entities can be converted as well. Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes and Blocks can be converted to any available node type. Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. This is due to the fact that a drawing can appear to be correct visually, but may contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be made up of two lines, one directly on top of another.


16-599

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion Tip:

Stand-Alone mode—You should take some time to clean up your AutoCAD drawing prior to performing the conversion. Look for entities that should not be converted, such as leader lines, and move them to their own layer. Turn off layers that you do not wish to convert. Do a quick review of your drawing and correct any potential conversion problems that you may find. After performing the conversion, we recommend that you use the converted file as a DXF Background (for more information, see “Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation” on page 16605). This will greatly enhance your review process. If you change the entities in your background drawing to a gray color from within AutoCAD, it will make it easier to distinguish between foreground elements and background entities. AutoCAD mode—You can interactively convert individual entities to pipes by using the Layout Tool.

To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During the conversion process, the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review. After performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window (see “Drawing Review Window” on page 5-267) will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that are encountered.

16.1.1

Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes Depending on how your drawing layers are set up, you may be able to save yourself a considerable amount of data entry time by converting your drawing in multiple passes. For example, if your 12-inch pipes are located on a 12InchPipes layer, 18-inch pipes are on a 18InchPipes layer, etc., you can import layers one at a time. Just set up your prototypes prior to importing that layer. To assist you in this process, your conversion settings will be retained between imports. Therefore, on subsequent passes you will need to revise your prototypes and specify the next layer to be imported. This same technique can be used when importing blocks.

16.1.2

Polyline to Pipe Wizard The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of converting your entities to elements.

16-600


Exchanging Data with CAD Software •

Step 1—The import behavior depends on the mode in which you are working: Stand-Alone—Specify the .DXF file that you would like to import. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only)” on page 16-601. AutoCAD—This step is skipped. You will be asked to select the entities to convert before accessing the Wizard.

•

Step 2—Specify the polyline to pipe conversion options. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 2” on page 16-602.

•

Step 3—Specify how T-intersections are to be handled. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 3” on page 16-602.

•

Step 4—Specify how blocks should be converted (for .DXF files that contain blocks). For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 4 (for .DXF Files with Blocks)” on page 16-603.

•

Step 5—Configure prototypes. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 5” on page 16-603.

•

Step 6—Specify the layers to be imported. For more information, see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 6” on page 16-604.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 1 (Stand-Alone Mode Only) This step allows you to specify the .DXF file to be imported. Note:

If you are running in AutoCAD mode, this step will be skipped. AutoCAD-mode users will be asked to select the entities to be converted before accessing the Polyline to Pipe wizard.

•

DXF Filename—Specify the name of the .DXF file you would like to import. Use the Browse button to select the file interactively.

•

DXF Unit—Specify the .DXF conversion unit (the unit that your .DXF file is in). For example, if your drawing is in SI units, specify meters (m). If your drawing is in architectural units, specify inches (in).


16-601

AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion

Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 2 Note:

If the conversion does not yield the desired results, you can repeat the conversion process using different settings. Be sure to save your project before performing the conversion.

This step allows you to specify the following Polyline to Pipe conversion options: •

Connectivity tolerance—Polylines whose endpoints fall within the specified tolerance will be connected to the same node. A default tolerance is supplied based on the current scale. This is generally a good starting point, but you may wish to increase or decrease this default tolerance depending on your particular drawing. If you complete the conversion process and find that the tolerance was not correct (pipes that should be connected were not, or vise versa), you may wish to repeat the conversion process using a new tolerance.

•

Specifying which entities to convert—You can optionally convert Polylines, Lines, or both. You generally want to convert both Polylines and Lines. However, if your drawing is set up so that Polylines are always used to represent pipes and Lines are used for annotation purposes, you may wish to convert only Polylines.

•

Handling missing nodes at polyline endpoints—A pipe can only be created if there is a node at both endpoints. If a node cannot be found at a polyline endpoint, a node must be added. Otherwise, the pipe cannot be converted. This option allows you to specify whether a node is created, and, if so, the default type of element to create.

In general, you will want to create a default node at polyline endpoints. However, if your network already contains nodes at polyline endpoints, or if your drawing contains blocks at polyline endpoints that are to be converted to nodes, you may wish to specify that the polyline not be converted. Polylines that cannot be converted, because one or both end nodes are missing, will be flagged for review at the end of the conversion process.


The tolerance that you specify in Step 2 (see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 2” on page 16-602) will also be used for Tintersection processing.

This step allows you to specify how T-intersections (pipe split candidates) should be handled. Nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of a pipe are referred to as pipe-split candidates. There are two ways to handle these:

16-602


Exchanging Data with CAD Software •

Join the pipes at the intersection—The pipe-split candidate will be used to split the intersecting pipe.

•

Do not join the intersecting pipes—Pipe-split candidates will be flagged for later review using the Drawing Review window.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 4 (for .DXF Files with Blocks) Note:

When you select an AutoCAD block, the preview pane will display the graphical representation of that block. This step will be skipped if there are no AutoCAD Blocks in your drawing.

If your AutoCAD drawing contains blocks, this step will appear, allowing you to convert AutoCAD blocks, if desired. If you would like to convert blocks to nodes, activate the Yes toggle. A table with two columns will appear, allowing you to map the AutoCAD blocks you would like to convert to any of the available node element types. The AutoCAD block column provides you with a list of available blocks to convert. The Element column provides you with a list of available node element types. For each AutoCAD block you would like to convert, specify the type of node element you would like to create.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard—Step 5 Before performing the conversion, you may wish to configure your prototypes with default data. During the conversion process, elements will be created using the specified defaults. Click a button to configure the defaults for the associated element.


16-603

Importing and Exporting DXF Files


It is recommended that you process your drawing prior to performing the import. If your drawing contains layers that you do not wish to import, turn them off from within AutoCAD and elements on those layers will be ignored during the import process.

Specify the layers that contain the entities you would like to convert. Use the Preview Drawing button to preview the elements on the selected layers. This step can be used in conjunction with the Prototype step to allow you to convert your drawing in multiple passes (for more information, see “Converting Your Drawing in Multiple Passes” on page 16-600).

Polyline Conversion Problem Dialog Box This feature is present in Stand-Alone mode only. This dialog box displays the reason that a polyline was not converted after running the Polyline to Pipe Wizard.

Drawing Preview Use the Preview Drawing button to view the elements in the .DFX file that will be converted. Next to the Preview Drawing button is a check box labeled Only include elements that will be converted. Turn the toggle on to preview the entities that will be converted. The entities to be converted are based on the settings you specified in the Polyline to Pipe Wizard (see “Polyline to Pipe Wizard” on page 16-600), such as type of line entities, blocks, and layers to be converted. Turn the toggle off to preview all entities.

16.2

Importing and Exporting DXF Files Importing and exporting DXF files includes:

16-604

•

“Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation” on page 16-605

•

“Exporting a DXF file” on page 16-605

•

“Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD” on page 16-605

•

“Advanced DXF Import Techniques” on page 16-606


Exchanging Data with CAD Software

16.2.1

Import a DXF File from AutoCAD or MicroStation To import background graphics in Stand-Alone mode from another drafting program, you must first export a .DXF file from your CAD program. This step is usually as simple as selecting an item from a menu in that program, such as File > Export > as DXF, or similar command. Once the .DXF file has been created, it can be imported into this program as follows: 1. Select the File > Import > DXF Background command to access the Import DXF File dialog box. 2. Select the .DXF file you wish to import, and click the Open button.

16.2.2

Exporting a DXF file Note:

You will be able to redefine all elements, except pipes, as blocks in AutoCAD. Pipes will be exported as polylines, so you will be able to set their line weight in AutoCAD.

A project can be saved in a format for use by AutoCAD, and many other common CAD-based applications. When you use the Export command, a window appears so that you can enter the file name, drive, and directory of the .DXF file you are saving. A status bar appears at the bottom of the screen as the file is being exported. To export the drawing plan view, select File > Export > DXF file.

16.2.3

Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD When exporting a DXF file from WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, pipes will be exported as Polyline entities, allowing you to change the line weights in AutoCAD. Miscellaneous elements (flow arrows, control symbols, etc), nodes, pumps, and valves will be exported as Block entities (named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW, HMI_PS, JUNCTION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and TCV) allowing you to redefine them in AutoCAD. If you would like to change the appearance of these blocks in your AutoCAD drawing, you can redefine them as follows: To begin, start AutoCAD and create thirteen separate drawing files named HMI_CKV.DWG, HMI_CSRC.DWG, HMI_FARW.DWG, HMI_PS.DWG, JUNCTION.DWG, TANK.DWG, RESERVOIR.DWG, PUMP.DWG, PRV.DWG, PBV.DWG, PSV.DWG, FCV.DWG and TCV.DWG. Save these drawings in your AutoCAD directory.


16-605

Importing and Exporting DXF Files Open the existing drawing that contains the network blocks. 1. At the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type INSERT and press enter. 2. At the Block Name: prompt, type JUNCTION=C: JUNCTION.DWG and press enter. 3. At this point, the block has been redefined and you can cancel this command. 4. Repeat these steps for the other named blocks. 5. Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Redefining Blocks.

16.2.4

Advanced DXF Import Techniques Note:

Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Importing .DXF files.

To import the network .DXF file into an existing AutoCAD drawing file, you will have to perform a couple of preliminary steps: 1. In your existing drawing, at the AutoCAD Command: prompt, type (regapp Wtrc) and press Enter. This will register the program application ID. Be sure to include the parenthesis. 2. Define blocks named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW, HMI_PS, JUNCTION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and TCV. Tip:

To save time, you can perform the above steps in a new AutoCAD drawing file and save it with the name WaterCAD.DWG. Now, instead of performing the above steps, insert this new drawing into your existing drawing file immediately before importing a network .DXF file.

You are now ready to import a .DXF file into your existing AutoCAD drawing.

16-606


Chapter

Additional Features for AutoCAD Note:

17

AutoCAD R14 is not supported in WaterCAD.

WaterCAD features optional support for AutoCAD integration. You can determine if you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your WaterCAD by using the Help > About menu option. Click the Registration button to view the feature options that have been purchased with your application license. If AutoCAD support is enabled, then you will be able to run your WaterCAD application in both AutoCAD and StandAlone mode. The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the Stand-Alone base product. Once you become familiar with the Stand-Alone mode, you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode. In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX WaterCAD client layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native WaterCAD network model while in AutoCAD. Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include: •

Lay out network pipes and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.

•

Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position WaterCAD elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.

•

Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on WaterCAD model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.

•

Output contours to your AutoCAD drawing, and interactively label them.

•

Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.

Additional features of the AutoCAD version includes:


17-607

AutoCAD Environment

17.1

•

“AutoCAD Environment” on page 17-608

•

“AutoCAD Project Files” on page 17-610

•

“WaterCAD Element Properties” on page 17-611

•

“Working with Elements” on page 17-612

•

“Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands” on page 17-614

•

“Undo/Redo” on page 17-617

•

“Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements” on page 17-618

•

“Special Considerations” on page 17-619

AutoCAD Environment The AutoCAD environment includes:

17.1.1

•

“AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout” on page 17-608

•

“Toolbars” on page 17-609

•

“Drawing Setup” on page 17-609

•

“Symbol Visibility” on page 17-609

•

“Rebuild Figure Labels” on page 17-610

AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout In AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods’ products provide a set of extended options and functionality beyond those available in Stand-Alone mode (for more information, see “Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-48). This additional functionality provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within AutoCAD. Key differences between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode include:

17-608

•

Element editing functionality has been extended by adding the Scale Elements and Rotate Labels commands, accessible under the Edit > Modify Elements menu, and the Change Widths command under the Edit > Pipes menu.

•

You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the Element Properties command (see “Element Properties” on page 17-612) under the Tools menu. For example, you can assign a specific layer for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text style to be applied.


Additional Features for AutoCAD

17.1.2

Toolbars In AutoCAD mode, the following toolbars are available:

17.1.3

•

Command Tools—Enables the Command Toolbar for quick access to the main commands, including computations, tables, graphic reports, Quick View, and direct access to the Haestad Methods Web Site.

•

Layout Tools—Enables the Layout Toolbar for access to the Tool Palette.

•

Analysis Toolbar—Enables the Analysis Toolbar to control the current scenario and provide quick access to the Scenario Manager (see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366), the Active Topology Selection dialog box (see “Active Topology Selection Dialog Box” on page 9-420), the Darwin Calibrator (see “Darwin Calibrator” on page 10-421), and the Capital and Energy Cost Managers (see “Capital Cost Manager” on page 11-448 and “Energy Cost Manager” on page 11-452), as well as time and animation controls.

Drawing Setup When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with Haestad Methods’ products in many different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Haestad Methods’ product elements can only be created and edited in model space.

17.1.4

Symbol Visibility Note:

In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a selected group of element labels, you should move them to another layer that can be frozen or turned off. For more information on restoring labels that have been erased using the native AutoCAD command, see “Rebuild Figure Labels” on page 17-610.

In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in the Drawing Options dialog box. The following commands allow you to customize the drawing by turning the visibility of flow arrows and labels on or off: •

To turn on the element labels, type: WTRCLABELSON

•

To turn them off, type: WTRCLABELSOFF


17-609

AutoCAD Project Files

17.1.5

Rebuild Figure Labels When running WaterCAD in the AutoCAD mode, it is possible to delete associated element label text entities. Element labels which have been erased can be selectively undeleted using the command WTRCREBUILDLABELS.

17.2

AutoCAD Project Files When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, there are two files that fundamentally define a WaterCAD model project: •

Drawing File (.DWG)—The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that serves as the model background.

•

Model File (.WCD)—The native WaterCAD model database file that contains all the element properties, along with other important model data. WaterCAD .WCD files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone mode. These files may be copied and sent to other WaterCAD users who are interested in running your project. This is the most important file for the WaterCAD model.

The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .WCD file. Since the .WCD file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using Stand-Alone mode, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you ever modify the model in Stand-Alone mode and then later load the AutoCAD .DWG file, the WaterCAD program will compare file dates, and automatically use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.

17.2.1

Drawing Synchronization Whenever you open a WaterCAD-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the WaterCAD model server will start. The first thing that the application will do is load the associated WaterCAD database (.WCD) file. If the time stamps of the drawing and database file are different, WaterCAD will automatically check synchronization. This protects against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the WaterCAD database file in Stand-Alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the WaterCAD application is not loaded. The synchronization check will occur in two stages:

17-610


Additional Features for AutoCAD •

First, WaterCAD will compare the drawing model elements with those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. WaterCAD enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .WCD file during a Stand-Alone session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, WaterCAD will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.

•

After network topology has been synchronized, WaterCAD will compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions. Again, any differences between the drawing client and server data will be listed, and a message box will open to give you a chance to indicate which state, drawing, or model server should be adopted during the second stage of synchronization.

You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the command WTRCSYNCSERVER.

17.2.2

Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg Note:

If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example), restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As command to save the drawing and model data to a different name.

AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided, as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the default directory. Since Haestad Methods’ modeling products create model databases associated with the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name puts you at risk of causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing and the Haestad Methods modeling files.

17.3

WaterCAD Element Properties WaterCAD element properties includes: •

“Element Properties” on page 17-612

•

“Select Layer” on page 17-612

•

“Select Text Style” on page 17-612


17-611

Working with Elements

17.3.1

Element Properties When working in the AutoCAD mode, this feature will display a tabbed dialog box with tables containing different model element types and their associated properties, along with the properties of the element’s layer, label, and annotation. To modify an attribute, double-click each associated grid cell. Setting changes made in this dialog box will be used for any newly created elements. Property changes will be performed on all elements of the given type. If the Apply to Existing Object check box is selected, modifications made in this dialog box are performed on a global basis. To restrict global changes to a certain layer for a particular element type, use the *current* option setting for the attribute of interest.

17.3.2

Select Layer When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the layer name (*current* by default) in the Layer column of the Element Properties dialog box. To access this, select Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the available layers and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a layer. The *current* option will use whatever layer is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing.

17.3.3

Select Text Style When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog box appears when you double-click the text style name (*current* by default) in the Text Style column of the Labels and Annotation tabs of the Element Properties dialog box. This is accessed by selecting Tools > Element Properties. It displays a list of the available text styles and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a text style. The *current* option will use whatever text style is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing.

17.4

Working with Elements Working with elements includes:

17-612

•

“Edit Element” on page 17-613

•

“Deleting Elements” on page 17-613

•

“Modifying Elements” on page 17-613



17.4.1

Edit Element In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection will open an element editor for any specific element. Select Edit > Edit Element, then select an element. This command is also available by choosing the Select tool, then clicking an element in the drawing pane. In addition, double-clicking an element will open the element editor for that element. Note:

Double-clicking an element when other elements are selected will open the AutoCAD Properties dialog box rather than the element editor.

The Edit Element command works with the current selection to allow you to generate filtered reports. For more information on working with selections, see “Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode)” on page 5-260.

17.4.2

Deleting Elements In AutoCAD mode, this command removes all elements in the current selection. For more information on working with selections, see “Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode)” on page 5-260.

17.4.3

Modifying Elements In AutoCAD mode, these commands are selected from the Edit menu. They are used for scaling and rotating model entities.

Scale Elements In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection resizes an element based upon a scale factor. After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the scale factor to be applied.

Rotate Labels In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection rotates the figure label. After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the desired rotation in degrees.

Modify Pipes Pipes (see “Pressure Pipe Editor” on page 6-277) may follow a non-linear alignment, since in pressure systems minor losses can be safely lumped with friction losses without significantly affecting model accuracy. WaterCAD uses the following specialized commands for editing pipes in AutoCAD:


17-613

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands •

Insert Bend—Use this command to add a bend to a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe to bend. Select the pipe and the location you want the bend to appear. The pipe alignment will automatically conform to this location.

•

Remove Bend—Use this command to remove a specific bend from a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe and the specific bend to remove.

•

Remove All Bends—Use this command to completely straighten a pipe that contains bends. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe, and all bends will disappear.

•

Change Widths—Use this command to change pipe widths. After choosing this command, select a pipe or group of pipes and enter the desired width. Note that the width entered is equivalent to the AutoCAD polyline width.

Change Pipe Widths In AutoCAD mode, this menu option is used to change the thickness of the pipe width. You are first prompted to select pipes, and is then prompted to enter a new pipe width to be assigned to the pipe figures.

Edit Elements In AutoCAD mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select figures on which to build a table.

17.5

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands Working with elements using AutoCAD commands includes:

17-614

•

“WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities” on page 17-615

•

“AutoCAD Commands” on page 17-615

•

“Explode Elements” on page 17-616

•

“Moving Elements” on page 17-616

•

“Moving Element Labels” on page 17-616

•

“Snap Menu” on page 17-617



17.5.1

WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities The primary AutoCAD-based WaterCAD element entities—pipes, tanks, reservoirs, pumps and valves—are all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database. This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see “AutoCAD Commands” on page 17-615) as you normally would, and the model database will be updated automatically to reflect these changes. It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state. Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes. Using ObjectARX enables the implementation of highly specialized editing actions that are not available with standard AutoCAD entities. Two examples of this specialized behavior are element morphs (see “Morphing Elements” on page 5-258) and pipe splits (see “Splitting Pipes” on page 5-258). Again, these modifications will trigger an automatic update of the model network topology and associated element properties. Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during Undo and Redo transactions. A custom model element has certain native text entities associated with it for displaying label and annotated property values. These associated label and annotation entities may be edited separately from the model element itself. However, most drawing edits made directly to a model element will be applied in the appropriate fashion against its associated label and annotation entities. Thus, if you drag an element to a new location, the annotation and label locations will update as well.

17.5.2

AutoCAD Commands When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods’ products make use of all the advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For example, Haestad Methods’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using common AutoCAD commands.


17-615

Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands

17.5.3

Explode Elements In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all Haestad Methods custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a Haestad Methods custom entity is exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded drawing under a separate filename. Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals who do not own a Haestad Methods Product license, since a fully exploded drawing will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see “Working with Proxies” on page 17-619.

17.5.4

Moving Elements When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements. For more information, see “Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode)” on page 5-260. To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the new location of the node.

17.5.5

Moving Element Labels When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels. For more information, see “Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode)” on page 5-259. To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will be moved without the element.

17-616



17.5.6

Snap Menu When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk AutoCAD documentation for more information.

17.6

Undo/Redo Note:

If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single redo level. The WaterCAD undo/redo is faster than the native AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back WaterCAD model edits, it is recommended that you use the menu-based WaterCAD undo/redo. If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore WaterCAD elements that have been previously deleted, morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in situations where the WaterCAD command history has been deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check your data carefully.

In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the Edit menu, you have access to WaterCAD undo and redo. Alternatively, you can perform the native AutoCAD undo and redo by typing at the AutoCAD command line. The implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct. The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on WaterCAD elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions. Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when any WaterCAD entities are affected by the operation. WaterCAD will then synchronize the model to the drawing state. Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model server’s managed command history. If the drawing’s state is not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server, WaterCAD will delete the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and server models.


17-617

Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements

17.7

Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements WaterCAD features powerful tools dedicated to assisting you in building WaterCAD models from existing AutoCAD drawing information. In addition to the standard GIS shapefile conversion options, there are two specific commands available in the AutoCAD platform that will be especially useful to the AutoCAD modeler:

17.7.1

•

“Layout Pipe Using Entity” on page 17-618

•

“Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes” on page 17-618

Layout Pipe Using Entity Note:

This command is extremely useful for constructing pipes that follow a curved alignment. In these cases, use an arc as the defining template entity for the pipe creation.

In addition to the standard options available under the Pipe layout command (accessed by clicking the button in the WaterCAD Tools toolbar, or by selecting the Tools > Layout > Pipe menu option), you may elect to use an existing AutoCAD line, polyline, or arc as a template to define an equivalent WaterCAD pipe or series of pipes. While you are in the Pipe Layout command, you may invoke the Entity conversion option by using the Entity keyword, or by selecting Entity from the right-mouse button context menu. Once selected, you will be prompted to choose an entity to use as a basis for a new pipe, and conditionally specify the type of nodal WaterCAD element to use at each end of the pipe.

17.7.2

Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes Note:

This is an automated batch process that requires some care and attention with respect to the selection set that is going to be used as a basis for generating actual WaterCAD model elements. For instance, it may be desirable to select like-sized pipe elements during each pass. This way, you can use the prototyping capabilities to their greatest advantage. A little time spent in planning and strategizing a series of individual conversion steps will go a long way toward preventing confusion, which could necessitate later re-conversions.

When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this special AutoCAD command allows you to use a selection of AutoCAD entities—arcs, lines, polylines, and blocks—as a defining template set for the creation of equivalent WaterCAD elements. This command performs the element generation in batch fashion. You are prompted

17-618


Additional Features for AutoCAD for the selection of entities to convert, and the selection is followed by the Polyline to Pipe Conversion Wizard that leads you through a sequence of steps defining the basis of the batch conversion. For more information, see “AutoCAD Polyline-to-Pipe Conversion” on page 16-599.

17.8

Special Considerations Special considerations include:

17.8.1

•

“Import WaterCAD” on page 17-619

•

“Working with Proxies” on page 17-619

Import WaterCAD When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected WaterCAD data (.WCD) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.WCD. Whenever you save changes to the network model through WaterCAD, the associated .WCD data file is updated and can be loaded into WaterCAD 4.0 or higher.

17.8.2

Working with Proxies If you open a WaterCAD drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that does not have the WaterCAD application installed, you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because the executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the WaterCAD modeling elements are not associated with the WaterCAD native database. WaterCAD proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an AutoCAD station that is running a WaterCAD application, the application will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine. (for more information, see “Drawing Synchronization” on page 17-610).


17-619

Special Considerations

17-620


Chapter

Automated Skeletonization

18

Skeletonization is the process of selecting only the parts of the hydraulic network that have a significant impact on the behavior of the system for inclusion in a water distribution model. For example, including each individual service connection, valve, and every one of the numerous other elements that make up the actual network would be a huge undertaking for larger systems. The portions of the network that are not modeled are not ignored; rather, the effects of these elements are accounted for within the parts of the system that are included in the model. A fully realized water distribution model can be an enormously complex network consisting of thousands of discrete elements, and not all of these elements are necessary for every application of the model. When elements that are extraneous to the desired purpose are present, the efficiency, usability, and focus of the model can be substantially effected, and calculation and display refresh times can be seriously impaired. In addition to the logistics of creating and maintaining a model that employs little or no skeletonization, a high level of detail might be unnecessary when incorporating all of these elements in the model has no significant effect on the accuracy of the results that are generated. Different levels of skeletonization are appropriate depending on the intended use of the model. For an energy cost analysis, a higher degree of skeletonization is preferable and for fire flow and water quality analysis, minimal skeletonization is called for. This means that multiple models are required for different applications. Because of this necessity, various automated skeletonization techniques have been developed to assist with the skeletonization process. Automated Skeletonization includes: •

A generic skeletonization example—For an example of skeletonization, see “Skeletonization Example” on page 18-622.

•

What automated skeletonizers generally do—For a discussion of common, generic approaches to automated skeletonization, see “Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques” on page 18-623.


18-621

Skeletonization Example

18.1

•

How Skelebrator approaches skeletonization—For a discussion of the features and advantages of Haestad Methods’ Skelebrator, see “Skeletonization Using Skelebrator” on page 18-626.

•

Using the Skelebrator software—For reference information on using the Skelebrator software to perform skeletonizations of networks, see “Using the Skelebrator Software” on page 18-633.

Skeletonization Example The following series of diagrams illustrate various levels of skeletonization that can be applied. The diagram below shows a network subdivision before any skeletonization has been performed.

As you can see, there is a junction at each service tap and a pipe and node at each house for a total of 48 junctions and 47 pipes within this subdivision. To perform a low level of skeletonization, the nodes at each house could be removed along with the connecting pipes that tie in to the service line. The demands at each house would be moved to the corresponding service tap. The resulting network would now look like this:

There are now 19 junctions and 18 pipes in the subdivision. The demands that were assigned to the junctions that were removed are moved to the nearest upstream junction. The only information that has been lost is the data at the service connections that were removed.

18-622


Automated Skeletonization A further level of skeletonization is possible if you remove the service taps and model only the ends and intersections of the main pipes. In this case, re-allocating the demands is a bit more complex. The most accurate approximation can be obtained by associating the demands with the junction that is closest to the original demand junction (as determined by following the service pipe). In the following diagram, these service areas are marked with a dotted line.

To fully skeletonize this subdivision, the pipes and junctions that serve the subdivision can be removed, and the demands can be assigned to the point where the branch connects to the rest of the network, as shown in the following diagram:

As can be seen by this example, numerous levels of skeletonization can be applied; determining the extent of the skeletonization depends on the purpose of the model. At each progressive level of skeletonization, more elements are removed, thus the amount of available information is decreased. Deciding whether this information is necessary to the intended use of the model dictates the point at which the model is optimally skeletonized.

18.2

Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques The following are descriptions of the skeletonization techniques that have been employed to achieve a level of automation of the skeletonization process. Generally, a combination of these techniques proves to be more effective than any one on its own. Common techniques include: •

“Generic—Data Scrubbing” on page 18-624


18-623

Common Automated Skeletonization Techniques

18.2.1

•

“Generic—Branch Trimming” on page 18-624

•

“Generic—Series Pipe Removal” on page 18-625

Generic—Data Scrubbing Data scrubbing is the simplest, and generally the first, step of the skeletonization process. In fact, some automated skeletonizers rely entirely on this reduction technique. (Data scrubbing is called Smart Pipe Removal in Skelebrator.) Data scrubbing consists of removing all pipes that meet user-specified criteria, such as diameter, roughness, or other attributes. Criteria combinations can also be applied, such as: Remove all 2-inch pipes that are less than 200 feet in length. This step of skeletonization is especially useful when the model has been created from GIS data, since GIS maps generally contain much more information than is necessary for the hydraulic model. Examples of elements that are commonly included in GIS maps, but not necessarily in the distribution model, are service connections and isolation valves. Removing these elements generally has a negligible impact on the accuracy of the model, depending on the application for which the model is being used. The primary drawback of this type of skeletonization is that there is generally no network awareness involved. No consideration of the hydraulic effects of a pipe’s removal is taken into account, so there is a large potential for errors to be made by inadvertent pipe removal or by causing network disconnections. (Haestad Methods Skelebrator does account for hydraulic effect.)

18.2.2

Generic—Branch Trimming Branch trimming—referred to as Branch Collapsing in Skelebrator—is the process of removing short dead-end links and their corresponding junctions. Since pipes and junctions are removed by this process, you specify the criteria for both types of element. An important element of this skeletonization type is the reallocation of demands that are associated with junctions that are removed. The demand associated with a dead-end junction is assigned to the junction at the beginning of the branch. Branch trimming is a recursive process; as dead-end pipes and junctions are removed, other junctions and pipes can become the new dead-ends—if they meet the trimming criteria, these elements may also be removed. You specify whether this process continues until all applicable branches have been trimmed or if the process should stop after a specified number of trimming levels. Branch trimming is an effective skeletonization technique; dead-end junctions with no loading have no effect on the model, and dead end junctions that do have demands are accounted for at the point through which this flow would pass anyway (without skeletonization), so the hydraulic behavior of the network as a whole is unaffected.

18-624


Automated Skeletonization The only situation that presents a drawback to this type of skeletonization is the obvious one; information and results cannot be obtained from non-existent elements. During water quality or fire flow analysis, information on these trimmed elements may be desired but unavailable. Again, having multiple models utilizing various levels of skeletonization is the solution to this potential drawback.

18.2.3

Generic—Series Pipe Removal Series pipe removal, also known as intermediate node removal or pipe merging, is the next skeletonization technique. It works by removing nodes that have only two adjacent pipes and merging these pipes into a single one. As with Branch trimming, any demands associated with the junctions being removed must be reallocated to nearby nodes, and generally a number of strategies for this allocation can be specified. An evenly-distributed strategy simply divides the demand equally between the two end nodes of the newly merged pipe. A distance-weighted technique divides the demands between the two end nodes based on their proximity to the node being removed. These strategies can be somewhat limiting, and maintaining an acceptable level of network hydraulic precision while removing nodes and merging pipes is made more difficult with this restrictive range of choices. Other criteria are also used to set the allowable tolerances for relative differences in the attributes of adjacent pipes and nodes. For example, an important consideration is the elevation difference between nodes along a pipe-merge candidate. If the junctions mark critical elevation information, this elevation (and by extension, pressure) data would be lost if this node attribute is not accounted for when the pipes are merged. Another set of criteria would include pipe attributes. This information is needed to prevent pipes that are too different (as defined by the tolerance settings) hydraulically from being merged. It is important to compare certain pipe attributes before merging them to ensure that the hydraulic behavior will approximate the conditions before the merge. However, requiring that pipes have exactly matching criteria limits the number of elements that could potentially be removed, thus reducing the level of skeletonization that is possible. In other words, although it is desirable for potential pipe merge candidates to have similar hydraulic attributes, substantial skeletonization is difficult to achieve if there are even very slight variances between the hydraulic attributes of the pipes, since an exact match is required. This process is, however, very good at merging pipes whose adjacent nodes have no demand and that have exactly the same attributes. Removing these zero-demand junctions and merging the corresponding pipes has no effect on the model’s hydraulics, except for loss of pressure information at the removed junctions. Series pipe removal is called Series Pipe Merging in Skelebrator.


18-625

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator

18.3

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator Skeletonization Using Skelebrator discusses the advantages and approach to skeletonization of Haestad Methods’ Skelebrator process. Skelebrator includes:

18.3.1

•

“Generic—Data Scrubbing” on page 18-624

•

“Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing” on page 18-627

•

“Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging” on page 18-628

•

“Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging” on page 18-630

•

“Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features” on page 18-631

•

“Skelebrator—Conclusion” on page 18-632

Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal The first step that Skelebrator performs is Smart Pipe Removal, which is an improved version of the data scrubbing technique described in “Generic—Data Scrubbing” on page 18-624. The main drawback of standard data scrubbing procedures is that they have no awareness of the effects that removing elements from the model will have on the calculated hydraulics. This can easily cause network disconnections and lead to a decrease in the accuracy of the simulated network behavior. Skelebrator eliminates the possibility of inadvertent network disconnections caused by the data scrubbing technique. This is accomplished by utilizing a sophisticated network-walking algorithm. This algorithm marks pipes as safe to be removed if the removal of the pipe so marked would not invalidate, or disconnect, the network. For a pipe to be removed, it must: •

Meet the user-specified removal criteria

•

Be marked safe for removal

•

Not be marked as non-removable

•

Not be connected to a non-removable junction (to prevent orphaning)

This added intelligence protects the model’s integrity by eliminating the possibility of inadvertently introducing catastrophic errors during the model reduction process. This innovation is not available in other automated skeletonization applications; a likely result of performing skeletonization without this intelligent safety net is the invalidation of the network caused by the removal of elements that are critical to the performance and accuracy of the model. At the very least, verifying that no important

18-626


Automated Skeletonization elements have been removed during this skeletonization step and re-creating any elements that have been erroneously removed can be a lengthy and error-prone process. These considerations are addressed automatically and transparently by the Skelebrator’s advanced network traversal algorithm.

18.3.2

Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing Branch Collapsing is a fundamental skeletonization technique; the improvements over the branch trimming that was described in “Generic—Branch Trimming” on page 18624 that Skelebrator brings to the table are primarily a matter of flexibility, efficiency, and usability. The branch trimming method utilized by other automated skeletonization applications allows a limited range of removal criteria; in some cases, just elevation and length. Workarounds are required if another removal criteria is desired, resulting in more steps to obtain the desired results. Conversely, Skelebrator innately provides a wide range of removal criteria, increasing the scope of this skeletonization step and eliminating the need for inefficient manual workarounds. The following diagrams illustrate the results of Branch Collapsing.

Figure 18-1: Before Branch Collapsing

Figure 18-2: After One Branch Collapsing Iteration


18-627


Figure 18-3: After Two Branch Collapsing Iterations (Branch is Completely Removed)

18.3.3

Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging Tip:

If you want to combine only pipes with the same hydraulic characteristics (i.e., diameter and roughness) then, to a series pipe removal operation add a pipe tolerance of 0.0 and a roughness tolerance of 0.0. Also make sure to deselect the Use Equivalent Pipes option.

The Skelebrator Series Pipe Merging technique overcomes the basic drawbacks to series pipe removal that were mentioned previously (see “Generic—Series Pipe Removal” on page 18-625) in two ways: First, the demand reallocation strategies normally available for this step are not comprehensive enough, limiting you to choosing from an even demand distribution or a distance-weighted one. This limitation can hinder your ability to maintain an acceptable level of hydraulic parity. To overcome this limitation, Skelebrator provides a greater range of demand reallocation strategies, including: Equally Distributed, Proportional to Existing Load (at the ends of the new pipe), Proportional to Dominant Criteria, and User Defined Ratio. Evenly Distributed divides the demand equally between the two end nodes of the newly merged pipe. The Proportional to Existing Load divides demand based on the amount of demand already associated with the end nodes. The Proportional to Dominant Criteria strategy can supply the distance-weighted option, and allows other pipe attributes to be weighting factors as well (for example, roughness or diameter). The User-Defined Ratio option assigns the specified proportion of demand to the upstream junction and the remainder of the demand to the downstream one. These additional choices allow the proper simulation of a wider range of hydraulic behaviors. Second, and more importantly, this technique is effective because it lets you specify tolerances that determine if the pipes to be merged are similar enough that combining them into a single pipe will not significantly impact the hydraulic behavior of the network. This increases the number of potential merge candidates over requiring exact matches, thereby increasing the scope of skeletonization but affecting hydraulics, since differences in hydraulic properties are ignored.

18-628



J1

J2

P1

P2

J3

Length: 250 ft.

Length: 350 ft.

Diameter: 8 in.

Diameter: 8 in.

Roughness: 120

Roughness: 120

Figure 18-4: Before Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes)

J1

P1

J3

Length: 600 ft. Diameter: 8 in. Roughness: 120

Figure 18-5: After Series Pipe Merging (Exact Match Pipes) To counter the hydraulic effects of merging pipes with different hydraulic attributes, a unique hydraulic equivalency feature has been developed. This feature works by determining the combination of pipe attributes that will most closely mimic the hydraulic behavior of the pipes to be merged, and applying these attributes to the newly merged pipe. By generating an equivalent pipe from two non-identical pipes, the number of possible removal candidates (and thus, the potential level of skeletonization) is greatly increased. This hydraulic equivalency feature is integral to the application of a high degree of effective skeletonization, the goal of which is the removal of as many elements as possible without significantly impacting the accuracy of the model. Only Skelebrator implements this concept of hydraulic equivalency, breaking the barrier that is raised by other skeletonizers that only allow exactly matched pipes to be merged by this process.


18-629


J1

P1

J2

P2

J3

Length: 350 ft.

Length: 250 ft.

Diameter: 8 in.

Diameter: 6 in.

Roughness: 120

Roughness: 120

Figure 18-6: Before Series Pipe Merging (Different Diameters)

J1

Length: 600 ft.

J3

P1

OR

Length: 600 ft.

Diameter: 8 in.

Diameter: 6 in.

Roughness: 77

Roughness: 163

Figure 18-7: After Series Pipe Merging (Using Skelebrator’s Hydraulic Equivalency feature)

18.3.4

Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging Parallel Pipe Merging is the process of combining pipes that share the same two end nodes into a single hydraulically equivalent pipe. This skeletonization strategy relies on the hydraulic equivalency feature described in “Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging” on page 18-628. To merge parallel pipes, you specify which of the two pipes is the “dominant” one. The length of the dominant pipe becomes the length of the merged pipe, as does either the diameter or the roughness value of the dominant pipe. You specify which of the two attributes to retain (diameter or roughness) and the program determines what the value of the other attribute should be in order to maintain hydraulic equivalence. For example, the dominant pipe has a diameter of 10 inches and a C factor of 120; one of these values is retained. The pipe that will be removed has a diameter of 6 inches and a C factor of 120. If the 10-inch diameter value is retained, the program performs hydraulic equivalence calculations to determine what the roughness of the new pipe should be in order to account for the additional carrying capacity of the parallel pipe that is being removed.

18-630


Automated Skeletonization Because this skeletonization method removes only pipes and accounts for the effect of the pipes that are removed, the network hydraulics remain intact while increasing the overall potential for a higher level of skeletonization.

Figure 18-8: Before Parallel Pipe Merging

Figure 18-9: After Parallel Pipe Merging

18.3.5

Skelebrator—Other Skelebrator Features Skelebrator offers numerous other features that improve the flexibility and ease-of-use of the skeletonization process. The Skeletonization Preview option allows you to preview the effects that a given skeletonization step, or method, will have on the model. This important tool can assist the modeler in finding potential problems with the reduced model before a single element is removed from it. Before skeletonization is begun or between steps, you can use Skelebrator’s protected element feature to manually mark any junctions or pipes as non-removable. Any pipes marked in this way will always be preserved by the Skelebrator, even if the elements meet the removal criteria of the skeletonization process in question. This option provides the modeler with an additional level of control as well as improving the flexibility of the process.


18-631

Skeletonization Using Skelebrator The ability of the Skelebrator to preserve network integrity by not removing elements that would cause the network to be invalidated is an important timesaving feature that can prevent this common error from happening. There may be circumstances, however, when you do not want or need this additional check, so this option can be switched off. For the utmost control over the skeletonization process, you can perform a manual skeletonization. This feature allows you to step through each individual removal candidate. The element can then be removed or marked to be excluded from the skeletonization. You can save this process and choices you made and reuse them in an automatic skeletonization of the same model.

18.3.6

Skelebrator—Conclusion With the overwhelming amount of data now available to the water distribution modeler, some degree of skeletonization is appropriate for practically every model, although the extent of the skeletonization varies widely depending on the intended purpose of the model. In light of this, it has become desirable to maintain multiple models of the same system, each for use in different types of analysis and design. A model that has been minimally skeletonized serves as a water quality and fire flow analysis model, while energy cost estimating is performed using a model with a higher degree of skeletonization. Creating a number of reduced models with varying levels of skeletonization can be a lengthy and tedious process, which is where the automated techniques described above demonstrate their value. To ensure that the skeletonization process produces a reduced model with the minimum number of elements that is necessary for the intended application while simultaneously maintaining an accurate simulation of network behavior, the automated skeletonization routine must be flexible enough to accommodate a wide variety of conditions. Skelebrator provides an unmatched level of flexibility, providing numerous demand reallocation and element removal strategies. It alone amongst automated skeletonizers maximizes the potential level of skeletonization by introducing the concept of Hydraulic Equivalence, eliminating the limitation posed by exact attribute matching requirements. Another distinction is the advanced network walking algorithm employed by Skelebrator, which ensures that your model remains connected and valid, thereby greatly reducing the possibility for inadvertent element removal errors. These features, and others such as the Skeletonization Preview (see “Skeletonization Preview” on page 18-637) and Manual Skeletonization (see “Manual Skeletonization” on page 18-639), greatly expedite and simplify the process of generating multiple, special-purpose water distribution models, each skeletonized to the optimal level for their intended purpose.

18-632



18.4

Using the Skelebrator Software Skelebrator is available for use with a number of products. Skelebrator has slightly different behavior and features in some environments. It is available for: •

WaterCAD v6 or higher (Stand Alone and AutoCAD)

•

WaterGEMS Modeler

•

WaterGEMS (ArcCatalog and ArcMap)

This section describes using the Skelebrator software. When using Skelebrator, please note: •

We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your model as a safe guard before proceeding with Skelebration. In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap), there is no ability to undo your changes after they have been made.

•

We strongly recommended that you eliminate all scenarios other than the one to be skeletonized from a model prior to skeletonization.

•

For information on the reasons for these recommendations, see “Important Skelebrator Information” on page 18-653. Note:

Skelebrator reduces a WaterGEMS model and applies its changes to the model’s WaterGEMS datastore, which is contained within an .MDB file. Skelebrator cannot view or make changes to a standard GIS geodatabase. To use Skelebrator with a GIS geodatabase, you must first use ModelBuilder to create a WaterGEMS datastore from the GIS data. To use Skelebrator with a CAD drawing, you must first perform a Polyline-to-Pipe conversion to create a WaterGEMS datastore from the CAD file.

Using Skelebrator includes: •

“Skeletonizer Manager” on page 18-634

•

“Manual Skeletonization” on page 18-639

•

“Smart Pipe Removal Operations” on page 18-642

•

“Branch Collapsing Operations” on page 18-644

•

“Series Pipe Merging Operations” on page 18-644

•

“Parallel Pipe Merging Operations” on page 18-648

•

“Add New Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650


18-633

Using the Skelebrator Software

18.4.1

•

“Rename Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650

•

“Skelebrator Progress Summary” on page 18-650

•

“Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-650

Skeletonizer Manager Use Skelebrator’s skeletonization manager to define how you are going to skeletonize your network. The basic unit in Skelebrator is an operation. An operation defines and encapsulates the settings required to be defined in order to perform some reduction process on your hydraulic network. Skelebrator provides these types of operation that may be used to reduce the size of your mode: •

Smart Pipe Removal (See “Skelebrator—Smart Pipe Removal” on page 18-626)

•

Branch Collapsing (See “Skelebrator—Branch Collapsing” on page 18-627)

•

Series Pipe Merging (See “Skelebrator—Series Pipe Merging” on page 18-628)

•

Parallel Pipe Merging (See “Skelebrator—Parallel Pipe Merging” on page 18630)

To use Skeletonizer Manager: 1. Click the skeletonization technique you want to use: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, Parallel Pipe Merging. 2. Click New. 3. Type the name you want to use for the operation you are creating, or keep the default name. 4. Click OK. The respective operation editor will be displayed. 5. Choose your settings and conditions. 6. Click OK. New—Click New to add a skeletonization operation. This adds an operation for the option that is currently selected: Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging. Skelebrator performs a single operation at a time. An operation consists of the strategy to use (Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, etc.) and the settings and conditions specific to that operation. One operation might be branch trim pipes < 6-in. diameter. Edit—Click Edit (or double-click an operation) to edit the currently selected operation. If there is no operation listed, you must first Add one by selecting New. Rename—Click Rename to rename the currently-selected operation.

18-634


Automated Skeletonization Duplicate—Click Duplicate to create a copy of the currently-selected operation. You can rename and edit the copy as needed. Delete—Click Delete to remove the currently selected operations from the list. Go—To run automatic skeletonization and apply your skeletonization operations to your model, click Go. The run is executed using the selected (highlighted) operations. You can select more than one operation. Manual—Click Manual to manually run the skeletonization operation. Manual skeletonization lets you conduct skeletonizations in a concise and controlled manner, whilst viewing the pipes that will be removed and gives you the opportunity to protect some of those pipes on a real-time basis. For more information, see “Manual Skeletonization” on page 18-639. Note:

The preview feature is not available when running WaterGEMS from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.

Preview—To preview the results of your skeletonization, click Preview. For more information, see “Skeletonization Preview” on page 18-637. Export—Select Export to export the current Skelebrator setup. All your defined Skelebrator operations, batch run settings, and protected element settings will be saved to an .SKE file of your choice. (An .SKE file is a file in XML, eXtensible Markup Language, format that contains all of the settings related to your skelebration.) We strongly recommended that you do not manually modify the contents of any .SKE file. Import—Select Import to import a previously exported Skelebrator setup (*.SKE file). Note:

Protected Element Settings are saved as references to the originally skeletonized model. Using the Skelebrator protected element settings with a different model is likely to result in different (and unintended) elements being protected from skeletonization. If you wish to re-run previously-saved skeletonizations on the original model, be sure to save your Skelebrator setup with the original model or in a place with a name that make it obvious that the export file belongs to that particular model. If you are not using the protected element feature, then this caution does not apply. For more information, see “Important Skelebrator Information” on page 18-653.

Protected Pipes—Click the Protected Pipes button to specify that certain pipes in your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletonization process. Under all circumstances, pipes listed as protected will not be removed by Skelebrator. For more information, see “Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions” on page 18-641.


18-635

Using the Skelebrator Software Protected Junctions—Click the Protected Junctions button to specify that certain junctions in your model are protected from being removed as part of the skeletonization process. Under all circumstances, junctions listed as protected will not be removed by Skelebrator. For more information, see “Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions” on page 18-641. Note:

Pumps, tanks, valves and reservoirs are automatically protected from skeletonization and will never be skeletonized by Skelebrator. The only exception to this is during Series Pipe Merging you may select to treat TCV (Throttle Control Valves) as junctions by selecting the Allow Removal of TCVs option. In that situation TCVs may be removed from your model.

Batch Run—Whereas automatic runs only selected skeletonization operations of the same type, Batch Run lets you choose which of all your defined skeletonization operations to run and in what order to run them. Use Batch Run if you want to run skeletonization operations for more than one option, e.g., a combination of Smart Pipe Removal, Branch Collapsing, Series Pipe Merging, or Parallel Pipe Merging operations and where the order of applied operations is important. For more information, see “Batch Run” on page 18-640.

18-636



Skeletonization Preview Skeletonization preview lets you review the affects of a skeletonization on your model without actually making any changes to or deletions from your model. To use the preview feature: 1. Create a skeletonization operation and select it.

2. Click the Preview button. 3. The network displays in the preview window.


18-637


File:

File lets you export your network to AutoCAD .DXF format. For more information, see “Advanced DXF Import Techniques” on page 16-606.

Pan/Zoom Tools:

Use the Pan and Zoom buttons to change your view of the network. For example, you might want to magnify a section of the network by zooming in.

Options:

Use the Options button to find an element or change how your network displays. The preview feature uses three colors to display a preview of your network. Using three different colors lets you distinguish: •

Unchanged Elements

•

Modified Elements

•

Deleted Elements

You can use colors and change the size of affected elements to better see and understand how skeletonization affects your network.

18-638



Click the Ellipsis button to choose a color from the color palette

Print Preview:

Close:

18.4.2

Use Print Preview to review how your network will print. For more information, see “Print Preview Window” on page 13-559. Click Close to exit the preview window.

Manual Skeletonization If you click the Manual Skeletonization button, the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box opens. The manual skeletonization review dialog box lists the proposed skeletonization actions for the particular skeletonization process selected. The contents of the action list window (to the left of the buttons) will vary depending on the type of operation being run. For Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing each Skelebrator action will have one pipe associated with it whereas Series and Parallel Pipe Merging will have two pipes associated with each action. For Smart Pipe Removal, when network integrity is enforced, the contents of the action list are updated, after every executed action, to reflect only valid actions, after each action is performed. Go To1—Select an element in the element window and click Go To to jump to the element in WaterGEMS. WaterGEMS displays the element at the level of zoom you selected in the Zoom drop-down list. Next1—Click Next to preview the next element in the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box. Previous1—Click Previous to preview the previous element to the one you have selected in the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box.

1. Not available when using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap.


18-639

Using the Skelebrator Software Protect—Click Protect to protect the selected element. Protected elements cannot be deleted from the network by skeletonization. In a Series or Parallel Pipe Merging operation, protecting one pipe in an action will mean that the action will not be able to be executed. The remaining un-protected pipe will not be skeletonized during this skeletonization level; however, it is not precluded from subsequent skeletonization levels unless it also is protected. Execute—Click Execute to run Skelebrator only for the selected Skelebrator action. In the case of Smart Pipe Removal and Branch Collapsing the associated pipe will be removed from the model, and associated loads redistributed as specified. Additionally, for branch collapsing, one junction will be removed. For Series Pipe Merging two pipes and one junction will be removed, associated loads redistributed as specified and an equivalent pipe added as a replacement, if the option is selected. Otherwise, the properties of the dominant pipe will be used to create a new pipe. For Parallel Pipe Merging, one pipe will be removed and the remaining pipe will be updated to the hydraulic equivalent, if you selected hydraulic equivalency. Auto Next?1—Select this check box if you wish for Skelebrator to immediately advance to the next pipe element in the action list. This is the equivalent of clicking Execute then clicking Next immediately afterwards. Close—Click Close to exit the Manual Skeletonization Review dialog box. Any remaining actions listed will not be executed. Zoom1—Select a Zoom at which you want to display elements you preview using Go To, Previous, and Next.

Batch Run Note:

The batch run manager does not become available until at least one Skelebrator operation is added. All operations selected into the lower window of the batch run manager dialog box will be executed during a batch run. There is no need to select (highlight) the operations before running them. Conversely, selecting only some operations in this window does not mean only those operations will be run.

If you click the Batch Run button, the Batch Run Manager opens. Use the Batch Run Manager to select the skeletonization strategies you want to use and the order in which you want to run them. Operations appearing in the top window are the operations you have defined and which are available for use in a batch run. Any operations in this window may be selected for a batch run. The same operation can be selected multiple times.

18-640


Automated Skeletonization Click Add to add a selected operations to the lower window. Any operations in the lower window are selected as part of the batch run. Use the Remove, Move Up, and Move Down buttons to manage the makeup and order of the operations in the batch run list. Note:

When using Skelebrator from ArcCatalog or ArcMap, only automatic skeletonization is an option and only a GO button is available (with no drop-down selection menu).

Click GO > Run Batch to commence an automatic skeletonization using the operations you have defined in your batch run. Click GO > Preview to preview the results of the operations you have defined in your batch run.

Protected Pipes and Protected Junctions Note:

Simply by its presence in the left hand side removable elements window an element is not guaranteed to be skeletonized. In order to be skeletonized the element must meet all other conditional, tolerance and topological criteria, be active in the current topological alternative and have no external references such as calibration observed data, simple control references, logical control references, VSP control node references, or WQ (Water Quality) Trace Node references. Only then will the element be skeletonized.

The Protected Elements Manager provides a way of making certain elements in your model immune to skeletonization. Use this feature to mark important elements in your model as not skeletonizable. Note that only pipes and junctions may be protected from skeletonization since all other node elements (valves, pumps, tanks and reservoirs) are already immune to skeletonization. (TCVs are the noted exception to this rule and may be treated as junctions, if selected, during Series Pipe Merging.) Elements displayed in the left hand side window are potential skeletonization candidates and elements displayed in the right hand side window are immune to skeletonization. Junctions/Base Demand—If you choose to set up protection for junctions, the Junctions and Base Demand column headings are displayed. Clicking these column headings lets you sort the list of elements. Pipes/Diameter—If you choose to set up protection for pipes, the Pipes and Diameter column headings display. Clicking these column headings lets you sort the list of elements.


18-641

Using the Skelebrator Software Tip:

Right-click anywhere in either the removable elements window or non-removable elements window in order to customize the units and precision of the displayed values. You can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple elements at once. Double-clicking an element will move it to the opposite list.

Use the following buttons: >—to protect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element cannot be removed by Skelebrator. >>—to protect all of the elements. <—to unprotect the selected elements. If you subsequently click OK, that element is available for removal by Skelebrator. <<—to unprotect all of the elements. OK—Click OK to apply your changes. Cancel—Click Cancel to exit Protected Elements Manager without saving any changes.

18.4.3

Smart Pipe Removal Operations Note:

We recommend that Smart Pipe Removal be performed with conditions defined. At the very least, a limiting condition placed on pipe diameter should be used. Smart Pipe Removal is designed to allow removal of small diameter pipes (including those that form parts of loops) and thus it is recommended that smart pipe removal be used with a condition that limits the scope to only remove small diameter pipes.

When you add or edit a removal operation, the Smart Pipe Removal Operation Editor dialog box opens. Removal operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and Conditions. 1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings. –

18-642

Preserve Network Integrity—Select Preserve Network Integrity if you want Skelebrator to ensure the topological integrity of your network will not be broken by a removal operation. All non-junction node elements (valves, tanks, pumps and reservoirs) will remain connected to the network, and the network will not be disconnected by Skelebrator. Total system demand will be preserved. Any junctions marked as non-removable will also remain connected to the network.


Automated Skeletonization –

Remove Orphaned Nodes—Select Remove Orphaned Nodes if you want Skelebrator to find and automatically remove any nodes left disconnected from the network after removal operations. (Orphaned or disconnected nodes are solitary nodes no longer connected to any pipes. By virtue of the nature of pipe removal, junctions can be left disconnected.) Note that Skelebrator does not remove any orphaned nodes that were orphaned prior to skeletonization. This option is not available if the preserve network integrity is not selected. If you leave this option unchecked, your model will contain junctions not physically connected to the hydraulic network, which will result in warning messages when you run your model.

–

Loop Retaining Sensitivity—Adjust the loop retaining sensitivity in order to control how sensitive the pipe removal algorithm is to retaining loops in your model. The lower the setting is, and in the absence of any other limiting conditions, the higher number of loops will be retained in your model (i.e., loops are less likely to be broken). Conversely, a higher setting will favor retaining less loops in your model. Use this setting in tandem with Skelebrator’s preview feature to get a feel for the effect of the various settings. This option is only available if you have selected the Preserve Network Integrity option.

2. Click Conditions to edit or create pipe conditions. You can add more than one condition. 3. Click Add to add pipe conditions. You can add more than one condition. 4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. The condition editor lets you define pipe conditions that determine which pipes are included in the Smart pipe Removal process. It is acceptable to define an operation that has no conditions (the default). In this case no pipes will be excluded from the skeletonization based on any of their physical attributes alone.


18-643


18.4.4

Branch Collapsing Operations When you add or edit a Branch Collapsing operation, the Branch Collapsing Operation Editor dialog box opens. Branch Collapsing operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and Conditions. 1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings. –

Maximum Number of Trimming Levels—Set the maximum number of trimming levels you want to allow. In Branch Collapsing, a single trimming level run to completion would trim every valid branch in the model back by one pipe link. Two trimming levels would trim every valid branch back two pipe links and so on.

–

Load Distribution Strategy—Select what you want to do with the hydraulic load on the sections you trim. The choices are Don’t Move Load, which means that the demands are no longer included in the model, or Move Load, which means transfer the demands to the upstream node.

2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions. 3. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions. You can add more than one condition. 4. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. You can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions. The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are included in the skeletonizing process. In Branch Collapsing, the junctions referred to (in junction conditions) are the two end junctions of the pipe being trimmed. Tolerances can also be defined for junctions. Tolerances work by limiting the pipes skeletonized only to the ones that have the specified attribute within the specified tolerance. For example, in Branch Collapsing a tolerance on junction elevation of 3 feet would limit skeletonization to pipes that had both end junctions with an elevation within three feet of each other.

18.4.5

Series Pipe Merging Operations Note:

In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes to pipes and junctions created during Series Pipe Merging operations by using the Element Labeling feature. For instance, to assign a prefix of “sk” to all pipes that are merged using the Series Pipe Merging operation, open the Element Labeling dialog box and enter “sk” before the “P-” in the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged

18-644


Automated Skeletonization during the Series Pipe Merging will now be labeled “skP-1”,” skP-2”, etc. Remember to reinstate the original prefixes/suffixes after skeletonization has been performed. For more information about Element Labeling, see “Element Labeling” on page 5-271.

When you add or edit a Series Pipe Merging operation, the Series Pipe Merging Operation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and Conditions. 1. Click the Settings tab to edit settings. –

Maximum Number of Removal Levels—Select the number of levels of pipes that get removed per iteration of the Series Pipe Merging operation. The maximum number of removal levels is 50. This is because in the absence of any other limiting factors (conditions, protected elements, non-removable nodes, etc.) one series pipe removal iteration will effectively halve the number of pipes. A second iteration will again halve the number of pipes, and so on. Therefore, 50 is the practical limit for removal levels.

–

Dominant Pipe Criteria—Select the criteria by which Skelebrator determines the dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are retained as appropriate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in. pipe, if diameter is selected as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diameter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the properties for the new pipe. That is, the 8-in. pipe’s diameter, roughness, bulk reaction rate etc will be used for the new pipe.

–

Use Equivalent Pipes—Select Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator to adjust the merged pipe properties as such to attain equivalent hydraulics as the two merged pipes.

–

Equivalent Pipe Method—Select whether you wish to modify the dominant pipe roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calculations. -

Modify Diameter

-

Modify Roughness

If modify diameter is selected, the new pipe’s roughness is kept constant and the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Conversely if modify roughness is selected, the new pipe’s diameter is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant.


18-645

Using the Skelebrator Software Note:

–

Load Distribution Strategy—Select how you want the load distributed from junctions that are removed. -

Note:

18-646

Equally Distributed puts 50% of the load on the starting and ending junctions of the post-skeletonized pipe. For the length attribute, load assignment is inversely proportional, such that the closest junction gets the majority of the demand.

-

Proportional to Dominant Criteria assigns loads proportional to the attribute used to select the dominant pipe. For example, if diameter is the dominant attribute and one pipe is 6-in., while the other is 8-in. (14-in. total length), 8/14 of the load will go to the upstream node, while 6/14 will go to the downstream node.

-

Proportional to Existing Load maintains the pre-skeletonization load proportions.

-

User-Defined Ratio lets you specify the percentage of the load applied to the upstream node in the post-skeletonized pipe.

Note:

–

When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify Diameter is the only available selection since calculated equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some circumstances.

If either of the uncommon nodes of the two pipes being merged are not junction nodes, then the selected load distribution strategy is ignored and all load is moved to the junction node. If both uncommon nodes are not junctions, then skeletonization is only carried out if the common junction node has zero demand.

Upstream Node Demand Proportion—Set a user-defined load distribution percentage. Set the percentage of the node demand that you want applied to the upstream node adjacent to the removed sections. This parameter is only available if you select User Defined in the Load Distribution Strategy dropdown list. Upstream in this context relates to the physical topology of the pipe and its nodes and may not correspond to the direction of flow in either the preskeletonized or post-skeletonized pipe.


Automated Skeletonization Note:

–

Apply Minor Losses—Select Apply Minor Losses if you wish for Skelebrator to preserve any minor losses attached to the pipes in your network. For Series Pipe Merging the minor losses for the original pipes are summed and added to the resulting pipe. If this option is not selected then the minor loss of the resulting pipe will be set to zero.

Tip:

–

The resulting pipe from a Series Pipe Merging operation is routed in the same direction as the dominant pipe. Therefore, upstream and downstream nodes relate to the topological direction of the dominant pipe. If check valves are present, then the resulting pipe is routed in direction the direction of the pipe that contains the check valve. If check valves are present in both pipes and those pipes oppose each other then skeletonization is not performed.

To combine only pipes with the same hydraulic characteristics (i.e., diameter and roughness), create a Series Pipe Removal Operation and click the Conditions tab. Then, add a pipe tolerance condition of 0.0 and a roughness tolerance condition of 0.0. Also, make sure to deselect the Use Equivalent Pipes check box.

Allow Removal of TCVs—Activate this option by checking the box to allow Skelebrator to remove TCVs during the Series Pipe Merging operation.

2. Click Conditions to edit or create conditions. a. Click Add to add conditions. You can add pipe and/or junction conditions. You can add more than one condition. b. Or, select an existing condition and click Edit to modify a selected condition. You can add and edit Junction and Pipe Conditions. Note:

In the case where not all nodes connected to the two pipes are junctions, tolerances are only evaluated based upon the junction type nodes. For example, if a tolerance of 5gpm was defined this would not invalidate the merging of two pipes that had one uncommon node that was a pump, for example. The tolerance condition would be evaluated based only upon the two junction type nodes.

The Pipe Condition Editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are included in the skeletonizing process. Tolerances can also be specified for both pipe and junction conditions. In the context of series pipe merging, pipe tolerances are calculated between the specified attribute of the two pipes to be merged. For example, a tolerance on diameter of 2-in. means that only pipes within a range of 2-in. diameter of each other will be merged (i.e., a 6-in. and an 8-in. pipe would be merged, an 8-in. and a 12-in. pipe would not).


18-647

Using the Skelebrator Software In the context of series pipe merging, junction tolerances are calculated on all present junctions. If all three nodes are junctions, then all three junctions will be used to evaluate the tolerance. For example, a tolerance of 10 ft. on elevation would mean that the two pipes would not be merged unless all of the three junctions had an elevation within 10 ft. of each other.

18.4.6

Parallel Pipe Merging Operations Note:

In WaterGEMS Modeler, you can assign prefixes and/or suffixes to pipes and junctions created during Parallel Pipe Merging operations by using the Element Labeling feature. For instance, to assign a prefix of “sk” to all pipes that are merged using the Parallel Pipe Merging operation, open the Element Labeling dialog box and enter “sk” before the “P-” in the Prefix field of the Pressure Pipe row. Any pipes merged during the Parallel Pipe Merging will now be labeled “skP-1”,” skP-2”, etc. For more information about Element Labeling, see “Element Labeling” on page 5-271.

When you add or edit a Parallel Pipe Merging operation, the Parallel Pipe Merging Operation Editor dialog box opens. Operations have two sets of parameters, Settings and Conditions. 1. Click Settings to edit or create settings. 2. Click Add to add a new pipe condition. 3. Or, select a condition and click Edit to change its parameters. The condition editor lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are included in the skeletonization process. Maximum Number of Removal Levels—Set the maximum number of removal levels you want to allow. In the context of Parallel Pipe Merging a single removal level will merge two parallel pipes. Consider a case where there exists 4 pipes in parallel. It would take 3 removal levels to merge all 4 pipes into a single pipe. In the first removal level, two pipes are merged leaving three pipes. In the second level another two pipes are merged leaving only two pipes. The last two pipes are merged into a single pipe in the third removal level. Unless you have a large degree of parallel pipes in your model, one or two levels of Parallel Pipe Merging will generally be all that is necessary to merge the majority of parallel pipes in your system.

18-648


Automated Skeletonization Dominant Pipe Criteria—Select the criteria by which Skelebrator determines the dominant pipe. The dominant pipe is the pipe whose properties are retained as appropriate. For example, when merging a 6-in. pipe and 8-in. pipe, if diameter is selected as the dominant pipe criteria then the larger diameter pipe (e.g., 8-in.) will provide the properties for the new pipe. That is, the 8-in. pipe’s diameter, roughness, bulk reaction rate, etc., will be used for the new pipe. Use Equivalent Pipes—Select Use Equivalent Pipe if you want Skelebrator to adjust remaining pipes to accommodate the removal of other pipes in series. Equivalent Pipe Method—Select whether you wish to modify the dominant pipe roughness or the dominant pipe diameter for the equivalent pipe calculations. •

Modify Diameter

•

Modify Roughness

If modify diameter is selected, the new pipe’s roughness is kept constant and the diameter adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Conversely, if modify roughness is selected, the new pipe’s diameter is kept constant and the roughness adjusted such that the head loss through the pipe remains constant. Note:

When using Darcy-Weisbach for the friction method, Modify Diameter is the only available selection since calculated equivalent roughnesses can be invalid (negative) in some circumstances.

Minor Loss Strategy—If your network models minor losses, select what you want Skelebrator to do with them. •

Use Ignore Minor Losses if you want to ignore any minor losses in parallel pipes. Resulting merged pipes will have a minor loss of 0.

•

Use Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max to protect from skeletonization any pipes that have a higher minor loss than a value you set for the Maximum Minor Loss.

•

Use 50/50 Split to apply 50% of the sum of the minor losses from the parallel pipes to the replacement pipe that Skeletonizer uses.

Maximum Minor Loss—If you select Skip Pipe if Minor Loss > Max from the Minor Loss Strategy drop-down list, any pipes with a minor loss value greater than the value you set will not be removed by Skelebrator.


18-649


18.4.7

Add New Operation Dialog Box This dialog box appears when the New button is clicked in the Skeletonization Manager. The text field allows you to enter a identifying label for the newly created operation.

18.4.8

Rename Operation Dialog Box This dialog box appears when the Rename button is clicked in the Skeletonization Manager. The text field allows you to change the identifying label for the highlighted operation.

18.4.9

Skelebrator Progress Summary This dialog box appears following the successful completion of an automatic skeletonization operation. The text pane provides information concerning the operation that was performed, including the model name, date, the length of time the operation took to run, and the number of elements that were deleted.

18.4.10

Conditions and Tolerances Conditions and Tolerances are used in Skelebrator to define the scope of Skelebrator operations. They consists of an attribute (e.g., diameter), an operator (e.g., less than) and a unitized value (e.g., 6 inches). These values together define the effect of the condition. The examples just listed when combined into a condition would reduce the scope of an operation to only skeletonizing pipes with a diameter less than 6 inches. A condition is able to be assessed based on a single element type, regardless of topology. It is possible to assess whether pipes meet the specified condition of diameter less than 6 inches without knowing the pipes’ location in the hydraulic model. Tolerances, however, are different. They are assessed based on the ensuing topology, and thus, the meaning of a tolerance varies depending on Skelebrator operation type. Additionally, the tolerance operator is not available when it doesn’t make sense. For example, it does not make sense to define a pipe tolerance for Smart Pipe Removal since only a single pipe is being considered at a time. An example of a valid tolerance is for Branch Collapsing where a junction tolerance can be specified between the two end junctions of the pipe. Conditions and tolerances are cumulative. That is with every additional condition, the number of pipes able to be skeletonized will be reduced. Setting conflicting conditions such as diameter < 6-in. and diameter > 8-in. will result in no pipes being able to be skeletonized since conditions are joined with the logical AND operator. It is not possible to specify OR conditions or tolerances.

18-650


Automated Skeletonization It is possible to specify no conditions for a particular operation. In that case all pipes are valid for skeletonization based on their physical attributes. However, conditions and tolerances are not the only elements that determine whether a pipe will be skeletonized. For a pipe to be skeletonized it has to meet all of the following criteria: •

Be valid in terms of the network topology with respect to the particular skeletonization operation. That is, during Branch Reduction the pipe has to be part of a branch. Any pipes whose topology dictates they are not part of a branch will not be skeletonized.

•

Must not be an element that is inactive as part of a topological alternative. All inactive topological elements are immune to skeletonization.

•

Must not be referenced by a logical control, simple control, or calibration observed data set.

•

Must not be connected to a VSP control node or the trace node for WQ analysis.

•

Must not be a user-protected element.

•

Must meet all user defined conditional and tolerance criteria.

Conditions and tolerances includes: •

“Pipe Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-651

•

“Junction Conditions and Tolerances” on page 18-652

•

“Add New Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650

•

“Rename Operation Dialog Box” on page 18-650

•

“Skelebrator Progress Summary” on page 18-650

•

“Important Skelebrator Information” on page 18-653

Pipe Conditions and Tolerances Click Add to add conditions. You can add more than one condition. The Pipe Condition Editor opens. This lets you set select parameters that determine which pipes are included in the skeletonization process. Attribute—Select the Attribute that you want to use to determine which pipes to skeletonize. These include: •

Diameter

•

Length

•

Roughness

•

Minor Loss Coefficient


18-651

Using the Skelebrator Software •

Check Valve

•

Bulk Reaction Rate

•

Wall Reaction Rate

Operator—Select an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute of Diameter, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 6 in., then any pipes with less than a 6-in. diameter are valid for skeletonization. Depending on operation type, Tolerance may also be an option for operator. When using a tolerance, a tolerance (as opposed to a condition) is defined. For example, in the context of Series Pipe Merging where two pipes are being merged, a tolerance of 2-in. diameter means that those pipes will only be merged if their diameters are within 2-in. of each other. Value—The label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you select.

Junction Conditions and Tolerances The Junction Condition Editor lets you set selective parameters that determine which junctions are included in the Branch Collapsing process. Attribute—Select the Attribute that you want to use to determine which junctions to trim. These include: •

Base Demand

•

Emitter Coefficient

•

Elevation

Operator—Select an operator that defines the relationship between the attribute you select and the value you select for that attribute. For example, if you select an attribute of Base Demand, an operator of Less Than, and a value of 50 gpm, any pipes with end nodes with a base demand less than 50 gpm are valid for skeletonization. Value—The label, units, and appropriate value range depend on the attribute you select. Junction tolerances are only evaluated against junctions. For example, if two series pipes are to be merged, but their common node is a pump, any defined junction tolerance is evaluated based on the two end nodes only. Where only one junction exists, as may be the case when allowing skeletonization of TCVs, tolerance conditions are not evaluated and do not limit the scope of the skeletonization.

18-652



18.5

Important Skelebrator Information Consider the following before using Skelebrator:

18.5.1

•

“Backing Up Your Model” on page 18-653

•

“Skeletonization and Scenarios” on page 18-653

•

“Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings” on page 18-655

•

“Skeletonization and Active Topology” on page 18-656

Backing Up Your Model Note:

We strongly recommended that you first make a copy of your model as a safe guard before proceeding with Skelebration.

In ArcGIS (ArcCatalog or ArcMap), there is no ability to undo your changes after they have been made. Skelebrator makes transactions against the GEMS database without the ability to rollback those changes. From within WaterCAD v6 (Stand Alone or AutoCAD), and WaterGEMS Modeler, changes can be undone on a global level by not saving the model after skeletonizing. However, any changes made prior to skelebration will also be lost if this method of avoiding committing skeletonization changes is used. Making a copy of your model up front will ensure that you can always get back to your original model if problems occur.

18.5.2

Skeletonization and Scenarios Note:

Before you use Skelebrator, we strongly recommended that you eliminate from your model all scenarios other than the one to be skeletonized.

Skelebrator is designed to skeletonize a single scenario at a time. Specifically, skelebrator modifies information in the set of alternatives (topological, demand, physical etc.) that are referred to by the currently selected scenario. It follows that any other scenarios that refer to these alternatives in some way can also potentially be modified by skeletonization, but most likely in an undesirable and inconsistent way, since skeletonization only works on the data in the alternatives referenced by the currently active scenario. For example, a second scenario that references all the same alternatives as the scenario being skeletonized except for, say, the demand alternative, will itself be seemingly skeletonized (its topological and physical alternatives etc are modified) except that the values of demands in its local demand records have no way of being factored into the


18-653

Important Skelebrator Information skeletonization process. Due to this, demands may actually be lost since pipes that were deleted (e.g., dead ends) did not have their local demands relocated upstream. Relocated demands will represent the result of merging the demands in the parent alternative, and not those of the child alternative where local records are present. Due to the behavior of skeletonization with respect to scenarios and alternatives, and to save possible confusion after skeletonization, it is very strongly recommended that you eliminate all other scenarios (other than the one to be skeletonized) from the model prior to skeletonization. Some exceptions, however, exist to this recommendation and may provide some additional flexibility to those users who have a strong desire to skeletonize multiple scenarios. In general, it is strongly recommended that multiple scenario skeletonization be avoided. A multiple scenario model can be successfully skeletonized only if all of the following conditions are met: •

All scenarios all belong to the same parent-child hierarchy

•

The scenario being selected for skeletonization must contain only parent (base) alternatives

•

All elements that reference local records in any child alternative are protected from skeletonization

As a simple example, consider a model with two scenarios, Base and Fire Flow. The Base scenario references a set of parent (base) alternatives, and the Fire Flow scenario references all the same alternatives, except for the demand alternative, where it references a child alternative of the Base scenario demand alternative, with local records at junctions A-90 and A-100 which are to model the additional flow at the fire flow junctions. This model meets all of the above 3 conditions and thus skeletonization of this model can be conducted successfully for all scenarios in the model, but only if all of the following skeletonization rules are adhered to: •

The Base scenario is always selected for skeletonization

•

The elements associated with local demand records (i.e., junctions A-90 and A100 in our example) are protected from skeletonization using the Skelebrator element protection feature

The reason the base scenario (a) must be selected for skeletonization is so that only parent (base) alternatives are modified by skeletonization. This is so that changes made to alternatives propagate down the parent-child hierarchy. If skeletonization was to occur on a scenario that referenced child alternatives, then the changes made to the scenario will not propagate back up the parent-child hierarchy, and would result in incorrect results.

18-654


Automated Skeletonization The reason for the element protections (b) is to limit the scope of skeletonization to the data common to both scenarios. That is, any model elements that possess any local records in any referenced child alternative, are excluded from the skeletonization since the differences in properties between the child and parent alternatives cannot be resolved in a skeletonization process that acts for all intents and purposes on a single scenario. This idiom can be extended to other alternative types besides the demand alternative.

18.5.3

Importing/Exporting Skelebrator Settings Note:

We strongly recommended that you review protected element settings when importing an .SKE file that was created using a different model.

Skeletonization settings can be saved and restored by using Skelebrator’s import/ export feature. This feature allows all skeletonization settings to be retained and reused later on the same computer, or on different computers as required. In addition to saving skelebrator operations and batch run settings, protected element information is saved. Ideally, this information should be stored only with the model that it pertains to, because it only makes sense for that model, but that limitation would prevent skelebrator settings to be shared between different projects or users. The caveat of allowing protected element information to be saved in a file that is separate to the original model, and thus be able to be shared between users, is that the situation is created whereby importing an .SKE file that was created with another model can result in meaningless protected element information being imported, in the context of the new model. However, your protected element information will probably be valid if you import a skelebrator .SKE file that was created using the same original model, or a model that is closely related to the original. The reason for this is that protected element information is stored in an .SKE file by recording the element’s GEMS IDs from the GEMS database. For the same or closely related models, the same pipes and junctions will still have the same GEMS IDs and, so will remain correctly protected. Protected element behavior for imported files is not guaranteed because a potential problem arises when elements that were deleted from the model were previously marked as protected and where the following three things have happened in order: 1. Modeling elements (pipes, junctions) have been deleted from the model. 2. The model database is compacted (thus making available the IDs of deleted elements for new ones). 3. New elements (pipes, junctions) have been added to the model after compaction, potentially using IDs of elements that have been deleted earlier.


18-655

Important Skelebrator Information From the above steps, it is possible that the IDs of new pipe or junction elements are the same as previously protected and deleted elements, thereby causing the new elements to be protected from skeletonization when they should not necessarily be protected. Even though the above protected-element behavior is conservative by nature, it is recommended that you review protected element information after importing an .SKE file to make sure that it is correct for your intended skeletonization purposes.

18.5.4

Skeletonization and Active Topology Skeletonization occurs on only active topology, but considers all topology. That is, any inactive topology of a model is unable to be skeletonized, but is not outright ignored for skeletonization purposes. This fact can be used to perform spatial skeletonization. For example, if you only wish to skeletonize a portion of your model, you can temporarily deactivate the topology you wish to be immune to skeletonization, remembering of course, to reactivate it after you have completed the skeletonization process. Any points where inactive topology ties in to the active topology will not be compromised. To better explain this, consider two series pipes that are not merged by series pipe removal. Under most circumstances two series pipes that meet the following conditions will be skeletonized:

18-656

•

Meet topological criteria (e.g., that the two pipes are in series and have a common node that is legal to remove, i.e., not a tank, reservoir, valve or pump)

•

Meet all conditional and tolerance based criteria

•

Are not protected from skeletonization

•

Have a common node that is not protected from skeletonization

•

Have no simple control or logical control references

•

Have no calibration references including to the junctions they are routed between

•

Are routed between nodes that are free of references from variable speed pumps (VSPs)

•

Are routed between nodes that are free from Water Quality (WQ) trace analysis references

•

Are routed between nodes that represent at least one junction, if the common node is a loaded junction (so the load can be distributed)

•

Do not have opposing check valves


Automated Skeletonization The two series pipes still may not be skeletonized if any inactive topology could be affected by the execution of the skeletonization action. For example, if the two series pipes have an additional, but inactive pipe connected to their common node, and if the series pipe removal action was allowed to proceed, the common node would be removed from the model, and the inactive topology would become invalid. This is prevented from occurring in Skelebrator.


18-657

Important Skelebrator Information

18-658


Chapter

19

WaterSafe

WaterSafe is an extension of the WaterCAD water quality simulation capability. It allows you to run multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates previously unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabilities improve your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water quality scenarios.

19.1

WaterSafe Manager The WaterSafe Manager provides a central location to store and manage your WaterSafe analysis projects. It is divided into two panes—the left pane allows you to select the analysis type, while the right pane displays all of the projects of the highlighted type. For instance, highlighting Trace Analysis in the left pane will cause all of the previously created Trace Analysis projects to be displayed in the right pane. Above the right pane are eight command buttons, as follows: New—This command creates a new analysis project of the currently highlighted type. Edit—This command opens the Analysis Project Editor for the currently highlighted analysis project. Rename—This command allows you to rename the currently highlighted analysis project. Duplicate—This command creates a copy of the currently highlighted analysis project. Delete—This command removes the currently highlighted analysis project. Go—This command calculates the currently highlighted analysis project. Graph—This command opens the WaterSafe graph manager.


19-659

Trace Analysis Project Editor Report—This command opens the WaterSafe report manager.

19.2

Trace Analysis Project Editor The trace analysis editor allows you to create trace analysis projects. First, a scenario is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the following controls: Scenario—The scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. Start Time—The Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenario’s operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here. Duration—The Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant. Trace Node—The Trace Node pane lists the nodes that will be included in the trace analysis project. To add elements to the list pane (and thus, to the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one element has been added to the list pane, you can remove elements from the list pane by highlighting them and clicking the Delete button.

19.2.1

Select Trace Nodes Dialog Box The Select Trace Nodes dialog box allows you to select the trace nodes that will be included in the trace analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes: The Type menu allows you to filter the elements that are available in the left pane. The left pane contains the nodes that are available for inclusion in the analysis project, as modified by the Type menu. By default, the Water Sources option is selected here, which enables display of all source nodes. Selecting Junction, for instance, causes the left pane to display only junction nodes; selecting Tanks displays only tanks in the left pane, and so on.

19-660


WaterSafe The right pane contains the nodes that have been selected for inclusion in the analysis project. Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane. [>>]—This button moves all of the elements in the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane. [<<]—This button moves all of the elements in the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.

19.3

Constituent Analysis Project Editor The constituent analysis editor allows you to create constituent analysis projects. First, a scenario is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the following controls: Scenario—The scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. Start Time—The Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenario’s operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here. Duration—The Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.


19-661

Age Analysis Project Editor Constituent Alternative—The Constituent Alternative pane lists the alternatives that will be included in the constituent analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane (and thus, to the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative has been added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by highlighting them and clicking the Delete button.

19.3.1

Select Constituent Alternatives Dialog Box The Select Constituent Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the constituent alternatives that will be included in the constituent analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes: The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis project. The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the analysis project. Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right pane. [>>]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left pane. [<<]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.

19.4

Age Analysis Project Editor The age analysis editor allows you to create age analysis projects. First, a scenario is chosen from the Select Scenario menu. The scenario that is selected will specify the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project. The dialog box contains the following controls: Scenario—The scenario chosen in the Scenario menu dictates the active topology, physical, demand, initial settings, and operational alternatives that will be used while calculating the analysis project.

19-662


WaterSafe Start Time—The Start Time specifies the beginning of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Any time-based controls that are applied in the scenario’s operational alternative will be affected by the start time chosen here. Duration—The Start Time specifies the length of the time period that the analysis project will simulate. Hydraulic Time Step—Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant. Age Alternative—The Age Alternative pane lists the alternatives that will be included in the age analysis project. To add alternatives to the list pane (and thus, to the analysis project) click the Insert button. After at least one alternative has been added to the list pane, you can remove alternatives from the list pane by highlighting them and clicking the Delete button.

19.4.1

Select Age Alternative Dialog Box The Select Age Alternatives dialog box allows you to select the age alternatives that will be included in the age analysis project. The dialog box is divided into two panes: The left pane contains the alternatives that are available for inclusion in the analysis project. The right pane contains the alternatives that have been selected for inclusion in the analysis project. Alternatives can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the left pane to the right pane. [>>]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted alternative from the right pane to the left pane. [<<]—This button moves all of the alternatives in the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single alternatives can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.


19-663

Graphing

19.5

Graphing Graphing includes:

19.5.1

•

“Graph Setup” on page 19-664

•

“Graph Display” on page 19-665

•

“Statistics Report” on page 19-668

•

“WaterSafe Manager” on page 19-659

Graph Setup The graph setup dialog boxes for each analysis project type allow you to specify the elements that will be graphed.

Trace Analysis Graph Setup The Trace Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be graphed. The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the Element Type drop-down list. The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the graph. Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.

Constituent Analysis Graph Setup The Constituent Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be graphed. The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the Element Type drop-down list.

19-664


WaterSafe The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the graph. Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.

Age Analysis Graph Setup The Age Analysis graph setup dialog box consists of a drop-down list that lets you select the element type and two panes that allow you to select the elements to be graphed. The left pane contains all of the available elements of the type specified in the Element Type drop-down list. The right pane contains all of the elements that have been selected for inclusion in the graph. Elements can be moved between the panes using the following buttons: [>]—This button moves the highlighted element from the left pane to the right pane. [<]—This button moves the highlighted element from the right pane to the left pane. Additionally, single elements can be moved from one pane to the other by simply double-clicking them.

19.5.2

Graph Display The graph display window allows you to view graphs and change graph settings as desired. The following time step controls are available in this dialog box:

Above the graph display are the time step and animation controls. These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the graph view and the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps are displayed during animation.


19-665

Graphing By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following Animation Options: •

Animation Delay—Opens a dialog box that allows you to set the delay between animated frames.

•

Animate All Windows—If this option is selected, every window capable of being animated will then animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not selected, then only the current window will animate.

If you right-click with the mouse over the drawing pane, a context menu appears, offering the following options: •


•


•


•

Graph Setup—This command opens the GeoGrapher Graph Setup dialog box (see “GeoGrapher Graph Setup” on page 13-532).

•

Graph Options—This command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see “GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533.

The main graph display pane has the following tabs: •

Graph—This tab displays the current graph.

•

Data—This tab displays a tabular view of the data upon which the graph is based. Note:

The display units for the various attributes cannot be manually changed through the graph display dialog box. Instead, the graph will automatically use the unit that is assigned to a given attribute in the WaterCAD project. To change the unit that is used, first change it in the project (see“FlexUnits” on page 4-252), then open WaterSafe and create your graph.

The following buttons are found along the top of the graph display dialog box:

19-666


WaterSafe

Export—Exports the current graph image or data.

Print—Prints the current graph.

Print Preview—Displays a preview of the graph as it will be printed. Activate/Deactivate Zoom—This toggle button enables you to magnify any area of the graph by click-dragging a selection box around it. Zoom Extents—Displays graph at the default (fully zoomed out) magnification and view.

Refresh—Updates current graph display to reflect current changes.

Graph Setup—Opens a dialog box that allows you to change graph settings.

Graph Options—Opens the Graph Options dialog box.

Add Pie/Bar Graph—Adds a Pie or Bar graph to the graph display.

Bar and Pie Graphs You can display bar and pie graphs in conjunction with the main graph view by clicking the Add Pie/Bar Graph button. A dialog box containing the pie or bar graph will appear attached (docked) to the left side of the main graph dialog box. The following options are available when the right mouse button is clicked over the bar/pie graph dialog box: •


•



19-667

Statistics Report

19.5.3

•


•

Graph Options—This command opens the GeoGrapher Options dialog box (see “GeoGrapher Options” on page 13-533).

•

Print Preview—This command opens the print preview dialog box for the graph display (see “Table Print Preview Dialog Box” on page 19-670).

•

3D—Toggles 3 dimensional perspective on/off.

•

Marks Visible—Toggles labels detailing graph values on/off.

Graph Print Preview Dialog Box This dialog box displays a print preview of the current pie or bar chart. The dialog box contains two radio buttons that allow you to select the page orientation, as follows: •

Portrait—When this button is selected, the chart will be printed in portrait orientation (page will be taller than it is wide).

•

Landscape—When this button is selected, the chart will be printed in landscape orientation (page will be wider than it is tall).

Clicking the Print button sends the currently displayed printer to the default printer. The Preview Chart dialog box is accessible by right-clicking on the bar/pie chart and selecting Print Preview.

19.6

Statistics Report The Statistics Report dialog box consists of the following items: Export—This button exports the currently displayed table as a comma-delimited text file. Copy—This button copies the currently displayed table to the Windows clipboard. Print—This button prints the currently displayed table. Preview—This button opens the “Table Print Preview Dialog Box” on page 19-670, allowing you to display a print preview of the currently displayed table. Color Coding—Color Coding allows you to automatically create user-defined attributes for the statistical results contained in the table. In WaterCAD, color coding can then be applied to the model based on the new user defined attributes. Clicking this button opens the “Color Coding Dialog Box” on page 19-670.

19-668


WaterSafe Report Variable—This menu changes depending on the type of analysis project that is being viewed. •

Trace Node—This drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for trace analysis projects. The options included in the list are the trace nodes that were selected in the trace analysis project editor.

•

Alternative—This drop-down list appears on the statistical reports for constituent and age analysis projects. The options included in the list are the alternatives that were selected in the constituent or age analysis project editor.

Start Time—This menu, in conjunction with the Finish Time drop-down list, allows you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which you want the report to begin. Finish Time—This menu, in conjunction with the Start Time drop-down list, allows you to select the time frame that is presented in the report. Select the hour at which you want the report to end. Tip:

The table can be sorted by any of the column attributes. Click the column heading once to sort ascending and twice to sort descending. Columns and rows can be manually resized. Hover the mouse cursor over the break between the row or column headings. The mouse cursor will change to a double-headed arrow. Click and hold the mouse button and a line will appear, displaying the new position of the row or column break. Drag this line to the desired position of the new break.

Tabular Report—This table is the main body of the report dialog box. The various statistical results are displayed here in tabular format. •

Node Tab—This table displays statistical results for all of the nodes contained in the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.

•

Links Tab—This table displays statistical results for all of the pipes contained in the scenario that was chosen during the analysis project setup.


19-669

Statistics Report

19.6.1

Color Coding Dialog Box The Color Coding dialog box allows you to create user defined attributes in your WaterCAD model based on the statistical analysis attributes displayed in the table. You can then color-code by these user defined attributes in WaterCAD. The dialog box consists of a check box for each of the statistical attributes in the report; Average, Variance, Deviation, Minimum, Maximum, Min. Record Time, and Max Record Time. There is also an All check box which selects all of the attributes. Place a check in the corresponding box of each of the attributes for which you want a user-defined attribute to be created, then click the OK button.

19.6.2

Table Print Preview Dialog Box The Print Preview dialog box displays the tabular report as it will appear when printed. The following controls are available in this dialog box: Print—This button prints the report as it appears in the preview pane. Zoom—This button allows you to set the zoom level of the preview pane. Preview Pane Layout Buttons—This button allows you to control the number of pages that are simultaneously displayed in the preview pane. The following choices are available: •

One Page

•

Two Pages

•

Three Pages

•

Four Pages

•

Six Pages

Close—Closes the print preview dialog box. Page—This control allows you to select the page that is currently displayed in the preview pane.

19.6.3

Statistical Report Attributes The following attributes are calculated and displayed in the statistical report: •

19-670

Average


WaterSafe

•

•

•

•

–

Trace Analysis—The average flow percentage contributed to a node by a trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

–

Constituent Analysis—The average concentration at a node for the simulated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

Maximum –

Trace Analysis—the maximum flow percentage contributed to a node by a trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

–

Constituent Analysis—The maximum concentration at a node for the simulated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

Max Record Time –

Trace Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the Maximum flow percentage occurs.

–

Constituent Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the Maximum concentration occurs.

Minimum –

Trace Analysis—The minimum flow percentage contributed to a node by a trace source node over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

–

Constituent Analysis—The minimum concentration at a node for the simulated constituent over a period of time between the user-selected Start Time and Finish Time.

Min. Record Time –

Trace Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the Minimum flow percentage occurs.

–

Constituent Analysis—The hour during the specified time frame when the Minimum concentration occurs.


19-671

Statistics Report

19.6.4

Graph Unit Selection Dialog Box The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used. The dialog box consists of the following controls:

19.6.5

•

Unit—Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type, click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use both US Customary and SI units.

•


•


Table Unit Selection Dialog Box The Unit Selection dialog box allows you to set the parameters for all the units used. The dialog box consists of the following controls:

19-672

•

Value—Displays the value of the currently highlighted cell.

•

Unit—Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type, click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option allows you to use both US Customary and SI units.

•


•



Appendix

A

Frequently Asked Questions A.1

Overview: “How Do I” “How Do I” tips are available in the following categories: •

“Import/Export Tips” on page A-674

•

“Modeling Tips” on page A-683

•

“Display Tips” on page A-699

•

“Editing Tips” on page A-701

Extensive, up-to-date tips are available at your fingertips by clicking the Globe button. This will take you to the ClientCare area of Haestad Methods’ web site, where you will be able to look up Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), modeling tips, and other useful information in our Knowledge Base and do a search on any keywords. This area of the website is only available if you are participating in the ClientCare program. If the information you need is not available in this section, click the Search tab at the top of the Help window for an index. To make your work easier, WaterCAD and the Help system are designed to be used together. If you have a high-resolution display monitor, you will probably find it helpful to size the frames of both the program and the Help windows so that they fit side by side. Then, while using the program, you can use the right mouse button or the Help button in any dialog box to update the Help window with context-sensitive Help.


A-673

Import/Export Tips

A.2

Import/Export Tips Note:

You can import data from virtually any model using our intuitive and powerful Database Connections and Shapefile Connections (see “Shapefile Connections” on page 15-585) feature.

The following tips will be covered in this section:

A.2.1

•

“Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions” on page A-674

•

“Transitioning from Cybernet v2” on page A-675

•

“Importing EPANET Files” on page A-681

•

“Importing KYPIPE Data” on page A-681

•

“Importing Spot Elevations” on page A-682

•

“Exporting Spot Elevations” on page A-682

Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions You can import data from the following versions: •

Cybernet v1 Drawing

•

Cybernet v2 drawing

•

WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files

Cybernet v1 Drawing No support is available for importing a Cybernet v1 drawing directly into WaterCAD. If you want to import a Cybernet v1 drawing, load it into Cybernet v2 (for DOS) and re-save the data as a Cybernet v2 drawing. The data can then be imported into WaterCAD following the procedure described below. If you are running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, open the drawing that contains the Cybernet v2 data. The import Wizard of WaterCAD will automatically begin importing the data.

Cybernet v2 drawing If you are running WaterCAD in Stand-Alone mode, you must first convert the Cybernet v2 drawing into a special C2W file format that can then be imported into WaterCAD. This is accomplished by using one of the C2W utilities inside any of the following AutoCAD versions: AutoCAD 12, 13 DOS, 13 Windows, 14, 2000, or 2002. Consult the C2W utilities help for specifics on its use.

A-674


Frequently Asked Questions Note:

Because the color coding legend is comprised of native entities, the built-in conversion is unable to automatically remove these elements. In WaterCAD v3.0 and up in AutoCAD mode, color coding legends are block inserts. If your Cybernet v2 drawing contains legends, you must manually edit these out of the drawing.

When using the C2W utility in AutoCAD 12 or 13, there are certain limitations to the amount of data imported: •

Only Cybernet v2 base data is imported. No change records in Cybernet scenarios are supported.

•

Cybernet multi-point pump curves are not supported. The C2W utility converts the pump to a standard three-point curve pump. This may not be the optimum solution for the multi-point curve. Validate the points chosen, and consider manually entering the multi-point data.

•

Cybernet demand patterns are not imported. However, junction node demand type data is imported. Use the Pattern Manager to enter the Cybernet Extended Period Simulation GDF curves.

WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files Open the WaterCAD v3 or v4 file, or import the .WCD file as you normally would in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3. The .WCD file will be automatically converted to the WaterCAD format. Once you save this file in WaterCAD, it can no longer be opened in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3/ v4.

A.2.2

Transitioning from Cybernet v2 This section is intended to offer you some insight about the tools in this version of WaterCAD that are different from Cybernet v2 methods. We have seen the questions that arise in technical support. We designed WaterCAD v3, v4, and v5 specifically to help you avoid many of these problems, while offering even more flexibility and a much friendlier interface.


A-675

Import/Export Tips

Working with the Graphical Editor One of the first differences between WaterCAD and previous versions of WaterCAD is the interface, aside from just the difference of WaterCAD being a Windows application. For more information, see “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout” on page 17-608. WaterCAD actually has two interfaces, one for AutoCAD (called WaterCAD AutoCAD mode), and our own CAD-style Stand-Alone interface (called WaterCAD Stand-Alone Mode). For more information, see “Stand-Alone and AutoCAD Mode” on page 2-48. This offers an amazing amount of flexibility, especially since both interfaces can be used with the exact same hydraulic model. Organizations now have the flexibility to allow AutoCAD users and non-AutoCAD users to work with the same model, without struggling through any type of intermediate conversion. Even the style of the two interfaces is similar with identical toolbars and menus. Where is the Modeling Control Center (MCC)? The Modeling Control Center in Cybernet v2 served two purposes: tabular reporting and scenario management (including calculation). In WaterCAD, these same purposes are served by two separate objects, which are each better than anything that has come before: FlexTables and Scenario Management.

Report Tables (FlexTables) In Cybernet v2, you were provided with a tabular view of the network that was a bit inflexible and tedious at times. WaterCAD FlexTables provide tabular reporting tools that are so powerful and flexible that you can perform your typical tasks in less time than it used to take you just to enter the MCC. With features like sorting, filtering, and global editing, you can review and adjust your data in a fraction of the time it used to take, and with none of the hassle. Even the variables and sequences that are presented in tabular form are totally customizable to fit your needs. For more information, see “FlexTables” on page 7-329.

A-676


Frequently Asked Questions

Links to Graphical Information Systems (GIS) and Databases One of the most exciting developments of the software industry in the 1990s has been the push for data reuse. Constantly improving database capabilities, published file formats (such as the shapefile format), and even tools as simple as the Windows clipboard are all contributing to a level of data sharing that has never been seen before. WaterCAD is right there on the leading edge. With WaterCAD database connectivity, your hydraulic model can easily be linked to virtually any major database, spreadsheet, or GIS product currently in use today. Shapefile wizards and flexible database linking tools make the process simple and straightforward, without anchoring you to a specific database layout or units system. For more information, see “Shapefile and Database Connections” on page 15-571.

Scenario Management Cybernet v2 had two levels of definition: the base data as entered in the AutoCAD interface or through the Edit menu in the MCC, and scenario changes as entered through the Setup Analysis menu. Although this was far better than any competing scenario management, it was very limited and certainly not oriented toward datareuse. WaterCAD has a whole new outlook on scenarios, stemming from the basic principle that every system has unknowns. If there is only one unknown, such as junction demand, for example, the options are quite simple. With the addition of more unknowns, the options quickly become difficult to manage. How can a modeler keep track of so many unknowns? Through alternatives and inheritance. Alternatives are collections of very specific data, such as junction demands, or pump and valve operational settings. A scenario references a certain combination of these alternatives, similar to a slot machine rolling different symbols in and out of each position. Rather than several similar scenarios each holding onto individually adjusted data, they can instead each reference some of the same alternatives (just as several slot machine combinations can show the same symbol). This not only allows for far more flexibility, it also greatly reduces the amount of data that is handled. This greatly reduces the chance of that data being mishandled. Inheritance is another attribute of WaterCAD scenario management that adds a level of functionality that has never existed before. In Cybernet v2, each scenario essentially inherited data from the base model, unless a specific change was made. As mentioned above, this is fine for individual changes, but it falls apart for subsequent changes. Consider, for example, a system that is to have pipes replaced in phases. Phase I changes inherit from the base model, but then what happens for Phase II? Repeat all of the changes from Phase I, and add the changes for Phase II? And then again for Phase III? It is too easy to overlook a change and make simple typographical errors.


A-677

Import/Export Tips In WaterCAD, there is no limit to the extent of inheritance that could exist. To follow the example given above, Phase II inherits its data from Phase I, and then has whatever changes are specific to Phase II rehabilitation. Likewise, Phase III inherits from Phase II, and so on. Best of all, if something changes in Phase I, that change is inherited through the hierarchy such that all of the children (Phase II, Phase III, etc.) reflect the new data. There is a scenario tutorial for the Stand-Alone editor, and there is a scenario Wizard to help you through your first few scenario creations. Once you have seen what alternatives and inheritance can do for your model, you will be glad that you spent a few minutes becoming familiar with them. For more information, see “Scenarios/Alternatives” on page 8-345.

Using the Scenario Control Center Scenario functionality is extended even further by the presence of comparative tools, such as graphing. Scenario results can be directly compared graphically, plotting all of the scenarios on the same axes. This means that determining the effects of things such as system expansion, future demand increases, and pipe deterioration can all be seen within seconds of running the models. Combined with batch runs, which is running several scenarios in sequence, scenario management has reached a level that most modelers have only dreamed of until now. For more information, see “Scenario Control Center” on page 8-366.

Demand Alternatives With the new scenario management, demand loading also has all new flexibility. Rather than being limited to Avg. Day, Max Day, Peak Hr., User 1 and User 2, there are an unlimited number of demand alternatives available in WaterCAD. You can still have global demand and global roughness factors for your WaterCAD model, so you can make minor adjustments during calibration without having to generate new alternatives. For more information, see “Demand Alternative” on page 8-354.

A-678



Composite Demands As well as having an unlimited number of demand alternatives, there is also no limit to the number of different demand types you can have. Cybernet v2 was limited to five demand types (1, 2, 3, 4, and Fixed), but WaterCAD allows as many different types necessary. Also, they can have alpha-numeric labels, such as Residential, Commercial, and Industry XYZ. This enables you to model service connections with much more detail, because you can specify diurnal demand patterns for any number of special individual customers. In addition to demands, WaterCAD also provides inflow, or flows that are introduced into the system. Perhaps the best improvement for demands, however, is the ability to attribute more than one type of demand to a given junction node. An unlimited number of different customer types can all contribute to the total demand at a single junction, so there is no need to estimate an equivalent demand type or add another demand type to a fake junction immediately adjacent to another node. For more information, see “Load” on page 6-300.

Control Valves Cybernet v2 provided you with three types of controlling valves: Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs), Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs), and Flow Control Valves (FCVs). WaterCAD also provides them, plus two additional types: Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs) that create a constant headloss across the valve, and Throttle Control Valves (TCVs) that allow you to adjust minor loss coefficients based on system pressures, HGLs, or time. Cybernet v2 also allowed a valve setting of Maintain Always for PRVs and FCVs. These settings were primarily used to simulate a pump for preliminary design work. Through numerous support calls and dozens of inaccurate models, however, we found that this feature was often misused, resulting in frustration. These Maintain Always settings are no longer supported in WaterCAD. Instead, we offer a wider variety of pump options to encourage modelers to make better educated guesses and better preliminary design decisions. For more information, see “Valve Theory” on page B-726.


A-679

Import/Export Tips

Pumps and Pump Curves Cybernet v2 pumps can be categorized as one of three types: constant horsepower, three-point, and multi-point (up to eleven points). In WaterCAD, three-point pump curves are still fully supported, as are multi-point pump curves. In fact, there is no limit to the number of points you can enter to approximate the pump’s exponential curve. Although we continue to discourage the use of constant horsepower pumps (for many of the same reasons we discouraged the use of Maintain Always setting for valves), this type of pump is still available in WaterCAD. However, do not use one unless you have actually looked at a constant horsepower curve. It only resembles the shape of a typical pump curve over a very short range near the best efficiency point, and diverges from this curve rapidly as the curve becomes asymptotic to both the head and discharge axes. If you are performing a preliminary design or if you have another purpose that requires you to estimate pump characteristics based on insufficient data, consider using a one-point pump curve. This allows you to enter the design point and approximate a curve based on a typical pump curve. Of course, nothing beats having actual pump test data so you can generate a truly accurate representation of your pump, and, subsequently, an accurate representation of the remainder of your system. For more information, see “Pump Editor” on page 6-279.

In Summary There are many more features and enhancements in WaterCAD, and they appear in every dialog box and button. The following are two very important points that we would like to emphasize as you prepare to use WaterCAD for the first time:

A-680

•

Tutorials are available in the Stand-Alone editor for a deeper introduction to nearly every topic, and there is context-sensitive online help available from anywhere in the program by pressing the F1 key, or by clicking a Help button.

•

Don’t be afraid to explore. Some of the neatest features can be easy to overlook. Remember, whenever you see an Ellipsis (…) button it means that a special feature is available. Play with the model, and most importantly, start to enjoy modeling again.



A.2.3

Importing EPANET Files Note:

In EPANET, pumps and valves are modeled as links. In this program, they are graphically modeled as node elements. Hence, during an import, each EPANET valve and pump link is replaced by two pipes and one pump or valve element. This will not affect the behavior of these elements in your system. In EPANET, tanks can have an optional inactive volume parameter. If this parameter is omitted from the input file or a zero is entered for this parameter, the EPANET numerical engine will compute an inactive volume based on the tank’s diameter and the minimum level. To mimic this behavior, this software will calculate the inactive volume and display it in the tank data upon import of the file. When using this software, it is important to remember that zero inactive volume means zero inactive volume, and not some internally computed value.

Select File > Import > Network and choose EPANet (inp). Then, from the File Open dialog box, select the file you would like to import. During the import procedure, you will be prompted for a map scale factor (for more information, see “Map Scale Factor” on page 4-249). You may also be asked to specify the Unit of Concentration (for more information, see “Concentration Units Import” on page A-681).

Concentration Units Import Select the unit of concentration that the data contained in the [QUALITY] section of the EPANET file is in.

A.2.4

Importing KYPIPE Data This program supports the import of KYPIPE 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 data sets. If the data set does not include geometry data, all nodes will be assigned a coordinate of (0,0). This has no effect on the hydraulic state of the model. Pipe lengths will not be computed based on the coordinates of the end nodes, but will be taken directly from the KYPIPE data set. This program only supports the import of the pipes and nodes of a KYPIPE model. You must insert pumps, valves, and tanks into the current project.


A-681

Import/Export Tips

A.2.5

Importing Spot Elevations A series of spot elevations can be imported from an ASCII text file, which might be generated from a survey data recorder or another software program. These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.

A.2.6

Exporting Spot Elevations All of the spot elevations in the current project can be exported to an ASCII text file, from which they can be brought into a spreadsheet, word processor, or other program. These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.

A.2.7

Importing Database and Shapefile Data Created with WaterCAD v3 As a result of overwhelming user feedback, as well as through a review of common technical support questions, Haestad Methods has decided to make a fundamental change in the way pump/valve connectivity is modeled. These elements are now handled as nodes, whereas they were previously represented as links in database and GIS connections prior to release of WaterCAD. Unfortunately, this change will affect existing users who have built database connections using WaterCAD version 3.5 and earlier. However, a survey of our customers has shown that nodes are the natural and preferred way to represent a pump or valve in a database. The change is driven by the desire to improve and enhance the mapping of these elements onto GIS and enterprise data. Haestad Methods has invested significant effort to separate the model representation of pumps and valves from your view of these elements. Specific changes are as follows:

A-682

•

Pumps and valves used to be represented in the model as links, and had To and From Node attributes. Now pumps and valves are represented as nodes, and have To and From Pipe attributes.

•

Pumps and valves exported to the Links Table will not be restored to the model. If you try to import a Link Table with pumps and valves, they will be created as new pipes of zero length and at coordinates of (0,0).

•

The import of pump and valve tables will work as expected, with the exception of the items listed above.



A.2.8

Additional Considerations When Working with Large Model Files WaterCAD is designed to utilize up to 500 megabytes of RAM, even if your machine has more memory available. The reason for this is that we found during testing that increasing this amount prevented WaterCAD from running under certain machine configurations. With the 500 MB setting, WaterCAD ran under all tested system configurations while still allowing sufficient memory to run the vast majority of models. If you encounter a Non-Continuable Protection Violation or Out of Memory error while working with a large model, you may be hitting the 500 MB limit. To increase this limit: 1. Browse to your Wtrc folder and find the Wtrcsys.exe file. 2. Rename it to Wtrgsys_backup.exe. 3. Find the v10.exe file and rename it to Wtrcsys.exe. 4. Start WaterCAD. 5. If WaterCAD starts successfully, your machine configuration is compatible with the higher memory setting. WaterCAD will now utilize up to 1000 MB of RAM. Note:

If WaterCAD does not start successfully, your computer configuration is not able to utilize the higher memory setting. Contact Haestad Methods ClientCare Support for assistance.

If, after performing the above operation you continue to receive Non-Continuable Protection Violation or Out of Memory errors, please contact Haestad Methods ClientCare Support for assistance.

A.3

Modeling Tips The paragraph presents some FAQs related to modeling water distribution networks with WaterCAD. Also, please keep in mind that Haestad Methods offers workshops in North America and abroad throughout the year. These workshops cover these modeling topics in depths and many more in a very effective manner. The following modeling tips are presented: •

“Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank” on page A-684

•

“Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well” on page A-684

•

“Modeling Parallel Pipes” on page A-685

•

“Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series” on page A-686

•

“Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks” on page A-687


A-683

Modeling Tips

A.3.1

•

“Modeling Fire Hydrants” on page A-688

•

“Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main” on page A-688

•

“Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank” on page A-690

Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank Hydropneumatic tanks can be modeled using a regular tank element and converting the tank pressures into equivalent water surface elevations. Based on the elevation differences, the tank’s cross-sectional area can then be determined. For example, consider a hydropneumatic tank that operates between 50 psig and 60 psig. The tank’s storage volume is approximately 50 cubic feet. The tank base elevation is chosen to be equal to the ground elevation, and the pressures are converted into feet of water (1 psi = 2.31 feet). It is apparent that the tank operates between levels of 115.5 feet and 138.6 feet. The difference between the levels is 23.1 feet, which brings us to a needed cross-section of 2.16 square feet.

A.3.2

Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well A groundwater well is modeled using a combination of a reservoir and a pump. Set the hydraulic grade line of the reservoir at the static groundwater elevation. The hydraulic grade line can be entered on the reservoir tab of the reservoir editor dialog box, or under the Reservoir Surface Elevation column heading in the Reservoir Report. Pump curve data can be entered on the Pump Tab of the Pump Editor. The following example will demonstrate how to adjust the manufacturer’s pump curve to account for drawdown at higher pumping rates. Drawdown occurs when the well is not able to recharge quickly enough to maintain the static groundwater elevation at high pumping rates.

Figure A-1: Pump Curve Accounting for Drawdown

A-684


Frequently Asked Questions EXAMPLE: The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog:

Head (ft.)

Discharge (gpm)

1260

0

1180

8300

1030

12400

Based on field conditions and test results, the following drawdown data is known:

Drawdown (ft.)

Discharge (gpm)

40

8300

72

12400

To account for the drawdown, the pump curves should be offset by the difference between the static and pumped groundwater elevations. Subtract the drawdown amount from the pump head, and use these new values for your pump curve head data. The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufacturers pump data.

Head (ft.)

A.3.3

Discharge (gpm)

1260

0

1140

8300

958

12400

Modeling Parallel Pipes With some water distribution models, parallel pipes are not allowed. This forces you to create an equivalent pipe with the same characteristics. With this program, however, you can create parallel pipes by drawing the pipes with the same end nodes. To avoid having pipes drawn exactly on top of one another, it is recommended that the pipes have at least one vertex, or bend, inserted into them.


A-685

Modeling Tips

Figure A-2: Pipe Bends

A.3.4

Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series Note:

With pumps in series, it is actually more desirable to use a composite pump than to use multiple pumps in the network. When pumps shut off, it is easier to control one pump. Several pumps in series can even cause disconnections by checking if upstream grades are greater than the downstream grade plus the pump heads.

Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the same From and To Nodes. Pumps in series (one pump discharges directly into another pump’s intake) can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe. The following figure illustrates this concept:

Figure A-3: Pumps in Parallel and Series If the pumps are identical, the system may also be modeled as a single, composite pump that has a characteristic curve equivalent to the two individual pumps. For pumps in parallel, the discharge is multiplied by the number of pumps, and used against the same head value. Two pumps in series result in an effective pump with twice the head at the same discharge. For example, two pumps that can individually operate at 150 gpm at a head of 80 feet connected in parallel will have a combined discharge of 2•150 = 300 gpm at 80 feet. The same two pumps in series would pump 150 gpm at 2•80 = 160 feet of head. This is illustrated as follows:

A-686



Figure A-4: Pumps Curves of Pumps in Series and Parallel

Parallel VSPs Variable speed pumps can also be modeled in parallel. If you use the Fixed Head pump type, both parallel VSPs must be set to the same target node. The program will attempt to meet the fixed head requirements you set using only one of the pumps. If the fixed head cannot be met with only one of the pumps, the second pump will be turned on, and the relative speed settings of the pumps will be adjusted to compensate.

A.3.5

Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks If tanks are hydraulically close, as in the case of several tanks adjacent to each other, it is better to model these tanks as one composite tank with the equivalent total surface area of the individual tanks. This process can help to avoid fluctuation that may occur in cases where the tanks are modeled individually. This fluctuation is caused by small differences in flow rates to or from the adjacent tanks, which offset the water surface elevations enough over time to become a significant fluctuation. This results in inaccurate hydraulic grades.


A-687

Modeling Tips

A.3.6

Modeling Fire Hydrants Fire Hydrant flow can be modeled by using a short, small diameter pipe with large Minor Loss, in accordance with the hydrant’s manufacturer. Alternatively, hydrants can be modeled using Flow Emitters. For more information, see “Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters” on page A-691.

A.3.7

Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main If you are unable to model an existing system back to the source, but would still like to model a connection to this system, a reservoir and a pump with a three-point pump curve may be used instead. This is shown below:

Figure A-5: Approximating a Connection to a Water Main with a Pump and a Reservoir The reservoir simulates the supply of water from the system. The Elevation of the reservoir should be equal to the elevation at the connection point. The pump and the pump curve will simulate the pressure drops and the available flow from the existing water system. The points for the pump curve are generated using a mathematical formula (given below), and data from a fire flow test. The pipe should be smooth, short and wide. For example, a Roughness of 140, length of 1 foot, and diameter of 48 inches are appropriate numbers. Please note that it is ALWAYS best to model the entire system back to the source. This method is only an approximation, and may not represent the water system under all flow conditions. Qr = Qf * [(Hr/Hf)^.54] Where:

A-688

Qr

=

Flow available at the desired fire flow residual pressure

Qf

=

Flow during test

Hr

=

Pressure drop to desired residual pressure (Static Pressure minus Chosen Design Pressure)

Hf

=

Pressure drop during fire flow test (Static Pressure minus Residual Pressure)


Frequently Asked Questions EXAMPLE: DETERMINING THE THREE-POINT PUMP CURVE 1. The first point is generated by measuring the static pressure at the hydrant when the flow (Q) is equal to zero. Q = 0 gpm H = 90psi or 207.9 feet of head (90 * 2.31) (2.31 is the conversion factor used to convert psi to feet of head). 2. The engineer chooses a pressure for the second point, and the flow is calculated using the Formula below. The value for Q should lie somewhere between the data collected from the test. Q=? H = 55 psi or 127.05 feet (55 * 2.31) (chosen value) Formula: Qr = Qf * (Hr/Hf)^.54 Qr = 800 * [((90 - 55) / (90 - 22))^.54] Qr = 800 * [(35 / 68)^.54] Qr = 800 * [.514^.54] Qr = 800 * .69 Qr = 558 Therefore, Q = 558 gpm 3. The third point is generated by measuring the flow (Q) at the residual pressure of the hydrant. Q = 800 gpm H = 22 psi or 50.82 ft. of head (22 * 2.31) Pump curve values for this example:


Head (ft.)

Discharge (gpm)

207.9

0

127.05

558

50.82

800

A-689

Modeling Tips

A.3.8

Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank A tank element in WaterCAD is modeled as a bottom feed tank. Some tanks, however, are fed from the top, which is different hydraulically and should be modeled as such.

Figure A-6: Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Tank To model a top feed tank, start by placing a pressure sustaining valve (PSV) at the end of the tank inlet pipe. Set the elevation of the PSV to the elevation of the inlet to the tank. The pressure setting of the PSV should be set to zero to simulate the pressure at the outfall of the pipe. Next, connect the downstream end of the PSV to the tank with a short, smooth, large diameter pipe. The pipe must have these properties so that the headloss through it will be minimal. The tank attributes can be entered normally using the actual diameter and water elevations. The outlet of the tank can then proceed to the distribution system.

Figure A-7: Example Layout

A-690



A.3.9

Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters Another way to model the discharge from a hydrant is to use flow emitters. A flow emitter relates the discharge to pressure immediately upstream of the emitter using:

Q = KP n Where:

Q

=

flow through hydrant (gpm, l/s)

K

=

overall emitter coefficient (gpm/psin, l/s/mn)

P

=

pressure upstream of hydrant (psi, m)

n

=

pressure exponent (0.5 for hydrant outlets)

The pressure exponent, n, is a variable that can be set in the Hydraulic Analysis Options section of the Calculation Options dialog box (for more information, see “Hydraulic Analysis Options” on page 9-392). The default value is 0.5, which should be used when using flow emitters to model hydrant outlets. You should be able to model a hydrant as a flow emitter and enter the appropriate value for K. Not all of the energy available immediately upstream of the hydrant is lost, however. Instead, some of the energy is converted into increased velocity head, especially for the smaller (2.5 in, 63 mm) hydrant outlet. In order to accurately model a hydrant, the model must be given an overall K value, which includes head loss through a hydrant and conversion of pressure head to velocity head. AWWA Standards C502 and C503 govern the allowable pressure drop through a hydrant. For example, the standards state that the 2.5 in. outlet must have a pressure drop less than 2.0 psi (1.46 m) when passing 500 gpm (31.5 l/s). The energy equation can be written between a pressure gauge immediately upstream of the hydrant and the hydrant outlet:

K=

1 ⎛ 1 1 1 1 ⎞ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ 2 gC c 2 ( D 4 − D 4 ) + k 2 ⎟ F F O P ⎝ ⎠


1

2

A-691

Modeling Tips

Where:

v

=

velocity (ft./sec., m/s)

CF

=

unit conversion factor (2.31 for pressure in psi, 1 for pressure in m)

cF

=

unit conversion factor (2.44 for flow in gpm, diameter in inches, 0.0785 for flow in l/s, diameter in mm)

g

=

gravitation acceleration (ft./sec.2, m/s2)

k

=

pressure drop coefficient for hydrant

K

=

overall emitter coefficient

The difference between K and k is that K includes the terms for conversion of velocity head to pressure head. k is known, but K is the value needed for modeling. A typical hydrant lateral in North America is 6 in. (150 mm) and typical outlet sizes are 2.5 in. (63 mm) and 4.5 in. (115 mm). Values for k vary from minimum values, which can be back calculated from AWWA standards, to much higher values actually delivered by hydrants. Values for K for a range of k values for 6 in. (150 mm) pipes are given below. Table A-1: Emitter K Values for Hydrants Outlet Nominal (in.)

k gpm, psi

k l/s, m

K gpm, psi

K l/s, m

2.5

250-600

18-45

150-180

11-14

2-2.5

350-700

26-52

167-185

13-15

4.5

447-720

33-54

380-510

30-40

The coefficients given are based on a 5 ft. (1.5 m) burial depth and a 5.5 in. (140 mm) hydrant barrel. A range of values is given because each manufacturer has a different configuration for hydrant barrels and valving. The lowest value is the minimum AWWA standard.

A-692



A.3.10

Modeling Variable Speed Pumps With WaterCAD, it is possible to model the behavior of variable speed pumps (VSP), whether they are controlled by variable frequency drives, hydraulic couplings or some other variable speed drive. Workarounds that were previously used, such as pumping through a pressure-reducing valve, are no longer needed. The parameter that is used to adjust pump speeds is the relative speed. The relative speed is the ratio of the pump’s actual speed to some reference speed. The reference speed generally used is the full speed of the motor. For example, if the pump speed is 1558 rpm while the motor is a 1750-rpm motor, the relative speed is 0.89. This relative speed is used with the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump head characteristic curve to model the pump. If only a steady state run is being made and the pump relative speed is known, the speed of the variable speed pump can be set in the General tab of the pump dialog box. However, if the conditions that control the pump are not known at the start or an EPS run is being made, then variable speed behavior must be described in more detail. Modeling variable speed pumps includes: •

“Types of Variable Speed Pumps” on page A-693

•

“Pattern Based” on page A-694

•

“Fixed Head” on page A-694

•

“Controls with Fixed Head Operation” on page A-695

Types of Variable Speed Pumps The behavior of the VSP is set under the VSP tab within the pump dialog box. There are two ways to control a variable speed pump. One is to provide a Pattern (see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394) of pump relative speeds. This is best used for cases where you are trying to model some past event where the pump speeds are known exactly or where the pump is not being controlled by some target head. This would be the case where human operators set speed based on a combination of time of day, weather and other factors. The second type of control is Fixed Head control, where the pump speed is adjusted to maintain a head somewhere in the system. For water distribution pumping into a pressure zone with no storage, this is usually some pressure sensor on the downstream side of the pump. For wastewater pumping, the pump may be operated to maintain a constant wet well level on the suction side (i.e., flow matching). To indicate that a pump is behaving as a VSP, first check the box next to Variable Speed Pump? at the top of the VSP tab. This will change the remaining boxes on the tab from gray to white.


A-693

Modeling Tips

Pattern Based If you want to provide the actual pump relative speeds, Pattern Based should be selected from the VSP Type menu. The default pattern is Fixed, which corresponds to constant speed performance at a speed from the General tab. Usually, you will want to specify a series of pump relative speeds. To do this, click the Ellipsis (…) button next to Pump Speed Pattern. This will open the Pattern Manager dialog box (for more information, see “Pattern Manager” on page 9-394). Click the Add button, and the Pattern Editor dialog box will appear (for more information, see “Pattern Editor” on page 9-395). From this dialog box, you can assign a label (name) to the new Pattern and complete the series of multipliers (i.e., relative speeds) versus time. Clicking OK twice will return you to the VSP tab. A difficulty in using Pattern Based speeds is that the pattern that would work well for one scenario may not work well for other scenarios. For example, tanks will run dry or fill and shut off for a slightly different scenario than the one for which the pattern was created.

Fixed Head Fixed head control is achieved by selecting Fixed Head from the VSP Type? menu. Once Fixed Head is selected, you must describe how the control is implemented. You must identify a node that controls the pump. This is the node where some type of pressure or water level sensor is located. This can be done by: •

Using the menu and picking the node from the list

•

Clicking the Ellipsis (…) button and using the Select Element dialog box (for more information, see “Single Element Selection Dialog Box” on page 5-260)

•

Clicking the Select From Drawing button (see “Select From Drawing Button” on page 5-261) and picking the node from the drawing

In selecting the control node, you must choose a node that is actually controlled by the VSP. For example, the selected node must be in the same pressure zone (i.e., one that is not separated from the pump by another pump or PRV) and should not have a tank directly between the node and the pump. You must then select the head to be maintained at that node. If the node selected for control is a tank, then the Target Head is set as the initial head in the tank. If a junction node is selected, the head must be a feasible head. If a physically infeasible head is given, the problem may not be solved or some unrealistic flow may be forced to meet this head (e.g., backward flow through pump).

A-694


Frequently Asked Questions You also have the option of setting the maximum relative speed of the pump, which would usually correspond to the rated speed of the motor. The default value for this is 1.0. You can have the model ignore this limit by placing a large value in the field for maximum speed.

Controls with Fixed Head Operation Note:

There should only be a single VSP serving a given pressure zone. If more than one VSP tries to use the same node as a control node, then the model will issue an error message and not solve. If you try to use two different nodes that are very close hydraulically, an error will also result.

When the relative pump speed reaches maximum speed (usually 1.0), the model treats the pump essentially as a constant speed pump. In the case of pumps controlled by a junction node, when the conditions warrant, the pump will once again behave as a VSP. However, for pumps controlled by tanks, the pump will run at a maximum speed for the remainder of the EPS run, once they reach maximum speed. To get the pump to switch back to variable speed operation, you need to insert a control statement that switches the pump back to variable speed. Consider the example below: PMP-1 tries to maintain 280 ft. discharge at node T-1 on the discharge side of the pump, but pump (PMP-1) switches to full speed when the flow is so great that it cannot maintain 280 ft. In that case, the water level drops below 280 ft. As demand decreases, the level increases until it reaches 280 ft., at which time variable speed operation begins again. To make this occur in the model, you must use a logical control (see “Logical Controls” on page 9-397) to restore variable speed operation: IF (HGL T-1 >= 280 ft) THEN (PMP-1 = ON)

A.3.11

Creating Scenarios to Model “What If?” Situations The scenario management feature was designed to let you model “What If?” situations by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data. Comparing different output results is just as simple. To create a new scenario: 1. Open the Scenario Control Center dialog box by clicking the Scenario Control Center button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main application window. 2. Click the Scenario Wizard button in the upper left of the Scenario Control Center dialog box.


A-695

Modeling Tips 3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard—Name the new scenario, choose which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done. 4. Close the Scenario Control Center dialog box. Notice the scenario you have just created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario choice list in the main application window. 5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new scenario.

A.3.12

How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge Base? You can access of hundreds of commonly asked questions at our online Knowledge Base. The quickest way to access the Knowledge Base is to click the Globe Icon in the product toolbars. This will automatically log you on to our website. Simply click the Knowledge Base icon next to the Haestad product of interest. If the computer you are using does not have internet access, you can log on to Knowledge Base at an alternate computer by going to http://www.haestad.com and entering the ClientCare portion of the website. You can then log on with the Product ID located in the back of the user’s manual or your PID number.

A.3.13

Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips If you’ve found your way to this section, then you are probably looking for an answer to a problem that you cannot find elsewhere. Please refer to the list below if you are having problems running Darwin Calibrator (you keep getting unsatisfactory solutions) or if you receive this message while running a calibration: The calibration engine was unsuccessful. See the help system for troubleshooting tips. If you are receiving the engine unsuccessful message, try the following:

A-696

•

Take note of the error message that is provided along with the calibration engine was unsuccessful message. It may provide a clue as to why your calibration didn’t run and save you from having to go any further through this list!

•

Ensure that the scenario model upon which the calibration is based will run properly in WaterCAD. Select Analysis > Compute, select the steady state button, and click GO. If the run obtains either a yellow or green light, then the hydraulic model runs and this is not the problem.


Frequently Asked Questions •

Ensure that all your roughness and demand group settings are valid and reasonable. For example, ensure that roughness adjustments and/or demand adjustments are not such that your hydraulic model might have difficulty converging. For example, make sure that you are not allowing demands to be set too high or pipes too rough, causing excessive amounts of head loss.

•

If you have a large number of pipes assigned to status groups, review the need to include all of those pipes as status decisions and try to minimize the number of pipes in status groups. Note:

•

Virtual memory settings should only be adjusted by advanced users or system administrators.

You may be experiencing low system memory. When running Darwin Calibrator, be sure to close any other unused applications and if adjusting advanced GA parameters ensure that you are using a cut probability of more than a few percent, and a splice probability of less than 90 percent. If your system doesn’t have much RAM (<128Mb), you may also wish to increase the amount of allocated virtual memory that your system is using. Windows 98/ME users should let Windows manage virtual memory, however, Windows NT4/2000/XP users may wish to increase the size of their system paging file. Please see your Microsoft Windows documentation for information on virtual memory settings specific to your operating system.

If you are having problems getting reasonable calibration solutions, try the following: •

Ensure that the Time field for each of your field data measurement sets corresponds to the time of day that your measurements were taken. The reason being that the time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are in turn used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated within the GA calibration engine. (The demand at a junction during a GA calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.) Pump settings and control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers. Also note that a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands applied, whereas a GA calibration run based on a steady state scenario will still use pattern multipliers for the specified time.

•

Modifying the status of a link can have significant effects on hydraulic results and your chances of finding good calibration solutions. If you are using a number of status group adjustments, you should review why you need those adjustment groups. It may be better to experiment with these kinds of adjustments manually, or get somebody to find out whether that valve really is closed and remove the status decision from the GA calibration. In general, try to keep status adjustment decisions to a minimum.


A-697

Modeling Tips

A-698

•

Make sure that your adjustment groupings are logical. For example, junctions are grouped by similar pattern or demands for demand groups and pipes are grouped by similar size, age and location for roughness groups.

•

Ensure that you do not have too many adjustment groups or the allowable ranges and increments for those groups do not allow too many choices for each group. For example, a roughness group allowed to vary between a Hazen-Williams C of 80 and a Hazen-Williams C of 130, with an increment of 0.1 equates to 500 different possible roughness settings for one group. This is far too high! Try to choose lower and upper bounds, and an increment that will give you no more than 10-12 possible values. If need be, you can start off with course settings (say 80 to 130 with an increment of 5) initially, and gradually refine the allowable range and increment to refine your calibration solutions. This applies to both roughness adjustment groups and also to demand adjustment groups.

•

Make sure that you have sufficient and quality field data and that it has been entered correctly. In general, it is a good idea to have as many (or more) field data measurements as adjustment groups for the calibration, or else your calibration problem is under-specified. This means that there is likely to be multiple calibration solutions that produce the same or very similar hydraulic results (e.g., solutions that exhibit compensating errors). In theory, there is only one correct solution, however, due to limits observed for many practical model calibrations, the more quality field data you can provide, the better chance you have of finding a solution that is close to the real situation. When assessing the number of field observations that you have, consider that each individual observation should contribute unique and accurate information to the calibration. For example, pressure measurements made at two junctions in different parts of the distribution system are likely to be more valuable than two measurements made at locations close to each other in the distribution system. In fact, the two measurements taken at points close together may only be as good as one measurement. That is, both measurements say the same thing about the system. Simply, the field data you collect and enter into Darwin Calibrator should be data that represents times when your system is experiencing high demand, even if it is only the result of such activities as fire flow tests. The reason for this is that during times of normal demands, the head loss across the system is usually on the same order of magnitude as the error in measuring head loss. Therefore, small errors in measurement can lead to huge errors in roughness coefficient or demand.

•

Make sure that you haven’t entered field data observations that are made impossible to achieve by any observed boundary conditions, such as an observed grade out for a PRV set to a different grade.


Frequently Asked Questions Note:

A.4

Tank levels, pump speed settings, and valve settings are all used by the calibration engine as boundary conditions and as such these field data entries will not appear in the calibration report summary. That is, these quantities are set as fixed in the calibration simulations and the calibration does not try to match these data. All other quantities are used as observed quantities that the calibration engine tries to match by adjusting parameters defined in your adjustment groups.

•

Make sure you are using the correct boundary conditions. If you have entered observations for tank levels etc., ensure that you have not made any errors in entering the data.

•

If after following the tips in this check list you are still experiencing problems, or just to learn more about the GA or Darwin Calibrator itself, see “Darwin Calibrator Methodology” on page B-748.

Display Tips The following display tips will be discussed in this section:

A.4.1

•

“How Do I Change Units in a Column?” on page A-699

•

“How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing?” on page A-700

•

“How Do I Color Code Elements?” on page A-700

•

“How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels?” on page A701

•

“How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels?” on page A-701

How Do I Change Units in a Column? Note:

The change of units affects only the data in the Table. It DOES NOT change the units within your network design.

In a Table, you may change the units of all the data within any column. To change the units: •

Select Use Local Units from the Options menu in the Tabular Report dialog box.

•

Right-click the column heading, or any data item within a column.

•

Select Properties from the shortcut menu.

•

Change the units and select OK. All data items in that column will change to the selected units.


A-699

Display Tips

A.4.2

How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? To change the size of element symbols and labels: •

Select Tools > Options, and select the Drawing tab.

•

In the Annotation Multipliers group, change the Symbol Size Multiplier to modify the element size, and the Text Height Multiplier to modify the label size. Smaller numbers will make the element symbols and text decrease in size.

These changes will affect all symbols and text, including color coding legends, but will not have any effect on pipe lengths.

A.4.3

How Do I Color Code Elements? To color code elements: •

Select Tools > Color Coding, or click the Color Coding (rainbow) button on the toolbar.

•

In the Color Coding dialog box, select the attribute you would like to color code.

•

Click the Initialize button to automatically build a range of colors. You may decide to modify these default ranges. Alternatively, pick a color for the first and last values in the list and click the Ramp button. This will automatically generate a gradient range based on a combination of the specified colors.

•

Click OK to color code the drawing.

All link or node elements and their labels will be colored based on the specified ranges. You can also use the Initialize button to quickly set up and modify Color Coding Options. A Color Coding Legend may be inserted into the drawing by using the Legend tool (see “Legend” on page 13-558) located on the Tool Palette.

A-700



A.4.4

How Do I Remove Color Coding from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Labels? Due to popular request, Haestad Methods has implemented the separation of elements and their labels. This gives you much more control over the placement and formatting of the labels, in addition to resolving the problem of color coding labels with elements. However, if you open an old drawing (version 3.1 or earlier) with existing color coding on the labels, this color coding will not dynamically update. The solution to this problem is to move the labels to a different layer, and assign a neutral color to them. To do this, select Tools > Element Properties, and choose the Labels tab. Assign a new layer to the labels for all the elements, and check Apply to Existing Objects.

A.4.5

How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? To make the program reuse the label for a deleted element: 1. Select Tools > Element Labeling. 2. Enter the ID number for the deleted element in the Next field for the appropriate type of element. 3. Click OK. 4. Add a new element to the drawing.

A.5

Editing Tips The following tips will be discussed in this section:

A.5.1

•

“Mouse Tips” on page A-701

•

“Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline” on page A-702

•

“Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline” on page A-703

Mouse Tips The right mouse button (Mouse Buttons) can be used to: •

Select units and precision for displaying data.

•

Get context-sensitive Help for dialog boxes and data entry fields.

•

Open a pop-up Context Menu of command options for an element.


A-701

Editing Tips The mouse wheel can be used in a few different ways:

A.5.2

•

Click and hold the mouse wheel while moving to pan the drawing view.

•

Scroll the drawing view horizontally by rolling the mouse wheel.

•

Hold down the Ctrl button while scrolling with the mouse wheel to zoom in and out in the drawing view.

Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline When laying out pipes using the Pipe Layout tool, this program will allow you to draw pipes with multiple bends by using the Control key on your keyboard. To draw a pipe with bends: 1. Click the Pipe Layout tool to begin laying out your network. 2. Move the mouse to the desired location, and click to insert the first element. 3. The layout tool will rubber-band, indicating that a pipe will be inserted when the next element is added. In Stand-Alone mode: 1. At this point, hold down the Control key. The cursor appearance will change to a Crosshair to indicate that pipe bends will be added. 2. While holding the Control key down, click to insert any number of pipe bends. 3. When you are through adding pipe bends, release the Control key. 4. The appearance of the cursor will change to reflect the next element to be added. 5. Click with the mouse to terminate the pipe and add the next element. In AutoCAD mode: 1. Select Bend from the right-click menu. 2. Draw the pipe as you would draw a polyline. 3. Right-click and select the end node of the pipe.

A-702



A.5.3

Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline Tip:

In Stand-Alone mode, you can remove vertices by selecting the pipe. Right-click the vertex you wish to remove, and select Bend > Remove Bend. In AutoCAD mode, you can remove vertices by selecting Edit > Modify Pipes > Remove Bends. Select the pipe and the location of the bend that you would like removed.

In Stand-Alone mode, to make a straight pipe into a multi-segmented polyline: 1. Right-click the pipe to which you would like to add a vertex. 2. From the context menu, select the Bend > Add Bend menu item. 3. A vertex will be added to the pipe. Click and drag the vertex to move it. In AutoCAD Mode: Note:

There is no limit on the number of vertices that a pipe may have.

1. Select Edit from the Main Menu. 2. Select Modify Pipe. 3. Select Insert Bend. 4. Click the location in the pipe where you want the bend. 5. Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the bend in the pipe.

A.6

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips 1. How do I consider fire flows in my design? You may consider fire flows by one of two methods: a. Use the demand adjustments feature in the required design event to add additional demand to the specific junctions at which fires are to be fought. b. In WaterCAD, create a child demand alternative of the demand alternative referenced by the representative scenario, and then add the fire flows as fixed pattern flows to the appropriate junctions. Next, in Darwin Designer, set up a design event and select the Override Scenario Demand Alternative check box, and select the new child demand alternative you created. Of the two methods, the second one is preferred, since, after you have exported your design from Darwin Designer to a new scenario, you will most likely want to verify the performance of the design directly within WaterCAD. If you have used method one to add fire flows, then you will have to add those fire flows to your current (or new) demand alternative in order to simulate the design against the


A-703

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips same demands as in your design event. If you had used method two, however, then you would not need to create any additional demand alternatives, since you had already done that. 2. How do I consider emergency conditions and facility outages? Emergency conditions, such as pipe breaks and facility outages, can be handled in Darwin Designer by using the boundary-conditions feature of a design event to close pipes that would normally be open. For example, you may want to consider the effect of a water treatment plant being out of service. This can be achieved by adding any connecting pipes to the design-event boundary conditions and setting their status to closed. 3. Designer only sizes or rehabilitates pipes. How can I consider the inclusion of new facilities? Selection of new facilities may be achieved by using various modeling techniques, an example of which follows. Selecting the location of a new tank: a. You can select the location of a new tank modeling the new proposed tank in the representative scenario. Given a specific tank location you will need to enter the tank elevation, diameter, and other size information as if it existed— but, connect the tank to the system with a short small diameter pipe. Give the new pipe an obvious label such as New Tank Connector. The pipe that connects the tank to the system should have a length of 1 and a diameter of 0.01. b. Create a new Design group and label it as New Tank Connector, or something similar, and add the connecting pipe to the new group. c. In Darwin Designer, create a new pipe option group, label it New Tank, or something similar, and add the following data: Diameter

Cost

0

0

X

Cost of Tank

Where, X is some large diameter sufficient for the expected flows to and from the tank. d. In your local design run group, enable the new pipe group by clicking Active and select the New Tank option group. Darwin Designer can now connect the tank to the system and incur the cost specified in the above table, or it will construct a 0 diameter pipe (no pipe) and the tank will not be included in the system. Note that it is up to you to

A-704


Frequently Asked Questions make sure that sufficient demand cases are investigated to verify the tank’s design and that tank operation is independently verified through an EPS simulation. Using similar logic Designer could be used to consider the inclusion exclusion of pump stations, valves, water treatment facilities, reservoirs and so on. 4. Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I doing wrong? There are a number of things that could be causing you get strange or unexpected results with Darwin Designer. Before calling technical support, please take the time to review this list to see if any of these things may apply to you. a. Make sure you are using the correct design data. Make sure you are using the correct representative design scenario and that scenario includes all pipes to be sized by Darwin Designer. b. Make sure that the representative design scenario runs successfully within WaterCAD. If it does not, then Designer will not be able to function correctly. c. Make sure that the correct demands are present. For EPS representative scenarios, make sure your patterns are correct and that you are using the correct time from start value in your design events. d. Make sure that you have applied the correct and necessary boundary conditions. For example, if you are designing for a 7 a.m. peak-flow condition, make sure that you have boundary conditions specified for all necessary tank levels, pump operation, etc. For designs that include a significant amount of new infrastructure or completely new designs, tank levels have to be assumed tank levels. e. Make sure that the range of pipe sizes and rehab actions you are using are reasonable. For example, make sure that you are allowing Darwin Designer a sufficient range of pipe diameters to come up with a reasonable design. While Darwin Designer does perform an initial feasibility check (it uses the largest pipe sizes and checks minimum pressures), too few pipe choices may artificially restrict the flexibility of the optimization. Conversely, too many choices may affect the convergence of the optimization on to a good solution. It doesn’t make sense, for example, to allow a rising main from a pump station to be 6 in. or 8 in. f.

Make sure that you have a reasonable number of design and/or rehab groups. As an extreme example, consider that every pipe to be design was in the same group. Then the only possible solution that the optimization can arrive at is to construct all of the pipes the same size. While it may still be possible to find a feasible solution, only having a single design group will restrict the flexibility of the optimization and the ability of Darwin Designer to find cheaper solutions. Conversely, too many design groups will hinder the


A-705

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips convergence of the optimization and result in sub-optimal solutions. A good number of design groups will depend on the actual model and design situation, but would lie somewhere between 10 and 100. g. Make sure you have sufficient and reasonable design constraints in place. The genetic algorithm optimization engine in Darwin Designer is very powerful. If the objective of the optimization is to minimize cost, the optimization engine will do everything in its power to minimize cost including unwanted things that may not have been disallowed by the designer. The worst case scenario is a design with no constraints. If the design does not have any performance requirements, then the cheapest design is no design at all. The optimization algorithm only knows the problem that is defined for it, and to that end if you wish to get meaningful designs from Darwin Designer, you need to constrain your designs appropriately. The idea is to set up design constraints that corner the optimization algorithm into a region of the solution space (region of all possible solutions) that makes the most practical sense. Design constraints can be applied in Darwin Designer by pressures (max. and min.) and also pipe velocities (max. and min.). An example of an impractical situation in a hydraulic model might be a 1 MG tank that is draining at far too high a rate. In order to save costs on constructing pipes to a more distant source, the optimization algorithm may over-use a closer water source. Another example of a design constraint—other than the pressure and flow constraints—is the number of design events (and hence demand/operational cases) that the design must meet. The optimal solution to a single demand case does not fully reflect the real system operating scenarios. If a single load condition is used along with a zero-diameter as one of possible sizes in a option group, it will most likely result in a branched network design. Thus, it is necessary for reliability reasons to design systems for multiple demand conditions. It is up to the engineer to recognize any impracticality of an optimized design and set up the necessary design constraints to prevent that type of design from being feasible, thus removing that design possibility from the grasp of the optimization algorithm. 5. How do I include a special cost, such as the cost of a highway crossing or interconnection in my design? To do this you need to do three things: a. Group together the pipes that will attract the special cost. These pipes can be each in their own groups or all in one group, but they should be grouped such that they are separate from pipes that won’t attract the special cost. b. Create a option group (new pipe or rehabilitation option group) that includes the special cost premiums. c. Assign the special option groups to the associated design groups locally, for the design run you wish to use with the special costs.

A-706


Frequently Asked Questions 6. Designer keeps coming up with pipe sizes that change up or down in size. I wouldn’t construct such a design; what can I do? Darwin Designer applies a competent genetic algorithm to optimize the design. It does not require or have any domain-specific knowledge about the water system, which ensures it is a generic tool, but also causes some side-effect for some design cases—like giving up-or-down pipe sizes. In particular, the solutions are evaluated by comparing the fitness values of solutions. Darwin Designer will assume a pipeline with pipe sizes that go up and down (to meet required pressures as closely as possible) is better than one that has a constant size that exceeds the pressures at some locations, since there is no specific penalty assigned to the fitness of a solution that has pipes that change up and down in size. It is, therefore, up to you to control the eventual design and this can be done by different means, as follows: a. The first means is simply to make manual adjustments to a design after Darwin Designer has finished, in order to clean up the design and make it a practical design. Cleaning up a design may technically move you away from the cheapest design, but an inexpensive design that won’t be constructed is of little use. You may find that not much cleaning up is necessary. Quick edits to diameters or rehab actions like can be performed effectively in Darwin Designer by using a manual design run. b. Another thing to consider when analyzing a Darwin Designer design is whether the chosen pipe sizes are a function of the lengths of pipe in your model. To better illustrate this concept, consider a run of four pipes in series, each with different lengths. For these four pipes, the controlling pressure is the downstream-most junction, and all intermediate junctions are well above the required pressure. Now, after Darwin Designer finishes designing the run of pipe, it selects the first pipe as a 16 in., the second as 12 in., the third as 16 in. and the fourth as 12 in. It is unlikely that this design would be constructed asis, but if the pipes themselves represented sufficient length of pipe, then it may be practical to construct a portion of the pipeline as 16 in. and a portion as 12 in. If this is the case, then you need to look at the model to determine why Darwin Designer is changing the third pipe back up to 16 in. It may be that since the downstream-most junction is the only controlling node, that Darwin Designer is merely trying to achieve the right head-loss in the total pipe length, by choosing the length of pipe that should be 16 in. and the length that should be 12 in. Of course, it is still constrained by the individual pipe lengths in the model, but if they are different, the optimization algorithm will use this fact to its advantage. In this case, it may very well be that Designer is saying construct a total of 1500 ft. of 16-in. and 1000 ft. of 12-in. pipe, and


A-707

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips not necessarily 850 feet of 16-in., 600 feet of 12-in., 650 feet of 16-in., and 400 feet of 12-in. pipe in sections. Use engineering judgment when analyzing the results. c. Another means of achieving more constructible designs from Darwin Designer is to group in the same group pipes that would be constructed the same size. For example, a rising main would most likely be constructed a single size, and it would thus make sense to include all the model pipes that make up the rising main in the same design group. What you don’t want to do by grouping pipes is artificially design the system even before you have had a chance to optimize it. 7. When sizing new pipes, Darwin Designer can choose a zero-size, which means, do not construct that pipe. Is it possible to do a similar thing for rehabilitation actions? It is possible to do the same thing for rehabilitation actions. To create a rehabilitation action that represents a Do Nothing option, simply follow these steps: a. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab diameter function that defines at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. For example, mi.n pipe size through max. pipe size and make the pre-rehab diameter the same as the post-rehab diameter. This function will define that the diameter of any single pipe remains the same before and after the rehab action. b. Create a diameter versus unit cost function that defines at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g., min. pipe size through max. pipe size and make the cost for each diameter zero. This function will thus define that the cost for the rehab action, regardless of pipe size is zero. c. Create a pre-rehab diameter versus post-rehab roughness function that defines at least two diameters that cover the domain of diameters in your model. E.g., min. pipe size through max. pipe size and make the post-rehab roughness, the roughness of the current pipes to which the Do Nothing option will be an option. This function will thus define that the resulting roughness stays the same as the original values. Create a Do Nothing rehab action that references each of the above functions. If selected by Designer, the Do Nothing action will leave the same diameter, cost nothing, and leave the same roughness: in effect, doing nothing. 8. Do I have to change the parameters or can I simply use the defaults? In most circumstances it is not necessary to change the parameters in order to run Darwin Designer, however, you may wish to modify certain values as follows: a. Random Seed—The Darwin Designer optimization algorithm depends on the generation of pseudo-random numbers through a random number generator. The reason the numbers are pseudo-random is that they are generated by a mathematical formula, and hence the resulting series of numbers is not actually random at all. In order to make the random numbers different the random

A-708


Frequently Asked Questions number algorithm is initialized with what is known as a seed. For a different seed value, a different series of pseudo-random numbers will be produced. When no parameters in the Designer optimization problem change (i.e., no changes at all, including hydraulic model changes, constraint changes, etc.), running Darwin Designer twice will result in exactly the same result. Darwin Designer results are therefore repeatable in this way. One way of ensuring a different result (or at least a different progression to the same result) is by changing the random number seed. Doing this will result in different optimization results for different runs. By the nature of genetic algorithm optimization, you should not just accept the result of a single optimization run, but run several runs and make sure that all runs produce similar results. An easy way to run multiple runs and achieve different results is to change the random number seed. b. Penalty Factor—Penalty factor is a weighting that is used in the determination of the fitness value for an hydraulic solution. In particular the penalty factor is used to discourage the survival of designs that fail the design constraints. A higher value for penalty factor will put designs that fail the design constraints in greater disfavor, where as a lower value for penalty factor will place designs that fail the design constraints in less disfavor. A reasonable default for penalty factor has already been selected for you. However, if you find that Darwin Designer keeps settling on designs that contain constraint violation, then you may wish to increase the penalty factor value. c. Probabilities, Era Numbers, and Population Size—Good defaults have already been selected for you for these values, but instead of changing the random number seed when conducting multiple optimization runs of the same design, you may want to change these values. Good ranges for the values are therefore listed below for your convenience. Note:

The upper limit values for population size, maximum era number, and era generation number are problem-dependent. For larger design models, you should use greater values than for smaller models.

Population Size : 40 to 200 Cut Probability : 0.5 to 2.5% Splice Probability: 50 to 80% Mutation Probability: 0.5 to 2% Maximum Era Number: 4 to 10 Era Generation Number: 50 to 200 9. Is there a way to select design and rehab group pipes from the model drawing?


A-709

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips You cannot select pipes directly from the drawing in this first release of Darwin Designer. For this reason, we recommend you identify pipe groups and create appropriately-named selection sets before starting Darwin Designer. When you have defined the necessary selection sets, they can be used directly within Darwin Designer. Selection sets can also be used to define pressure and flow constraints, and to select boundary condition elements. 10. Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. How do I work out what is going wrong? It is very likely that in using Darwin Designer, you will encounter situations where Darwin Designer cannot find a feasible solution. This happens even to those experienced in genetic-algorithm optimization and is due to the fact that the determination of which designs are feasible and which aren’t is assessed by a computer subject to the information you tell it. That is, the rules are applied, with no exceptions. For example, if you want a minimum of 20 psi across the board, Darwin Designer will determine as infeasible any solution that does not have 20 psi at every junction. If you have a couple of junctions that are part of the detail of a tank inlet valving, for example, then maybe you don’t really require 20 psi at those junctions. Perhaps what you really mean is that you want 20 psi at all service junctions. In that case, you’ll find where an engineer would have said the design is feasible (because the design only fails the 20 psi requirement at non-service junctions), but Darwin Designer is unable to make that determination, since it was told 20 psi was required at all junctions. The process by which you can get around these kinds of issues is simply to identify them, correct them, and then re-run the optimization. For the case of the 20 psi junction example, the fix might be to create a selection set (in WaterCAD) of the junctions that are service junctions, and only use those junctions as pressure constraint junctions. (The selection set can be selected from within Darwin Designer.) Along these same lines, you may also want to consider if any of the following things might be causing trouble, before calling technical support: a. Check for constraint violations in the results. Check both pressure and flow constraints for the presence of constraint violations. If any violations exist, you will need to determine why the junctions and/or pipes at which the violations occur are problematic. Maybe a minimum pressure constraint is simply impossible to meet due to the junction elevation, etc. Other things to check for are the applicability of blanket minimum and maximum pressures and velocities to modeling elements in detail models of pump stations, and the like. If you find anything, then you need either to change the model, or modify/ remove the offending constraint and run the optimization again. b. Make sure you have sufficient design options for a feasible design. That is, make sure that you have a sufficient range of pipe sizes and/or rehabilitation actions available to Darwin Designer to find a valid design.

A-710


Frequently Asked Questions c. Make sure that you haven’t specified competing design events. While it may be possible to meet one design event or another separately, it may be impossible to meet two together if they compete with each other. For example, one design event might specify that a minimum pressure is required, and as such the corresponding pipe taking the flow to that location needs to be large, however, in the next design event with similar demands, a minimum velocity constraint means the pipe has to be sized smaller. It may be impossible to meet both design events with the single pipe size. To test this, build runs up by performing initially with only one design event, then adding more in. If all of a sudden after adding in a design event no more feasible solutions can be found, then you can try to work out what in the most recently added design event is causing the problem. d. For multi-objective and maximum benefit optimizations, make sure you have sufficient budget specified. It may just be that you have not given Darwin Designer sufficient budget to allow a feasible design to be found. Try increasing the budget. For more information, see “Designer keeps coming up with strange results. What am I doing wrong?” on page A-705.


A-711

Advanced Darwin Designer Tips

A-712


Appendix

B

WaterCAD Theory

WaterCAD is a state-of-the-art software tool primarily for use in the modeling and analysis of water distribution systems. However, the methodology is applicable to any fluid system with the following characteristics: •

Steady or gradually-varying turbulent flow

•

Incompressible, Newtonian, single phase fluids

•

Full, closed conduits (pressure systems)

Examples of systems with these characteristics include potable water systems, sewage forcemains, fire protection systems, well pumps, and raw water pumping. The WaterCAD algorithms are anticipated to grow and evolve to keep pace with the state of the practice in water distribution and water quality modeling. Because the mathematical solution methods are being continually extended, this manual deals primarily with the fundamental principles underlying these algorithms, and focuses less on the details of the implementation of the algorithms.

B.1

Acknowledgements WaterCAD was designed, developed and programmed by Haestad Methods’ staff of Software Engineers and Civil Engineers. This program is intended to represent the latest technology in Windows-based Water Distribution Analysis and Design. WaterCAD numerical computations are based on research conducted by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Drinking Water Research Division, Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory, its employees and consultants. As a result, WaterCAD will generate results consistent with the EPA computer program EPANET 2.


B-713

Pressure Network Hydraulics

B.2

Pressure Network Hydraulics Pressure network hydraulics includes:

B.2.1

•

“Network Hydraulics Theory” on page B-714

•

“The Energy Equation” on page B-716

•

“Hydraulic and Energy Grades” on page B-716

•

“Conservation of Mass and Energy” on page B-717

•

“The Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719

•

“Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719

•

“The Linear System Equation Solver” on page B-722

•

“Pump Theory” on page B-723

•

“Valve Theory” on page B-726

Network Hydraulics Theory In practice, pipe networks consist not only of pipes, but of miscellaneous fittings, services, storage tanks and reservoirs, meters, regulating valves, pumps, and electronic and mechanical controls. For modeling purposes, these system elements are organized into the following categories:

B-714

•

Pipes—Transport water from one location (or node) to another.

•

Junctions/Nodes—Specific points, or nodes, in the system at which an event of interest is occurring. This includes points where pipes intersect, where there are major demands on the system such as a large industry, a cluster of houses, or a fire hydrant, or critical points in the system where pressures are important for analysis purposes.

•

Reservoirs and Tanks—Boundary nodes with a known hydraulic grade that define the initial hydraulic grades for any computational cycle. They form the baseline hydraulic constraints used to determine the condition of all other nodes during system operation. Boundary nodes are elements such as tanks, reservoirs, and pressure sources.

•

Pumps—Represented as nodes. Their purpose is to provide energy to the system and raise the water pressure.

•

Valves—Mechanical devices used to stop or control the flow through a pipe, or to control the pressure in the pipe upstream or downstream of the valve. They result in a loss of energy in the system.


WaterCAD Theory An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the system. While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a solution, there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network, including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle (see “Conservation of Mass and Energy” on page B-717), and the Energy Principle (see “The Energy Principle” on page B-715). The two modes of analysis are Steady-State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period Simulation (for more information, see “Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation” on page 9-378). This program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades using the Gradient Algorithm.

The Energy Principle The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval. The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disregarded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude. In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight, resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic system is often represented in three parts: Pressure Head:

p/γ

Elevation Head:

z

Velocity Head:

V2/2g

Where:


p

=

Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)

γ

=

Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)

z

=

Elevation (m, ft.)

V

=

Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)

g

=

Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec.2)

B-715

Pressure Network Hydraulics These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two locations using the energy equation (for more information, see “The Energy Equation” on page B-716).

B.2.2

The Energy Equation In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respectively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, you then obtain the energy equation: p1 V2 p V 2 + z1 + 1 + h p = 2 + z 2 + 2 + hL γ 2g γ 2g

Where:

p

=

Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)

g

=

Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)

z

=

Elevation at the centroid (m, ft.)

V

=


g

=


hp

=

Head gain from a pump (m, ft.)

hL

=

Combined headloss (m, ft.)

The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quantities, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.

B.2.3

Hydraulic and Energy Grades Hydraulic and energy grades includes:

B-716

•

“Hydraulic Grade” on page B-717

•

“Energy Grade” on page B-717


WaterCAD Theory

Figure B-1: EGL and HGL

Hydraulic Grade The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/g) and elevation head (z). The hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezometer. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic grade line, or HGL.

Energy Grade The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g). This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL, as can be seen in the following figure.

B.2.4

Conservation of Mass and Energy Conservation of mass and energy includes: •

“Conservation of Mass” on page B-717

•

“Conservation of Energy” on page B-718

Conservation of Mass At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into flows from connecting pipes, demands, and storage, you obtain:

∑ QIN ∆t = ∑ Q OUT ∆t + ∆VS


B-717


Where:

QIN

=

Total flow into the node (m3/s, cfs)

QOUT

=

Total demand at the node (m3/s, cfs)

∆VS

=

Change in storage volume (m3, ft.3)

∆t

=

Change in time (s)

Conservation of Energy The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose head when proceeding in the flow direction).

Figure B-2: Conservation of Energy The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to achieve the same hydraulic grade (see “Hydraulic and Energy Grades” on page B716) as at the beginning.

B-718


WaterCAD Theory

B.2.5

The Gradient Algorithm The gradient algorithm for the solution of pipe networks is formulated upon the full set of system equations that model both heads and flows. Since both continuity and energy are balanced and solved with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaranteed to deliver the same level of accuracy observed and expected in other well-known algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the Linear Theory Method (Wood). In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems: •

The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equivalent looped networks or pseudo-loops.

•

Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition, which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.

•

The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modeler’s error. The loop and path methods fail in these situations.

•

The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.

The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a working system of equations.

B.2.6

Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two incidence matrices:

A12 = A21T

(P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix

and

A10 = A01T

(P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix

The following convention is used to assign matrix values:


B-719


A12(i,j) = 1, 0, or -1

(PxN) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix

Assigned nodal demands are given by:

qT = [q1, q2,…, qN]

(1 x N) Nodal demand vector

Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:

HfT = [Hf1, Hf2,…, HfB ]

(1 x B) Fixed nodal head vector

The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:

FT(Q) = [f1, f2…, fp ]

(1 x P) Non-linear laws expressing headlosses in links

fi = fi (Qi )

These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for unknown flow and unknown nodal head. Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:

QT = [Q1,Q2…, Qp ]

(1 x P) Unknown link flow rate vector

Unknown nodal heads are defined by:

HT = [H1, H2 …, HN ]

(1 x N) Unknown nodal head vector

These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation: A 12H + F(Q) = − A 10H f A 12 Q = q

B-720


WaterCAD Theory A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:

A 11

⎡R Q n1 −1 ⎢ 1 1 ⎢ R2 Q2 ⎢ =⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢⎣

⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ... ⎥ ⎥ ... ⎥ n −1 R P QP P ⎥⎦

n2 −1

This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form: ⎡ A 11 A 12 ⎤ ⎡Q⎤ ⎡− A 10H f ⎤ = ⎢ ⎥ ⎥ 0 ⎦ ⎢⎣H ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ q ⎦ ⎣ A 21

To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H to get: ⎡NA 11 A 12 ⎤ ⎡dQ⎤ ⎡− dE⎤ = ⎢ ⎥ 0 ⎦ ⎢⎣ dH⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ dq ⎥⎦ ⎣ A 21

with ⎤ ⎡n1 ⎥ ⎢ n2 ⎥ N= ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ... ⎥ ⎢ nP ⎦ ⎣

The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by: −1

{

−1

}

H k +1 = −(A 21 N −1 A 11 A12 ) −1 A 21 N −1 (Q k + A11 A10 H f ) + (q − A 21Q k ) −1

Q k +1 = (1 − N −1 )Q k − N −1 A 11 (A12 H k +1 + A10 H f ) The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver (see “The Linear System Equation Solver” on page B-722) that is specifically tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations. Sources:


B-721

Pressure Network Hydraulics Todini, E. and S. Pilati, “A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,” Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1—Systems Analysis and Simulation, ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword, Hertfordshire, England.

B.2.7

The Linear System Equation Solver The Conjugate Gradient method (see “The Gradient Algorithm” on page B-719) is one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps. The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of equations as: Ax = b

where: x = Hk + 1

{

−1

}

b = − A 21 N −1 (Q k + A 11 A 10 H f ) + (q − A 21Q k )

The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is: A = A 21(NA 11 ) −1 A 12 = A 21DA 12

and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total working matrix A that is: •

Symmetric

•

Positive definite

•

Stieltjes type

Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves to increase the computational effort. Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can be performed to give: A = LLT

where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:

B-722


WaterCAD Theory

y = L−1b x = (LT ) −1 y

The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this software solves the system of equations using a variant of Cholesky’s method which has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing storage and reducing overall computational effort.

B.2.8

Pump Theory Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the system. A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, additional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be operating. The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor losses (for more information, see “Minor Losses” on page B-732). When these curves are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found. This is shown in the figure below.

Figure B-3: System Operating Point


B-723

Pressure Network Hydraulics As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change, the static head (Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve, while the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve result in a shifting operating point over time.

Variable Speed Pumps A pump’s characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter, but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws. For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as: Q1 n = 1 Q2 n2

and h1 ⎛ n1 ⎞ ⎟ =⎜ h 2 ⎜⎝ n 2 ⎟⎠

2

Where:

Q

=

Pump flow rate (m3/s, cfs)

h

=

Pump head (m, ft.)

n

=

Pump speed (rpm)

Figure B-4: Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve

B-724


WaterCAD Theory

Constant Horsepower Pumps During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump may not be known. In these cases, the assumption is often made that the pump is adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flow rate relationships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although this assumption is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should only be used for preliminary studies. Note:

It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream of a pump because pumps have built in check valves that prevent reverse flow.

This software currently models six different types of pumps: Tip:

Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points.

•

Constant Power—These pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and estimating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accurate results are desired.

•

Design Point (One-Point)—A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd @ Qd). From this point, the curve’s interception with the head and discharge axes is computed as Ho = 1.33•Hd and Qo = 2.00•Qd. This type of pump is useful for preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.

•

Standard (Three-Point)—This pump curve is defined by three points—the shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the singlepoint pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which the pump performs predictably).

•

Standard Extended—The same as the standard three-point pump, but with an extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by the program.

•

Custom Extended—The custom extended pump is similar to the standard extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.

•

Multiple Point—This option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:

Y = A − (B × Q C )


B-725


Where:

Y

=

Head (m, ft.)

Q

=

Discharge (m3/s, cfs)

A,B,C

=

Pump curve coefficients

The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given multiple-point rating curve.

B.2.9

Valve Theory There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system. These valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities, but all valves are used for automatically controlling parts of the system. They can be opened, closed, or throttled to achieve the desired result. •

“Check Valves (CVs)” on page B-726

•

“Flow Control Valves (FCVs)” on page B-726

•

“Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs)” on page B-726

•

“Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs)” on page B-727

•

“Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs)” on page B-727

•

“Throttle Control Valves (TCVs)” on page B-727

•

“General Purpose Valves (GPVs)” on page B-727

Check Valves (CVs) Check valves are used to maintain flow in only one direction by closing when the flow begins to reverse. When the flow is in the specified direction of the check valve, it is considered to be fully open. Check valves are added to the network on a pipe element.

Flow Control Valves (FCVs) FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe). These valves are commonly found in areas where a water district has contracted with another district or a private developer to limit the maximum demand to a value that will not adversely affect the provider’s system.

Pressure Reducing Valves (PRVs) Pressure reducing valves are often used for separate pressure zones in water distribution networks. These valves prevent the pressure downstream from exceeding a specified level in order to avoid pressures that could have damaging effects on the system.

B-726


WaterCAD Theory

Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSVs) Pressure sustaining valves maintain a specified pressure upstream from the valve. Similar to the other regulating valves, these are often used to ensure that pressures in the system (upstream, in this case) will not drop to unacceptable levels.

Pressure Breaker Valves (PBVs) Pressure breaker valves create a specified headloss across the valve, and are often used to model components that cannot be easily modeled using standard minor loss elements.

Throttle Control Valves (TCVs) Throttle control valves simulate minor loss elements whose headloss characteristics change over time.

General Purpose Valves (GPVs) GPVs are used to model situations and devices where you specify the flow-to-headloss relationship, rather than using standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, and turbines.

B.3

Friction and Minor Losses Friction and minor losses includes:

B.3.1

•

“Friction Loss Methods” on page B-727

•

“Minor Losses” on page B-732

Friction Loss Methods Friction loss methods include: •

“Chezy’s Equation” on page B-728

•

“Colebrook-White Equation” on page B-728

•

“Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-729

•

“Darcy-Weisbach Equation” on page B-729

•

“Manning’s Equation” on page B-731


B-727

Friction and Minor Losses

Chezy’s Equation Chezy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods, including Manning’s equation. Chezy’s equation is: Q =C⋅ A ⋅ R⋅S

Where:

Q

=

Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)

C

=

Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)

A

=

Flow area (m2, ft.2)

R

=

Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)

S

=

Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)

Colebrook-White Equation The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach friction factor: Free Surface:

⏐ k 1 2.51 ⎯ = −2 log ⎯ + ⎯ ⎯ f ®12.0 R Re f

⎞⎟ ⎟⎟ ⎟⎟⎠

Full Flow (Closed Conduit):

⏐ k 2.51 ⎯ = −2 log ⎯ + ⎯ ⎯ f ®3.7 D Re f

⎞⎟ ⎟⎟ ⎟⎟⎠

Where:

f

=

Friction factor (unitless)

k

=

Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft.)

Re

=

Reynolds Number (unitless)

R

=


D

=

Pipe diameter (m, ft.)

1

B-728


WaterCAD Theory

Hazen-Williams Equation The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is as follows: Q = k ⋅ C ⋅ A ⋅ R0.63 ⋅ S0.54

Where:

Q

=

Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)

C

=

Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)

A

=


R

=


S

=


k

=

Constant (0.85 for SI units, 1.32 for US units).

Darcy-Weisbach Equation Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly takes the following form:

hL = f ⋅

L V2 D 2g

Where:

hL

=

Headloss (m, ft.)

f

=

Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

D

=


L

=

Pipe length (m, ft.)

V

=

Flow velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)

g

=


For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a circular section’s full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter: D = 4R


B-729


Where:

R

=


D

=

Diameter (m, ft.)

This can then be rearranged to the form: Q = A ⋅ 8g ⋅

Where:

R⋅S f

Q

=


A

=


R

=


S

=


f

=

Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

g

=


The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor. For more information, see “Swamee and Jain Equation” on page B-730. Swamee and Jain Equation Note:

f =

The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default units are initially set by Haestad Methods.

1.325 2 ©⏐ ⎞⎟⎤ . 5 74 ε ™ ⎥ + ln ⎯ ⎟ ™⎯ ⎯ 3.7 D Re0.9 ⎟⎠⎥⎦ ⎛ ®

Where:

f

=

Friction factor (unitless)

ε

=

Roughness height (m, ft.)

D

=


Re

=

Reynolds Number (unitless)

The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is dependent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

B-730


WaterCAD Theory

Manning’s Equation Note:

Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.

Manning’s equation, which is based on Chezy’s equation, is one of the most popular methods in use today for free surface flow. For Manning’s equation, the roughness coefficient in Chezy’s equation is calculated as:

C=k⋅

R1/ 6 n

Where:

C

=

Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)

R

=


n

=

Manning’s roughness (s/m1/3)

k

=

Constant (1.00 m1/3/m1/3, 1.49 ft.1/3/ft.1/3)

Substituting this roughness into Chezy’s equation, you obtain the well-known Manning’s equation: Q=

k ⋅ A ⋅ R2 / 3 ⋅ S1/ 2 n

Where:


Q

=


k

=

Constant (1.00 m1/3/s, 1.49 ft.1/3/sec.)

n

=

Manning’s roughness (unitless)

A

=


R

=


S

=


B-731


B.3.2

Minor Losses Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.

Figure B-5: Flow Lines at Entrance The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter, or other localized component is:

hm = K

V2 2g

Where:

hm

=

Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft.)

K

=

Loss coefficient for the specific fitting

V

=


g

=

Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec. 2)

Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in the Fittings Table. For more information, see “Fitting Loss Coefficients” on page B-747. Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration on typical pipe entrance flow lines.

B-732


WaterCAD Theory

B.4

Water Quality Theory The governing equations for WaterCAD water quality solver are based on the principles of conservation of mass coupled with reaction kinetics. The following phenomena are represented (Rossman et al., 1993; Rossman and Boulos, 1996):

B.4.1

•

“Advective Transport in Pipes” on page B-733

•

“Mixing at Pipe Junctions” on page B-734

•

“Mixing in Storage Facilities” on page B-734

•

“Bulk Flow Reactions” on page B-735

•

“Pipe Wall Reactions” on page B-738

•

“System of Equations” on page B-739

•

“Lagrangian Transport Algorithm” on page B-739

•

“References” on page B-741

Advective Transport in Pipes A dissolved substance will travel down the length of a pipe with the same average velocity as the carrier fluid while at the same time reacting (either growing or decaying) at some given rate. Longitudinal dispersion is usually not an important transport mechanism under most operating conditions. This means there is no intermixing of mass between adjacent parcels of water traveling down a pipe. Advective transport within a pipe is represented by the following equation:

∂C i ∂C i -------- = – u i -------- + r ( C i ) ∂x ∂t Where:


Ci

=

Concentration (mass/volume) in pipe i

ui

=

Flow velocity (length/time) in pipe i

r

=

Rate of reaction (mass/volume/time) as a function of concentration

B-733

Water Quality Theory

B.4.2

Mixing at Pipe Junctions At junctions receiving inflow from two or more pipes, the mixing of fluid is taken to be complete and instantaneous. Thus the concentration of a substance in water leaving the junction is the flow-weighted sum of the concentrations from the inflow pipes. For a specific node k one can write:

Ci x = 0 =

Where:

B.4.3

jε I k Q j C j x = L + Q k, ext C k, ext ∑ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------∑ jε I k Qj + Qk, ext j

I

=

Link with flow leaving node k

Ik

=

Set of links with flow into k

Lj

=

Length of link j

Qj

=

Flow (volume/time) in link j

Qk,ext

=

External source flow entering the network at node k

Ck,ext

=

Concentration of the external flow entering at node k

Ci|x=0

=

The concentration at the start of link i.

Ci|x=L

=

The concentration at the end of link i.

Mixing in Storage Facilities It is convenient to assume that the contents of storage facilities (tanks and reservoirs) are completely mixed. This is a reasonable assumption for many tanks operating under fill-and-draw conditions, providing that sufficient momentum flux is imparted to the inflow (Rossman and Grayman, 1999). Under completely mixed conditions the concentration throughout the tank is a blend of the current contents and that of any entering water. At the same time, the internal concentration could be changing due to reactions. The following equation expresses these phenomena:

B-734


WaterCAD Theory

∂( V s C s ) ------------------- = ∂t Where:

B.4.4

∑ i ε I s Q i C i x = L – ∑ j ε O s Q j Cs + r ( Cs ) i

Vs

=

Volume in storage at time t

Cs

=

Concentration within the storage facility

Is

=

Set of links providing flow into the facility

Os

=

Set of links withdrawing flow from the facility

Bulk Flow Reactions While a substance moves down a pipe or resides in storage, it can undergo reaction with constituents in the water column. The rate of reaction can generally be described as a power function of concentration:

r = kC

n

Where:

k

=

Reaction constant

n

=

Reaction order

When a limiting concentration exists on the ultimate growth or loss of a substance, the rate expression becomes: For n > 0, Kb > 0:

R = K b ( C L – C )C

(n – 1)

For n > 0, Kb < 0:

R = K b ( C – C L )C Where:


CL

(n – 1)

=

Limiting concentration

B-735


Simple 1st-Order Decay (CL = 0, Kb < 0, n = 1)

R = Kb C The decay of many substances, such as chlorine, can be modeled adequately as a simple first-order reaction.

First-Order Saturation Growth (CL > 0, Kb > 0, n = 1)

R = Kb ( CL – C ) This model can be applied to the growth of disinfection by-products, such as trihalomethanes, where the ultimate formation of by-product (CL) is limited by the amount of reactive precursor present.

Two-Component, 2nd-Order Decay (CL > 0|CL < 0, Kb < 0, n = 2)

R = Kb C ( CL – C ) This model assumes that substance A reacts with substance B in some unknown ratio to produce a product P. The rate of disappearance of A is proportional to the product of A and B remaining. CL can be either positive or negative, depending on whether either component A or B is in excess, respectively. Clark (1998) has had success in applying this model to chlorine decay data that did not conform to the simple first-order model.

Michaelis-Menton Decay Kinetics (CL > 0, Kb < 0, n < 0) Note:

These expressions apply only for values of Kb and CL used with Michaelis-Menton kinetics.

Kb C R = ---------------CL – C

B-736


WaterCAD Theory As a special case, when a negative reaction order n is specified, WaterCAD will utilize the Michaelis-Menton rate equation, shown above for a decay reaction. (For growth reactions the denominator becomes CL + C.) This rate equation is often used to describe enzyme-catalyzed reactions and microbial growth. It produces first-order behavior at low concentrations and zero-order behavior at higher concentrations. Note that for decay reactions, CL must be set higher than the initial concentration present. Koechling (1998) has applied Michaelis-Menton kinetics to model chlorine decay in a number of different waters and found that both Kb and CL could be related to the water’s organic content and its ultraviolet absorbance as follows:

K b = – 0.32 UVA

1.365 ( 100UVA )

-------------------------DOC

C L = 4.98UVA – 1.91DOC Where:

UVA

=

Ultraviolet absorbance at 254 nm (1/cm)

DOC

=

Dissolved organic carbon concentration (mg/L)

Zero-Order Growth (CL = 0, Kb = 1, n = 0)

R = 1.0 This special case can be used to model water age, where with each unit of time the concentration (i.e., age) increases by one unit. The relationship between the bulk rate constant seen at one temperature (T1) to that at another temperature (T2) is often expressed using a van’t Hoff-Arrehnius equation of the form:

K b2 = K b1 θ Where:

( T2 – T1 )

θ

=

Constant

In one investigation for chlorine, q was estimated to be 1.1 when T1 was 20 deg. C (Koechling, 1998).


B-737


B.4.5

Pipe Wall Reactions While flowing through pipes, dissolved substances can be transported to the pipe wall and react with material such as corrosion products or biofilm that are on or close to the wall. The amount of wall area available for reaction and the rate of mass transfer between the bulk fluid and the wall will also influence the overall rate of this reaction. The surface area per unit volume, which for a pipe equals 2 divided by the radius, determines the former factor. The latter factor can be represented by a mass transfer coefficient whose value depends on the molecular diffusivity of the reactive species and on the Reynolds number of the flow (Rossman et. al, 1994). For first-order kinetics, the rate of a pipe wall reaction can be expressed as:

2k w k f C r = ------------------------R ( kw + kf ) Where:

kw

=

Wall reaction rate constant (length/time)

kf

=

Mass transfer coefficient (length/time)

R

=

Pipe radius

For zero-order kinetics, the reaction rate cannot be any higher than the rate of mass transfer, so:

r = MIN ( k w, k C ) ( 2 ⁄ R ) f Where:

kw

=

Mass/area/time

Mass transfer coefficients are usually expressed in terms of a dimensionless Sherwood number (Sh):

D k f = Sh ---d Where:

D

=

Molecular diffusivity of the species being transported (length 2 / time)

d

=

Pipe diameter

In fully developed laminar flow, the average Sherwood number along the length of a pipe can be expressed as:

B-738


WaterCAD Theory

0.0668 ( d ⁄ L )ReSc Sh = 3.65 + -------------------------------------------------------------------2⁄ 3 1 + 0.04 [ ( d ⁄ L )ReSc ] Where:

Re

=

Reynolds number

Sc

=

Schmidt number (kinematic viscosity of water divided by the diffusivity of the chemical) (Edwards et. al, 1976).

For turbulent flow the empirical correlation of Notter and Sleicher (1971) can be used:

Sh = 0.0149Re B.4.6

0.88

Sc

1⁄ 3

System of Equations When applied to a network as a whole, Equations 1-3 represent a coupled set of differential/algebraic equations with time-varying coefficients that must be solved for Ci in each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s. This solution is subject to the following set of externally imposed conditions:

B.4.7

•

Initial conditions that specify Ci for all x in each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s at time 0

•

Boundary conditions that specify values for Ck,ext and Qk,ext for all time t at each node k which has external mass inputs

•

Hydraulic conditions which specify the volume Vs in each storage facility s and the flow Qi in each link i at all times t

Lagrangian Transport Algorithm WaterCAD water quality simulator uses a Lagrangian time-based approach to track the fate of discrete parcels of water as they move along pipes and mix together at junctions between fixed-length time steps (Liou and Kroon, 1987). These water quality time steps are typically much shorter than the hydraulic time step (e.g., minutes rather


B-739

Water Quality Theory than hours) to accommodate the short times of travel that can occur within pipes. As time progresses, the size of the most upstream segment in a pipe increases as water enters the pipe while an equal loss in size of the most downstream segment occurs as water leaves the link. The size of the segments in between these remains unchanged. The following steps occur at the end of each such time step: 1. The water quality in each segment is updated to reflect any reaction that may have occurred over the time step. 2. The water from the leading segments of pipes with flow into each junction is blended together to compute a new water quality value at the junction. The volume contributed from each segment equals the product of its pipe’s flow rate and the time step. If this volume exceeds that of the segment, then the segment is destroyed and the next one in line behind it begins to contribute its volume. 3. Contributions from outside sources are added to the quality values at the junctions. The quality in storage tanks is updated depending on the method used to model mixing in the tank (see “Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the Lagrangian Solution Method”on page B-741). 4. New segments are created in pipes with flow out of each junction, reservoir, and tank. The segment volume equals the product of the pipe flow and the time step. The segment’s water quality equals the new quality value computed for the node. To cut down on the number of segments, this step is only carried out if the new node quality differs by a user-specified tolerance from that of the last segment in the outflow pipe. If the difference in quality is below the tolerance, then the size of the current last segment in the outflow pipe is increased by the volume flowing into the pipe over the time step. This process is then repeated for the next water-quality time step. At the start of the next hydraulic time step, the order of segments in any links that experience a flow reversal is switched. Initially each pipe in the network consists of a single segment whose quality equals the initial quality assigned to the upstream node.

B-740


WaterCAD Theory

Time t

2 1 3

2

1

2

1

Time t + ∆t

2

1 3

2

3

2

1

Figure B-6: Behavior of Segments in the Lagrangian Solution Method

B.4.8

References Bhave, P.R., Analysis of Flow in Water Distribution Networks, Technomic Publishing, Lancaster, PA, 1991. Clark, R.M., “Chlorine demand and Trihalomethane formation kinetics: a secondorder model,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 124, No. 1, pp. 16-24, 1998. Dunlop, E.J., WADI Users Manual, Local Government Computer Services Board, Dublin, Ireland, 1991. George, A. & Liu, J. W-H., Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1981.


B-741

Water Quality Theory Hamam, Y.M., & Brameller, A., “Hybrid method for the solution of piping networks,” Proc. IEE, Vol. 113, No. 11, pp. 1607-1612, 1971. Koechling, M.T., Assessment and Modeling of Chlorine Reactions with Natural Organic Matter: Impact of Source Water Quality and Reaction Conditions, Ph.D. Thesis, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio, 1998. Liou, C.P. and Kroon, J.R., “Modeling the propagation of waterborne substances in distribution networks,” J. AWWA, 79(11), 54-58, 1987. Notter, R.H. and Sleicher, C.A., “The eddy diffusivity in the turbulent boundary layer near a wall,” Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 26, pp. 161-171, 1971. Osiadacz, A.J., Simulation and Analysis of Gas Networks, E. & F.N. Spon, London, 1987. Rossman, L.A., Boulos, P.F., and Altman, T., “Discrete volume-element method for network water-quality models,” Journal of Water Resource Planning and Management, Vol. 119, No. 5, 505-517, 1993. Rossman, L.A., Clark, R.M., and Grayman, W.M., “Modeling chlorine residuals in drinking-water distribution systems,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 120, No. 4, 803-820, 1994. Rossman, L.A. and Boulos, P.F., “Numerical methods for modeling water quality in distribution systems: A comparison,” Journal of Water Resource Planning and Management, Vol. 122, No. 2, 137-146, 1996. Rossman, L.A. and Grayman, W.M., “Scale-model studies of mixing in drinking water storage tanks,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 755-761, 1999. Salgado, R., Todini, E., & O’Connell, P.E., “Extending the gradient method to include pressure regulating valves in pipe networks,” Proc. Inter. Symposium on Computer Modeling of Water Distribution Systems, University of Kentucky, May 12-13, 1988. Todini, E. & Pilati, S., “A gradient method for the analysis of pipe networks,” 1987. International Conference on Computer Applications for Water Supply and Distribution, Leicester Polytechnic, UK, September 8-10.

B-742


WaterCAD Theory

B.5

Engineer’s Reference This section provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting loss coefficients. Roughness Values: •

“Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation” on page B-743

•

“Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)” on page B744

•

“Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation” on page B-745

•

“Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes” on page B-746

Coefficients: •

B.5.1

“Fitting Loss Coefficients” on page B-747

Roughness Values—Manning’s Equation Commonly used roughness values for different materials are: Table B-1: Manning’s Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits Flowing Partly Full Channel Type and Description

Minimum

Normal

Maximum

a. Brass, smooth

0.009

0.010

0.013

1. Lockbar and welded

0.010

0.012

0.014

2. Riveted and spiral

0.013

0.016

0.017

1. Coated

0.010

0.013

0.014

2. Uncoated

0.011

0.014

0.016

0.012

0.014

0.015

b. Steel

c. Cast iron

d. Wrought iron 1. Black


B-743

Engineer’s Reference Table B-1: Manning’s Coefficient (n) for Closed Metal Conduits Flowing Partly Full (Cont’d) Channel Type and Description

Minimum

Normal

Maximum

0.013

0.016

0.017

1. Subdrain

0.017

0.019

0.021

2. Storm drain

0.021

0.024

0.030

2. Galvanized e. Corrugated metal

B.5.2

Roughness Values—Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) Commonly used roughness values for different materials are: Table B-2: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights e for Closed Conduits

B-744

Pipe Material

ε (mm)

ε (ft.)

Glass, drawn brass, copper (new)

0.0015

0.000005

Seamless commercial steel (new)

0.004

0.000013

Commercial steel (enamel coated)

0.0048

0.000016

Commercial steel (new)

0.045

0.00015

Wrought iron (new)

0.045

0.00015

Asphalted cast iron (new)

0.12

0.0004

Galvanized iron

0.15

0.0005

Cast iron (new)

0.26

0.00085

Concrete (steel forms, smooth)

0.18

0.0006

Concrete (good joints, average)

0.36

0.0012

Concrete (rough, visible, form marks)

0.60

0.002

Riveted steel (new)

0.9 ~ 9.0

0.003 - 0.03

Corrugated metal

45

0.15


WaterCAD Theory

B.5.3

Roughness Values—Hazen-Williams Equation Commonly used roughness values for different materials are: Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients (C) Pipe Material

C

Asbestos Cement

140

Brass

130-140

Brick sewer

100

Cast-iron New, unlined

130

10 yr. Old

107-113

20 yr. Old

89-100

30 yr. Old

75-90

40 yr. Old

64-83

Concrete or concrete lined Steel forms

140

Wooden forms

120

Centrifugally spun

135

Copper

130-140

Galvanized iron

120

Glass

140

Lead

130-140

Plastic

140-150

Steel Coal-tar enamel, lined

145-150

New unlined

140-150


B-745

Engineer’s Reference Table B-3: Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients (C) (Cont’d) Pipe Material

C

Riveted

B.5.4

110

Tin

130

Vitrified clay (good condition)

110-140

Wood stave (average condition)

120

Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes Typical pipe roughness values are shown below. These values may vary depending on the manufacturer, workmanship, age, and many other factors. Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values Material

Manning’s HazenCoefficient Williams n C

Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Height k (mm)

k (0.001 ft.)

Asbestos cement

0.011

140

0.0015

0.005

Brass

0.011

135

0.0015

0.005

Brick

0.015

100

0.6

2

Cast-iron, new

0.012

130

0.26

0.85

Steel forms

0.011

140

0.18

0.6

Wooden forms

0.015

120

0.6

2

Centrifugally spun

0.013

135

0.36

1.2

Copper

0.011

135

0.0015

0.005

Corrugated metal

0.022

—

45

150

Galvanized iron

0.016

120

0.15

0.5

Glass

0.011

140

0.0015

0.005

Lead

0.011

135

0.0015

0.005

Concrete:

B-746


WaterCAD Theory Table B-4: Comparative Pipe Roughness Values (Cont’d) Material

Manning’s HazenCoefficient Williams n C

Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Height

Plastic

0.009

150

0.0015

0.005

Coal-tar enamel

0.010

148

0.0048

0.016

New unlined

0.011

145

0.045

0.15

Riveted

0.019

110

0.9

3

Wood stave

0.012

120

0.18

0.6

Steel

B.5.5

Fitting Loss Coefficients For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and contraction ratios. Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients Fitting

K Value

Pipe Entrance

Fitting

K Value

90° Smooth Bend

Bellmouth

0.03-0.05

Bend Radius / D = 4

0.16-0.18

Rounded

0.12-0.25

Bend Radius / D = 2

0.19-0.25

Sharp-Edged

0.50

Bend Radius / D = 1

0.35-0.40

Projecting

0.80

Contraction—Sudden

Mitered Bend θ = 15°

0.05

D2/D1 = 0.80

0.18

θ = 30°

0.10

D2/D1 = 0.50

0.37

θ = 45°

0.20

D2/D1 = 0.20

0.49

θ = 60°

0.35

θ = 90°

0.80

Contraction—Conical D2/D1 = 0.80

0.05

D2/D1 = 0.50

0.07


Tee Line Flow

0.30-0.40

B-747

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Table B-5: Typical Fitting K Coefficients (Cont’d) Fitting D2/D1 = 0.20

K Value 0.08

Expansion—Sudden

K Value

Branch Flow

0.75-1.80

Cross

D2/D1 = 0.80

0.16

Line Flow

0.50

D2/D1 = 0.50

0.57

Branch Flow

0.75

D2/D1 = 0.20

0.92

45° Wye

Expansion—Conical

B.6

Fitting

D2/D1 = 0.80

0.03

D2/D1 = 0.50

0.08

D2/D1 = 0.20

0.13

Line Flow

0.30

Branch Flow

0.50

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Genetic algorithms methodology includes:

B.6.1

•

“Darwin Calibrator Methodology” on page B-748

•

“Darwin Designer Methodology” on page B-753

•


Darwin Calibrator Methodology Computer models have become an essential tool for the management of water distribution systems around the world. There are numerous purposes for using a computer model to simulate the flow conditions within a system. A model can be employed to:

B-748

•

Ensure adequate quantity and quality service of the potable water resource to the community

•

Evaluate planning and design alternatives

•

Assess system performance

•

Verify operating strategies for better management of the water infrastructure system

•

Perform vulnerability studies to assess risks that may be presented and affect the water supply


WaterCAD Theory For these purposes, a model is constructed in which data describing network elements of pipes, junctions, valves, pumps, tanks, and reservoirs are assembled in a systematic manner to predict pipe flow and junction hydraulic grade lines (HGL) or pressures within a water distribution system. Computer models are significant investments for water companies. To ensure a good investment return and correct use of the models, the model must be capable of correctly simulating flow conditions encountered at the site. This is achieved by calibrating the models. A calibration involves the process of adjusting model characteristics and parameters so that the model’s predicted flows and pressures match actual observed field data to some desirable or acceptable level. This is described in more detail in Walski, Chase and Savic (2001). Calibration of a water distribution model is a complicated task. There are many uncertain parameters that need to be adjusted to reduce the discrepancy between the model predictions and field observations of junction HGL and pipe discharges. Pipe roughness coefficients are often considered for calibration. However, there are many other parameters that are uncertain and affect junction HGL and pipe flow rate. To minimize errors in model parameters and eliminate the compensation error of calibration parameters (Walski 2001), you should consider calibrating all the model parameters, such as junction demand, operation status of pipes and valves, and pipe roughness coefficients. Calibrating water distribution network models relies upon field measurement data, such as junction pressures, pipe flows, water levels in storage facilities, valve settings, pump operating status (on/off), and pump speeds. Among all the possible field observation data, junction HGL and pipe flows are most often used to evaluate the goodness-of-fit of the model calibration. Other parameters, such as tank levels, valve settings, and pump operating status/speed are used as boundary conditions that are recorded when collecting a set of calibration observations of junction pressures and pipe flow rates. Field observation data are measured and collected at different times of the day and at various locations on site, which may correspond to various demand loadings and boundary conditions. In order for the model simulation results to more closely represent observed data, simulation results must use the same demand loading and boundary conditions as observed data. Thus, the calibration process must be conducted under multiple demand loading and operating boundary conditions. Traditional calibration of a water distribution model is based on a trial-and-error procedure, by which an engineer or modeler first estimates the values of model parameters, runs the model to obtain a predicted pressure and flow, and finally compares the simulated values to the observed data. If the predicted data does not compare closely with the observed data, the engineer returns to the model, makes some adjustments to


B-749

Genetic Algorithms Methodology the model parameters, and calculates it again to produce a new set of simulation results. This may have to be repeated many times to make sure that the model produces a calibrated prediction of the water distribution network in the real world. The traditional calibration technique is, among other things, quite time consuming. In addition, a typical network representation of a water network may include hundreds or thousands of links and nodes. Ideally, during the water distribution model calibration process, the roughness coefficient is adjusted for each link and demand is adjusted for each node. However, only a small percentage of representative sample measurements can be made available for the use of model calibration, due to the limited financial and labor requirements for data collection. Therefore, it is of utmost importance to have a comprehensive methodology and efficient tool that can assist the engineer in achieving a highly accurate model under practical conditions, including various model parameters such as pipe roughness, junction demand, and link status, and also multiple demand and boundary conditions.

Calibration Formulation An optimized calibrator is formulated and developed for facilitating the calibration process of a water distribution model. The parameters are obtained by minimizing the discrepancy between the model-predicted and the field-observed values of junction pressures (hydraulic grades) and pipe flows for given boundary conditions. The optimized calibration is then defined as a nonlinear optimization problem with three different calibration objectives.

Calibration Objectives The goodness-of-fit of model calibration is evaluated by the discrepancy between the model simulated and field measured junction HGL and pipe flow. The goodness-of-fit score is calculated by using a user-specified fitness-point-per-hydraulic head for junctions and fitness-point-per-flow for pipes. This allows a modeler to flexibly weight the evaluation of both pipe flow and junction hydraulic head. Objective Type One: Minimize the Sum of Difference Squares

minimize

2

NF ⎛ Fsimnf − Fobsnf ⎛ Hsimnh − Hobsnh ⎞ w wnf ⎜⎜ + ⎟ ⎜ ∑ ∑ nh ⎜ ⎟ Hpnt Fpnt np =1 ⎠ nf =1 ⎝ ⎝ NH + NF NH

⎞ ⎟⎟ ⎠

2

Objective Type Two: Minimize the Sum of Absolute Differences NH

minimize

B-750

∑ wnh

np =1

Fsimnf − Fobsnf Hsimnh − Hobsnh NF + ∑ wnf Hpnt Fpnt nf =1 NH + NF


WaterCAD Theory Objective Type Three: Minimize the Maximum Absolute Difference

minimize Where:

⎧ NH Fsimnf − Fobsnf ⎫ Hsimnh − Hobsnh NF max ⎨max wnh , max wnf ⎬ nf =1 Hpnt Fpnt ⎩ nh=1 ⎭ Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade. Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade. Hlossnh is the head loss at observation data point nh, Fobsnf is the observed flow, Fsimnf is model simulated flow, Hpnt notes the hydraulic head per fitness point, while Fpnt is the flow per fitness point. NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades and NF is the number of observed pipe discharges, Wnh and Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as: Wnh = f(Hlossnh /Σ Hlossnh ) Wnf = f(Fobsnf /Σ Fobsnf )

Where:

f( ) is a function which can be linear, square, square root, log, or constant. An optimized calibration can be conducted by selecting one of three objectives above and the weighting factors between head and flow. The model parameters are calculated by using a genetic algorithm while minimizing the selected objective function and satisfying the calibration constraints.

Calibration Constraints Optimized calibration is conducted by satisfying two type constraints, the hydraulic system constraints and calibration parameter bound constraints. The system constraints are a set of implicit equations that ensure the conservation of flow continuity at nodes and energy for the loops within a water distribution system. Each trial solution generated by the GA is analyzed using WaterCAD hydraulic network solver. The calibration bound constraints are used to set the minimum and maximum limits for the pipe roughness coefficients and junction demand multiplier. They are given as follows.

RFmini ≤ RFi ≤ RFmaxi

DMmini ≤ DM i ≤ DMmaxi


i = 1,2,3,..., nPipeGroup

i = 1,2,3,..., nDemandGroup

B-751

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Where:

RFmini is the minimum roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; RFmaxi is the maximum roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; and RFi is the roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i, DMmini is the minimum junction demand multiplier for demand group i; DMmaxi is the maximum demand multiplier for demand group i; and DMi is the demand multiplier for demand group i.

Pipes that have the same physical and hydraulic characteristics are allowed to be grouped as one calibration link, and one new roughness coefficient or one roughness coefficient multiplier is assigned to all the pipes in the same group. Junctions that have the same demand patterns and within a same topological area can also be aggregated as one calibration junction, to which a same demand multiplier is calculated and assigned. Calibration parameters are bounded by prescribed upper and lower limits and adjusted with a user-prescribed incremental value. For example, a Hazen-Williams C value for a pipe or a group of pipes will be computed within a range of 40 to 140, and by an increment of 5. Demand multipliers may range from 0.8 to 1.2 by 0.1. Parameter aggregation is useful at reducing the calibration dimension, however caution needs to be exercised when grouping pipes and junctions, as this may affect the accuracy of the model calibration.

Genetic Algorithm Optimized Calibration A genetic algorithm (GA) is a robust search paradigm based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction (Goldberg, 1989). For optimizing calibration of a water distribution model, a genetic algorithm program first generates a population of trial solutions of the model parameters. A hydraulic solver then simulates each trial solution. The resulting hydraulic simulation predicts the HGL (junction pressures) and pipe flows at a predetermined number of nodes (or data points) in the network. This information is then passed back to the associated calibration module. The calibration module evaluates how closely the model simulation is to the observed data, the calibration evaluation computes a goodness-of-fit value, which is the discrepancy between the observed data and the model predicted pipe flows and junction pressures or HGL, for each solution. This goodness-of-fit value is then assigned as the fitness for that solution in the genetic algorithm. One generation produced by the genetic algorithm is then complete. The fitness measure is taken into account when performing the next generation of the genetic algorithm operations. To find the optimal calibration solutions, fitter solutions will be selected by mimicking Darwin’s natural selection principal of survival of the fittest. The selected solutions are used to reproduce a next generation of calibration solutions by performing genetic operations. Over many generations, the solutions evolve, and the optimal or near optimal solutions ultimately emerge. There are numerous variations of genetic algorithms over last decade. Many successful applications of GA to solving model calibration have been carried out for optimized calibration of water

B-752


WaterCAD Theory resource systems (Wang 1992; Wu 1994; Babovic etc. 1994; Wu and Larsen 1996). More recently, a competent genetic algorithm (also called fast messy GA), which has been demonstrated the most efficient GA for the optimization of a water distribution system (Wu & Simpson 2001), has been used for the optimized calibration. A brief overview is given in the following section.

B.6.2

Darwin Designer Methodology Darwin Designer uses a genetic algorithm (GA) generic search paradigm to help hydraulic engineers efficiently plan and design a water distribution system. The optimization model can be established to include the combination and aggregation of sizing new pipes and rehabilitating old pipes, multiple demand loading conditions, and various boundary system conditions. This will enable a modeler to optimize either an entire water system or a portion of the system with the minimum cost and maximum benefit. The cost effective design and/or rehabilitation solution is determined by the least cost, the maximum benefit, or the trade-off between the cost and benefit. You can select any one of three optimization models to best suit your project needs.

Model Level 1: Least Cost Optimization The least cost design and rehabilitation is defined as a single objective optimization; the optimal solution is determined by the minimum cost of a water distribution design and rehabilitation that satisfies prescribed hydraulic criteria such as: •

Minimum required junction pressure

•

Maximum allowable junction pressure

•

Maximum allowable pipe flow velocity requirement

•

Minimum required pipe flow velocity

Model Level 2: Maximum Benefit Optimization The benefit optimization model is developed to determine the maximum pressure benefit design/rehabilitation solution for a water distribution system. A competent genetic algorithm is employed to search for the optimal solution by maximizing the design benefit while meeting the hydraulic criteria and the available budget.

Model Level 3: Cost-Benefit Trade-off Optimization The cost-benefit trade-off model is formulated to determine the design of optimal trade-off between the cost and benefit, subject to the funding available for a design and/or rehabilitation. You can customize the benefit functions and specify the maximum affordable budget. The model produces a set of non-inferior (non-dominant) solutions that represent the Pareto optimal for different cost and benefit levels.


B-753

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Both model level 1 and 2 are single-objective optimization while level 3 is the multiobjective optimization. A modeler is able to select optimization model for a study. The optimization framework including both the cost and benefit functions is given in the following sections.: •

“Design Variables” on page B-754

•

“Cost Objective Functions” on page B-755

•

“New Pipe Cost” on page B-755

•

“Rehabilitation Pipe Cost” on page B-755

•

“Break Repairing Cost” on page B-756

Design Variables Two types of design variables are used for the optimal design and rehabilitation of water distribution systems. They are pipe sizes (d) and design actions (e). Pipe Size:

Pipe diameter is treated as a design variable for a new pipe to be sized. A new pipe can be the pipe added to a subdivision, a replacement, or a pipe that is parallel to existing pipes. A modeler can aggregate a number of pipes as one design link. Pipes within one pipe group are sized to the same diameter. Pipe diameter can be selected from a set of discrete and commercially available pipe sizes, given as:

⎧ 0 ⎫ 0 ∀i, ∀d i ∈ D = ⎨ d m, m = 1, …, DC ⎬ ⎩ ⎭ Design Action:

Design action is introduced as a design variable for optimizing the rehabilitation alternatives (e.g. cleaning, relining, replacement, parallel pipe, etc.) for existing pipes. A modeler can define a set of possible actions that can be applied to a group of pipes. The pipes within one pipe group will have the same rehabilitation action, given as:

⎧ 0 ⎫ 0 ∀k, ∀e k ∈ E = ⎨ e m, m = 1, …, EC ⎬ ⎩ ⎭

B-754


WaterCAD Theory Cost Objective Functions Total cost of a network design and rehabilitation is the sum of the new pipe cost (Cnew ), rehabilitation pipe cost (Crehab ) and pipe break repairing cost (Crepair ). Thus the total cost is given as: Ctotal = Cnew + Crehab + Crepair New Pipe Cost The cost of a new design pipe is defined as a function of pipe length. Let the total number of design pipes be DP, and let ck(dk) be the cost per unit length of the k-th pipe diameter selected from a set of available pipe diameter D0 of DC choices. The new pipe cost is given as:

DP

C cnew =

∑ Ck ( dk )Lk k=1

Where:

Lk

=

Length of the kth pipe

Rehabilitation Pipe Cost The cost of a rehabilitation pipe is associated with the pipe diameter and the rehabilitation action. Let ck(ek, dk) be cost per unit length of a pipe for the kth rehabilitation action ek chosen from a set of possible action E0 of EC choices for the existing pipe of diameter dk. The cost of rehabilitation pipes is formulated as:

RP

C rehab =

∑ ck (dk,ek)Lk k=1

Where:

Lk

=

Length of the kth pipe

RP

=

Number of rehabilitation pipes

For the pipes that are grouped into one design link, the same pipe size or rehabilitation action will be applied to the pipes.


B-755

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Break Repairing Cost Pipe renovation or rehabilitation will effectively improve the pipe structure condition, and consequently reduce the pipe break repair cost. For the rehabilitation pipes that the action of doing-nothing (leaving a pipe as it is) is assigned to, a cost of repairing pipe break is incurred to account for the potential cost in a planning horizon (such as 10 years). Assuming bj(t) the number of breaks per mile at year t for pipe j, Cbj the repair cost per break of pipe j. The total cost of pipe repair over a period of ny years is given as:

RB

C break =

ny

∑ ∑ j=0 t=0

Where:

b j tCb j ----------------t (1 + r)

RB

=

Number of doing-nothing pipes that may have breaks

r

=

Interest rate

Benefit Functions The benefits of a design and rehabilitation result from hydraulic performance improvement (hydraulic benefit), excess hydraulic capacity (capacity benefit), and pipe rehabilitation improvement (rehabilitation benefit). The hydraulic benefit is measured by using a surrogate of the junction pressures. The hydraulic capacity benefit is modeled by the excess flow through the emitters at user-selected junctions, while the rehabilitation benefit is defined as the pipe roughness improvement. Therefore, the overall benefit is noted as: BTotal = HYbenefit + CPbenefit + RHbenefit Pressure Benefits The benefit of the hydraulic performance is measured by using junction pressure (P) improvements. The pressure improvement is proposed as a ratio of pressure difference between the actual pressure and a user-defined reference pressure. The benefit is normalized by the junction demand (JQ). The factors are also introduced to enable a modeler to convert and customize the hydraulic benefit function.

ND ⎧

RJ

ref ⎛ JQ i, k ⎞ ( P i, k – P i, k ) ⎪ HYbenefit = ⎜ ----------------------⎟ --------------------------------⎨a ref JQtotal ⎝ ⎠ ⎪ k P i, k k = 1⎩ i = 1

∑

B-756

∑

b

⎫ ⎪ ⎬ ⎪ ⎭


WaterCAD Theory

RJ

JQtotal k =

∑ JQi, k i=1

Where:

a and b

=

Factors that allow an optimization modeler to weight, convert, and customize pressure improvement to hydraulic benefit

JQi,k

=

Demand at junction i for demand alternative k

JQtotalk

=

Total junction demand for demand alternative k

Pi,k

=

Post-rehabilitation pressure at junction i for demand alternative k

Pref

=

reference junction pressure defined by a user to evaluate the pressure improvement

Rehabilitation Benefit Rehabilitation improves water supply by increasing the pipe capacity and improving the pipe roughness. To maximize the value of every dollar spent on rehabilitation, a rehabilitation action should favor the actual improvement of the pipe smoothness. Thus the rehabilitation benefit is quantified by the roughness improvement ratio and normalized by the rehabilitated pipe length.

RP

RHbenefit = e

∑ i=1

new

old

( Ci – C i )L i -----------------------------------------old C i L total

RP

L =

∑ Li i=1


B-757

Genetic Algorithms Methodology

Where:

e

=

The factor that allows a modeler to weight the rehabilitation benefit by using the roughness improvement

Cnew

=

Post-rehabilitation roughness coefficient

Cold

=

Pre-rehabilitation roughness coefficient

Li

=

Length of the design pipe

Unitized Benefit Functions The benefit from a design and rehabilitation can also be quantified by using the unitized average flow and pressure increase across the entire system. The benefit functions can be simply given as follows. Average Pressure Increase:

With the unitized benefit function, you can evaluate the average flow and pressure enhancement for your investment. It is worth being aware of the value of the dollars spent on your design and/or rehabilitation.

JN

∑ Pj – Pmin

j=1

Pavg = ------------------------------------JN Design Constraints:

Each design trial solution is analyzed by a number of hydraulic simulation runs corresponding to the multiple demand conditions. The system responses, such as junction pressures, flow velocities, and hydraulic gradients, will be checked against the design criteria you set.

Pipe Size Constraint:

A list of available pipe sizes (and costs) is specified and used as a commonly shared data by all the pipe groups. For each group, you specify the minimum and maximum diameters, which narrows the scope of the optimization problem. Pipe size is selected from a list of commercially available pipe diameters within the range of the minimum and maximum limit, such as:

min

Di

B-758

max

≤d i ≤D i

, ∀i


WaterCAD Theory A set of pipe diameters can also be introduced to exclude the unfavorable pipe sizes to a pipe group. This set can be noted as:

d i ∉ D i = {d i, 1 , d i, 2 , …, d i, n} Junction Pressure Constraint:

min

max

H i, j ≤H i, j ≤H i, j , Where:

Junction pressure is often required to maintain greater than a minimum pressure level, to ensure adequate water service, and less than a maximum pressure level, to reduce water leakage in a system. Thus junction pressure constraints are given as:

∀t, i = 1, …, NJ ;

Hi,j

=

Hydraulic head at junction i for demand loading case j

NJ

=

Number of junctions in system (excluding fixed grade junctions)

Hmin

=

Minimum required hydraulic pressures at junction i for demand loading case j

Hmax

=

Maximum allowable hydraulic pressures at junction i for demand loading case j

NDM

=

Number of demand loading cases

Pipe Flow Constraint:

max

V i, j ≤H i, j , max


Vi,j

A design and rehabilitation solution is also constrained by a set of pipe flow criteria that are often given as a maximum allowable flow velocity and a maximum allowable hydraulic gradient or slope, given as:

∀t, i = 1, …, NP ;

HG i, j ≤HG i, j , Where:

j = 1, …, NDM

j = 1, …, NDM

∀t, i = 1, …, NP ; =

j = 1, …, NDM

Flow velocity of pipe i for demand loading case j

B-759

Genetic Algorithms Methodology

Vmax

=

Maximum allowable flow velocity

NP

=

Number of constraint pipes in system

HGi,j

=

Hydraulic gradient (slope) of pipe i for demand loading case j

HGmax

=

Maximum allowable hydraulic gradient In many system improvement designs, a feasible design solution must ensure the storage tank to be refilled to a certain water level so that a stable periodical supply can be established. To meet a tank refilling criteria, pipe flow velocity must be greater than the minimum required velocity, given as:

min

V i, j ≥ V i, j ,

∀t, i = 1, …, NP ;

Budget Constraint:

C total ≤Fund

j = 1, …, NDM

Water utilities are often constrained by a budget for a new subdivision design and/or the rehabilitation of an existing water system. When the optimization is conducted to maximize the value or benefit of the design, the optimal solution will be constrained by the available funding.

max

Multi Objective Genetic Algorithm Optimized Design Genetic algorithms have been widely applied to solving single-objective optimization problems in water resources system analysis (Bavic et al. 1994; Wu and Simpson 1996, 1997a, 1997b and 2001; Wu et al. 2000 and 2001). In recent years, multi-objective genetic algorithms have been found to be more effective than traditional optimization techniques at solving multi-objective optimization problems. A wide range of multi-objective optimization problems have been successfully solved by using evolutionary algorithms. There is no need to modify or simplify the system hydraulics and design criteria to fit multi-objective GA. Single-objective optimization is used to identify the optimal or near-optimal solutions according to the sole objective function. As soon as a solution is found better than the current-best solution, it is accepted. Multi-objective optimization is to locate the non-inferior (or non-dominated) solutions in solution space. Solution A is called non-inferior to solution B if and only if solution A is no worse than solution B in all the objectives. It is also said that solution A dominates solution B or that solution A is a non-dominated solution. A global non-dominated solution is

B-760


WaterCAD Theory defined as the solution that is no worse than any other feasible solutions in all the objectives. There exist multiple global non-dominated solutions. The task of a multiobjective optimization is to search for all the global non-dominated or non-inferior solutions also known as the Pareto-optimal set or Pareto-optimal front. Conventionally, a multi-objective optimization problem was transformed into a single-objective optimization problem by using two approaches including weighted sum of objectives and e-constraint method (Cohon, 1978). Weighted sum approach applies a set of weighting factors to all the objectives and sums up the weighted objectives to construct a composite single objective. It is expected that the optimization of a composite objective is equivalent to the optimization of the original multiple objectives, but the optimal solution depends on the chosen weights and it can only search for a single optimal solution rather than Pareto-optimal solutions in one run. The constraint method chooses one of the objective functions and treats the other objective functions as constraints. Each of the constraints is limited to a prescribed value. It transforms a multi-objective optimization problem into a single-objective optimization. The optimal solution resulted by the constraint method, however, depends on the pre-defined constraint limits. Pareto-optimal solutions can be obtained by performing multiple runs of the single-objective optimization problem using different weighting factors or constraint limits. The more combinations of weighting factors or constraint limits, the more optimization runs are required, the greater the computational cost. In contrast, multi-objective genetic algorithm concurrently optimizes all the objective functions in one run without any fix-up on objective functions. It provides an effective method for handling multi-objective optimization. The goal of single-objective optimization is to search for an optimal solution. Multiobjective optimization has two goals during the search process. One goal is to find a set of Pareto-optimal solutions as close as possible to Pareto-optimal front. The second goal is to maintain a set of Pareto-optimal solutions as diverse as possible. Searching for Pareto-optimal solutions is certainly the primary task for multi-objective optimization. A solution of single-objective optimization problem is evaluated by the objective value, which directly contributes to the fitness of the corresponding genotype solution. However, the fitness of a solution for multi-objective optimization problem is determined by the solution dominance that can be defined as the number of solutions dominated among the current population of solutions. The stronger the dominance, the greater the fitness is assigned to a solution. While identifying Paretooptimal solutions is important, maintaining the diversity of Pareto-optimal solutions is also essential. Dealing with multi-objective optimization, such as minimizing cost and maximizing benefit for a water distribution system, it is anticipated that optimal tradeoff solutions are found and uniformly distributed for the entire range of cost budget. This is normally achieved by using a method of fitness sharing or solution clustering. To effectively solve the problem of cost-benefit trade-off optimal design, as formulated in the early section, fast messy genetic algorithm (Goldberg et al. 1993) has been extended to handle the multi-objective functions. The multi-objective fast messy GA has been integrated with WaterCAD hydraulic network solver. The integrated


B-761

Genetic Algorithms Methodology approach (Wu et al. 2002) provides a powerful design optimization tool to assist hydraulic engineers to practically and efficiently design a water distribution system. It offers capability of three levels of optimization design analysis, including minimum cost design, maximum benefit design and cost-benefit trade-off design optimization.

B.6.3

Competent Genetic Algorithms The working mechanics of a genetic algorithm are derived from a simple assumption (Holland 1975) that the best solution will be found in the solution region that contains a relatively high proportion of good solutions. A set of strings that represent the good solutions attains certain similarities in bit values. For example, 3-bit binary strings 001, 111, 101 and 011 have a common similarity template of **1, where asterisk (*) denotes a don’t-care symbol that takes a value of either 1 or 0. The four strings represent four good solutions and contribute to the fitness values of 10, 12, 11, and 11 to a fitness function of:

f ( x 1, x 2, x 3 ) = x 1 + x 2 + 10

x⁄ 3

Where, x1, x2 and x3 directly takes a bit value as an integer from left to right. In general, a short similarity template that contributes an above-average fitness is called a building block. Building blocks are often contained in short strings that represent partial solutions to a specific problem. Thus, searching for good solutions uncovers and juxtaposes the good short strings, which essentially designate a good solution region, and finally leads a search to the best solution. Goldberg et al. (1989) developed the messy genetic algorithm as one of the competent genetic algorithm paradigms by focusing on improving GA’s capability of identifying and exchanging building blocks. The first-generation of the messy GA explicitly initializes all the short strings of a desired length k, where k is referred as to the order of a building block defined by a short string. For a binary string representation, all the combinations of order-k building blocks requires a number of initial short strings of length k for an l-bit problem:

k l n = 2 ⎛ --⎞ ⎝ k⎠ For example, the initial population size of short strings, by completely enumerating the building blocks of order 4 for a 40-bit problem, is more than one million. This made the application of the first-generation messy GA to a large-scale optimization problem impossible. This bottleneck has been overcome by introducing a building block filter procedure (Goldberg et al. 1993) into the messy GA. The filter procedure speeds up the search process and is called a fast messy GA.

B-762


WaterCAD Theory The fast messy GA emulates the powerful genetic-evolutionary process in two nested loops, an outer loop and an inner loop. Each cycle of the outer loop, denoted as an era, invokes an initialization phase and an inner loop that consists of a building block filtering phase and a juxtapositional phase. Like a simple genetic algorithm, the messy GA initialization creates a population of random individuals. The population size has to be large enough to ensure the presence of all possible building blocks. Then a building block filtering procedure is applied to select better-fit short strings and reduce the string length. It works like a filter so that bad genes not belonging to building blocks are deleted, so that the population contains a high proportion of short strings of good genes. The filtering procedure continues until the overall string length is reduced to a desired length k. Finally, a juxtapositional phase follows to produce new strings. During this phase, the processed building blocks are combined and exchanged to form offspring by applying the selection and reproduction operators. The juxtapositional phase terminates when the maximum number of generations is reached, and the cycle of one era iteration completes. The length of short strings that contains desired building blocks is often specified as the same as an era, starting with one to a maximum number of era. Because of this, preferred short strings increase in length over outer iterations. In another words, a messy GA evolves solutions from short strings starting from length one to a maximum desired length. This enables the messy GA to mimic the natural and biological evolution process that a simple or one cell organism evolves into a more sophisticated and intelligent organism. Goldberg et al. (1989, 1993) has given the detail analysis and computation procedure of the messy GA.

B.6.4

References Babovic V., Wu Z. Y. & Larsen L. C., “Calibrating Hydrodynamic Models by Means of Simulated Evolution,” in Proceeding of Hydroinformatics, Delft, Netherlands, pp193-200, 1994. Cohon, J.L., Multi-objective Programming and Planning. Academic Press, New York, 1978. Goldberg, D.E., Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning. Addison Wesley, Reading, MA, 1989. Goldberg, D. E., Korb, B., & Deb, K., “Messy genetic algorithms: Motivation, analysis, and first results,” Complex Systems, 3, 493-530, 1989. Goldberg, D. E., Deb, K., Kargupta, H., & Harik G., “Rapid, Accurate Optimization of Difficult Problems Using Fast Messy Genetic Algorithms,” IlliGAL Report No. 93004, Illinois Genetic Algorithms Laboratory, University of Illinios at UrbanaChampaign, Urbana, IL 61801, 1993. Walski, T.M., “Model Calibration Data: The Good, The Bad and The Useless,” J. AWWA, 92(1), p. 94, 2000.


B-763

Genetic Algorithms Methodology Walski, T. M., “Understanding the adjustments for water distribution system model calibration,” Journal of Indian Water Works Association, April-June, 2001, pp151157, 2001. Walski, T.M., Chase, D.V. and Savic, D.A., Water Distribution Modeling, Haestad Press, Waterbury, CT, 2001. Wang Q.J., “The Genetic Algorithm and its Application to Conceptual RainfallRunoff Models,” Water Resources Research, Vol.27, No.9, pp2467-2482, 1991. Wu Z.Y., “Automatic Model Calibration by Simulating Evolution,” M.Sc. Thesis, H.H. 191, International Institute for Infrastructure, Hydraulic and Environmental Engineering, Delft, Netherlands, 1994. Wu, Z. Y., Boulos, P.F., Orr, C.H., and Ro, J.J., “An Efficient Genetic Algorithms Approach to an Intelligent Decision Support System for Water Distribution Networks,” in Proceedings of the Hydroinformatics 2000 Conference, Iowa, IW, July 26-29, 2000. Wu, Z. Y., Boulos P. F., Orr C.-H. and Ro J. J., “Rehabilitation of water distribution system using genetic algorithm,” Journal of AWWA, Vol. 93, No. 11, pp74-85, 2001. Wu Z.Y. & Larsen C.L., “Verification of hydrological and hydrodynamic models calibrated by genetic algorithms,” Proc. of the 2nd International Conference on Water Resources & Environmental Research, Vol. 2, Kyoto, Japan, pp175-182, 1996. Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “An Efficient Genetic Algorithm Paradigm for Discrete Optimization of Pipeline Networks,” International Congress on Modeling and Simulation, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia, 8-11 December, 1997b. Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “Competent Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Water Distribution Systems,” Journal of Computing in Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol 15, No. 2, pp89-101, 2001. Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R., “Messy Genetic Algorithm for Optimal Design of Water Distribution Systems,” Research Report, No. 140, Department of Civil & Environmental Engineering, University of Adelaide, South Australia., 1996 Wu, Z. Y and Simpson A. R., “Optimal Rehabilitation of Water Distribution Systems Using a Messy Genetic Algorithm,” AWWA 17th Federal Convention Water in the Balance, Melbourne, Australia, 16-21 March 1997a. Wu, Z. Y, Walski, T., Mankowski, R., Cook, J. Tryby, M. and Herrin G., “Optimal Capacity of Water Distribution Systems,” in Proceeding of 1st Annual Environmental and Water Resources Systems Analysis (EWRSA) Symposium, Roanoke, VA, May 1922, 2002.

B-764


WaterCAD Theory

B.7

Energy Cost Theory The concept behind energy usage for a water distribution system is simple: pumps are used within a system to add energy, counteracting the energy losses that occur due to pipe friction and other losses. The cost of operating these pumps, however, can be one of the largest expenses that a utility incurs during normal operations. An accurate understanding of these energies and the costs associated with them is the key to developing better, more efficient, and more economical pumping strategies. Energy cost theory includes:

B.7.1

•

“Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy” on page B-765

•

“Water Power” on page B-765

•

“Brake Power and Pump Efficiency” on page B-766

•

“Motor Power and Motor Efficiency” on page B-766

•

“Energy” on page B-767

•

“Cost” on page B-768

•

“Storage Considerations” on page B-768

•

“Daily Cost Equivalents” on page B-769

Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy Power is the rate at which energy can be transferred, and there are several different powers that are associated with the pumping process. In order for power to be transferred to the water, it needs to go through several steps: from the electrical wires into the pump motor, from the motor into the pump, and finally from the pump to the water itself. Each transfer results in energy losses.

B.7.2

Water Power Water power is the power associated with the water itself, and is a function of the fluid characteristics, the gain in head, and the rate of discharge. PW = ρ · g · ∆H · Q


B-765

Energy Cost Theory

Where:

B.7.3

PW

=

Water power

ρ

=

Fluid density

g

=

Gravitational acceleration

∆H

=

Change in head

Q

=

Discharge rate

Brake Power and Pump Efficiency Brake power is the power at the pump itself, and is related to the water power by: PW = PB · ep Where:

PW

=

Water power

PB

=

Brake power

ep

=

Pump efficiency

In other words, the pump efficiency represents the ability of the pump to transfer power from the pump itself to the water. The pump efficiency varies over the operating range of the pump, so it is important to model pump efficiency as closely as possible to ensure an accurate representation of your system.

B.7.4

Motor Power and Motor Efficiency Motor power is the power that the pump’s motor receives from the electrical utility, and is related to the pump brake power by: PB = PM · em Where:

PB

=

Brake power

PM

=

Motor power

em

=

Motor efficiency

In other words, the motor efficiency represents that ability of the motor to transfer power from the electrical lines to the pump itself. For most pumps, the motor efficiency can be considered to be constant over the whole operating range of the pump.

B-766


WaterCAD Theory Note:

In the case of variable speed pumps, the efficiency of the variable speed drive needs to be accounted for. This efficiency varies with pump speed among other things. You are encouraged to correct the motor efficiency to include the variable speed drive efficiency. For variable speed pumps, there is a drive mechanism between the motor and the pump itself. There are also energy losses associated with this drive, which may be significant in some cases.

For example, if a motor has an efficiency of 90% (0.90) and the variable speed drive has an efficiency of 85% (0.85) at the speeds being used, then the motor efficiency should be entered as 76.5% (0.765). Note:

The variable-speed data is merely presented as an example and should not be construed as representative of any particular pump.

You are encouraged to find the drive efficiency data for the specific drive that is being used. See “Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiency”on page B-767 for some typical data for variable speed drive efficiency, found in the report, “Operations and Training Manual on Energy Efficiency in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants,” TREEO Center, University of Florida, 1986. Table B-6: Variable Speed Drive Efficiency Percent of Full Speed

Variable Frequency Drive

Eddy Current Coupling

Hydraulic Coupling

100

83

85

83

90

82

78

75

70

81

59

56

50

76

43

33

These corrections should not be made to alternatives with constant speed pumps. If you are performing an analysis to compare constant and variable speed pump, you should set up two alternatives: one for the constant speed pump and a second for the variable speed pump.

B.7.5

Energy Energy is a representation of the ability to do work, and is related to power by: E=P·t


B-767

Energy Cost Theory

Where:

E

=

Energy (kW-hours)

P

=

Power (kW)

t

=

Time (hours)

Although water energy and pump energy could be calculated, the motor energy is the primary consideration for water distribution systems because this is the energy that the utility is billed for.

B.7.6

Cost There are several different methods that an electrical provider may use to bill for their energy.

Energy Usage Cost Energy usage costs are simple: there is a cost associated with a unit of energy. This price may vary for different times of day, different days of the week, different seasons, etc., but the basic concept is still the same.

Peak Usage Cost Some energy providers also charge customers based on peak usage (sometimes also called a ratchet charge). This charge is actually based on power rather than energy, with the cost being based on the highest instantaneous power that the customer used during the billing cycle.

B.7.7

Storage Considerations Tank storage can have a considerable effect on the estimated energy costs for a system. As tanks fill or drain, they also act as an energy (and therefore cost) storage element. If a tank is full when a simulation begins and empty when it ends, there is an energy deficit—at some point the pumps will need to operate again in order to replenish the tank. Likewise, if a tank begins empty and fills over the course of a simulation, that represents an energy credit when the total daily cost is calculated.

B-768


WaterCAD Theory

B.7.8

Daily Cost Equivalents Different scenarios may have different analysis durations, so a direct comparison of costs would not be equitable. To normalize all analyses to a common reference, costs are also converted as daily equivalents. For energy costs and storage costs, the total computed cost is adjusted according to the ratio of a single day to the analysis duration. For peak usage cost, a daily cost is computed by dividing the peak usage cost by the number of days in a billing cycle.

B.8

Variable Speed Pump Theory The variable speed pump (VSP) model within WaterCAD lets you model the performance of pumps equipped with variable frequency drives. Variable frequency drives continually adjust the pump drive shaft rotational speed in order to maintain pressure and flow requirements in a network while improving energy efficiency and other operating characteristics as summarized by Lingireddy and Wood (1998); •

Minimization of excess pressures and energy usage,

•

Leakage control through more precise pressure regulation,

•

Flexible pump scheduling, improving off peak energy utilization,

•

Control of tank drain and fill cycles,

•

Improved system performance during emergency water usage events such as fires and main breaks,

•

Reduction of transients produced when pumps start and stop,

•

Simplification of flow control procedures.

WaterCAD variable speed pumping feature will allow designers to make better decisions by empowering them to fully evaluate the advantages and disadvantages associated with VSPs for their unique application. Within WaterCAD there are two different ways to model VSPs depending on the data available to describe pump operations. The relative speed factor is a unitless number that quantifies the rotational speed of the pump drive shaft. 1) If the relative speed factor (or for EPS simulations a series of factors) is known, a pattern based VSP can be used. 2) If the relative speed factor is unknown, it can be estimated using the VSP with WaterCAD new Automatic Parameter Estimation eXtension (APEX).


B-769

Variable Speed Pump Theory •

Pattern Based VSPs—The variable speed pumping model lets you adjust pump performance using the relative speed factor. A single relative speed setting or a pattern of time varying relative speed factors can be applied to the pump. This is especially useful when modeling the operation of existing VSPs in your system. The Affinity Laws are used to adjust pump performance according to the relative speed factor setting. For more information, see “Pump Theory” on page B-723.

•

VSPs with APEX—APEX can be used in conjunction with the VSP model to estimate an unknown relative speed setting sufficient to maintain an operating objective. APEX uses an explicit algorithm to solve for unknown parameters directly (Boulos and Wood, 1990). This technique has proven to be powerful, robust, and computationally efficient for estimation of network parameters and has been improved to allow use for steady state and extended period simulations. To use APEX for estimating relative speed factors, the control node and control level setting for the pump must be selected and the pump curve and operating range for the pump must be defined. The following paragraphs provide guidelines for performing these tasks.

•

Control Node Location—The location of the control node is an important consideration that affects pump operating efficiency, pressure maintenance performance, and, in rare instances, the stability of the parameter estimation calculation. The algorithm has been designed to allow multiple VSPs to operate within one pressure zone of a network; however, the pump and control node pairs should be decoupled from one another. In other words, a control node should be located such that only the pump it controls influences it. If the pressure zone of the model contains a tank or reservoir (hydraulic boundary conditions), consider making the boundary condition the control node as opposed to selecting a pressure junction near the boundary. This will eliminate the possibility of specifying a set of hydraulic conditions that are impossible to maintain, and thus reduce the possibility of computational failure.

•

Setting the Target Head—The control node target head is the constant elevation of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head is greater then the maximum head, the pump can generate at the demanded flow rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained. Tip:

•

B-770

Navigating to the target head settings—The VSP target head for junction nodes can be set on the VSP tab of the Pump dialog box, and for tanks on the Section tab of the Tank dialog box by adjusting the initial level.

Setting the Maximum Relative Speed Factor—For flexible operation, a variable speed drive and pump should be configured such that it can efficiently operate over a range of speeds to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements it will be subject to. The value selected for the maximum relative speed factor depends


WaterCAD Theory on the normal operating range of the drive motor. To set the proper maximum value, you must determine the drive motor’s normal operating speed and maximum operating speed (the maximum speed at which the drive motor normally operates, not the speed at which the drive catastrophically fails). The relative speed factor is defined as the quotient of the current operating speed and the normal operating speed. Thus the maximum relative speed factor is the maximum operating speed of the drive divided by the normal operating speed. For example, a maximum relative speed factor of 2.0 means that the maximum speed is two times the normal operating speed, and a maximum relative speed factor of 1.0 means that the maximum operating speed is equal to the normal operating speed. •

Defining the Pump Curve—In order to determine the relative speed factor using APEX, the pump curve must be smooth and continuously differentiable; thus a one point or three point power function curve definition must be used. For best results, the curve should be defined for the normal operating speed of the pump (corresponding to a relative speed factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the maximum speed setting).

Variable speed pump theory includes:

B.8.1

•

“VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls” on page B-771

•

“Performing Advanced Analyses” on page B-772

•


VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls The VSP model and APEX have been designed to fully integrate with the simple and rule based control framework within WaterCAD. You must keep in mind that the definition of controls requires that the state (On, Off, Fixed Speed Override) and speed setting of a VSP be properly managed during the simulation. Therefore, the interactions between VSPs and controls can be rather complex. We have tried to the extent possible to simplify these interactions while maintaining the power and flexibility to model real world behaviors. The paragraphs that follow describe guidelines for defining simple and logical controls with VSPs. •

Pattern based VSPs—The pattern of relative speed factors specified for a VSP takes precedence over all simple and logical control commands. Therefore, the use of controls with pattern based VSPs is not recommended. Rather, the pattern of relative speed factors should be defined such that control objectives are implicitly met.

•

VSPs with APEX—A VSP can be switched into any one of three different states. When the VSP is On, the APEX will estimate the relative speed sufficient to maintain a constant pressure head at the control node. When the VSP is Off, the relative speed factor and flow through the pump are set to zero, and the pressure


B-771

Variable Speed Pump Theory head at the control node is a function of the prevailing network boundary and demand conditions. When the control state of a VSP is Fixed Speed Override, the pump will operate at the maximum speed setting and the target head will no longer be maintained. The Temporarily Closed state for a VSP indicates that the check valve (CV) within the pump has closed in response to prevailing hydraulic conditions, and that the target head cannot be maintained. The VSP control node can be specified at any junction node or tank in a network model. As described below, however, the behavior of simple and logical controls depends on the type of control node selected.

B.8.2

•

Junction Nodes—When the VSP control node type selected is a junction node, the VSP will behave according to some automatic behaviors in addition to the controls defined for the pump. If the head at the control node is above the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to Off. If the head at the control node is less then the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to On. The VSP will automatically switch into and out of the Fixed Speed Override and Temporarily Closed states in order to maintain the fixed head at the control node and prevent reverse flow through the pump. Additional controls can be added to model more complex use cases.

•

Tanks—When the VSP control node is a tank, you must manage the state of the pump through control definitions, allowing for flexible modeling of the complex control behaviors that may be desired for tanks. If a VSP has a state of On, the pump will maintain the current level of the tank. For example, at the beginning of a simulation if a VSP has status of on, it will maintain the initial level of the tank. As the simulation progresses and the pump happens to turn off, temporarily close, or go into fixed speed override, the level in the tank will be determined in response to the hydraulic conditions prevailing in the network. When the VSP turns on again, it will maintain the current level of the tank, not the initial level. Thus control statements must be written that dictate what state the pump should switch to depending on the level in the tank. A pump station with a VSP and a fixed-speed pump operating in a coordinated fashion can be used to model tank drain and fill operations.

Performing Advanced Analyses The VSP model is fully integrated with the energy cost manager for easy estimation of pump operating costs. When comparing the energy efficiency of fixed speed and variable speed pumps, however, it is important to bear in mind that the pumps are not maintaining the same pressures in the network. The performance of the pumps should be compared in such a way that takes this difference into account; otherwise the

B-772


WaterCAD Theory comparison is of little value. For example, consider a comparison between a VSP and a fixed-speed pump is prepared, but the target head at the control node is greater than the head maintained there by the fixed speed pump. The VSP energy efficiency numbers will be disappointing because the VSP is maintaining higher pressures. The concept of a minimum acceptable head (or pressure) can be useful when evaluating the performance of fixed speed and variable speed pumps. Both pumps should be sized and operated such that the pressure is equal to, or greater than, the minimum acceptable head. In this way, the heads maintained by the respective pumps can be used to define equivalency between the respective designs. When the comparison is thoughtfully designed and conducted, it is likely that the energy efficiency improvements possible with VSPs will come to light more clearly.

B.8.3

References Lingireddy, S. and D.J. Wood, “Improved Operation of Water Distribution Systems Using Variable Speed Pumps,” Journal of Energy Engineering, ASCE, 124(3) 90-103, 1998. Boulos, P. F. and D. J. Wood, “Explicit Calculation of Pipe-Network Parameters,” Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, ASCE, 116(11) 1329-1344, 1987.

B.9

Hydraulic Equivalency Theory This section outlines the rules that Skelebrator uses for creating equivalent pipes from parallel or series pipes. These equations can be solved for equivalent diameter or roughness (C, n or k). With the Darcy-Weisbach equation, the equations are solved only for D because there are situations where the roughness can be negative. Both solutions are presented. In general, there will be one pipe that is the dominant pipe, and the properties of that pipe will be used when a decision must be made. There will be some default rule for picking the dominant pipe, but you will be able to override it. You will not use equivalent lengths because you want to preserve the system geometry. For pipes in series, you will add the lengths of the two pipes while for pipes in parallel. You will use the length of the dominant pipe, as follows: Lr = L1 + L 2

B.9.1

Principles The equations derived below are based on the following principles. The equations below are for two pipes, but can be extended to n pipes.


B-773

Hydraulic Equivalency Theory For pipes in series: Qr = Q1 + Q2 where Q = flow, r refers to the resulting pipe, and 1 and 2 refer to the pipes being removed. hr = h1 + h2 For pipes in parallel: Qr = Q1 + Q2 and hr = h1 + h2 As long as the units are consistent, then any appropriate units can be used. For example, if the diameters are in feet, then the resulting diameter will be in feet.

B.9.2

Hazen-Williams Equation KL Q 1.85 h = ------------- ⎛ ----⎞ 4.87 ⎝ C⎠ D K depends on the units but cancels out in equivalent pipe calculations.

Series Pipes For series pipes, the length is based sum of the lengths. Solved for C:

0.54

Lr -----------2.63 Dr C r = --------------------------------------------------Li ⎛ ⎞ 0.54 ----------------------------⎟ ⎜ 4.87 1.85 ⎝ Di Ci ⎠

∑

Solved for D:

B-774


WaterCAD Theory

0.205

Lr --------------0.38 Cr D r = -------------------------------------------------------Li ⎛ ⎞ 0.205 ------------------------------⎟ ⎜ 4.87 1.85 ⎝ Di Ci ⎠

∑

Parallel Pipes Solved for C:

0.54

Lr C r = ------------2.63 Dr

2.63

Ci Di -----------------0.54 Li

∑

Solved for D:

⎛ L 0.54 r D r = ⎜ -----------⎜ C ⎝ r B.9.3

2.63 0.38

∑

C i D i ⎞⎟ ------------------0.54 ⎟ Li ⎠

Manning’s Equation 2

KL ( n Q ) h = ----------------------5.33 D Series Pipes Solved for n:

2 0.5

2.66

Dr ⎛ n r = ------------- ⎜ 0.5 ⎜ Lr ⎝

∑

Li n ⎞ i ⎟ -----------5.33⎟ Di ⎠

Solved for D:


B-775

Hydraulic Equivalency Theory

⎛ ⎞ 0.188 ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ L n2 ⎟ r r D r = ⎜ ---------------------⎟ ⎜ 2⎟ Li n ⎟ ⎜ r ⎜ -------------⎟ ⎝ D 5.33⎠ i

∑

Parallel Pipes Solved for n:

2.66

Dr ------------0.5 Lr n r = -------------------2.66 Di ------------0.5 Li n

∑

Solved for D:

⎛ 0.5 Dr = ⎜ Lr n ⎜ ⎝ B.9.4

2.66 0.376

∑

D i ⎞⎟ ------------0.5 ⎟ L i n⎠

Darcy-Weisbach Equation 2

----------------h = KLfQ 5 D It is the roughness, k—not f—that is a property of the pipe. While f behaves well, the roughness can take on negative values in the parallel pipe case. Therefore, only solutions for D will be developed.

B-776


WaterCAD Theory The other problem with the Darcy-Weisbach equation is that D and f are not uniquely related and depend on the Reynolds number, which is a function of velocity. So the question that must be first answered is, Which value of f should be used in the equations? This is especially tricky when the individual pipes have different value of k. First, a velocity of 1 m/s will be used as a reference velocity to calculate Reynolds number for the individual pipes. Second, an iterative solution must be used to solve for D. That is: 1. Pick a D and k based on the dominant pipe. 2. Calculate f for the resultant pipe using Swamee-Jain formula. 3. Use that f for fr in the equations below. 4. Check if Dr is close enough to D used to calculate f. 5. Repeat until convergence. The Swamee-Jain equation is

1.325 f = -------------------------------------------------2 ⎛ k ⎞ 5.74 ln ⎜ ------------ + -------------⎟ ⎝ 3.7D Re 0.9⎠ where

Re = VD -------ν ν must be selected so that the units cancel. Typical values are 1.00e-6 m2/s or 1.088e5 ft.2/sec.

Series Pipes

⎛ ⎞ 0.2 ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ Lr ff ⎟ D r = ⎜ ----------------⎟ ⎜ L i f i⎟ ⎜ --------5⎟ ⎝ Di ⎠

∑


B-777

Hydraulic Equivalency Theory

Parallel Pipes

⎛ ⎛ ⎜ D r = Lr f r ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎝

2.5

∑

⎞ Di --------------------⎟ 0.5⎟ ( Li f i ) ⎠

2 ⎞ 0.2

⎟ ⎟ ⎠

Check Valves Most pipes will not have check valves and the resulting valves will not. For series pipes, if any pipe has a check valve, then the resulting pipe will have a check valve. For parallel pipes, if both pipes have check valves, then the resulting pipe will have a check valve. The degenerative case is when one of the parallel pipes has a check valve. This should not happen in terms of good engineering. If it does, the parallel pipes should not be combined and a warning message should be issued.

Minor Losses For pipes in series, the minor loss coefficients should be added. The differences in diameter between the original pipe and the resulting pipe should be negligible. You should be given the option to ignore minor losses in series pipes. For pipes in parallel, you should be given the option to ignore minor losses, not skeletonize pipes with significant minor losses (e.g., if total Km > 100) or account for them as a change in diameter. One possible short heuristic for handling minor losses in parallel pipes is to realize that you are splitting the minor loss over two pipes. If the pipes are roughly the same length, roughness, and diameter, then the minor loss coefficient will be cut approximately in half. I worked through the math for coming up with an equivalent minor loss coefficient and it’s a mess. Using half the minor loss coefficient isn’t exactly correct, but it pretty much accounts for things.

Numerical Check To check the equations, I’ll run through examples of each. I will solve for head loss in each pipe individually and then combine to see how the head loss in the equivalent pipe compares for series pipes and for parallel, I’ll see how the flow compares. I’ll stick with the SI units (i.e., flow in m3/s, D, L and h in m). Series Use Q = 1 m3/s, and solve for head loss. Pipe 1 is the dominant pipe.

B-778


WaterCAD Theory Table B-7: Comparison between the Sum of the Headlosses from the Two Pipes and the Headloss from the Equivalent Pipe Pipe 1

Pipe 2

Resulting, solve for D

Resulting, solve for C,n

Length

100

80

180

180

Diameter

1

0.75

0.88

0.75k, 0.855n

C

100

120

100

71

k

0.002

0.0015

0.002

X

n

0.013

0.012

0.013

0.0197

h (Hazen)

0.21

0.49

0.72

0.72

h (Manning)

0.17

0.55

0.72

0.72

h (Darcy)

0.20

0.58

0.77

X

Parallel Use head loss = 1 m and solve for Q. Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe Resulting, solve for C,n

Pipe 1

Pipe 2


Length

100

80

100

100

Diameter

1

0.75

0.88

1.18n, 1.21k

C

100

120

100

163

k

0.002

0.0015

0.002

X


B-779

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory Table B-8: Comparison between the Sum of the Flows from the Two Pipes and the Flow from the Equivalent Pipe (Cont’d)

B.10

Pipe 1

Pipe 2


Resulting, solve for C,n

n

0.013

0.012

0.013

0.0083

Q (Hazen)

2.31

1.47

3.74

3.77

Q (Manning)

2.40

1.35

3.72

3.75

Q (Darcy)

2.26

1.31

3.55

X

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory Thiessen polygon generation comprises two methods:

B.10.1

•

“Naïve Method”

•

“Plane Sweep Method”

Naïve Method A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are closer to the site than to any of the other sites. Let P = {p1, p2,…pn} be the set of sites, and V = {v(p1), v(p2),…v(pn)} represent the Voronoi regions or Thiessen polygons for Pi, which is the intersection of all of the half planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of pi and the other sites. Thus, a naïve method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:

B-780


WaterCAD Theory Step 1 For each i such that i = 1, 2,…, n, generate n - 1 half planes H(pi,pj), 1 j, and construct their common intersection v(pi). Step 2 Report V = {v(p1), v(p2),…v(pn)} as the output and stop. This naïve procedure is, however, very inefficient for generating Thiessen polygons. The computation time increases exponentially as the number of sites increases. There are many other more competent methods for constructing a Thiessen polygon.

B.10.2

Plane Sweep Method The plane sweep technique is a fundamental method for solving two-dimensional geometric problems. It works with a special line called a sweepline, a vertical line sweeping the plane from left to right. It hits objects one by one as the sweepline moves. Whenever it crosses an object, a portion of the problem is solved. Therefore, it enables a two-dimensional problem to be solved in a sequence of one-dimension processing. Sweep plane technique provides a conceptually simple and efficient algorithm. Steven Fortune (1986; 1987) has developed a sweepline algorithm for constructing Thiessen polygons. This algorithm has been implemented in the WaterGEMS Thiessen Polygon Generator. The detailed working algorithm is given as follows: 1. Q <------- P. 2. Choose and delete the left-most point, say pi from Q. 3. L <------- the list consisting of a single region ϕ(V(pi). 4. While Q is not empty, repeat Steps 1-3. 5. If w is a site, say w = pi, do: a. Find region ϕ(V(pi) on L containing pi. b. Replace ϕ(V(pi) on L by the sequence (ϕ(V(pj), h-(pi, pj), (ϕ(V(pi)), h+(pi, pj), ϕ(V(pj). c. Add to Q the intersection of h-(pi, pj) with the intermediate lower half hyperbola on L, and the intersection of h+(pi, pj) with the immediate upper half hyperbola on L. 6. If w is an intersection, say w = ϕ(qt), do: a. Replace sub-sequence (h±(pi, pj), ϕ(V(pi)), h±(pi, pk)) on L by h = h-(pi, pk) or h = h+(pi, pk) appropriately. b. Delete from Q any intersection of h±(pi, pj) or h±(pi, pk) with others.


B-781

Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory c. Add to Q any intersection of h with its immediate upper half hyperbola and its immediate lower half parabola on L. d. Mark ϕ(qt) as a Voronai vertex incident to h±(pi, pj), h±(pi, pk), and h. 7. Repeat all half hyperbolas ever listed on L, all the Voronai vertices marked in the preceding step, and the incidence relations among them. The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon. The computation time required for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more competent method than the naïve method and provides satisfactory performance for generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.

B-782


Appendix

C

Scenario Management Guide Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature can dramatically increase your productivity in the “What If?” areas of modeling, including calibration, operations analysis, and planning. By investing a little time now to understand scenario management, you can avoid unnecessary editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more out of your model, with much less work and expense. In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages: •

A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of “What If?” conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results.

•

Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.

•

The Scenario/Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.

•

With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.

These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them.


C-783

About this Guide

C.1

About this Guide The depth of scenario management as implemented by Haestad Methods is probably far beyond what you have ever seen before. With that in mind, this guide is intended as an introduction to the philosophy and terminology upon which scenario management is based. This is not intended as a step-by-step guide to using the software. If you are a moderately experienced Windows software user, you should have no difficulty learning and exploring the scenario management interface. Excellent tutorials and context-sensitive online help are also available within the software itself. These learning tools will prove to be of tremendous assistance to you for all aspects of the software, and should certainly not be ignored if you are having difficulty. For more information, just click the Help button, which is available from anywhere within the program. In addition, contact Haestad Methods information on the different training services it offers.

C.2

Before Haestad Methods—Distributed Scenarios Let us begin by understanding the approaches that have historically been used to attempt “What If?” analyses. Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of change on a software model: •

Change the model, recalculate, and review the results

•

Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results

Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and errorprone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Additionally, comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be stored in physically separate data files.

C-784


Scenario Management Guide

Figure C-1: Before Haestad Methods—Distributed Scenarios

C.3

With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained Scenarios Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives: •

Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally)

•

Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input and output data, and direct comparisons

•

Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data from existing scenarios (data reuse)

•

Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot in common


C-785

The Scenario Cycle The scenario management feature developed by Haestad Methods successfully meets all of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.

C.4

The Scenario Cycle The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome file management. This process allows you to cycle through any number of changes to the model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information. Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates.

Figure C-2: With Haestad Methods—Self-Contained Scenarios

C-786



C.5

Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and Alternatives Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:

C.6

•

Attribute—An attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter, length, and roughness.

•

Alternative—An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the network’s elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.

•

Scenario—A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data— the referenced alternatives do.

A Familiar Parallel Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entrée, and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entrée may have a meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in the following figure:

Figure C-3: A Restaurant Meal Scenario


C-787

Scenario Behavior: Inheritance The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entrée 1, and Dessert 2 might then be combined to define a complete meal. Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.

Figure C-4: Generic Scenario Anatomy

C.7

Scenario Behavior: Inheritance The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical interface. But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change? The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance. In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is implemented in software:

C-788



C.7.1

Overriding Inheritance Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic. These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only in local attributes. For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent. Now the child puts on a pair of green-tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.

C.7.2

Dynamic Inheritance Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent’s characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to brown, and the children’s eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will revert to the inherited color, now brown. This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can override all of the parent’s values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a child.

C.8

When Are Values Local versus Inherited? Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.


C-789

Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance

Figure C-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change

C.9

Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, “just like x except for y.” Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions, with no duplicated effort. We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text. Note:

•

“Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.”

•

“Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing.” Note:

C-790

Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: “Salad 3 is just like Salad 2, except for the dressing.”

If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to peas), only Entrée 1 needs to be updated, and the other entrées will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of “Peas” instead of “Green Beans.”


Scenario Management Guide •

“Entrée 2 is just like Entrée 1, except for the meat and the starch.”

•

“Entrée 3 is just like Entrée 2, except for the meat.” Note:

•

C.10

Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it can be created as a “root” or base alternative. It does not inherit its attribute data from any other alternative.

“Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping.”

Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale. Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad. The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):

•

“Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert.” The salad and entrée alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.

•

“Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2.” A totally new base or root is created.

•

“Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad.” The entrée and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.


C-791

A Water Distribution Example

C.11

A Water Distribution Example Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies water by gravity to three junction nodes.

Figure C-6: Example Water Distribution System Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties. Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands and pipe diameters.

C.12

Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and preliminary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives, and the hierarchies to look like the following (showing only the items of interest):

C-792



C.13

Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J2’s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.

Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following scenario hierarchy:

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative hierarchy remains the same as before.

C.14

Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the industrial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.


C-793

Correcting an Error

Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:

Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives remain the same.

C.15

Correcting an Error This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial demand is not actually 500 gpm—it is 1500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be updated. The changes will ripple through to the children. After the single change is made, the demand hierarchy is as follows:

Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections. The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results. When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.

C.16

Analyzing Improvement Suggestions To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements are suggested:

C-794


Scenario Management Guide •

A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative, inheriting all the diameters except P-1’s, which is overridden.

•

Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives, this can be created as a base (root) alternative.

These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:

This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run to provide results for these proposed improvements. Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Control Center) and comparison Graphs (from the element editor dialog boxes) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved pressures.

C.17

Finalizing the Project It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is present in the alternatives we already have!


C-795

Conclusion Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak, Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1. Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.

C.18

Conclusion These are the fundamental concepts behind the architecture of Haestad Methods’ scenario management. To learn more about actually using scenario management in Haestad Methods software, start by running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the Scenario Control Center itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or field that puzzles you. Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature gives you a powerful tool for modeling real-world engineering scenarios when analyzing system response to different demands, reviewing the impacts of future growth, and iterating to find the least expensive design. That means you will be able to finish your projects faster, spend less money, and improve your bottom line.

C-796


Appendix

D

Capital Cost Estimating Capital cost estimating includes:

D.1

•

“Capital Cost Estimating Basics” on page D-797

•

“Unit Cost Functions” on page D-802

•

“Building Cost Scenarios” on page D-810

•

“Viewing Cost Results” on page D-811

•

“Assigning Costs to Model Elements” on page D-815

Capital Cost Estimating Basics The Cost Manager in WaterGEMS, WaterCAD, StormCAD, and SewerCAD is a tool for tracking the costs associated with a water distribution, storm sewer, or sanitary sewer construction project. It is set up to mimic the way that a typical engineer would track the costs of a capital improvement project during a planning study. In order to compute the cost of a particular Scenario, you must supply the model with the following information: •

Elements included in costing—The first step is to select the elements from the model that you want to include in a given Cost Scenario. This set of elements may include all the elements in the model if, for instance, you are modeling a new subdivision, or a subset of the elements if you are expanding an existing system.

•

Unit Costs—The second level of data is the costs associated with each element. The costs for each element are broken down into two types, construction and nonconstruction. Construction costs are specified on a per unit basis where the unit can be either an item (e.g., $/hydrant) or a length unit (e.g., $/ft. or $/m). Most unit costs are constants, but unit costs for pipe elements and gravity structures can also be specified as a function of diameter or some other property of the element using a unit cost function. A unit cost function defines the relationship between the unit cost for an element and some attribute of that element. Non-construction costs can be specified as either a percentage of the total construction costs or as a lump sum amount.


D-797

Capital Cost Estimating Basics •

Quantities—The third level of information is the quantity of each item (e.g., number of service lines, length of pipe, number of valves) associated with a given element. In the case of pipes, you need not specify the length, as the default value for the quantity is the length of the pipe segment.

•

Adjustments—Finally, you can enter the adjustments that should be made to the total costs computed for the elements in a Scenario (i.e., project). You can specify these project level cost adjustments as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total cost.

Capital cost estimating basics includes:

D.1.1

•

“Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager” on page D-798

•

“Navigating within the Cost Manager” on page D-798

•

“Entering Data for Multiple Elements” on page D-800.

Element Cost Data versus Cost Manager The early sections of this appendix describe how to handle cost data for each element. Entering the cost data for individual elements does not involve the use of the Cost Manager portion of the program. The Cost Manager is used to sum the costs of the elements and prepare project cost reports. The Cost Manager is accessed by clicking the Cost Manager button, or by selecting Analysis > Compute Costs. Costs for individual elements can be calculated without entering the Cost Manager.

D.1.2

Navigating within the Cost Manager There are five selections within the Cost Manager: •

Unit Cost Functions—Use this selection to construct unit cost functions.

•

Cost Alternatives—Opens the Cost Alternative dialog box where you can edit the element cost data defined in the project.

•

Cost Adjustments—This selection lets you enter cost adjustments that pertain to the overall Scenario, not just individual elements.

•

Active Scenarios—You can specify which Scenarios will appear in the Cost Manager.

•

Cost Reports—View cost reports with varying levels of detail.

The Cost Manager also provides a way of viewing the calculated costs at user-selected levels of detail.

D-798


Capital Cost Estimating

Level of Detail The cost analysis feature is extremely flexible with regard to the level of detail in which you can develop cost estimates. At the simplest level, you may want to capture all the costs of a pipe in a single $/ft. or $/m unit cost. At the other extreme, you may break down the cost of a pipe into numerous cost items, including materials, installation, repaving, hydrants, services, valves, land, engineering, inspection, legal, permits, and contribution to a capital clearing account, plus an explicit allowance for omissions and contingencies. Either approach can be easily accommodated using the Cost Manager.

Construction versus Overall Project Cost It is important to understand which costs you are calculating, construction costs or overall capital costs. For example, you must decide if the costs calculated are pure construction costs, or if they include items such as inspection, design, land, easements, etc. There is no single correct way to compute costs, but it is important to realize which costs are included or not included in the totals, and to perform cost evaluations in a consistent manner.

Indirect Costs by Element or by Project Indirect costs such as design and inspection may be assigned to each element individually or to the project as a whole, depending on how you wish to account for the costs in your estimate. For instance, if a pipeline project is made up of five pipe elements, the inspection cost may be added into each element, or calculated after summing the individual costs and added to the overall project cost.

Cost Functions versus Fixed Unit Cost For pipes and gravity node structures, it is possible to specify unit costs as a function of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost of a pipe might be a function of the diameter, or the cost per unit for a gravity structure could be a function of the structure depth. By using a cost function, the unit cost for an element will be automatically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change.

Scenarios versus Cost Alternatives While cost data are stored in the Cost Alternatives, costs are calculated for individual Scenarios. This distinction is necessary because element properties such as pipe diameter and manhole depth are not stored with cost data, but rather with the system’s physical data. So, the cost must be based on a Scenario, which includes both a Cost Alternative and a Physical Properties Alternative.


D-799

Capital Cost Estimating Basics

Multiple Scenarios The cost data that you enter is stored in a Cost Alternative, so you can easily change the cost data that is used from Scenario to Scenario. For instance, you may have several phases of construction for which you wish to separately compute the associated costs. You can do this by creating two Cost Alternatives, one containing the cost data for the elements in phase one, and another containing the costs for the elements in phase two. By creating the appropriate Scenarios to reference these Alternatives, you can quickly compute and compare the costs associated with each phase.

D.1.3

Entering Data for Multiple Elements Thus far, data entry has been described for individual elements. However, in most cases, unit costs are the same for a given type of item regardless of the element with which it is associated. For example, a service line may cost $1200, and you want to use that same unit price for all elements. You can define these costs by either using: prototypes, globally editing the costs, or using unit cost functions.

Prototypes If you know that you will be using the Cost Manager before you begin your project, the Prototype feature allows you to easily establish default cost data by using the Cost tab. For instance, if you know that all your pipes are going to have construction cost items for material and installation, valves, and service connections, you can enter these items into the construction cost table, along with their unit costs. Then, when you have finished laying out your system, you can select the Pipe Editor and update the appropriate quantity for each of these items. For example, the pipe prototype may have an item labeled Service Connection with a quantity of 0 and a unit cost of 750. Then, for each element, the labels and unit costs will appear with the default values from the prototype, and you only need to specify the quantity of each item.

D-800



Setting the Include in Cost Calculation Box In the prototype shown above, cost data has been entered, but the box labeled Include in Cost Calculation has not been checked. When new pipes are created in the graphical editor, their cost data will default to the values shown here, but they will not be selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. If you select Include in Cost Calculation in the prototype, the program will calculate costs for every element subsequently entered into the model. It may be necessary to use the Table Manager or Alternative Manager to ensure that the model is only calculating costs for the elements that you want included in the costing. For example, costs should not be calculated for existing pipes. The Pressure Pipe tab in the Cost Alternative Editor below shows how you can specify that only certain pipes are included in the cost calculation.


D-801

Unit Cost Functions

Entering Cost Items and Unit Prices Globally If you have already entered a system for which you would like to compute the cost, you can globally edit the cost data either through a FlexTable or the Cost Alternative Editor. Once in the Cost Alternative Editor, select the alternative to be edited, and choose the tab corresponding to the type of element to be edited. There, right-click the Element Costs column heading and select Global Edit. In this way, it is possible to add a global unit cost for hydrants or service lines. Then, within each element, you need only enter the quantity of these items. If necessary, you can still override the unit cost in an individual Element Editor or delete an item entirely.

Using Filters to Edit Only Some Elements If you use FlexTables, you can easily select subsets of elements for applying different default cost data. For instance, you may wish to apply a different unit cost function to a material item and an installation item for pipes having different materials. In the FlexTables, you can filter a table to view only the pipes that are made of ductile iron, and then globally edit the cost data for these pipes. You can then repeat the process for your PVC pipes. Combining element prototypes and the global editing capabilities makes it easy for you to quickly enter large amounts of cost data and develop a planning-level estimate of the cost of your system.

D.2

Unit Cost Functions Unit cost functions define a relationship between a unit cost and a certain property of an element. For pipe elements, the unit cost would be in units of $/length and might be related to the diameter of the pipe. In WaterCAD, pipes are the only elements for which unit cost functions can be defined. However, in StormCAD and SewerCAD, you can also define unit cost functions for gravity structures like inlets, junctions, and manholes. Unit cost functions for gravity structures relate the cost of the element to some property, such as structure depth. As with any function, unit cost functions can give the relationship between cost ($/length or $/structure) and an element property (diameter or structure depth) in either a tabular form or an equation. Unit cost functions includes:

D-802

•

“Form of Cost Functions” on page D-803

•

“Formula Cost Functions” on page D-806

•

“Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables” on page D-808



D.2.1

Form of Cost Functions Cost functions can be specified in formula (equation) or tabular (table) format as shown below: Formula Unit Cost Function $/ft = 0.4 D1.5 Where:

D

=

Diameter (in.)

Tabular Unit Cost Function D (in.)

6

8

10

12

14

16

$/ft.

5.90

9.00

12.60

16.60

20.90

25.60


D-803

Unit Cost Functions

The two cost functions are essentially the same at the actual discrete diameters. The method that you choose is strictly a matter of individual preference or dependent on the data you have. Graphs of the formula and tabular unit cost functions given above are shown below:

D-804



Multiple Cost Functions Of course, not every pipe of a given size is going to have the same unit cost. Pipes laid in new subdivisions in soil generally have lower costs than pipes laid in congested downtown areas with a great deal of rock and extensive repaving. You might therefore want to define several different cost functions corresponding to different pipes and different conditions. Each of these cost functions should be given its own unique name or label. Some typical unit cost functions may be: •

New roads

•

Cross country with rock

•

Downtown urban area

•

Old neighborhood

•

Boring under highway

A typical list of cost functions (in this case for pipes) is shown below. Note that you can build a new cost function by adding it or by duplicating and editing an existing function.


D-805

Unit Cost Functions

Assigning Cost Functions to Elements Once the cost functions have been named and defined, you can assign them to any number of construction cost items for each pipe being included in the cost calculations. This assignment can be made using the Pipe Editor, FlexTables, or the Cost Alternative Editor.

Entering Cost Function Data You can enter data to construct the cost functions by selecting Unit Cost Functions from the Cost Manager, or by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button in the Advanced Options dialog box located under the Cost tab of any element that supports cost functions. The units of the independent variable will be the units of that variable elsewhere in the model, while the units of the unit cost are $/ft. or $/m for pipe and $/unit for non-pipes.

D.2.2

Formula Cost Functions Formula cost functions includes:

D-806

•

“Defining Cost Formulas” on page D-807

•

“Coefficients in Cost Formulas” on page D-807



Defining Cost Formulas When you decide to use a formula rather than a table to describe unit costs, you need only enter four coefficients to describe the cost function, rather than an entire table of values. With this method, adjusting the costs for a different cost function involves changing only one or two of the coefficients of the equation rather than an entire table. The general form of the cost function is: $/ft = d + a (x-c)b Where:

x is the value of an element attribute such as diameter, rise, or span (in length units such as inches and millimeters for diameter and feet or meters for depth); and a, b, c, and d are coefficients of the cost equation.

In general, typical ranges for the coefficients for pipe cost functions in $/ft. where diameter (span) is expressed in inches are: 0.4

<

a

<

1.0

1.2

<

b

<

1.8

0.0

<

c

<

20

0.0

<

d

<

6

Coefficients in Cost Formulas Costs are most dependent on b since it is an exponent. It indicates how sensitive costs are to size. If costs are relatively independent of size, b is small, while if they vary dramatically with size, b is larger. The coefficient d represents a minimal cost for something like pavement restoration, which is independent of the size of the pipe. The coefficient a is the best parameter to adjust when converting cost from one laying/ excavation condition to another. The figure below shows the effects of the coefficients on the shape of the cost curve.


D-807

Unit Cost Functions

If you have few data points, it is best to set c and d to zero, b to 1.6, and see what value of the a coefficient best fits the cost data. Try using a spreadsheet graph for this. Then, adjust b to get the curvature of the cost curve, and c and d to get the correct x- and yaxis intercepts.

D.2.3

Tabular Cost Functions—Defining Cost Tables Setting up a cost table involves typing in pairs of values in the Unit Cost Function Editor dialog box. While the independent variables for the formula cost functions were required to be numbers, the independent variables for tabular functions can be numeric or text values, as shown below. Note:

•

•

D-808

In a circular gravity pipe, the rise and span both equal the diameter.

Numeric Variables –

Rise

–

Structure Depth

–

Structure Diameter

–

Pipe Diameter

–

Minor Loss Coefficient

–

Complex Pipe Elements

Text Variables –

Section Size

–

Material Type


Capital Cost Estimating Sometimes a single pipe may actually have different unit costs along its length. Consider a 500 foot pipe that has an 80 foot stream crossing part way along the pipe, 320 feet of cross country pipe, and 100 feet of pipe laid in an old neighborhood. There are two ways to approach costing this kind of pipe element: •

Set up three separate model elements (i.e., pipes), each with its own cost function. This method is the most straightforward way, even though it increases the number of pipes the hydraulic model must solve.

•

Or, set up one 500 foot pipe with the cost function for cross country pipe and add the following: a cost item for the additional cost of the stream crossing with a quantity of 80 feet and a unit price of, say, $20/ft., and a cost item for the additional cost of laying pipe in the old neighborhood with a quantity of 100 feet and a unit price of $30/ft., where the $20 and $30 represents the incremental costs for the more expensive pipe laying. The difficulty with this approach is that the addon cost is independent of pipe size. If the add-on costs are a function of pipe size, new cost functions for those items can be defined.


D-809

Building Cost Scenarios

D.3

Building Cost Scenarios Costs are calculated for Scenarios, which are made up of physical data, demands or loads, initial settings, costs, and other Alternatives. The data used in the cost calculations is primarily found in the Cost Alternative, but pipe and manhole sizes are taken from the Physical Alternative, and system adjustment data is entered in the Cost Manager under Cost Adjustments on a Scenario basis. Values in the other Alternatives, such as demands and water quality, have no impact on the cost calculations. The relationship between sources of data for cost calculations is shown in the figure below.

D.3.1

Associating Costs with Scenarios While cost data is entered in the Element Editors, FlexTables, and Cost Alternatives, these costs must be associated with a Scenario. This is done in the Scenario Control Center by selecting the Cost Alternative to be used with a Scenario. Each Scenario has a cost associated with it, which means that there may be many Scenarios with the same cost. This occurs when the Cost and Physical Alternatives are the same for a particular Scenario even though the Scenarios may have a different demand alterative or initial condition. However, you can control which Scenarios will appear in the Cost Manager.

D-810



D.3.2

Application For example, consider a pipe on Jones Street that is assigned a cost function in a Cost Alternative that is based on the diameter of the pipe. In Physical Properties Alternative 1, the pipe is given a diameter of 12 inches; in Physical Properties Alternative 2, it is given a diameter of 16 inches. When Physical Properties Alternative 1 is combined in a Scenario with the Cost Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 12-inch Jones Street pipe, and when Physical Properties Alternative 2 is combined with the Cost Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 16-inch.

Using Cost Alternatives to Segregate Multiple Projects Cost Alternatives can also be used to separate costs into distinct projects. A Cost Alternative identifies which elements are included in the cost calculation and summary. For example, you may have ten elements, such as nine pipes and a pump station, that have costs calculated for them in the model. Seven of the pipes will be installed on the north side of town in a single project, while two pipes and a pump station will be installed in the south side under a different project. When defining the Cost Alternative, you set up one Cost Alternative with the seven north side pipes, and another Cost Alternative with the two south side pipes and the pump station. Checking the Include in Cost Calculation box in the Cost Alternative Editor under the Cost Manager determines which elements are part of the cost analysis for each Scenario.

D.4

Viewing Cost Results You can view cost results on the screen, by exporting them to spreadsheets and other software, and by printing them for use in reports. These reported costs can be given on an element-by-element basis in the element dialog boxes, aggregated by pipes and nodes in FlexTables, and on a project basis in the Cost Manager. The default display units on cost are dollars ($) with no decimal places, although they can be changed to thousands of dollars (k$), and the display precision can be adjusted. Viewing cost results includes: •

“Active Scenarios” on page D-812

•

“Use of Cost FlexTables” on page D-812

•

“Individual Element Costs” on page D-813

•

“Node and Pipe Cost Tables” on page D-813

•

“Cost Scenario Tables” on page D-813


D-811

Viewing Cost Results

D.4.1

Active Scenarios The Cost Manager can calculate costs for every Scenario created in the Scenario Control Center. However, some Scenarios may share the same Cost Alternative and Physical Alternative, and differ only in the loading (demand) or initial conditions. In these cases, the costs will be the same for the different Scenarios. You may therefore want to view the costs for only a few of the available Scenarios. This can be done by selecting Active Scenarios in the Cost Manager and checking the appropriate boxes. Only those Scenarios that are selected as active in the Cost Manager will have costs calculated for them.

D.4.2

Use of Cost FlexTables The cost reports are formatted as FlexTables, so the columns can be adjusted and display properties changed. The tables can also be exported to a tab delimited or comma delimited file, or copied to the Windows Clipboard and pasted into other software. The actual values displayed in the cells, not the formulas, are copied, so the numerical values should not be adjusted once they are exported. That is, if the unit cost or quantity is changed, the totals will not automatically update in the spreadsheet.

D-812



D.4.3

Individual Element Costs For any element, costs can be viewed under the Cost tab of the element dialog box. If there are more than three construction or non-construction costs, not all will be visible at once. The costs can be viewed in a report like the one shown below by selecting Report > Cost Report. To obtain a printout, select Print Preview and Print.

D.4.4

Node and Pipe Cost Tables Just as the model contains some standard pipe and node tables, they also contain standard cost tables. These can be viewed from the Tabular Reports dialog box by selecting Node Cost Report or Pipe Cost Report. In this view, it is possible to sort or filter elements and use all the functionality of FlexTables to customize the look of the table. The table can also be exported, copied, and printed. You can filter out elements not included in the cost calculation by selecting Options > Filter > Custom.

D.4.5

Cost Scenario Tables The costs can be viewed for an entire Scenario (project) in the Cost Manager itself. The costs are presented in a tree structure such that you can expand or collapse various branches of the tree to suit the level of detail desired. More attractive tables are available by selecting Cost Reports. There are four levels of detail available, as shown in the examples below: Detailed tables show all unit costs and quantities.


D-813

Viewing Cost Results

Element Summary gives construction and non-construction costs for each element.

Project Summary gives totals for each type of element (e.g., Pipes, Tanks, etc.).

D-814



Pipe Costs gives the total length and cost for the pipes included in the cost analysis.

D.5

Assigning Costs to Model Elements Assigning costs to model elements includes:

D.5.1

•

“Construction versus Non-Construction Costs” on page D-815

•

“Cost Considerations for Different Elements” on page D-816

•

“Pipe Costs” on page D-816

•

“Node Costs” on page D-818

•

“Pump Station Costs” on page D-821

•

“Non-Construction Costs” on page D-822

Construction versus Non-Construction Costs The costs for each type of element are divided into two types—construction and nonconstruction. The definition of each type of cost depends to a certain extent on you. However, in general, the difference between the two types of costs is that construction costs are based on a unit cost multiplied by a quantity, while non-construction costs are specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. The method of specifying non-construction costs is identical for every element. There are slightly different options for specifying construction costs, depending on the type of element to which you are assigning the cost. These nuances will be explained in more detail in the sections that follow.


D-815

Assigning Costs to Model Elements

D.5.2

Cost Considerations for Different Elements While cost management for the various elements shares most features, different types of elements have some special behaviors. The four distinct categories are pipes, nodes with cost functions, nodes without cost functions, and pump stations. Each type is described in more detail in the corresponding topics.

D.5.3

Pipe Costs Pipe costs includes: •

“Cost per Item versus Cost per Length” on page D-816

•

“Items with Cost per Length” on page D-817

•

“Unit Cost Functions for Pipes” on page D-817

Cost per Item versus Cost per Length The construction costs for pipes are entered into the construction cost table portion of the Cost tab for the element. The table can contain any number of construction cost items. You can specify each pipe construction cost item as either a cost per item or a cost per length. If you specify the cost on a per item basis, then the total construction cost is the cost per item multiplied by the quantity or number of objects. You indicate the type of cost in the Unit column by selecting:

D-816

•

Each, if the costs are calculated per item

•

Any length unit, if the costs are calculated per length



Items with Cost per Length If a length unit (e.g., ft. or m) is selected in the Unit column, the number in the quantity column is the length by which the unit cost is to be multiplied. The default value in the quantity field is the length of the pipe used in the hydraulic calculations. However, if that particular unit cost only applies to a portion of the pipe, you can enter another value by deselecting Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length in the Advanced Options dialog box for each cost item.

Unit Cost Functions for Pipes The Cost Manager allows you to specify the unit cost as a function of a pipe attribute using a unit cost function. The unit cost function relates the cost per unit length to a pipe property such as diameter. If you specify a unit cost function for a construction cost item, then the program will calculate the unit cost for that item. Creating unit cost functions is described later. EXAMPLE: Consider 650 feet of a 10-inch diameter pipe with the following cost data: Table D-1: Unit Cost as a Function of Diameter Diameter (in)

Unit Cost ($/ft.)

8

45

10

55

12

60

And with the following unit costs and quantities: •

Material and installation $55/ft. (calculated based on the above table)

•

7 service connections at $650 each

•

Omission and contingency at 15% of construction cost

•

Inspection services at 5% of construction cost

•

Utility Easement at $350

The Cost tab for this pipe would appear as follows:


D-817


Each pipe can have as many construction cost items as you wish, which means that any number of unit cost functions can be used for a single pipe. For instance, you could have unit cost functions for materials, excavation, or resurfacing. The advantage of specifying the costs in terms of unit cost functions is that as the physical characteristics of the pipe change, the cost for the element is automatically updated.

D.5.4

Node Costs Node costs includes: •

“Types of Nodes by Cost” on page D-818

•

“Cost Items for Nodes” on page D-819

Types of Nodes by Cost In terms of assigning construction costs, nodal elements can be broken down into two categories: those that support unit cost functions and those that do not support unit cost functions. For the most part, the construction cost items for these two categories of nodal elements are specified in a very similar fashion. The first category includes the gravity structures: manholes, inlets, and junctions. The second category consists of the remaining nodal elements: outlets, pressure junctions, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs.

D-818



Cost Items for Nodes The construction cost items for nodal elements consist of a label, quantity, unit, and unit cost. The unit field contains a user-defined string and is primarily used for bookkeeping, since it does not affect the total cost of the item. The total cost for the construction cost item is the quantity multiplied by the unit cost, which are parameters defined by you. For elements that support unit cost functions (manholes, inlets, and junctions), the function can be defined in the Cost Manager and assigned to the construction cost item. As with pipes, if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, then the unit cost is computed based on some attribute. The difference is that for pipes the unit cost function computes a cost per length (e.g., ft. or m), while for nodal elements the unit cost function computes a cost for the item (e.g., structure). So if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, the quantity will default to 1, and the unit will default to each. A quick way to determine if an element supports cost functions is to look at the element dialog box. If it is possible to select the Advanced button, then you can assign a cost function to that element. It is in the Advanced Options dialog box that cost functions can be assigned to items, as described later in this document. EXAMPLE: NODE WITHOUT A COST FUNCTION The construction cost of a tank, a type of element that does not support unit cost functions, may consist of the following items: •

1 steel tank at $250000

•

600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.

•

Site clearing and grading at $20000

•

1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000

The Cost tab for this item is shown below:


D-819


EXAMPLE: NODE WITH A COST FUNCTION For an inlet, you could use a unit cost function so that the construction costs for the element are updated as the design is changed. Consider an inlet with the following cost data. Table D-2: Unit Cost Function of Structure Depth Depth (ft.)

Cost of Subsurface Structure ($)

6

3000

8

3500

10

4000

•

1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500 (calculated from the unit cost function)

•

1 surface inlet at $2000

The Cost tab for this item would appear as shown below:

D-820



D.5.5

Pump Station Costs Pump stations are a special case of nodal elements. In terms of the hydraulic model, a pump station with three pumps makes up three hydraulic elements. However, in terms of cost estimating, a pump station is a single entity. There are two ways to address this situation. You can either apportion the costs evenly between the three elements or aggregate the cost for the entire pump station on a single pump. From a reporting and management perspective, it often makes the most sense to assign all the costs to a single pump as illustrated below: •

3 pumps at $12000 each

•

3 pump installations at $4000 each

•

9 gate valves installed at $2500 each

•

3 check valves at $690 each

•

1 pump station structure at $80000

•

1 SCADA system with sensors and radio at $25000

•

Engineering and inspection at 15% of construction

•

Allowance for contingencies @ 5% of construction

•

Land for pumping station at $20000


D-821

Assigning Costs to Model Elements The sum of all these costs is the total cost for the element and would show up only in the selected pump. The other two pumps at the station would have zero cost. In the screen capture below, note that only three items are shown in the table, but the table can be scrolled to show the remaining items.

D.5.6

Non-Construction Costs There are numerous indirect costs that are applied to construction projects. The terminology describing these costs varies depending on local conventions, whether a public or private utility is involved, and whether construction is being done with force account labor or outside contractors. There are numerous items that can be included in these indirect costs, such as:

D-822

•

Design and bidding

•

Construction phase engineering services

•

Inspection

•

Utility overhead

•

Capital clearing account

•

Administration

•

Legal

•

Permits


Capital Cost Estimating •

Allowance for interest on funds used during construction

•

Insurance

You are able to include these costs in the following ways: •

With each element as a lump sum.

•

With each element as a percentage.

•

For the overall Scenario as a lump sum.

•

For the overall Scenario as a percentage of construction costs.

•

For the overall Scenario as a percentage of both construction and non-construction costs (% of total cost).

•

As a factor applied to the overall project (multiplier).

Non-construction costs include: •

“Omissions and Contingencies” on page D-823

•

“Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs” on page D-823

•

“Specifying Non-Construction Costs” on page D-824

Omissions and Contingencies Usually, cost estimators make an allowance for unforeseen items that come up during projects, sometimes referred to as Omissions and Contingencies (O&C). These costs are usually high when the project is being formulated initially (25%) and get smaller (5%) as the scope and details of the project are worked out. It is important not to count the allowance for O&C twice by including an allowance on an element-by-element basis, and then another allowance for the project as a whole.

Land, Easement, and Right-of-Way Costs Many projects involve procurement of land, easements, or rights-of-way. These costs are usually not a function of element size, and so can be handled on an element byelement basis as a lump sum or as a cost per foot or acre multiplied by the number of feet or acres. If the land costs are not going to be accounted for element-by-element, but rather by a single land purchase for the entire project, a lump sum cost adjustment should be made to the appropriate Scenario.


D-823


Specifying Non-Construction Costs Non-construction cost items for all types of elements are computed in the same manner, and can be specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. For instance, you may wish to make allowances for omissions and contingencies on an element-by-element basis. You can do this by assigning a nonconstruction cost item to every element that is 15% of the total construction cost of the element. The dialog boxes and reports below illustrate how the construction and non-construction costs for the following elements will appear in Cost tab of the Element Editor dialog box and in the cost report for each element. •

D-824

Pipe (using values from a previous example): –

650 feet of 10-inch diameter pipe at $55/ft.

–

7 service connections at $650 each

–

Omission and contingency at 15% of construction

–

Inspection Services at 5% of construction

–

Utility easement at $350



•

Tank: –

1 steel tank at $250000

–

600 ft. of fencing at $15/ft.

–

Site clearing and grading at $20000

–

1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20000

–

Engineering and inspection at 12% of construction

–

2 acres of land at $50000/acre


D-825


•

D-826

Inlet (using values from a previous example): –

1 surface inlet at $2000

–

1 subsurface structure 8-ft. deep at $3500

–

Engineering and inspection at 25% of construction cost




D-827


D-828


Appendix

E

Haestad Methods

Haestad Methods offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems, from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output, Haestad Methods is the ultimate source for your modeling needs. In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, some of our products—WaterCAD, WaterCAD, StormCAD and SewerCAD—can be totally integrated within AutoCAD. These programs also share numerous powerful features, such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation. Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.haestad.com to find out about our latest software, books, training, and open houses.

E.1

Software Haestad Methods software includes: •

“WaterGEMS”

•

“WaterCAD”

•

“SewerCAD”

•

“StormCAD”

•

“PondPack”

•

“FlowMaster”

•

“CulvertMaster”

•

“WaterSafe”

•

“PumpMaster”


E-829

Software

E.1.1

WaterGEMS WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next level. It is the only water distribution modeling software that provides full, completely seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advantages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of freedom, power, efficiency, and usability. You can design, create, display, edit, run, and map, water models from within the GIS environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with traditional Haestad Methods modeling tools. Further, you can use WaterObjects to customize WaterGEMS to meet your specific needs. These abilities, in conjunction with the cross-product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architecture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects. WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo, AutoCAD, or the WaterGEMS Modeler interface.

E.1.2

WaterCAD WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized pipe networks, such as municipal water distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more. WaterCAD abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues, with extensive water quality features, including: automated fire protection analyses, comprehensive scenario management, skeletonization, calibration, cost analysis, and enterprise-wide data sharing faculties. Further, you can use WaterObjects to customize WaterCAD to meet your specific needs. WaterCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

E-830


Haestad Methods

E.1.3

SewerCAD SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute sanitary loads, tracking and combining loads from dry-weather and wet-weather sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity collection and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions, and even automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers everything from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets. SewerCAD can be run in a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

E.1.4

StormCAD StormCAD is a highly-efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flexible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm sewer modeling. Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity, and inlet hydraulics conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a variety of popular junction loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and diversions to hydraulic jumps. StormCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

E.1.5

PondPack PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and postdeveloped watershed conditions, and estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing, and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond infiltration, and pond detention times. PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, and automatically creates section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an executive summary for an entire watershed, or build an elaborate drainage report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs are fully compatible with other Windows software, such as AutoCAD.


E-831

Software

E.1.6

FlowMaster FlowMaster is efficient software for the design and analysis of a wide variety of hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets. FlowMaster’s Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest FHWA guidelines, and irregular section roughness can be weighted based on any popular techniques.

E.1.7

CulvertMaster CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert hydraulics, from single barrel crossings to complex multi-barrel culverts with roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies, and allow you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you don’t know, such as culvert size, peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.

E.1.8

WaterSafe WaterSafe is an add-on module for WaterCAD and WaterCAD. It allows you to run multiple constituent, trace, and age analyses, and it also incorporates previously unavailable statistical results. Enhanced reporting and graphing capabilities improve your ability to compare, examine and predict the effects of various water quality scenarios.

E.1.9

PumpMaster PumpMaster is software service for the selection of pumps from pump manufacturer catalogs provided through three different solutions: a stand-alone application, an online catalog, and a programmable pump library for use within Haestad Method products. Features include: Automated selection of pumps based on a basic criterion

E-832


Haestad Methods (duty point) or more elaborate parameters (application, pump type, speed, etc), Simultaneous access to catalogs from multiple pump manufacturers, and Enhanced work flow and design capabilities for complex pump stations, such as variable speed pumping or analyzing arrangements of identical and multiple size pumps.

E.2

Haestad Press Haestad Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable, quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Haestad Press publications include:

E.3

References and Textbooks:

Authored by industry-recognized experts, Haestad Press offers a complete line of reference books for use in both academic and professional settings.

Technical Journals:

With an eye towards computer technology, journals like “Current Methods” address the latest innovations in water resources modeling and practical modeling case studies, as well as offering credit towards certification.

Independent Papers:

Haestad Press also provides funding for engineers to write case studies of their projects, for potential publication in a variety of industry journals and magazines.

Training and Certification Haestad Methods Continuing Education department has rightfully earned a reputation for excellence among hydraulic modelers, because of both the high quality of the educational experience and the friendly and professional environment that is provided at locations throughout the world. These training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations. Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an assortment of teaching methods including: •

JumpStart Seminars


E-833

Internet Resources •

Comprehensive Workshops

•

Publication-Based Programs

To obtain more information about Haestad Methods certification programs, or to see upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.haestad.com.

E.3.1

Accreditations Haestad Methods has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the International Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET), and the Professional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to Haestad Methods’ own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers to earn Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours (PDHs) for their satisfactory participation in various training and educational programs.

E.4

Internet Resources In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Haestad Methods also provides Internet-based tools to help engineers manage their account information, manage their projects, and manage their sanity. Use the Globe button to access the Haestad Methods’ knowledge base and instant software updates for ClientCare subscribers, etc.

E.4.1

Instant Account Management Now you can go online to manage your own account information, such as to conveniently maintain your products, customize your communication settings, or indicate your areas of interest. Just visit the accounts section at http://www.haestad.com.

E.4.2

CivilProjects.com CivilProjects.com is a special Internet service for posting and locating Requests for Proposal (RFPs). The database is updated daily with postings from around the world, and there are extensive search capabilities that allow you to find exactly what you are looking for.

E-834


Haestad Methods

E.4.3

CivilQuiz.com CivilQuiz.com is a great way to treat yourself to some fun with a quick online engineering challenge, and maybe win a laptop or other prizes along the way. You can even submit your own questions to stump future CivilQuiz players!

E.4.4

Haestad Engineering Forums The WaterTalk™, SewerTalk™, and StormTalk™ online forums will keep you up-todate with the latest tips and tricks in hydraulic and hydrologic modeling. Post your engineering questions and share your unique modeling experiences with a global audience of thousands of professionals. For more information, visit http:// www.haestad.com and click the links to use the forums.


E-835

Internet Resources

E-836


Appendix

F

Glossary

Age:

An analysis for the age of water determines how long the water has been in the system, and is a general water quality indicator.

Available Fire Flow:

Amount of flow available at a node for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.

Base Elevation & Level:

Elevation from which all tank levels are measured. For example, a tank level of two meters represents a water surface elevation two meters above the base elevation.

Boundary Node:

Node with a known hydraulic grade. It may be static (unchanging with time), such as a reservoir, or dynamic (changes with time), such as a tank. Every pipe network must contain at least one boundary node. In order to compute the hydraulic grade at the other nodes in the network, they must be reachable from a boundary.

Bulk Reaction Coefficient: Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time. It is expressed in units of 1/ time, for first-order reactions. Calc. Min. System Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the system during fire flow withdrawal at a node. Calc. Min. Zone Pressure: Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs. Calc. Residual Pressure:

Calculated pressure at the junction node where the fire flow withdrawal occurs.

Calculation Unready:

An element that does not have all the required information for performing an analysis is considered to be calculation unready.

C-Coefficient:

Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen-Williams Equation.


F-837

F-838

Check Valve:

Prevents water from flowing backwards through the pipe. In other words, water can only flow from the From Node to the To Node.

Closed/Inactive Status:

You can control the status of a valve to be either inactive or closed. Inactive means that the valve will act like an open pipe where flow can occur in either direction, and the headloss across the valve will be calculated using the valve’s minor loss factor. Closed means that no flow will occur through the valve.

Constituent:

Any substance, such as chlorine or fluoride, for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient.

Context Menu:

A shortcut menu opened by right-clicking a project element or data entry field. Commands on the context menu are specific to the current state of the selected item.

Control Status:

A pressure pipe can be either Open or Closed. Open means that flow occurs in the pipe, and Closed means that no flow occurs in the pipe.

Conveyance Element:

A pipe or channel used to transport water.

Coordinates:

Distances perpendicular to a set of reference axes. Some areas may have predefined coordinate systems, while other coordinate systems may be arbitrary. Coordinates may be presented as X and Y values or may be defined as Northing and Easting values, depending on individual preferences.

Cross Section Type:

Tanks can have either a constant area cross section or a variable area cross section. The cross section of a tank with a constant area is the same throughout the depth. The cross section of a tank with a variable area varies throughout the depth.

Crosshair:

The cursor that looks like a plus sign (+).

Current Storage Volume:

The volume of water currently stored in a tank. It includes both the hydraulically active volume and the hydraulically inactive volume.

CV:

Check valve

Database Connections:

A connection represented by a group of database links. There may be a single linked external file within a connection, or there may be several external file links within a single connection.

Dataset:

A dataset is a WaterCAD project.


Glossary DBMS:

An acronym that stands for Database Management System. These systems can be relational (RDBMS) or non-relational.

DEM:

Digital elevation model

Demand:

Represents the total demand from an individual junction for the current time period. It is based on the information from the Demand tab of the Junction Editor.

Design Point:

Point at which a pump was originally intended to operate, and is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.

Diameter:

Refers to a pipe or valve’s inside diameter. It is the distance between two internal points directly opposite each other.

Discharge:

Volumetric rate of flow given in units of length3/time.

DLG:

Digital line graph

Double-Click:

To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.

Drag:

To hold down one of the mouse buttons while you move the mouse.

Element:

An object such as a tank, junction node, or pipe in a drawing.

Elevation:

The distance from a datum plane to the center of the element. Elevations are often referenced with mean sea level as the datum elevation.

Energy Grade Line (EGL): Sum of datum (base elevation), elevation, velocity head, and pressure head at a section. EPS:

Extended Period Simulation

Extended Edit Button:

A small button with an ellipsis (…) as the label. Extended edit buttons are located next to drop-down choice lists, and provide further editing for the associated choice list items.

External Files:

Any file outside of this program that can be linked. These include database files (such as FoxPro, Dbase or Paradox) and spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus). Throughout the documentation, all of these file types will be referred to as databases or external files interchangeably.


F-839

Extrapolate:

To infer a value based on other known values, with the desired value lying outside the known range. Often based upon extending the slope of the line connecting the previous known values to the desired point. See also: interpolate.

Feature Class:

1. A classification describing the format of geographic features and supporting data in a coverage. Coverage feature classes for representing geographic features include point, arc, node, route-system, route, section, polygon and region. One or more coverage features are used to model geographic features; for example, arcs and nodes can be used to model linear features such as street centerlines. The tic, annotation, link, and boundary feature classes provide supporting data for coverage data management and viewing. 2. The conceptual representation of a geographic feature. When referring to geographic features, feature classes include point, line, area, and surface.

F-840

Feature Dataset:

A feature dataset is a collection of feature classes that share the same spatial reference.

Field Links:

Define the actual mapping between model element attributes and columns within each database table.

File Extension:

The period and three characters, typically, at the end of a filename. A file extension usually identifies the kind of information the file contains. For example, files you create in AutoCAD have the extension *.DWG.

Fire Flow Upper Limit:

The maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical limit that will prevent this program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures. Remember that a system’s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location.

Flow:

Represents the calculated value of the pipe, valve, or pump discharge at the given time.

From Node:

Represents the pipe’s starting node. Positive flow rates are in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction.

From Pipe:

The pipe that connects to the upstream side of a valve or pump.


Glossary GA:

Genetic algorithm

Generations:

The maximum value for genetic algorithm generations is determined by the Maximum Era Number and Era Generation Number you set in the GA Parameters. The actual number of generations that get calculated depend on the Stopping Criteria you set.

Geodatabase:

Short for geographic database, a geodatabase stores spatial and descriptive data in an efficient manner. Geodatabases are the standard file format for ArcGIS v8 and later.

Headloss:

Represents the energy lost due to friction and minor losses. The headloss field displays the pipe, valve, or pump’s total headloss at the given time.

Headloss Gradient:

Presents the headloss in the pipe as a slope, or gradient. This allows you to more accurately compare headlosses for pipes of different lengths.

Hydraulic Grade:

Elevation to which water would rise under zero pressure. For open surfaces, such as reservoirs and tanks, this is equal to the water surface elevation. The hydraulic grade field presents the hydraulic grade for the element at the current time period as calculated based on the system flow rates and head changes.

Hydraulic Grade Setting:

The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in units of head (Length). Depending on the type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or downstream hydraulic grade or the headloss across the valve.

Inactive Volume:

The volume of water below the minimum elevation of the tank. This volume of water is always present, even when the tank reaches its minimum elevation and closes itself off from the system. Therefore, it is hydraulically inactive. It is primarily used for water quality calculations.

Inflow & Outflow:

An inflow is a flow into a node from the system, while an outflow is a flow from the node into the system. A negative outflow is the same as a positive inflow, and a negative inflow is the same as a positive outflow.

Inheritance:

Refers to the parent-child relationships used by scenarios and alternatives. Just as in the natural world, inheritance is used to refer to the situation where an entity receives something from its parent. For example, we speak of a child inheriting blue eyes from a parent. Unlike in the


F-841

natural world, inheritance in scenarios and alternatives is dynamic. If the parent’s attribute changes, the child’s attribute automatically changes at the same time, unless the value is explicitly changed in a child. Initial Settings:

Sets the status of an element for a steady-state analysis or the first time step in an extended period simulation. The initial settings for a pipe, pump, or valve can be set using the elemental dialog boxes or a table.

Initial Water Quality:

Represents the starting conditions at a node for age, trace, or constituent concentration. The initial value will be slightly different depending on the analysis type.

Interpolate:

Estimating a value between two known values assuming a linear relationship. See also: extrapolate.

Invert:

Lowest point of a pipe opening. Sometimes referred to as the flow line.

Label:

The unique name by which an element will be referenced in reports, error messages, and tables.

Length:

Represents the distance on a pipe from the From Node to the To Node, according to the scaled length of the pipe. To enter an overriding length, click the User Defined Length field and type in your desired length value.

LIDAR:

Light Detection and Ranging

Manning’s Coefficient:

Roughness coefficient used in Manning’s Formula.

Material:

The selection of a pipe’s construction material. This material will be used to determine a default value for the pipe’s roughness.

Maximum Elevation:

The highest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If the tank fills above this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Max. Extended Operating Point:The absolute maximum discharge at which a pump can operate, with zero head being added to the system. This value may be computed by the program or entered manually. Maximum Operating Point: The highest discharge for which a pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly. Messages:

F-842

The section that contains information generated during the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors, and status updates.


Glossary Messages Light:

A light that appears on the Tab of the Messages sheet. The light will be red if errors occurred during the analysis, yellow if there are warnings or cautions, and green if there are no warnings or errors.

Metadata:

Additional information (aside from tabular and spatial data) that makes the data useful. Includes characteristics and information that are required to use the data but are not contained within the data itself.

Minimum Elevation:

The lowest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If the tank drains below this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Minimum System Junction: The junction where the calculated minimum system pressure occurs. Minimum System Pressure: The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal. If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint. Minimum Zone Junction:

The junction where the calculated minimum zone pressure occurs.

Minimum Zone Pressure:

The minimum pressure to maintain at all junction nodes within a Zone. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be specified in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another Zone.

Minor Loss:

The field that presents the total minor loss K value for a pipe or valve. If an element has more than one minor loss, each can be entered individually by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button.

Modeler/Stand-Alone:

The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the AutoCAD one.

Mouse Buttons:

The left mouse button is the primary button for selecting or activating commands. The right mouse button is used to activate shortcut context menus and help. Note that the mouse button functions can be redefined using the Windows Control Panel. If your mouse is equipped with a mouse wheel, you can use it for various panning and zooming functions.


F-843

F-844

Needed Fire Flow:

The flow rate required at a junction to satisfy fire flow demands.

Network Element:

An element that forms part of the network model. Annotation elements, such as polylines, borders, and text, are not network elements.

Number:

The number of parallel conveyance elements in a model.

Notes:

The field that allows you to enter text relevant to the model. It may include a description of an element, a summary of your data sources, or any other information of interest.

ODBC:

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational database management systems (DBMS).

On/Off Status:

The status of a pump can be either on or off. On means that flow will occur in the downstream direction, and the pump will add head to the system according to it’s characteristic curve. Off means that no flow will occur, and no head will be added.

Open/Closed Status:

The status of a pipe can be either open or closed. Open means that flow can occur in either direction. Closed means that no flow will occur through the pipe.

PBV:

Pressure breaker valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B726)

Percent Full:

The ratio of the current storage volume to the total storage volume, multiplied by 100.

Pipe Status:

Indicates whether the pipe is open or closed. As input, this determines how the pipe begins the simulation. As output, it shows the calculated status of the pipe at the given time.

Polyline:

A composite element that consists of a series of line segments. Each line segment begins and ends at a vertex. A vertex may be another element such as a junction, tank, or pump.

Power:

Represents the water horsepower of a pump. This is the horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump into the water. Depending on the pump’s efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.

Pressure:

The field that displays the pressure for the current time period.


Glossary Pressure Setting:

The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in units of pressure (Force per Length²). Depending on the type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or downstream pressure or the pressure drop.

PRV:

Pressure reducing valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B726)

PSV:

Pressure sustaining valves (see “Valve Theory” on page B-726)

Menu:

A menu of available commands or actions you can perform. Access menus from the menu bar at the top of the main program window.

Pump Status:

A pump can have two different status conditions: On, which is normal operation, or Off, which is no flow under any condition.

RDBMS:

An acronym that stands for Relational Database Management System.

Relate:

A temporary connection between table records using a common item shared by both tables. Each record in one table is connected to those records in the other table that share the same value for the common item.

Relational Database:

A database in which the data is structured in such a way as to associate tables according to attributes that are shared by the tables.

Relational Join:

The process of merging two attribute tables using a common item.

Relative Speed Factor:

Defines the characteristics of a pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 would indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve.

Residual Pressure:

The minimum residual pressure to occur at a junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at a junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

Reynolds Number:

Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces. A high Reynold’s number indicates turbulent flow, while a low number indicates laminar flow.

Roughness:

A measure of a pipe’s resistance to flow. Pipes of different ages, construction material, and workmanship may have different roughness values.


F-845

F-846

Roughness Coefficient:

A value used to represent the resistance of a conveyance element to flow. In the Manning’s equation, this value is inversely proportional to flow. The smaller the roughness coefficient, the greater the flow.

Satisfies Fire Flow:

A true or false statement indicating whether this junction node meets the fire flow constraints. A check mark in the box means the Fire Flow Constraints were satisfied for that node. If there is no check mark, the Fire Flow Constraints were NOT satisfied.

Schema:

A diagrammatic representation; an outline or model. Essentially, a schema represents the number of tables, the columns they contain, the data types of the columns, and any relationships between the tables.

Select:

The process of adding one or more elements to an active selection set.

Selection Set:

The active group of selected elements. A selection set allows editing or an action, such as move or delete, to be performed on a group of elements.

Shape:

The cross-sectional geometric form of a conveyance element (i.e., circular, box, arch, etc.).

Shapefile:

A file format that stores spatial and attribute data for the spatial features within the dataset. A shapefile consists of a main file, an index file, and a dBASE table. Shapefiles were the standard file storage format for ArcView 3.x and earlier.

Shutoff Point:

The point at which a pump will have zero discharge. Typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.

Size:

Inside diameter of a pipe section for a circular pipe.

Spatial Reference:

The spatial reference for a feature class describes its coordinate system (for example, geographic, UTM, and State Plane), its spatial domain, and its precision. The spatial domain is best described as the allowable coordinate range for x, y coordinates, m- (measure) values, and z-values. The precision describes the number of system units per one unit of measure. A spatial reference with a precision of 1 will store integer values, while a precision of 1000 will store three decimal places.

Stand-Alone/Modeler:

The Haestad Methods software environment, and not the AutoCAD one.

Starting Elevation:

The value that is used as the beginning condition for an extended period simulation.


Glossary Status Pane:

The area at the bottom of the window used for displaying status information.

Storage Node:

Special type of node where a free water surface exists, and the hydraulic head is the elevation of the water surface above sea level.

Table Links:

A table link must be created for every database table or spreadsheet worksheet that is to be linked to the current model. Any number of Table Links may reference the same database file.

TCV:

Throttle control valve (see “Valve Theory” on page B726)

To Node:

Represents a pipe’s ending node. Positive flow rates are in the direction of from towards to. Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction.

To Pipe:

The pipe that connects to the downstream side of a valve or pump.

Total Active Volume:

The volume of water between minimum elevation and maximum elevation of a tank. This is an input value for variable area tanks.

Total Storage Volume:

The holding capacity of a tank. It is the sum of the maximum hydraulically active storage volume and the hydraulically inactive storage volume.

Total Needed Fire Flow:

If you choose to add the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow plus the baseline demand. If you choose not to add the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow.

Trace (Source Ident.):

Determines what percentage of water at any given point originated at a chosen tank, reservoir, or junction.

Trials:

The maximum value for genetic algorithm trials is determined by what you set for Stopping Criteria. Note that you can set a number larger than (Maximum Era Number)*(Era Generation Number)*(Population Size), but calculations beyond that number (for this example, the value is 45,000) are less likely to produce significant improvements in optimization.

Valve Status:

A valve can have several different status conditions: Closed (no flow under any condition), Active (throttling, opening, or closing dependent on system pressures and flows), and Inactive (wide open, with no regulation).


F-847

Velocity:

The field that displays the calculated value for a pipe, valve, or pump velocity at a given time. It is found by dividing the element’s flow rate by its cross-sectional area.

Vertex:

An element in a topological network.

Wall Reaction Coefficient: Defines the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe, and is expressed in units of length/time.

F-848

WaterCAD Datastore:

The relational database that WaterCAD uses to store model data. Each WaterCAD project uses two main files for data storage, the datastore (.MDB) and the WaterCAD specific data (.WCD).

WaterObjects:

The object model used by WaterCAD, which allows for the extension and customization of the core software functions.

Water Quality:

The field that displays the water quality for the current time period.

Water Quality Analysis:

An analysis that can be one of three types: Age, Trace, or Constituent.


Appendix

G

References

Benedict, R. P., Fundamentals of Pipe Flow, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1980. Brater, Ernest F. and Horace W. King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1976. Cesario, A. Lee, Modeling, Analysis, and Design of Water Distribution Systems, AWWA, 1995. Clark, R. M., W. M. Grayman, R. M. Males, and A. F. Hess, “Modeling Contaminant propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1993. Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, Fifth Edition, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 2002. CulvertMaster User’s Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 2000. Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1998. FlowMaster PE Version 6.1 User’s Guide, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 2000. Males R. M., W. M. Grayman and R. M. Clark, “Modeling Water Quality in Distribution System,” Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New York, 1988. Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1997. Roberson, John A., John J. Cassidy, and Hanif M. Chaudhry, Hydraulic Engineering, Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1988. Roberson, John A. and Clayton T. Crowe, Engineering Fluid Mechanics 4th Edition, Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1990.


G-849

Rossman, Lewis A., EPANet User’s Manual (AWWA Workshop Edition), Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Ohio, 1993. Rossman, Lewis A. et al., “Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distribution Systems: A Comparison,” Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New York, 1996. Rossman, Lewis A., R. M. Clark, and W. M. Grayman, “Modeling Chlorine Residuals in Drinking-water Distribution Systems,” Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1994. Sanks, Robert L., Pumping Station Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, Inc., Stoneham, Massachusetts, 1989. Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1985. Todini, E. and S. Pilati, “A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,” Computer Applications in Water Supply, Volume 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation, ed. Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press Ltd., Letchworth, Hertfordshire, England. Walski, Thomas M., Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET, Waterbury, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 1993. Zipparro, Vincent J. and Hasen Hans, Davis’ Handbook of Applied Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1993.

G-850


Index Symbols .BAK 506 .MDB 506 .PDF 28

A abbreviated labels 341 accuracy 392 action rehabilitation 479 actions tab 404 active scenario 81 active scenarios 798 active topology 353, 354, 419 active topology alternative 353 address See contacting Haestad Methods. 45 adjustments demand 431 advanced options 316 advective transport in pipes 733 aerial view 266, 267 affinity laws 724 age 837 alternative 358 analysis 389 alternative 348, 349 alternatives 116, 345, 346, 372, 787, 788 child 346 editor 349, 365 inheritance 789, 790 manager 347 merge 346 analysis constituent 390 fire flow 385, 386 hydraulic 377, 378, 379, 714, 715 options 380


toolbar 81 trace 391 water age 389 water quality 389, 390, 391 analysis results report 70, 516 animation options 82, 530, 666 annotation 139, 140, 141, 509, 510 comparison wizard 555 multipliers 247 size 700 annotation wizard 510 apply minor losses 647 assigning costs to model elements 815 attribute annotation 510 inheritance 790 auto prompting 244 AutoCAD 607 command line 57 commands 615 drawing synchronization 610 DXF 605, 606 element scale 613 entities 615 exporting DXF file 605 importing DXF files 606 importing WaterCAD 619 importing WaterCAD DXF files 605 multiple sessions 240 proxies 619 rebuild figure labels 610 undo/redo 617 AutoCAD mode 48, 607 graphical layout 608 project files 610 toolbars 609 Autodesk 607 automated skeletonization 621 auto-refresh 85

Index-851

B

B backflow preventer 384 background drawing 605 background DXF (AutoCAD) 605 background layer 52 base 422 base alternative 346, 349 base elevation 837 base scenarios 364, 366 batch run 364, 368, 640 bends adding to a pipe 703 in AutoCAD 614 Bernoulli equation 716 bibliography 849 blocks (AutoCAD mode) 599, 605 borders 558 boundary conditions 490 boundary node 837 brake power 766 branch collapsing See Skelebrator. 624 branch trimming 624, 627, 644 break repair cost Darwin Designer 756 building cost scenarios 810 bulk flow reactions 735 bulk reaction 568 coefficient 837 buttons online help topic navigation 77

C C coefficient 729, 838 calculation 373, 374, 391 options 391 problem summary report 518 results status 84 unready 837 calibration 381, 421 calibration adjustment groups dialog 438 calibration export to scenario dialog 427 calibration field data observation dialog 433 calibration field data set dialog 430 calibration field data sets dialog 432 calibration group selection dialog 261

Index-852

calibration groups 438 calibration manager 421 calibration options 440, 441 calibration options formulae 444 calibration results statistics 429 calibration solutions 426 calibrations 426 capital 797, 799 cost 447 cost manager 448, 449 cost warnings report 464 unit cost function 457 capital cost alternative 363 capital cost estimating overview 797 capital cost reports 461 certification 833 change pipe width 614 characteristic curve pump 724 pumps 723, 724 check data 382 check valve 726, 838 chemical analysis 390 Chezy’s equation 728, 731 child 348, 349, 422, 790 alternative 346 scenario 364, 791 Cholesky 722 CivilProjects.com 834 CivilQuiz.com 835 ClientCare 44 clipboard copy table 344 copy to 83 coefficient 846 roughness 846 coefficients engineer’s reference 743 Colebrook-White equation 728 typical values 744 collapsing branch See Skelebrator. 624 color coding 128, 141, 142, 513, 514, 558, 700 column allow duplicate 335 change units 699 heading 341 table customization 340


C command line (AutoCAD Only) 57 commands (AutoCAD mode) 615 common user access 243 compare scenarios 556 composite logical action dialog 415 composite logical condition dialog 411 composite minor loss 284 concentration 390 concentration limit 568 conditions tab 403 configuration 242 conjugate gradient method 722 connection 571, 572, 573 database 578 editing 577 hiding 584 management 574 shapefile 588 sharing 584 synchronization 610, 611 connectivity tolerance 602 conservation of mass & energy 717 consider pressure benefit 489 constant horsepower pump 725 constant power pump 290, 725 constituent 568, 838 alternative 358, 360 analysis 390 baseline load 354, 358 library 568 pattern 359 source 358, 372 constituents reactions 735 construction costs 315 construction costs table 315 contacting Haestad Methods e-mail 45 fax 45 hours 44 mail 45 sales 44 technical support 44 telephone 45 context menu 838 contour 547, 548, 549 plan view 519 smoothing 549


contour labeling 550 control 305, 306 status 838 valve 726 controls tab 402 copy to clipboard 83 Darwin Designer 499 table 344 cost 447, 448, 765, 768, 769, 797, 798, 799, 800 alternative 363 analysis 447, 448 design 500 manager 448 new pipe 475 rehabilitation 475, 500 total 500 unit cost function 457 cost adjustments 798 cost alternatives 798 cost function 819 cost manager 798 button section 449 center pane 450 left pane 450 cost reports 798 cost tab 313 cost warnings report 464 cost-benefit trade-off 753 costs globally editing 800 new pipe 475 creating a new logical control 399 creating scenarios 695 crosshair location 84 CUA 243 CulvertMaster 832 cursor location 84 curve pump 290, 291, 293, 723, 724, 725 curved pipes 703 custom AutoCAD entities 615 custom extended pump 725 custom sort 338 customize database 574, 575 drawing 246, 247, 248, 609 labels 341

Index-853

D libraries 563 tables 340 cut probability 443

D daily energy cost summary section 321 Darcy Weisbach Colebrook-White equation 728 equation 729, 730 roughness values 744 Darwin 421 Darwin calibration 424 Darwin Calibrator 421 Darwin Calibrator methodology 748 Darwin Calibrator troubleshooting tips 696 Darwin Designer 465 cost-benefit trade-off 753 graphing 499 how to 465 least cost 753 maximum benefit 753 report 499 Darwin Designer genetic algorithm 753 Darwin Designer methodology 753 Darwin Designer theory 753 Darwin manager 421 data check 382 entry 87, 322, 790, 791 organization 345 validation 382 data scrubbing 624, 626 database 571, 572, 573 export 575, 576, 577 import 575, 576, 577 ODBC 581, 582, 583 synchronization options 579 table link editor 579 database connection 571, 578 editor 577 example 585 manager 574 ODBC 583 standard 575, 576, 577 dead-end pipes 624 decay second order 736

Index-854

simple first order 736 default 322 delete elements 262, 613 table 332 delete selection set 264 demand 300 alternative 354, 355 graph 521 multipliers 396 demand adjustments 431 demand import dialog box 302 demand multiplier 487 design costs 474 design event 469 adding 471 design event editor 484 design event name 470 design events 493 design group 471 adding 472 editing 472 name 472 design groups 494, 500 design option group 471 design point 290, 725 design run 492 computing 498 design studies 465 design study 466 design type tab 483 design variables Darwin Designer 754 designer data verification summary 507 detailed report 516 diffusivity 568 dimensionless benefit 484 discharge 384, 839 dispersion 733 display precision 253 display tips 699 change units in a column 699 color code elements 700 control element/label sizing 700 dissolved substance in pipes 733 dominant pipe criteria 645, 649 downstream elements selection 276 drafting 262, 557 drag 839


E drawing 261 options 241, 242, 246 pane 50, 51 preview 604 review 267, 268, 269, 600 scale 246, 247 setup (AutoCAD mode) 609 synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 610 DWG 237, 610 DXF 605 exporting from WaterCAD 605 import 605, 606 properties 53 dynamic inheritance 788, 789

E edit elements 614 editable 362 editable table columns 336, 337 editing elements 261, 701 efficiency pump 766 efficiency settings section 320 efficiency summary section 322 EGL 717 element 275, 276, 613 annotation 509 deleting 262, 613 editing 61, 62, 276, 613 find 265 labeling 272, 701 modify 613 morphing 258 moving 262, 616 numbering 270, 701 scale (AutoCAD mode) 61, 613 search 265 selection 259, 260, 263, 271 type 258 visibility 248 element detailed cost report 462 element properties 612 element selector Darwin Designer 501 elevation 837, 839, 843 base 837 input mode 245


maximum 843 minimum 353 spot 551 e-mail 45 e-mail address 45 energy 765, 767, 768, 769 conservation 717, 718 equation 716 grade line 717, 839 pricing 364 principle 715 energy cost alternative 363, 364 energy cost manager 452 energy cost theory 765 energy pricing editor 456 energy pricing manager 455 energy tab 319 engineering forums 835 engineering library 563, 565 constituent 568 editor 565 liquid 567 manager 564 material 565, 566 minor loss 566, 567 enhanced pressure contours 550 enter key behavior 242, 243 entering data for multiple elements 800 entering fire flow test results 434 entities change into pipe 618 in AutoCAD 615 to pipes 618 entity conversion 618 EPANET import 681 EPS 378 analysis 378, 379 equally distributed 628, 646 equations 713 equivalent pipe method 645, 649 era generations number 442 error messages 382 results report 374 error.log 44 ESRI 571, 572, 596 export shapefile 593 import shapefile 589 shapefile connection 588

Index-855

F estimate 840, 843 example projects 43 lessons 87 tutorials 42 exclamation point in circle 202 existing loads 628 exit WaterCAD 60 explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 616 export 59, 60 database 574, 575, 576, 577 DXF 605 profiles in AutoCAD 554 shapefile 593, 594, 595 shapefile link editor 594 spot elevations 682 table to ASCII 344 export to scenario 499, 505 exporting a submodel 241 extended edit button 840 extended period analysis 378 lesson 2 107 external files 840 extrapolate 840

F F1 28 factor relative speed 291 favorites 75 fax 45 field links 581, 840 share 327 field data import 435 file format update 506 file management 237 filter tables 339 find element 265 find logical action dialog 417 find logical condition dialog 417 find logical control dialog 416 fire flow 311, 312, 434 alternative 360, 361, 362 analysis 385, 386 input 312, 313 results 313, 386 theory 385

Index-856

fire flow dialog 389 fire flow upper limit 843 fire hydrants 688 fire hydrants as flow emitters 691 first order saturation growth 736 simple decay 736 fitness 426, 500 fitness tolerance 424 fitness type 440, 441 fitting loss coefficients 732, 747 fittings library 566 FlexTables 329, 802 FlexUnits 252, 253 table 254 flow 843 arrow visibility 248 flow constraints 489, 501 flow control valve 726 flow emitters 384, 691 flow per fitness point 440 FlowMaster 832 format 253 user data 324, 325 formulas 743 forums 835 friction method theory 244 from node 843 from pipe 843 function editor Darwin Designer 483 function manager Darwin Designer 481

G GA 421, 751, 752, 762, 763 Gaussian elimination method 723 general purpose valve 352, 357 general status information 84 general tab 568 genetic algorithm Darwin Designer 753 genetic algorithms 421, 752, 762, 763, 764 calibration tips 428 methodology 748 optimized calibration 423, 752 optimized calibration advanced options 442


H global edit 337 global options 242, 243, 244 global settings 237 globe button 37 glossary 42 GO button 383 GPV 352, 357 grade line energy 717 hydraulic 717 gradient algorithm 719 derivation 719 graph dialog box Darwin Designer 503 graph setup 522 graphic annotation 66, 557 graphical editor 255 graphical layout AutoCAD 608 Stand-Alone 255 graphically 261 groundwater well 684 group name rehabilitation 474 grouping elements 259 selection sets 263

H Haestad forums 835 Haestad Methods 37 about us 829 accreditations 834 certification 833 continuing education 833 e-mail addresses 45 publications 833 software 829 training 833 Web site 45 Haestad Methods Knowledge Base 696 Haestad Press 833 Haestad.log 44 Hazen-Williams equation 729 coefficients 746 roughness values 745 head 384 head per fitness point 440


head-discharge points 299 headloss 843 coefficient 567 headloss gradient 843 help 87 button 70 menu 70, 71 tutorial 42 tutorials 42 See also online help. HGL 717, 843 input mode 245 HGL setting 843 hide button 72 hide results 499 horse power (pump) 290 how to use Darwin Designer 465 hydrants 688 hydrants as flow emitters 691 hydraulic analysis 378 hydraulic equivalency 629 hydraulic grade 843 hydraulic grade line 717 hydraulic grade setting 843 hydraulically close tanks 687 hydropneumatic tank 684

I impeller 724 Import WaterCAD 619 import 59 command 239 Cybernet 674, 675, 676, 677, 679, 680 database 575 database and shapefile data created in v3 682 DXF files into AutoCAD 605, 606 EPANET 681 KYPIPE 681 polyline to pipe 58 shapefile link editor 591 spot elevations 682 submodels 59 WaterCAD 59, 60, 619 import/export tips 674 importing demands 301

Index-857

J importing patterns 396 inactive elements 340 inactive pipes 507 inactive volume 843 importing from EPANET 681 include active topology 340 include in cost calculation 314 independent papers 833 index 73 inflow 843 inheritance 788, 789, 843 dynamic 789 overriding 789 initial settings 843 alternative 355 initial water quality 843 input 261 data 275 modes 245 quick view 273 insert elements 258 nodes 258 installation guide for network license versions 40 installation problems 35 installing Haestad Methods products 35 intermediate node removal 625 interpolate 843 inventory 517 invert 843

J junction condition editor 652

K K coefficients 566, 747 kinematic viscosity 567 knowledge base 696 KYPIPE 681 KYPIPE import 681

L label 843

Index-858

abbreviate 341 elements 272, 701 rebuilding (AutoCAD mode) 610 sizing 700 visibility 248 Lagrangian transport algorithm 739 laws affinity 724 conservation of mass and energy 717 layer 248, 604, 612 layout 89, 90, 91, 92 AutoCAD 608 network 256 pipe using entity 618 least cost 753 legend 67, 557, 558 quick view 273 length 843 level 837 mode 245 Levenberg-Marquardt method 726 library constituent 568 editor 565 engineering 563, 565 liquid 567 manager 564 material 565 minor loss 566 licenses 36, 37 light 843 messages 843 line 557 linear system equation solver 722 linear theory method 719 link color coding 513, 700 liquid 245 library 567, 568 load boundary conditions 491 load distribution strategy 644, 646 local units 342 local units 342 log files 44 logical 306 logical control 305, 306, 307 dialog box 405 manager 401 set alternative 357


M set editor 419 sets dialog 418 logical control: See operational controls alternative. logical controls operation 401 overview 397 loop retaining sensitivity 643 loop-based algorithms 719 losses friction 244, 613, 721, 729 minor 723, 727, 732

M mail 45 manager 349 Manning’s coefficient 843 Manning’s equation 731 roughness values 743 typical values 746 manual calibration 425 manual fire flow scenarios 387 manual fire flow scenarios dialog 388 manual selection 494, 497 manual skeletonization 632, 639 mass conservation 717 material 843 library 565 material editor Darwin Designer 478 maximize benefit 484 maximum era number 442 extended operating point 290, 843 increment 423 number of removal levels 648 number of trimming levels 644 operating point 290, 843 trials 424 maximum benefit 753 maximum trials 497 memory 683 menu 55, 57, 66 context 838 shortcut keys 56 toolbars 55, 56 merge 240, 241, 348, 349


alternatives 347, 348 merge alternatives 346 submodel 240 merging pipes by 647 merging pipes of the same diameter 647 messages 317, 843 light 843 metric 253 microstation 605 minimize cost 484 minimum allowed value 254 increment 423 system junction 843 system pressure 837 system requirements 33, 34 zone pressure 837 minor loss element 350, 352 minor loss strategy 649 minor losses 723, 727, 732 fitting 747 properties 566 mix units in a tabular report 342 mode AutoCAD 48 input 245 scaled 246, 247 schematic 246, 247 Stand-Alone 48 Stand-Alone/AutoCAD 48 model 275, 276, 377 modeler definition 843 modeling fire hydrants as flow emitters 691 modeling tips 683, 693 modeling variable speed pumps 693 morphing elements 258 motor pump 765, 766, 771 mouse tips 701 move elements 262, 616 labels 616 moving element labels and annotation 273 multi segmented polyline 702 multi-objective trade-off 484 multiple pump curve 725, 726 units 342, 343

Index-859

N multiple point pump 725 multiple sessions 240 multipliers 247 mutation probability 442

N native AutoCAD entities converting 599, 618 network deployment folder 41 network hydraulics theory 714 network license 39 network licensing 37 network walking algorithm 632 new base 422 new calibration 422, 423 new child 422 new logical action dialog 413 new logical condition dialog 406 new multiple design groups 471 new pipe cost 475 Darwin Designer 755 new pipe costs 475 See also design option groups nodal demand vector 720 node 837, 843 boundary 837 color coding 513, 700 from 843 node costs 818 non-construction costs 823, 824 non-continuable protection violation 683 non-convergence 378 non-improvement generations 424, 497 northing/easting mode 245 notation scientific 253 number of digits after decimal point 252 Reynolds 845

O objective type 483 ODBC 581 online book 28 See also .PDF. online forums 835

Index-860

online help 70 favorites tab 75 index tab 73 navigation buttons 77 previous/next buttons 77 related topics 73, 76 search tab 74 showing contents 72 topics 76 using 72 open database connectivity 581 operating point 292 operating range section 303 operational alternative 357 operational controls alternative 357 optimized calibration 424 options 83 calculation 391 design run 497 drawing 246 global 242 graph 560, 561 project 244 options groups tab 474 organize data 345 orphaning of pipes 626 out of memory 683 outflow 843 output 509 quickview 273 tables 329 override defaults 488, 490 override scenario demand alternative 487 overview 421, 452

P parallel pipes 685 modeling 685 removal 630, 648 parallel pumps 686 parent 349 parent alternative 347, 348 parent scenario 364, 367, 370 Pareto optimal defined 504 pareto plot 503 pattern 393 demand 395, 396


P demand multipliers 395 extended period analysis 379, 396 pattern editor 395 pattern graph 521 time steps 395 peak demand summary section 321 physical alternative 350 physical alternative editor for GPVs 352 physical properties 350 pipe 277, 843 adding vertices 703 advective transport 733 align text with pipe 248 condition editor 651 diameter 647 dissolved substance 733 fittings 566 from 843 layout using entity 618 length 843 length rounding 244, 246 material 843 merging 625 merging same diameters 647 parallel 685 splitting 258 text 248 tool 67, 257 pipe cost adding 476 editing 476 pipe costs 816 report 464 pipe count design group 472 rehabilitation 474 pipe option group 477 adding 478 pipe size usage plot 503 plan view reports 518 plot Darwin Designer 499 polyline conversion problem 604 polyline to pipe conversion 599 wizard 601 population size 442 power 291, 293 brake 766


water 765 precision display 253, 254 predefined reports 515 preserve network integrity 642 pressure head 716, 717 mode 245 pressure benefit coefficient 484 exponent 484 pressure benefits Darwin Designer 756 pressure breaker valve 726 pressure constraints 487, 501 pressure sustaining valve 726 pressurized tank 684 preview 559 skeletonization 637 print 58, 60, 83 preview 83 preview window 559 setup 58 table 344 problem solving 673 problems with setup or uninstall 35 profile 70, 552 plot 553 setup 553 project example 43 files 237, 238, 239, 610 options 241, 244 settings 237 summary 58, 242 title 241, 242 project detailed cost report 463 project element summary cost report 463 project summary cost report 463 proportional to coalesced pipe attributes 628 proportional to dominant criteria 646 proportional to existing load 646 protected elements manager 641 prototype 322, 800 prototypes 275 proxies 619 pump 279, 280, 686 affinity laws 723 constant horsepower 725 curve 290, 293, 723, 724, 725, 726

Index-861

Q custom extended 725 definition 290 efficiency 294, 766 groundwater well 684 head definition 291 impeller 724 importing from EPANET 681 initial condition 291 initial settings 355 motor 765, 766, 771 multiple point 725 operating point 292, 723, 724, 725 parallel 686 power 290 series 686 static head 724 static lift 723 theory 723 three point 725, 771 type 725 variable speed 724 pump curve 291 pump efficiency section 320 pump station costs 821 pumps 723

Q quick attribute selector 56 quick edit window 64 quick selection set dialog 420

R random seed 442 reaction rates tab 569 reactions bulk flow 735 read-only 362 rebuild figure labels 610 recent files 58 red circle 202 redefine WaterCAD blocks 605 redo 61, 62, 617 reference engineer’s 743

Index-862

references 849 references and textbooks 833 refresh 85 registering network programs 38 registration 36, 37, 70 regulating valves 727 rehab groups 496, 500 rehabilitation action 479 rehabilitation benefits Darwin Designer 757 rehabilitation cost 475 adding 478 editing 478 rehabilitation group 473 adding 472 editing 472 rehabilitation option group defining 478 rehabilitation pipe cost Darwin Designer 755 relabel elements 270 relabel operations 270 related topics 73 defined 76 relative speed factor 291, 845 remove columns 334 elements 262 Haestad Methods products 35 remove orphaned nodes 643 removing color coding from labels imported from pre-v3.5 files 701 repaint 85 report Darwin Designer 499 reports 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 509 analysis results 516 detailed 515, 516 menu 70 plan view 518 predefined 515 project inventory 517 scenario 517 tabular 517 representative scenario 469 reservoirs 279 residual pressure 845 resize to fit 499 results 509


S Darwin Designer 498 getting results from Darwin Designer 498 review drawing 267 Reynolds number 845 rotate labels (AutoCAD mode) 248, 613 roughness Chezy’s equation 728 coefficient 565, 566, 743 Colebrook-White equation 728 Darcy-Weisbach equation 729 Hazen-Williams equation 729 Manning’s equation 731 roughness height 728, 730, 744 roughness values 743 Colebrook-White 744 Darcy-Weisbach 744 Hazen-Williams 745 Manning’s 743 typical 746 rounding 253 pipe length 246 RPBP valves 281 rule based 306, 307, 401 running the model 383

S sales 44 sample projects 43 saturation growth first order 736 save 58, 59, 60, 79 as 58, 59, 60 as drawing *.DWG 611 SCADA 819 scale 246 elements (AutoCAD mode) 613 scaled mode 246, 247 scenario 70, 364, 368, 555, 556, 788 alternatives 116, 117, 119, 120, 121, 124, 372 analysis toolbar 81 base 364 batch run 368 calculation 372 child 116, 117, 118, 120, 121, 788 comparison 122, 124, 555 editor 365


inheritance 788, 789, 791 lesson 3 116 management 345 results 374 selection 365 summary report 517 scenario control center 366 scenario dataset wizard 249 scenario management 63, 116, 345, 366, 367, 783 example 792 schema Darwin Designer 506 format 506 schema definition 846 schematic mode 247 scientific notation 254 scrubbing See Skelebrator. 624 search for elements 265 second order decay 736 second-order decay 736 section 303 select 66, 261 by selection set 263 element types 590 elements 61, 62, 63, 259, 260 field links 581 layer 612 text style 612 select from drawing 261 selection 261 selection set 264 dialog box 264, 439 general 263 manager 64, 263 selection set dialog 439 selection tool 66 series pipe merging See Skelebrator. 625 series pipe removal 625, 628, 645 series pumps 686 set field options 252, 507 setup 35, 242, 609 drawing options 246 problems 35 project options 244 prototypes 322

Index-863

S SewerCAD 831 SewerTalk 835 shapefile 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591 format 596 properties 53 shapefile connection 586, 587, 588, 590, 591, 592 editor 587 example 596 export example 595 export wizard 593 import example 592 import wizard 589 link wizard 588 manager 586 wizard 586 shapefile connections sharing between projects 596 share fields 327 shortcut keys 55, 56 show button 72 show results 499 shutoff point 290 simple 306 simple control dialog box 306 simple first-order decay 736 simple logical action dialog 413 simple logical condition dialog 407 simultaneous path adjustment method 719 single element selection dialog 260 size elements (AutoCAD) 613 Skelebrator 626 batch run 640 branch trimming 627, 644 conditions and tolerances 650 data scrubbing 626 junction condition editor 652 manual skeletonization 639 parallel pipes removal 630, 648 pipe condition editor 651 protected elements manager 641 recommended practices 653 series pipe removal 628, 645 skeletonization preview 637 skeletonization manager 634 skeletonization preview 631 troubleshooting 653 using 633

Index-864

what it does 632 skeletonization 621 branch trimming 624 data scrubbing 624 example 622 manager 634 network walking algorithm 632 series pipe removal 625 Skelebrator 626 techniques 623 See also Skelebrator. skeletonization preview 637 smoothing contours 549 snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 617 software registration 36 solutions 426, 427 solutions to keep 498 solutions to modeling problems 683 sort custom 338 tables 338 source tracing 391 sparse matrix 719, 722, 723 splice probability 443 splitting pipes 258 spot elevations 551, 682 stand-alone definition 846 Stand-Alone mode 48 standard database import/export 575 standard extended pump 725 static head pump 724 static lift pump 723 status 84 bar 55, 84 log 561 statuses initial settings 843 steady state analysis 378 sticky tools 244 Stieltjes 722 stopping criteria 497 storage volume 843 active 847 inactive 843 StormCAD 831 StormTalk 835


T stretch 262 submodel 240 submodel import 240 suggestions 45 support 44 addresses 45 hours 44 Swamee and Jain equation 730 symbol size multiplier 247 visibility 248 visibility (AutoCAD mode) 609 synchronize 587 database links 574 options 579 via ODBC 583 synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 610 synchronized units 342 system international 243, 253 system cost adjustments table 450 system head curve dialog 520 system operating point 723

T table 329, 335 change units 341 copy to clipboard 344 customization 340 editing 331 export to ASCII file 344 filtering 339, 340 FlexUnits 254 manager 330 mixing units 342 navigation 336 print 344 print preview 344 properties 333 setup 332 type 333 tabular 70 tabular report 329 tabular report window 519 tank 278 curve 521 hydraulically close 687


hydropneumatic 684 importing from EPANET 681 mixing model 359 pressurized 684 technical journals 833 technical support 44 text 616 style 612 text height 247 FAQ 700 multiplier 247 theory 713, 769 network hydraulics 715 valve 726 three point pump 725, 771 throttle control valve 726 time condition 307 T-intersections 602 title project 241, 242 tolerance 269 tool pane 78, 242 toolbar 56, 609 analysis 81 and shortcut keys 55 buttons 78 top feed/bottom gravity discharge tank 690 top solutions 498 topics online help 76 topology 382, 719 total active volume 847 total benefit 500 total cost 500 totalizing flow meters 519 trace alternative 360 trace alternative 360 trace analysis 391 training 833 transport algorithm 739 transport in pipes 733 trimming See Skelebrator. 624 troubleshooting Darwin Designer 507 tutorials 42, 71, 87 lessons 87 two-component second-order decay 736

Index-865

U type coercion 572

U U.S. customary units 243, 253 undo 61, 62 undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 617 uninstallation 35 problems 35 unit conversion 572 unit cost 457 data table 460 function formula 460 function manager 458 table coefficients 461 unit cost functions 798, 802, 804, 805 unit system 243, 254 unit system status 84 unitized benefit 484 units 243, 254, 507, 699 change in a column 699 local 342 synchronized 342 update file format 465, 506 updates 70 upgrades 36, 37 upstream node demand proportion 646 usage 566 use 50/50 split 649 use equivalent pipes 645, 649 use ignore minor losses 649 use skip pipe if minor loss > max 649 user data 322, 323 alternative 363 user memos 317 user-data extension, zone manager 275 user-defined ratio 628, 646 using Skelebrator 633

V validation 382 valve 281, 282, 838 characteristics 297 check 838 importing from EPANET 681 theory 726

Index-866

valves RPBP 281 variable frequency drive 317, 693, 769 variable frequency drives 765 variable speed pump 769 curve equations 724 efficiency 767 theory 769 VSP tab 317 See also VSP. variable speed pumps 724, 767 velocity head 717 verification report 507 verification summary 507 vertices adding to a pipe 703 VFD 317, 693, 765, 769 view menu 64 tabular 329 viewing cost results 811 visibility of symbols 248, 609 volume 843 inactive 843 total active 847 VSP 317, 318, 319, 693, 694, 695, 765, 770, 771, 772, 773

W walk 554 pipe and node 554 selection 554 wall reaction 568 warning Darwin Designer 202 water main 688 water power 765 water quality analysis options 392 water quality theory 733 WaterCAD 830 custom AutoCAD entities 615 elements 275 main window 49 theory 713 WaterCAD engineering library modules 564


X WaterCAD in AutoCAD 607 files 610 WaterGEMS 830 WaterTalk 835 WCD file 237, 238, 239, 610 Web site 45 welcome dialog 70, 242, 243 well 684 groundwater 684 well groundwater 685 white 362 white table columns 336 wizards 510, 593 annotation comparison 555 polyline to pipe 599, 601 project setup 241 shapefile connection 586 shapefile link 588, 589 workshops 43

X X - Y mode 245 X coordinate 245

Y Y coordinate 245 yellow 362

Z zone 328 manager 328 zoom 65, 79, 265, 266


Index-867

Z

Index-868


WaterCAD Users Guide

Recommend Documents